THE
:01)KKN HINDUSTANI SCHOLAR
or
I TIIK PUCCA MUNSHI.
Specially adapted to the present-day requirements of the Lower and
Higher Standard Examinations.
BY
MUNSHI THAKARDASS PAHWA,
Qualified Hindustani Instructor.
CALCUTTA :
KD AT THE BAPTIST MISSION PRESS AND PUBLISHED BY
THE AUTHOR AT JHELUM.
1919.
(All rights reserved.)
Price R*. 10.
Dedicated
to
all the Munshis
as a mark of grateful
respect for the profession.
PK
PREFACE.
IT is true that in the course of the following pages I have
traversed a much-beaten track. I found, however, during my
experience as a teacher for the last ten years that the track
was not yet sufficiently straight and smooth. Most of the
students' difficulties have been simply and lucidly explained in
this book, its sole object being to facilitate further the task of
the reader. In short, it claims to have removed most of the
stumbling-blocks which still stood in the way of rapid and easy
progress of the student in the language.
It is divided into three parts and five appendices. The first
part treats of grammar in graduated lessons, most of which are
followed by two exercises (one from English into Hindustani
and the other from Hindustani into English) and a set of use-
ful colloquial sentences. The exercises are, of course, on the
rules in the lesson immediately preceding them, but the collo-
qui:il sentences have a free run over all the rules and words
given before, thus keeping the student in constant touch with
what has preceded them.
The second part consists of miscellaneous advanced exercises
from English into Hindustani and 50 from Hindustani
into English) which have been very carefully selected and
arranged. They have been introduced by a short essay on
paraphrasing and simplification which are so essential in trans-
lations from one language into another.
The third part is meant to provide the student with a nice
and substantial collection of Idiomatic and Military Sentences,
while the appendices contain some common proverbs and a
tu i id of little odds and ends.
I n the whole book no word that is not commonly used, finds
any place, and many knotty points have been unflinchingly
approached and amply clu< -hinted. In short, I believe that the
IV
Lower and the Higher Standard candidates will find it emin-
ently useful, in fact a mine of information.
It also fully answers the requirements of the present Military
Colloquial examinations. But the student need not go through
the whole of it for that purpose. Beginning at the third lesson,
and omitting those rules of grammar which are not printed in
bold type, he can stop at the 37th lesson, after which he should
go through the Military Sentences, translated into Hindustani
(pp. 581-626), and then take the examinations confidently.
Since a language is essentially a thing to be learnt more
through the ear than the eye, I would ask the teachers to read
out the Hindustani exercises to their pupils loudly and never
to get tired of talking to them. The pupils, on their part,
should never feel shy of talking in the language.
In conclusion, I beg to acknowledge my deep indebtedness to
those of my predecessors in the field, whose guidance I have
repeatedly sought in producing this book.
THAKARDASS PAHWA.
JHELUM :
1st October, 1918.
CONTENTS.
PART I.— GRAMMAR.
Lesson Page
J. The Alphabet .. .. 1
II. Pronunciation . . . . . . 16
III. The Articles .. .. .. ..28
Nouns. — Gender .. .. .. ..29
Number . . . . . . 34
Case (Declension) . . . . 36
IV. The Genitive Case.— (Use of ka; ke, kl) .. 44
V. Adjectives .. .. .. ..49
Declension of Adjectives . . . . 50
VI. Numerals (Cardinals) .. .. ..57
Ordinal Numbers . . . . 60
Collective Numerals . . . . 61
Multiplicative Numerals . . . . 6-
Numeral Adverbs . . . . 62
Fractional Numbers . . . . . . 63
V 1 1 . Pronouns. — Personal . . . . 66
Demonstrative . . . . . . 67
Interrogative . . . . . . 68
Relative .. .. ... ..69
Reflexive . . . . . . 70
Honorific . . . . . . 71
Indefinite . . . . 71
Pronominal Adjectives . . . . 80
VIII. The Verb.— Infinitive .. .. ..84
Root . . . . . . 84
Present Participle . . . . 85
Past Participle
The Agent . . .87
Conjunctive Participle . . . . .88
Adverbial Participle . . . . 88
I \. Tenses. — Present Auxiliary . . . . 93
Past Auxiliary . . 93
Present Subjunctive nf honft ' (to be) . . J)4
Future tense of * honft ' (to be) . . . . 94
Order of words in a sentence . . . . 94
Agreement of Verb . . 98
Page
X. Tenses (contd.) . . . . . . . . 108
Imperative . . . . . . . . 109
Respectful Imperative . . . . . . 109
Kut ure Advisory Imperative . . . . 110
XI. Tenses (contd.). Present Subjunctive .. 115
Future .. . . ' .. ..117
XII. Tenses (contd.). Past Conditional —
First Form . . . . . . . . 122
Second Form . . . . . . . . 125
XIII. Tenses (contd.). Present (Indicative) . . 132
Imperfect (Past) . . . . . . 134
XIV. Tenses (contd.). Preterite . . 140
Perfect (Past) . . . . . . . . 142
Pluperfect .. .. .. ..143
XV. Additional Tenses —
Present Continuous Subjunctive . . 150
Past Continuous Subjunctive . . . . 150
Perfect Subjunctive . . . . ..151
Imperfect Future . . . . 151
Perfect Future . . . . . . 152
XVI. Tenses (concld.)—
Present and Past Continuous . . . . 157
XVII. Agentive Case.— (Use of ' ne ' ) . . . . 1 64
Use of ' ko ' with the object . . . . 1 68
XVIII. Summary of Tenses-
Intransitive Verb . . . . . . 176
Transitive Verb . . . . . . 181
Conjugation of 'hona ' (to be) . . . . 182
Distinction between 'hai' and ' hota hai' . . 187
Difference in ' tha.' ' hota tha ' and ' hu,a ' 188
XIX. Use of the Respectful Pronoun ' Ap * . . 194
' Ap* as Reflexive Pronoun . . . . 195
Use of ' apna ' (one's own) . . . . . . 195
X X Comparison of Adjectives . . . . . . 202
How to express ' To ' of motion . . . . 204
' From ' of motion from a person . . . . 205
Use of ' ko ' with Adverbs of time . . . . 205
Infinitive of Purpose . . . . . . 206
XXI. 'To have*, how to express — . . . . 211
'To belong' .. .. .. .. 214
'To get/ ' to obtain,' etc. (milna) . . . . 214
Vll
Leswn
XXII. Conditional Sentences
'Until,' how to express —
XXI II. Compound Verbs. — Nominals ..
X XIV Intensive
\ XV. Potential (' sakna/ to be able)
X XVI. Completive < ' chukna/ to finish)
X XVII. Inceptive ( * lagna,' to begin)
XX VI II. Permissive (' dena,' to allow) ..
Acquisitive ( 'pana,' to be allowed)
X X I X . Desiderative ( ' chahna,' to wish, etc.)
XXX. 'Chahlye' (should or ought to) . .
' Chahlye tha ' (should have or ought to have)
• Chahe— ya ' (whether— or)
XXX I . Compulsive ( * parna ' or ' hona , ' to have to do)
• XXXII. Habitual ('karna') ..
X XXIII. Continuative and Progressive ( ' rahna ' and
4 jana ' )
XXXIV. Extra-Intensive
Summary of Compound Verbs
X XXV. Passive Voice
Conjugation of the Passive Verb
XXXVI. Causal Verbs
Denominative Verbs
.\\.\\ll Direct Narration
X X X V J 1 1 Participles, use of — as Adjectives
X X X I X . Conjunctive Participle, Various uses of —
X L. Relative Construction . .
\ LI. Adverbs
Idiomatic uses of : —
kahftrt
L'tlllM
idhar — udhar
jahah — aur
jah&n— wahftn
Postpositions . .
k& (of, etc.)
Page
218
222
228
240
251
257
263
270
271
277
283
285
286
291
297
303
311
312
318
322
329
337
342
349
363
:*7(>
393
:$«.»:$
393
393
394
Vlll
Lesson P»8*
ko(to, etc.) .. .. ..398
se (from, etc.) . . . . . . 399
men (in, etc.) . . . . . . 400
par (on, etc.) . . . . . . 401
tak (up to, etc.) . . . . . . 401
ke sath, ke hamrah, ke samet, lekar,
dekar (with) . . . . . . 402
ke pas, ke nazdlk, ke qarlb (near) . . 403
XLII. Conjunctions .. .. ..406
aur (and, etc.) . . . . . . 408
o (and — Persian) . . . . . . 410
lekin, magar, par, balki (but) . . . . 410
to (then, etc.) . . .. . . . . 411
to, tab, phir (then, etc.). . .. .. 412
nlz, bhl (also) . . . . . . . . 412
ki (that, etc.) . . . . . . . . 413
churiki and kyonki (because) . . . . 414
Interjections . . . . . . . . 415
XL11I. Miscellaneous hints —
Repetition of words . . . . . . 420
Rhyming appositive . . . . . . 427
Ellipsis .. .. .. ..428
Etiquette or Polite Conversation . . 431
Euphemism . . . . . . . . 435
" As soon as," how to express — . . . . 437
•' For," how to express— . . . . 439
Interrogatives used as negatives . . . . 440
Interrogatives used in place of relatives in
objective clauses . . . . 442
Use of ' kya,' ' kaisa ' and l kitna ' before an
adjective or an adverb . . . . 442
' Kaisa hi ' or ' kitna hi ' (however) . . 442
Intentional Acts . . . . . 443
' Unless,' how to express — . . 445
Suffix ' wala ' . . . . . . . . 445
Suffix ' sa ' . . . . . . . . 447
Intensive particle ' hi ' . . . . . . 448
Use of ' na ' at the end of a sentence . . 450
' To owe,' how to express— . . . . 451
PART II.— MISCELLANEOUS EXERCISES.
Paraphrasing or Simplification . . . . . . 454
English into Hindustani . . . . . . . . 455
Hindustani into English . . . . . . . . 499
Page
PART III.— COLLOQUIAL SENTENCES.
Idiomatic Sentences .. .. .. .. 556
.Military Sentences —
Enrolment Questions . . . . . . . . 582
Drilling .. .. .. .. ..585
PviHe Exercise and Musket rv .. .. .. 589
Recruiting . . . . . . . . 593
Leave and Furlough . . . . . . . . 595
Camping . . . . . . . . 598
•nces . . . . . . . . . . 600
Miscellaneous Sentences . . . . . . . . 603
Easy Dialogues . . . . . . . . 622
APPENDICES.
Appendix A. —
Days of the week . . . . . . . . 628
Hindi months . . . . . . . . . . 628
Seasons . . . - . . . . . . 629
Directions or Cardinal points .. .. .. 629
Coins . . . . . . . . . . 629
Weights .. .. .. .. ..630
Appendix B. — Proverbs . . . . . . . . 630
Appendix C. —
Prepositional Verbs . . . . . . . . 633
' Kahna ' with ' se ' and ' ko ' . . . . . . 633
'Milna* „ „ „ 633
'Puchhna',, „ .. .. ..634
List of some Prepositional Verbs ... . . . . 634
hna ' and * bolna,' difference between — . . 647
rna ' and • parna ' „ . . . . 647
a ' and * pahinna ' , ,, . . . . 647
Chlmtna' and 'bachna ', „ .. .. 647
( hahnft ' and ' mangna ' , „ . . . . 647
' Letnft ' and ' parnfi ' „ . . 647
Appendix D. — Some feminine nouns other than those
noticed in Sections 26 and L'7 . . . . . . 048
Appendix E. — Words of misleading resemblance . 651
ROMANISED PRONUNCIATION.
The best method to learn pronunciation is to learn it through
tlu- ear, i.e., from hearing a native speak. The roman charac-
used in the body of this bjok represent in most cases the
exact sounds used by the native ; in a very few instances they
the nearest possible approach. All the letters have only
one sound ascribed to each of them and are, in spite of the
- and dashes added to them, pronounced exactly as in
English excepting those noticed below : —
VOWELS.
There are in all ten vowel sounds in the language : —
'a' (short, unmarked). Always pronounced like 'u' in up, but, hut.
-hort. unmarked). .. .. „ T in it. pit. kit.
>hort, unmarked). .. .. „ 4u'input,pash,bash.
'a' (long, marked). .. .. .. ' a ' in far bar . father.
T (long, marked). .. .. 'ee' in peel. feel. bee.
NT (long, marked). .. ., 'oo' in cool pool. zoo.
1 e ' (al ways long). . . . . i y ' in pay. say. bay.
ko* (always long). .. .. .. 'oa' in oats, coat
'ai' (diphthong). a' in at, pat, cat.
'au' (diphthong). ,, .. ,. *ow' in owl, how, cow
M. : ' a ' (short) followed by • h ' or ' h ' with a consonant after it . in,
however, sounded like ' a' in pat, cat, etc.
Occurring at the end of a word it approaches half way the Bound of
long •«.'
CONSONANTS.
*d* (soft, undotted) is sounded like ' th ' in 'this'; uttered by
applying point of tongue to roots of upper front teeth.
*g' as in 'good.' Always hard, never as in 'gem,' 'cage,' etc.
'n* (dotted). Nasal as in ' ink.' long.'
us ' k,' only a bit more guttural.
4r' (soft, undotted) as in 'run.' 'ring.' Always with a ring.
vor as in ' for,' ' sir,' etc.
(dotted). Very nearly like double *r' (rr). Sounded by
striking tip of tongue on the middle part of palate.
V ' s,' or ' s.' Always as ' H ' in ' sit.' ' sell.' Never as ' z.'
XI]
't' or 'fc' (soft). Just a bit softer than English 't.' Uttered
with point of tongue on roots of upper teeth.
' w ' like English ' v ' or ' w.' Sometimes like a sound between
the two.
' w ' (dotted). Always silent.
1 y ' as in ' yes,' ' you.' Always consonant.
* eh.' Always soft as in * church ' ; never as in ' chemist.'
'gk' (underlined). More guttural than 'gh' in 'ghost.' A
gargling sound.
*kb' (underlined). Another guttural like 'ch' in 'loch.'
Sounded with tremulous motion of throat. Just a shade
more guttural than the aspirated 'kh' in ' workhouse.'
* ph ' as *p' with aspiration, closely sounded together. Never
like'f.'
' sh.' Always like ' sh ' in * she/ bush, etc.
'th' (soft) as in 'thick.'
' zh ' as * s ' in ' pleasure.'
Consonants other than those noticed above, when imme-
diately followed by ' h ' are sounded with aspiration, closely
together.
' (comma above) stands for Arabic guttural 'a.'
, (common in the middle) stands for ' hamza.' It indicates
separation of syllables when the preceding one ends arid
the following one begins with a vowel.
The Modern Hindustani Scholar.
PART I -GRAMMAR.
Lesson I.
The Alphabet.
I. The Persi- Arabic alphabet as applied to Hindustani
consists of 38 letters, which are given below first collectively
and again in a tabulated form with their respective names
and the sounds they represent. Unlike English they are
written from right to left.
d d kh h ch j s t t p b a
^ 5 * + r * - vJL«<^
C C £ £
sli s zh z
n m 1 g k q f gk 'a z t
e, etc. 1 , (oomma) h h w, etc.
2
Table.
Name.
Form.
Sound.
Name.
Form.
Sound.
Alif.
I
a.
Re.
J
r (^orrf).
Be.
«»_> b
Ze
z (orda*-
•
.
nary).
Pe.
Sr> p-
Zhe.
A
J
zh.
Te.
d>
t (soft).
Sin.
U"
s (orcfo*-
riari/^
or ^
Te.
*
t (hard).
Shin.
L?
sh.
Se
•*>
s (Arabic,
dental).
Sad
"u-
s (Arabic,
round).
Jim.
£
j.
Zad.
•
z (^4ra6*c,
k!_
w
rottwc?).
Che.
T
ch.
To,e.
1
b
t (Arabic,
v£
upright).
He.
^
h (Arabic).
?o,e.
^
z (Arabic,
upright).
Khe.
r
kh (guttural.)
'ain.
t
'(a, Arabic)
Dal.
*
d (ao/0-
Ghain.
f.
gh ( gf^^-
**-
tural).
pal.
5
d (Aard).
Fe.
^J
f.
Zal.
*
z (d-like).
Qaf.
L?
q (guttu-
ral).
Re.
i
r (ordinary).
Kaf.
^^ k.
^
3
Name.
Gaf.
Form.
Sound.
Name. Form.
Sound.
g (hard).
He
H
h (ordin-
Lam.
j
I
He
A
ary or
dropped).
h (flwpt-
ra^6, or
butterfly).
Mim.
Xiin.
A m
CJ n
Hamza.
Ye(ma'-
ruf).
S£
'(or hy-
phen)
Wa,o.
J
w, v, o,u,au
Ye(maj-
hul).
^^
e,ai
(^wrricrf
ftocA;)
2. A few consonants coupled with butterfly ' h ' (A) are
aleo often used. These are given below and might be
termed aspirated consonants : —
bh ph th th jh chh dh dh rh kh gh
*&<***£*? <+?* '+*- ^J ^^ ^5 '** *r
These are, as noted above, simply the aspirated forms of
the original consonants and, as a rule, are used when, in
pronunciation , no vowel sound intervenes between the ' h '
ni'l the consonant preceding it. But since butterfly ' h '
(A) almost optionally interchanges with the ordinary • h '
(»). their individuality as compound letters has lost much
of its basic necessity.
3. The alphabet, as a glance at it will show, is mostly
arranged in groups of letters almost identical in shape
I»ut for their distinctive dots and marks a good many of
them are undistinguishably alike. This feature should be
carefully borne in mind because it denotes their characteris-
tic uniformity which they preserve throughout the changes
they undergo for the sake of brevity and speed according
to their position in a word.
I. As a ready reference we reproduce the groups
here : —
I,
J
5-
C-
t
a.
1
b (one dot below) .
p (3 dots below).
t (2 dots above),
t (hard mark above).
s (3 dots above),
n (one dot above).
I (2 dots below),
e
j (one dot below),
ch (3 dots below),
h (no dot),
kh (one dot above).
i
group I of 2 letters.
group II of 8 letters.
group III of 4 letters.
-
d (no dot).
d (hard mark above). ^at begin-
z (one dot above).
w (round beginning).
r (no dot).
J
J
r (hard mark on top).
group IV
of 8 letters.
fine begin-
ning.
z (one dot above).
J, zh (3 dots above).
, t*or , »— -^ s (no dot).
L f1 Or \J^* 8^ ^ do*8 above).
s (loop instead of kinks and no dot),
z (loop and one dot above).
t (no dot). I
, \group VI of 2 letters.
i?, (one dot above). J
group V of
4 letters.
hamza ( , comma),
'a (no dot),
gfe (one dot above),
m (no dot and bulb).
f (one dot above and
Hat).
q (2 dots above and
deep).
v group VII of 4 letters.
group VI II of 2 letters.
k (no dot or stroke). \
g (one small parallel ^rouP IX of 2 letters-
stroke above).
S. h (single loop). j
Woup X of 2 letters.
.A, h (two-eyed). j
5. The letters, as given above, represent their detached
forms, i.e. when they appear by themselves With the
exception of ' 'a ' ( £ ), ' gh ' ( £ ), and ' h ' ( * ) which under-
go a slight change, these forms are also used when they
occur at the end of a word. But in their initial and me-
dial positions in a word they, with the exception of such as
are too small to admit reduction, dwindle down to their
initial part generally. They are, however, clearly and
easily recognizable in their reduced forms. The reason and
the advantage of this reduction are obvious. If the whole
form were used in the initial and the medial situations as
well, their combination into a word, apart from being
clumsy, would require infinite space and entail waste of
time and energy. In short the abridgment stands for
speed, which is so essential especially in these days of
restless racing.
6. The following table will show all the letters in their
respective groups again. But this time they appear in
their initial and medial positions as well.
7. We might, here again with advantage, emphatically
invite the attention of the reader to the fact that the
letters are written not from left to right as in English but
from right to left.
ill
COMBINED FORM.
E XAMPUFIC ATION.
Group
tumber.
Final.
Me-
dial.
Ini-
tial.
Final.
T
Medial. Initial.
,
a.
i
I
1
ja.
bar.
ab.
1,
chl.
qlm.
Ib.
j
1
J
1
J
^
p
^
sbb.
qbr.
br.
N
v*
b.
Sr*
*
J
^r^^
j*
^
chp.
chhpr.
pr.
••
P
*-r
*
i
Sr^
J^
A
chst.
str.
tr.
u=J
t.
cu
db
M
J
V
/"
y
pet.
btn.
tr.
«|
^
8
\~j
t.
L ~ ^
X
J
^^^
isf^
^
II.
sals.
aksr.
8bt.
*L>
8-
^
db
A
J
/fl
A
i
chin.
bnd.
nr.
isJ
n.
c/ •*
J
i-^
^l
>
peti.
kll.
yk.
^
I.
L.5
t
J
••
S^
J^
uC|
Irke.
bel.
y
e.
*~
N
Lf
J-
COMBINED FORM.
EXAMPLIFICATION.
•id * o
Group
1* Jw
Final.
Medi. Ini-
al. tial.
Final.
number.
Medial. Initial.
sj. bnjr.
jgr.
2 j.
£
»
^
r
y
sch. khchr. chlm.
5
ch.
£
SI
V
V
r ^ r^
•III.
sbh. mhb. hb.
C
h.
£
SI
^ -**
•
mekh. skht.
khda.
r
kh.
^
•^ f^
^±^
IjJL
,
bd.
^dr.
dgta.
^
d.
*>•
^
^
*
;k^ liJ
khd.
ndr. dr.
5
Q.
a
a
5
•
kaghz.
nzr. zat.
•*
?.
^^
^
^
^
;
jo.
sud. wh.
J
w.etc. ^
^
J
^
Ay* *J
IV.
khbr.
grm. rat.
J
F- J-
j
J
•J*±
r/ ^l>
mr.
srna.
re.
J
r-
^>
3
J
Y
^jr
^J
gz.
•Eft.
zk.
3
z.
J-
jr
J
/
!>
H5
4
A
i
A
papzh.
dvizhn.
zhalh.
•
zh.
J
&
^
^
i .
Sound or
Phonetic
value.
COMBINED FORM.
EXAMPLIFICATION .
Group
number.
Final.
Medi-
al.
J|jj Final. Medial.
Initial.
js.
jsm.
sbz.
•
Lr
8.
LT
^v^
~ ^r^
r-- j*»
or
or
or
or or
or
or
^ — '
U~^
-^*
— ' ^
^-
>^
koshsh.
bshr.
shakh.
C^
8h.
»*•
LT
-£. * 0^v
&
tut
V.
or
or
or or or
or or
^
•x-
^i^* j>|4r*x^y
*t
r1^
^^
nqs.
qsd.
sbr.
u*
,
-^ -^ ^ ^
J*°
b'az. mzbut.
zrur.
u>
z. jji
^J
•^
,>*; Lyua^
)V*
IP
t.
b
^
. kht. btkh.
*^ ^^ -Uj
tlb.
^JUs
H
Z
A
A
t
hz.
nzr. zlm.
(VI
cha.
kai.
V
9-
P
lOTp
>U
\x
L g^
—
tb'a.
b'ad. 'aql.
£ \ 'a.
ft
A
£
^
^ J«
VII.
•
te^.
bj^air. gtsh.
£ K»>.
£
•
A
£
6^
1,^^) ^ y^ ^
^ '
snm.
jm'a. mn'a.
Is
m.
r
*
.4
r-
^ ^
10
Ill
COMBINED FORM.
EX AMPLIFICATION.
Group
number.
Final.
Medi-
al.
In.-
tial.
Final.
Medial.
Initial.
sf
sfr.
fkr.
.
c^
f
^^
A
d
V Q -"
Jlu,
r&
s s
/VIII
sbq.
nqd.
qbr.
o
q-
(3
£
5
3*~
MS
^
J
thlk.
pkr.
kb.
'•
L«5
k.
L. _C
£
^ ^ *-LI?J
v^J
IX.
^
^
rng.
mgr.
gnn.
^
g-
^^
£
t
-*;
>-
r/
-
bchh.
nhr.
hnr.
}
*
h.
1
V
r
v •
^
>T
>x
-
h.
-
•
X
kchh.
gir-
hr.
1
8. It must be rather puzzling to the beginner that in
some cases there are more than one letter representing
practically the same sound. For instance there are :—
2 a's
3 t's
3 s's
3 h's
2 d's
2 r's
4 z's
and c .
^, cL< and is
>, ^j~ or ^ and
, » , and .fc .
and 5.
and ; .
, ; , U* , -k-
11
The explanation is that Hindustani or Urdu is, relatively
speaking, a language of recent origin. It came into being
during the rule of the Mughal invader, who brought with
him his Persian and Arabic and grafted it on the top of
Hindi, the original language of the Hindu. Thus Urdu is
a conglomerate language, being a mixture of Arabic, Persian
and Hindi, which have some sounds peculiar to themselves
and distinguish a shade of difference in the phonetic values
of these units.
9. It does not, however, follow that Urdu still preserves
these shades in their entirety. The modern pronunciation
is not very keen on their retention, at least in the case of
s's, h's, z's and the two t's ( & and L ). Yet the original
spelling goes on eternally in spite of the pronuncial laxity.
10. Tt might as well be noted here that c~* , ^ , ^c , ^ ,
JB , Js , £ , and j are peculiar to the Arabic language, while t
belongs almost exclusively to the Persian and cL? , 5 , j and
all the aspirated consonants coupled with butterfly ' h ' ( &> )
occur only in Hindi.
y , ^ and «— /are common to Persian and Hindi, but are
unknown in the Arabic.
Other letters are common to all the three languages.
Hence you can often know from its composition which
language a word belongs to.
I I Before we proceed to explain the changes given
in the foregoing table we beg the reader's indulgence to note
carefully :—
(t) That the following eleven letters never change, be-
ing considered too small to admit of shorten-
ing:—
tzhzrrwzdda
, ^ ; j i
12
(it) That, of these eleven letters, nine namely,
zhzrrwzdda
* ; - , . J J J I
) ) ' ' >
are not united with the letter following them.
Anything coming after them must begin anew.
They are. however, joined on to the letter
preceding them, provided it is not one of their
own class.
These nine letters can be summarised or
memorised by the English word "road," i.e.
letters of the type, of ' r ' (; ) and ' d ' ( J )
with ' o ' ( ^ ) and ' a ' ( I ) put between.
(in) That hamza ( > ) and * e ' ( c— ) have no initial
forms.
12. To explain the changes we might advantageously
dispose of the final form first as it presents practically
no difficulty. As will be seen from the table the final forms ,
with the exception of those of c ('a) £ (gh) and a (h) which
undergo a slight modification, are merely reproductions of
the detached ones, the tiny stroke beginning them simply
shows where the junction with the preceding letter is effect-
ed. This stroke generally disappears in actual combina-
tion except in the case of the letters of Group II, when
its retention in a few cases serves to facilitate union. For
instance : —
^/, grja J#, bel ^$> pet
±>, bd j>, pr ^r~>., bs
k> , bt 4-Jur , sf j^ or jrS^ , sbq
or vJ^ , shk ^J. J , \ha,g *«O , lakh
, ghl £_ or ^ , se or , sch
The tiny stroke has obviously merged itself in the above
combinations of letters, except in the case of the last word
13
*~ (sch), where its retention is justified since it facilitates
the junction.
13. The initial form in most cases is simply the initial
put of the detached form, except in the case of Group II
and ' h ' ( s ), which dwindle down to a tiny crescent ;
that of ' h ' ( * ) taking a tail below which has the look of
figure 6.
14. The medial forms are again almost identical with
initial ones except in the case of £ , £ and a, the former
two of which become bulb-like whilst the last, i.e. *, has
tins time a downward point or kink. The strokes begin-
ning and following the medial forms simply show where the
junction takes place at both ends and as usual merge them-
selves in the actual combination.
15. Group II requires special attention, since it admits
of slight variations when beginning a word.
(t) ' e ' ( c_ ) never begins a word.
(u) The remaining seven, i.e., ^, y, m, ^, £?, ^ and
^ ordinarily dwindle down to a crescent as al-
ready stated in section 13 above. The crescent,
however, changes into
(a) 3, when followed by ^ or j^ , ^£ or J* , <^>
O'.-k.^if.^.^Jjj and j i also before
^ and c_ when they are not followed by
another letter, as :—
bs bs bshr bshr \\>i b/,a'at
^H or ^>. +zj> or ^. wJuaJ ^-rLo*
bt ?i/.r b'ad b.i^hair nfrt nqarh
k> 4i> JJU ^*~> .
^
yurp pi be
(6) ^ when followed by ^ , ^ , ^ , ^ , and
especially in manuscripts, as :—
14
bjna thfh bkhar smr
':/-, AT, .fr, X
18. The following additional points might also be
noted : —
ft') I and J in their initial and medial forms are
distinguished from each other by the fact that
' cannot be united with the letter following it
while J observes no such restriction, e.g. :—
chin chal Ikn agr blm bam Ib ab
*fr ^ ^ /' ^ ^ ^ ^
(ii) ^ begins a word only as ' y ' consonant, as :—
yqin yad yhan yh ytim
^ Jb- Jvt *i ^
(For its use as vowel vide sec. 17 and 18.)
(m) Letters of the type of J ( d ) make an upward
point in their combination with the preceding
letter whilst that of ; ( r ) admit of no such point
or kink, e.g. :—
bd br pd pr ndr nrm
* S ^ Ji & ?S
sdr zrb qdr qrb fda frq
(iv) ^j» an(^ U* ^ave an additional form each in
j^ and jf respectively. Since the latter forms
dispense with the kinks they are the easier
to use, e.g. : —
bs bs koshsh koshsh
or
(v) Hamza ( * ) is very rarely used at the end of a
word. Its proper function is to indicate the
15
separation of two syllables, when one of them
ends and the other begins with a vowel, long or
short. It is always placed above the second
vowel, if the vowel occurs in its detached form ;
otherwise it takes a crescent-like prop for it,
as : —
bha,i lo,I ra,e la,e kama,u ja,o
sa,Is ja,ega so,ehge
.^jJLw ^''^ ^^y
If the second vowel happens to be detached I,
hamza precedes it, as :—
IjJb , hu,a
It is sometimes placed above medial I when
the I is intended to be sounded short and to
begin its own syllable, as :—
of,** , jr.at
(vi) The medial and final bulbs of £ and £ are
upward while that of ,. is downward, as : —
r
j'ad jmd b'ad bmb
q'ar qmr balg^ salm sn'a snm
+j j* ^, r'L, ^ ^c
(vii) The medial forms of <—s and jj are blank within
while those of £ and £ are filled up, as :—
sfr sqr s'ad sghr
^A*». Ju» JJUM rx-tf
(viii) J and I are combined as J ( not U ).
I and J following uJ" and ^-/ are united as
follows • —
16
k;< ga kl gl
* If Jf J/
klftm glas kaghz ga,oh
^** v^/** ^
(not LJ , IJ , J-f , J— / etc.).
Lesson II.
Pronunciation.
Vowels.
17. There are in all ten vowel sounds expressed by
seven vowel marks and letters as follows :—
Short Vowels.
4 a ' (short, unmarked). Consists of a small slanting
stroke (called ' zabar ' or ' fatha ') above the letter
it is meant to follow and is pronounced like ' u '
in up, but, etc., e.g. :—
REMARK.—' a ' (short) followed by ' h ' ( * ) and ' h ' ( ^ ),
with a consonant following them is sounded more like ' a ' in
cat, rat. etc.
* i ' (short, unmarked). Consists of a small slanting
stroke (called * zer ' or * kasra ') below the letter
it is meant to follow and is uniformly sounded like
* i ' in it, pit, etc., e.g. :—
V> = bi. ^—3 = fi. = ni.
* XX
4 u ' (short, unmarked). Consists of a comma- like hook
'called * pesh ' or * zamma ') above the letter it is
intended to follow and is always pronounced like
* u ' in bush, put, etc., e.g. :—
f 9, y
*-j = bu. v— i = fu. = nu.
17
Long Vowels.
' a ' (long, marked). Expressed by I ' alif ' and always
pronounced as * a ' in bar, father, etc., e.g. :—
b=ba. '^ = ja. L, = sa.
' i (long, marked). Expressed by c , (zer -f ya,e
^fl>
ma'ruf) and always sounded like ' ee ' in reel,
peel, etc., e.g. :—
*u ' \long, marked). Expressed by ^ (zamma-|-wa,o).
Always sounded like ' oo ' in cool, pool, etc., e.g. :—
f 9 *
4 o ' (always long). Expressed by ^ (wa,o itself) and
sounded like ' oa ' in oats, boat, etc., e.g. :—
*ej (always long). Expressed by *— (ya,e majhul
itself) and pronounced like 'ay' in say, pay,
etc., as ^_ = be. ^ = se. <£_ — ke.
Diphthongs.
' ai.' Expressed by c— (zabar-f-ya,e majhul) and pro-
nounced like * a ' in at, cat, etc., e.g. :—
<J>=toi- <L=kai. ^__ =hai.
*au/ Expressed by ] (zabar-|-wa,o) and sounded like
4 ow ' in owl, how, etc., e.g. :—
^ = jau. }~ = sau. y = nau.
18. In practice, however, the shorts (zabar, zer, and
pesh) are often omitted. Thus if you leave them out
throughout it will be seen that the four letters I, ;, ^ and
c_ express all the long and diphthongal sounds as "shown
below, while the short ones are supplied by tin- ingenuity
of the reader himself.
18
I stands for ' a '
„ ., 'o', u, and au.
«- „ ,, 'e.'and'ai'.
Let us assure the reader that it is not, after all, so con-
fusing as it might appear at the first glance. With the in-
crease of his vocabulary the hazy uncertainty will gradually
give place to confident security.
19. The most important point in connection with the
Vowels is that when they begin a word they invariably
take 1 (alif) as a prop. e.g. :—
ab = L-> I or ignoring the short vowel uJ
uska
Iman = ^
upar =
ek =
os =
aisa =
aur=
„ „
„ „
„ „
„ „
„
(no short vowel).
(no short vowel).
ignoring the short vowel
* c ' ('a, Arabic) serves the same purpose in such words
as begin with it, as : —
JU, 'ilm.
oe, 'Id.
fl(ci 'am.
vxȣ, 'ajib.
, 'uhda.
'umr.
When ' a ' (long) begins a word it is written I, i.e.
ordinary I with the 4 madd ' mark ( - ) on its top, as :—
19
admi =
aj ^
asan = ^LJ
Further examples of Vowels in their medial and final
, ak.
i^J, darakht.
^EU», baicht.
tJ, takht.
Jj, dil.
jism.
qism.
J, fait.
, flush man
KjJ, larka.
ix>£, kanpna.
badshah.
J+«i "
Ix», befi.
^ '
mela.
niche,
samne.
pichhe.
mor.
log.
ko.
kudo,
jaisa.
hi /.«?</ .
mat.
/aw;.
Ij^v, xauda.
*jL, taur.
20
, kaun.
y(j, qabu. y», sau.
Ijjl; piira. ^, Jan.
9, *
y>$* rubarii. y, nan
/I5, ddku.
Consonants.
20. The following letters are sounded exactly like their
English equivalents :—
s^> b ^> 4 ex9* ? cJ> 1
V, p »>, z <>, z ^, m
^-•i t ;. z ^^ z
^, s ^-, s cJ, f
^5 j u*» sh j» q
Those requiring special notice are :—
& (t), and Jo (t) are soft dentals, sounded with the tip of
tongue struck against the roots of upper teeth.
^ (ch) is uniformly sounded like ' ch ' in " church " ;
never as in " chemist".
^ ( h ) is a strong aspirate.
*. ( kh ) is gutturally sounded with tremulous motion of
throat like ' ch ' in " loch ".
J (d, soft). Sounded like " th " in " the " and " they ".
( r, soft ). Always sounded with a ring like ' r ' in
" run," never as in " bar," and " for ".
; ( r, hard ). Sounded by striking tip of the tongue
against the palate a little more backward than in
ordinary ' r ' and more forcibly.
j ( zh ). Sounded like ' z ' in * azure ' or ' s ' in " plea-
sure ". Is of extremely rare occurrence.
('a). Is more guttural than the ordinary I (a).
*]
( gh ). A peculiar guttural sound like that made in
gargling.
( q ). Uttered by pressing back the root of the tongue
on the throat and making a slight clicking sound.
( g ). Always hard as in " go " and " good " ; never as
in -gem "and "cage''.
e ( n ) . Apart from its ordinary function as ' n ' in
"not" and "nib v it has a nasal sound like that of
' n ' in "" inch " and iv English >J. As nasal it is rep-
resented by " h " (i.e. ' n ' with a dot on top).
When it occurs as a final nasal, in which case it is
generally preceded by a long vowel, its dot is omitted, as : —
UU, man. uto>, han.
^jj^o, men. ^j±&, hairi.
(w or v). It is more ' v ' than 4 w ' both of which it
represents. It occasionally occurs as silent and is
then represented by ^ (w), as :—
slj-i. khwah (pronounced l khah ').
khwesh (pronounced ' khesh ').
Its use as a vowel has already been explained in Sections
18 and 19
» (h, ordinary or dropped). When initial and medial
it is sounded exactly like the English ' h ', but when it
is final it is sometimes very perceptible while at others
almost imperceptible. As latter it is sounded very
much like the short 'a' or *i' (by which it is then
represented), according as it is preceded by * zabar ' or
n -ipectively, e.g. :—
-•= bar. ;^ — bahar. *l; « rah
= rasta. *J^ — parda tf «= ki.
In some Arabic words it is marked with two dots , thus x ,
and is pronounced like ' t ' u^.
A (h, aspirate or butterfly). Effects aspiration as ex-
plained in Sec. 2. It is, however, almost optionally
interchanged with the ordinary ' h ' ( * ). Used in its
final form it takes a final downward stroke, resembling
the final form of the ordinary ' h' ( a ), which in this
case is never sounded, as :—
**•*£» Pith **&*>, hath JLfcjj* parh.
^ ( y ). Sounded like ' y ' in c you ' or ' yes '. Its use
as a vowel has been explained in Sees. 18 and 19.
^ (I, y), and c— (e, ai) occur as silent in a few Arabic
words ; in such a case they are generally overtopped
by I (a), as : —
a'la j/^/*» murtaza.
(ph). Sounded as 'p' aspirated, never as " ph " in
" philosophy " or ' f ' in ' fish '.
(th). Soft as " th " in " thin " or " thigh ".
21. The following diacritical marks are also used :—
(tashdid, mark of reduplication). Doubles the letter
over which it is placed, as : —
f
, bill! yS, tattu.
(jazm, amputation). Indicates the end of a syllable,
as :—
<* , <,
Jy«, mard. e/'^-^, khandan.
(wasla, junction or combination). Occurs in Arabic
words only above Jl ( al ), the definite article of the
language, as : —
?* 9 ,
^x» , bait-ul-muqaddas (not, baitu-al-muqaddasf. )
23
When the article Jl (al) precedes a dental, liquid or
sibilant letter it is assimmilated with it and the letter itself
is doubled to compensate for the elision, as : —
, Qutb-ud-dln (not, Qutbu-al-din).
# ' (Tan win or nunation). Occurs at the end of
Arabic words only to denote their termination in ' n '.
The symbols are merely the doubled forms of the three short
vowel points and are in this case sounded as ' an ', ' in ', and
4un' respectively, as :—
, ittifaqan J^>, naslin.
#
/ X
iJ, dafa'tan. *-*&*, kitabun.
REMARK. — In practice, however, all these diacritical marks,
with the exception of 'Tanwin,' are generally omitted.
EXERCISE 1.
Give the roman characters for and compare your answers
with those given against each of them : —
:_. e,ai.
^, th.
t'
kh.
A»-^. chh.
v% b.
1, a.
^,
kh.
;, zh.
£' j>
^, w, v, etc.
•5,
4-
~- s.
*, th
^-, sh
;,
r.
f,
*>, d.
-. hamza.
r-
h
r-
J~'
A^, bh.
r'
m
u^. 8h-
.b, t.
5. ch.
•l
h.
j, Z.
Jl <!•
«/. n.
t.
_>. t.
£' '*•
O>, 8.
J,
1.
^x. k
^. 8.
*/, gh
*4j,
ph
***. jh.
•Ill
j, /..
r^
4JtJ, .ill
V' P-
u* n
4Jb,
h.
is.
24
, achchd.
s£t kuchh.
V
, idhar.
^Laaj, nuqsdn.
c->b-«wl, asbdab.
U~, sipdhi.
j>, bahut.
UJ, lambd.
xi^I, unchd.
+^, kishtl.
^;, zakhml.
', akxar.
pasand.
qalam.
qism.
liamla.
hamesha.
!, ikhtiydr.
o, sarkdr.
9, sdhib.
;, zamdna.
ti, shikast.
Jl, fath.
, muddat.
»U*^, musdfir.
, t.
EXERCISE 2.
Decipher and compare your answers with those given
against each of them : —
i angrez.
y,
afghdn.
hissa.
bukhdr.
bhejnd.
it^T, khd,o.
thag.
2fl
, mauquf.
>#» bewaquf.
. kl \cahish.
t, am.
f, aram.
andesha.
akhir.
maila.
Jlxi,
t — j»oc.
^»j^cl, amir.
xyU, muqarrar.
^t^j', qurban.
?
*•• •M--
lyJ, irada.
*J'' adwa.
'
, qasdan.
iG, panchivan.
o ^
>;J, darwaza.
r*-, surang.
**, bhandaq.
*, mulaqdt.
iJiJ, naqsha.
, tasalli.
'y, nur-ul-haq.
nur-ud-din.
kaisa.
da'wa.
tahsil.
EXERCISE 3.
Write in Urdu characters and compare your answers
with those given against each of them : —
£ '
•sV>/, JL* dastur, ^yu-j ^»_
namak\
4
26
chlni, ^-4^
a/??, yi
o/e,
shdkh, £-'-i
a?a. Ul
ojhal,
^habar, ^.
U-l
bojh,
shadl, ^(£
arfafi, ^*\
lobh,
y<w*» ufty.
ungll, ^J&^
chob,
nalish, ^^^
insdn, ^L-JI
logo,
zila\ ^
a/sar; ^«j'!
ja,o,
tanfehwah, * 1^. Jo
iran, ^1^1
'aib,
shikayat , e^o KL&
wpar, j*J
auqat,
tarlqa, ^*ij^>
un, yj
pan,
log, ^J^
ekdekl, ^&) Kol
hukm,
ghulam, * iLc
erl, ^y)
thord,
•i«at, 4=
beshak, ^-^HH
ghord
*mm, ^U
kela, M
tdqat,
zahir, ybUs
seb, ^.^o^
taswir,
EXERCISE 4.
Q J>
. yt
.;!
27
9s
9
~
Transliteration .
Agarchi wuh ba'z daf'a dushmanoh par ban berahmi
karta tha , magar phir jald narm hojata tha. Bara bahadur
tha, khatar ke waqt ghabrata na tha aur mu sib ton men
himmat na harta tha. Ek lara,I men dushmanoh ki kasrat
dekh kar sirdar ghabraga,e aur Hindustan ae phirne ki
i di, ban mushkil yih hu,I ki is waqt ek najumi Turki-
stan se aya tha, us ne kaha " mera 'ilm bhi kahta hai ki is
lara,I men dushman ki fath hogl." Log aur bhi ghabra,e
magar wuh apne irade par jama rah a. Fath hu,i to
najumi ko bulaya, kuchh use sharmaya, kuchh dhamkaya
lekin akhir bahut sa in'am diya aur kaha ki " ab turn
yahah se chale ja,o."
EXERCISE 5.
(Short vowels and diacritical marks totally left out}.
c ;
28
US b! it ^-— - U>
u^j .vo xw », -^o j^
Transliteration .
Dusre din subh ko dushman qil'a chhor kar bhag ga,e
aur merl pal tan ko us par qabza karne ka hukm hu,a. Jab
ham us men daurkar dakhil ho rahe the, dushman ne yaka
yak 'ain ha mare qadmon ke niche surang uradl. Main
surahg ke zor se ura aur behosh hokar zamin par gira, der
tak mujhe khabar na rah! na hosh baqi tha na ahkh kam
karti thi aur na kuchh suna,I deta tha. Jab hosh aya to
kya dekhta huh ki do gore topchi mera pa, oh pakar kar
mt patthar ke tode ke ahdar se khehch rahe haih. Ek ne
4 ram ' sharab mere muhh men uhdel dl. Akhir mujhe
nikalkar ek sahib ke pas lega,e aur us ke ba'd main ' fild
haspatal ' men bhejdiya giya ta ki aram se maruh.
Lesson III.
Article.
22. There are three articles in English : ' a ', ' an ' and
4 the '. ' A ' or ' an ' is sometimes very indefinite, mean-
ing 'some', or 'any', as in 'some man' or ' any book',
whilst at others it is a shade less indefinite, equalling
1 one ' or ' a certain one '. ' The ' in its markedly definite
character equals either 'this', 'these or ' that ', 'those.'
To express these various shades of meaning Hindustani
uses the following words :
29
ko,I, a or an ( equalling ' some', ' any ' — very
indefinite).
Ool ek, a or an (equalling ' one ', ' a certain one '
—less indefinite).
<sb yih, the ( = this , these).
*; wuh, the ( = that , those).
MARK. — (a) When a noun is used in its generic sense, i.e.
when it comprehends the whole breed, kind, or species, it does
m»i take the article before it. For instance in the sentences :—
(i) A rat is quite at home when under ground,
(n) An aeroplane can travel 100 miles, or even more, in
one hour,
(in) The tiger is a carnivorous animal,
an ? and ' the ' will not be translated.
(6) Nor is the article expressed when the sense is quite
clear without it. For example in the sentence : —
" A king went hunting with his minister ;
as they came to a spring the minister said " ;
'the' preceding 'minister' can advantageously be left out.
>ther minister having been mentioned, there is hardly any
need to particularise him. It is obvious enough without ' the.'
(c) The article is also not expressed in detached phrases or
m complete sentences without a context.
Noun.
23. Noun or substantive is the name by which a liv-
ing being (persons, etc.) or a thing is called, as :—
James (Proper noun).
admi, man (Common noun).
v— fy log, people (Collective noun).
uncha,!, height (Abstract noun).
I:I.M\UK. — Gerunds and Simple Infinitives ,>t verbs are in
fact, though not in !'<»rm. abstract nouns.
24. Nouns have gender, number and case.
Gender. -Males of course belong to the masculine and
females to the feminine gender. Hindustani recognizes
no neuter gender. Hence lifeless things are classed
30
either with males or females according to their termina-
tions.
25. The most common masculine terminations are
(i) a (long), (ii) a (short), (iii) a,o, (iv) pan, e.g. : -
L> « J darva river.
kamra room.
bacha,o defence, protection.
bachpan childhood, infancy.
REMARK. — ' a ' (long) and 'a' (short) often interchange,
as : —
!-•*' fam™Uom.
Sj*£ kamra )
Exceptions are : —
(a) Arabic words ending in ' a ' (chiefly triliterals) and a
few others, as : —
y* haiva air. wind.
»>•• saza punishment.
\2& dawd medicine.
U^ du'a prayer, blessing.
U>j razd divine decree (also, furlough).
tJ* gbiza food, diet.
khata fault.
shifa recovery (from illness).
dunya world.
ri'aya subjects (people).
wdja cause, reason.
ddfa time (adverbial).
*jy tauba repentance.
(6) Hindi diminutives and a few abstract nouns, as :—
l*»5 dibyd a small case, casket.
l»i flayd kindness.
Ux*» sabhd association, society.
.Miscellaneous : —
jaga place.
31
cha,e
tea.
inn.
<—'_»••• sara,e ^
jb ?ia,o ferry boat.
26. The most common feminine terminations are (i) i,
(ii) t (chiefly Arabic nouns), (iii) ish (Persian Verbal
nouns), and (iv) 'hat' or 'wat' (Hindi verbal nouns);
as :
rhaukl )
;
chair.
qismat fate, luck.
koshish effort, endeavour.
ghabrahat confusion.
bana^^)a^ make (also, artificiality).
water.
butter (clarified).
mind, disposition.
pearl.
curds.
time.
proof.
sweatened drink.
rich robe of honour.
ruby.
couplet (also, house).
bier.
tree.
fate (always plural).
32
bandobast arrangement.
tafcht throne.
but idol, statue.
khet field.
gosht flesh, meat.
dant tooth.
sut cotton thread (unspun).
git song.
balish pillow.
27. Arabic verbal nouns of the measure of ' taf'll '
; Persian shortened Infinitives ; and Hindi verbal
roots are also classed as feminine, e.g. :—
(a) Arabic verbals : —
taklif, trouble.
taswlr, picture, photo.
(6) Persian Shortened Infinitives : —
^y-ol amad coming, approach. From ^^,
amadan = to come.
s^^^L, sakht make. From ^A.L*, safyhtan
= to make.
(c) Hindi verbal roots : —
^ mar beating (also, striking range).
From (Jjl* , mama = to beat.
samajh understanding. From U^c<^*
samajhna = to understand .
^ jit victory. From t»u^ , jltna = to
win.
;lfc har defeat. From U>U , hdrna = to
lose (in competition).
;^J daur race. From Uj^o , daurna = to
run.
33
Exceptions are :—
jjju ta'wlz amulet.
khel play, game. From ' khelna ', to play.
ju rang colour. From ' rangnd ', to colour,
to paint.
li nap measurement. From ' napna ', to
measure.
fear. From ' darna ', to fear,
hole. From ' chhedna ', to bore a hole
through.
^'J Tzacft dance. From ' nachna* , to dance,
and a few others.
28. Related or allied nouns which generally go in
couples take the gender of the last named, as : —
i^b UU man bap (lit. mother-father), parents
(mas., plural). Because of
' bap \ father.
Jx> *c_ £ ga,e bail ( lit cow-bullock ) , cattle ( mas. ,
plural). Because of ' bail '
bullock.
uul^j jJL* qalam dauxit (lit. pen-inkpot), pen and
inkpot (fern., singular). Be-
cause of ' dawat ' inkpot (/.).
29. The gender of compound nouns is also similarly
determined by the latter part, as :—
slfjBL£ (f.) shikar-gah, hunting ground. (Because
* gah,' a place, is fern.)
sUo^i (f.) ahahr-panah, a wall of defence round a
city. (Because 'panaA',
K shelter, is fern.)
30. Generic nouns are either masculine or feminine
and apply equally to both sexes, as : —
5
34
kawwa (m.), a crow.
chil (f.), a kite.
31. A few adjectival nouns belong to the common
gender ; as : —
^~*jj dost, friend.
dushman, enemy.
0 bay/it, rebel (also, rebellious).
32. For nouns other than those noticed above prac-
tice is the only guide : you learn their gender as you
learn the words themselves. So far as this book is con
cerned such nouns should be treated as masculine unless
marked otherwise.
33. Number.— There are two numbers ; singular and
plural.
34. Masculine nouns ending in ' a ' (long) and ' a '
( short) change to ' e ' for plural, as :—
Ky larka, a boy. ^j/ larke, boys.
XfJ kamra, a room. <^/J kamre, rooms.
Masculine nouns ending in ' an ' are similarly treated, i.e.
their ' a ' changes to ' e ', the nasal ' n ' being retained at
the end, as : —
u\/ ku,ah, a well. ^^ ku,en, wells.
35. Masculine nouns ending otherwise do not change
for plural, as :—
admi, a man or men.
sher, a tiger or tigers.
U5^ ga,on, a village or villages.
*L> nam, a name or names.
36. Feminine nouns ending in ' 1 ' add ' an ' whilst
those ending otherwise add ' en ' for plural, as :—
35
ghori, a mare. J^)}4 ghoridn, mares.
chauklt chair. ,j^0^ chaukidh, chairs.
}£> 'aurat, woman. j^;^ 'aurten,1 women.
y±* (f.) mezt table. \jljZ* mezen, tables.
37. Persian and Arabic nouns follow the above rules
but they occasionally resort to rules of their respective
languages, especially when they occur united with other
Persian and Arabic words in the genitive and adjectival
constructions.
38. Persian nouns add ' an ' in the case of " animate "
and 4 ha ' in the case of inanimate nouns for plural irres-
pective of gender ; as :—
Jj^> mard, a man. d^s* marddn, men.
,_^L;j darakht, tree. (rS^;J darakhthd, trees.
REMARK. — A few euphonic modifications are made by the
rtion of ' y ' and ' g ', as : —
lit a dand, a wise man. c>^f»3 ddndyan, wise men.
«*xij banda, a slave. ojtf*ij bandagdn, sla
(or bandgdn)
39. Arabic language has a large variety of rules for
forming plurals. The regulars, as used in Urdu, are formed
by adding ' In ' and * at ' to the singular, as :—
^ fchayydt, a tailor. ^^U^ khayydtm, tailors.
j*b(a* hdzir, present. ^^e(^ hd$irin, all the pres-
ent (audience).
^Ijx*. fiaiwdn, an animal. cj(j!^x^ haiwdnat, animals.
^IL* makdn, a building. c^UtCo makdndt, buildings.
N'ot so good • 'ai When a word of two syllables has • a
it-* 1 i -i syl! il>le, the ' a * is elided when a long vowel in added to the
word. (Vide 100, note.)
36
'adat
'adat
If the singular ends in ' t ' ' a ' ( I ) only is inserted before
it, as : —
halat circumstance, condition.
halat circumstances, conditions,
habit,
habits.
40. The irregular plurals present a great variety. We
shall give here only a few of them by way of example :—
affairs.
kinds,
varieties,
medicines.
books,
mosques,
troubles,
noblemen.
rulers ,
officers,
the great-
est people,
wonders,
strange things.
j^ol amr
an affair *,
^) umur
+~3 qism
kind, variety ,L
MJ>| aqsdm
]jj dawd
medicine fa
j^l adwiya
v>tJtf kitab
book v^
5£ kutub
^sv^w^c masjid
mosque j^U
M^O masdjid
cJuU") taklif
trouble > — ajJ
H5 takdllf
j*-*\ amir
a nobleman U
*1 umard
Jl^ hakim
ruler, officer rb
L^ hukkdm
akbar greater,
akabir
'a jib
strange,
wonderful
41. The Arabic language possesses a dual number as
well, formed by adding " ain " to the singular, as :—
jJJ^ walid father ^^^ walidain parents.
«*-»,Js tarf side $* tar fain both the sides.
42. The cases, as given in some Hindustani Grammars,
are eight in number ; namely the Nominative, Agent,
Genitive, Dative, Accusative, Ablative, Locative, and
37
Vocative. In reality, however, there are but two cases ;
viz. the crude form or Nominative, and the oblique form or
Formative.
REMARK. — The Nominative and Accusative are alike in Hin-
dustani, unless the Accusative has got to be put in the Dative
in certain circumstances (vide Sees. 181 to 188).
43. When a noun is governed by a postposition (ex-
pressed or understood) it is said to be in the Oblique or
Formative form, otherwise it is in the Nominative case.
REMARK. — What are known as Prepositions in English are
ied Postpositions in Urdu, for the simple reason that, unlike
English, they are placed after the noun or pronoun they govern.
For instance in English you say * on the table.' In Urdu we
say the table on.'
44. There are two kinds of postpositions; Simple and
Compound (or Prepositional Phrases).
45. The Simple ones are :—
K ka of (Genitive).
/ ko to (Dative).
<~. se from, by, than, etc. (Ablative).
men in, among, etc. ^
par on, at, over, etc. \ (Locative).
tak up to, till J
Of these only K ka (of) is subject to change into £. ke
and i ki. (Vide Sec. 52).
46. The Compound ones or rather Prepositional
Phrases begin with either ' ke ' or ' ki ' with the excep-
tion of a couple or so which begin with ' se ' and might
be called Comparative Postpositions. For facility of
reference we shall call those beginning with ' ke ' Mas-
culine and those with 'ki ' Feminine. They are too many
to be given here. We shall, therefore, give below only
a few by way of example :
38
Masculine postpositions :—
^.b ,£_ ke pas near, in the possession or
keeping of.
X>y £_ ke nazdlk near.
ke waste
for.
ke sath with.
ke upar on, above, etc.
-£> £_ ke niche under, below.
£_ ke samne in front of.
£_ ke age in front of, ahead of.
£.. ke pichhe behind, in the rear of.
jjo £, ke ba'd after (time).
Feminine postpositions : —
ki taraf towards, in the direction of.
ki tarah like, in the manner of.
k\ babat regarding, in respect of.
ki ma' r if at through the medium of, c/o.
ki zubarii from the word of mouth of.
REMARK. — These postpositions are, for the most part, origi-
nally nouns in the oblique case, some simple postposition being
suppressed (occasionally expressed) after them. They take
' ke ' if the noun is masculine and ' ki ' if the noun is feminine,
e.g.—
< (j-*'* ) *^1^ £• ke sath (men) = in company of.
saih = company, companionship.
( u7±* ) **j^ ^ ki iarat (men] = in the direction of.
(taraf (f.) = direction, side).
Comparative postpositions :—
<h$ £L se pahle before, prior to (time).
^T ^. se age beyond, farther than (locality).
39
REMARK. — Occasionally two postpositions are used together,
a> : —
<z. uA< men se from in, from among, though, across.
<~L ~* par se from on.
<£.^~ lj £. ke pas se from near.
47. Masculine nouns ending1 in ' a ' (long) or ' a ' (short)
change to ' e ' for oblique singular and to ' on ' for ob-
lique plural, as :
l;^*/ ghora horse,
y c_ ;j4/ ghore ko to the horse,
y uti}^ ghoron ko to the horses.
Nouns ending in ' ah ' are similarly treated, i.e. their
4 a ' changes into ' e ' and 4 o ', as : —
kuyan a well.
ku,en men in the well.
ku.on men in the wells
48. Masculine nouns ending otherwise, also all femin-
ine nouns, make no change in the oblique singular but
add ' on ' in the oblique plural, as :—
adml a man.
admi ko to the man.
admioh ko to the men.
y larkl a girl,
y larkl ko to the girl.
y larkion ko to the girls.
49. The Vocative (or Nominative of Address) can op-
tionally use the nominative or the oblique form in the
singular. In the plural the final ' n ' of the oblique plural
is dropped. This case takes no postposition but ' ai '
), or some other interjection of corresponding significa-
i . may be prefixed to it, as :—
40
or ) (JUL> c_ I
ai beta (or bete)
0 son !
ai beto
0 sons !
ai beti
O daughter !
ai betlo
0 daughters !
50. The following masculine nouns ending in ' a ' are
treated as if they ended otherwise :—
Ichuda God.
dqa
darya
master.
rver.
sahra sandy desert. (Jo
swrma brave man.
U^l; raja Hindu king.
Uifc, rahnuma a guide.
chachcha uncle
(paternal).
dada grandfather
(paternal).
LiU nana grandfather
(maternal).
father
(Hindi).
a god
(Hindu).
a beggar.
In case of nouns denoting measure, quantity, time, dis-
tance or manner the oblique singular is also used for the
oblique plural, as :—
do auns ke waste = for two ounces.
do man ke waste = for two maunds.
do ghante tak = for two hours.
do mil tak = for two miles.
do tarah (men) = in two ways.
51. The following paradigms will show at a glance
the various changes a noun undergoes for number and
case :—
(i) KjJ larka, a boy.
(Masc. noun ending in ' a ' long).
41
Singular. Plural.
Nominative Ky, lafka, £jl larke, boys.
a boy.
Oblique £ £j/, larke, ko, ^ u^y larkon ko, to the
to the boy. boys.
Vocative ( «£_jJ or ) Kyi <=_J yy <=_! at larko, 0 boys •
at larka (or Zar&e) 0 boy !
(u) &xx> bachcha) a child.
(Masc. noun ending in ' a ', short).
Sing. Plur.
Nom. &so, bachcha, child. ^o bachche, children.
v
Obi. y ^y;, bachche ko ^ uf^ bachchoh ko, to the
to the child. children.
Voc ( <^o or ) &sx> c— I ai bachcha j**> c_J aibachcho,
(or bachche), 0 child ! 0 children !
(Hi) j^JL sher, tiger.
(Masc. noun ending otherwise.)
Sing. Plur.
Nom. ^x& sher, tiger. ^ sher, tigers.
Obi. y ^xi star &o, to the tiger, y uJJx^ sheroh to the
fco, tigers.
Voc. ^txi c— I ai sher, 0 tiger! j**£ <=— I at shero,>
0 tigers !
(fv) U.I; ra/a, a Hindu king.
(Masc. noun ending in ' a ' but treated otherwise).
Sing. Plur.
Nom. UJ^ raja, king. LJ; raja, kings.
Ohl / UJ; ra;a fc), to the king. / ujUJ; ra;a,ow to the
kot kings.
Voc. La^l; c^l at ra;a, 0 king ! jUJ; c^l at ra/a.o,
0 kings !
6
42
(v) ^y larki, a girl.
(Fern, noun ending in ' i ' ).
Sing. Plur.
Nom. <_5^y toffct, a girl. u^y ^arkian girls.
Obi. y Jyy farfct fco, to the girl.y o^^ larkion to the
fco, girls.
Voc. ^jJ c_J at fof&i, 0 girl ! j±ty <=_) at Zar-
fcto, 0 girls !
(in) ^ bahin, sister.
(Fem. noun ending otherwise).
Sing. Plur.
Nom. ^ bahin, sister. .r^V bahinen sisters.
Obi. y ^^j bahin ko, to the sister, y jjj-V bahinon to the
A;o, sisters.
Voc. ^ c^l at fta^tTi, 0 sister ! yy c^l at bahino,
0 sisters !
REMARK.— (a) When the nominative singular ends in ' on '
it does not take another ' oh ' for the oblique plural. Similarly
if the nom. singular ends in ' o ' it adds ' h ' only for the ob
lique plural, e.g. : —
j?j& gd,on, a village. VjJ , a camp.
<jt* i/fi gd,on men, in the village ^< o^'J^ pardon men,
or villages. in the camps.
(6) The oblique plural always ends in ' oh '.
(c) Compound postpositions occasionally appear split up
in old writings ; as 'pas ga,oh ke ' instead of ' ga,oh ke pas.'
But this should not be imitated.
VOCABULARY.
camel (m.) unt »JU>y
dog kutta (if
donkey gadha
jackal (m.) ^a/-
servant naukar
king badshah
father bap yl>
mother man UU
brother bha,i
elephant (m. ) hathl
43
bird parinda
canton- chha.oni
ment
trench (also marcha
fortified
position)
mountain
hill (also,
hilly)
soldier
pahar
pahari
A*
sipah
(sepoy)
room
kamra
city
church
shahr
girja
house (resi- ghar
dential)
building makan
roof chhat
cloth kapra
bank, coast, kinara
edge
iron loha
gold sona
curtain parda
book (f.) kitab
wall (f.) dlwar
bayonet (f.) sangin
belt pefi
uniform wardi
uy
EXERCISE 6.1
Dog. Dogs. To the dog. To the dogs. Church. Churches.
In the church. In the churches. Bird. Birds. To the
l»inl. To the birds. Trench. Trenches. In the trench.
In the trenches. Servant. Servants. To the servant. To
the servants. Sepoy. Sepoys. To the sepoy. To the
sepoys. Elephant. Elephants. On the elephant. On the
elephants. Brother. Brothers. For the brother. For the
brothers. Jackal. Jackals. To the jackal. To the jackals.
City. Cities. In the city. In the cities. River. Rivers.
In the river. In the rivers. For God's sake. Before
the raja. Belt. Belts. For the belt. For the belts. Hill
ph
l Don't translate the articles in Exercises consisting of det
44
Hills. On the hill. On the hills. Wall. Walls. Behind
the wall. Behind the walls. Book. Books. In the book.
In the books. Roof. Roofs. On the roof. On the roofs.
O God ! 0 Father ! 0 Soldiers ! 0 Bird ! 0 Birds !
EXERCISE 6 (a).
L. c_j^ • c_j$* - \y& -j*
L. *_ j, - c_ j - ** - K
L
ur
.xx. j^
Lesson IV.
The Genitive.
52. The use of ' ka ', ' ke ', and ' ki '. English has two
ways of expressing the genitive :—
(i) by apostrophe ' s '.
(ii) by 'of.
45
For instance in English you can equally well say: —
(i) Jacob's horse,
(ii) Horse of Jacob.
Hindustani has only one way of expressing it, and
it accords with the apostrophe order of words. In
other words, before you translate the English genitive
(or a string of them) into Hindustani you must put it
either in the apostrophe or 'of order of words, no mix-
ture being allowed. In the case of apostrophe order you
begin with the first and go forward, whilst in the case
of 'of you begin with the last and come backwards,
Jacob's horse > _
. > Jacob ka ghora.
Horse of Jacob >
The change of • ka ' into ' ke ' and ' kl ' is determined
by the word which follows it in Hindustani, as explained
below :—
before a masculine singular noun in the nom.
case, i.e. when it is not governed by a postposi-
tion.
1 ke ' before a masculine singular noun in the oblique
case, i.e. when it is governed by a postposition ;
also before masculine plural noun (nominative or
oblique).
* kl ' before all feminine nouns, irrespective of number
and case.
E.g. :-
The man's horse ^
! = adml ka ghora.
Horse of the man \
To the man's horse = adml ke ghore ko.
The man's horses = adml ke ghore.
To the man's horses — adml ke ghoroh ko.
The man's mare -= adml kl gkofl.
To the man's mare == adml kl ghorl ko.
46
The man's mares =-- adml kl ghorlan.
To the man's mares = adml kl ghorion ko.
The house, of the servant's father = naukar ke bap ka
ghar.
Jacob's wife's table = Jacob kl 'aurat kl
mez.
Uniforms of the king's servants = Badshah ke nau-
kron kl wardlan.
:ARK. — (a) ' ka ' is in fact an adjectival affix and changes
• •Mu-tly like an adjective ending in ' a '.
(6) The genitive occasionally appears after its governing
noun in old writings, as, ' beta badshah ka ' instead of ' badshah
ka beta ' (the king's son). But this should not be imitated.
53. Persian and Arabic genitive constructions are often
used but the words so connected must be Persian or Arabic,
never Hindi.
54. The Persian genitive is formed by juxtaposition of
nouns. The regimen, or the thing possessed, always stands
first and is united with the following noun by ' i ' called
izafat, addition) which means ' of ', as : —
L-?'utf kitab-i-Ya'qtib = Jacob's book.
l*. J^L« manzil-i-hakim-i-Baghdad=The residence
S>
of the ruler of Baghdad.
NOTES. — (a) If the governing noun ends in | or j the ' izafat '
is replaced by ^ or «_ with or without ' hamza ' (>), or by
' hamza ' with or without the ' zer ' stroke, as : —
Jv **_b -\ pa-i-fil = foot of elephant ( ' pa — foot ;
5 'f*l'= elephant).
} ru-i-zamln = face of earth ('ru* = face ;
) ' 2owi?/i ' = earth).
ulama-i-Isldm = Mohamadan religious autho-
rities (' 'ulama ' = learned or wise men ;
'Islam' = Mohamadanism).
(6) If the governing noun ends in 8 or (^ , only ' hamza ' is
placed on top of it, as : —
47
(jf AJLL khdna-i-aqa = master' s ho u se (khana = house,
' 5^5 ' = master).
Up* ^o^-* sarcK-i-sarmd = The cold of winter ( ' sardi —
coldness, 'wrr/wa' - winter).
55. The Arabic Genitive is formed by placing the noun
to be put in the genitive case immediately after the
governing substantive, as :—
^oj bait-al-qazl = house of the Judge ( 'bait '=
house ; ' al '= the (Arabic article) ; ' qazi '=
Judge).
VOCABULARY.
risala
India Hindustan
Army (f.), fauj
Cavalry regiment
Infantry regiment (f .), pal^an
-*
Artillery, topfchana
Village headman, nambardar
Watchman, chaukidar ^JJ/JA
Lock, tala il
cA^6i (or /fcwn^'t)
(2) barh
Volley (f.) 5
(
Attack, hamla ddU^
Parents (masc. pl.),ma?V bnj>
(^svir or)
Round (visiting), gasht ^^Z*f
Saddle, zln ^
o (f.), lagam .(0
Door, darwazd 8j'j>;J
low, khifkl v^/J^
Cannonade (f.), golabari
**
Friend ;or ally), (c.) dost
VA*VI
Enemy (c.), dushman ^JL^
Jamadar (Indian 2nd Lt.),
jarn'odar Jjjt*a.
Havildar (Indian Sergeant),
haivaldar JjJI^a.
Corporal (Indian), na,t^
Lance Corpl. (Indian),
na,ik
People (masc pi.), log
Trooper, rider
Mounted (adj,
Gentleman (European), mhib
^
er >
j.) \
Recruit, rahgrut
Lines (quarters,
la in ,jj
Map, Sketch, naqsha
Sun (disc), sura?
Sunshine (glare) (f.), dhup
Moon (m.), chand
Light (f.), roshni
f(l) bandiiq
Gun ( Rifle) (f.),<! ^jl>
((2) raft JJ;
Box ( (l)*and*9
C (2) bakas
Order, hukm
Forest, jangal
Animal, janwar
Custom (way), dastur ^
EXERCISE 7.
Girl's father. Enemy's army. Havildar's belt. Watch-
man's brother. Horse's saddle. Horse's bridle. Jamadar's
pay. Havildar's book. Sahib's books. Glare of the sun.
Animals of the forest. Sahib's order. Map of India.
People of the city. The boy's parents. In the house of
the village headman. On the roof of the house. For the
Sahib's friend. Under the Sahib's table. For the sepoy's
uniform. With the Corporal's brother. In the enemies'
army. From the sketch of the mountain. The recruit's
name. The lock of the door of the Sahib's room. Name of
the city. In the camp of the enemy's army. In the
enemy's trench. Bridle of the Sahib's friend's horse. The
trooper's horse's saddle. On the bank of the river. Near
the banks of the rivers. From the sepoys' pay. Curtains
of the Sahib's room. People of the village. In the Lance
Corporal's box. During the Jamadar's round. Key of the
lock of the door. From the artillery's cannonade. From
the volleys of the Infantry. After the attack of the
Cavalry.
49
EXERCISE VII (a).
'u * u'/ -
JL.
Lesson V.
Adjective.
56. An adjective is a word used to qualify a noun, as : —
achchha = good.
fchiibfiurat = handsome, beautiful.
kharab = bad.
^ 6afd = big, large, elder.
Mold = small, younger.
pahla = Hret.
su pichhla = last.
on top denotes a Proper U..MM . the proper name of a place or
50
57. There are two different ways in which an adjec-
tive can be used— (a) Attributive, and (b) Predicative.
(a) An adjective is used attributively, when it qualifies
ite noun directly, so as to make a compound noun :—
A brave soldier. Green trees.
(b) An adjective is used predicatively when it qualifies
its noun indirectly — through the verb or predicate :—
His character is noble. The horse went lame.
An adjective so used is a form of complement to the
verb, because it completes what the verb left unsaid.
58. Hindustani adjectives are indeclinable excepting
such as end in ' a'
59. Adjectives ending in ' a ' change exactly like the
'ka', 'ke', 'ki' of the genitive :-
'a' (crude form), when qualifying a masculine
singular noun in the nom. case (i.e. when it is
not governed by postposition).
1 e ' when qualifying a masc. singular noun in the
oblique case (i.e., when it is governed by a
postposition) ; also when qualifying masculine
plural nouns (nom. or oblique).
' 1 ' when qualifying a feminine noun (irrespective
of number and case).
E.g. :-
achchha adml = A good man.
(masc. sing. nom.).
achchhe adml ko = To the good man.
(m. s. obi.).
^gaJ achchhe adml = Good men.
(m. pi. n.).
^ achchhe admion ko= To good men.
(m. pi. o.).
51
achchl 'aurat = A good woman
(f. s. n.)
„ 'aurat ko = To the good
woman (f. s. o.)
,, 'aurten = Good women
(f. pi. n.)
» 'aurton ko = To good women
(f. pi. o.)
khubsurat larka = Handsome boy
(m. s. n.)
,, tor&e = Handsome boys
(m. pi. n.)
,, larke ko = To the handsome
boy (m. s. o )
,, larkon ko = To the handsome
boys (m. pi. o.)
,, larkl = Handsome girl
(f. s. n.)
,, larklan = Handsome girls
(f. pi. n.)
" larki ko = To the handsome
girl (f . s. o )
,, larklon ko = To the handsome
girls (f. pi. o.)
60. Adjectives ending in ' ah ' change the penultimate
* a ' as exemplified above, e.g. : —
dayan (or, ddyian) hath == right hand.
day\n fang = right leg.
da,en hath (ko) => to the right (hand).
panchwan adml = the fifth man.
panchwin 'aurat =» the fifth woman.
panchwen adml ko = to the fifth man.
52
-an }
ind C = rij
ind )
daydn
ddhind [= right (side, etc.)
dahind
hdth (m.) = hand.
tang (f .) = leg.
pdnchwdn = fifth.
61. The following adjectives ending in ' a ' are inde-
clinable :—
Ulj dana, wise = (Persian).
C^-u tanhd, alone = (Persian).
(jU. fehafd, angry, annoyed (Persian. Used
only predicatively).
Ujj* surmd, brave. (Hindi).
62. The following adjectives ending in ' a ' or 4 a ',
though occasionally met with declined, should not be
declined :—
judd = separate.
tdza = fresh .
'umda = nice.
sdldna— annual.
*Jlj;; rozdna = daily.
REMARK. — With the exception of ' surma ' (which is Hindi)
all other adjectives given in 61 and 62 are either Persian or
Arabic. These and several others ending in ' a ' and belonging
to Persian or Arabic are in fact exceptions to the rule given
in 59.
63. An adjective used as a noun is inflected like the
noun of its class (i.e. according to its termination), as :—
^^1 achchhe = the good,
v
y ijj^ achchon ko = to the good.
^Ux> blmdr = the sick.
jf uj,;Ux> blmdr on ko = to the sick.
53
64. When a noun occurs as an adjective in English it
is either put in the genitive or expressed by a corres-
ponding adjective, as :
Transport animals = barbardari ke jdnwar = (animals
of transport).
Infantry soldier = paljan ka sipdhl (sepoy of Infy.
regt.).
f (1) sarkar ka mal (property of Govt.)
Government
4 (2) sarkarl mal (Governmental pro-
property =
perty).
Transport = barbardari ^;l*y/>
Govt (f.) = sarkar ^
Govt. (adj.) = sarkarl ^^j"
Property, goods = mal JU
65. Persian and Arabic adjectival constructions are
often used in Urdu. The words thus united must be either
Persian or Arabic, never Hindi.
66. In Persian the adjective follows the noun it qualifies
and is united with it by ' i ' (izafat), as : —
libas-i-shahana = royal robe.
aqa-i-namdar -- illustrious master.
bazu-t-qawi = strong arm.
jama-i-gadayana = beggarly clothes.
badi-i-shani9 == shameful wickedness.
libas dress, robe. (Arabic).
shahana kingly, royal. (Persian).
aqa master. (Arabic).
namddr famous, illustrious. (Persian).
bdzii arm. (Persian).
54
qawl strong. (Arabic).
jama clothes dress. (Persian).
gadayana beggarly. (Persian).
badl wickedness, evil. (Persian)
shanV shameful, disgraceful (Arabic).
67. If the Arabic substantive is preceded by the defi-
nite article Jl (al=the), the adjective, which must be
Arabic as well, also requires the article, as :—
at-tajir-al ghani = The rich merchant.
tajir = merchant.
I = rich.
VOCABULARY.
Clean, Clear,
saf
Distinct
Dirty, maila
Ugly, bad'Surat
High, uncha
Low, nicha
Undulating, uncha l nicha
UJ
Wounded, zafehml ^^)
Double-barrelled , do nail
Equal, Level,^
Continuously J
Alive,Living
zindah
((2)/
Yellow
(2)
Sword (officer's) (f .) kirch ^
Long, lamba
Broad, Wide, chaura lj^
Deep, gahra [^
Active (physicaUy chalak ^ (curved, cavalry) (f.)
and mentally) ^^ | talwar ^
Active, Tidy, chust ^^^^ ! Food, khana
\
Bad character (notorious),
bad-mu'ash \
Subedar (Indian Infy. officer,
Lieut.) subedar
Both the adjectives are declined.
55
Lazy. Slow, sust ^~~~~
Intelligent, Clever, hoshyar
Mr*
White, safed
Flag, jhandi
Healthy (not ill), tandurust
Hard
severe, strict, sakJit
Soft, T? arm
Brave, bahadur
Sharp, swift "^
Strong (of sun, > tez \£
liquids) J
Strong (physically), mazbut
kamzor
Green
(2) hara
Old (not new), purana
New, nat/a
\Onng (youth), ;
I'.lind, a?w/^
Klu.- nila *?
Respectable, intlurntial,
'izzatdar ;lj ^c
•lining to respectable
family, khandani
Butter, makkhan
Fruit
(2) phal J^
Gun (artillery), (/.) top
Wife,
And,
Risaldar (Native Cavalry
officer, Lieut.), risaldar
;J
Country,
Owner, rnalik
Pension (f.), pinshan
( (1) rishtadar
Relation, ;lj<uj:; ;
(relative), (2) bha,i band
Land, Ground, zamtn
Sea, Ocean, samundar ^.x
Gunner, topchl
Bugler, bigalc.hl
Bugle, bigal
Blanket, kambal
Firewood, la kr\
Star, sitara
Ship ^m ),
Colour, rang
Orderly, arrfa/T ^J;'
('upboard, Shelf, ahnari
^v\
Indian Sergeant (Cavalrv
dafdar
56
EXERCISE 8.
Brave army. Beautiful city. Pretty girl. Big tiger.
Big gun. Little child. Deep water. Big church. Elder
brother. Younger sister Dirty water. Green trees.
Severe attack. Good food. Dirty uniform. Blind man.
Great trouble. Beautiful picture. White clothes. Fresh
butter. Small village. High wall. Fresh fruit. Young
woman. Brave people. Good girls. Big chairs. Small
tables. Brave people of the beautiful city. Beautiful wife
of the young soldier. Big tiger's little cubs ! (young ones).
In the deep and dirty water of the stream. Jamadar's
younger brother. Green trees of the small village. On the
long and high wall of the city. The old headman of the
small village. Small chairs in (of) the big room. Fresh
fruits of Kashmir. Good raja of the big country. Owner
of the green fields. Servants of gentle folk. Wounded
soldiers' pension. Clean clothes. Clear sky. In the low-
lying ground. Broad river. The old Risaldar's relative.
Old uniform. Old (experienced) soldier. In the new build-
ing.
EXERCISE 8 (a).
^ I
I Bachche.
|J is -
Lesson VI.
Numerals.
68.
Cardinal numbers :— 13
tfrah
1
ek cJol
14
chaudah
2
do ^
15
pandrah
3
«* &*
16
solah
4
char ;U.
17
satrah
5
pdnch ^JL
18
atharah
6
cMi(orchhe) ^
19
unls (or
7
sat ei?L,
unnls)
8
'//A A..7'
20
bis
0
/wi?/ y
21
ikkls
10
das ^j~J
22
ba,is
11
giarah s^L/
23
tefs
12
6araA 8;L>
24
chaubi*
8
«>*'
58
25
pachls (or 44
chawalls
pachchis) ^H^ *5
paintdlls
26
chhabbis ^r*H^ ^6
chhialls
27
8ata,is (or 47
saintalls
sattajs) ^H^^ 4 s
afatalls
28
athayls (or
(or
atfha,ls) ^r^V1
artalls)
29
untls i^/H^ *9
unchas
30
t\s ^-v 50
pachas
31
iktls (or
51
ikawan
ikattis) ^/~£^'
52
bawan
32
battls ^-jJLj 53
trepan
33
tetis (^H^
(or
(or or
tirpan)
tentls) ^-jjjoJ)
54
chawwan
34
chautls ^,jjj^)
55
pachpan
(or or | 56
chhappan
chauntis ) ( ^.--jJLi^
57
satawan
35
paintls ^MJJJUU
58
athawan
36
chhattls o^H^
59
unsaih
37
saintis ^^Juuv
60
sath
38
o^i« ^r^1
61
iksajh
(or or
(or
ar^**) ^r^j'
ikasath
39
untaKs ^^jJLu)
62
basajh
(or or
63
tresajh
unchalls) ^-jJt^ol
(or
40
chalis (^r^^
tirsafh)
41
iktalis ^r^^l
64
chausath
42
6ia/i« ^^/-^^
(or
43
teto/w ^/H^^
chaunsajh
(or or 65
painsajh
tentalls) .^jJGuuJ 66
chhiasajh
or
or
or
or
or
59
f) "
sarsa(h
arsath
(or
athasafh)
unhattar
70
sattar
71
ikhattar
72
bahattar
73
tihattar
74
chauhattar
75
pachhattar
76
chhihattar
--
satattar
78
athattar
79
'isi
80
0881
81
ikasi
82
biasi
83
tiros*
84
rhaurdsi
pachasi
chhidsi
or
nawdsl
nawwe
ikdnwe
bdnwe
A^
-r
K!
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
(or
sai)
1,000 hazdr
1,00,000
chaurdnwe
pachdnwe
chhidnwe
satdnwe
ajhanwe
nindnwe
(or
1,00,00,000
69. The numbers above one hundred are expressed as
in English with the conjunction * and ' suppressed, e.g. :—
Ool ek sou ek = one hundred (and)
one.
cJol ek sou do = one hundred (and)
two.
" £^ pane h sou bar ah = five hundred (and)
twelve.
.*#terah*auti*^^ > , 330
satrah
naw 9au satrah
1,917
60
70. By prefixing 4 ko,I ' (any) or affixing l ek ' (one) the
idea of " about " or " approximately " is expressed, as :—
ko<\ das
f = about ten.
das
71. Two numerals (not generally consecutive), when
combined, convey the idea of indefiniteness, as :—
do char (lit. two four) = two or three, a few.
das bis = ten (or) twenty.
NOTE. — ' ek adh ' signifies " one or two ", ' a few ' (not • one
half).
72. The noun following a plural cardinal number is
generally put in the plural, but occasionally with great
numbers singular is also permissible, as :—
hazar ghora, a body of one thousand horses.
hazar ghore, thousand horses.
73. Ordinal numbers :—
\j pahla \ ^J^otj panchwan, fifth.
jy awwal C = first. ^ cM^- ,
dusra, second (also j^L ^^ geventh
next, other, an- , ,-} .
J^ athwan, eighth,
other)
w tiara, third. '^ naw™< ninth'
chautha, fourth. u'^J daswan, tenth.
From ' fifth ' upwards, with the exception of ' sixth ',
which has an alternate form in " chhata ", the ordinals are
regularly formed by affixing " wan " to the cardinals
74. The cardinals are unchangeable. But the ordinals
ending in ' a ', as also those ending in c wan ', change like an
adjective ending in ' a ' (vide 59 and 60), e.g. :—
61
pahla admi the first man.
pahle admi ko to the first man.
pahli 'aurat the first woman.
satioan admi the seventh man.
satwen admi ko to the seventh man.
satwm 'aurat the seventh woman.
7fi Collective numerals. The following nouns are com
monly met with as collective numerals : —
a pair, couple.
;^ jora )
. . >
darjan. a dozen.
kori, a score.
saikra )
.. , a hundred.
satnkra S
76. By adding ( oh' to small numerals the idea of
inclusiveness or totality is conveyed while the same
termination added to higher numerals signifies indefinite -
ness or numerousness, as : —
: — The medial ' n ' in ' donon ' is inserted for euphony
lv
^tnon = the three together or all the three.
charon = the four together or all the four.
drjanon = dozens of.
hundreds of.
sainkfon
hazn \ housands of.
lakh&h lacs of.
Similarly —
[anon tons of ( ^y fan = ton).
manon maunds of ( ^ man = maund = S2 Ibs.).
62
bar son years and (uv? bars = a year).
years
sadlon centuries ( ^c±*c sadi — a century),
(indefinite)
77. The phrase * per cent ' is expressed by ~±*
' /» sadi 9 or ' /» saikrd '. Fi (Arabic preposition) = in, per,
etc.
78. The idea of distribution is conveyed by repeating
the cardinal number once, as :—
v_&) uJol ek ek = one at a time, singly, one
a piece.
^ )A do do = two by two, two a piece.
NOTE. — £,jS ' karke, ' (lit. having made ; the conjunctive parti-
ciple of Uy karna, to do) is often added as redundant, as :—
£,jf j& j* do do karke by twos (not, two a piece).
79. Multiplicative numerals. The multiplicatives are
formed by adding to the cardinals :-
(t) guna, as :—
Uf^J do guna
double.
dugna
. treble.
tigund
lif fe* char guna ^ four times as much or as
Uf^ chau guna y many.
U/ ^>b pahch guna = five times as much or as many.
Uf &4A. chhe guna = six times as much or as many,
(w) l hard \ with slight euphonious modifications, as :—
Ijyf !. ikahrd, single fold.
I^Jt^J dohrd, double fold.
l^> ^ra, treble fold.
80. Numeral adverbs. The numeral adverbs 'once',
'twice', * thrice', etc., are expressed by adding to the
cardinals ' bar ', ' daf'a ', or, ' martaba ', as : —
63
;b Oo) ek bar ~\
ek da fa v once
ek martaba j
do bar ^
do da fa > twice,
V
•Ju^e ^ j do martaba J
81. Fractional numbers are :—
|b pd,o > a quar- ]j»» sai^d, one and a
chauiha,i ) ter. quarter,
a third *Jtjj>J c£er7&, one and a
do tfto,I-f. half"
^.UtJ d&d,£ ) two and a
a half or ^ ^ . j hajf
half* I.;1- *&rfo, one half
three more.
REMARK. — * Fauna' (|) and ' adha ' (J) decline like an ad-
jective ending in ' a '. ' Sawa ' (1J) is indeclinable.
'Fauna' ('paune,' pi.) placed before a numeral signi-
fies one quarter less of the particular unit, as :—
paune do = 1J or 1-45 (time).
paune barah = 11J or 11-45 (time).
paune do sau = 175.
paune do hazdr = 1 ,750.
' Sawa ' similarly used denotes one quarter more, as : —
sawn do = 24- or 2-15 (time).
*• ^ '
saioa char = 4J or 4-15 (time).
saioa sau = 1 25.
sawa do sau = 225.
«awa do hazar = 2,250.
64
* Derh ' and 4 dha,I ' (or arha,I) are also similarly used but
only with collective units of 100 and above, as : —
derh sau =-• 150.
derh hazar = 1,500.
dha,\ (or arha,i) sau = 250.
dha,l (orarhdj) hazar = 2,500.
'Sarhe' similarly signifies "half more." It is used
only with three and upwards ; as :—
sarhe tin = 3£ or 3-30 (time).
sarhe panch = 5£ or 5-30 (time).
sarhe tin sau = 350.
sarhe char hazar = 4,500.
REMARK. — From ' sawa ' (1J) and ' derh ' (1 J) the following
adjectives are derived : —
lj|^-» sawdyd — consisting of one and a quarter, at the
rate of 1J.
lAJtfS deorha = half as much again.
82. Persian and Arabic numerals are occasionally used
but rarely beyond ten. We shall, therefore, give below
only such as are met with in Urdu.
83. Persian cardinals are : —
1 yak i_5o 7 haft
2 du j£ 8 hasht
3 sih <)u 9 nuh
4 chahar ;(^ 10 dah
5 panj f±> 100 sad
6 shash (or, shish) ^A^
84. The ordinal numbers are formed by adding ' um '
to the cardinals, but in the ' second ', ' third ' and ' ninth '
slight modifications are allowed, as : —
--O yakum first.
,.«o duwum )
• second, secondly.
-j^o duyum )
65
siwum 1
siyum } third, thirdly.
•x~ siyyum }
^ chaharum fourth, fourthly.
panjum fifth, fifthly.
shashum sixth, sixthly.
haftum seventh, seventhly.
hashtum eighth, eighthly.
nuhum )
• ninth, ninthly.
nuwum )
dahum tenth, tenthly.
85. Numerals of multitude take the plural termination
ha', as:-
sadha, hundreds of.
hazarha, thousands of.
86. Multiplicatives are formed by adding 4 chand J to
the cardinals ; as : —
du chand double.
sih chand treble.
chahar four times as much or as many.
chand
87. Arabic cardinals are : —
1 ahad (or wahid) ( JoJ^ or) j^J 6 sitta juu»
2 iman ^(ij) 1 sab'a
3 salasa &jti 8 samaniya
4 arba'a i*>A 9
5 khamsa t.~>^ 10
88. Ordinals are :—
J^l awwal first.
^tj' *ani second
third.
66
rabi* fourth.
fehamis fifth.
etc. etc.
89. By adding ' an ' (tan win) the adverbial numerals
are formed, as :—
5y awwalan firstly.
saniyan secondly.
salisan thirdly.
90. Multiplicatives are :—
muwnna double, a duplicate.
musallas three-fold, triple, three sided,
triangle.
murabba' four-fold, square.
91. Fractional numbers are: —
suls a third.
rub' a fourth.
khums a fifth.
nisf a half.
Lesson VII.
Pronouns.
92. A Pronoun is a word used instead of a noun or
noun-equivalent.
93. Personal Pronouns :—
(i) First Person : ^>, main (I), ^ ham (we).
Singular. Plural.
j^> main, I. *Jb ham, we.
,i), my. |UA ^amam ei our.
J
me, tome. JU8 to us
~J** C */vi*/* fnr rr [ hamare waste, for us.
67
Singular. Plural.
> ww;'A *e, from me. ^ /••& ^#w se, from us.
c— .UA)
J^o)
~ > mere ttw«/e, for me. ^^ j
/ara/, towards ^^ ) h^^ari /ara/, towards
i» ) me. ^> N us.
(w) Second Person: y, tu (thou) J turn (you).
Singular. Plural.
J ^7 , thou. J <^m vou.
/ r ' ^
xJ ^em (e,I), thy. I;UJ tumhara (e,i), your.
fyou or to
^w/A ^o j ^jU3 tvmko you (accu-
, ., thee, to thee.
tujhe ) ^A^^J tnmhen Dative or
- dative).
to;'A «e, from thee. £L J tumse, from you.
J^M
tere waste, for thee.
j ) tumhare waste, for
^ j you.
, towards. ^t+*l jtumhari taraf,
. — j^ ) thee. . — JJa s towards you.
94. Strictly speaking, Hindustani owns no pronoun of
the third person ; its place is supplied by the Demonstra-
tive pronouns, chiefly by the Remote Demonstrative
' '*).
Remote Demonstrative :—
(t) »^ wuh (he, she, it, that, they, those),
singular. Plural.
••//. he, she: it, that. *} wuh, they, those.
uska (e,I), his, hew, lit nnka (e,I), their, of
of that those.
usko , to him, to her, yo' 'hem, to them.
use ) to it, to that. ! unhen ) to those.
68
Singular. Plural.
,t usse, from him, her, £- J\ un se, from them,
etc. from those.
us ke waste, tor him, ^^un ke waste, for
her, etc. e^Jj ) them, for those.
) us kl taraf, towards ^31 ^ un k% taraf, towards
) him, her, etc. L-LLb ( them, those, etc.
REMARK. — ' Us ' and ' un ' are occasionally written as ' ^~y '
and ' cJjt ' respectively.
Proximate Demonstrative.
(ii) to yih (he, she, it, this, they, these)
Singular. Plural.
to yih, he, she, it, this to yih, they, these.
iska (e,i), his, hers, KJ} inkat (e,i), their, of
its, of this. these.
is ko ) to him , to her , y3 J inko ) them , to them ,
ise ) to it, to this. ^4*1 inhenl to these.
is se, from him, her, £L w! in se, from them,
etc. from these.
is ke waste, for him, ^ ) in ke waste, for them,
her, etc. ^^ } for these.
is ki taraf, towards ^5-^! f i>n hi £ara/, towards
» — 9jk 5 him, her, etc. * — i^o ( them, to wards these.
REMARK. — * Wai ' or ' we ' ( <—$} and ' ye ' ( L- ) are occasion-
ally met with in older writings as plural forms, but they are
obsolete now.
95. Interrogative Pronouns:—
(i) w/kaun (who?)
Singular. Plural.
^yL kaun, who ? ^ kaun, who ?
kiska, (e,I), whose? K.ii' kinka (e,I), whose?
69
Singular. Plural.
kisko N whom ? y^ &mfco j whom ?
fcwe ) to whom ? ^riy^ kinhtn ) to whom ?
kis ae, from whom ? ^ e/ Hw 56' from whom
^t5 &fi uw«/e, for £. ^ ; Kn. &e u?as/te, for
j whom ? <^"^ ) whom ?
wards whom ? • — Jrb whom ?
(n) Uf %a (what ?)
, what ? UT %a, what ?
(e,I), of what 1 £if ibtniba (e,I), of what ?
And so on, i.e. * kis ' in the oblique singular and ' kin '
in the oblique plural exactly like ' kaun' (who ?).
REMARK. — (a) * Kaun ' is used for animate beings and ' kya '
for things.
(b) ' Kahe ' (Afc) is occasionally met with as the oblique
form of * kya ', but it is now rarely used except in the genitive
and dative cases. The genitive * kahe ka ' signifies "of what
thing or material " and the dative ' kahe ko ' always means
"what for ? " "why ( "
(m) LJ^i' kaunsa, which (particular) ?
It changes like an adjective ending in { a ', as : —
kaunsa adml = which man ?
kaunse adml ko = to which man ?
kaunse adml = which men ?
kaunsl 'aurat =: which woman ?
REMARK. — ' Kaunsa ' is more particular than ' kaun '.
96. Relative Pronoun :
^ 7*0, who, which, etc.
^ingular. Plural
^ 70, who. ^ ;o, who.
jiska (e,I), whose. &i*> jinka (e,I), whose.
70
Singular.
jiskn )whom.
jise \ to whom.
Plural.
jinlco ywhom,
jinhen N to whom
jis 5e, from whom ^i /*w *e. from whom.
/ n* Are was'e, for
whom.
') jis kl taraf, towards
} whom.
L
t Jin ke waste, for
l whom.
jin kl taraf, towards
whom.
ap
»7 Reflexive Pronoun:—
yT ap, self.
self (or, selves) (nominative).
(e,i) one's own (genitive).
apfco to oneself (or. (accusative and
selves) dative).
apse from oneself (or, (ablative).
selves)
cipne waste for oneself (or, (when governed
selves) by a masculine
compound post-
position).
apnl taraf towards oneself (when governed
(or, selves) by a feminine
compound post-
position).
REMARK. — (a,) It has but one form for the singular and
plural.
(b) ' apas ' (, ,-jT is occasionally met with as its oblique
form but only in the genitive and locative plural, as -
\f ev.jf apas ka (e;I) = mutual.
^^4-jf apas men = among or between ourselves,
yourselves . and themselves.
(c) The Persian reflexive ' khud ' ( iyi. ) often replaces * ap *
but onlv in the nominative case.
71
98. Honorific Pronoun or Pronomen reverentise.
' Ap ' (w»f ) is also very commonly used as a respectful
pronoun. It differs from the Reflexive inasmuch as it
makes no change before a postposition It is used
mainly for the second person (you), though occasionally
it is met with used for the third person as well : —
yT dp Your Honour, etc.
K yT dp kd (e,I) of Your Honour, etc.
/ yT dpko to
<±_ y' dp se from
^ yT dpke waste for ,, „
dp kl taraf towards „ ,, „
REMARK. — ' ap ' ^f in this sense is often replaced by ' huzur '
( )r*^ ), ' jariab ? ( ^**> ,, and kindred expressions. For the
purposes of concord or agreement they are all treated as mascu-
line plural of the third person. In Delhi, however. : ap ' ( yf )
is also treated as second person plural, but this is not so ele-
gant.
99. Indefinite Pronouns : -
(*) ^^^ ko,i (any one).
ko,l any (one).
kisikd (e,l) of any (one).
kisl ko to any (one).
kisl se from any (one)
kisl ke waste for any (one).
kisl kl taraf towards any (one).
REM Un i ' i- alu; ilar ami ivf-
onJ\
(«) ^4=6 kuchh, some (indeclinable).
REMARK. — It is used for both quantity ami numlM-i. In
eference to quant it it is always singular wliilr in rrfm-nrp to
.il as:—
72
kuchh pani some water.
fcwcM admi some men (not ' man ').
But
v^o^f <«5y ko,i admi any man, some man (not,
'men').
(m) ^S ka,i , some, several, many, more than one.
REMARK. — It refers to number only, is always plural, and
when followed by a postposition takes the oblique plural ter-
mination 'on,' as :—
ka.ion ko to some, to many, etc.
NOTE. — ' ka,l ek ' (indeclinable) is sometimes met with used
in the same sense.
(iv) ^A*-*. ba'z, some, several.
REMARK. — Like ' ka,l ' it refers to number only but always
implies a part of a greater whole, expressed or understood.
For the oblique plural it also takes ' on ', as :—
jf Oy**> ba'zon ko, to some (of us, you, or them).
(v) &*;pf j&. jo kuchh, whatever (indeclinable).
(vi) ^^ ^ jokoi, whoever, whichever.
P8 &*'5* ka (6,1), of whomsoever, etc.
ft8 hisi* koy to whomsoever, etc.
And so on , i.e. double inflection ; ' jo ' into ' jis ' and
' ko,i' into ' kisi ' in the oblique. It has only one singular
form.
(vii) v __ vou sab, all.
\ / — ,
REMARK. — It is naturally always plural and indeclinable ;
* sabhon ' (^m~) the old oblique plural is occasionally met with
in old writings.
(viii) *Mf^ v^vu, sdbkuchh, every thing (indeclinable).
9
(ix) d&* fulana (or uili , fulan), such and such.
REMARK. — ' fulana ' changes like an adjective ending in ' a ',
as : —
fulana admi = such and such a man.
fuldne admi ko = to do.
73
ittlane n = such and such men.
.. ddmton ko = to do.
falani 'aurat = such and such a woman.
(x) c-l^t har-ek (oryt har) = each.
REMARK. — yfc ' har ' (each) is chiefly used as an adjective, as
T ddmi, each man.
100. Reciprocal Pronoun :—
efc dt/sre ka ie,I), of eaoh other, of one an-
other.
„ „ ko, to ,, ,, to ,, ,.
» ,. se, from „ » from ,, „
and so on.
KM MARK. — [t has no nominative form.
101. The following salient points might be noted with
advantage :-
(») {j^<> main (I) is used for oneself when speaking to
anybody, especially an equal or superior. When speaking
to a superior the speaker often resorts to submissive ex-
pressions like—
banda, slave,
fidwi, devoted servant,
kamlarin, humblest servant (lit. the least;
and kindred words
(«) ^ 4 ham ' (we) besides being used in the plural is
quite commonly used for the singular * main* (I). But this
is permissible only when one speaks to an inferior or
assumes a sense of self-importance.
(tu) y tu (thou) is very seldom used. In fact its use is
practically confined to addressing—
(a) God (on account of His fatherly intimacy).
(6) Familiar and homely people.
(c) Inferiors, specially to indicate indifference,
pleasure, or contempt.
10
74
(tr) J Jww (you), though grammatically always plural
is used equally of one or more persons. In fact its use,
like that of ' you ' in English, is quite common for the
singular. When plurality is implied it may be supple-
mented by some other explanatory word, as :—
* — Jy J turn log, you people.
u^.j J turn donon, you both, both of you.
^-~ ^ tumadb, you all, all of you.
(v) The third person plural is often used for the singular
out of respect.
( vi) Genitive of the First and Second Personal Pronouns ,
singular and plural, has peculiar forms ending in 'ra',
and that of the reflexive ending in * na ' instead of ' ka ',
the otherwise universal sign of the genitive, e.g. :—
l^o mera, my, mine. KUfc hamara, our, ours.
[r» tera, thy, thine. l^xo tumhara, your, yours.
(JL>! apna, one's own (singlar and plural).
H^suo mujhkd (of me), H^so tujhkd (of thee), £ Jb
hamkd (of us), and ^ J tumka (of you) are occasionally used
but only when a noun or an adjective happens to inter-
vene, as :—
mujh gharlb ka of me, the poor.
tujh kambakht ka of thee, the
wretched.
h®™ yhariboh Tea of us, the poor.
turn kambakhton ka of you, the
wretched.
(one's own) is immune from such a liability.
ghwib = poor.
kambakht = wretched, ill-fated.
(vii) All the genitives ending in 'ka', 4ra' and ' na '
are declined like an adjective ending in l a ', as : —
75
merd bha,i = my brother.
mere bhd,l ko = to my brother.
merebhaj = my brothers, or 0 my
brother! (Voc. sing.)
mere bhajon ko = to my brothers.
were 6Aa,to = O my brothers !
(Vocative pi.)
men bahin = my sister, or 0 my
sister ! (Voc. sing.)
err? u^ mer* ^kin ko == to my sister.
wen bahinen = my sisters.
men bahin&h, ko = to my sisters.
men bahino = O my sisters ! (Voc. pi.)
(wti) Leaving out the genitive 4 ka ' which has been
dealt with above, ' main ' (I) changes into ' mujh ' and
' tfi ' (thou) into 4tujh' before a simple postposition.
Their plurals ' ham ' (we) and * turn ' (you) admit of no
such change.
(tar) Before a compound postposition beginning with
or 4 ki ' the genitive of the pronoun itself is used and
the 4 ke ' and ' ki ' part of the postposition drops out, hav-
ing been succeeded by the final 4 ra ' in the case of First
and Second Persons and by ' na ' in the case of Reflexive
Pronoun. Of course the * ra ' and ' na ' change to 4 re ' or
' n ' and ' ne ' or ' nl ' in response to ' ke ' and ' ki ' left
•>'it . as :-
- ^—^tJ^ mere saih (not, 4 mujh ke sath ' or mere
ke sath) «= with me.
— A> ^g.jz* men bdbat (not, mujh ki babat. or mert
ki babat) = regarding me.
apnesath (not, apne ke sath) = with
• •no's self.
)
o ( kis kin
? J
76
apni babat (not, apnl kl babat) = regard-
ing oneself.
NOTE. — The reason is obvious ; you cannot bring in two
genitive signs together.
(a;) Tbe following pronouns decline rather rythmically
before a postposition, simple or compound :—
Nominative. Oblique Oblique
Singular. Plural.
wub, that, those, he, she. it, they. us un
yih, this, these, he, she, it, they. is in
kaun, who ?
i - i. x
kya, what
jo, who, which (Relative). jis jin
ko,I any kisi
jo ko,I whoever jis kis!
(xi) The Dative of the Personal, Demonstrative, Inter-
rogative and Relative Pronouns has two forms each. The
second form comes in useful when two datives happen to
come together in a sentence, thus avoiding the uneupho
nious repetition of 'ko'. We reproduce them here for
ready reference.
mujh ko or mujhe, me, to me. >
V First Person.
ham ko or hamen, us, to us. )
tujh ko or tujhe, thee, to thee. > ,.,
V Second Person.
turn ko or tumhen, you, to you. >
usko or use to that, to him,
to her. to it.
unko or unhen to those, to them.
Third Person and
isko or ise to this, to him, Demonstrative.
to her, to it.
inko or inhen to these, to them.
77
kisko or kise whom ? to whom ?
(Singular.)
7-1 7-1. u u 9 r Interrogative.
kinko or kinhen whom ? to whom ?
(Plural.)
jisko or ;ise whom, to whom, -N
(Singular.) /_
y Relative.
finko or jinhen whom, to whom V
(Plural.)
NOTE. — (a) ' ko ' is often replaced by ' ke ta,In ' (
ipecially in old writings, as : —
^•^ <i— »-y° mere to = me, to me.
uske ta,ln — him, to him.
kiske ta,in — whom ? to whom ?
j^i apne ta,\h — to oneself (Reflexive).
(b) The above forms of the dative should not be confused
with the emphatic forms given below : —
main hi,
I only.
hamin,
we only.
tuhi,
thou only.
turn hin,
you only
wuh%.
he, she, it
he, she, it, that, and those only, or
that very.
(^ yih\, he, she, it, this, and these only, or
this very.
Wuhi ' ( <y*3 ) becomes * us! ' ( ^»\ ) in the oblique singular
4 unhln ' ( ^^i: ) in the oblique plural. Similarly ' yihl '
-» ) becomes ' isl ' i ^-J i in the oblique singular and ' inhlA '
) in the oblique plural.
102. All pronouns with the exception of :—
(i) First and Second Personal Pronouns,
(t'i) Reflexive Pronouns,
(m) Honorific Pronoun
are also used as adjectives. The postpositions in such
cases naturally follow the noun qualified by them, as : —
78
Demonstrative:—
u^k
A^1 u-1
/ uJ^jI J-
Interrogative :—
w
us
un admlon ko>
yih adml,
is adml ko,
in admlon ko,
kaun adml,
kis adml ko,
(ii)
£_ <
£_
that man.
to that man.
to those men.
this man,
to this man.
to these men.
which man, or
which men ?
to which man ?
to which men ?
what fault ?
for what fault ?
U/ kya qusur,
kis qusur ke waste
kin qusur on ke waste for what faults ?
(iii) LJ>y kaunsa ( which ? ) is declined like an adjective.
(Vide 95 iii).
Relative :—
jo adml,
jis adml ko,
Indefinite :—
(»')
the man who, or whatever
man.
the man to whom, or to
whatever man.
jin admlon ko, the men to whom, or to
whatever men.
= any man.
o = to any man.
= any thing.
ko = to any thing.
ko,l chlz
79
(ii)
.^»
(m)
^
(iv)
(v)
(tn)
kuchh admi
kuchh admioh ko
kuchh makkhan
kuchh makkhan men =
//'/.' admi
ka,i admioh ko
ba'% shahr
ba'% shahr oh men
sab admi
sab admioh ko
sab dud
sab dud men
fuland admi
fulane admi ko
fulane admi
fulane admioh ko
fulani 'aural
fulani 'aural ko
fulani 'auraleh =
some men.
to some men.
some butter,
in some butter,
several men.
to several men.
some (of the)
cities.
in some (of the)
cities.
all the men.
to all the men.
the whole milk.
in the whole
milk.
such and such
a man.
to such and
such a man.
such and such
men.
to such and
such men.
such and such
a woman,
to such and such
a woman.
u< h and such
women.
80
*** fulant 'aurton ko = to such and
such women.
(wit) ( cJol ,J*>or) r& Aar (or, &ar-efc)adwi = each man.
or )t Aar (or, har-ek) adml ko = to each man
103. The following Pronominal adjectives might be
noted as well :
(a) Denoting quantity and measure
(i) Demonstrative :—
UJl Una = this much.
x>! or £\ itne (m.) or itnl(i.) = this many, so many.
IxS! utna = that much.
jj or ^t nine (m.) or utni (f.) = that many, so many.
(ti) Interrogative : —
Uxi" kitnd = how much ?
m or ..^ Hfne (m.) or kitni (f.) = how many ?
(iti) Relative : —
UJLa. jitna = (as much) as.
jjLa. or ^ix^ jitne (m ) or = (as many) as.
jitm (f.)
(6) Denoting quality, kind or similitude.
(i) Demonstrative :—
L-jl aisa = like this, such as this (also, 'so',
adverb)
Loj i^aisa = like that, such as that (also, ' so',
adverb).
( it ) Interrogative : —
kaisa = what -like ? of what kind ? (also
'how ' as adverb).
81
(in) Relative :—
U^jua. jai*a = (ot the same quality) as; (in the same
manner) as.
VOCABULARY.
Work kam
Barracks (f.) barak
Lines (f.) lain
Fault qwur
C\. qimat (f.)
Price < 2. dam (m.)
IS. mol (m.)
Button bafan
Coat (m.) koj
Handkerchief rumal
' ainp. )
> para o
Halting stage )
(1. kampu
2. para,o
, 1. ton&u
Trill
' 2. rfera
Permission i;aza^
Order huku>
• >m (syce) «d,w
Difficult,
Jr-
e^
lu'uage, ^
i'- (part
of body)
boli
11
1"
. 7
asan J^i
-\
(
j
k\ tarah
laJU
Like
In the manner
of
Company ( Regi- kampni
mental)
Party toll
Wrong (adj.) ghafat
Mistake fjholtl
Rope rassi
Foolish i
(or, fool, I*""**' ^
Dear (in cost) mahinga
General jarnail
Colonel karnail
Major mejar
Captain kaptan
1. laftant
2. laftain
Adjutant ajijan
Qr. Master kot mastar
Lieut.
( 2. kamdniar
Corporal ndtik
Lance-corporal lais na,ik
Recruit rangrut
82
Bearer (sahib's }
head servant) > bahra
Deaf )
Office daftar
Thing (article) (f.) chiz
Thing (affair]
Cook (sahib's) khansaman Qne,s wQrdg
uUUj( '
Cook (general), bawarchl
Cook (Regimental) lahgrl
(f.
Fort qiVa
Mountain pahar
Plain maidati
Bungalow bangla
Happy, Glad 1$hush
Cheap sasta
Satisfied ^)
\raz\
(or, willing))
Displeased naraz
Heavy bhdri
Light (in halka
weight)
tUUt
EXERCISE 9.
My work. My uniform. Your bayonet. Their rifles.
Our enemy's guns. Your friend's house. To us. Near us.
Near our barracks. In front of their lines. Their Com-
mander's bungalow. Thy fault. Price of his uniform.
Buttons of my coat. In our camp. In their trenches.
Their strong hilly forts. With whose permission (Inter-
rogative and Relative). By our major's order. Your
syce's work. In whose tent (Rel. and Int.). Price of
what ? The price of which (Rel.). Difficult language of
this country. What work ? For what work ? The man
near whom. On which wall ? In some Infy. regiments.
Some water. In any village. Several people. Some
horses. In some big cities. In Your (Honour's) office.
Your name, Sir? One's own country. For one's own
country. From us, the poor. For you, the wretched
In ray room. Like their servants. Behind their lines.
Whose servant (Int. and Rel ). In our Artillery. My
orderly's fault. In their green fields On those green trees.
83
So many blankets. So much work. How many recruits ?
How many big guns ? Such a fault (as this). Such an
order (as this). What sort of people ?
EXERCISE 9o.
Kil -
i £.
^ bV*
84
Lesson VIII.
Verb.
104. A verb is a word which denotes doing being or
suffering a thing.
105. A verb is called transitive (or, active) if the action
denoted by it passes on from the subject to the object, and
intransitive (or, neuter) if the action or event denoted by
it is confined to the subject itself, e.g.—
(a) Transitive Verbs. (6) Intransitive Verbs.
Cy karnat to do. Uyt> hona, to be, etc.
(ij dena, to give. til and, to come.
txfXf likhna, to write. tiLa. jana, to go.
106. The verb in its Infinitive form invariably ends in
' na.' This form is chiefly used as a verbal noun and when
governed by a postposition changes to ' e ', as :—
^"^j L- ck«*^ likhne Ice waste = for writing
% ,£_ ±J ^1 uske ane se pahle = before his coming
(arrival).
NOTE. — The Infinitive is also occasionally used as Impera-
tive. Vide Sec. 134.
107. The verbal root or stem is obtained by leaving out
the final ' na ' of the Infinitive.
This root is occasionally used as a noun, eg. : —
85
lut (f ) plunder, from
chamak (f.) glitter, ,,
rnahg (f.) demand, „
/
(f.) reflection,
? (f.) roar, thun-
der,
dar (m.) tear,
W (m.) joint,
lutna, to rob, to plun-
der.
chamakna, to shine,
to flash.
LiJliU mahgna, to ask for,
demand.
Lk^*»v sochnd, to reflect
garajnd
to roar, to
thunder.
darna,
jorna,
to fear.
to join
together.
But it chiefly serves as a basis for the formation of
various Participles and Tenses.
NOTE. — For the use of root as Imperative vide Sec. 135.
108. The Present (or Imperfect) Participle is formed by
adding ' ta ' to the root as :
Infinitive. Present Part.
->/ karna, to do. ^ karta, doing.
|4 likhnd, to write. U+Cf likhta, writing.
(JU> jana, to go. 'JU. jdta, going.
The chief function of this participle is to present an
action or event in course of progress, and hence, incom
plete.
109. The Past (or Perfect) Participle is formed by add-
ing ' a ' to the root; as :
Infinitive. Past Participle.
U4XJ lilshna, to write C+Xf Ukha% written.
UU mama, to beat. I;U mrira, beaten.
'JJy bolna, to speak. ^ bola, spoken
i,. It i In- mni . onsistHof two shon Il;ii)le8, the vowel
ili. nig a' (short), it (thr N
86
Infinitive. Past Part.
Samajhnd, to understand. Samjha, understood.
Badalna, to change. Badld, changed
(Vide footnote on page 36) .
But should the root end in c a ' or * o ' insert • y ' for vocal
facility, as : —
L'T and, to come. (tf dyd. come.
ty land, to bring. l*V faya, brought.
liyk,v dhond to wash. L>>*J> dhoyd, washed.
lij; rond to weep. ^ royd, wept.
110. The following verbs form their past participle
slightly irregularly :—
Infinitive. Past Participle.
M. S.
F. S.
M. P.
F. P.
f karnd,}
bf kiyd
S/ U
J/ A;^€
,j/ A:tn
^^ x
to do.
(or kid)
(or klye)
^ jdnd,
Uf gaya v
^ gayl
^ gaye
^ gayin
to go.
(or g^i/a, gid)
(orga,l)
(or ga,e)
(or, gra,m).
J dend.
bj diya
^ di
J_4 dive
. fjJ dm.
to give. (or did) (oTdi,e)
(JuJ lend, GJ %a ^ It Jj liye ^\ lin.
to take. (or, lid) (or li,e)
Gyt ^o?ia, lyt M,a ^^ hu$ £_y& hu,e ^f&
to be. hu,in.
The chief function of this participle is to present an
action or event complete and past.
111. The Present and Past Participles are used occasion-
ally in a few set phrases and constructions as nouns as well
and when governed by a postposition change to * e ', as :—
1 ' Ka; a ' (with its inflections ' kari ', « kare ', ' karin ') is occasionally
heard. But it finds no place in writing and should not be imitated.
87
J> j~ sote «c, from sleep : from Uy«, sona, to sleep.
/U. ;a<7te men, in „ tifU., /d^na, to be
wakeful state : awake.
'_{ l^x< mera knha, my „ li^ fca&nd, to say.
words (advice, re-
quest, etc.) ;
***j ^ <—j¥° mere ga,e ,, UU. ;ana, to go, and
baghair, without my ^i*-! ' baghair ' (or
going ; j**J. L- ke baghair)
without.
J/ G—J** ^ be merega,e, „ UU. jana, to go, and
without my going. <£_ be, without (Per-
sian Preposition).
NOTE. — For the use of the Present and the Past Participle as
an adjective vide Sec. 316 to 33">.
112. The Agent (or, the Agentive Participle) is formed
by adding wala (e.i) to the inflected ' Infinitive, as :—
karnewala, doer, from (ij karna, to do.
! likhnewala, writer, „ (J^XJ likhna, to write.
bolnewala, speaker,,, UJ^> bolnn , to speak.
This participle is often used as a generic adjective
denoting a characteristic or peculiar quality, as :
gosht khanewale janwar* carnivorous
animals.
6a^u( bolnewald admi, a talkative in-
dividual.
It also expresses imminence ( ' about to ' ), as :
jL>' anewala, about to come.
janewala, about to go.
aneioali muftibat, \npend\n_i
1 The final ' « * change<i to • e \
88
NOTE. — yijfti/* nHirmwala (from lyo marnd. to die), however
HUMUS (f) deceased, or (ii) about to die.
113. The Conjunctive Participle is formed by adding
' kar ' or ' ke ' to the root, as : -
Infinitive. Conjunctive Part.
jana, to go. (.L^ or) ^U. jakar (or
jake), having gone.
likhna, to write. (L **& orJ^XfXJ likhkar (or
likhke), having written
LOJ dena, to give. (^^ or)^& J defazr (or defce) ,
having given.
UuJ lend, to take. (^ or)^Xxl Jefcar (or leke),
having taken.
ly karna, to do. ' £„/ karke, having done.
NOTE. — The use of ' kar ' is more common than * ke '. Occa-
sionally both (karke) are stuck on to the root, but this is very
clumsy.
The chief object of this participle is to minimise the use
of ' and ' (aur) For instance, ' He wrote the letter and
gave it to me ' can be equally well expressed by " Having
written the letter he gave it to me." Thus it unites two
or more sentences into one and hence is called the Conjunc-
tive (joining-together) Participle. (Vide 337 to 348).
114. The Adverbial Participle is formed by adding
1 hi ' (Just) to the inflected ? Present Participle. It denotes
the immediate succession of one action or event after an-
other, e.g. -
^fc eLf^ v_ 5-fV chtyhi likhte hi, instantly after writing the
letter.
J U. c— .j%« mere jdte hi, immediately after my de-
parture.
-L£ sham hole hi, with the fall of evening.
1 Not * karkar ' which is uneuphonious.
2 The final ' 6 ' changed to ' e '.
89
It mav sometimes denote simultaneity or concurrence,
utke boUe hi
as : —
/ (t) as soon as he spoke,
or no sooner than
he spoke
(it) during his speech.
REMARK. — It must be noted that the genitive before it
always ends in e' for the simple reason that the Present
Participle in this case is used as a noun, * par ' (on) or * men '
(in. during) being always suppressed after it. e.g. : —
^(£
mere jdte
just
(
on
\
my going.
\ during /
115 We summarise here, for the reader's convenience,
tin* various elements and constructions explained above —
Infinitive. Root. Pr. Part. Past Part. Agent.
frolna, to speak
dekhna, to see
/and, to bring
bond, to sow
bol boltd bold
dekh dekhtd dekhd
Id Idtd Idyd
bo bold boyd
Conj. Part Adv. Part.
bolkar bolie hi
dekhkar dekhte hi
Idkar late hi
bokar bof.e hi
bolnewdld
dekhneiffdld
Idnewdld
bonewdld
To (rail
To drink
To eat
To fall
12
VoCABULAm
bularui U* To reach
frind
khdnd
girnd
To arrive.
To put (in),
To pour (in)»
To cast off.
pahuhchna
ddlna
90
To stop,
To wait
1 To stop,
S thairnd ('^ To prevent
V roknd '^^
(intr.)
J To leave,
1
To send
bhejnd U»j^ To release,
chhornd
To read
parhrtd da>j» To let go,
Gj.-^
To take (to
lejdnd GLsuJ TO untie
J
a place)
To be re-
^
To take out,
leased,
! chhutnd
or off,
> nikdlnd UJ1J To be let
GJ 4^
To drive out.
off, or out.
J
To wake up
jagdnd (*&*.
r (1) chhipna
(tr.)
To hide
(Ja^
To cut,
To bite,
) (intr.)
kdtnd loK
\
(2) chhupnd
To deduct,
J
r ( 1 ) chhipdnd
To be cut,
1
UUj*.
deducted or
• katnd (& ^-° hide (tr.)
(
J (2)cM^pana
bitten.
1
( I! t ,-£
L v^»
To wish,
To want.
To ask (for) .
To beg (for) .
\ To catch,
rcnanna UJtU.
To capture,
1 To seize,
I mangna J
u^u Tohold
1
I pakarnd L>jO
J
To demand.
To say,
' kahnd ^^
To sleep
sond Uy* To relate.
)
To be made,
\ m
( 1 batdnddtv
/ To tell
To pretend
to be.
bannd UuLj
\ To inform.
1 2. batldnd
t ^^!
To make,
r 1. dikhdnd
To build,
To make a
> banana. UlJu To show
\
j 2. dikhldnd
fool of.
[ UVJ
l Englishmen and their servants often use • m&hgna ' for ' to want.'
This is incorrect.
91
To die marna '~ye
To put. j
To pi ) rakhna U^;
To keep.
T< > run daurna l Lij^ J
To run away, |
V bhaansi1 G
charhna ^J&'fc
To escape, v bhdgna1
To desert. j
To fight //////// (jjj
To remain, \
-tay,
1 roAfwr but,
I » live, ,
To be left. )
To climb,
To ascend, f
To rise (as ^
-un, etc.)
46t Up,
he lifted
Po ouse.
To raise,
„, ... / uthana
To lift up, j
To carry.
To learn slkhna U^Xx,
/ 1. sikhana
j 2 sikhlana
j
«|OA 11 or off, • ularna
To descend , /
L >*
mse. \
tise,
ttfarna Ujr
Todismount, \
To disem- '
bark, |
To detrain. J
To take off, }
or down, / utarna U;l>f
etc.
To fly, j
To be blown / urna l»j?
up.
To open
To shut,
To close, band karna
To disconti- i'
nue.
To tie bandhna
To save, ^ bachana
To defend.
To hear
To laugh
To walk, )
To start, chalnd
To go off.
To make to »
go, 1 chaland
To propel,
To drive,
• Daurna' means simply * to run* while • bhSgnS ' signifies
•way from something apprehended."
to rua
92
To fire (as a ^ chaldna I 1. rasta
gUn>' ^^ R°ad' Way' { 2 rasta^'
Engine ahjan ..5^6' \
v
EXERCISE 10.
For calling. After drinking. Concerning his coming.
Before sleeping. After my arrival. At his suggestion
(Saying). Before I spoke. After he arrived. After his
death. The range of this gun. From fear of the enemy.
Seeing. Seen. On-looker. Showing. Shown. Having
shown Sending. Sent. Having sent. Catching. Caught.
Captor. Drinking. Drank. Doing. Done. Having
done. Going. Gone. Having gone. Eating. Eaten. Hav-
ing eaten. Living. Lived. Opening. Opened. Opener.
Having opened. Hearing. Heard. Listener. Having
heard. Laughing. Laughed. Cheerful. Having laughed.
Instructor. Engine-driver. Keeper. Guide (road-shower).
Having read. Reader. Having cut. Having slept
Inhabitant. Threaten ing-to-fall. About-to-arrive As
soon as he left. No sooner than he came. Instantly after
his desertion. As soon as I heard. Soon after the des-
patch of the letter.
EXERCISE 10 (a).
- JJO i-
Ju
93
<LT -
Lesson IX.
Verb (continued}.
Tenses.
116 Before we come to the formation of tenses we ask
the reader to learn thoroughly the following four tenses of
1 hona ' (to be etc.) which are very extensively used both
as finite verbs and also as anxiliaries to form certain
tenses :
(t) Present auxiliary.
I am, main hun ^yt (jj^ We are, ham ham .xfc ~fc
Thou art, tu hai £_ y You are, turn ho yfc J
He, she, it is, wuh hai £_ ^ They are, unih hain (JjJb ^
Nora. — No distinction of gender.
(u) Past auxiliary.
I was, main tha (thi) We were, ham the (thin) l
Thoii wast, tu tha (thi) You were, turn the (thin)
He, she, it was, nnth tha (thi) They were, unih the (thin)
»J) V ^ (^) *L *J
K. — The 'ft* of the Masculim Singular changeH to ' I'
-alar, to ' e* for maso. plural, and to ' In ' for fern,
plural.
1 As a matter of fact the first person plural (we) has no feminine
throughout except in the Panjab.
94
(Hi) Present Subjunctive.
I may be, etc., main huh We may be, etc. ham hoh
Thou mayest be, tuhoj&y You „ „ ,, turn ho
etc. yt> J
He, she, it may wuhho They,, ,, ,, wuh hem,
be, etc. yt ^ uyt> ^
NOTE. — No distinction of gender.
(iv) Future.
M. F. M. F.
I shall be, main huhga (gl) We shall be, ham hohge (gl} '
Thou wilt be, tu, hoga (gl) You will be, turn hoge (gl)
(s/)Vy L/)£V
He, she, it will be, wwA &og>d(j7t) They will be, wuh hohge (gi)
NOTE. — (a) This tense is formed by adding to the Present
Subjunctive ' ga ' which changes to * ge ' for masc. plural and
to ' gl ' for fern, singular and plural.
(b) This tense does not only mean ' shall be ' or ' will be ' but
also signifies ' may be ', ' might be ', ' must be ', etc. In case of
doubt it is supplemented by 'shayad' (perhaps), while in
case of certainty by ' zarur ' (certainly) or by some synonym
of theirs, as : —
Shayad wuh d.egd = He might come (lit. Perhaps he will
come.
Wuh qarur d,egd — He must come (lit. He will cot DC
positively).
Order of Words in a Sentence.
117. Now that we are entering into a more ambitious
scheme of constructing sentences we beg to give below the
order of words in Hindustani sentences :—
l As a matter of fact the first person plural (we) has no feminine
declension throughout except in the Panjab.
95
(t). The subject with its adjuncts, if any, stands first.
(M). The object with its adjuncts, if any, stands second.
If there are both direct and indirect objects, the latter
precedes but this is immaterial. Should the object be a
clause it follows its verb.
(in). The verb with its adjuncts, if any, stands last.
(iv). The negative adverbs immediately precede the verb.
Should the verb be compound, they sound much better
between the component parts.
(v). Interrogatives, especially adverbs, sound much
better, placed as near the verb as due regard for other rules
will allow.
(in). The adverb of time (a word or a phrase) may intro-
duce a sentence or immediately follow the subject or
whatever happens to be, otherwise, the first word. If
there be an adverb of place (a word or a phrase) as well,
it follows that of time.
(vii). If two things are mentioned in a sentence, one
bigger, and the other smaller, the smaller forming part of, or
contained in the bigger, the bigger is allowed precedence.
(tnu). The introductory ' it ' and ' there ' are not trans-
lated.
Examples:—
English Construction.
1. He is very rich.
He went lame.
3. The gallant soldier
saved her life.
Hindustani Construction.
I
He very rich is.
i 2 3
He lame went (became).
i
The eallant soldier her life
saved.
96
English Construction.
4. I gave the poor man
two rupees.
5. He discharged his du-
ties honestly.
6 Don't bother me.
7. He says that it is not
fair.
8. He did not come in
time.
9. How did the glass
break ?
10. Why did you beat
him?
11. He arrived here yes-
terday.
12. He cannot reach the
town before two
o'clock.
Hindustani Construction.
I to the poor man two rupees
4
gave.
l 2 3
He his duties honestly
4
discharged.
i 2 3
Me don't bother.
12 34567
He says that it fair not is.
He in time not did come
(came).
i 2 3
The glass how did break
(broke).
123 4
You him why did beat
(beat).
12 34
He yesterday here arrived.
He
the town not reach can
(or reach not can).
English Construction.
Hindustani Construction.
13. There is a big fort on On the top of the hill
the top of the hill. 2 3
a big fort is.
14 How many men are In this company
in this company ? 23
how many men are.
1 L> 3
15. It is sin to tell a lie. To tell a lie sin is.
16. There are two hundred In a company
men in a company. •
two hundred men are.
NOTE. — The above rules which are meant solely for the
guidance of the beginner are not infrequently departed from,
for the sake of emphasis, etc.
118. The order of words in an interrogative sentence
is virtually the same as in an assertive or affirmative
sentence. Occasionally ' kya ' (what ?) is prefixed to a
sentence to indicate interrogation. But this is purely
optional and can be used with only such sentences as
have no interrogative word in them already. In speak-
ing, however, the chief guide is tone, which consists in
laying a stress on the last syllable, i.e. pronouncing it
more forcibly in a pitched voice.
1 Kyon ' (why ?) is also used to mark interrogation but
very rarely.
The .\>f/fi tir<- Adverbs.
119. There are in all three negative adverbs :—
(i) o.* m-tf = don't.
13
98
(u) ** »m = not.
(ttt) ^fcji nafcfi* = HO, not.
120. (0 ' Mat ' is exclusively used with the Impera-
tive and is very strong and imperious Placed after the
verb it sounds still more dictatory.
(u) 'Na1 is used with:—
(a) Imperative. (It is neither very strong nor
imperious.)
<fe) Present Subjunctive.
(c) Past Conditional.
(d) Preterite or Indefinite Past.
(e) Negative Infinitive.
</> Cither nor = g^ JJL,
NOTE. — ' Na ' (or ' na ' k) placed after the verb gives it in
terrogative sense like the English " Wont you ? I hope you
will," etc.
(Hi) ' nahin ' is used :^
(a) In answer to a question.
(6) When the Present Auxiliary (hun, hai, etc.)
occurs either as a finite or auxiliary verb- In
this case the auxiliary is optionally discarded.
(c) With Imperative, but very rarely and then it
generally follows the verb.
(d) With ' chahiye ' (should, ought to, it is neces-
sary, etc.).
REMARK. — (i) With the other tenses ' na ' or ' nahln ' can be
optionally used. * Nahin ' is, however, stronger than ' na '.
(ii) The English ' no ' when it occurs as an adjective is
expressed by ' ko,I ' if it refers to number, and by * kuchh ' if it
refers to quantity. In either case the verb is made negative.
Agreement of Verb.
121. Unless otherwise stated (vide sec. 173), the verb
agrees with its subject in gender, number and person.
NOTE. — (i) Tenses which have no distinction of gender agree
with the subject obviously in number and psrson only.
99
(n) A sentence as subject (or object) of the main sentence
is treated as a masculine singular noun.
122. If there are more than one subject belonging to
different persons, they are arranged in the natural order
of the persons, beginning with the first, and the verb is put
in the First Person Plural if one of the subjects is of this
person and in the Second Person Plural if the subjects
belong to the Second and Third Persons. All nouns belong
to the Third Person.
123. If the subjects are living beings (Singular or
Plural) belonging to the Third Person, the verb is put in
the plural and agrees with them in gender if they are all
of the same gender; but if they are of different genders,
the Masculine is preferred. Care should, however, be taken
in such cases, to bring the Masculine one nearer the verb.
124. A subject in the third person singular is often
treated as plural out of respect or politeness.
125. In case the subjects are things or abstract nouns,
all Singular and of the same gender, the verb may occa-
sionally be put in the Plural, but the Singular is far more
preferable. If all of them are Plural of the same gender
the verb must, of course, be put in the Plural of the particu-
lar gender.
126. In case of mixture the verb agrees with the last.
127. If the various subjects are summed up by 'donon '
(both), 'sab' (all) etc., put in apposition, the verb, of
course, agrees with them, e.g. : —
100
English Construction. Hindustani Construe-
Gender, Number
and Person of
the verb.
Reference,
to rule.
1 . T shall go.
I shall go.
First Pers.
Sing. (Masc.
or Fern.).
\
2. We shall go.
We shall go.
First Pers.
Plur. (Masc.
or Fern.)
3. Thou wilt go.
Thou wilt go.
Second Pers.
Sing. (Masc
or Fern ).
4. You will go.
You will go.
Second Pers.
Plur. (Masc.
or Fern.).
>Sec.
121.
5. He will go.
He will go.
Third Pers.
Sing. , Mas-
culine.
6. She will go.
She will go.
do. Fern.
7. It will go.
It will go.
do. (Masc.
or Fern.).
8. They will go.
They will go.
Third Pers.
Plur. (Masc.
or Fern.).
101
ish Construction.
Hindustani Construc-
tion.
Gender.Number
and Peroon of
the verb.
Reference
to rule.
9. He and I shall
I and he will go.
First Pers.
go.
Plur., Mas-
culine.
10. You and I
I and you will go.
First Pers.
shall go.
Plur., Masc.
(Fern, if both
Sec.
the subjects
122.
are femin-
ine).
11. He and you
You and he will Second Pers.
will go.
go-
Plur., Mas-
culine.
12. The king and
The king and his
Third Pers
v
his minister
minister ahunt-
Plur. , Mas-
went ahunt-
ing went.
culine.
ing.
13. The queen and
The queen and Third Pers.
her daughter her daughter
Plur., Fem-
oame to the * ^
inine.
king. to the king
Sec.
oame.
123.
14. His parents His parents Third Pers.
went to — x —
Plur., Mas-
Lahore.
to Lahore went.
culine.
15. The boys and
The boys and girls
do.
girls are play-
ing.
are play i
/
102
English Construction.
Hindustani Construc-
tion.
'Gender, Number
, and Person of
the verb.
Reference
to rule.
16 He has gone
They to Lahore
Third Pers.
to Lahore.
Plur., Masc.
have gone.
(For res-
pect.)
17. The Colone
The Colonel
do.
has gone to
~ -^
Sec.
the butts.
to the butts
124.
have gone.
18. Lady Dane is
Lady Dane
Third Pers.
coming to
^- — * ,
Plur., Fern.
India.
to India
(For res-
are coming.
pect.)
'
19. My pouch (m.)
My pouch and
Third Pers.
and haversack
haversack
Masculine.
(m.) were lost.
(Singular or
was (or were) lost.
Plural).
20. Pouches (m.)
Pouches and
Third Pers.
Sec.
and haversacks
haversacks
Plur. Mas-
/ t "\ r1
y
/ 125.
(m.) were dis-
, ~ .
culine.
tributed.
were distributed
21. Table (f.) and
Tables and chairs
Third Pers.
chairs (f.)
.
Plur., Fem-
were put in.
inside were put.
inine.
103
English Construction.
Hindustani Construc-
tion.
Gender ,N u mber
and Person of
Reference
to rule.
the verb.
2 '2. My pouch (m.
My pouch and
Third Pers.
X
and his bay-
his bayonet Sing., Fern.
onet (f.) were
(agreeing
lost.
was lost.
with ' bayo-
net ').
> Sec.
23. Fever (m.) and
By it fever
Third Pers
126.
cough (f.) are
and cough
Sing., Fern.'
caused by it.
^~— •>
(agreeing
is caused.
with
' cough ').
j
-». His pistol (m.)
His pistol and
Third Pers.
\
and my gun
my gun both
Plur., Mas-
(f.) were both
- ,
culine (agree-
lost.
were lost.
ing with
'both').
rt
; Sec.
25. His pistol (m.),
His pistol, your
do. (agree-
127.
your rifle (f.)
rifle and my
ing with
and my sword
sword all were
' all ').
(f.) were all
lost.
lost.
True (adj.) ^
th (m.) )
iful sachcha
web
VOCABULARY.
Quite, absolutely bilkul l
A He (m.) .
False (adj.) 5 *"
Mark spelling • bilkl '.
104
Liar (or lying) jhuta ^j-4^
Day after ,
Literate (educated) parhd [
to-morrow ]
likha (.$£/ l&jj
Tk u r parson . , *»>+>
Day before ( UJ~yt
Illiterate anparh *^>J^
yesterday. /
y 1. thik
TT71 C 1. kahan ...Li"
Where ?
Right, correct '
1 2. durust
( 2. kidhar yt>j>i
When ? A;a6 "^J
\ ^^A*)J
When (relative) ?'a& ^-^?*
Age 'umar ^c
Doubtless beshak ^^.
Rank 'uhda *jy:
Hiding (hidden) chhipa*(hua)
Sufficient S^'
C 2. 6asa ^ v . •:«
Caste (f.) zat «^!J
Forest jangal J.iA^
-»
Present hazir ^iU.
At that time us waqt u^S^ 1
Absent ghair hazir j~c(s^j±c
Parade (f.) preJ v-^i^
How far ? (distance) kitmdur
Loss, harm, damage nuqsdn
Hot, warm grarw " 3
Mess (f. ) miskot cL^Xo*^>
^i i i * i. x ( !• 5^^ ^r«*
Cold fadi } 1 J
Company (f.) kampni ^^
\ J / i c\ »7 .1— !"•••»
' 2. thanda I^A^J
Service, duty (of naukri
Very, much, "j
inferior) (f.) ^/f*
many, too V bahut ^.^
Tailor darzi ^f')^
(of excess) )
Object, meaning matlab
Turban (f.) pagn ^j^,
Useless, gainless be * fajda
To-day aj ^
x^Uuj
To-morrow, ~\
Irregular be qa'ida * *^3#
1 kal Jr
Sin gundh 8(I»
yesterday. J
Habit "adat ^jU
' Both parts are inflected.
* • bas ' is used predicatively only. As interjection it means ' enough ! '
* Participial adjective ; it is optional to add ' hiia ' ; when added it
must be inflected as well.
* Unchangeable Persian adjectives.
105
( u-tom dastiir »yu*,J ' Complete, full.)
ipftra !»»;>
Subjects (people) ra'iyat UP to standard J
Leave (of absence) chhuttl
Oflu-er
1. afsar
2. hakim
Follower of Hinduism Hindu
Mohamadan musalinan
-tian 'isaf
.. chhatt (f.)
Chest
2. slna (m.)
Language, tongue (f.) zubdn
Language (not tongue) (f.)
boll ^Jy.
Race, tribe (f.) qaum '^
To tell a lie jhul bolna
(JJjJ CL?^4^
Known ma'lum
Or ya
EXERCISE 11.
1. He is an intelligent man. 2. Is he your brother ?
3. It is a very big fort. 4. Who are you ? 5. Is it true ?
6. No, it is a lie. 7. They are all illiterate. 8. Are you
educated ? 9. He is ill to-day. 10. He is quite healthy
to-day. 11. This recruit is very weak. 12. Is he your
id? 13. That Havildar is my enemy. 14. The roads
are very bad. 15. It is a very difficult language. 16. It
is quite an easy thing. 17. Your uniform is very dirty.
18. Whose arrangement is this? 19. This is quite wrong.
20. It is all right. 21. Whose servant ' are you ? 22. What
is your age ? 23. What is your rank ? 24. What is tin
time? 25. This trench is not deep enough. 26. He ifl
a Rajput by caste (of caste). 27. How many men are pre-
sent ? 28. How far is your village? 29. Tin- water i>
too hot. 30. This room is too warm. 31. What is your
object ? 32. I was in Lahore yesterday. 33. Whose fault
I The Predicative noun, if masculine, is treated M belonging to the
same number aa the subject. Hence it in plural here.
14
106
was this ? 34. It was your fault indeed. 35. Why were
you absent yesterday ? 36. They were absent from the
parade. 37. If he is (may be) in the office. 38. If it is
right. 39. I shall be in Rawalpindi to-morrow. 40. He
might be in the mess. 41. It must be in my room.
EXERCISE 11 (a).
(4) - *• A- ^ UE# urV (3)
< £.1* }-j> 1^. (6) - £_ ^ l/«-J *i cJuu. (5)
xj (8) - A- ,jV «-V ^
** (10) -•?>«> ^;l ^ f (9)
S ^_ U tj (12) - -*_ cab S^Ux; «j (11) -
u|lf .^./^ (14) - « A. W fU K»T (13)
(16) - « -*- ^ ^yilf *. J^i ilik (15)
fa (18) - .*_ xli/ UJy t£jy«a. (17) - &-
(20) - S A. ;yL,j W ^^ u5X« ^-1 (19)
yt> J^AA ^ (22) - ^ ^1 «_;Ua> yT (21)
- ^-a^ ^j*«i (24) - u^ ^Ujc ^ (23)
-y, e^^ «^ ^ (26) -<*. ^;^ ^^ ^1 (25)
^v^ «j (28) - j*ji ^- ^oT ^ (27)
* f3 (30) - 4- jv W ^v ^J ^ (29)
(32) - ^^> ^. JL-^ Jf ^.jfcU. *j (31)
f* (33) - ^^ ^^ >-s~f!
(35) - "? ^ *-*il 3 (34)
107
/! (45)
;Ux,
y (39) - ^ ±j>
J* v^^ (41) -yt r>~, y^5/) (40) -
(43) -yty!raSia*e/! (42) -^
- y» u^ '^' ^ ^ (44) "^
/ A f\\ ^ i \T * c ^*
i (48) - *> ^-^^ ^ Ml (47)
j (50) - 8y*> *J^ u^axu. v^>^j J/ (49)
Miscellaneous Colloquial Sentences.
Is there any body here ?
Who are you ?
What is your name ?
What is your father's name ?
What is your caste ?
What is your village ?
In which tahsil * ?
How long is this trench ?
deep is this river ?
How broad is that nullah ?
Whose fields are those ?
Where is my sword ?
This color is very bad.
Where is my orderly ?
Is he a relation of yours ?
you the owner of this
bungalow ?
ko,il hai?
turn kaun ho ?
tumhdra ndm kya hai ?
tumhare bap kd nam kya hai ?
tumhdrl zal kya hai ?
tumhdra ga,oh kaunsd hai?
kis lahsll men ?
yih morcha kitnd lamba hai ?
yih daryd kitnd gahrd hai ?
iruh ndld kitnd chaura hai?
wuh kiske khet hain ?
hamdrl kirch kahdn hai ?
yih rang bahut khardb hai.
hamdrd ardall kahdn hai ?
wuh tumhdra rishta-ddr hai ?
turn is bangle ke mdlik ho ?
1 Used aa a shout for servants.
9 A collection of towns or villages smaller than a district.
108
He is a very respectable man.
Our Subadar Major be-
longs to a respectable
family.
It is the Colonel's strict
order.
The sun is very strong
to-day.
Was it yours or his ?
He is an old servant of
mine.
(At) what time ?
(In) which direction ?
(At) what place ?
wuh bard 'izzatddr ddml hai.
hamdre subeddr sahib khan-
dam ddmi haih.
(yih) karnail sahib kd sa^ht
hukm hai.
dj dhiip bahut tez hai.
wuh tumhdrd thd yd uskd ?
wuh hamdra purdnd naukar
hai.
kis waqt ?
kis taraf ?
kis jaga ?
Lesson X.
Tenses (contd.).
128. There are altogether nine principal tenses ; three
are formed from the root, three from the Present Participle,
and three from the Past Participle.
Tenses of the root :—
(i) Imperative.
(U) Present Subjunctive
(Hi) Future.
Tenses of the Present Participle :—
(it-) Past Conditional.
(v) Present (Indicative)-
(vi) Imperfect (Past).
Tenses of the Past Participle :—
(vii) Preterite (or Past Indefinite).
'•in) Perfect.
(ix) Pluperfect.
109
Imperative.
129. The most common form of the second person plural
Imperative is formed by adding ' o ' to the root. It gene-
rally requires immediate compliance, e.g : -
Infinitive. Root. Imperative.
Jj-> bolna, to speak J^l bol y^j bolo.
'^J thairna, to stop ^ jhair ^ thairo.
(JJ^ kholna, to open J^ khol y^f kholo.
NOTE. — (a) If the root ends in ' o ' the addition of another
o is obviously unnecessary, e.g. : —
bjA* dhona, to wash yka dho, wash (Imperative).
(6) The roots of * dena ' (to give) and ' lena ' (to take)
• <!' and '!' respectively for all the three tenses formed from
th< root, e.g : —
lija dena, to give ^ do, give (Imperative).
UJ lena, to take J lo, take (Imperative).
130. English sentences, constructed with ' must ', ' shall ',
'should', 'are to', etc., which have virtually the force of
command or order, are advantageously expressed by the
Imperative, eg:—
You must go just now, \
You shall go just now,
\r u u /• 11 m V °w" 7»»°-
You should (jolly well)
I (abhl = just now),
go just now, v
You are to go just now. )
131. The Respectful or Polite Imperative is formed
by adding Mye ' to the root, as : -
^JujI afye, be pleased to come ; from Ul ana, to come.
^Jo^xju baithiye, be pleased to sit down ; from U^ baithna
to sit down.
likhiye, be pleased to write ; from U^ likhnd, to
write.
JOJUM sunlye, be pleased to listen, from Ui~ sunna, to
listen, to hear.
110
NOTE. — (a) The addition of ga ( (? ) to this form gives it a
future signification, as : —
fcxUjf *JLa. jdld djyegd, you will be pleased to come soon.
(6) For Impersonal use of the Respectful Imperative vide
269 to 271.
132. Very much allied to the Polite form given above
is what we, for want of a better name, might call the
Future Advisory or Monitory Imperative. It is formed
by adding * lyo ' (instead of 'lye ') to the root, as : —
yjJU. <L> Jjbj wahdh na jdlyo, never go there (I advise
or warn you).
NOTE. — This form implies a sense of superiority (real or
assumed) on the part of the speaker.
133. The following verbs form their Respectful and
Advisory Imperatives slightly irregularly : —
Infinitive. Root. Resp. Imp. Adv. Imp.
(jjf karna, to do jL kar c=Ixs\jJ' kijlye j-^^pj^ Tcijlyo.
IJuj dena, to give c_ o de ^-JxsoJ dljlyc J.AXSUJ dijlyo
(JoJ Una, to take <L le ^-IxsuJ lljiye j-^suJ lljiyo.
LUJ pind, to drink ^_^ pi ^-AXSUO pljiye ^sxx> pljlyo.
(jyb hona, to be yt ho ^-ua^A hujiye ^La^Jb hujiyo
134. The Infinitive is also used as :—
(a) Present Polite Imperative.
(b) Future Imperative.
As Present Imperative it is generally supplemented by
zara (just, a little, for a while), or ' to ' (just, etc.), or both,
as: —
yih kitdb dena, \
zara yih kitdb dena, [ Just give (me) this book
V
yih kitab to dena, I will you ?
zara yih kitdb to dena. J
As Future Imperative it is not necessarily polite, as : —
Ill
hafte ke ba'd ana = (you might) come after a week.
(hafia = week.)
135. The root itself also expresses the Second Person
Singular Imperative but its use is confined to cases defined
in Sec. 101 (iii), e.g.:—
At fchudd, mere gundh mu'df kar = 0 God, forgive my
sins. (rnvSaf karnd, to forgive.)
Beta, meri bat sun — O son, listen to what I say (my
words).
Idhar a = Come here (you silly fool), (idhar = here.)
Quickly (adv.) ) .
Rapidity (f.) yal
To hurrry up, ^jaldi karnd
To make haste, j U,
Silent (adj.)
Silence (f.)
Inside andar
Outside bdhir
Noise shor
To make a noise shor karnd
VOCABULARY.
Without thinking be soche
<L-
samjhe
Clearly, Distinctly saf sdf
u— *L0 *- *i -f
Standing (adj.) khard (hud)
Sitting (seated) baifha (hud)
To stand up khara hond
To keep quiet chup rahnd
Aga i 1 1
Loudly .
phir
-oiKll v, i
^orcibly, >
trongly. )
zor se
And, Other, More aur
Cake kek
To fear darnd
Window khirki ^fj^
Bath gbusl "J^c
To have a bath ghusl karnd
', }jaldnd ^
tr. J '
,
To burn (tr.)
To put out, , bujhdnd
To extinguish.
Takes • se ' (from) after the object feared.
112
( 1. lamp (m.)
Lamp j 2. bam (f.)
Wick battl
Fire (f.) ag
To forget bhulna
Bicycle bajsikal
Back (adv.) wapi*
To turn (intr.) ghumna U
To turn (tr.) ghumdnd li
To the right da,ef&
To the left | a'6
L £i-)Ljb fjo u
A little ihord Ij^
Clerk (native) fra&w yl>
Boots 6il^ «JLj^>
Repairs (f.) marammal
To repair marammat karnd
To enquire pucMnd
To go on, )chald '
To go away. ;
1.
2.
1. wahdn ^
2. wrfAar ^
To bring up, ^ pesh karnd
To submit. 3
Here
There
. fefna
To lie down •< 2. ?e^ ;ano
Very far
Answer jaivab
Paper kaghaz
At 4-30 sd^e cAflr
First of all sa& se pahle
> khdnd LiLi'
Food (m.) 3
Drill (f.) qawd'id jxly
\ 1. mangdnd
To send for
/• r • I ^^V*
(inferiors
_- , . 2. mangwdnd
and things). '
To send for
(persons in >• bulwand
general).
Prisoner
Near (adv.) nazdik u
Onward, Ahead (adv.)
Pace qadam
To keep up pace
mildnd
Heel (f.) en
To keep heels together
mildnd
qadam
en
« ChalS ' also changes its ' a ' to agree with the subject.
113
To fix bayonet sangin char-
hand (J(jbj
To press dabdnd
Slowly, \ .
/ \ahista
Gently. J
\khenchnd
To draw. J
Brown (almond color) bdddml
Target nishdna
Bull's eye
Moon
Seven o'clock
gulzari
chdnd
sat baje
sidhd
Straight
Roll call, |
Strength / gintl
(numerical). '
j 1. ek dam ,
At once )
< 2. fauran
EXERCISE 12.
1. Call my bearer.1 2. Call him here. 3. Bring him up
to-morrow. 4. Don't be afraid. 5. Shut the door. 6.
Open the window. 7. Take these papers at once to the
office. 8. First of all teach them drill. 9. Write down
their names. 10. Wait for the answer. 1 1 . Show this to me.
12. Speak again. 13. Bring an answer. 14. Speak distinctly
and slowly. 15. Send for him quickly. 16. Send for the
dinner at once 17. Don't go very far. 18. Don't forget
again. 19. Take my brown boots for repairs. 20. Come
back before roll-call time. 21. Don't speak so quickly.
22. Look straight towards the target. 23. Don't wake me
HP before 7 o'clock 24. Be pleased to write to him
now. 25. Be pleased to come in and sit down.
26. Will you be pleased to let me have a look at the map.
-7 Just call my bearer, will you ? 28. Never answer in
M* (I advise or warn you). 29. Come to my office after
two weeks. 30. Bring food for the dog.
i Personal Pronouns and human
are generally put in the Dative.
15
occurn ;«»ct objects
114
EXERCISE 12 (a).
(3) - jT v_%i ;,! (2) - j* y ^JL, ^;U* (1)
(5) -yy AjLjJ );j (4) - jU ^^
UT (7) - $ eL>y \y> (6) - jJI
a. ^r /T UtJJu- (9) - |Ka. ^O ;U. vJa^J yUJt (8)
(12) -yucab^Ub (11) -^j ^^.ytjfytjl (10)
- yy ^- ^^ (13) - y^ r
/ £ (16) - j2l ytb J^ ^ (15)
(18) - yU. ^jiwjbT ^JLjiI -jjXjj^J (17)
JL, (20) - |UL ^JOa^ ILI (19)
(22) - ^y, ^ yb yu, yij (21)
(24) - crW-^ ^ S— ^ «>> (23) - jJI « vJV ?>
^b Aj (25) - JuJl~J A*5U ^1 / ^j;)
b );j (27) - KUMBOJ JsU upl^a. (26)
(29) - UU e^« ybjf ybj] ^. ^ ^jbl (28)
(31) - Ul ^ ur^ (30)
Miscellaneous Colloquial Sentences.
Turn to the right. da,ew Aa^ ghumo.
Turn to the left. ba,en hath ghumo.
Keep up step. qadam milato.
Heels together. epi mila,o.
Don't press (it) violently. zor se mat daba,o.
Press (it) gently. ahista daba,o.
Fix bayonet. sangln charha,o.
Pull vigorously. zor se khencho.
Come here. idhar a,o.
115
Don't go there.
Take care (or, look out).
Hurry up.
Don't make a noise.
Keep quiet.
Take off (your) clothes.
Stand up straight.
Lie down.
Wait a little.
Bring him up before the C.O.
Take this letter to the
Adjutant.
Bring an answer quickly.
It is very hot to-day.
It is very cold to-day.
II- is rather annoyed.
You are very lazy.
Who is this sepoy ?
udhar mat ja,o.
fchabardar.
jaldi karo.
shor mat karo.
chup raho.
kapre utdro.
sidhe khare ho.
letja,o.
zara (or thora) jhairo.
usko karnail sahib ke samne
pesh karo.
yih chifthl Ajitan Sahib ke l
pas leja,o.
jawab jaldi la,o.
aj bahut garmi * hai.
aj bahut sardi* (or thahd)
hai.
wuh kuchh fchafa hai.
turn bahut sust ho.
yih jawan * kaun hai ?
Lesson XI.
Tenses (contd.).
Present Subjunctive (or as it is miscalled Aorist).
138. The Present Subjunctive is formed by adding to
the root :
1 • To ' of motion to persons is expressed by ' ke pS» ' (near).
8 Oar ml =s heat, warmth.
8 Sardl (or tl.afid) = coldness.
* 'Jaw-in' (youth, a young man) is often used for a soldier as a
compliment.
110
* fin ' for First Person Sing. ' en ' for First Pers. PI (we).
(I).
1 e ' for Second Person Sing, 'o' for Second Pers PL
(thou). (you).
* e ' for Third Person Sing, 'en' for Third Pers PI.
(he, she, it, etc.) (they, etc.)
e.g. UJyj , bolna, to speak ; root J^ bol.
main bolun = I may speak, etc.
tu bole, = Thou mayest speak, etc.
wuh bole =He, she, it may speak, etc.
ham bolen — We may speak, etc.
J £MW 6ofo = You may speak, etc.
*j wuh bolen = They may speak, etc.
NOTE. — If the root ends in a long vowel, ' w ' is occasionally
met with inserted before the above terminations. For instance
instead of ^f »j wuh a,e (he may come, etc.) you sometimes
come across <^-jf *j wuh awe. But this latter form is now
considered inelegant and is fast falling out.
137. The Present Subjunctive is chiefly used :—
(i) To express future conditions (especially if the main
clause is in the Imperative), as :—
Agar wuh a,e, if he comes (i.e. should come).
Jab wuh a,e, when he comes (i.e. should come).
Jab l tak wuh na a,e, until he comes (i.e. should come).
(ii) To make doubtful statements, in which case the
sentence is generally introduced by * shayad ' (perhaps)
as: —
Shayad wuh puchhe = He might enquire.
Shayad main waqt par na pahunchuh = I might not
arrive in time.
1 ' Jab tak ' (as long as) when used for ' until ' takes the verb in the
negative , because ' until he comes ' = ' as long as he does not come.'
117
(Hi) To ask permission or advice or to express a wish ,
request, etc. as :—
Main ja,un ¥ May (or shall) I go ?
Wuh ja,e ya na ? Should he go or not ?
Ab main kya karun ? What should (or can) I do now ?
Khuda kare ivuh kamyab hoja,e, God grant that he should
succeed.
Kash-ki wuh a) e, Would that he were to come.
Ab = now.
Khuda kare = God grant.
Kamyab = successful.
Kamyab hona (or, hojana) = to succeed.
Kdsh ki = would that.
(iv) To express contingent subordinate clauses ex-
pressive of purpose, etc., as: —
Darwaza kholo ki hawa andar a,e = open the door that
the air may come in.
(J£t = that, in order that, etc.)
(v) For the missing persons of the Imperative, as : —
A,o koshish karen = come let us try.
Koshish karna == to try.
Future.
138. The Future Tense is formed by adding 4 ga ' to the
Present Subjunctive; 'ga' becomes 'ge' for masculine
plural and ' gi ' for feminine, singular and plural, e.g. :—
M. F.
main bolunga (gi) = I shall speak.
& bolegd (gi) = thou wilt speak.
wu^1 bolega (gi) = he, she, it will speak .
h<*™> bolenge (gi) = we shall speak.
turn bologe (gi) — you will speak.
bolenge (gi) = they will speak.
118
NOTE — (a) Apart from expressing simple future actions or
events it is often used to express future conditions, especially
when the main clause is in the future, as : —
Agar uruh a,ega to main ja,unga = It he comes I shall go.
to = then.
(6) It is occasionally used to express wish or intention
as: —
Main pahle dekhunga Id uslci ra,e kya hai — first of all I
would (or want to) see what his opinion is.
VOCABULARY.
Opinion (f.) rd.e
Thought, \
Idea, I fehayal
Opinion. J
1. mere
Tchaydl men
In my opinion
2. meri
rd,e men
Chimney chimni
To blow ,
To sound,
_ , bajdnd
To play
(music).
Alarm alar am *fl]
Airship, ^ hawdj jahdz
Aeroplane. / \(^ ^Jy*>
Yes hdn ~ u(&
This evening aj sham *(£ ^
To-night dj rat «yl; ^1
To dismiss dismis karnd
To dismiss (from service)
mauquf karnd (.i/ «.
Cells (mily.) kdnji Tiaus
Examination imtihdn ^
How long (time) kitril der
To accept,
To agree,
manna
To follow (advice) , / (jj^
To carry out
(order) . j
Otherwise , > 1 . nahin to y ^^i
or else . i 2 . war na <u ? ,
Advice (f.) salah
Cart, \
Carriage, > ^ar*
Trap.
Train l^Telgdrl
119
To miss a train gdfi se rah-
jdnd
Sock(s),
/ 1. mauza (m.)
: }
To report (against) (ki) ropot Sp;cimen>
A show (amusing) tamdshd Stocking(s.) | 2. ;
A march kiich
To march kiich karna Gr
(f.)
topi
karna
To start, \raivdna1 hond
To set out. J
namuna
/ 1 . subdh sawere
Early in the) <=-vir* -**
morning i 2. 6ari /a;or
>
At what time kis waqf,
Finished
To finish
To be finished ^hatam hona
fchatam J^
khatam karna
Hat,
Cap
\
Sample. )
Cigarette (f.) sigret
Small case, )
Casket (f.) / 4*^ ^
To refuse to (se) inkdr karna
madad
Help,
Reinforcement
Musketry, \ chdndmdri
Butts.
/
it
Beginning shuru'
(jyt Ji±. To begin (tr.) shuru' karna
Itnd UJy ^ £^
To be broken ' 2. M jdnd To be begun shuru1 hond
I • »
liL'^ i^** _» . i
\ . j*
To break (tr.) torna U»;y
To explain,
To argue,
To remonstrate.
I samjhdnd
News (f.)
khabar
To work kdm karna
War, Battle, ]
Fight, Cam- (
paign, Active
service.
EXERCISE 13.
1. If you follow my advice. 2. If the train arrives in
tini« 3. If you stop in Lahore. 4. If he works well
l ' Rawftnn * does not change.
120
(does good work). 5. You might miss the train. 6. He
might not tell the truth 7. They might report to the C.O.
8. May I call him ? 9. Shall I send for it now ? 10. Come,
let us see the show. 11. God grant that he should recover
(become healthy). 12. Would that he were to follow my
advice. 13. I shall go to Delhi ( ^*>4 ) to-morrow.
14. When will you come back ? 15. What time will he
arrive there ? 16. We shall march early in the morning.
17. Who will do this work ? 18. When will this war be
finished? 19. They will start to-morrow. 20. I shall
explain to him. 21. What time will the train arrive?
22. I shall not have a bath to-night. 23. I shall bring
you up before the C.O. 24. How far will you go ? 25. I
shall deduct its price from your pay. 26. How long will
you stay there ? 27. I shall pay (give) you its price.
28. The ship will set sail to-morrow.
EXERCISE 13 (a).
- ^ ^ Jjjjrf £* /) (2) - ^ r /I (1)
/I (5) -ii-ii^lCTn,/! (4) .^-/^^/l (3)
/I (6) -c-jpli,
LL* * *, M (11) - a*?* ^-J- yUif/i (10)
<* «J /' <13) - ^vi *« jj «J, .**- *& (12)
V (15) - &k <" y^^- <j ^ (14) S ^ Ui 4* u-l
5T (18) • ^5^ j* ^ijt u*~ )r^ (17)
i(? (20) - -V M» «
121
(22) - ^
(23)
/! (34)
(35)
Miscellaneous Colloquial Sentences.
What is the latest news
to-day ?
How old are you ?
Do you know ?
How long have you been
in service ?
How long have you been
ill ?
Whose belt is this ?
in- MI i -take.
Take these recruits to the
doctor.
That hill is not within the
range of our guns.
16
fij taw, khabar kya hai ?
tumharl 'umar kya (or kitni)
hai?
turn ko ma'lum hai ?
tumharl naukri kitni hai.
turn kab se blmar ho ?
yih kiskl pefi hai f
yih uskl ohaltl hai.
in rangruton ko daktar sahib
ke pas lejato.
wuh pahdri hamari topon kl
mar men nahln (hai).
122
How deep you think is that
nullah ?
Is this book yours ?
Is it a big city ?
No, it is a small village.
There was a big forest in our
rear.
The roads are very bad there.
How many new recruits are
there ?
He is an old sepoy.
He is a very good orderly.
What is the name of this
city ?
I will dine out to-night.
It is very good news.
Whose fault is this ?
If not yours, (then) is it
mine ?
Don't go that way.
Come this way.
tumhdre khaydl men wuh
ndld kitnd gahrd hat ?
yih kitdb tumharl hai ?
(kyd) bard shahr hai ?
nahin, chhotdsd l gdon hai.
hamdre pichhe ek bard jangal
thd.
udhar rdste bahut fehardbhain.
kitne na,e mhgru\ hain ?
wuh purdnd sipdhl hai.
wuh bahut achchha ardall
hai.
is shahr kd ndm kyd hai ?
dj rat ham khdnd bdhir
khd,enge.
yih bahut achchhl fyhabar hai.
yih kiskd qusur hai ?
agar tumhdrd nahin to hamdrd
hai?
ustaraf mat jd,o.
is taraf d,o.
Lesson XII.
Tenses (contd.)
Past Conditional. (First Form.)
139. The Past Conditional is expressed by the Present
Participle itself in both its clauses. The ' if * clause (Pro-
1 « aa ' intensifies ' chhota ' (i.e. very small).
123
tasis) is generally introduced by ' agar ' 1 (if), while the
main clause ( apodosis) takes ' to ' (then) at the beginning
of it One or both of these conjunctions may, however, be
understood when the sense is clear without them.
Protasis or ' if ' Clause.
M. F.
**$\ agar main bolta (boltl) = If I had
spoken.
y jf] agar in bolta (boltl) = If thou hadst
spoken.
»j j*\ agar ivuh bolta (boltl) = If he, she, it
had spoken.
(*> £\ agar ham bolte ( boltin ) = If we had
spoken.
f5 X' W tum b°lte (ooltln) = If you had
spoken.
^ jf] agar wuh bolte (boltin) = If they had
spoken.
Apodosis or Main Clause.
M. F.
) MS. y to main bolta (boltl) = then I
have spoken.
*. ) ^ y y to tu bolta (bolti) = then thou ^
have spoken.
) &jj> *j ^ to wuh bolta (bolti) = then he, she, it
would , !
have 8P°kea-
r? ) ^y ^ y to Aam 6o/<6 (ftottln) = then we
have spoken.
> • ;o6 ' (when) and • ;o6(db ' (M long M) with their correlative* • tab '
(then) and • tabtak ' (until then) respectively are also uaed in conditional
sentences. ' jo ' (if) is also occasionally met with instead of
124
^y ) £y. S totum bolte (boltin) = then you
have spoken.
to wuh Mte (boltin) tnen tneY
have spoken.
140. The Optative is also expressed by the Present
Participle itself but it is appropriately introduced by
* kdshki ' (would that) instead of ' agar '; as : —
M. F.
) &r» Z* *^£K, kdshki main boltd (bolti) = would
that I had spoken
. ) &y £ <J^K, kdshki tu boltd (bolti) = would that
thou hadst spoken.
) K/jJ ^ sSJ&, kdshki wuh boltd (bolti) = would
that he, she, it had spoken.
^ ) ^ f* *^> kdshki ham bolte (boltin) = would
that we had spoken.
*o«AW turn bolte (boltin) = would
that you had spoken.
kdshki wuh bolte (boltin) = would
that they had spoken.
141. The most notable feature about this tense (Past
Conditional or Optative) is that it refers to conditions,
wishes, etc., which might have been realised but, as cir-
cumstances or ill luck would have it, were never realised.
In cases of wishes it implies a cherished hope for their
realisation.
142. It may even be used with reference to present or
future but then it is always assumed, as a foregone con-
clusion, that the action or event denoted by the verb,
has no chance of coming to pass, e.g. :—
Agar wuh did = (i) If he had come (but he did not).
(ii) If he were to come (but he won't).
125
Kdshki wuh dtd = (t) Would that he had come (but he
did not).
(it) Would that he were to come (but
he won't).
As it is it is rarely used for anything but the past.
143. In case of doubtful suppositions the sentence is
generally introduced by ' shdyad" (perhaps), as:—
shdyad ivuh dtd = he might have come ( i.e., supposing
he had come).
144. There is, however, a Second Form of this tense
as well, which is formed by adding the Present Participle
of ' hond ' (to be) to the Past Participle, as :—
Protasis.
Gyt Vj> *jjf] agar wuh bold hotd = If he had spoken.
^yy& ^y. Xj /} agar wuh boli hoti = If she had spoken.
J yt ijj Xj jf] agar wuh bole hote = It they (m.) had
spoken.
j^/1 agar wuh boli hotih = It they (f.) had
spoken.
Apodosis.
*) y to ivuh bold hotd = then he ^^ have
spoken.
8^ y to wuh boli hoti = then she , , have
spoken.
*, y to wuh bole hote = then they ( m . ) , , have
spoken.
*j y to wuh boli hotin = then they (f.) ,, have
spoken.
Optative.
kdshki wuh bold hotd = would that he
had spoken.
126
kdshki wuh boll hotl = would that she had
spoken.
kdshki wuh bole hole = would that they
(m.) had spoken.
kashki wuh boll hotln = would that they
(f.) had spoken.
145. The first form is much more common than the
second ; they are interchangeable so far as they relate to
past. The second form, unlike the first, is used in reference
to the past only and aims at the finality of an action or
event. In either case the condition or wish is believed to
have been possible of realization but was never realised.
Flag signalling
kdm
To reply to -(kd) jawdb dend
Address, Trace pata alj
To be punished sazd pdnd
To punish -(ko) sazd dend
Day (Hindi) din
Day (Persian) roz
c 1. har roz
Every day ] _
J (2. roz roz )jj ^
1 1 . roz ba roz
Day by day/ ^^
| 2. din ba din
To oppress,)
[ sitana
to tease )
VOCABULARY.
jhandl kd Complaint shikdyat
To complain of (or against)
-(ki) shikdyat karnd
mauqa
z,arur
urgent t
zarurl
i tarurat
Opportunity
Certainly
Necessary,
tant
Need,
necessity
Petition, ) ,
request (f.) )
To petition, ) 'arz karnd
to request) l>^
Reasonable )
[ wdjibl
(proper) j
Petition
(written)
Neck (f.) gardan
impor-
127
What sort of ? ) _
(kaisa
How ? )
Arm, weapon hathyar
Arm 1h~ ' -b
(part of body) >
Tool auzdr *\\J
To surrender (to lay down
arms) hathyar ddl dend
Uxfc;
rcwta
Reward in* am
To bathe nahdnd
Loyal, faithful wafdddr ;
Disloyal bewafd
( 1. badraqa <
Guide •
( 2. rahnumd
To lose one's way
bhulnd UJ
r 1. /air fcarnd
To fire
( 2. crtaJand ]
To kill mdrddlnd UJlJ ;U
To cause to fly, ^
To blow up, \urdnd UIj!
To gallop hard. /
Bag, sack borl
C 1. sant
Sentry ] 2. pahrewdld
ill,
Victory (f.)
To gain victory fatdh pdnd
Defeat shikast ^~-X£
To suffer defeat shikast
khdnd lil^f >-^"^ ^vj^A
To defeat -(fco) shikast dend
Enlistment 6Aar^l
To enlist (tr.) bhartl karna
To enlist (intr.)
1. bhartl kdkdm
2. galle kd "kdm
Recruiting j
duty
\
1. bhartl ka
daftar
2. galle ka daftar
1. bhartl wdld
sahib
Recruiting
officer 12. gattewdla
.mhib
Sense, wisdom (f.) 'aql
1 • Chalini ' means ' to let off/ 'to let go '. Whatever is let off has
got to be mentioned. For instance • goll chalana' (to fire a bullet),
1 pintaul chalanS ' (to fire a pistol).
128
To learn wisdom 'aql sikhna
Inside andar
Outside bahir
Wheel pahiya
To cover dhankna 116 U>5
Before, earlier pahle <%
To delay der lagana
Rebel baghi
/ manzur
karna
To sanction,
To approve of.
Sanctioned (acceptable)
manzur
To be sanctioned manzur
hona
Mule (f.) fehachchar
( 1. Una (to take)
To charge J UuJ
(price) "j 2. mangna (to
t ask for)
(I. (mol) Una
To buy
5. feharidna ^^-^
1.
Thoroughly, J 2. achchhl
Well. } tarah
'
Recommendation sifarish
To recommend (Jet) sifarish
karna (^ ^£>IJL ( ^ )
To pull, to draw khenchna
To pardon, to forgive mu'af
karna I
To load Iddna
Load (bulk) 6o/&
Load (weight) wazn
Tarpaulin (f.) tirpal
Wet glla
C 1. 5wMa
t 2. £&«*&&
To commit a fault qusur
karna (^ \y^»
To work hard mihnat karna
EXERCISE 14.
1. If he had come I would have gone. 2. If you had
written me I should have answered. 3. If you had worked
hard you would have succeeded. 4. If they had hoisted
(showed) white flag we should not have fired. 5. If they
had remained loyal the Government would have rewarded
them. 6. If our guide had not lost his way we should
have reached in time. 7. Had you accepted it, it would
129
have been all right. 8. If the sentry had not fired the rebel
would have killed him. 9. If we had not blown up the
fort we could not have gained victory. 10. If the enemy
had remained hidden in the trenches they would not have
been defeated. 11. If I had not enlisted in the army I should
not have been a subadar to-day. 12. If your ghee had
not been bad I should not have complained. 13. If you had
charged (asked for) reasonable price I should have bought
it from you. 14. If you had done this well I would have
recommended you. 15. If you had not pulled it so violent-
ly it would not break. 16. If you had loaded it lightly the
wheel would not break. 17. If you had covered these bags
with tarpaulin, they would not be wet. 18. If you had
seen it before sending it to me you would not have sent it.
!'.«. If you had asked for leave a couple of weeks earlier 1
could have given it to you. 20. If you had not committed
this fault I should not have punished you. 21. Would that
they had been literate. 22. Would that you had not
brought this bad news.
Translate into Second Form :—
23. If you had come yesterday I should not have gone
to Rawalpindi. 24. If he had arrived day before yesterday
there would not have been so much trouble. 25. Would
that you had brought this news a week earlier.
EXERCISE 14 (a).
; (2) -
I • BatS denl ' is intensive form of ' bating ' (to tell).
17
130
(7) .^Uyt'^^c^^/^^^yt^^yjry/l (6)
(8)
/) (9)
^UJ! ^^j ^. ^(^ y Uyb Xjjj ^^Jy-1 »_; ^1 (11)
Uf
VT /I (13)
^° y ^-^
(17) -<L>^Ky^U^/J (16)
(18)
(19)
(18)
(20)
j>J\ (21)
(22)
(23)
«>y I (24)
l^ (26) - 2-b Ji^j ^j ^^^ (25)
1 ' Ho jana ' is intensive form of ' hona ' (to be).
2 ' Mu'af kardena ' is intensive form of ' mu'af karna ' (to pardon)
* * Sipahi ka sipahl ' = sepoy as before (or, as ever).
* ' Pahunch jftna ' is intensive form of * pahunchna ' (to arrive).
131
Miscellaneous Colloquial Sentences.
Come in. andar a,o.
Where is the key of this is bakas kl chabi kahan hai ?
box?
The first attack was very pahla hamla bahut safcht tha.
violent.
Whose round was it last kal rat kiskl gasht thl f
night ?
I shall stop this custom. ham yih dastur band karenge.
What will the people say ? log kya kahenge?
and report to the Jama- jakar Jama'dar Sahib ko
dar. rapot karo.
Send one Havildar with ekhawaldarunkesathbhejdo.1
them.
Put them all in this box. wuh sab is sanduq men rakho.
Give me a clean handker- (hamko) ek saf rumal do.
chief. ^
Give me the other coat. (hamko) dusra kot do.
Do you think it is difficult ? tumhare khayal men yih
mushkil hai ?
I am much pleased with ham tumhare kam se bahut
your work. khush hain.
This rope is not strong yih rassl kafl ma^but nahin.
enough.
\ thing is dear here. yahan sab chlzen mahingi
hain.
What time will the train gafl wahan kis waqt pahun-
arrive there ? chegl ?
p it with you (yourself), apne pas rakho.
l>'m't tell it to anybody. yih bat kisl se* mat kaho.
l • BhejdenS ' ia intensive form of ' bhejna' (to send).
^hna' with 'ae' after ita indirect object mean* to tell, to relate,
to request," and with • ko ' after the object * to order,' * to call/ etc.
132
Don't run, walk slowly.
Come on quickly.
Stop that noise or I shall
beat you.
Don't loosen the dog.
What is its weight ?
Do you agree (Is it accept-
able to you ? )
Take them to, the Recruiting
office.
It is a very good opportu-
nity.
Put these clothes in the sun.
Do you know his address ?
We want recruits badly.
daufo nahln, ahista chalo.
jaldl chalo.
shor band karo nahln to ham
tumko marenge.
kutte ko mat kholo (or, chhoro).
iskd wazn kitnd hai ?
tumko manziir hai?
unko bharti ke daftar men
leja,o
yih bahut achchhd mauqa*
hai ?
yih kapre dhup men ddlo.
tumko uskd pata ma'lum
hai ?
hamko rangriiton kl barl
zar&rat hai.
146.
Lesson XIII.
Tenses (contd.).
Present (Indicative).
The Present Tense is formed by adding the
uyt>
Present auxiliary to the Present Participle, as :•—
M. F.
o main bolta (bolti) hun = I speak
or am speaking.
tu bolta (bolti) hai = thou speak-
est or art speaking.
*j wuh bolta (bolti) hai = he, she
it speaks or is speaking.
ham bolte (bolti) hain = we speak
or are speaking.
133
turn bolte (bolti) ho = yon speak
or are speaking.
truA 6ofte (bolti) hain = they
speak or are speaking.
147. This tense has three chief significations :—
(i) Habitual or frequentative (i.e. repeated action).
(it) Incomplete continuous (i.e. one action in course
of progress).
(n't') General or universal truth, in which there is
naturally no restriction of time.
Examples :—
(t) Wuh har roz ydhan dtd hai = he comes here every
day.
Tumhard bap kya kdm karta hai ? = what does your
father do ?
n-nh dusre bangle men rahta hai = he lives (or is living)
in the other bungalow.
$ahib khand khdte ' hain = Sahib is dining.
2 Kya karte ho ? = what are you doing ?
Sher kd bachcha sher hold hai = a tiger's cub is
(naturally) a tiger.
14.S. It is occasionally used for : —
(0 Immediate future.
(n^ Past (to represent it vividly).
E.g. :-
Main abhl atd hun = I shall come (or be coming)
presently.
Abhl = (i) just now (present), (it') quite lately (past),
(tit) presently (future), (iv) as yet, (v) still .
' 9fthib ' is always treated as plural for respect.
; • Turn ' understood.
134
Shakespear ek jaga likhtd hai = Shakespear has
written (lit. writes) in a place.
Jab main ahdar giyd to kyd dekhtd huh ki merd
wafdddr naukar mard para hai = when I went in
I saw (lit. what do I see (but)) that my faithful
servant was (lit. is) lying dead.
Main usko muddat se jdntd huh = I have known him
for a long time (and still know him).
Mara = dead (Past Participle from ' marna,' to die).
Para = lying (lit. laid. Past Participle from ' parna,'
to fall, to be lying).
Muddat (f.) = long time.
Imperfect (Past}.
149. The Imperfect Tense is formed by adding the
Past auxiliary to the Present Participle, as :—
M. F.
ma^n boltd thd (bolti thi) = I was
speaking or used to speak.
tu bolta thd (bolti thi) = thou wast
speaking or spokest (habi-
tually) .
wuh bolta thd (bolti thi) = he, she,
it was speaking or used to speak.
ham bolte the (bolti thin) = we were
speaking or used to speak.
tum bohe the (bolti thlh) = you were
speaking or used to speak.
wuh bolte the (bolti thin) = they
were speaking or used to speak,
160. This tense is chiefly used to express —
(t) A single act actually taking place in the past tim<
for once, as : —
135
Main us waqt akh bar parhta tha = I was reading
newspaper then.
Afchbar = newspaper (m.)
(M) A repeated or lasting action.
Ham har roz nau baje qatva'id karte the = we drilled
(or used to drill) every day at 9 o'clock.
151. The most notable feature about this tense is that
it sets no definite limit, i.e. it does not take into consi-
deration the final end of an action or event. That is
why it is so often used for the English Preterite when
the latter denotes duration or repetition without reference
to termination, as :—
wuh likhtn thfi = (t) he was writing (still).
(it; he was (still) in the
habit of writing.
case the action is represented as incom-
In either
plete
Whole day
long.
To play
Quietly
1 2
2. sa
ra d
1 i p away khisak jdnd
VOCABULARY.
1. din bhar Full, Filled bhara hud lyb
Empty bhali
Ready tayyar ;U>
This time isdafa i**J ^J.
To cry rona (Jjj
To cook, to bake pakdnd
n
khelnd
chupke
'/-
Innocent, ^bequsur p^n
Without any fault. ) ^/r^ ^
Heart, mirul dil JJ
Attentively (with the heart m .
in it) dil lagakar ^KJ Jj
Tnfill. -j bharnd
To load (gun, etc.) ) (J^H Season
( 1. bdrish (f.)
( 2. menh
1 . barish hond
2. pant
136
(1. tolna (JJy
Winter ^ 2. sardl ka mausim \ To weigh < 2. wazn karna
Summer garml ka mausim
To waste
zai'a karna
For nothing mw/£
To know janna
Always hamesha
Ever (at any time) kabhi
Wound zalchm
Pain, ache dard
Fool, foolish bewaquf ^-s^i^
To appear, to seem, to trans-
pire, to become known
ma'lum hona liyb
Road ( broad )( f .) 5«mA;
1 1 . zamlndar
Farmer /
(2.
Whenever
Why ?
What for kiswaste ?
»
To pain, to ache dard karna ; SometimeS; ^ faWj fea6Ai
by J;J
To find out, to investigate
daryaft karna (^
Search (f.) talash
1.
To search,
2. dhundna
To change badalna
Relief, transfer badli
To transfer, to relieve
li karna li,f . Jc
To be transferred, to be
relieved (fa) badli hona
Occasionally.
Bread, or
A loaf of bread (f .)
.
{ f< '*
Crop
Milk
fasl
1. dud
Sugar chini
\ 1. «5tt6a7i (f.) -x*
Morning
(2. fafjar(i.)
Evening sham (f.) *
This morning a; subah
This evening aj
Defect
-
nuqs
Slowly, gently ahista ahista
137
Whistle st'fi
To blow, to sound, to play
(music) bajana
To be played, ^
To be sounded, j
bajna
To feel happy khush hand
1. sirf
,.
I 2.
'
Only 2. faqat
3. khali
EXERCISE 15.
1. Who is making noise ? 2. My wound is paining.
3. What are you looking for ? 4. Sahib is having
(drinking) his tea. 5. Whenever he gets an opportunity
he quietly slips away. 6. They are playing ' tennis '
(jainis ^rJuJ). 7. Sahib is changing his clothes. 8. When
the rain falls the farmers feel happy. 9. He comes here
occasionally. 10. You are wasting my time. 11. The
adjutant is measuring the recruits. 12. What are you
doing here ? 13 What price does he ask for ? 14. He
is learning flag wagging. 15. I want only one week's leave.
16. Whenever they commit a fault we punish them.
1 7 Do you ever report this to the Q M. or not ? 18. What
time does the musketry begin ? 19. Does he refuse to go
"ii active service? 20. What time does the train start
from here ? 21. I shall pardon you this time. 22. Why
do you not work hard ? 23. He always told lies. 24. I
was having my Hindustani lesson (reading Hindustani)
i. 25. My bearer (usually) woke me up at 6 o'clock.
26 They lived (were living) in Lahore. 27. What were
; saying ? 28. What time did you (as a rule) close the
office ? 29. He was repairing your bike, Sir. 30. We
both having our bath then.
EXERCISE 15 (a).
;U ±-;U 8, (1)
18
138
(4) -^bi/^U^U^j ^^^b ^ (3)
(6) - S ^ ^GU ^^ u r>r ^J * £-! (5) - Syt
(8) - ^ ^Joj ^U U yU yT (7) - S £_ G/ ,K
-U JJ/ (10) - u
-yb <LK/^j <Ajujb ^ (12) - <*_ (IGUUT ^ (11)
(15) -SA.Gy l^r 1^, !;Ujb (14) -Sytjoj Uf ^ (13)
^ ;l^j (16) - £- Gl^ ^; ^ ;j^-
JU y| (18) - S A. LUJ ^U UT ycj ^ (17)
^^ (21) - Syb JLjil A^y Uui^^i. vJol (20)
. U3 G/ ^o.ia ^;UJ ^ (22) - ^,-L/ *1~ ^JL
(24) -^J^J "vj^o^ouT" ^J.^1 ^o,U Jxi/ (23)
"J ^" >* ^s* ^ eA ^^ 4 (25)
^ (26)
^^ (27)
-^ (28) - ^_2-U ^^«^
(29) - £_ JLU «-/Ui ^ y ^
(30)
• Worohe ' is a meaningless appositive implying ' etc.'
139
Miscellaneous Colloquial Sentences.
He seems (to be) a fool.
Does this path lead to the
station ?
What is wrong with this ?
He always tells lies.
Just weigh it please, will
you ?
There will be no parade this
evening.
This is not fresh milk.
Is the tea ready ?
Why do you not come in
time ?
What time will you be
relieved ?
It is very cold here during
the winter.
It is very hot here during
the summer.
Learn (your) drill atten-
tively.
I am going to play polo.
He plays whole day long.
Why do you fight among
yourselves ?
Is it (f.) loaded or empty ?
He is cooking (his) food.
Please forgive me this time,
I shall never do so again
wuh bewaquf ma'lum hota
hai.
yih rasta ' steshan ' ko jata
hai?
is men kya bhardbl (or nuqs)
hai*
wuh hamesha jhut boltd hai ?
zard yih tolna to ?
dj sham pret nahln hogl.
yih dad tdza nahln hai.
chd tayy~r hai ?
turn waqt par kyon nahln ate.
tumhdrl badli kiswaqt hogl ?
jare men yahan bahut sard*
hotl hai.
garmlon men yahan bahut
gar mi hotl hai.
qawa'id dil lagakar slkho.
ham polo khelne jate hain.
wuh ear a din (or din bhar)
khelta hai.
turn apas men kyon larte ho f
yih bharl hu,l hai ya khall ?
wuh khdna pakata hai.
is daf'a mu'af kijiye, phir
aisa kabhl nahin karfinga.
140
Put a tarpaulin on these in borion par tirpal daldo,1
bags.
Don't wash (your) clothes yahdn kapre mat dho.
here.
This water is for drinking yih parri pine ke waste hai.
purposes.
Try once more. ek dafa aur koshish karo.
How long will it take you to turn kitnl der men wahdn
reach there ? pahunchoge ?
Is there any prisoner in the aj kdnji haus men ko,i qaidl
cells to-day ? hai ?
You will miss the train turn phir gdrt se rahja,oge.
again.
Give me my cigarette case. (hamari) sigret kl dibyddo.
You mind your business. turn apnd kdm karo.
Do you think it will be tumhdre khaydl men yih kal
finished by to-morrow ? tak khatam hoja,ega ?
Your * sight ' is too fine. tumhara ' sa,it* bahut nicha
hai.
Your ' sight ' is too full. tumhara ' sa,U ' bahut unchd
hai.
Do you know him ? turn uslco jante ho ?
Do you know (how) to make turn morcha banana jante ho f
a trench ?
Lesson XIV.
Tenses (contd.)
Preterite.
152. The Preterite is expressed by the Past Participle
itself, i.e. without the aid of any auxiliary, as :—
I Prom ' paldenS ' intensive of ' dalna.'
141
M. F.
main bola (boll) = I spoke.
» »• = Thou spokest.
*> uwA ,, ,, =He, she, it spoke.
Jt> ham bole (bolin) = We spoke.
" » =You „
» =The
153. This tense denotes what took place once at a
definite time in the past : in contradistinction to the
Imperfect it always represents an action complete and
terminated, e.g. :—
Ham sham ko wahdn pahunche = we arrived there in the
evening.
Jab gar I khari hu,i = when the train stopped.
Main sirf ek hafta kalkatte men ihaira = I stayed only one
week in Calcutta.
REMARK. — (a) Whenever the English Preterite denotes repeti-
tion or duration and does not aim at finality Hindustani
Imperfect must be used, as : —
Jokuchh wuh kahid thd main karid tha — l used to do whatever
he told me to.
Jab kabhi tvuh sachchi khabar late the ham unko bahut in* am
dete the = we rewarded them liberally whenever they
brought true nc
Main pahle se janta thd = I knew it already.
Ek sJiahr men ek sauddgar rahtd thd — a merchant lived in a
• ity.
Pahle se = already.
/ iiddgar — merchant.
Ma'lum hotd thd ki = it seemed that ; but ma'lum hud = it
transpired or became knou n.
(/>) When two or more such actions are described the auxiliary
4 ttid ' etc. is often understood or may come once at the end,
as:— «•
Jab kabhi wuh ko,i khush-khnin-i laid hum use in am dete =•
whenever he brought any happy news we rewarded him.
142
154. It is occasionally used presumptively for the Future
(immediate or absolute), as :—
Aya huziir = I am coming, Sir (and shall be with you in
no time).
Agar wuh aya = if he comes (i.e. if it is taken for
granted that he will come).
Bos wuh aya aur main giya = in a word the moment he
comes I shall be off
NOTE. — * Aur ' in such cases has the sense of ' as soon as.'
implying concomittance or immediate succession.
Perfect Tense.
155. The Perfect Tense is formed by adding the Present
Auxiliary to the Past Participle, as :—
M. F.
ma™ bola (boll) hun = I have
spoken.
tu bola (boll) hai = Thou hast
spoken.
£_ ( ^j> ) ^ *j wuh bola (bolt) hai = He, she,
it has spoken.
jjfc ( ^lj> ) ^L ^ +& ham bole (boll) hain = We have
spoken.
yb ( ^j* ) ^-^. *> turn bole (boll) ho = You have
spoken.
jjb ( ^^. ) <Ly* ^ wuh bole (boll) hain = They have
spoken.
156. The peculiarity of this tense is that it invariably
connects a complete past action or event with the present
through its results, etc., as : —
Chiragh bujkgiya hai = the lamp has gone out (and
therefore it is dark now).
143
Zarur kahln bdrish hu,l hai = surely it has rained some-
where (for I am feeling its effect now).
Hu%ur Munshi Sahib l dye hain l = the Munshi has come,
Sir (and is still here).
157. There is, however, conceivable difference between
(t) the sequence of a completed action, and
(it) the perpetuation of the action itself.
In the latter case Hindustani uses the Present Tense.
\Yuh yih kdm tin sal se kartd hal=he has been doinu
this for three years past (and is still doing).
Main usko bachpan se jdntd hun =-• 1 have known him
from his infancy (and still know him).
Pluperfect Tense.
158. The Pluperfect is formed by adding the Past Aux
iliary to the Past Participle, as:—
M. F.
) t^> }yt main bold thd (boll thl) = l had
spoken.
* ) 1*3 Vy. £ tu bold thd (boll thl) = thou hadst
spoken.
) ) l«3 Jljj 8, wuh bold thd (boll thl) = he, she,
it had spoken.
ole the ^ol1 thl^ = we had
spoken.
) 4i f* t{im boh the (boll thin) = you
had spoken.
- ) 4i *J wuh bole the (boll thin) = they
had spoken.
169. This tense is chiefly used to express : —
(t) What took place long ago (Remote Past).
(u) What, in a comparative sense, took place anterior
to another action (expressed or implied). It is immaterial
Plural for respect on account of • Sihib '.
144
whether the succeeding action is directly antethetical or
otherwise.
(at) What took place once irrespective of the idea of
proximity or remoteness of time, and was treated as a
thing past and gone until it happened to be mentioned
again, e.g. : -
(t) Yih shahr pandrah sau tls 'iswi men bana tha =
this city was built in 1530 A.D.
(ii) (a) Mere pahunchne se pahle wuh chala giya tha =
he had left before I arrived.
(b) Wuh kal sham ko aya tha = he came (lit. had
come) here yesterday evening (but is not now
here).
(Hi) Aj subah khabar ayl thl = the news was received
this morning.
160. In English the Pluperfect is chiefly used to con-
trast priority of one action to another [vide example (ii a)
above], but in Urdu it expresses much more than that.
That is why it is so frequently used for the English Pre-
terite [vide examples (i}} (ii) (b) and (Hi) above].
161. When no contrast is aimed at and it is desired to
state things in the order in which they took place Pre-
terite is used, as :—
Pahle main Lahore giya, wahan ek hafta thaira, phir
Bombay chalagiyd = First I went to Lahore, stayed
there for a week, and then left for Bombay.
162. It is occasionally presumptively used for what
very nearly came to pass, as :—
Agar turn na ate to main chalagiya tha = If you had not
come I was gone (to all intents and purposes).
Main mar giya tha, magar wuh waqt par pahunchgiya =
But for his timely arrival I should have (certainly)
died.
145
VOCABULARY.
1. ghabrana
To feel fright-
ened or con- v 2. ghabrd-
fused
To feel tired
jana
1. thakna
{
) 2. the
( UU
thakjana
To win (in a competition)
jitna
To lose (in a competition)
hdrnd UhU>
To burst, \ l.phatna(il+>
To explode, ^2.pha(jdnd '
To be torn. )
Head
1. chakrdnd
To feel giddy
To retreat pichhe hatnd
Club kalab ghar
Several times ka
To be spread J
i 2.
1. phailna
I
phailjana
Tied bandhd hud
To break Jose
i
1. chhufnd
2. chhutfdnd
I v. cfi/iutjdnc
1.
To decrease ^ 2.
(par)
\ ' (
or nonplussed] 2. chakrdjdnd ! J^ (^ )
\ GU I j^ ascend- (or charhjdnd
To laugh hansnd
To be conquered (to fall,
To fall
a place) /ato/i Aona Ciyt ^Ii
r^ A little after midday
lo move ittitnn in*. I ^
To shake,
To stir.
\hildnd
2. ^ir parnd Ujj
ft
•
To feel shy
ag6' \8dmdn
Kquipment. /
To bark bhaunkna Uxj^^j
To move aside, hatnd (JJJL
19
sharmana
GUyi
(intr.),
To put to
shame (tr.)
To force entrance ghusjdnd
•^
146
Last time pichhlt dafa
milna
To meet,
To be mixed.
Ago hu,d
C 1. mama
To die < ._ .
» 2. marjana
To smile muskarana Li
To wrap (tr.) lapetna
To dig khodna
/ 1. ghirna
To be surround- j
ed " 2.ghirjana
"j 2.ghirj
\ GU
lagna
UJ3
u
To pass (intr.) guzarnd (>
To be opened khulna
/ 1. bachna
• » '
To be saved
To escape. 1 2. bachjana
\ * • |
/ 1. dubna
To sink (intr.), J Ix^J
To be drowned. ) 2. dubjana
1. 6am
Bomb
Cannon ball,
Shell.
Bullet, pill goli
(«
V
Whole year
1. sal-bhar
To hit (to strike
against)
Arm bazu
To swim faMV/w
Furlough (f.) raza
To rain, }
_ ^
To pour down. )
To slip phisalna
Special fyhas
Long time muddat
EXERCISE 16.
1. All of us (we all) went to the butts. 2. When did you
come back from Bombay ? 3. They arrived here last
night. 4. We did not stay in Calcutta. 5. How did this
2. 5ara .55^
JLI;U
Hut jhonprl ^JXJ^^A.
(In the) last year pichhle sal
jjLw j^SXJ
Yet, so far, ^)abhi tak
Up till now. j ^-£ -^
l Changes to ' hu,e ', « hu,I,' etc., to agree with the subject.
4 Hona,' among its other meanings, signifies " to lapse*' as well, and
hu,a ' (lapsed) is its past tense.
147
glass break ? 6. It rained heavily last night. 7. They
were drowned with the ship. 8. When he brought the
letter. 9. The horse was frightened and fell into the
' khud.' ' 10. The dogs of the village barked at us.
11. He laughed and went away. 1 2. How was this torn ?
13. The bomb exploded and his hand was blown off. 14.
\\V all felt tired. 1 5. We passed by * a hut. 16. The horse
broke loose. 17. The bullet hit (in) his head. 18. Have
you brought my luggage from the station ? 19. Where
ha-- my servant gone (to) ? 20. How has this been dis-
covered ? 21. The news spread throughout the whole city.
--. They have retreated to a new position. 23. How many
m«-n have gone on turlough ? 24. All the buildings have
fallen down. 25. Has the rain stopped ? 26. This build-
ing was made two centuries ago. 27. Long long ago
Alexander3 came into this country. The sun had not yet
ri-«'n when (ki) we started. 29 They had not yet got up
when we arrived. 30. How many men went on furlough
year ?
EXERCISE 16 (a).
j# k±. t^^J;^ fK «, (4) - ^
: -
JWt jj (9) - I;
Ijl-or)^ J^^ (11) - ^ 1^ v^. f* (10)
, ^ (13) .Ufr &r. ^-. (12) -I*;
(15) -f V jy< ^^ (14)
' • Khu 1 ' ( 3^ ), ravine, down the precipice.
• ' Ke pis ee ' ( 4*. ^b L. \ from m
148
J ufc 1^. (16)
«i (18) - s^i
^.LC (20) - ^ jry ^ ,_^u (19)
(22) -^ c_;JT Ju^ ^ (21)
- • u& k
JL, ^1 (24)
' Jti ^-!^ ^^ oe^ «-^J fft (25) - ^J
^. ^ (27) - ura Uf 1^ A ^y ^ (26)
(30) - &- Uf cLy jjO KL.I (29) - <*- Uu Uf (28)
^y ^Ub (31) - L3 IL
(32) - J\ jajfj )}\ ^ A
i (33) • ^ ^yy^ ^;
fJ (34) - U/y& Jj
Miscellaneous Colloquial Sentences.
Don't be uneasy. ghabra,o mat.
Who, you think, will win ? tumhare khayal men Tcaun
jltega ?
Shall we win or lose ? &aw jltenge yd harenge ?
Don't laugh. hanso mat.
Why do you smile ? turn kyon muskrate ho ?
Don't move. hilo mat.
Move aside, ^ (leave the chajo (or hatjayo).
Save yourself. ) road). ( bacho (or bachja,o).
Your pagri is not well tied. tumhari pagn thik bandhi
hu,i nahin.
149
We arrived there a little
after midday.
He is quite innocent
Mr. Fraser has gone to play
tennis.
Are the crops good this year ?
Do you know (how) to swim ?
What time will the guard
change ?
Show (me) some other
sample.
Keep your accoutrement
always clean.
Try to take him alive.
What time do you dine,
Sir?
H< is lazy, does not take
pains.
Is he a relation of the head
clerk.
You are a young and strong
man, why do you not
enlist in the army ?
I cannot understand you
(your words).
Government will pay for it.
I there a well near the
camp ?
Is the water of the well
»d ?
Whrre is this made ?
ham din dhale wahdn pahun-
che.
wuh bilkul bequsur hai.
Fraser Sahib tainis khelne
gaye ham.
is sal fasl achchhe hain ?
turn tairnd jdnte ho ?
gdrd kis waqt badlegi ?
ko't aur namund dikha,o.
apnd sdmdn hamesha sdf
rakho.
usko zindah pakarne ki
koshish karo.
dp kiswaqt khdnd khdte hain ?
wuh sust hai, koshish nahin
kartd.
wuh bare bdbu kd rishiadar
hai?
turn jawdn aur ma$bul ho,
fauj men bhartl kyon
nahin hole ?
tumhdrl bat men samajh men
nahin dti.
sarkdr iskl qimat degi.
kampu ke pas ko,\ kudn hai ?
us kuen kd pdni achchha hai ?
yih kahdn bantd hai ?
150
Lesson XV.
Additional Tenses.
163. Apart from the nine principal tenses given in
Section 120 there are five others occasionally met
with : —
(t) Present Continuons Subjunctive,
(tt) Past Continuous Subjunctive,
(tit) Perfect Subjunctive.
(iv) Imperfect Future.
(v) Perfect Future.
164. The Present Continuous Subjunctive is formed by
adding the Present Subjunctive of ' hona ' to the Present
Participle, e.g. :— M J\
( ^tij* ) Wj* .fi*^ <*>ya>r main bolta (bolti) hun = If
I am (may be) speaking.
,a> ( ^JJj* ) U/y y^/l agar tu bolta (bolti) ho = If thou
art (mayestbe; speaking.
txfjj *jjfl ago*1? wuh bolta (bolti) ho = li he,
she, it is (may be) speaking.
are (may be) speaking.
m bolte (bolti) ho= If you
are (may be) speaking.
uh> bolte (bolti) hon = If
they are (may be) speaking.
165. The Past Continuous Subjunctive is formed by
adding the Present Participle of ' hona ' to the Present
Participle of another verb, e.g. :— M. F.
? ) ^y* ^y ^* a^ar ma^ bolta hotd (bolti
hotl) = If I had been
speaking.
151
M. F.
forta (bolti hotl
= If thou hadest been
speaking.
If he, she, it had
been speaking.
If we had been
speaking.
b°he hole (bolti
hotin) = If you had been
speaking.
wuh bolte hote (bolti
hotin) = If they had
been speaking
166. The Perfect Subjunctive is formed by adding the
Present Subjunctive of * hona ' to the Past Participle,
e-g-:- M. F.
uyt ( ^Jy ) ^ ^yi agar main bola (boll) Mn = If I
have (may have) spoken.
yt ( ^^ ) Vy y ^/! agrar ^w Wa (boll) ho = If thou
hast (mayest have) spoken.
yt ( ^y ) Vy s;^/l ograr ?<^ bola (boll) fto = If he,
she, it has (may have) spoken.
uyt ( ^y ) 2.y f>j£} agar ham bole (boll) hoh=lf we
have (may have) spoken.
yt ( ^Jy ) 2-y> j>£\ agar turn bole (boll) ho = It you
have (may have) spoken.
ayt ( ^y ) <ijj> *)jS\ agar wuh bole (boll) hob = If they
have (may have) spoken
167. The Imperfect Future is formed by adding the
Future of ' hona ' to the Present Participle, e.g. :-
152
M. F.
a™ bolta hunga (bolti hungi)
= I shall be speaking.
bolta hoga (bolti hogi) =
Thou wilt be speaking.
°^ ^°^ (bolti hogi) =
He, she, it will be speaking
ham bolte honge (bolti hongi}=
We shall be speaking.
°^e hoge (bolti hogi) =
You will be speaking.
b°lte honge (bolti hongi) =
They will be speaking.
168. The Perfect Future is formed by adding the
Future tense of ' hona ' to the Past Participle, eg. :—
M. F.
) ^V* ^y (j^° mai™ bola hunga (boli hungi =
I shall (or may) have
spoken.
y <« bolahoga (boli hogi) = Thou
wilt (or mayest) have
spoken.
w^ 6oZ5 Aogra (6oZt hogi)=
He, she, it will (or may
have spoken.)
) ^V6 ^y ^ ^am °ole honge (boli hongi) ==
We shall (or may) have
spoken.
turn bole hoge (boli hogi) =
You will (or may) have
spoken.
wuh bole honge (boli hongi) =
They will (or may) have
spoken.
153
169. Of the above five tenses only the last two, namely
(i) The Imperfect Future, and
(i7) The Perfect Future,
require special notice. While the primary use of these
tenses is, as their names indicate, to present an action in
a state of progress and completion respectively at some
future time, they are, in fact, very seldom used in this
sense. They are chiefly used for the Past, occasionally
for the Present and rarely for the Future. This is due
to the various significations of ' hoga ' which does not mean
only * will be/ but 'may be,' 'must be/ 'may have'
' must have ' etc. as well, e.g. : —
Wuh atd hoga = (i) He ™ have been coming (Past).
(it) He "SL be coming (Present).
(m) He will be coming (Future).
W uh aya hoga = (i) He ^^fc have come, i.e. possibly,
probably or positively he came,
or has come (Past).
(ii) He will have come (Future).
To avoid the ambiguity context or tone often comes to
assistance. Besides these tenses are often qualified by
supplementary adverbs like—
±>(£ shayad = perhaps
(d(c yhaliban = probably.
**j£ %arur = certainly.
^C^w beshak = doubtless, undoubtedly.
VOCABULARY.
, 1 . us waqt tak \ Lame lahgra
By that time, j cJo e^jyJ To limp langrana
T'ntil tlirn. 2. tab tak
Newspaper akhbar
To read pafhna
•0
154
That is why,
In fact that
is why.
1. isl waste
£"• j v.
2. iabhl to
3.
, ^ 1. a
. ) 2. o
)_..,,
> a,indah
Also bhi l
Asleep soya (hud) ly*> l
Likethis, ^ 1. aisa (e,I.)
So, Such. 2. owe
Future
T , .
In tutu re. )
Health , ^ mizaj ( ni . )
Disposition. \tdbVat
Greetings, ^
Good morning
' /
Good evening,
etc.
Satisfied
Rent, Hire, Fare,
Freight, Pass-
age money.
j
Turn (f.) bdrl ^/o
In turns 6<m 6an ^;0 ^0
Lying (things, etc.) para
(hua) ( lyb) Ij*
Lying (animate beings) letd
(hud) lyb bJ
Good for nothing, ) nikammd
Unemployed. ) UXi
Bottle (f.) 6o^a?
Cooly (porter) quli
Responsible zimma-war
dakkhdna
Responsibility
Post Office
Telegraph Office tdrghar
A match (to light) diydsaldj,
Match box
EXERCISE 17.
1. If he is telling the truth. 2. He might be feeling shy
M. If you are searching for the key. 4. They might be
wishing to come. 5. If he had been working hard. 6. If
you had been replying my letters. 7. If he has come
back. 8. If they have deserted. 9. If you have brought
an answer. 10. He might have felt uneasy. 11. I shall
1 Always follows the word it emphasizes.
2 « Aise,' ' waise,' ' kaise ' and ' jaise ' are used when they qualify a
verb.
155
be doing that work. 12. T shall be going to Calcutta on
Sunday. 13. The train may have arrived at the station.
14. He will have been dead by that time. 15. Probably
the ship was drowned. 16. He must have fallen off the
horse that is why he is limping. 17. They must have
won ; that is why they are (feeling) so glad.
EXERCISE 17 (a).
*,/! (2) - ^ <LS J- ^* /! (1)
Li (4) - uyt JL^^-jy-l f>/\ (3)
f/] (6) -yt *LW UU* v^y-f ^ ^ (5)
) (8) - JLyt <x>U p K ,£83 ^/l (7) - <Ly
/! (10) -ytbii^l^^/l (9) -Oyt lyt ^ ^ *>
^ J*>> u^ *i ^-u (11)
^1 (13) - ^Gyt iy «;IJ/
^ Jl^- c-^ (14)
- Kyi (J(^A. ^**j cub ^Le! ^ (15)
^ ^ *j (17) -^yt ^LuT '^JuJ' v^Jy.1 ^ (16)
UU (20) - Syt U«^ ^ v^Ila^ 1C) 8j jjli (19)
sj (22) - <£yt ^u ^j jjUt (21) - Kyt
^ jUi. ^^c (24) - K> Uu L/ (23) - tfyt b!
» ^^ ur J
Miscellaneous Colloquial Sentences.
od morning, Jainad n . Jama'ddr sahib, saldm.
w do you do ? ap^a mizaj ' A:awa
\Vlio is responsible ? town ztrnmaw^r hai.
i To be used only for persona of distinct i..n
156
It is your responsibility.
It is very urgent.
Take this at once to the
Telegraph Office.
Does this road lead (go) to
the Post Office ?
Call two coolies quickly.
Who is lying on the ground ?
It is lying on my table.
Whose turn is now ?
Come in turns.
Are you quite satisfied now ?
Never do so in future.
Is he asleep ?
What is the rent of this
bungalow ?
What is the railway fare
from here to Pindi ?
I am very pleased with your
work.
Give us a match please, will
you ?
What are you doing there ?
It looks very old.
I am very busy to-day.
What is wrong with him ?
Who is it ?
Come on in.
Who is that coming ?
I have forgotten your name.
What do vou want ?
yih tumhdri zimmawdn hai.
yih bahut %arurl hai.
yih fauran (or, ekdam) tdrghar
(ko) lejd,o.
yih rdsta ddkbhdne (ko) jdtd
hai?
do quli jaldi buld,o.
zamin par kaun leja hud hai ?
hamari mez par para (hud)
hai
ab kiski bdrl hai ?
ban bdrl d,o.
ab turn bilkul rdzl ho ?
d,indah aise mat karo.
wuh soya hud hai ?
is bangle kd kirdya kyd hai ?
yahdn se Pindi tak kyd kirdya
hai ?
ham tumhdre kdm se bahut
khush haih.
diyd saldyl dend.
wahdn kyd karte ho ?
bahut purdnd ma'liim hotd hai.
dj hamko bahut kdm hai.
usko kyd hud hai ?
kaun hai ?
andar a\a,o.
wuh kaun dtd hai ?
ham tumhdrd ndm bhulgaye
hain.
turn kyd chdhte ho ?
157
Has he gone ? wuh chalagiya hai ?
When did he go ? kab giya ?
How do you know it ? tumko kaise md'lum hai ?
What will you do now ? ab kya karoge ?
I- this bungalow to let ? yih bangla kiraye ke waste
(or khall) hai?
Lesson XVI.
Tenses (concld.)
Present and Past Continuous (Indicative).
170. As was pointed out in Sections 147 and 150 the
Present and Imperfect tenses have more than one significa-
tion, as : —
Wuh likhta hai=(i) He writes (usually).
(ii) He is writing.
Wuh likhta tha=(i) He used to write.
(ii) He was writing.
171. This plurality of meaning is sometimes ambiguous,
avoid which Hindustani has quite a peculiar and better
instruction to express the incomplete continuous phase of
them, thus reserving, to a degree, the above forms to
express the habitual and frequentative sense.
172. The Perfect tense of ' rahna ' (to remain, to
tinue) added to the root of another verb imparts to it
the present incomplete continuous meaning while its pluper-
fect similarly added gives it the past incomplete continuous
sense, e.g. :—
• Present Continuous.
M. F.
ujji ( ^jbj ) (jt; Jjj ^* main bol raha (rahl) hun = I am
speaking.
158
£_ ( ^yb; ) U>; Jyy <fi 60? raM (rahl) hai = Thou art
speaking.
£_ ( jbj ) U>^ Jy *j MW^ W raha (rahl) hai = He, she
it is speaking.
,jfc ( ^jb> ) ^ Jy jb &aw W ra^e (rafa) hain = We are
speaking.
yt ( ^tM ) ^; J^> J ^wm 6o/ mAe (rahl) ho = You are
speaking.
P ( * ) &-) ^> *) wu^ b°l ra^e (rafa) ham = They are
speaking.
Past Continuous.
M. F.
) [£ Ubj Jy ^o mam bol raha tha (rahl thl) = I
was speaking.
«fi 6oZ ra^a $a (m^i ^i) = Thou
wast speaking.
wuhbolraha tha (rahl thl) = He,
she, it was speaking.
We were speaking.
tum b°l ra^e ^ (ra
You were speaking.
) 4i<L.; Jr? x-? ^w^ ^°^ m^e the (rahl thin) =
They were speaking.
REMAKK. — Both these constructions denote a single act
or event actually taking place (and hence incomplete), in the
present and the past respectively.
173. This finishes all the tenses. As will have been
observed from the preceding examples under various tenses,
the Present and Past Participles used in the formation of
tenses change their final ' a ' for the purposes of agreement,
to
159
* e ' for masculine, plural, and to
4 i ' for feminine, singular and plural
unless the Participles occur, as they often do, as the finite
verb in a sentence, without the auxiliaries, in which case
the feminine plural takes ' In ' instead of only ' i.' Such
cases occur when the auxiliaries either do not come into
the formation of a tense or are idiomatically discarded.
—
agar wuh 'auraten boltm =
If those women had
spoken. (Past Condi-
tional).
wuh 'auraten bolm=Tho8e
women said. (Preter-
ite).
achchhi 'auraten jhuj nahm
bolttn = Good women do
not tell lies. (Negative
Present).
with 'auraten jhuj nahih
bolin = Those women
have not told a lie
(Negative Perfect).
Ulf ))\ ^jjl \))j* \j$)** 8J wu^1 'auraten bar roz atln
aur gana 8unatin=Tho8Q
women came every day
and sang songs. (Imper-
fect.)
U(T g&na = (i) Song, singing (m.)
(ii) To sing (verb).
l>Uu» sundna •= To cause to hear, to relate,
to repeat, to announce.
160
In the first two examples the auxiliaries do not enter into
the formation of the tenses while in the last three the auxilia-
ries have been idiomatically omitted.
'Hota,' the Present Participle from 'hona' (to be), used
to form the Second Form of the Past Conditional (or
Optative) follows the same rule, as : —
agar wuh 'aurateh boll hotln = If
those women had spoken.
kashki wuh 'auraten boll hotln =
Would that those women had
spoken.
VOCABULARY.
Dust
Smoking pipe (bubble bub-
ble) huqqa
To smoke huqqa plna
U^
1. gard (f.) J/
2. garda (m.) lo^
Campaign, active service (f.)
lam *$
Post, mail (f.) dak
English walayati
English mail walayati dak
Among ourselves, yourselves'
themselves apas men
All round charon taraf
(par) gole
To cannonade,
To shell.
> barsana
Cards (playing) tash ^Ji(*
Telegram, wire tar fi
Tentpegging neza bazl
To tentpeg neza bazl karna
¥ ^ *j*
To pitch (tent) lagand (JKJ
Hunting, game, \
. , . / shikar \&&
victim, prey. )
1 . shikar
khelnd
To hunt,
To shoot (game). 2. shikar
karna
Depot
Bandsman bdje wala
Band, piano,
harmonium
161
cable, pleasing pasand \ative place watan
jJu*.^ W it ness gawdh
To put on (clothes etc.) Evidence gawahl
pahinnd lii^ Statement bit/an to,U*
To remind ijn't dildnd . . , . , ^;
t Anxiety (f) fikar ^
_, ?, ; Heed, care (f.) par wall al.
To bear in mind yad rakhna
<> try to recollect ,
1 •• !• "ii bv heart.
kama
!!«'
Wax mom
To burn (tr.j jalana u)
Separate, apart, alag
Separately alag alag
Rope (thick and big)
To put out, ~\bujhand
Extinguish.
1. bujhnd
To go out (be )
j. I extinguished). \ 2. bujhjdnd
To burn (intr.) jalnd CJJU.
To rebel sir uthfina
ct ??7a'
Annual *~i'lr/fih l
id (animals etc.) Iddnd • Preparation to^yarl ^;o
UjV j To make preparation for (kl
Wages (workman's) mazduri tayydrl karnd
EXERCl i. 18.
• diniiiL'. '2. I am doing some important
>rk. ;i. H »• (ffice work. 4. What are you
ing ? 5. Our regiment is going on service
\Vh ;ig noise ? 7. What is taking place
8 I am \\ritinir Knglish mail. 9. Why are you
ting among your 10. Cavalry people are busy
"'gginp. 1 1. Look ! a big airship is coming. 12. Is
I Or. ••*!• »hlo). Vide 62.
162
it raining outside ? 13. I am reading to-day's paper.
14. The bandsmen were playing the band. 15. They
were having tug-of-war. 16. He was writing witness'
statements. 17. What was he saying ? 18. Rebels were
rising up from all round. 19. The troops on (of) both the
sides were shelling each other. 20. Bullets were falling
from all sides. 21. Dust- was flying all round. 22. We
were doing musketry then. 23. They were having (drink-
ing) tea. 24. What was he looking for ? 25. The Adjutant
was recommending you to the C.O.
EXERCISE 18 (a).
Ujl^^^ljUt (2) -Syti-jl^u^ip (1)
_; Wbj, £} ^ )}\ axfc £_; vJUfc ^^ L^l *; (3)
(6) - £- Ub; («j& *, (5) - S £. U>; jl ^ ^ b;J (4)
A. u>; u, v£j> ^r (7) ' a** ^ ^^ ^G ^' ^^
; yb ^^H CL;^; (9) - S yb 4.; 10 ^J ^ (8)
(11) -a^^;^^-^^^i^ v-^J ^j^ ol (10)
r^ ^ L/^^ ^ *e (12) - £- ^; ^ u^o
-U (14) - £_;/ ^!>' ^X5; (13)
(17) - LfS
^ (19) - ^ 4-; / ^ Ur ^ (18) - U5 tit; U
/ &r ^;u ^ ^A (20)
U (22) -^ A.; A^J *^5i ^ ^IjJ v^o.U (21)
jjy (23) - ^ i.; T
; j^
163
Miscellaneous Colloquial Sentences.
What regiment are you in ?
What is the number of your
regiment ?
What Company are you in ?
When did you enlist ?
Hmv long have you been in
service ?
Do you like soldiering ?
II ive you ever been on
active service ?
What is your rank ?
many N.C.O.'s are in
this Company ?
What district do you belong
to?
many Indian officers
are in your Depot ?
ration arrangement was
splendid.
many Infantry regi-
ments are (stationed) in
this Cantonment ?
t station is your regi-
ment (stationed) in ?
turn kis paltan men ho ?
tumharl paltan kd nambar
kya hai ?
turn kis kampanl men ho ?
turn kab bharti hute the ?
tumharl naukrt kitni hai?
tumko fauj ki naukri pasand
hai f
turn kabhi lam par ga,e ho ?
tumhara 'uhdd kya hai ?
is kampani men kitne 'uhde-
ddr hain ?
tumhara ghar kis zila* ' men
hai ?
tumharl dipo men kitne sirdar
hain ?
rashan (or, rasad) ka bando-
bast bahutachchha tha.
is chha.onl men kitni palfaneh
hain?
tumharl palfan (or tumhara
risala) kis chhatonl men
hai?
Pronounce like • e ' (oblique).
164
There will be company drill
this evening.
\\ '1 H-ii will the annual mus-
ketry be finished ?
Who was on duty on the
guard room ?
It is not a definite order.
What time do you parade ?
How many times a day ?
What time do you get up ?
Don't fire as yet.
What is your defence (to an
accusation) ?
Take this man back to the
hospital.
Is he senior to you (in
service) ?
No, he is junior o me.
aj sham " kampam dril "
hogl.
salana chdndmdrl kab khatam
hogl ?
' gard rum ' par kiski naukrl
ihl '{
yih pakkd hukm nahm hai ?
turn kis waqt (or, kitne baje)
prej karte ho ?
din men kitnl da fa ?
kis waqt uthte ho ?
abhi ( fair ' mat karo.
tumhara Tcya jawdb hai ?
is adml ko haspatdl men
wdpis lejd,o.
wuh turn se dahne ' hai :
nahin, ba,en* hai.
Lesson XVII.
The Agentive Case.
The use of j_ ' ne '. 8
174 It was laid down in Section 121 that, unless other-
wise stated, the verb agrees with its subject in gender,
number and person. In this lesson we intend to deal with
the exception to the rule ; but before we do so we would
• Lit « To the right.' » Lit. ' To the left.'
» Some grammarians assert that it equals ' by.' We are afraid we
cannot agree with them and would prefer to call it simply the sign of the
Agentive case.
165
point out that the rules we are about to give below are
very important.
Rule:— (< ) When a transitive verb is used in any of the
tenses formed from the Past Participle, namely.
(a) Preterite (Sec. 152),
(6) Perfect (Sec. 155),
Pluperfect (Sec. 157),
Second Form of the Past Conditional or Optative
(Sec. 144),
Perfect Subjunctive (Sec. 165),
Perfect Future (Sec. 167),'
the subject is put in the Agentive case, i.e. it takes 'ne'
after it, and the verb then agrees, not with its Subject,
but with its iiiri'i'f oh/erf, if any, provided the object is not
followed by ' ko ', as : -
(a) Preterite.
I wrote a letter = main ne chichi likhi (agrees with
'letter')
I gave him two rupees = main ne usko do rupai diye
(agrees with ' rupees ').
(b) Perfect.
Have you read this book = turn ne ylh kitab fxirhl hai ?
(agrees with * book ').
(c) Pluperfect.
I had not seen the place before = main ne yih jaga pahle
nahln dekhl thl (agrees with 'place ').
(d) Second Form of the Past Conditional or Optative.
If you had read the books = agar turn ne >mh kitaben
parhi hotln (agrees with * books ').
(e) Perfect Subjunctive.
If you have read the order = agar turn ne with hukm
parha ho (agrees with ' order ').
l In some grammars this tense is called " Past Dubious."
166
(/) Perfect Future.
You must have seen the photo = turn ne %arur wuh taswft
dekhl hogl (agrees with ' photo ').
REMARK.— In case of several nouns of different genders and
numbers the verb agrees with the last, as : —
We bought one mare and two horses = ham ne ek ghori aur
do ghore kharide (agrees with ' horses ').
We bought two horses and one mare = ham ne do ghore aur
ek ghori kharidi (agrees with ' mare ').
(w) If no object is expressed (or understood), or if the
object is followed by ' ko ' (or put in the second form of the
Dative in the case of pronouns) the verb becomes independ-
ent and is. then, put in.vftriit.bii/ in the third person, mas-
culine, singular, as : —
We said = ham ne kaha.
Why have you beaten him = turn ne usko (or use) kyoh
mara hai ?
I had seen the man before = main ne is admi ko pahle
dekha tfia.
175. ' Ne ' acts as a postposition for the purposes of
declension, except in the case of first and second personal
pronouns (singular and plural), 'wuh' (they) and 'jor
(who, plural) are preferably changed to ' unhon ' (or ' inhon ')
and ' jinhon ' respectively instead of 'un' (or 'in') and
4 jin ' only, as :—
My elder brother said = mere bare bha,i ne kaha.
He said = us (or is) ne kaha.
They said = unhon (or inhon) ne kaha.
(Those) who s&id= jinhon ne kaha.
176. With several UOUHS as subjects the 'ne' follows
the last only, but if they are pronouns the 'ne' is added
to each of them, as :—
The king and the minister said = badshdh aur wazir ne
kaha.
167
He and I both explained to him <= main ne aur its )t
donon ne usko samjhdyd.
wazir = minister.
samjhdnd = to explain.
177. If there is a noun, an adjective or a phrase in
apposition to the subject, ' ne ' follows the appositivc
as i —
A person, called Akbar, said =- ck shaJchs Akbar ndm (or,
ndml) ne kahd.
We, the wretched, said — ham kamba'^htoii ne kahd.
I, the wretched, said = mujh ' kambabht ne kahd.
Akbar, his elder brother, said = Akbar uske bare bhd,i ne
kahd.
178. The following verbs, however, do not take ' ne '
i.e. they are treated as intransitive and hence always
agree with their subject :
(JJyj bolnd, to speak.
(i£> baknd, to talk nonsense.
liJ^> bhulnd, to forget.
t->;^ ( £L ) (se) darnd, to fear,
(jjija. ( *> ) (par) chafhnd, to climb, to embark, to entrain,
to rise (as sun, etc.).
UjJ ( <£. ) (se) larnd, to fight (against).
(JJU ( ^. ) (se) milnd, to meet, to see (a person).
pahuhchna, to reach, to arrive.
l>)> land, to bring.
lejdna, to take away.
A- le and, to fVtcb.
chibfrnd, to scream.
chilldnd, to yell, to shout, to < xclaiin, t<»
out.
* ' main ' (I) and • tfl ' (tbou) become • mujh ' and • tujh ' respect >
16S
j pukarna, to cry out (but when it means
'to call ' it takes 'ne').
janna, to give birth to.
179. It is optional to use * ne ' with the following verbs :
i, to understand, to think.
i, to win (in competition).
li;U harna, to lose (in competition).
U$£>~» rikhnti, to learn.
180. In the case of intensive compound verbs, if one
of the components is intransitive, the whole is treated
as such for the purposes of 'ne', as: —
kha jana, to eat up.
> pi jdna, to drink up.
chaldend, to start off.
ho Una, to be finished.
181. If two or more sentences are joined into one by
the Conjunctive Participle the subject takes or does not
take ' ne ' according to the last verb ; but if the sen-
tences are joined by 'aur' (and), the use of * ne ' is
determined by the verb in the first sentence, as :—
Having written the letter he went away = wuh chitflii
likh kar chalagaya.
He wrote the letter and went away = us ne chichi likhi
aur chalagaya.
REMARK. — The subject being common to all such sentences,
its repetition is considered unnecessary.
The Use of ^ ' ko ' ivith the Object.
182. With the exception of such cases as require spe-
cial postpositions instead of 'ko,' the object of a transi-
tive verb is put either in the Dative (i.e. with ' ko ' after
it) or in the nominative ' (i.e., without any postposition
after it).
1 Or more correctly the Accusative, which happens to be identical with
the Nominative in Hindustani. (Vide Remark under Sec. 42.)
169
133. There are two kinds of objects; / direct, and
indirect, as : —
I gave him (indirect) two rupees (direct).
Do you teach them (indirect) Hindustani (direct) ?
184. The indirect object is invariably put in the
Dative (i.e. with ' ko '), as :—
I gave him two rupees = nmiii HC usko do rnpai diye.
Do you teach them Hindustani? Ap unko Hindu*
P'irhnte hai
bUjj p'lrhunn ^--to teach (lit. to cause to read).
First of all teach the recruits (their) drill = > *'>i> ** r<lhltJ
runyi-iiton ko qmrn'id sikhtf,n.
185. As will be observed from the above examples the
direct object is generally put in the Nominative form.
But should the direct object be a pronoun denoting a
human being it must also be in the dative. In such
cases recourse is had to the Second form of the dative
to avoid the uneuphoneous repetition of ' ko,' as: —
The Colonel gave him to me = /v-ir/m// .sw/, ne »/<£•» \nujh>'
liyfi.i
!!I:M\KK. — Ordinarily the direct object follows the iii'li
but when l>oth of them are in the dative the order is
rsed and the precedini: one always denotes the direct, object.
CTION.— Care should be taken not to confuse the ordinary
ve with the dative of interest, which U followed
l»v ke waste,' as : —
t me (for me) a cup of* te& = hamare wa*t< <k [.fi/nla <-hn
la,o.
Make me (for me) a pair of2 boots — hamare wa*tc, ek joffi hut
7,o.
186. Most of the verbs have, however, a single object
and the following rules seem to govern the use of 'ko'
. it:
If the object is a pronoun denoting a human being
it mu*f be put in one or the other form of the dative, a
1 ' Dedonft ' is the intensive form of ' dena' to give.
* Nouns d- nnhor. «|iiantity,etc . ore oxpresxod without ' of.'
22
170
Bring him here = nsko (or, use) i/ahftn la,o.
Whom did you see there ? = fww ne kisko (or, kise)
dekha thd f
(ii) If the object is a noun denoting a human being it
is generally (not invariably) put in the Dative, as :—
Call nw bearer = hamare bahre ko bula,o.
Did you bring up the recruits ? = tum ne un rangruton ko
pesh kiya tha ?
REMARK. — The addition of ' ko ' in such cases requires that
the object should be definite. Should the object be very in-
definite, or should it be intended to treat it indifferently the
' ko ' is omitted, as : —
We saw some men of the enemy — ham ne dushman ke kuchh
adml dekhe.
Bring (any) five coolies at once = pahch quli jalctt la,o.
(Hi) If the object is an irrational creature or a lifeless
thing it is generally put in the Nominative form, as :—
Bring the horse this way = ghora idhar la,o.
I bought the horse = main ne wuh ghora feharid ! liya.
Who has broken this lamp ? = yih lamp kisne lord hai ?
REMARK. — : Ko ' is, however, occasionally added to irrational
creatures and lifeless things, as well, to give them the idea of
conspicuous importance or marked definiteness, as : —
The Colonel saw the (particular) horses = Karnail Sahib ne un
gjioroh ko dekha.
Why did you tear the (so important a) letter = turn ne us chitthi
ko kyoh phara ?
187. Occasionally 'ko' is added merely to avoid ambi
guity, as : -
When a tiger sees an elephant = jab sher hathi ko dekhta hai.
Omit the 'ko ' and ' hathi ' (elephant) might be mistaken
for the subject.
Some verbs mu*t have 'ko' after their object, they can
not do without it, as :—
Kharidlena ' is the intensive form of kharidna, to buy.
171
Why did you threaten my servant ?= tum ne hamare
ko kyon partly a ?
'->f;5 durftna = to threaten, or to try to threaten.
188 In case of several nouns occurring as objects the
1 ko ', if it must be added, is added to the last only, as :—
Call all the boys and the girls = sab larkuA attr larklon
(Or, l.'irke lurkiun) ko bitla.o.
REMARK. — If the nouns are coupled without 'aur', as in
ase of ' larke larkion ' bracketted above, the first noun takes
>blique singular form. It must, however, be noted that
coupling together is permissible in the case of such nouns
only as can go in pairs on account of their affinity, etc.
VOCABULARY.
Native desi ^*d-> To prepare, to get ready (tr.)
Washerman dhobi ^^ | tayydr karna by;U3
Glass (looking glass or'pane j T<> ch*se> *> Pursue (*»)
of glass) shtsha
Glass (drinking) gilds
Collected jama'
To collect jama' karna
pichhd karnd
Fish (f.) machhll
Last time pichhll daf'a
To save, to defend bachdnd
Poor
Tailor
gbarib
darzl
succour (f.) )
Gladly, voluntarily khushl se
Advice, counsel (f.) saldh
To be collected jama' hand jt
IJJ& C*^ Help, assistance, \
Tin- whole circumstance «o6 reinforcement, ,- madad
hdl
Pony
To suffer loss (tr.) nuqsdn
•itjtfind (Jl^jl^La^i
At least Jtam -kam J *7 ,<
az y
At tin- most ziyddah se
ziyddah *Jbj 4^ 8Jbj
Uuuv To push dhakelnd
172
To recognise pahchanna
Pistol pistaul
To frighten dardnd
Companion, comrade sdthi
^L
Game, stake bdzl "^jb
Adversity, catastrophe
musibat
Disloyal namak hardm [
Desperately jan tor kar
Woollen (adj.) urii
Cotton (adj.) sutl
Carpet (woollen) qalin
Carpet (cotton) darl
At dawn tarke
Early in the morning (subah) \
sawere ^-jlf" ( f^° )
Garden bdgh " £^>
To pluck (fruit, etc.) tornd
Feigning ignorance anjdn
bankar y^.b ^tsol
Shop (f.) dukdn ^4
Life (f.) jan* ^
Duster (c.) jhdran &;!•*?*
To dust, to sweep jhdrnd
Handkerchief rumal
Promotion taraqql
1. (ko) taraqql
dend
To promote
2. (kl) taraqql
karnd(^)
Khaki Ichdkl
Letter khafj.
Mile mil
All, whole tamdm ^U3
What various kyd kyd
«• *•
Water-carrier, ) bahishti
Bhisti. )
Dooly bearer kahdr
Dooly, stretcher, j
palanquin. I '
Deer (m.) hiran
Spy jdsus
Unworthy ndld.iq &*J^
To have been (to a place)
(se) hodnd Ul yb ( ^_ ^
Police (f.) pwZis
, 1. kahln
Anywhere ] 2. fcm ^'agra
J^
1 Literally ' false to one's salt,' used of servants only.
2 « Jan '=life (vitality, not ' lifetime ').
173
EXERCISE 19.
1. What did you explain to him ? 2. We put on (our)
uniforms and went off to the parade. 3. Who broke this
glass ? 4. He collected a big force preparatory to (for)
attack. 5. Why did you not tell me the truth ? 6. They
suffered a heavy loss. 7. Who saved you from such a
catastrophe ? 8. Why did you beat the poor old man ?
'.). The Police chased them for (up to) three miles. 10. We
caught ten fish last time. 1 1. Who gave you this advice ?
12. Who showed him the road to (of) the village ? 13. He
has asked for 3 months' leave. 14. I have bought a nice
pony. 15. Have you put out the lamp? 16. Why have
you not lighted the fire ? 1 7. The spy may have seen him.
18. If you had asked for leave one week earlier (before =
'pahle'), I should have gladly given (it) to you (Second
Form). 19. If you had asked for help I should have sent
at least one Company. 20. If you had reminded me this
morning I should have asked the Adjutant about it.
- 1 . I had told them before your arrival. 22. Did you
rview (meet) him yesterday ? 23. They fought des-
perately. 24. Who has taken away my bicycle ? 25. Our
ships arrived there at dawn. 26. How many recruits have
you brought ? 27. I shouted for help. 28. The bearer and
the orderly both beat him. 29 He and I, both of us,
he remaining troops. 30. His elder brother
threatened me with a pistol. 31. The stretcher bearers
took up the dooly and off they went to the hospital.
Having gone into the shop we bought some dusters
and handkerchiefs. 33. How did you climb up the wall ?
E\ a).
^ ,XJ <L ;*,- (1) »+~ ^} ,XJ L. J* (1)
/ aU ^
174
(12) -
(14) -SWUfi-^f (13)
J ^L ^ (15) - tfyb L^l l
. Uo^ ted* <*+> (16) - Lc> *i u
L. (18) -S
(20) -LU/ ^^,
jjUt (21)
^ /) (22) -
(23)
(25) - ^ 2/^
(27)
(19)
^1 (24)
(28)
-Jb <->j~^ vnr*
2- ^o.U) JjJ^ (6)
(8) -b^ y UT 0^ . j> (7) -b
^ uij 2. ^ (9) - Wl ^USJ
^ (10)
*i (5)
y! (17)
Gyt
V (26)
175
(32)
(34)
(36)
V (33)
(35) -<
(37)
Miscellaneous Colloquial Sentences.
\V<- shall go on route march
to-morrow.
n was your regiment
raised ?
\Vlien did you last go on
leave ?
much leave does he
want ?
it will you do with one
month ?
week is enough, I think.
on remember ?
I do not remember
exactly.
Do you know the way to the
railway station ?
t take my bicycle, go on
foot.
Do you want employment ?
Let me see your chits
What pay will you take ?
\ ou agree ?
I lioar that then- i illness
1 he city.
par
kal ham ' raut march '
jd,enge.
tumhdrl paltan kab khan
hu.l thl?
turn pichhli da fa kab chhutfl
par gaye the ?
kitnl chhulll mangtd I
ek mahind kyd karoge ?
hamare khaydl men ek hafta
kafi hogd.
turn ko (or, dpko) yad hai ?
nahln, hamko (or, mujhko)
thik yad nahln.
tumko steshan kdrdstama'lum
hai?
hamdrd bd,isikal mat '•
paidal jd,o.
naukrl karoge ?
chitthidh dikhdto.
kyd falab (or, tankhiwh) loge -
tumko mannir hai ?
ham ne sund hai ki shahr
men blmdrl hai
176
Tell the men that the city is
out of bounds for a fort-
night
How many men shall I send
there, Sir?
One N.C.O. and four men.
Go and bring a parcel of
mine from the station.
You are young and strong.
Why do you not enlist ?
The pay is decent and rations
free.
What is the price of this
carpet ?
Give me
chief.
sipdhwri ko hukm sunddo ki
do hafte ke waste shahr
men jdnd band hai.
huzur, wahdn kitne ddinl
bhejun ?
ek uhdeddr aur char sipdhl
jdkar hamdrd ek par sal
steshanse le-d,o.
turn jawdn aur mazbut ho.
bhartl Tcyon nahin Jiote.
tanfehwah achchhl hai aur
1 rdshan ' muft hai
is qdlln ki qlmat kya hai ?
a clean handker- (hamko] ek sdf rumal do.
Lesson XVIII.
Tenses.
189. In this lesson we propose to summarise the various
tenses for the reader's convenience : —
PRINCIPAL TENSES.
(a) Intransitive Verb.
Infinitive, bolna (to speak) Root. bol.
Present Participle, boltd (speaking). Past Participle.
bold (spoken).
The Agent, bolnewdld (speaker, etc.) Conjunctive Part
bolkar, or bolke (having spoken).
Adverbial Participle or phrase, boltehi (immediately on
speaking).
(i) Imperative.
Boloy speak (common form).
177
Bollye, be pleased to speak (Respectful or polite form).
Boliyega (or, boli,ega), you will be pleased to speak
(Future Polite Imp.).
Boliyo (or, boll,o), speak or make a practice of speaking
in future (Future Advisory Imperative).
Bolna, speak, will you ? or speak later on (Present
Polite or Future Imperative).
Bol, speak (thou).
,(«*) Present Subjunctive.
(If) I should speak, I may (or might) speak, etc.
Singular. Plural.
/. Main bolun. ham bolen.
II. Tu bole. turn bolo.
III. Wuh bole. wuh bolen.
No change on account of gender.
(Hi) Future.
I shall speak, etc.
M. F. M. F.
/. Mainbolunga(gi). hambolenge (g\).
II. Tu bol'ga (gl). turn bologe (gl).
III. Wuh bolega (gl). wuh boleiige (gl).
(iv) Past Conditional or Optative.
If (or, would that) I had spoken, eto.
First Form.
M. F. M. F.
/. Main bolta (I). ham bolte(in).
If. Tu bolta (%). turn bolie (in).
Ill Wuh bolta (I) wuhbolte(m).
23
178
Second Form.
M. F. M. F.
/. Main bola hota (boli ham bole hole (boll hotin).
hoti).
II. Tu bola hota (boll turn bole hole (boli hotin).
hoti).
III. Wuh bola hota (boll wuh bole hote (boll hotin).
hoti).
(v) Present (Indicative).
Frequentative or Continuous.
1 speak or am speaking, etc.
M. F. M. F.
/. Main bolta (1) huh. ham bolte (I) hain.
II. Tu bolta (i) hai. turn bolte (I) ho.
III. Wuh bolta (I) hai. wuh bolte (I) hain.
Continuous (exclusively).
I am speaking (but not I speak) etc.
M. F. M. F.
/. Main bol raha (I) huh. hambolrahe (I) hain.
II. Tu bol raha (I) hai. turn bol rahe (I) ho.
III. Wuh bol raha (1) hai. wuh bol rahe (i) hain.
(vi) Imperfect (Past).
Frequentative and Continuous.
I used to speak or I was speaking, etc.
M. F. M. F.
/. Main bolta tha (boltl thl). ham bolte the (boltl thin)
II. Tu bolta tha (boltl thl). turn bolte the (boltl thin).
III. Wuh bolta tha (boltl thl). wuh bolte the (boltl thin).
179
Continuous (exclusively).
I was speaking (but not I used to speak) etc.
M. F. M. F.
I. Mainbolraha tha (rahl thl). ham bol rahe the (rahl thin).
II. Tii bol raha tha (rahi thl). turn bol rahe the (rahl thin).
III. Wuh bol raha tha (rahl thl). wuh bol rahe the (rahl thin) .
(tnV) Preterite or Simple Past.
I spoke, etc.
M. F. M. F.
/. Main bola (I). ham bole (In).
II. Ta bola (?). turn bole (In).
III. Wuh bola (I). wuh bole (in).
(viii) Perfect.
I have spoken, etc.
M. F. M. F.
/. Mainbola (I) hun. ham bole (I) hain.
II. Tu bola (?) hai. turn bole (I) ho.
III. Wuh bola (1) hai. wuh bole (I) hain.
(ix) Pluperfect.
I had spoken, etc.
M. F. M. F.
/. Main bola tha (boll thl) ham bole the (boli thin).
II . Tii bola tha (boli thl). turn bole the (boll thin).
III. Wuh bola tha (boli thl). wuh bole the (boll thin) .
ADDITIONAL TENSES.
(x) Present Continuous Subjunctive.
(If) I am (or, may be) speaking, etc.
M. F. M. F.
/ Main bolta (1) hun. ham bolte (I) hoh.
II. Tu bolta (I) ho. turn bolte (I) ho.
If I. Wuh bolta (i) ho. wuh bolte (1) hoh.
180
NOTE. — ' bolraha (e,I) ' can be optionally substituted for
'bolta (e,I).'
(xi) Past Continuous Subjunctive.
(If) I had been speaking, etc.
M. F. M. F.
/. Mainboltdhotd (boltl hoti). hambolte hote (boltl hotin).
II. Tu boltd hotd (boltl hoti). tumbolte hole (boltl hotin).
III. Wuh boltd hotd (boltl hoti). wuhbolte hote (boltl hotin).
NOTE. — 'bolraha (e,i) ' can be optionally substituted for
' bolta (e;l) '.
(xii) Perfect Subjunctive.
(If) I have (or, may have) spoken, etc.
M. F. M. F.
/. Main bold (I) hun. ham bole (») hon.
II. Tu bold (?) ho. turn bole (I) ho.
III. Wuhbold (I) ho. wuh bole (1) hon.
(xiii) Imperfect Future.
I shall be speaking, etc.
M. F. M. F.
/. Mainboltd hungd (boltl ham boltc honge (boltl hongl).
hungi).
II. Tu bolta hogd (b >ltl turn bolte hoge (boltl hogl).
hogl).
III. Wuh bolld hogd (boltl wuh bolte honge (boltl hongl).
hogl).
NOTE. — ' bolraha (e,I) ' can be optionally substituted for
' bolta (e,I).'
(xiv) Perfect Future.
shall
I may have spoken, etc.
must
M. F. M. F.
/. Main bold hungd (boll ham bole honge (boli hongi).
(hungi).
181
M. F. M. F.
//. Tu bold hoga (boll turn bole hoge (bolt hogl).
hogl).
Ill . Wuh bola hoga (boli wuh bole honge (bolt hongl)
hogl).
NOTE. — First person, plural (we) has no feminine declension
throughout except in the Punjab.
(b) Transitive Verb.
The conjugation of a transitive verb is exactly like that
of the intransitive given above except in the following
tenses in which f ne ' is used :—
Kahna, to say.
(t) Preterite.
I said, etc
/ . Main ne kaha. ham ne kaha.
II Tu, ne kaha. turn ne kaha.
III. Us ne kaha unhon ne kaha.
(ii) Perfect.
1 have said, etc.
/ Main ne kaha hai. ham ne kaha liai.
//. T:i ne kaha hai. turn ne kaha hai.
III. Us ne kaha hai. unhon ne kaha hai.
(Hi) Pluperfect.
I had said, etc.
/ Main ne kaha tha. ham ne kaha thd.
I r . Tu ne kaha < turn ne kaha tha.
1 1 f. Us ne kaha tha. unhon ne kaha thd.
182
(iv) Past Conditional (Second Form).
If (or, would that) I had spoken, etc.
/. Mainnekahd hota. ham ne kaha hold.
II Tu „ „ „ turn „
HI- Us „ „ „ unhon „
(v) Perfect Subjunctive.
(If) I have (or, may have) said, etc.
/. Main ne kaha ho. ham ne kaha ho.
II- Tu „ „ „ turn „ „ „
III- Us ,, ,, ,, unhon ,, „ „
(vi) Perfect Future.
shall
I may have said, etc.
must
/. Main ne kaha hogd. ham ne kaha hogd.
II. Tu „ „ „ turn ,,
///. Us „ ,, „ unhon ,,
NOTE. — Since no object is mentioned in the above paradigms
the verb is independent and is, therefore, put in the Third
Person, Masculine, Singular. But if the object is expressed
without ' ko ' after it. the verb, of course, agrees with it.
(Vide 173(0).
190. We take this opportunity to give below the conju-
gation of ' hona ' (to be, etc.) ' which is extensively used : -
Infinitive, hona, to be, to be done, to take place, etc.
Root, ho. Present Part., hota (being). Past Part., hu,d
(been). The Agent, honewdld (be-er, or about to be, etc ).
Conj. Part., hokar or, hoke (having been). Adverbial Parti-
ciple, hote hi (immediately on being, happening, etc.).
' Hona = to be, to lapse, to take place, to happen, to accrue, to
, to be done, etc.
183
Principal Tenses,
(i) Imperative. Be, etc.
ffo — be (you or thou).
Hitjiye (or hujite) = be pleased to be (Respectful or polite
form).
Hujlyr-ga (or huji,ega) = you will be pleased to be (Future
Polite Imp.).
Hujiyo (or hHjl,o) = be or make a practice of being in
future (Future Advisory Imp.).
Hond = be, will you ? or be later on (Present Polite or
Future Imp.).
(ii) Present Subjunctive.
I may or might be, etc.
/. Main hun. ham hon.
II. Tu ho. turn ho.
III. Wuh ho. wuh hon.
No distinction of gender.
(m) Future.
I shall be, etc.
M. F. M. F.
/. Mainhungd(gl). ham honge (gl).
II. Tu hoga (gl). turn hoge (gl).
III. Wuh hoga (gl). wuh honge (gl).
(iv) Past Conditional or Optative.
If (or would that) I had been, etc.
First Form.
M. F. M. F.
/. Main hota (i). ham hole (in).
//. Tn hold (i). turn hole (r
///. Wuh hold (i). wuh hole (in).
184
Second Form.
M. F. M. F.
/. Main hu,ahota (huj hotl). ham huye hote (huyi hotih).
II. Tu „ „ ( „ „ ). turn „ „ ( „
///. Wuh,, „ ( „ „ ). wuh „ „ ( „
(v) Present (Indicative).
I am, etc.
First Form. (Accomplished Fact).
/. Main hun. ham hain.
II. Tu hai. turn ho.
III. Wuh hai. wuh hain.
No distinction of gender.
Second Form. (Frequentative and Continuous).
I am (usually), etc.
M. F. M. F.
/. Main hota (1) hun. ham hote (I) hain.
II. Tu ,, (t) hai. turn „ (I) ho.
III. Wuh „ (i) hai. wuh „ (i) hain.
Third Form. Continuous (exclusively).
M F. M. F.
/. Main ho raha '(i) hun. ham ho rahe (i) hain.
II. Tu „ „ (t) hai. turn „ „ (i) ho.
III. Wuh ,, ,, (1) hai. wuh ,, ,, (I) hain.
(vi) Imperfect (Past).
I used to be, etc.
First Form. (Frequentative and Continuous).
M. F. M. F.
7. Main hotatha (hotl thi). ham hote the (hotl thin).
II. Tu „ „ ( „ „ ). turn „ „ ( ,, „ ).
///. Wuh ,, ( „ „ ). wuh „ „ ( „ „ ).
185
Second Form. (Continuous exclusively).
M. F. M. F.
/. Main ho raha tha (rahi thi). ham ho rahe the (rahl thin).
II Tu „ „ „ ( „ ,,). turn f| „ ,, ( „ „ ).
///. Wuh,, „ „ ( „ „). wuh „ „ „ ( „ „ ).
(vii) Preterite or Simple Past.
First Form. (Accomplished fact as it already existed).
M. F. M. F.
/. Main tha (I). ham the (thin).
II Tu Jf (t). turn „ ( „ ).
///. Wuh „ (i). wuh „ ( „ ).
Second Form. (I became, etc.).
M. F. M. F.
I. Maihhu,a (i). ham hu,e (in).
II. Tu. ,, (1). turn „ (in).
III. wuh ,, (»). wuh ,, (in).
(viii) Perfect.
I have been, etc.
M. F. M. F.
/ Main huya (i) huh. ham hute (i) hath.
II. Tu „ (t) hai. turn „ (i) ho.
Ill \\'uh „ (t) hai. wuh „ (t) hain.
(ix) Pluperfect.
I had been, etc.
M. F M. F.
/ M'liii h~itatha (hu,i thi). ham hu,e the (huj thin).
H T „ ( „ „ ). turn „ „ ( ,, ,, ).
/// Wuh „ ,, ( „ ,, ). wuh ,, „ ( ,, ,, ).
24
186
Additional Tenses.
(x) Imperfect Continuous Subjunctive.
(If) I am usually, etc.
M F. M. F.
/. Main hota (I) hitn. ham hote (f ) hon.
II Tu „ (?) ho. turn „ (I) ho.
III. Wuh „ (I) ho. wuh ,, (i) hon.
NOTE. — « ho raha (e,I) ' can be optionally substituted for
' hota (e,I).'
(xi) Past Continuous Subjunctive.
(If) I had been usually, etc.
M. F. M. F.
/. Main hota hota (hoti hotl). ham hote hote (hotl hotln).
11 Tii » » ( » „ )• turn „ „ ( „ „ ).
///. Wuh „ „ ( „ „ ). wuh „ „ ( „ „ ).
NOTE. — ' ho raha (e,l) ' can be optionally substituted for
the first 'hota (e,l).'
(xii) Perfect Subjunctive.
(If) I have (or, may have) been, etc.
M. F. M F.
/. Main huta (i) huh. ham hu,e (i)hon.
II. Tu „ (l) ho. turn „ (l) ho.
III. Wuh „ (I) ho. wuh „ (i) hon.
(xiii) Imperfect Future.
I shall be in the course of being made, etc.
M. F. M. F.
7. Main hota hunga (hotl ham hotehonge (hotlhongi).
hungi).
II. Tu hota hoga (hotl turn hote hoge (hotl hogl).
hogl).
III. Wuh hota hoga (hotl wuh hote honge (hotl hongl).
hogl).
187
NOTE. — ' ho raha (e,I) ' can be optionally substituted for
' hota (e,I).'
(xiv) Perfect Future.
shall
I may have been, etc.
must
M. F. M. F.
/. Main hu,d hungd (hu,i ham hu,e honge (hu}i hongi).
hnhgi}.
If. Tit hu<d hogd (M,i hogl). turn hu,e hoge (hu,i hogl).
III. Wuh hu,d hogd (hu,i wuh hu,e Jionge (hu,i hohgl).
hog]).
REMARK. — Like all other verbs this verb has, throughout, no
feminine declension for the First Person, Plural (we) except in
the Punjab.
Distinction between ' hai' and l hotd hai.1
191. As will be observed from the above paradigm
' hona ' has three forms for the Present (Indicative). The
difference between the second and the third, which it shares
with other verbs, has already been explained in Lesson XVI,
Section 169 to 171. Here we intend to explain the dis-
tinction between the first and the second forms.
192. The first form * hai ' etc. denotes what is or exists
as an accomplished fact in the present, as : —
I There is (only) one God = khudd ek hai.
I am a Hindu = main Hindu huh.
H<- is very intelligent = wuh bahut hoshydr hai.
You are a fool = turn bewaquf ho.
The second form ' hota hai ' etc. (as in the case of other
verbs— vide Sec. 147) expresses : —
(i) What takes place repeatedly.
>) A general truth.
What i- taking place now (rare).
188
E.g.:-
There is a parade every day = har roz pred (or pret) hotl
hai.
Inhabitants of cold countries are (as a rule) of fair
colour = sard mulkon ke rahnewdle gore hole ham.
KT/ gora (noun) = a British private or an N.C.O.
(adj.) = of fair colour.
What is happening there ?= wahan kya hota hai (or better
' ho raha hai ' ) ?
Difference in ' tha,' etc., ' hota tha,' etc., and ' hufi,' etc.
193. ' Tha ' expresses what was an accomplished fact
already in existence at a particular point of time in the
past, as :—
He was in the office at 2 o'clock = wuh do baje daftar men
tha.
They were all spies = wuh sab jasus the.
* Hota tha ' etc. expresses —
(»") What used or continued to be, or took place re-
peatedly (without any reference to its end).
(ii) What was actually taking place and was hence
yet incomplete.
E.g.:-
(i) Rajputs were (used to be) very brave people =
raj put bare bahadur log hofe the.
Whenever he was (fell) \\\ = jab kabhi wuh bimar hota tha.
(ii) The battle was (still) in progress = larayl hoti thi
(or, ho rahl thl).
' Hu,a ' etc. express what took place or happened to be at
a particular time, as :—
There was (took place) a fierce battle the next day
dusre din sa^ht lara,i hu,i.
189
If the idea of change from one state into another is
conspicuous or the finality or completion is emphasized
' hogaya ' etc. (Preterite of * hojana '=to become, to be
over) is used, as : —
Doctor gave him a medicine and he was instantly all
right = ddktdr sahib ne usko ko,% dawd di aur wuh
fauran achchhd hogaya.
CAUTION. — Since all the above phases of meaning can be
expressed by 'was' in English, one has to be very careful
Nvhile translating it into Hindustani according to its sense.
194. When 'to be* implies duration, it is often option-
ally expressed by rahna ' (to remain, to continue to be),
as: —
This place is always dirty = yih jaga har waqt madl hoti
hai (or, rahtl hai).
He was ill (for) three days = wuh tin din blmdr thd (or,
rahd).
He was always cheerful = wuh har waqt khush hold thd
(or, rahtd thd).
VOCABULARY.
Counter-attack jawdbl hamla Pantaloon (f.) patlun
*^^ S^*:'-^ Trousers pdjdma
At last dkhir ^J Short8 jangla
On the alert chaukas ^^ puttie (or bandage)
Snow, ice (f.) barf uJ^
( 1. wdskat Towel taulla (or tauliya) 4>y
^tcoat (f.) j vJ^XJ^ Doubt
(z.kurti^tf I Narrow, tight
Shirt (with cuffs and collar) Pocket (f.) jeb «
qaml^(L) ^^i Quinine (f.) kunln
Shirt (without cuffs and Native vety. asstt. salotri
collar) k urtd 6+
190
Wine (f.)
shardb «-?!,_£
Letter-paper chifthl llkhne kd
/ 1. soda IJy*.
kdghaz J^K K ^XJ ^«I*.
Soda water
\ 2. kharl pdnl
Pen qalam JL»
^jr^ i_rM
Breakfast, ]
Brackish
kharl ^/^
T) \ (f •) hdztrl -~&(A.
-t 1 1 ooiice* i *•
C 1 . lamned ±*±J
Lunch, tiffin ^'/an wiJ
Lemonade
1 2. mlthd pdnl
Supper rat (or sham) kdkhdnd
Spoon
Sweet
Bitter karwd
( chamcha
\chamach
Fork (also, thorn, spur,
hook) kdntd lx>£
Table-knife chhurl
Pen-knife chdqu
[. plet (c.)
J. rakdbl (f.)
Cow go;,e
Unconscious be-hosh
All of a sudden
Plate
Remaining bdql
That, so that ki
Shop (f.) dukdn
Scissors qainchl
Ink siydhl
Ink-pot (f.) dawdt
Pencil (f.) pinsal
Blotting paper sidhl chus
' ( JJL or ) cul^
Toast tos
Coal koila
Without ke baghair
Tennis fainas
Rank, degree } class
Bat
Jb
Polo polo
Football fut bdl
Hockey hxkl
Cricket kirkat
. bait
. balld
Racket raikat
Too (much), }
Extremely, j
To the right of kl dd}in taraf
To the left of kl bd,ln taraf
Result natija
In those days un dinoh
.7
Free
azdd
191
EXERCISE 20.
1. India is a very big country. 2. He is not my enemy,
he is my friend. 3. There is a big forest to the right of
It. 4. There is a strict order of the General about it.
5. They are not men, they are beasts. 6. We are resi-
dents of Shahpur. 7. Is he the bazar Chaudhri '? 8. (As a
rule) the people of Madras are of black color. 9. The
result of such actions is (generally) bad. 10. Cow's milk
is sweet. 11. This is generally the case in every country.
1 -. There is a daily parade in this regiment. 13. Perhaps
somebody's marriage is taking place. 1 4. It was a bitter
medicine. 15. The wind was very strong (tez). 16. What
was the time ? 17. There were green fields on both sides
of the road. 18. The food arrangement was excellent.
19. There was ample shooting (to be had) in this forest
before. 20. Every individual was free in those days.
21. Whenever there was a doubt. 22. Whenever there
was a holiday. 23. It was raining. 24. There was a big
attack on Tuesday.4 25. He fell down from the horso and
was lame.
EXERCISE 20 (a).
(1)
b (3)
v L*« )r*~ (5) •
J (7) - A. v|/^ ^^r? ^
. <*_ ^}j± t+^ f~\ U>ouxL ^;'^Jb (8)
(10) - A. ^ vj^j Vr AJ ~ JUi. ^.;Ljt (9)
> * Chaudhri' = headman of market, of quarter of a town, or of a
class.
* For days of the week aee Appendix A.
192
**o L^J (13)
^ (14)
^ (15) -
jU (16) - ^xa
i U/ *i (17)
(18)
Miscellaneous Colloquial Sentences.
Is the breakfast ready ?
I shall dine out to-night.
Look here, this plate is very
dirty.
Come here, wipe these boots,
Give us a small peg of
whisky.
Bring (me) a clean towel.
hazirl tayyar hai ?
aj sham ko ham bahir khana
kha,ehge.
idhar dekho} yih rakabi bahut
maill hai.
idhar a,o, yih but saf karo.
ek chhota peg wiski do (or,
wiski kd ek chhota peg do}.
saf taulya ldto.
193
I shall come after I have had
my tiffin.
There is polo for 3 days in a
week.
Whom do you want to see ?
Mr. Fraser has gone to play
football.
There is a hockey match to-
day.
What time will the play
begin ?
I come back from tennis at
5-30.
Where is my pencil, bearer ?
Has the washerman brought
my white pantaloons
back :
('.ring one bottle of soda and
one of lemonade.
Where did you put (it) ?
•k in the upper pocket.
Is this butter fresh ?
Take this chit to the shop
and bring me five pounds
of sugar.
Give (us) a knife and fork
It was in my waist-coat
pocket this morning.
ham tifan khakar a,enge.
haft? men tin dafa polo hoti
hai.
kis se milna chahte ho ?
Fraser Sahib fut-bal khelne '
gaye hain.
aj hakl ka maich hai.
khel kis waqt shunC hoga ?
main sarhe panch baje fainas
se wapis atahun.
Bahra, hamari pinsal kahah
hai?
dhobl hamari safed patlun
wapis laya hai ?
ek botal soda (or khari panl)
aur ek botal lamned (or
mltha panl) la,o.
turn ne kahan rakha ?
upar wall jeb men dekho.
yih makkhan taza hai ?
yih chichi dukan par leja,o
aur panch paund chlnl la,o.
chhuri a kanta do.
aj subah hamari waskal k\
jeb men tha.
Ko * or ' ke wSate ' understood after ' khelne.'
delated or allied nouns are often coupled without 4 atir* (and).
25
194
What time do you take turn Us waqt khdnd khateho ?
your food ?
Why did you go without my turn hamdre hukm ke baghair
orders ? kyon gaye.
Why did (you) not do (it) ? kyon nahm kiyd ?
What time does the mail dak kis waqt (or kitne baje)
close ? band hoti hai ?
Take the dog to the native kutte ko salotrl ke pas leja,o.
Vet.
Have you seen the sea ? turn ne samundar dekhd hai ?
I don'fc like this color. ham ko yih rang pasand
nahm.
Lesson XIX.
Respectful Pronoun yf ap.
195. ' Ap ' (your Honor etc.) is much more polite than
4 turn ' (you), for which it is extensively used. It should
not be used for an inferior. Its use is very appro-
priate in the case of superiors, equals and other persons
of distinction. Though very commonly used for the
second person and only occasionally for the third person
it is treated as belonging to the Third Person, Plural,
as :—
Where will you go, Sir ? = ap kahan jdenge ?
Jamadar Sahib, you might go ahead and arrange for the
camp = JarrCadar Sahib, ap age jd-kar kampu ke
waste bandobast karen.
You were reading the newspaper then, Sir = dp us waqt
afehbdr parh rahe the.
NOTE. — Occasionally in Delhi it is given the declension of the
second person, plural, but this is not so elegant. For instance
they say ' ap kahan Ja,oge' instead of ' ap kahan ja,enge' for
' where will you go, Sir.'
195
196. 'Ap' is occasionally used for the Third Person
Singular (he or she) as well, as : —
Ap likhte hain ki = he writes that — .
<y I, * dp ' as a Reflexive Pronoun.
197. When ' ap ' is used as reflexive pronoun it
implies no politeness, as :—
Main dp (or l^hud) jdfihgd = I myself will go.
Karnail Sahib dp (or %hud) dekhenge = The Colonel
himself will see (it).
Ham ne dp (or 1&hud) dekhd thd = I saw it myself.
Wuh apne dp ko bard ddml samajhtd hai = he thinks
himself (to be) a big man.
Main usko apne sdth legayd = I took him with myself.
Apne pas rakho = keep (it) with yourself.
The use, of U$l apnd (one's own).
198 What requires special notice among the reflexive
forms of ' ap ' is its genitive ' apna, ' which must be
used in the following- cases :—
(?) When a possessive pronoun (my, our, thy, your,
bis her, its or one's) (1) refers to the subject of a
sentence and (2) is governed by a noun not in the
HnmiHfttirr ct,se it is expressed by 'apna,' as:—
I am going to my bungalow = Main apne bangle ko jdtd
Mn.
We were going to our village = ham apne gdto ko jdnte
the (or jd rahe the).
He has not done his (own) work ==» us ne apnd kdm
nahln kiyd.
Why do you not do your work ? = turn apnd kdm kyoh
nahin karte ?
They told tin -ir (own) Colonel = unhon ne apne Karnail
Qdhib «e kdhd.
196
Take off (your) clothes = kapre utdro.
Do your work (or, mind your business) = apnd kdm
karo.
NOTE. — ' Thy and your,' in the Imperative of the Second
Person, are not translated unless it is emphasised in the sense
of ' thy, or your own and no one else's '.
(n) If both the conditions laid down above are not
fulfilled or the possessive pronoun does not refer to all
the subjects, if more than one, the possessive pronoun
must be expressed ordinarily, as :—
I and my brother enlisted together = main aur merd
bhd,i ikafthe bhartl hii,e.
You and your friend are both young men = turn aur
tumhdrd dost demon jawdn ddmi ho.
He went to his (someone else's) house = wuh uske ghar
men giyd.
Why do they ask for their (others') pay ? = wuh unkl
talab kyon mdngte haiii ?
The Colonel and I went to my house = Karnail Sahib
aur main mere ghar gaye.
In the first two examples the nouns ' brother ' and
' friend ' are in the Nominative, whilst in the last two
instances the pronouns ' his ' and ( their ' do not refer to the
subject, i.e., they do not stand for one and the same
person or persons. In the last example the ' house ' does
not belong to both the subjects.
199. 'Apna' is also used for a possessive pronoun
when the latter stands in a similar relation to the object,
as : — .
Who told you to put your life in danger ? = tumko apm
jdn khatre men ddlne ke waste kisne kahd thd ?
khatra = danger.
197
200. * Apna ' is also used for emphasis in declarations
of ownership etc., as : —
It is not Government property, it is my own = yih
sarkdrl nahin hai, hamdrd apnd hai.
Where is your own rifle ?= tumhdrl apni raft kahdn hai ?
201. 'Apna apna ' signifies each his own, as :—
We went to our respective houses (each to his own
house) = ham apne apne ghar chalc gaye.
Take your respective squads to your respective places -
apnn apnn ' *quad ' ajml apni jaga lejd,o.
202. It occasionally officiates for the Genitive of the
first person, as : —
Apnd- kdm to bilkul dean hai = As for my work, it is
quite easy.
Apni 'ddat men yih ddfehil nahin «=* This does not enter
into my habits (i.e., this is not one of my habits).
(jy& J^lj ( ^JJL* ) (men) ddfehil hond = to enter.
203. ' Apne ' (' apnoh,' oblique plural) is sometimes
used in the sense of ' one's own kith and kin,' or ' near
relations,' as : —
Apne 'umuman waqt par kdm die hain = One's own kith
and kin are generally helpful in time of need.
Apnan men ab wuh mahabbat nahin rahl = Relations
have no longer their former affections.
L«f»c 'umuman = generally.
Ul J6 kdm and = to be useful, to fall in a noble strife, as
in action.
ju H-uh = that, former, yonder.
mahabbat = affection, love.
VOCABULARY.
itention irdda soK)
ie(c.) fd'fin
Cholera hai^a
Lantern teftam
198
To investigate daryaft karnd
Cash naqd
Treasu ry kh azdna
Heart, mind dil
To wrap lapejna
To become angry (ko) ghussa
ana (
Shade saya
Present maujiid
Mechanic, mason mistri
England
1. walayat
2. Inglistdn^
Bridge pul
Promise iqrdr
Way, footpath (f.) rah
Unworthy nald,iq
On foot paidal
Conversation
/I.
, I
talk (f.) 2.
To know
To fulfil (as>|
promise),
To make up ;
(as a defi-
ciency) . /
janna
pura karna
! To fetch ledna Ul
j To apply lagdnd
\ False excuse, pretence
bahdna &
\ Short time thorl der^
Long time bahut der ^
How long (time) kitrii der
So long (time) itni der
peshgl
District
Tehsil (f.) tahsll
Police station thdna
Lucky Itfiush qismat
^ " — ..*.-***.< 1^° *^>-
On account of (overwhelmed
with) ke mare <=_ ^U £_
An advance
(money etc.
In advance.
Inspection maldhaza
To count ginnd
Bush jhdrl ^jU^-
Cobbler, shoemaker mochi
Stamp,
Ticket.
Envelope lifdfa
Borrowed manga hu,d
EXERCISE 21.
1. Are you (feeling) all right to-day, Subedar Sahib ?
2. Good morning Jamadar Sahib, when did you return
199
from leave ? 3. You might come again to-morrow,
Tehsildar Sahib. 4. What time will you come to-morrow,
Munshiji ? 5. I myself shall find out about this. 6. You
go yourself. 7. He gave himself out as a Captain.
8. Look in front of you. 9. Why did you not keep it
with you ? 10. Why do you not do your work ? 11. He
is asking for his pay. 12. I was sitting in my tent.
13. Show me your account. 14. He and his neighbour
are both influential men. 15. I and my brother, both of
us, were going to the village. 16. This is my own watch.
17. These are their own tents. 18. Stand up in your
respective places. 19. Tell us your names. 20. They are
cleaning their respective rifles.
EXERCISE 21 (a).
yl (2) S^Vy^ L^Jy^ y! (1)
Ki) tf c^ibo ^ vxU jJ <% y! jx*
y I jl\ (5) -^ XJI;I
(7) - S ^ 2.UT v^J^ liUf ^ r^ y! (6)
(9) -S^l^jIzdT (8) -S
LtT (12) .S
(16) • £_^r< J*>, ^ ^-^^ J*i/ (15)
(17)
i ' Ap ' can be used here as well, but for the sake of variety ' khud '
better.
* ' Khud ' must be used here to avoid the clumsy repetition of
200
, t«3 Uf^ Jfc yl j» (18) - U3 bj KjJ
- LJ ^ ^L ^H^ JU ^
(20) - Uf ^M ,L^>tjU
(22) - jUsuJ ^L, 2^1 / V-^M, J ^ (21)
(23) .
(24)
A. Uit; a^ y £_ t^ ^1 ^ (25) -U3 V ^
1. L^^U JjJ^ (27) - ^V ^ J^^ ^-1 |^ (26)
^y* (28) - bj < '
(29) - k^ M
^ J^x, ;^1 ^ (30)
(32) - !;U ^^) i. ^ ^V rf ^ f3 (31)
i (33) - ^ ^j u^-J ^^ ay^ er^;r^^ ^'
- ? A. J/ ^l^y U 1;^ (34) - A. ILI I,U A. ^ lyt
*t (35)
Miscellaneous Colloquial Sentences.
First wrap it in a paper and pahle kisi kaghaz men lapefo,
then tie it up with a string. aur phir tage ke sath
bandhdo.
Take this cheque to the yih chik khazane 'men leja,o
Treasury and cash it. aur rupaya le,ao.
Take guard with you, if agar zarurat ho to gard sath
necessary. leja,o.
1 '.Hi' is an emphatic particle. The sentence means 'he tried hard
to restrain himself but anger did overcome him.'
201
Bring half in notes and half
hard cash.
Do you know where he lives ?
He is an unworthy indivi-
dual.
How many men were present
at the roll-call ?
But why did you go without
permission ?
Do you agree to what I say ?
It is good for both of you.
Plague is a very bad disease.
This is merely a pretence.
He said so in my presence.
Does he ask for an advance ?
It is absolutely useless.
Hide yourself behind the
bush.
Put an anna stamp on this
envelope.
Take this lantern with you.
Have you counted them ?
Has the bootmaker brought
my boots ?
Where have you been for
such a long time ?
H<>\v long will you take to
come back ?
26
ddhe no\ aur ddhe naqd
rupai ld,o.
tumko ma'lum hai wuh kahdn
rahtd hai?
wuh bard ndld,iq adml hai.
gintl par kitne adml hd%ir
the?
lekin turn ijdzat ke baghair
kyon chale gaye ?
jokuchh main kahtd hun,
manzur hai ?
yih turn donon ke waste
achchhd hai.
ta'un ban fehardb blmari hai.
yih sirf bahana hai.
us ne yih mere samne kaha
tha.
wuh kuchh pesJigi mangta
hai?
yih bilkul befa,ida hai.
jha?l ke plchhe chhipja,o.
is lifdfe par ek dne kd
lagd,o.
yih Idltain (apne) sdth lejd,o.
turn ne unko gind hai ?
mochi hamdrd but Idyd hai ?
turn itni der kahdn the /
kitnl der men wdpis dyogef
202
I shall come back after a ham thori der ke ba'd wdpis
little while. a,enge.
When will you fulfil your turn kab apnd iqrdr purd
promise ? karoge ?
I shall go home (to England) ham agle mahme waldyat
next month. ja,enge.
I said to myself. main ne apne dil men kahd.
It appears from your talk. tumhari guftgii se ma'lum
hotd hai.
He became pale through dar ke mare uskd rang zard
fear. Tiogayd.
Lesson XX.
Degrees of Comparison.
204. Hindustani possesses no distinct forms of adjec-
tives to denote degrees of comparison.— The simple form
(which, if declinable, of course agrees with its noun or
pronoun) is used throughout.
205 Comparative Degree. When comparison is made
between two things (or two lots) conceived separately,
the thing with which comparison is made is put in the
ablative case, i.e. it is followed by ' se ', ' which among
other things means ' than ' or ' compared with ' as well,
e-R :-
This is bigger than that = yih us se bard hai.
This tree is higher than that building = yih darakht us
makdn se unchd hai.
Our guns are bigger than those of the enemy = hamari
topen dushman kl topon se bari hain.
Iron is harder than wood = lohd lakri se saT^ht hotd hai.
1 ' Se ' in this sense can always be replaced by ' ki nisbat ' (than , in
relation to).
203
206. The Persian word 'bihtar' (yv) which coincides
with English ' better ' is often used to express compari-
son, as :—
This is better than that = yih us se bihtar hai.
You (had) better go just now =tum bihtar abhi ja,o.
207. Superlative Degree. When one thing is picked
out as surpassing all others in a quality, the word 'sab/
all (or some synonym of it) is thrown in as well, as: —
This is the best of all = yih sab se achchha hai.
He is the cleverest of all the recruits = wuh sab rangruton
se hoshyar hai.
208. When the thing compared and the thing with
which comparison is made are conceived as one whole,
' men ' (in, among) or f men se ' (from in, from among) can
be optionally used. But the use of 'se' is more general,
as: —
Which is the better of the two ? = in donon men (or, men
se) kaunsa achchha hai ?
London is the biggest of all the cities in the world =
London dunya ke sab shahroh men (or men se) bar a hai.
209. Occasionally * ziadah ' (more) is put in to emphasise
the presence of a quality in a thing to a greater degree
than in the other, as:—
This boy is clever than that boy (i.e., both of them are
clever enough but one happens to be cleverer) = yih
larka us larke se ziadah hoshyar hai.
210. 'Aur' (more) and 'aurbh!' (still more) are
occasionally met with, expressing comparison, but in such
cases the object with which comparison is made appears
only once in the preceding clause, as :—
Murree is a cool place, but Simla is cooler, and Gulmarg
cooler still = Murree thandl jaga hai, lekin Simla our
'i hai aur Gulmarg aur bhl (handa.
204
211. An extra superlative degree is formed by repeating
an adjective with ' se ' put between, as : —
Achchhe se achchha adml = the best possible man.
j&ubsurat se khubsurat *aurat = a,n unsurpassably beauti-
ful woman.
unche se unchd pahar = the highest mountain existing.
A'la se a' la fehayal = the highest conceivable thought.
212. ' Too' of excess is expressed by (i) bahut, (ii) bahut
At, or (Hi) had se ziadah (more than the limit).
He is too tall = wuh bahut (or bahut hi or had se ziadah)
lamba hai.
How to express ' To ' of motion.
213. From Hindustani point of view 'To' used with
verbs of motion from one place to another is rather a
vague word. It might mean any situation. It is, there-
fore, expressed in Hindustani by some such postposition
as would express according to the intention of the
speaker the position of the mover in reference to the
object to which motion is made after the action denoted
by the verb is performed. For instance, if you go to a
person you are near him when you have gone to him ;
similarly, if you go to a room you are in it provided you
enter it. The following examples, we hope, will make
it clearer : —
I went to him (near him) = main uske l pas gaya.
I went to him (in his house) =main uske hah* gaya.
I took him to the Adjtt. =main usko ajitan sahib ke pas
(or ke samne) legaya.
When we came to (in front of) the mosque = jab ham
masjid ke samne ate.
I went to (on) the bridge = main pul par gaya.
l ' Ke pas' in this sense is not interchangeable with « ke nazdik,' or
'keqarib.'
* Or « us ke ghar.'
205
I went to (at) the station = main steshan par gaya.
I went to (near or under) the tree = main darafcht ke
pas (or ke niche) gaya.
I went to (in) my room = main apne kamre men gaya.
I went to Karachi (as far as Karachi) = main Karachi tak
gaya tha.
When our cavalry came to the village = jab hamara risala
ga,on ke pas aya.
214. If the object is not reached ' ki taraf ' is used, as :—
We went to (in the direction of) the church -ham girje
215. If the position of the mover in relation to the
object to which motion is made is indeterminate ' ko '
is used; it may imply reaching the object or not, as: —
We are going to the church - ham girje ko jate hain.
216. No postposition need be mentioned if the motion
is made towards a recognised locality,1 as :—
He has gone to Lahore = wuh ' Lahore ' gaya hai.
Why did you not come to office yesterday = turn kal
daftar kyoh nahlh aye the ?
•2 \ 6a. ' From ' of motion from a person is expressed
by * ke pas se ' or ' ki taraf * se.' Similarly ' by ' of motion
is expressed by ' ke pas se,' as :—
I have come from him =main us ke pas se aya hiin.
We passed by a mosque = ham ek masjid ke pas se guzre.
The use of ' ko' with adverbs of time.
217. 'Ko' is very commonly used with adverbs of
time, as :
In the morning subah ko ^ ~>~0
At midday dopahar ko y* srt>*
I n the evening sham ko ^ ^
I Such as countries, cities, important or familiar institutions etc.
Also means • on behalf of
206
At midnight ddhi rat ko
During the day din ko
During the night rat ko
In a month's time ek mahine ko l
On Sunday (etc.) itwdr ko
The Infinitive of Purpose.
218. When the English Infinitive denotes purpose it
is followed in Hindustani by ' ke waste,' ' ke ll,e ' or ' ko ' ;
the first two are much more common and elegant, as :—
I have written him to come here = main ne usko yahdn
dne ke waste likhd hai.
I have sent for a money order form to send him the
money = hamne usko rupaya bhejne ke waste ' money
order form ' mangdyd hai.
NOTE — ' Ko ' added to an infinitive occasionally expresses
< about to,' as : —
Gdri jane ko (or, janewali] hai = the train is about to go.
219. The ' ko ' or ' ke waste ' etc. is generally understood
after an infinitive of purpose if it occurs in immediate
or close proximity with the finite verb and the two verbs
refer to a common subject (or object which is not so
common), as : —
Sahib tamis khelne gaye hain = Sahib has gone to play
tennis.
Kitdb chhapne dl hai, shayad do mahine tak tayydr
hoja,egi=(I) have given the book to be printed; it
might be ready in two months' time.
VOCABULARY.
Camp bed safrl chdrpd,i
Bright (color) shofch ~ f^*
Quick (to act) phurtlld &£,+
Hasty jaldbdz jb jkU
Extremely nihdyat e^oC^
Not so common.
207
Also, even
List
Proud
Shady
bhi l
fahrist
maghrur
sdyaddr
Guard (watching) pahra \^y
To keep guard (on or at)
(par) pahra dend UuJ 1^ (^)
Climate (f.) db-o-hawd
Less, deficient, short kam
Quilt ra?a,i
Kingdom (f .) saltanat
Necessary,
Wanted.
darkar
Hard work (labour) mihnat
Collar (dogs) patfd
Britain Bartanla
Powerful tdqatwar
Grape angur
Base, low-born badzdt d>l
Soft-hearted narm-dil Jj
Chain zanjir
Timid darpok
Avaricious lalchl
Tyrant zdlim " J&
In the house or business
premises of ke hdn u(& £_
Sailor, boatman malldh --iu
Ball (playing)
1. tnachis
Examination t
To pass (an exam.) pas karna
uy^
Every week Aa/^c ke hafte
A match
(to light)
Missing gum
Rest dram
To rest dram karna
Forbidden mana'
To forbid mana' karna
1. chhuW (f.)
Holiday
2. till
3. diyasala,i
Sudden, suddenly achdnak
Auction
To auction
ntTaw
nt7am
.
To investigate darydft karna
Breath (blown) phunk
%
Board takhla
To explode, to be torn, to
crack phat jdnd (*(** vJU^j
Leather chamra )^
Canvas
kirmich
Signal post signal
Alwsya follows the word it emphasises. It never begins a sentence.
208
EXERCISE 22.
1. He is more lazy than I. 2. I am weaker than you.
3. This sword is sharper than yours. 4. He is a greater
fool than his comrade. 5. We were less tired than the
boatmen. 6. This color is brighter than that of your
turban. 7. He is the quickest (to work). 8. You are the
strongest of the lot. 9. You are much better to-day than
yesterday. 10. Our men are braver than the Germans.
11. He is my youngest son. 12. This room is a bit bigger
than the back one. 13. Delhi is a bigger city than Lahore.
14. Jhelum is nearer to Pindi than Lahore. 15. Himalayas
are the highest mountains in the world. 16. Paris is the
most beautiful city in the world. 17. Montgomery is a hot
place no doubt but Multan is hotter and Jacobabad hotter
still. 18. The worst imaginable man would not do a thing
like that. 19. Even the most idiotic individual knows this.
20. He is too proud. 21. Did he come to you ? 22. Why
did you not come to me ? 23. When the train came to
the signal post. 24. The farmer led us to the well. 25. Our
guide brought us to a shady tree. 26. They were going to
the jungle. 27. He has gone to the office. 28. They have
gone to the butts. 29. Our Colonel has gone home on leave.
30. When did your regiment go to Mesopotamia ? 31. He
will go with me as far as the next stage. 32. We arrived
there in the evening. , 33. He keeps guard at my bungalow
during the night. 34. T have asked the Jamadar to make
the necessary arrangements. 35. He has gone to play
football.
EXERCISE 22 (a).
K *-y* ^\ (1)
lyt oT ^J *LJt (3) - <*- J^< £L Ljltf ^J cJJS *> (2)
209
UJ ^
\y ^^j <±.
^ (9) -
(4)
L
J| (7)
fcJt t^J
(10)
(11)
(12) , - A.
(13)
«yl 3^ (14)
r"
(15)
^'05 j^l v<_jr?u()i ^t v^o
b! cx- «, Ji (20) -U
(18)
, (23)
(25)
*->-* (28)
(30) -
. ^ (31) -
e/1^1*1 (32) -
(5)
(6)
(8)
(19)
(29)
27
210
(35)
» (33) - A. *;j
L jAJfc *j (34)
Miscellaneous Colloquial Sentences.
How many men were Hlne acfom zafehmi hu,e ?
wounded ?
How many are missing ?
We rested there for a while.
We attacked them with
bayonets.
The enemy's right flank
appears to be weak.
It is forbidden to go there.
Don't fire as yet.
It is a very responsible job.
Pub a sentry near the well.
Post pickets all round the
city.
Patrol's business is to recon-
noitre.
It appears from the reports
of patrols that the enemy
has retired.
We made a sudden attack.
We halted there for three
days.
kitne gum hain ?
ham ne thori der wahdn drdm
kiya.
ham ne un par sanglnon se
hamla kiya
dushman ka day an flaink (or
bdzu) kamzor ma'lum hota
hai.
wahdn jdnd mana* hai.
abhi fair mat karo.
yih bar i zimmawdri kd kdm
hai.
kuen par ek santrl lagddo. '
shahr ki chdron taraf pahra
lagddo ]
patrol kd kdm dekhbhdl karnd
hai.
patrolon ki rapoton se ma'lum
hota hai ki dushman pichhe
hatgaye hain.
ham ne achdnak hamla kiyd.
ham ne tin din wahdn halt
kiyd.
1 * Lagado ' intensive form of ' lag§,o'.
211
The Adjutant wants to see
you.
Send this for auction.
I will take this camp bed
with me.
Where is your bill ?
Look here, there is no air in
the tube.
Pump it at once.
Put this sign-board at the
gate.
F ike care, it will explode,
not leather, it is canvas.
It is a holiday to-morrow.
I shall go out shooting.
Show me the list.
His character is very bad.
\Vln-re is the
and chain ?
dog's collar
sahib turn se milna
chdhte hain.
yih nilam ke waste bhejdo.1
ham yih safrl charpaj (apne)
sath lejayehge.
tumhara bil kahah hai ?
dekho tiyiib men hawa (or
phiink) nahln hai.
fauran phrtnk bhar do.
yih " sain bord ' (or nam ka
takhta] phalak par lagado *
khabardar, phaijaega.
yih chamra nahlh hai kirmich
hai.
kal chhuMi (or tatil) hai.
ham shikar ko ja,ehge.
hamko fahrist d\khato.
uskd chalchalan bahut kharab
hai.
kutte ka patfa aur zanjir
kahah hai ?
Lesson XXI.
' To have '.
220. Hindustani has no verb exactly equalling 'to
have ' and therefore resorts to certain devices to express
the idea of possession etc. embodied in it. The verb
chiefly used instead of it is ' hona ' (to be etc.) and, to
fit it in, the sentence is recast with the aid of certain
postpositions as explained below.
I'.hejdo * is the intensive form of * bhejo'.
' Lagffdo' intensive form of ' laga.o'.
212
(i) If the object denotes saleable property or a servant
or a lower subordinate 'ke pas' (in the possession or
keeping of— ) is used after the subject, as:-
HOW much land have you ? = temfcare yfls kitnlzamln hai ?
He has two medals = uske pas do tamghe hain.
They had lot of money = ?<// ke pus bahut rapaya tha.
1 had a very nice bicycle = mere pas ek bahut 'umda ' bicycle '
tha.
They have five servants = unke pas (or, uvke han) p&hch
naukar hain.
I have only one pupil at present = mere pas is ivaqt sirf
ek shfigird hai.
Every officer has one orderly = sab afsaron ke pas ek ! ek
ardall hai.
(H) If the object is a relation or part of the body
the subject is put in the genitive, as : —
I have tWO brothers = were do bha,l hain.
A raja had seven wives = ek raja kl* sat rani,an thin.
He has a broken &ri<i = uska bazu tuta hu,a hai*
He has white hair = uske bal * safed hain.
She has blue eyes = uskl ankhen nllihain.
(Hi) If the object is an abstract noun the subject is
put in the dative, as :—
What complaint have you ? = tumko kya shika'yat hai ?
He has fever to-day = usko oj bukhar hai.
I have no news Of this = mujhfco iskz kuchh khabar nahln.
(iv) If the object is a smaller thing forming part of or
contained in the subject, some such postposition is used
as would express the position of the object in relation
to the subject, as :—
1 Numerals are repeated to give the idea of distribution per head, a
piece, etc. (Vide Sec. 377).
2 Or, ' ke ' which is contraction of ' ke han ' ( = in the house of).
3 Lit. ' his arm is broken.'
* ' Bal ' is plural if more than one hair is meant.
213
This room has three chairs = is kamre men tin chaukidh
hain (lit. In this room three chairs are).
Have you any identifiction mark on your body ?=
tumhdre badan par ko,i %has nishdn hai ?
Our friend had many virtues = hamare dost men bahut
khubidn thin
221. The above rules are by no means exhaustive.
In fact, after all that has been said above, the chief factor
which seems to determine the nature of the postposition
is the relationship subsisting between the subject and the
object. It is, therefore, throughout, a case of transforma-
tion of sentences, and there are always more than one
way in which an idea can be expressed. E.g :—
He has two sons = (i) uske do bete hain.
(ii) uske han do bete hain.
He has five horses = (i) uske pas pdnch ghore hain.
(ii} uske han pdiich ghore hain.
Each regiment has a C.O. = har ek paltan kd (or, men
or, par or, ke upar) ek kamdn afsar hotd hai.
A tiger has great strength = sher men bari faqat hotl hai.
How much service have you ? = tumhari naukri kitni hai ?
He had a big load on his back = uskl pith par ek bhdrt
bojh thd.
This room has three doors = is kamre ke tin danvaze
hain.
He has many friends = uske kaj dost hain.
'2. It is occasionally expressed by * rakhna ' (to keep
etc.) but there is always an implication of pride in it, as :—
He has great wealth (to feel proud of) = wuh bahvt
daniil rakhtd hai.
He has seven brothers (to depend upon) = louh sat bhatl
rakhtd hai.
214
REMARKS.— • To have " in reference to eatables and drink
ables is expressed by ' khana ' and ' pina ' respectively, as : —
To have (or. take) food = khana khdnd.
To have (or, take) te&
To belong.
223. This verb also has no equivalent in Hindustani
and is likewise expressed by 'hona (to be etc.). In
this case the ofrjwt is put in the genitive, as :—
Does this belong to you ? (= is this yours ?) = yih tumhdrd
hai ?
No, it does not belong to me(=no, it is not mine)
=nahm) yih merd nahin hai.
Whom does this belong to? (= whose is it?.)=yih
kitka. hai ?
What regiment do you belong to? ( = Of or, in what
regiment are you ? ) = turn kis paltan ke (or better,
men) ho ?
To get, to obtain etc.
224. ' MilnaV which among its several meanings
signifies 4to meet ' or 'to come across' is very commonly
used to express 'to get,' 'to find,' 'to obtain' etc., in
which case it takes its subject in the dative and agrees
with its object, as : -
You will get a reward = lumko in'dm milegd (lit. to you
reward will meet, or come).
What pay does he get (or receive) ?= usko kyd talab miltl
hai ?
Did you get my letter or not ? = dpko merl chichi milt
yd nahin ?
Have you found my silk handkerchief ? —hamdrd reshml
rumdl mild hai ?
NOTE. — The last example dispenses with ' you ' which does
not seem very necessary.
CAUTION. — ' Milna ' in this sense is never used in the Impera-
tive when it is generally replaced by ' la,o ' (bring) or ' lea,o '
(fetch), e.g. :—
215
Get me a peg of whisky and soda = (kamdre icaste) ek peg
1 whisky ' aur * soda ' la,o.
Get me a box of cigarettes from the shop = (hamare waste}
dukan se sigret ka dabba lea,o.
M. <lai tamghd
Pupil shagird
Broken (adj.)
hit, a
lyt L
Virtue, good quality
1. taqat (f.)
Strength
2. zor (m.)
Silk (m ) resham
Silken
VOCABULARY.
Mustard rat ^.K
To kill mdrdalna UJIJ.U
Kind, sort (f.) qism +~s
qism qism ka
'r5
All sorts of
Heir, next of kin wari*
Helper, assistant madadgar
Countless
reshmi
bexhumar
Arm (body) bazu
Snake sanp
Keenness, fondness shauq
Proof sabut «^yy
Yard (36 inches) gaz /
Extra allowance bhatta (^
To go to sleep sojand
Cigar (c.) churl
Deer hiran
Horn (c.) sing
Authority, power il^htiydr \
On credit udhdr
Stick (walking) Marl ^^ Water tap nalka
Journey, travelling safar Fat (f ) charbl
;*~< Mixed milahu,d
Expenses kharch ^^ lyt
veiling expenses safar Rate (sale) nirfch
kharch ~ ^ JL Rice chanwal*
Or, in the Punjabi • takraa ' which is readily understood in
ihi regiments.
* With or without ., '
216
Potato alii yl
Flour off* tf
CJeanliness,
Sanitation. ""1 *
EXERCISE 23.
1. Tf you have a spare blanket give it to him. 2 Tf we
had had sufficient troops and guns in the beginning we
should not have retreated from Mons. 3. Have you a
sketch of this place ? 4. We have numerous guns and
aeroplanes now. 5. Have you some good cigars ? 6. I
had a very nice pony 7. Have you any relation of yours
in this regiment ? 8. How many witnesses have you ?
9. Deers have slender legs and long horns. 10. I have
headache. 11. He has plague. 12 He has great powers.
13. This bungalow has very little furniture in it.
14. Whom does this stick belong to ? 15. This does not
belong to me, it belongs to another Sahib 16. At last he
got the permission to go. 17. What orders ' have you
received? 18. You will not get leave this year. 19. What
pay do you get (whilst) on leave ? 20. What rations do
you get ? 21. When he accompanies me on tour he gets
travelling expenses. 22. How much gram does this horse
get every day ? 23. Get me a dozen of * silk handkerchiefs
from the bazar. 24. Get me a small peg of* whisky.
25. Get me a box of* soap this evening.
EXERCISE 23(o).
(2) - jT Ljp v «jG ^ ±,\ /) (1)
*; y ^yb Ji; ^L £~\/\ (3) - 4- Jy
M,) (5) - ^^j^ ^ f* r* \j^> ^xj (4)
(7)
1 ' Hukm ' (order) is generally used in the singular only.
a Dont translate ' of.'
217
(12) - S 4. ^;Ux> Uf yU (11) -
-^ ,u^^ s^t yUl (13) - ^
V 1^1' ^-Xi/ *d (15) - S 4. ^ U
u4# *d (16) -^
fe (18) - <*- ^ ^
(10)
^1
(14)
(17)
(19)
(22) -SA.UU U^>Ui y^i; . (21)
^ (23) - -
(25)
1 (26) -
Ut (28) - S iU ^
(27)
(30) -
Miscellaneous Colloquial Sentences.
a mistake some- kahlh ghalti hai.
Tli ere is
where.
^ 'ii charge double prices.
I will not buy on credit.
I shall pay you cash.
I .-hall turn you out of the
lines.
Don't wash clothes here.
The water will get dirty.
turn dugnl qlmat lete ho.
ham udhdr nahln lenge.
ham naqd qlmat denge.
ham tumko lain se
denge.1
yahah kapre mat dho.
pant maila hoja.ega.
nikal
' Intensive of ' nikWna'.
28
21S
Take water from the tap.
This ghee is very bad.
There is lot of fat mixed in
it.
What is the bazar rate ?
Do you get rice too ?
How much potatoes do you
get daily ?
This flour is not according
to sample
How many times a week do
you get ' dal' ?
The Doctor will come to see
the lines to-morrow morn-
ing.
Call the orderly sergeant
Call the sanitary sergeant.
You are responsible for the
cleanliness of the lines.
We do not get mustard.
nalke se pdnl lo.
yih ghl bahut fchhardb hai.
is men bahut charbi mill hu,l
hai.
bazar kd nirfeh kyd hai ?
turn ko chdnwal bhi milte
hain ?
turn ko har roz kitne dlu
milte hain ?
yih at\a, namune ke mutdbiq
nahih hai.
hafte men kitm dafa dal
miltl hai ?
kal subah daktar sahib lain
dekhne a,enge.
ardali hawaldar (or dewdle)
ko buld,o.
safd,i wale ' hawaldar ko
buldyo.
lain ki safari ke turn zimma-
wdr ho.
hamko ra,i nahm miltl.
Lesson XXII.
Conditional Sentences.
225. A conditional sentence has two clauses :—
(i) The * if ' clause or protasis.
(ii) The main clause or apodosis.
' Suffix ' wala ' = connected with.
219
226. Conditions are of two kinds : —
(i) Realised.
(ii) Unrealised.
(t) Realised Conditions.
227. The realised conditions are mere facts put hypo-
thetically. They belong either to the past or the present.
Future is beyond their scope, e.g. : —
Agar ivuh jata hai to tumko kya ? = (i) if he goes (as you
say he does) what is it to you ? (ii) if he is going (as
you say he is) what is it to you ?
Agar wuh mar raha hai to marnedo ' = if he is dying (as
you say he is) , let him die.
Agar wuh chalagaya hai (o fehair = if he has gone (as you
say or as 1 believe he has) then well and good.
Agar wuh chalagaya tha to turn ne hamko kyon na
batlaya = if he went (as you say he did) why did you
not tell me t
(ii) Unrealised Conditions.
228. The unrealised conditions are sub-divided under
two heads : —
(a) Past conditions or wishes which might have been
realised but were not realised. Under this head are also
included such Future conditions or wishes as are presup-
d to be impracticable. These are expressed by the
t Conditional or Optative Tense (vide Sec. 139 to 145).
To help the reader's memory we give below a few additional
examples :—
Form.
gar wuh fatah p&te to bari kharabl hoti = if they had
gained victory it would have been very bad.
i ' MarnedenS.' to let die.
220
Kdshki wuh bimdr na hold = would that he had not
fallen ill.
Second Form.
Agar us ne 'agl se kdm liyd hota to nuqsdn na uthatd (or,
uthdyd hold) = if he had used his senses he would
not have suffered the loss.
Kashki turn ne 'aql se kdm liyd hold = would that you
had used your senses.
(6) Present or Future conditions or wishes These can
only belong to the Present or the Future. Past is beyond
their scope. Consequently the main clause in such cases
can be in the (i) Present, (ii) Present Subjunctive,
(Hi) Imperative, or (iv) Future.
The easiest and safest rule to express such conditions
is that if the main clause is in the (i) Present, (ii) Present
Subjunctive, or (Hi) Imperative, put the k if ' clause in
the Present Subjunctive. But should the main clause be
in the Future put the ' if ' clause in the Future as well or
in the Preterite at option, e.g. : —
It is all right, if he comes (should come) = agar wuh d,e to
achchhd hai.
If he enquires, I keep quiet = agar wuh piichhe to main
chup rahtd huh.
If he goes, I might go as well = agar wuh jd,e to shay ad
main bhl chalaja,un.
If he comes, let me know = agar wuh d,e hamko bdtld,o.
If he comes, I shall go = agar wuh d,egd (or dyd) to main
jd.ungd.
Often, however, the rendering of such conditions de
pends on considerations of time, doubt (or sometimes
lack of wish) and hope. In case of doubt (or lack
of wish) Present Subjunctive is used irrespective of the
221
time limit, whilst in cases of simple futurity and hope
Future or Preterite are used, as :—
If he comes (now or later on — doubtful or undesired)
= agar ivuh d,e.
If he comes (later on, or I hope or believe he will) = agar
x-iih degd (or aya).
XOTE. — The Preterite merely presumes realisation of a con-
dition.
The chief Conditional Conjunctions are :—
(t) 'agar' or 'jo,' if. ('Jo' is older and not so
elegant),
(u) * jab,' when.
(Hi) 'jab tak,' as long as.
Of these * agar ' and 'jo' are exclusively conditional.
But 4 jab' (when) and ' jab tak ' (as long as) are conditional
as well as temporal. Referring to Past and Present facts
they are temporal but when they refer to Future supposi-
tions (immediate or absolute) they are treated as condi-
tional, e.g. :—
agar (or jo) wuh a,e = if he comes (exclusively condi-
tional).
Jab wuh aya = when he came.
Jab wuh did hai =whenever he comes.
Ja1) tak main wahdn rahd = whilst I stayed ,
.Temporal),
there. (
Jab tak main yahdn rahtd huh =•• whilst I
stay here.
Jab main a fin =* when I come (should x
oome).
tak ham wahah raheh «= whilst I I (Conditional).
(should) stay there or as long as I I
may stay tli
222
Conditional sentences beginning with ' jab ' and ' jab
tak * follow the same rules as those beginning with ' agar '
with the only exception that the Preterite does not enter
into their construction. The correlative of * jab ' is 4 tab '
or ' to ' whilst that of ' jab tak ' is ' tab tak ' (until then),
e.g. :—
Tell me when he comes = jab wuh dte hamko batld,o.
I shall tell you when he comes = jab wuh a,ega main
tumko batla,unga.
Let him stay there as long as he wants to =(i] (jab tak
chahe usko wahdn rahne do.1 (ii) Jabtak wuh chahe
ivahah rahe.
There will be no trouble whilst he is here = jab tak wuh
yahdn rahegd ko,l takllf nahm hogl.
Until.
230. Hindustani has no word for 'until' and there-
fore resorts to a peculiar device, i.e. as-long-as •+ not
= until.
That is why the verb is made negative when 'jab tak'
is used for English 'until.' E.g. :—
Until he came back ( = as long as he did not come
back) = jab tak wuh wapis na ay a.
Until he comes back (as long as he does not come
back — conditional) = jab tak wuh wapis na a,e.
231. To give a clear conception of the difference
between facts hypothetically put and the unrealised future
conditions we give below a few examples : —
Agar wuh bimar hai to usko haspatdl leja}o = take him
to the hospital if he is actually ill.
Agar wuh bimar ho to usko haspatdl leja,o = should he be
ill take him to the hospital (doubtful).
l * Rahnedena ' = to let stay.
223
Agar wuh ay a hai to usko jdkar buldld,o = if he has
actually come (and is there) go, call and bring him
here.
Also please note : —
Kdshki wuh aid (or ay a hold] = would that he had come.
Kdshki wuh d,e = would that he were to come.
VOCABULARY.
Rumour (f.) afwdh *lyl
Agreement (bond) iqrdrndma
Beyond (outside of) se bdhir
Accused mulzam
To hold or find guilty qusur-
wdr thairdnd Wj>&> fo\
Rioting dahgd fasdd
Debt qarz
Sunk, immersed dubd hu,d
Appeal (against a decision)
apll (f.) JjJ
To appeal (against a decision)
apll knrnd li J JjJ
Enmity dushmanl ^i*£j
Bad name, disgrace badndmi
Good name, credit neknami
Shame (f.) sharm
Disgraceful thing sharm kl
Laughter, joke hansl
Laughing matter hahsl kl
bat ci>L> L <S c>M*ijb
Oath (f.) qasm **~j
Siege, circumference gherd
Ashamed sharmindah 'i JJL* JZ.
Hunger (f.) bhuk
Thirst (f.) piyds
Hungry bhukd
Thirsty pi y dad
Anger ghussa
Pity rahm
Sight (vision) na:ar
Sight (of rifle) sd,it
Round
Butt (of rifle) f 6<
Barrel (of rifle), I
Dram. f Sr
Shoulder /.•////•///'/
Toes (forepart
of foot),
Fingers and panja
thumb,
Paw. Claw.
224
Knee ghutna
Somehow or other kisi na kisi
tarah ^ Jo ^^^ ^ v $
In this way is tarah
In what way kis tarah
For how much (price) kitne
ko / <&
Question sawal J^
To be raised (a siege) uthna
Remedy, medical treatment
>a&i ^
To remedy,
To treat" u, ^ (t
medically. J
State of health siht ^^=n
In operation, in progress,
in vogue jari -;(.
EXERCISE 24.
1. If I had gone to the city I should have seen him.
2. If our army had not advanced the enemy would not
have retired and we should not have won the victory.
3. If they had fought well, they would not have been
defeated. 4. If the siege had not been raised they would
have died of hunger. 5. [f you see the enemy inform us
at once. 6. Should you want more money wire to me.
7. If they go I shall go with them. S. If an answer is
not received by to-morrow evening, I shall wire. 9. If he
refuses to go on active service I shall shoot him. 10. When
you receive the order, communicate it to me without
delay. 11. Don't flinch when you fire. 12. I shall let
you know when he comes. 13. We shall begin it when the
C.O. comes. 14. Wait here until I come back. 15. Don't
fire until I give you the signal. 16. I shall stop here until
he comes back. 17. I shall not promote him until you
recommend him.
EXERCISE 24(a).
(2)
y
l;Ujt
/! (1)
(3)
225
(4) - GiU to
r> /' (6) •
el ^ /l (7) - A.
^/l (8) -
(9)
/i (13) • ^V ;^ ^ y
LSlo L-^. (14) -
^ to v.^^ (15) - UuJUj
-^- (16)
J/
(10) -Ij^«;
ur^ /) (11) - 1
- /' (12)
yt cu;^ ^ ^.
Kil
^ (18) - £
(20) - U
_^. (21)
s v^- (17)
H s^/-^
^. (19)
^a. (23)
to )
> ^ ^^ (24) -
.^ (25)
226
Miscellaneous Colloquial Sentences.
Whence did you hear this
news ?
It is not true ; it is only a
rumour.
Is your Sahib at home ?
Sir, two recruits have deser-
ted last night.
Four prisoners have escaped
from the cells.
Wire to the Police and write
a letter to the Deputy
Commissioner.
Has the deserter been
found ?
Send a guard to fetch him.
Why did you desert ?
You will be court-mar-
tialled.
Have you signed the agree-
ment ?
He apologizes.
It is beyond my power.
I have written to the Head
office.
Announce the order to them.
Do you plead guilty or not
guilty ?
turn ne yih fahabar kahdn se
sum ?
yih sach nahin, sirf aftvdh
hai.
tumhdre sahib bangle par
haiii ?
huziir, kal rat do rangrut
bhaggaye hain.
char qaidl kdnjl haus se
bhaggaye hain.
polls ko tar do aur dipfi
kamishnar sahib ko chifthi
likho.
wuh bhagord (or, mafriir) mild
hai yd nahin.
usko lane ke waste gdrd
bhejdo.
turn kyon bhaggaye the ?
tumhdrd kort marshal hogd.
turn ne iqrdrndma par dast-
fehat kiyd hai ?
ivuh mu'dfl mdngtd hai.
yih hamdre ifehtiydr se bdhir
hai.
ham ne bare daftar ko likhd
hai.
unko hukm sunddo.
tumhdrd kyd jawdb hai turn
ne yih qusur kiyd hai yd
nahin ? (or turn qusurwdr
ho yd nahin ?)
227
I am quite innocent, Sir.
Call the witnesses.
Do you want to bring up
any witnesses for your
defence ?
Whose signature is this ?
Your case will be tried by
jury.
Did you win the case or lose
it?
What is your complaint
after all ?
Improve your conduct.
The Court found the pri-
soner guilty.
He was drunk last night.
There was a big rioting in
the lines yesterday.
II' is head over heels in
debt.
Do you wish to appeal ?
It is the Board's decision.
Did you see it with your
own eyes ?
I shall reduce you to the
ranks.
His evidence appears to be
false.
What enmity is there
him and you ?
hu%ur main bilkul be qusur
huh.
gawdhoh ko buld,o.
turn apne bachdo ke waste
ko,* gawdh pesh karnd
chdhte ho ?
yih kiskd dast^hat hai ?
tumhdrd muqaddama jiorl ke
sdmne pesh hogd.
turn wuh muqaddama jite the
yd hare ?
dkhir tumhdrl shikdyat kyd
hai?
apnd chdlchalan achchhd (or
thik) karo.
'addlat ne mulzam ko qusur-
war thairdyd.
kal rat wuh nashe men thd.
kal lain men bard dangd fasdd
hutd.
wuh qar? men dubd hu,d hai.
turn apll karnd chdhte ho ?
yih kameti kd faisla hai.
apnl dnkhon se dekhd thd ?
ham turn ko torkar sipdhl
bandtdenge.
uskl gawdhl (or shahddat)
jhuti malum hoti hai.
turn men aur us men kyd
dushmani hai ?
228
Tell me truth and nothing sack sack bolo (or batla,o)
but the truth.
It will bring you bad name. is men tumhari badnami
hogi.
The regiment will get a good is men paljan ki neknami
name for it. hogi.
It is a disgraceful thing. yih ban sharm kl bat hai.
It is no laughing matter. yih hansl ki bat nahin.
It is very serious matter. yih bari sakht bat hai.
I shall report you to the C.O. ham kaman afsar sahib ko
tumhari rapot karenge.
Lesson XXIII.
Compound Verbs.
232. Hindustani uses a large number of Compound
Verbs, which are named as follows :—
(i) Nominal. (vii) Acquisitive.
(ii) Intensive. (viii) Desiderative.
(Hi) Potential. (ix) Compulsive.
(iv) Completive. (x) Frequentative or
Habitual.
(v) Inceptive. (xi) Continuative or Pro-
gressive.
(vi) Permissive or (xii) Extra Intensive,
concessive.
The reader need not be alarmed at so long a list of
laboured names. They are, in fact, very simple.
(i) Nominals.
233. This variety consists of a verb, chiefly ^/ ' karna '
(to do etc.) or ^ 'hona' (to be etc.) stuck on to (") a
229
noun, c/o an adjective, or (<•) an adverb or a preposition,
as :—
(a) Added to a noun.
(j^ JUxJuJ isti'amal karna = to use (isti'amal =
use).
( ^ ) (par) hamla karna = to attack (hamla
= attack).
/M~,L\ /&« sath\ .
I / ( - jshadi karna = to marry
(shadl = marriage).
Gyt JU*JLI isti'amal hona = to be used.
j ) (pa/-) ^aw/a hona = to be attacked.
( ^ ) (fci) shadl hona == to be married.
(6) Added to an adjective.
sa f karna = to clean (saf = clean).
kharab karna = to spoil (fcharab =
bad).
ma'lum karna = to find out (ma'lum
= known).
manzwr fcorna = to sanction, to ac-
cept (manzur = sanctioned, ac-
ceptable).
Uyt » _ *Lc saf hona — to be cleaned.
kharab hona = to be spoilt.
ma'/wm ^ona = to be discovered or
known, to seem, to appear, to
transpire.
mangiwr Aona «= to be sanctioned, to be
acceptable.
(c) Added to an adverb or a preposition.
fipar ^ar?ia = to raise above.
' Persian Prepositions as ' posh ' (before), ' zer ' (under), etc., or Hindu-
stani postpositions as • ke sftmne ' (before), • ke n!che ' (under), etc.
230
j niche karna = to lower down.
**
±> pesh karna = to bring up (before a
person).
upar hona = to be raised above,
j nic^e Aona = to be lowered down.
65^ ^ori^ = to be brought up (before
a person).
NOTE. — Those ending in karna ' are obviously transitive
whilst those ending in * hona ' are intransitive.
234. Various other verbs are similarly used, the more
common among1 them being:—
(a) LSuJ dena, to give (transitive) , as : —
( y ) (ko) madad dena = to help, to give
help to (madad (f .) = help).
) (ko) shikast dena = to defeat, to give
defeat to (shikast (i.) = defeat).
( y ) (ko) mar dena = to beat, to give
beating to (mar (f.) = beating).
( y ) (ko) qarz dena = to lend (money), to
give debt to (qarz (m.) = debt).
(b) (JuJ lena, to take (transitive), as : —
UuJ (jejZ qar% Una = to borrow (money)
(qarz (m.) =- debt).
(JuJ ^^JL, sans /end = to breathe (sans (m.) =---
breath) .
UuJ xlu ( ^.b £^ ) (A;e pa5) panah Una =to take refuge
with (panah (f.) shelter, refuge).
(c) (JjU, marna, to beat (transitive), as : —
lijU uyil ( y ) (jfco) /d^ mdrwd = to kick, to give a
kick (lat(t.) = a kick).
UjU j ]j\3 ( y ) (fco) talwar marna = to strike a blow
with sword (talwar (f.) = a sword).
231
(JhU jx^ ( y ) (ko) thappar mdrnd = to slap, to give
a slap, (thappar (m.) = a slap).
(d) U£f lagana, to apply (transitive), as :—
li(0 A^Ut ( y ) (fco) hath lagdnd =- to touch (with
hand) (hath (m.) = hand).
liG u/l ( y ) (ko) ag lagana = to set fire to (ag (f.)
= fire).
) (jfco) tala lagana « to lock (Jata (m.)
— look).
rfer lagana = to delay, to take long
over (der (f.) = delay, space of
time).
zor lagana = to exert strength
(zor (m.) = strength).
o ( ^ ) (fca) pa<a lagana = to trace (pata (m.)
= trace, whereabouts).
(e) (JC^ khana) to suffer (transitive), as:—
shikast khana = to suffer defeat
(shikast (f.) = defeat).
mar khana = to suffer beating
(mar (f.) = beating).
qasm khana = to take an oath
(qasm (f.) oath).
dhoka khana •= to be deceived
(dhoka (m.) deceit).
(/) UJIJ dalna, to put in, to lay, to cast off (transitive),
as : —
GJIJ \j*jS ( jjf £_ ) (ke gird) gherd ddlnd «= to besiege, to
lay siege to (ghera (m.) siege).
(UJj 8^5 dera rfa/na = to encamp (dera (m.)
camp, tent).
fcu/na, to be applied (intransitive), as : —
232
Ufl u-/f (y ) (ko) ag lagna = to catch fire (ag (f.)
= fire).
4J ( y ) (&0) &&£& lagna = to feel hungry
(bhuk (f.) = hunger, appetite).
^ ( y ) (£°) ptya* %wa = to feel thirsty
(piyas (f.) thirst).
&& ^Hr^ ( y ) (ko) choj lagna = to be hurt (cho\
(f.) hurt).
1x0 ;J ( y ) (ko) dar lagna = to feel frightened
(dar (m.) fear).
^ iH ( y ) (^°) ^wr^ /ag'na = to dislike (6wa,
= bad, ill).
UT 5wa, to come (intransitive), as : —
L>I ob ( y ) (A;o) yad ana, to happen to remember
(yad (f.) recollection).
Ul^ki nazar ana = to appear, to come in
sight (nazar (f.) sight).
(jl ...a^ ( y ) (yfco) ra^m awa = to feel compassion
(m^m (m.)pity).
U! &*&£ ( y ) (ko) ghussa ana = to feel angry
(ghussa (m.) anger).
15 1 i-x^ ^lA; dna= to fit (^A^, proper, right).
235. We admit it is sometimes puzzling to use them
but hope that the following remarks would minimise the
reader's difficulty.
(i) Verbs compounded with nouns.
(a) The subjoined noun in such cases appears in the
character of an objective or subjective complement. In
the case of transitive verbs it is in most cases treated as
direct object while in the case of intransitive ones their
grammatical subject, for the purposes of agreement.
233
(6) It is often necessary to connect the subjoined noun
with some other noun or pronoun, in respect of which the
action is done or takes place, by means of various post-
positions. To meet this requirement we have given in
brackets, where necessary, the particular postposition a
verb takes.
Examples :—
We attacked them = ham ne un par hamla kiya.
We were attacked = ham par hamla hu,a.
In both cases the verb agrees with ' hamla ' (attack).
(c) There are, however, a few cases where the subjoined
noun loses its distinctive character as a subject or object.
Who imprisoned you ? = kis ne tumko qaid kiya ?
I happened to remember = mujh ko yad ay a.
[n both these cases ' qaid ' (imprisonment, f .) and ' yad '
< memory, f.) exercise no influence on the verb. The
following verbs compounded with ' dena ' come under this
category : —
dikhdti dena = to be visible, to be seen.
suna,i dena = to be audible, to be heard.
samjhaj, dena = to be intelligible, to be
understood.
''j^ pakraj dena = to allow oneself to be oaught.
(d) A few cases are treated optionally, as :—
I lent him two rupees =» main ne usko do rupai qar%
diya (or diye).
(In case of ' diva,' the verb agrees with * qarz ' whilst
in case of ' diye ' with ' rupai ').
Have you repaired my bicycle ? =
(i) turn ne hamara bdlsikal marammat kiya half
(agrees with ' bicycle ').
turn ne hamare balsikal kl marammat k\ hai?
(agrees with ' marammat '—repair).
30
234
At first I tried (used) the medicine =
(i) pahle main ne yih dawa isti'amal k\ thi
(agrees with * dawa ' — medicine).
(ii) pahle main ne is dawa kd isti'amal kiya thd
(agrees with ' isti'amal ' — use).
(ii) Verbs compounded with an adjective.
(a) If the subjoined adjective does not end in 'a' it
presents no difficulty. But should it be one ending in * a '
the following rules are observed :—
(0 In the case of intransitive verbs the adjective
must agree with its subject, as :—
He was completely cured = wuh bilkul achchhd hogayd.
She was completely cured = wuh bilkul achchhi hogayi.
They (m ) were completely cured = wuh bilkul achchhe
hogaye,
(ii) In the case of transitive verb the subjoined ad-
jective obviously qualifies the object, with which it agrees
if the object is not followed by * ko '. Should the object
be followed by 'ko' the adjective must appear in its
crude form ending in ' a ', as : —
Stop the carriage = (i) gdri kharl karo.
(' Khan ' = standing agrees with ' garl ' = carriage).
(ii) garl ko khara karo.
(The adjective ' khara ' is independent in this case).
(&) In a few cases, however, the subjoined word happens
to be used in Hindustani both as a noun as well as an
adjective, as :—
jama' karna = to collect, to deposit.
(" jama' "= (i) addition — arithmetical ; (ii)
collected).
pasand karna = to choose, to approve of,
(' pasand=(^) liking, approval ; (ii) agreeable).
235
(c) We would invite special attention of the reader to
the construction of verb ' hona ' when compounded with
adjective.
(/) If the adjective denotes a state already in existence
in the present or in the past the auxiliary forms are
used, as : —
It is known (already) = yih ma'lum hai.
It was known (already) = yih ma'lum tha.
(it) If the state came into being at the time spoken of
preterite is used, as :—
It transpired or was (then) discovered or known =
ma'lum hu,a (or, hogaya).
(Hi) If the state is or was taking its course, the present
and imperfect, respectively, are used, as : —
It seems (is being known) = ma'lum Iwta hai.
It seemed (was being known) = ma'lum hota tha.
(Hi) Verbs compounded with an adverb or a postposition.
These present no difficulty. If the governed noun or
pronoun is mentioned the postpositional form is used,
while in its absence the adverbial form -without 'ke '—is
used, as :—
Lower (it) = niche karo.
ke
Put (it) below the knee = ghutne — niche karo.
se
236. A few verbs such as —
^ main main tu tu karna = to bicker,
to indulge in angry wrangling,
hate hate karna «= to lament, to bemoan,
seem to have been formed from pronouns and interject!*
But in reality subjoined words appear in their noun
character, " main main tu tQ " meaning ' bickering ' and
" ha,e ha,e," ' lamentation '.
236
VOCABULARY.
Princess shahzadl
Vengeance badla
To take vengeance (from—
for) (se — kd) badla lend
CJuJ dJjj ( ^ - s*
Honor 'izzat my
To honor (kl) 'izzat karna
To put to shame (ko) shar-
mindah karna
To lessen
ghatdnd
To try (fct) koshish karna
by ^^y (
To salute
To displease (ko) ndrdz karna
Fine
To fine
jurmana
jurmana
\
, \
|
J
par
karna (^ AJU^ ( — )
Kindness mihrbani ^fy«>
To show \ (par) mihrbani
favor to, \ karna
To be kind
to.
Mention
To mention (to — of) (se — kd)
zikar karna
Brass
To complain (of — to) (kl — se)
shikdyat karna
Never kabhl nahln
\
Real truth asl hdl JU.
To straighten sidhd karnd
Leg (f.) tang
Applause (f.) wa
To applaud (person) (ko)
wah wah karna
(par)
To applaud (thing)
wah wah karna
by .1, Hi,
Rest (m.) dram
To rest aram karna Ly
To fall to |
the hand / (ke hath)
of-
( L )
To conquer, to capture (a
place fatah karna Ly Ju
In the open khuli jaga
237
Advice (warning) nasiJiat To aim 1. shist bdndhna
^^*4-^ (lend or lagdnd)
Sea- voyage samundar kd ( U£f or UuJ or) li
safar j** K ^^1^ To stand one's ) jama l rahnd
Promise (m.) iqrdr }j*\ ground. ;
To promise (to-for)^^ Courage hausla
-kd iqrdr karnd To lose courage ^a^to ^arna
Ambush,
Look-out.
Ammunition goli bdrud
Aim (f.) shist
To disperse tittar bittar karnd
To be dispersed tittar bittar
hond
Ascent charhdj
Descent utrd,i
EXERCISE 25.
1. The raja married a beautiful princess. 2. She married
a raja. 3. Have you been married ? 4. Did you mention
it to him ? 5. What do you think ? 6. Is this used for
polishing (cleaning) brass ? 7. Everybody in the army
learnt about it. 8. I have not been married as yet.
!) \Vho spoilt this ? 10. Why did the Adjutant complain
against you? 11. But he will not sanction your leave.
12. It will never be cleaned. 13. The real truth will
never be known. 14. Do you agree ? 15. Lower the
mu/zle of your rifle. 16. Raise up your head a little.
17. Straighten your legs. 18. Put him ahead of all.
19. Bring him up before the Colonel to-morrow. Every
body applauded him. 20. The ship loomed in vi< \\
21. We helped him a lot. 22. I gave him a sound (khub)
l 'Jam!' (adjective), firm established (from • jarnnft' to be eata!>
1, to freeze).
238
beating. 23. Why did you lend him so much money ?
24. We defeated the rebels. 25. Breathe deeply (take long
breath). 26. We rested for a while under the shady trees.
27. I kicked him twice (two kicks). 28. We set fire to
the whole village. 29. Have you locked the box ?
30. You always take very long (over a thing). 31. I
exerted my utmost (whole) strength. 32. Whatever fell
into our hands. 33. He has been hurt on the head. 34. I
am feeling hungry. 35. They are feeling thirsty. 36. We
encamped in the open.
EXERCISE 25 (a).
^ (2) - UjXS Lol jt> y4) *k (1)
(3) -
.fr* L. (&) -A. Uf ;l/l KjiU. &^U c^v* ^LJ (4)
(8) - S yt JLy ;Kil ^ ^ 2«U >, ^ (7)
(9) - ^jJt ^ *>y ^1
u/Vi^S^ (10)
(12) - ^
(13)
- ( ^ or ) Uf *iU^ ^; ^ ^1 i. v-^Uo J^y (14)
(16) - ^ »)- euiu«yu3 ^ ,f^ Lol^ ^/) (15)
l^J^jbl^. (17) -^^y^brv-^^-)^-^
(20) - 5^ Jb.^ y^ Ji (19) -,y L^;J^ (18)
(22) - U?> ^JU K^T (21) - W Zi s*ti *; L. (*>
239
. KJ *i
(26) -^U <L/;
(27)
^ (24)
(25)
j;u
(28)
. ^ (30) -
y^x) (32)
(34)
(29)
(31)
(33)
- (36)
(35)
Gl
Miscellaneous Colloquial Sentences.
Your accoutrement is very
dirty.
We were lying in ambush.
We had not sufficient ammu-
nition.
First take a good aim and
then fire.
The enemy attacked furi-
ously.
But we stood our ground.
Why do you lose heart ?
\\v dispersed them at the
very first attack.
Th<-v were dispersed with
great loss.
It is a very difficult ascent.
tumhara saman bahut maila
hai.
ham ghat men baitfie (or
pare) the.
hamdre pas kdfi goll bartid
nahln tha.
pahle achchhl tarah shist lo
phir fair karo.
dushman ne bare zor ka
hamla kiya.
lekin ham jame rahe.
turn kyon hausla Juirte hof
ham ne pahle hi hamla par
unko tittar-bitlar kardiya.
unka bahut nuqsan hu,a <mr
tittar-bittar hogaye.
yih charhaj bahut mushkil
hai.
240
We experienced great diffi- hamko utraj men barl taklif
culty in the descent. M,f.
Load this on a cart and that yih gdrl par lado aur with
one on a mule. khachchar par.
All the rebels had assembled sab bdghi ga,oh men jama1
in the village. hogaye the.
It is a double-barrelled gun yih banduq do-ndli hai aur
and quite new too. na,i bhi hai.
We surrounded them and ham ne unko gherliyd aur sab
blocked all the approaches raste band kardiye.
to it.
Lesson XXIV.
Compound Verbs (Contd.).
(ii) Intensives.
237 This variety consists of one verb added to the
root of another.
238. If the signification of both the verbs is retained in
its entirety, the root part simply serves as a conjunctive
participle with which it is optionally interchangeable, as:—
W Jb bula land )
* \ = To call and bring.
bula kar lana )
jd baiihnd )
-/ \ -.I - [ = To go and sit.
ja kar bazjhna )
UU, A^J! ujh jdnd )
'
i - *" To Set UP and %°'
ujh kar jana 3
This, however, is not the variety, called Intensive.
REMARK. — There is, however, a shade of difference between*
the prefixed root and the conjunctive participle. In the case
of root tke subsequent action follows immediately, while the
conjunctive participle may denote a pause between the two-
actions.
239. If the latter verb merges its own meaning into
the root so as to give it a greater energy or sense of
241
fin.'Jity, and the two together are susceptible of various
meanings according to the root idea of the latter, the
w'jole compound is called Intensive, "as : —
lilff khdnd — to eat.
^ l^ khdjdnd «=- to eat up.
(J;U mdrnd = to strike.
•'w* mdrddlnd = to strike dead, to kill.
240. Most of the verbs so used are given below with
their various significations as Intensive auxiliaries : —
Verb.
Ordinary
meaning.
Significations as
Intensive auxiliary.
Remarks.
UbJ, <!• ii n
to give
denotes : —
k
(?) doing some-
thing for some
one else,
(it) going away of
the object from
the doer of the
action,
(Hi) posteriority in
time.
LijJ, lend , to take, to \ denotes :—
Generally
receive (i) self-interest,
used with
(u) to manage to
transitive
do a thing,
verbs.
(m) something
coming to the
doer «.f the
action ,
(tv) priority in
time.
li/K5,f/a/fia
to cast off,
<l»>notes force, ve-
t<> put in
hemence, or u«l
denness.
31
242
Verb.
Ordinary
meaning.
Significations as
Intensive auxiliary.
Remarks.
l>la>, jana
to go
denotes sudden-
ness, and com-
pleteness
Generally
lijj, parnd
to be laid,
denotes sudden-
.used with
to fall, to
ness or chance.
intransi-
befall
tive verbs.
ti«*l, uthna
to rise
denotes sudden-
ness.
Uflu,
to sit
denotes : —
With both
fatf&nd
(i) imprudence and
transitive
regret,
and intran-
(ii) force.
sitive verbs.
li^ rakhnd
to put, to
keep
denotes doing some-
thing beforehand
With transi-
tive verbs
to meet a future only
contingency or
requirement.
Q- ^
to leave
denotes to leave a ^With both
chhorna
thing only when it transitive
is done, not before.! I and
(.
! {intransitive
life;, rahnd
verbs.
remain
' sooner or later.'
)
liO, pana
to get
denotes chance.
With tran-
1 sitive verbs
(JjU, mama,
to beat
denotes impru-
dence or force.
j'only.
The above significations are in addition to the sense of
completion and finality of the action denoted by the root
243
and should be determined from the point of view of the
doer of the action.
Examples : —
LSbJ dena to give : —
bant dena = to distribute (to others).
Lj £4X1 likh dena = to write (for some one else).
Uojo J dedena = to give away or completely.
pj^j bhejdena = to send away.
samjhddend = to explain once for all or to
one's satisfaction.
chaldena = to start off.
lend, to take : —
UuJ vJ^Jlj 6an( dewa = to distribute (the distributor
receiving a share).
UuJ JnfXJ likh lend = to finish writing or to write for
oneself.
(JulxJ lelend = to take for oneself, to appropriate.
UuJyt holend = to be finished.
ddlnd, to cast off :—
(JJI5 ^U mdrddlnd = to kill.
UJIJ cL«^ kdtddlnd = to cut off.
torddlnd = to smash.
, to go : —
UUJ a;a?ia = to arrive, to turn up.
hojdnd = to become, to be over.
marjdnd = to die (and leave for good).
khajdnd = to eat up.
pljdnd == to drink up.
parnd, to be laid, to fall, to befall :—
GJJ^ girpafna = to fall suddenly.
tJjj I a parnd — to fall on, to attack suddenly.
244
^jl u\hna, to rise . to get up :—
LM^ Jj»> bol ufhna = to speak out, to cry out.
li«}Jl ILa^ chilla uthna = to shriek out.
U^Jl < — f(+> bhaq ujhna )
i , ft I.*- ., - =to take to fll?ht
t lj*s « — F U> ftAagr khara hona )
suddenly.
x), baithna, to sit-. —
mar baithna = to happen to beat without
justification.
ghalti Jcar baithna = to happen to make a
mistake through thoughtlessness.
i^joj -? ban baithna = to pose as, to become by
force.
^; rakhria, to keep or lay aside : —
XJ likhrakhna = to have written (ready for — ).
uJU> sa/ A:ar rakhna = to have cleaned (ready
for—).
chhorna, to leave :—
pa5 A;ar chhorna=to do pass (an examination)
eventually, not to leave efforts till it is
done.
J cfe chhorna = to give away completely.
rahna, to remain : —
drahna = to come sooner or later.
rahna = to be left over, to survive.
' Rahna ' added to the conjunctive participle conveys the
idea of eventual success like * chhorna/ as :—
lj pas karke rahna = not to stay efforts till
passing (an examintion), to pass some-
how or other.
245
lib
"^ e/*" 8url PQ>n<* == t° happen to hear.
lib AiJoJ deM pa/ia = to happen to see.
raarna, to beat : —
1>;U <_j de mama e= to happen to dash (a thing
Against something), to hurl at — .
241 As already stated, the idea of finality and com
pletion is common to all of them. That is why these
compounds, with very few exceptions, are not used in
the negative. For instance you can say 'dedo' for 'give
it away ', but not 'mat dedo ' for * don't give (it).' In the
latter case you nm*f say 'mat do' using the simpler
form of 'dena.'
242. The use of the Intensive compound in the nega-
tive is however admissible in the following cases : —
(t) To remove doubt or apprehension.
('/) With conditional sentences (with 'agar' and
'jabtak).'
(Hi) With sentences beginning with ' kahiri ' (I fear lest).
(/'/•) With interrogative sentences expecting answer in
the affirmative.
Examples :—
Main isko kha nn ja.unga = believe me, 1 shall not
gobble it up (as you seem to imagine).
\<iar main usko mar na daluhga to zakhmi zariir kar
nga = if I do not go so far as to kill him <> it right
I shall certainly wound him at least.
labtak ham usko mar na dalenge, mulk men amn na
hoga = there will be no peace in the countrx until
we have killed him.
kahn n-nh a na ja,e= I fear lest he should come.
I rdall ko na bhejdun « shall I not send the orderly ?
(I hope you will say ' yes ).
246
243. It must be noted that these verbs cannot be
stuck on to the root of any verb you like. They have
a method in their madness and require congruity of action.
For instance, verbs denoting suddenness and force can
combine with only such verbs as generally happen sud-
denly and require force.
244. When one part of these compounds is intransitive
the whole is treated as such for the purposes of ' ne ', as :—
Wuh sab dud pigiya = he drank up the whole milk.
Ham sab Dilli kl taraf chaldiye = all of us started off
towards Delhi.
In the first example ' giya ' (past participle of ' jana ')
and in the second < chal ' (root of ' chalna ') are intransitive.
Use of itf find (to come) and lil* js«n (to go) with verbs
of motion.
245. 'Ana' (to come) and 'jana' (to go) are very com-
monly added to the root of such verbs as denote motion
of the whole body from one place to another according
to the direction to which motion is made, as :—
UU.jja daur jana = to run or to go at a run to any
direction other than that of the speaker.
IJT jja daur ana, — to run or to come at a run in the
direction of the speaker.
GU OA ^suj pichhe hat jana = to retreat (to go backwards).
Gf CAA ^jj pic-hhe. hat ana = to retreat (to come backwards).
VOCABULARY.
m , . . ( khona
{ khodena
To be lost khojana
Statement. N _
) biyan u«>
Description. )
Entirely, from one end to
the other sarasar ^^ Out of time or season bewaqt
Estate, property ja,idad (f.)
Guest mihman
247
Success kdmydbl ^^^ At the most ziyadah se
Failure ndkdmydbl ^^U ziyadah *Jbj
Parrot fota U^j-b Loose dhlla
Cage pinjra l^'^ Come what may, what
Jail, prison jelkhdna 4JU*JU=w it may be kuchh h'i
Mad pagal
Anxiety (f.) fikar ^ Stone patthar
To sell Usuj To be drowned, | _
To saddle (par) zln lagdvd To sink. J *"
^ 1^-5 (j* ) Sorrow, regret a/sos
To tear phdrnd (-5^ Traitor dayhd bdz \(
Cholera haiza *~<2±b Remaining bdqi
Rock (f.) chatdn ^^ Lifetime zindgi
To fly, to be blown up urnd ! To lame (ko) langrd karnd
,7T. i Settlement, ) .
Luckilv khush qismati se \ faisla
\ Decision.
Hope, expectation ummid
To be saved, to escape
bad -— -.
. Distance fastla
f 1. ^handaq (f.)jjJLa.
DItch i2.tid,i(f.) ^V
Gambling /ii,d Ij* j TQ pay off> to perform
To gamble ju ,d khelnd ada karna &J I jl
To jump k&dna
At least fcam «e Aram
Pleader
EXERCISE 26.
I I have sold all my land. 2. Make mo a p.i
boots. 3. Has the groom finished saddling the horse ?
IMS
4. Will you please read me this letter? 5. Divide it
among yourselves. 6. Divide it equally among them.
7. Take one spare blanket for yourself. 8. Eventually we
were able to capture the position. 9. When this work is
completely done I shall give you other work (to do).
10. Who tore this silk handkerchief (into shreds) ? 1 1. The
tyrant cut off the child's head. 12. He shot him dead
(killed him with a bullet). 13. He fell ill. 14. Having seen
us they all ran off. 15. How many men died of (from)
cholera ? 16. They concealed themselves behind a rock.
17. The aeroplanes flew towards Lahore. 18. Luckily
he escaped. 19. How did he fall down? 20. All of us
(we all) jumped into the ditch. 21. The minister ex-
claimed " it is not fair." 22. All of a sudden they took to
flight. 23. He has lost everything in gambling. 24. He
has seized upon my land (posed as its owner). 25. Have
the letter written to-day. 26. Have the furniture put
up in his room at least one day before his arrival. 27. We
shall not stay our efforts till we have reached the top of
the hill. 28. Come what may he is bound to avenge
himself on him. 29. Should you happen to see him
anywhere. 30. Should you happen to hear any important
news. 31. He hurled a big stone against (on) this poor old
man. 32. Lest he should be drowned. 33. If I do not kill
the traitor I shall at least lame him for the rest of his life.
34. There will be no settlement until he has died.
35. Shall I not tell him all about this ?
EXERCISE 26(a).
(2) - y (JSUHU ^* V-^iko K ^rrV l^r' (1)
J^ yU <L (to (3) -y *«»*-" IT>A
l (5)
249
(7) -,LJ 'U; UiJ (6)
* v-~~ f* (10) . *- U/l ^UL, v_~ ^ ^ijJL ^ (9)
^^ (12) - UTo y+oj JU Jb ^ (11) . JT l^
(19) - ^j,T^ U^.1 y c*l; o) ^ (18)
Liu ^J- jJjJL^ ^~ ^ yb ^1 jpJG ju (21)
(23) - (*1# C^y JX, ^g ^^ J^ (22)
, UL# (24) -r^; y ;US 4
/ vJo4? os-^jJu v^u, (25)
^i/ ^L ^t ^1 ^ (26)
E1 (27) -^;Lo^) .L
(28)
(29)
^ ^ /! (30)
- JTb ^-1 (31)
(33) - isyij ^ ;u x
^ *; ^ (34)
• or
250
Miscellaneous Colloquial Sentences.
Does thib pencil belong to
you ?
Has the medicine afforded
you any relief ?
1 think it will be best to
do so.
He saluted and sat down.
They displayed great bra-
very.
This caused him much
concern.
I am very glad to see you.
I am feeling very cold.
What is the defect in this ?
Two rifles are missing.
It will require lot of money.
It is too late now
Do as I tell you.
He is exceedingly lazy.
yih pinsal tumhdri hai
us dawd se turn ko
fa, id a hu ,d ?
mere khaydl men aisd karnd
achchhd hogd.
wuh saldm karke baithgayd.
unhon ne ban bahaduri
dikhd,i
is se usko ban fikar hu ,1.
ham tumko dekhkar bahut
khush hue hain.
mujhko ban sardi lagrahl
hai.
is men nuqs kyd hai?
do raflen gum hain.
is par bahut rupaya fyharch
hogd.
ab bahut der hogayl hai.
jaise ham kahte hain waise
karo.
wuh nihdyat sust hai.
Having mounted his horse wuh ghore par sawar hokar
chala gay a.
yih ghciltion se bhara hu,a
hai.
yih but bahut hi bare haift.
he rode off.
It is full of mistakes.
These boots are much too
big.
This coat is too tight.
It is too loose.
yih ko\ bahut tang hai.
yih bahut dhild hai.
251
Disobedience of orders is a fauj men hukm na manna
serious offence in the bard bhdri qnsur (or, ;
army. hai.
!t is a pity that you did afsos hai ki turn ne yih ham
not tell me this before. se pahle nahlh kahd.
I am sorry. hamko afsos hai.
I hope so. ummld to } hai.
Lesson XXV.
Compound Verbs (Contd.).
(in) Potentials (To be able).
246. U£~, ' sakna,' added to the root * of another verb
resses ability to do a thing. It is regularly conjugated
and cannot be used by itself ; nor does it take ' ne ' of the
agentive case, eg.: —
kar sakna, to be able to do (from ' karna,' to
do).
likh sakna, to be able to write (from ' likhna,'
to write),
jj parh sakna, to be able to read (from * parhna,'
to read).
bol saknd, to be able to speak (from ' bolnA , to
speak).
ho saknd, to be possible (from * hona,' to be
etc.).
mil saknd, to be obtainable (from ' milna,'
to be got, to meet, etc.).
1 An idiomatic particle. Here it equals «• indeed " or •• yea."
* The inflected Infinitive is often colloquially heard inntead of the root
'•« ia clumsy and should not be i in it
252
Should you be able to come = agar turn a sako.
I shall not be able to come = main nahln a sakuhga.
If I had been able to come = agar main a sakta.
I cannot come = main a nahln sakta (huh).
I come=(i) main a nahln sakta tha.
was unable to
(ii) main a na saka.
I have been unable to go = main nahln ja saka (huh).
I had been unable to go = main nahlh ja saka tha.
247. Since the legitimate function of this compound is
to express ability it ceases to operate where actual
completion is concerned. That is why it is not used
affirmatively (i.e., when the sentence is not negative) in
the tenses formed from the Past Participle. In such
cases it is obviously succeeded by some compound verb
indicating success after effort, such as the intensive in
Mena ' etc., e.g.:-
(a) Preterite.
At last he was able to do (it) (i.e., at last he did it or
managed to do it) = akhir us ne karliya.
(b) Perfect.
At last he has been able to do (it) (i.e., at last he has
done or managed to do it) = akhir us ne karliya hai.
(c) Pluperfect.
He had been able to do (it) (i.e., he had done or managed
to do it) = us ne karliya tha.
(d) Perfect Subjunctive.
If he has been able to do (it) (i.e., if he has done or
managed to do it) = agar us ne karliya ho.
(e) Future Perfect.
He will have been able to do (it) (i.e., he will have done
or managed to do it) == us ne karliya hoga.
253
NOTE. — For the same reason it is not used in the Imp*
ti\<> either, for it will be obviously foolish to say 'be able to
do it ' which is better expressed by " try to do it " or " manage
to do it."
248. It will have been observed from examples under
section 246 that the Preterite of this compound has two
formations, one expressed by the Imperfect and the
other by the Preterite. The former denotes permanence or
duration whilst the latter relates to a single instance at
a particular time, as :—
They could kill him quite easily but the Colonel had
forbidden them = wuh usko bilkul asanl se mar sakte
the lekin karnail sahib ne mana' kardiya tha.
Although I could understand Hindustani well yet I could
not understand him at that time = agarchi main
Hindustani khub samajh sakta tha lekin us waqt uskl
bat na samajh saka.
VOCABULARY.
u , unaided akeld JUfl (Present) jahan tak1 ho
Individually alag alag sakta hai. (Past) jahantak '
^_JJI ^_&n ho saka ( or sakta tha).
Together, jointly milkar if possible. (Future) agar ho
j&* sake (or, ho sakega).
To strip (to open) kholna (past conditional) agar ho
sakta.
T<> assemble (to join to- _
How ? what way kistarah
gether) jorna
L*O encourage (ko) hausla
dena Lu j &Lc^ ( ^ )
f as much as posniM
(Future) jahah tak ' hosake
(or hosakega).
Simple and guileless
sldha sada » JL-
Ordinary ma' mull
To swim tairna
jahflh tak ' often gives place to • j.t.m '.
254
To remove (an undesirable
thing) dur karna (^ ^
To hit with effect (par) mar
karna Ciy \l* (^ )
Carriage stand adda 13!
Grass-cutter ghisyara I
fl. ddkwala
Jllj
2. chitthi rasan
Submarine
1. panl fce mcfo
rahnewall kishtl
•^ <L
\2."
."abdoz"kishti
Postman
Peon (official messenger)
chaprdsl ^J^
Inside (postposition)
fee andar ^' £_
j Glove dastdna
! Miser kanjiis
Harm, hindrance
i
By (the hand of)
A few chand
Insolent gustdkh
Smoke dhu ,ah
harj
^
ke hath
EXERCISE 27.
1. If I am able to do it I might try it. 2. But you know
I cannot do it, so it is useless to try. 3. When will you be
able to finish this ? 4. We shall not be able to reach there
in time. 5. Do you think he will be able to do this alone ?
6. I don't l think we shall ever be able to find out the real
truth. 7 Can you come with me to-day ? 8. Can you
lend me a thousand rupees ? 9. I am sorry I cannot
10. Is it possible? 11. No, I am afraid (I think) it is
absolutely impossible. 1 2. I don't think we can do it
individually but we might tackle it together. 13. He can
go on leave now if he wants to. 14. Can they drill well ?
15. Which of4 these recruits can fire the best? 16. One
1 ' To think ' in Hindustani is very seldom, if ever, used in the negative.
The final verb is made negative instead. For instance this sentence will
run * I think we shall never be able etc.'
2 Of (i.e. out of, from among) = men se.
255
man can easily carry the modern (new) machine gun.
17. Can you strip and assemble a machine gun ? 18. En-
courage him as much (or as far) as you can. 19. I helped
him as far as possible. 20. We are doing all we can.
•2 1 . I shall help him as far as possible. 22. 1 shall try to
reach there before Sunday if possible. 23. If I had been
able to do it I should have done it. 24. You could doubt-
less fire on the enemy whilst they were in the open.
15, I cannot understand why he could not do such an easy
thing. 26. They tried their best but could not scale
(climb up) the wall. 27. They were, however, able to do
it the next day. 28. Are any boats obtainable here ?
29. What provisions are obtainable there ? 30. You can
get everything here.
EXERCISE 27(a).
yl j»* $\ (1)
dLfxu>A* y \ j^o V-^-A.
A* (3) - S ayt U^T ^} (-1)
(4)
(5)
^>~ L. c^^jbjJI (7) - S yb ^~^ ^ (6) - S yb <:
l (9) - ^ V a
t+xS 443^ 8^ ^Jj crH^r* *-^i
4 JL, y,J £L u*l (10)
(11) - ^ IxG^i JXJ
iC^ (12) - 1C du I
1C yt L^J ^^ (13)
256
-yt
or
(15)
(14)
or
(17)
(19)
(20)
(18)
(21)
Miscellaneous Colloquial Sentences.
Run and bring a tonga from
the tonga stand.
How many grass-cutters
have gone to bring grass ?
Can you ride ?
Can you drive ?
Will you be able to recog-
nise him ?
Why do you laugh without
cause ?
The fields were all under
water.
Let me have my gloves.
He is a great miser.
Has the postman come ?
Send it by a peon.
This will be settled later on.
He has lately become inso-
lent.
daur kar adde se ek tdnga
ledo ?
kitne ghisydre ghds lane gaye
haih.
turn sawdr Jiond jante ho ?
turn gdri chaldnd jante ho ?
usko pahchdn sakoge ?
be sabab kyon hanste ho ?
kheton men pdrii phird hu,a
thd.
dastdne do.
wuh bard kanjus hai.
chichi rasdn dyd hai ?
chaprdsl ke hath bhejdo.
iskd plchhe faisla hogd.
wuh chahd dinon se gustdkh
hogayd hai.
257
i will you charge ?
I have given him all the
instructions.
He knows it thoroughly.
The treatment and medicine
are gratis there.
It will do no harm.
Draught is coming in, shut
that door.
This oil is very bad, it
smokes.
At last they succeeded after
strenuous efforts.
What is your opinion ?
kya qimat loge ?
ham ne sab kuchh usko
samjha diya hai.
usko yih fyhub ma'lum hai.
wahan 'ilaj aur dawa muft
hai.
is men kuchh harj nahin.
hawa andar arahl haif wuh
darwdza band kardo.
yih tel bahut kharab hai,
dhu.an deta hai.
jan tor koshishon ke ba'd
akbir wuh kamyab hogaye.
tumharl ra,e kya Jiai ?
Lesson XXVI.
Compound Verbs (Contd.).
(iv) Completive (to finish).
249. ^ * Chukna ' added to the root of another verb
expresses completion or finality. It is regularly conju-
gated and cannot be used by itself; nor does it take
' ne ' of the agentive case, e.g. :—
kar chukna = to finish doing, to have done
(from ( karna ' to do).
likh chukna=to finish writing (from ' likhna,'
to write).
UXaw yt ho chukna = to be finished (from * honft,' to be,
etc.).
If he finishes writing the report by to-morrow «» agar
wuh kal tak rapot likh chuke.
When you have finished doing this work -= jab turn yih
kam kar chuko.
88
258
I shall attend (listen) to you when I have finished doing
this = jab main yih kar chukunga to tumhdrl bat
sunungd.
I shall have read this book by to-morrow = main yih kitdb
kal tak parh chukunga.
If I had finished repairing your bicycle I would have
certainly sent it back to you = agar main dpkd
bd,isikal marammat kar chuktd to zarur dpke pas wd/ris
bhejdetd.
Whenever he finishes doing office work = jab wuh daftar
kd kdm kar chuktd hai.
Whenever he finished doing office work = jab wuh daftar
kd kdm kar chuktd thd.
Has he finished writing the letter or not ? = wuh chitthl
likh chukd hai yd nahln ?
I have (already) read this book = main yih kitdb parh
chukd hun.
When we (had) finished playing polo = jab ham polo khel
chuke.
He had (already) done all the work when you arrived =
jab turn pahunche wuh sab kdm kar chukd thd.
250. The Future of this compound is very commonly
used for the English Future Perfect, as :—
He will have done this by noon to-morrow = wuh kal
dopahar se pahle pahle yih kdm kar chukegd.
251. The English Perfect following 'when' is treated
as conditional and consequently put in the Present
Subjunctive or Future as required by circumstances,
as *
Come to me when you have finished this work = jab yih
kdm kar chuko mere pas and.
You will be fit to go on active service when you have
259
passed musketry = jab turn chdndmdrl pas kar chukoge
lam par jane ke ld,iq hojdyoge.
252. The English Pluperfect following c when ' is ex-
pressed by the Preterite of this compound or of some inten-
sive compound denoting finality, as :—
When he (had) learnt flag signalling = (i) jab wuh jhandi
kd kam slkh chuka. (ii) jab us ne jhandi kd kdm sikh
'/a.
When he had gone = (i) jab wuhjd chuka (or, chalagaya).
253. This compound is often used to express the sense
of * already/ as:—
He has already written the letter = wuh chichi likh
chuka hat.
We had already captured the position = ham wuh morcha
fatah kar chuke the.
254. Since this compound contemplates final comple-
tion it cannot be used for actions actually in progress.
That is why its Present Indicative is used in habitual
sense only.
255. The Preterite of this compound is ironically used
to express strong negation, as :—
KL^. la* x^ wuh jd chuka = he is not the man to go (catch
him going).
256. (ijS JLi. fchatam karna (to finish) and (J^A ^^
mfrUam hond (to be finished) often succeed this compound
especially when what is finished appears in its noun form,
as:—
When will yon finish this work ? «= (i) turn yih kam kab
kar chukoge ? (ii) turn yih kam kab khatam kar chukoge ?
(tit) turn yih kam kab l&atam karoge.
When will this work be finished ? — (i) yih kam kab
hochukega ? (it) yih kam kab khatam hoga ?
Card kdrd
Sweeper mihtar
To sweep, to dust jhdrnd
260
VOCABULARY.
To join (the rank, to come
back to the line) ja,in hond
To count ginnd
To think, to consider,
sochnd Ua.
A decent or elaborate bed
palang
Mouth, face munh
(1. batnd du
2. taqsim
To be divided .
hond
V.JkJ
Arrow (m.) tir
i
Ordinary bed, cot chdrpdj I Bow (f.) kamdn
Deserving of, entitled to
To post (letter, etc.) dak
men ddlna 15JJ<5
To dig khodnd
Useless, good\ 1. nikamma
for nothing, ; uX>
Unemployed, j 2. bekdr J&M
To render useless nikamma
(or bekdr) karnd
(kd) haqddr
To abide by (kd) sdth dend
To be born paidd 1 hond
To set out rawdna l hond
Cultivation
Canal (f.)
EXERCISE 28.
1. When your Sahib has finished his bath give him this
card. 2. When you have finished dressing come to my
room. 3. When the sweeper has finished sweeping you
should dust everything in (of) the room. 4. If the sahib
has finished (his) tea give him my salam. 5. When he has
counted the money send him to me. 6. I shall give my
opinion when I have carefully thought over the matter.
7. We shall have done the annual musketry next Monday.
The final ' a ' of « paida ' and ' rawana ' never changes.
261
8. Tf they had finished their musketry I could have sent
them on active service. 9. When he finishes (his) dinner
he goes to bed directly. 10. Whenever he finished his
Hindustani lesson he used to go to play hockey. 1 1 When
he (had) finished writing the letter he gave it to his orderly
to post (it). 12. When we had rested for a while we ajain
mounted our horses and moved forward. 13. Have they
finished digging the trench or not? 14. I have already
told you this several times. 15. We had already rendered
their artillery hors de combat. 16. They had already made
all the arrangements before I arrived (my arrival).
17. They are not the people to give in.
EXERCISE 28 (a).
/I (2) - UJI ^ ,=_*« yU ^ W UW ^ ^^ (1)
££ (3) - M *> y^? y yt K^
^ (4) - ls^ Mi- ^
^; (5) - ^ ^V y ( ^y yt or ) &
la^JU AJYL (6) - ^4^ y*> ;
jj y ^ .^ jx» ^. *L. «b s-f- (7)
Gyt K../ ^ WU^I K ^yU-^jijt ^/l (8) - ^ T
^ b A. ^ ^ ^U» (9) - Gyt Uf ^ ^ ,ly
jT (11) - S ^ ^. M^ Acly ^^; J^ (10)
U^ M| (12)
J1- ^r^ ucrfy v./-1 (13)
i^«*. K^, ^ £.
L« y .^ ^ A^axi v_^^Le ^ v-^a. (14)
262
(18)
(16)
(17)
(21)
(19)
(20)
Miscellaneous Colloquial Sentences.
What is the reason of this ? is ka sabab Tcya hai ?
What is the profession of
your father ?
What sort of place is that ?
Where were you born ?
When did your regiment
arrive in this station ?
How long has your regiment
been in this station ?
When will it be relieved ?
When and where did you
hear this news ?
Have you given food to the
dog ?
Can I get some fresh fruit
here ?
What district do you come
from ?
Is it a good place for re-
cruits ?
What is its climate like ?
tumhara bap kya kam karta
hai ?
wuh kaisl jaga hai ?
turn kahdn paida hu,e the ?
tumhan paltan is chha.onl
men kab dyi ?
tumhdrl paltan kab se is
chhd,onl men hai ?
iskl badll kab hogl ?
turn ne yih J^habar kab aur
kahdn suni ?
turn ne kutte ko khdnd diyd
hai ?
yahdn kuchh tdza mewa
milsaktd hai ?
tumhdrd zila' kaunsd hai ?
wahdn rangrut bahut mil-
sakte hain ?
wahdn kl db-o-hawd kaisl
hai ?
263
\\liat are its people like ? loahan ke log kaise hain ?
Do you own any land ? tumhdre pas kuchh zamin
hai ?
Can you do cultivation turn kheti kd kdm kar sakte
work ? ho ?
How do you irrigate your zaminon ko pdnl kaise dete
lands ? ho ?
Are there any canals there ? wahdn kuchh nahren hain ?
Lesson XXVII.
Compound Verbs (Contd.).
(v) Inceptive (to begin).
257. l^, 'lagna,'1 added to inflected Infinitive ex-
presses to begin to do a thing. It does not take ' ne.'
'Lagna' alone is conjugated, the infinitive retaining its
inflected form throughout, e.g. :—
LLO j__£ karne lagna = to begin to do (from ' karna ' to
do).
LLC ^J likhne lagna = to begin to write (from 4 likhna '
to write).
UJlf ^_yb hone lagna = to begin to be, to begin to take
place (from ' hona,' to be, etc.).
Remind me when I begin to write the letter = jab ham
chichi likhne lagen tab ydd dildnd.
If he asks (begins to ask) any thing you should keep
quiet = agar wuh kuchh puchhne lage turn chup rahna.
Now begin to fire = ab fair karne lagjdto.*
1 ' LagnS ' is a verb of multifarious meanings. Its primary signifi-
cation is ' to begin to do one'* job.' Hence to be applied, etc. In this
compound 'men' is suppressed after the Infinitive which accounts f
tion.
« • LagjUnS * intensive form of « lagnl.'
264
When will you begin to do this work ? = turn kab ///A
kam karne lagoge ?
If you had begun to do it yesterday it would have
been finished by now = agar turn isko leal karne lagte
to ab tak kh atam ho j did.
He is beginning (or has begun) to understand (it) a bit
now = wuh ab kuchh kuchh samajhne lagd hai.
He makes noise when I begin to read = jab ham parhne
lagte hain ivuh shor kartd hai.
They were beginning (or had begun) to play = wuh
khelne lage the.
We began to fire exactly at 10 o'clock = ham jhik das baje
fair karne lage.
258. The salient features of this compound are :—
(a) Its Present and Imperfect tenses formed from the
Present Participle are used in the frequentative or habitual
sense only ; they do not express one single action in the
course of commencement t which phase is expressed by the
second form compounded with Perfect and Pluperfect
tenses of 'rahna,' to remain (vide Section 172).
Ham subah sawere kam karne lagte hain = we (usually)
begin to work early in the morning.
Ham subah sawere kam karne lagte the — we (usually)
began to work early in the morning.
Wuh fehandqen khodne lag rahe hain = they are beginning
to dig ditches.
Wuh fehandqen khodne lag rahe the = they were beginning
to dig ditches.
The last two examples naturally signify " making
preliminary preparations towards immediate beginning."
They are too exact. In fact there can hardly be a begin-
ning to a beginning. When you are beginning a thing you
265
have really begun it, similarly when 'you were beginning '
you "had actually begun" That is why such cases are
generally expressed by the Perfect and Pluperfect respec-
tiv«'ly. For instance the last two examples can advan-
tageously run : —
Wuh fehandqen khodne lage ham = they have begun to
dig ditches.
Wuk fchandqen khodne lage the = they had begun to dig
ditches.
(6) 'Lagna ' primarily means " to set oneself to doing
one's job," * to be applied,5 etc. Thus it means ' to begin
and go on.' That is why we often come across expressions
like :-
Wuh kahne laga = he said (lit. began to say).
Wuh piichhne laga = he enquired (lit. began to enquire)
(c) Its Preterite and Pluperfect tenses are idiomatically
used —
<0 For the Present Subjunctive but only interrogatively
and that with the force of the negative, as :—
Main wahdn kyon jane laga = why should I go
there ? (i.e. I, for one, am not going).
Main wahan kyon jane laga tha = why should T have
gone there (i.e. I, for one, was the least likely
person to go there).
(it) To express "was about, prepared or inclined to,"
e.g.—
Wuh pistaul chaldne laga (or laga tha) lekin main ne
nska hath pakar liya = he was about to fire hi-
pi-tnl l»ut F caught hold of his hand.
Wuh mujhe das rupai dene laga tha lekin main n<
manzur na kiya*=he offered (lit. began or had
begun to give) me ten rupees but I would not
accept.
34
266
259 ' Lagna ' in its inceptive sense can always be
replaced by " shuru' karna " (transitive) and " shuru' hona"
(intransitive) with the following distinctions :—
(a) ''Shuru' karna" and 'shuru' hona' signify 'to
begin only,' not ' to begin and go on.'
(b) "Shuru' karna" (transitive) unlike ' lagna ' takes
' ne ' of the Agentive Case.
(c) "Shuru' karna" and "shuru' hona " can be used
without the Infinitive, especially when the
object and subject, respectively, happen to be
nouns other than the Infinitive.
Examples :—
We opened fire = (i) ham topen chalane lage. (ii) ham
ne topen chalani shuru9 kin.
It began to rain heavily = (i) zor kl barish hone lagl.
(ii) zor ki barish shuru9 hogayi.
NOTE. — The Infinitive, in the case of " shuru' karna," agrees
with its object in gender and number except when the object
is followed by ; ko,' in which case the infinitive and the finite
verb become independent and appear in the third person masc.,
singular form.
. VOCABULARY.
Wickedness shararat «^J
.-.
y.
To indulge in wickedness
shararat karna (^ ^^ sham hole hi ^.fi> 3 ^ AJi
Hand grenade dasti gold Band (music) bdjd
Camelman sdrbdn ^l^t.
Exercise (for horse) rol1 J^
To make to walk (for exer-
I
To cook pakdnd U&J | cise) tahldnd
Cough khdnsi .^^ ' Soap sdbun
Long since muddat ka l
To cough khansna
With the fall of evening
1 ' ka ' agrees with the subject or object as the case may be.
9 ' rol ' is the syce's word for horse-exercise.
267
Hair bdl l JU
Reinforce- f 1 . kumak ( i. }
ment. ( 2. madad (f .)
Sound (f.) awaz
At dawn tarke
To tremble, to shiver kanpnd
Fear £ JT, _/
At sunrise din nikle & ^
To give in hdr manna Luto «U>
Shave hajamat e^cLsua.
To shave (ki) hajamat banana
(
Razor
One side (or ^
leaf) of a \kiwar ;)/
door.
To sign (par) dastfthat karna
To take to flight (suddenly)
bhag khard hand
Return, retreat (f.) ivapisi
j
Step by step qadam qadam
Race (horse) ghurdaur )^J^
EXERCISE 29.
1. Pull his ears if he begins to indulge in wickedness.
2. Well ! now begin to hurl grenades. 3. The General will
begin to inspect the troops in this cantonment on Friday.
4. Had you begun it a year earlier (before) it would have
been finished long ago. 5. The cook is beginning to cook
food. 6. When he begins to cough his chest aches.
7. They begin to dig trenches with the fall of evening.
8. They begin to play the band at 6 o'clock every evening.
9. The camel men were beginning to load up things on
(their) camels. 10. We were beginning to retire when the
riMMfop-ements arrived. 11. We were beginning to retire
to our beds when a gun fire (sound of a gun) was heard.
12. The ship usually began its daily voyage at dawn.
i:i. He began to tremble with fear. 14. I began to read
and write well in six months' time. 15. When did you
< nlike English • bftl ' it treated as plural if it stands for more than
one hair.
268
begin to learn the language ? 16. We began to attack at
sunrise. 17. He has begun to get a little better now.
18. Have they begun to load things on the carts or not ?
19. The fire-brigade had begun to put out the fire before
our arrival. 20. Why should we give in? 21. Why
should I have felt frightened ? 22. He was about to say
something when (that) his friend forbade him. 23. We
were about to start when the wheel broke.
EXERCISE 20(a).
- UuJ lb <£^x> x£j i_y( lail_Uu J j tJJ^ ^^aXo ^^ ( 1 )
- ILJ ^uj ^ Oyi^ f ^ ^s£±-** u-^/i (2)
~ vi (4) - jU _*; <L/ / jj-. Mi (3)
(6) -^ixD i_/*li^3U^uy*jrO;i.
,5.1 y ,10 ^ ^^ jy ,J/I (7) - S
(9) - ^ -*_; ^ Lj ftf U,l U,l C^. (8)
feO v^ (10)
wy ^ v_^ (11)
I;U> v_^ (12) - i.c^
Kol Jo (13) - er/yb c_j.f* v-Lf) n_j y KJ
(16) .^kt-^ii-jf ^j, ^ " ^ ( 1 5)
il^ A J», f3 u^ (17) - < 4
*i B ^ «, (18) - S I*
269
(19) -4.
Miscellaneous Colloquial Sentences.
Wake me up at 5-15 pre-
cisely.
Mind, don't be late.
Tell the syce to have the
horse ready at 4-45.
The syce will go ahead.
Take the horse for exercise,
Is the bath ready ?
Put some cold water in it.
All right, never mind.
I <hall be late.
Get (me) some soap and
hair oil from the shop.
Put a clean towel in the
bath-room.
I shall not have a bath.
I <liall wash my hands and
face only.
Change the towels.
I ; ring some hot water for
the shave.
hamko jhik sawa panch baje
jaga,o.
khabardar, der na karna.
sa.ls ko bolo ki ghora paune
panch baje tayyar rakhe.
sa.ls age ja,ega.
ghore ko rol (or fahlane) ke
waste lejap.
ghusl tayyar hai ?
is men thora thanda pani
dalo.
achchha, fikar nahm.
hamko der hoja,egl.
dukan se kuchh sabun aur
baloh ka lei le-ayo.
ghuslkhane men ek saf taulya
rakhdo.
ham ghusl nahlh karehge.
-?tr/ muhh hath dho.enge.
taulya badaldo.
hajamat ke waste thora garm
pan! la,o.
270
Get me a barber to cut my bdl kdtne ke waste kol nd,l
hair. buld ld,o.
Wait till I have shaved. thairo, hamko hajdmat kar
lene do.
Give the razor to the barber ustrd na,i ko tez karne ke
to sharpen it. waste dedo.
Leave one side of the door ek kiwdr khuld rakho.
open.
Don't leave the doors open, darwdze khule mat chhoro.
Lesson XXVIII.
Compound Verbs (Contd.).
(vi) Permissive (to let or allow).
260. ii>a, ' dena ' (to give), added to an inflected infinitive
expresses to allow or to let one alone to do a thing.
The infinitive remains in its inflected form throughout,
'dena' alone being conjugated. It takes *ne'.
Examples : —
karne dena, to let or allow to do (from ' karna,'
to do).
j j_ I ane dena, to let or allow to come (from ' ana,'
to come).
jane dena, to let or allow to go (from ' jana,'
to go).
rahne dena, to let or allow to remain, to leave
alone (from ' rahna,' to remain, etc.).
If I let you go who will do your work = agar main
tumko jane dun to tumhdra kam kaun karega ?
Let him go = usko jane do.
Let it remain on the table = isko mez par rahne do.
I will not let you go = main tumko jane nahm dungd.
271
If he had allowed me to come I should have certainly
come = agar wuh mujhko dne detd to main zarur dtd.
Why do you allow him to go there every day ? (Habitual)
= turn kyon har roz usko wahdn jane dete ho ?
He is allowing them to go = wuh unko jane de raha hai.
He allowed them to go there every day (Habitual) =
wuh har roz unko wahdn jane detd thd.
He was allowing them to go = wuh unko wahdn jane de
rahd thd.
Who allowed him to go ? = kisne usko jane diyd ?
Have you allowed them to pitch tents here ? =-- tumne
unko yahdn tombu lagdne diye ' hain ?
Who had allowed them to go? = kis ne unko jdne diyd thd?
261. This compound expresses more passive than
active permission. In the case of active or express per-
mission ' ijazat ' (permission) construction is preferred,
as : —
He himself allowed me to go = us ne dp mujh ko jane ki
ijazat di.
(vii) Acquisitive (to be allowed).
262. klj, pana (to get), added to an inflected infinitive
expresses to be let alone or to be allowed to do a thing.
Like the Permissive it deals more with passive than
active permission, in which latter case the 'ijazat' or
'hukrn' construction is preferred. It does not take
'ne'.
Examples :—
Lib ±_jl karne p&nd — to be let alone or to be allowed to
do (from ' karaa ' to do).
lib i_(+ jane pdnd = to be let alone or to be allowed to
go (from ' jana ' to go).
l Agrees with tenta, maac. pi.
272
^ <L' &ne pand = to be let alone or to be allowed to-
come (from ' ana,' to come).
No outsider should be allowed to come = Ico ,i bdhir kd
ddml dnc. napd,e.
You will never be allowed to go = turn hargiz jane nahm
pa,oge.
If he had been allowed to go = agar wuh jane. pdtd.
No one is allowed to go there now = ab ko,i adml wahdn
jane nahm pdtd.
He was formerly allowed to go there but he cannot go
there now = wuh pahle rvahdn jane paid thd lekin ab
nahm jd saktd.
How were you allowed (or how did you manage) to go
there ? = turn wahdn kaise jane pd3e ?
Has anybody ever been allowed (or able) to go there ?
= kabhi ko,i adml wahdn jane pdyd hai ?
When he was permitted to go = jab usko jane kl ijdzat
mill.
I shall not be permitted to go = mujh ko jane ki ijdzat
nahm milegi.
263. As a matter of fact this compound is very rarely
used, there being always more elegant ways available.
It is often replaced by potential ' sakna ', as :—
No one is allowed to have a rifle without a license =
ko,l ddml lalsans Ice baghair banduq rakhne nahm pdta
(or, nahm rakh saktd).
264. Its Pluperfect put in the negative is, however,
idiomatically used to give the idea of ' hardly,' ' scarcely '
etc., while the same tense put affirmatively and supple-
mented by ' hi ' (just) gives the idea of ' just,' 'barely '
etc., as : —
He had hardly spoken even a word when I shouted =
wuh ek lafz bhi bolne na pdyd thd ki main bol uthd.
273
The train had scarcely started when I arrived = gari
abhi chalne na pa,i thl ki main apahuncha.
We had barely (or just) sat down when he arrived =
ham (abhi) baijhe hi the ki wuh apahuncha.
NOTE. — ' Abhi (yet) is optionally put in and • when' in such
sentences is expressed by ' ki ' (that) .
VOCABULARY.
v, ice (f.) barf *—*j>
To rub malnd UJU
Chalk kharya
Theft chori
f 1 . churdna
To steal/ 2. chori karnd
\
I • ipline (proper manage-
ment) intizdm ^
se
To talk to
ke sath
guftgu) karna.
bat (or
or
rith each other ek dusre ke
*.*jL< / c_ ^,,j
iple (Hindu) manda
(Mohamadan)Miugfici
1. 6ard ip
.-Id ir /-r
\2. bazurg ^->)'j*.
>rt command ^»7,a A:d
Aa^tm
35
To set foot
qadam (or
pa, on rakhna)
^*f) ( ,jjb or)
In any circumstances
halat men +
License laisans
fl. chhufti
\2. rufehsat
Kindness, thanks, mihrbdni
Leave
Kingdom, rule bddshdhi
Brush
To brush (ko) bursh marna
(or karna) UjU ^^ ( y )
( CiJ or )
/I.
Spot, blot { a
\ 2.
Whole night ra< 6Aar
f
. maidan-i-jang
field | 2. /ard,i A^ maidan
Whether— or khwah— ya
b —
274
In future ayindah
To tease, to disturb, ^ chherna
to meddle with j Ujj^
To rest assured ^hatir l jama'
rahna Uifc)
Quarrel jhagra
1. jhagarna
To quarrel
Race (f.)
2. jhagra karnd
u/ijV
qaum
Because
To be useful,j
to fall in a \karn ana lil
noble strife. |
( chunki '2 *&
I kyonki
Compound ihata
Secret bhed
To be revealed, )
To be opened. J
String (thin) taga
khulna
EXERCISE 30.
1. If I allow you to go on leave who will do the office
work ? 2. If we allow sepoys to behave (to do) like that,
discipline will disappear (will not remain). 3. Let them
fire. 4. Don't make a noise, let me sleep. 5. Don't let
them talk to each other. 6. I shall not allow anybody to
wash clothes at this well. 7. If you had not allowed him to
desert how could he have escaped ? 8. I do not allow him
to laugh in my presence (in front of me). 9. Who allows
them to come here every week ? 10. They do not allow
us to go into their temples. 11. Our elders would not
allow us to drink wine. 12. Who allowed you to see this
map ? 13. The Colonel did not allow us to attack.
14. The Commander of the fort would not allow anybody
to go out of the fort. 15. Did the sentry allow you to pass
without being challenged (without calling) ? 16. At last he
permitted us to make a sally (having come out to attack).
17. Why did you allow the fool to leave his dug-out ?
1 Lit. to remain heart collected.
2 • ChQnki ' is used when the clause stating reason precedes the
other clause and ' kyon ki * when it follows the main clause.
275
18. I myself have allowed him to go. 19. Look here, the
•e should not be allowed to set his foot inside my room.
20. Under no circumstances should this be allowed to
happen again. 21. No one will be allowed to board the
ship without a ticket. 22. If I had been allowed to come
earlier I should have arrived here yesterday. 23. No one
in India is allowed to keep arms without a license. 24. He
had hardly finished his work when he died. 25. I had
barely bought the ticket when the train whistled and
moved off.
EXERCISE 30(o).
(1)
*i b i-U.jXJ al^L (2)
276
(19) -
(20) - S
*£>
x
yl (23) - ^b A3
J?>^! (24)
y (22)
(25)
(26)
(27)
* uf T
Miscellaneous Colloquial Sentences.
What is this spot, brush it
off.
Rub some chalk over it.
Call the dog back.
Just dust these boots.
Take off my boots.
Don't delay it on the road.
If the Sahib is not in the
bungalow take it to the
Mess.
Leave it with the bearer.
Tell him to give it to the
sahib immediately he
comes back.
Don't dirty the letter.
dhabba (or
bursh markar urddo.
is par zara kharya matti
maldo.
kutte ko wdpis buld,o.
zard yih but jhdrdo.
hamdre but utdro.
rdste par der mat lagd,o.
agar sahib bangle par na hon
to miskot ko lejd.o.
bahre ke pas chhordo.
usko bolo ki jab sahib wdpis
d,en unko fauran dedo.
chitfhi ko maild mat karo.
277
There is no answer, give the
sahib my compliments.
First wrap it in a paper and
then tie it up well with
a strong bit of string.
I shall send the answer
later on.
Have you brought anything
else?
Tell him to wait.
Give us something to drink.
I am feeling very thirsty.
Have you got anything to
eat.
I am feeling very hungry.
Bring whatever you have
got ready.
Hand me that tin of biscuits.
Have you got some ice ?
I 1 not, send for it at once.
jawab nahlh hai, sahib ko
hamdrd salam bolo.
pahle ise kaghaz men lapetfo
phir mazbut tage ke sdth
khub bdndhdo.
ham jawab pichhe bhejenge.
kuchh aur bhi ld,e ho ?
usko bolo, thaire.
kuchh pine ko do.
hamko ban piyas lagi hai.
kuchh khdne ke waste hai ?
hamko bahut bhuk lagi hai.
jo kuchh tumhare pas tayyar
ho le,ao.
with biskut kd \ln pakrddo.
tumhare pas kuchh barf hai ?
agar na ho tofauran manga.o.
Lesson XXIX.
Compound Verbs (Contd.).
(viii) Desiderative (to wish, to want).
265. lUi^ ' chahna ' (to wish, ' etc ) added to an infini-
tive expresses to wish ' to do a thing. It takes ' ne.' The
infinitive in this case is, in fact, the direct object of
' chahna ' and agrees in gender and number specially when
'ne' comes in, with its own object, if any, provided the
l And significations akin to it, such as 'to desire', to feel inclined
», to like, to love, to offer, to volunteer, to intend, etc.
278
object is not followed by 'ko.' If the object of the
infinitive is followed by * ko ' the infinitive must be put
in its crude form ending in ' a.'
* Chahna,' like other transitive verbs, follows the
ordinary rules of agreement, e.g. : —
karna chdhnd = to wish to do (from ' karna '
to do).
U^Cf likhnd chahna — to wish to write (from
4likhna,' to write).
(j! and chahna = to wish to come (from ' ana,'
to come).
(JL=w jdnd chahna = to wish to go (from * jana,'
to go).
You can go if you want to = agar turn jana chdho to jd
sakte ho.
He might not want to go = shdyad wuh jana na chdhe.
They will want to go back = wuh wdpis jana chdhenge.
Had he wished to come he could have done so easily =
agar wuh and chdhtd to dsarii se a saktd thd.
Which of you volunteers to go ? = turn men se kaun
khushl se jana chdhtd hai ?
Do you wish to go on active service ? = turn Idm par jdnd
chdhte ho ?
Do you wish to serve in the army ? = turn fauj men
naukri karna chdhte ho ?
He wishes to write him a letter = wuh usko chi^thl likhm
(or likhna) chdhtd hai.
He was inclined to enlist = wuh bhartl hond chdhtd thd.
Ho wished to go on leave = us ne chhufti par jdnd
chdhd.
He wished to write a letter = us ne chichi likhrii chdhi.
I offered him five rupees = main ne usko pdnch rupai
dene chdhe.
279
We wanted to arrest the spies but unfortunately could
not do so = ham ne jasuson ko pakarna chaha tha lekin
bad qismatl se pakar na sake.
They have more than once wanted to kill him = unhoii
neka,i da fa usko mardalna chaha hai.
266. This compound is not used in the Imperative for
obvious reason that you cannot order or request a
person * to wish.' You can, however, advise him and
for this purpose its respectful Imperative ' chahiye ' is
impersonally used, and very commonly too. We shall deal
with it in the next lesson.
267. Since the ordinary future tense of a simple verb
occasionally expresses wish or intention the future of this
compound sometimes gives place to it, as : —
1 think he will want to attack = mere khayal men iruh
hamla karega.
268. * Chahna ' is occasionally met with added to the
Past Participle seemingly to convey the same idea as
with the Infinitive. But the modern function of ' chahna
•+• Past Participle (unchangeable) ' is to express to be about
to do a thing, and its use in this case is confined to the
Present and the Imperfect tenses, as : —
The train is about to start = garl chald chahtl hai.
He was about to go = wuh jay a [ chdhta tha.
VOCABULARY.
To get oneself discharged
apna nam ka(wana
Bunch guchrhha
Corner kona
Contract ///•/•'/ &£*£ \ (Jl^If -U Lul
1 Not ' gaya in this aeiMe and • karnu ' the hal»
auxiliary the regular Past Participle of ' jfinS ' (i.e. jayS) is used.
280
To join (ke sdth) milna
Against ke barfehildf
(I. balwa karnewdld
Rioter
1 2. fasadl
Police Supdt. Pulls kaptdn
To shoot (effectively)
goll mdrnd Ujt.
Fuze fatlla
To fall (to be captured)
fatah hond
Lifetime zlndgl
To ruin barbdd karna
Voluntarily, \
I khushl
Gladly ,
Happily. /
Drawer dardz
To crack taraknd
dhundld
it karna
To come to a ^
stop, to be
detained. J
To pass (tr.) guzdrna liJjJ
To pass (intr.) guzarna (J;JJ
Extravagance fuzul kharchl
A prostitute\
or a woman I bdzdrl *aurat
of loose
character.
Before, face to face with
ke ru-ba-ru ^ ^ £_
To deceive (ko) dhokd dend
'}
[[bdzdrl *<
German Kaiser Qaisar-i-
Jarmanl ^yu^a.^oj
To subdue (ko) zer karna
Final dkhirl ^J^
Draught (of men) draf <—^j5
For some reason kisl waja se
Dim
To prove
EXERCISE 31.
1. If he wishes to go out shooting let me know before
noon to-morrow. 2. If you wish to secure the contract
you had better see the Q.M. about it. 3. If your superior
(officer) had wished to recommend you he could have done
so yesterday. 4. I want to learn Hindustani for the Lower
Standard. 5. What reward would you like to give him
281
for his services (work) ? 6. Why do you want to go on
leave ? 7. Why does he want to be discharged ? 8. He
wants to make a petition to the C.O. 9. They were willing
to join the rebels but their chief was against it. 10. I
offered him Rs. 500 for the motor-bike but he wanted
more. 11. The Police wanted to shoot at the rioters but
their Superintendent forbade them. 12. The general had
wished to regain the position but the enemy were too strong
for it. 13. The prisoner wanted to escape but the sentry
shot him in the leg. 14. He was about to set fire to the
fuze when he was hit by a bullet and died instantaneously.
15. The fort is about to fall (be captured).
EXERCISE 31 (a).
/ (12)
(14)
36
282
UaU ti*
rl;T
(15)
(16)
y
C5
^ -^
^ £_ Jy^^J*, (18)
.^J (19) - U> ULGU ^
Usu+i ^ ,L v^^U 2.1^
(21) - UbU. Ujy ^L^\ L
(22)
y** j*£ (23)
(24) - Ijyi «
(17)
H yul <L v
(20)
.^
UtU. by
*A
b!
*Jb y«-0^ ;^j ^ e/6^0 (25)
&C (^ JL. ^.^^(
T (26)
Miscellaneous Colloquial Sentences.
Give me a, box of matches.
Give me a match.
Where have you put the
bunch of keys ?
Is this the right key ?
This is the wrong key.
Why does it not open ?
a solaj, kl dibya do.
(27)
a salaj, (or, l5
chabion kd guchchhd kahdn
rakha hai ?
yih isiki chabi hai ?
yih aur chdbi hai.
khultd kyon nahm ?
283
Try this key.
Lock it and give me the key.
Put it in the corner there.
Look for it in the table
drawers.
This wick is too old.
Put in a new one to-morrow.
It is not level.
It is not properly trimmed.
Bring me a pair of scissors.
Turn the wick up a bit.
It (f.) has not been properly
cleaned.
Look at the table, it is
covered with dust all over.
This lamp does not give good
light.
The wick is too high, turn it
down a bit.
How did this chimney
crack ?
The light is too dim.
yih chdbi lagakar dekho.
tdld lagakar kunjl hamko
dedo.
wahdn kone men rakhdo.
mez kl dardzon men dekho.
yih battl bahut purdnl hai.
kal na,l ddldend.
bardbar nahln hai.
thik kail hit, I nahJh.
qainchl ld,o.
battl ko thord upar kar do.
thlk sdf nahln hutl.
mez ko dekho, tamdm garde se
bhari part hai.
is lamp ki roshni achchhi
nahln.
battl bahut unchl hai, thori
niche kar do.
yih chimnl kaise tarakgayl ?
roshni bahut dhundll hai.
> Lesson XXX.
Compound Verbs (Contd.).
4 Chahiye ' (should or ought to).
269. <^*^ 'chahiye' (or chahi.e,' which by form is
the Respectful Imperative of * chahnaV to wish etc.) is used
to express 'should' or 'ought to.' It is impersonal and
takes the infinitive of another verb before it In the
284
case of transitive verbs the subject must be put in the
Dative (i e. with 'ko' after it), whilst in the case of
intransitive ones the subject need not be followed by
' ko ' if it is inanimate. The infinitive preferably
agrees with its direct object in the case of transitive
verbs and with the subject in case of intransitive
verbs if the object and the subject are not in the
Dative. E.g. : —
You should go = tumko ' jdnd chdhiye (no object). (Lit.
for you going is advisable.)
You should write him a letter = tumko use chitthi likhnl
chdhiye.
(The infinitive agrees with ' letter.')
They ought to pay him Rs. 10 = unko use das rupai dene
chdhiye (or, chahiyen).
(The infinitive agrees with ' rupees.')
NOTE. — (a) In the last two examples " use " is the alternate
form of ' usko ', used here to avoid two datives in ' ko ' coming
together in close proximity.
(6) ' Chahiyen ' is the old and fast-dying-out plural form of
' chahiye.'
No place should be left dirty = ko,i jaga maili nahin
rahni chahiye.
(The verb being intransitive and the subject ' jaga,'
being inanimate not followed by ' ko ' the infinitive and
the adjective are agreeing with it.)
The Police ought to arrest those thieves = pulls ko
un choron ko pakarnd chdhiye.
(' Thieves ' being in the dative, the infinitive is indepen-
dent and appears in its crude form.)
The legs should be kept straight = (i) tdngen sidhi rahni
chdhiye. (ii) tdngonko sidhd rahnd chdhiye.
1 « Ko ' following the subject in these constructions denotes interest
and therefore equals ' for.'
285
In (ii) the adjective ' sldha ' and the infinitive ' rahna '
are independent because the subject is in the dative. But
translation (t) is better than (ii).
270. The subject, if general, need not be mentioned at
all, as : —
You (or one) should not tell lies = jhuj bolna nahm
f/t 'hlye.
271. The impersonal use of the Respectful Imperative
is not confined to ' chahiye.' Any verb can be similarly
used with advisary signification, as : —
jhu( na bollye = (t) Please don't tell lies, (ii) One should
not tell lies.
1 Chahiye tha ' (should have or ought to have).
272. i*> ^rV1^ 4 chahiye tha ' similarly used expresses
4 should have ' or ' ought to have.' In this case the final
4 tha 'agrees with the object or the subject as the
circumstances may require, as :—
You ought to have gone = tumko jand chahiye tha.
You ought to have written him a letter = tumko use
chichi likhnl chahiye thl.
They ought to have paid him ten rupees = unko use das
^rupai dene chahiye the.
No place should have been left dirty = ko,i jaga maill
nahm rahnl chahiye thl.
The Police ought to have arrested the thieves «= pulls ko
un choron ko pakarna chahiye tha.
The legs ought to have been kept straight = (t) ta
sldhl rahnl chahiye thin, (ii) tangon ko sldha rahna
(hihlye tha.
The infinitive can be split into a subordinate clause
troduced by ' ki ' (that), in which case ' chahiye ' or
;hahlye tha ' (unchangeable) precede it, as :—
286
You should go = chahiye ki turn ja,o.
You should have gone = chahiye tha ki turn jate (not so
good, ja o).
REMARKS. — In the case of ' chahiye ' the subordinate verb is
invariably put in the Present Subjunctive while in that of
' chahiye tha ' in the Past Conditional or Present Subjunctive,
the former being preferable.
274. ' Chahiye ' is occasionally met with added to the
Past Participle, as : —
One should learn good manners = adab sikha chahiye.
But this is now practically obsolete and survives in the
solitary expression —
^LjtU (.^JoJ dekha chahiye = it is to be seen, let us see.
275. ' Chahiye ' and ' chahiye tha ' are also used by
themselves to express a requirement or advisability,
as : —
What do you want ? = tumko kya chahiye ? (Lit. to you
what is necessary ?)
What did you want ? = tumko kya chahiye tha ? (Lit. to
you what was necessary ?)
Such a thing does not behove you = tumko aisa nahin
chahiye.
Such a thing did not behove you = tumko aisa nahin
chahiye tha.
' Chahe — ya '= whether — or.
276. ' Chahe ' followed by ' ya ' (or its repetition) is
used to express ' whether — or,' or ' no matter if.'
(i) Chahe wuh jd,e yd, (or chahe) na ja,e main to zarur
jafihga = whether he goes or not I shall go for a
certainty.
(ii) Chahe wuh marjd,e = no matter if he dies.
REMARKS. — The Persian " khwah— ya (or khwah) " is often
used instead of this. For instance you can equally well say :—
287
(i) Khwah wuh ja,e ya (or kbwah) na ja,e main to zarur
(or kbwah ma kbwah) ja,unga.
Kliwah ma kbwah = certainly, will-he-nill-he, for no
reason, etc.
(ii) Kliwah wuh mar ja,e = no matter if he dies.
277. The Present Subjunctive of * chahna ' is also some-
times used to express * whether — or/ as : —
(t) Chahen ja,eii chahen (or ya) na ja,en = whether
they go or not.
(ii) Chaho ja,o ya na ja,o =» whether you go or not.
The fuller forms of these two sentences are :—
(*') Agar wuh chahen to ja,en aur agar na chahen to na
7*d,en = If they want to go they may go but if
they do not want to go they need not go (or
they may not go).
(ii) Agar turn chaho to ja,o aur agar na chaho to na
jdyo = if you want to go you may go but if you
do not want to go you need not go (or may not
go).
278. 'Chahiye' and 'chahiye tha ' are only advisory
verbs, they may express mild ' must ' but the strong
1 must' or inevitable obligation are beyond their function.
VOCABULARY.
Litigation muqaddama bdzl Under such circumstances
aisl hdlat men
Come what may kuchh hi ho
Till so late in the night
•Jb gJt AfA
^^ itnl rat gate tak
Date (of month) taritth (I.)
JitU
Punctually (without inter-
mission) bila nagha ^uL> ib
Otherwise (in another man-
ner) aur kisi tarah
288
To put up a
false excuse,
m . 'banana karna
To swing
the lead.
To hang (a person) (ko)
phansl dena
To thank God khudd ka
shukar karna C^^Ji £ ]^^
Thoughtfully soch samajhkar
To associate with (ke sath)
uthna baifhna
Income amadam
Backbiting chughll
To backbite (against) (ki)
chughll khana
Physical exercise warzish
Subordinate mataht o.«x3U
Affection, love mahabbat
To let one grow too familiar
(ko) munh lagdnd
UK/ ^ (/)
To turn back (tail) pith
dikMnd
To treat equally, or impar-
tially (ko) ek ankh se dekhna
Ul^iJ ^ A^il vJ^Jll ( y< )
To abuse (ko) gall dena
To be insolent gustakhi
karna (iyS ^^lu*/
Cashier khazanchl ^pilya*.
Receipt (ackgt.) rasid (f.) ^^
Gambling juja U^
To gamble juta khelnd
UU^i" !JA,
EXERCISE 32.
1. You should sell this horse. 2. You should at once
consult some efficient doctor. 3. Litigation is not a desir-
able thing. 4. You should keep silent. 5. Come what
may one should always speak the truth. 6. You should
not laugh without cause. 7. You should submit your bill
punctually on the 1st of every month. 8. You should
salute when an officer passes by. 9. A. sentry must always
be at his place. 10. They should not go very far. 1 L. We
should wait at least another week 12. You should not
speak English when I talk to you in Hindustani. 13. You
289
explain to them clearly. 14. One should be patient
under such circumstances. 15. You should not load more
Q 8 maunds on one camel. 16. You ought not to have
into the lines without a pass. 17. You ought not
to have remained outside the lines till so late in the night.
Vou ought to have obeyed orders. 19. You should
have reported this to your Company Commander. 20. He
ought not to have put up false excuses. 21. Whether you
auction it or sell it otherwise it is all the same to me
(for m<> u is equal). 22. Whether you hang him or shoot
him it does not make much difference to him. 23. Whether
it <uffices or not there is no more in the godown.
290
(20)
4 *. ^ (21)
(19)
(24)
(25) - ^-Ijjt!.^ Li
£ j^j] (26) -
U^jljAx^ (27)
(28)
4- (22)
, JU*. b li
(23)
^/* ^-^ (30)
*^ AJ wu b yt. Jx^^o ^L.(.^ (31)
^; ^^' (32)
Uf
(33)
Miscellaneous Colloquial Sentences.
You are never here when
you are wanted.
You are always absent
Have this letter registered.
Have you got any money ?
I shall pay all the servants
this evening.
jab tumhari zarrirat hofi hai
turn kabhi hazir nahln hole.
turn hamesha ghair Tiazir rahte
ho
yih chitthl rajistrl kara.o.
tiimhare pas kuchh rupaya
hai ?
ham aj sham ko sab naukron
ko talab denge.
A proverb indicating acquisition of what one wants most.
291
'IV11 them all to be present
here at 5-45 sharp.
rupee is bad, return it
to the Cashier.
Give this man his tonga hire.
the tailor fifty rupees
and get a receipt from
him.
Get me two rupees worth
of half-anna stamps.
Take this money order ID
the Post Office before
4 o'clock,
ou are late the Postal
people will not accept it.
Have you brought me a
receipt ?
All right you can take this
small change for yourself.
I am very pleased with your
work.
sab ko boldo ki thik panne
chhe baje hdzir rahen.
yih rupaya khojd hai, khazdn-
ch\ ko wdpis do.
is admi ko tdnge kd kirdya
dedo.
darzl ko pachas rupai dedo
aur rasld lelo.
do rupai ke ddh ddh dneivdle
tikat led,o
yih manl drdar char baje st
pahle pahle ddkfehdne lejd.o.
agar der karke jd>oge to
khdnewdle nahln lenge.
rasid ld,e ho ?
achchhd, yih rezgdrl turn lelo.
ham tumhare kdm se bahut
khush hain
Lesson XXXI.
Compound Verbs (Oont'i.).
(ix) Compulsive (to have to do).
9. (>;i ' parna ' (to fall or to befall) and b,* ' hona '
(to be etc.) added to an infinitive express "to have to
do a thing." In the case of transitive verbs the
subject, if mentioned, »»//*' be put in the dative and the
whole compound mn*t agree with the direct object, if
292
any, provided the object is not in the dative. If the
object is in the dative the whole compound verb is put
in the Third Person, Masculine, Singular. In the case of
intransitive verbs the subject is generally put in the
dative if it is an animate being and the compound is
put in the Third Person, Masculine, Singular. But should
the subject be in its nominative form the compound
agrees with it in gender and number.
'Parna ' is much stronger than ' hona.' The former im-
plies peremptory obligation whilst the latter expresses
merely a possibility without any pressing force at the
back of it, so much so that it often allows free exercise
of option.
Examples : —
or ) Ujj G^ karnd parna (or hona) = to have to do.
or ) (Jjj (JoJ dend parna (or hona) =a to have to give,
( (Jyt or ) (Jjj (JUw jana parna (or hona) = to have to go.
If you must needs go = agar tumko jana pare.
Should you have (like, mean, or care) to go = agar
tumko jana ho.
You sh^jn"^- to g° (inevitably) = tumko jana paregd.
You will (not, shall) have to go = tumko jana hogd.
If you had been obliged or forced to go = agar tumko
jana partd.
Should you have had (liked, meant or cared) to go =
agar tumko jana hotd.
I am obliged to go (habitual) = mujhko jana parta hai.
I am supposed to go (habitual) = mujhko jana hota hai.
I am to go (i.e. it is supposed or intended that I shoulc
go) = mujhko jana hai.
I was forced to go (habitually) = mujhko jana parta thd
I was supposed to go (habitually) = mujhko jana hot
tha.
293
1 was forced to go (and I did go) = mujhko jana para.
I was (supposed or intended) to go = mujhko jana tha
I have had to go (unavoidably) = mujhko jana para
hai.
I had had to go (unavoidably) = mujhko jana para tha.
Possibly he is (or was) being compelled to go (as a
practice) = usko jana parta hoga.
Possibly he was forced to go = usko jana para hoga.
280. It will have been observed that k hona ' finds no
place where force or unavoidability is implied. Nor can
tli ere be any occasion to use this compound in the
Imperative.
VOCABULARY.
To cause to be drawn
khinchwana
( taswlr
To have a picture I khinch-
drawn or photox wana
(\. nachar
Perforce 2. majburan
To (addressed to) ke nam
To demolish, to cause to fall
girana
To empty, to evacuate
karnd
Poverty gbaribi
For the sake of > kl $atir
taken.
Will, assent mar%i
According to ke muafiq
Ornament, jewellery zewar
Cartridge kartus
All of a sudden yaka yak
According to lapni marzi
one's own j ke mftafiq
will or satis- 1
faction.
Tyre fa,»r
Inner tube fiyub
Puncture pankchar
i.e. , out of regard for.
294
To go and come back ho ana \ ^ 1. karbajd 5*tbJ6
Uiyb I (2. gais -^
Valve valv Jl. TT
* ' Vaselin weslin
Screw pech ^
Nut dhibri
Wrench rench
To tighten kasna
To get in (as thorn) chubhna
Pump
pamp
EXERCISE 33
1. Should you have perforce to sta;y there wire to me.
2. Should you be compelled to retreat what will you do ?
3 Should you care to go to the hospital I can give you a
letter to the doctor. 4. If you want to recall him from
leave I can give you his address. 5. You must obey your
senior's order. 6. We shall have to demolish this wall.
7. You shall have to give up this evil habit 8. If we had
had to march during the day it would have been very
difficult on account of the heat. 9. If we had had to
retreat we should have suffered great loss. 10. I have to
accept whatever he proposes. 11. I have to ask his
permission in everything. 12. They have to learn drill
and musketry before going on active service. 13. I have
to arrive there to day. 14. Whenever we attacked they
had to retreat. 15. They were to do their annual
musketry last week. 16. We had to cut the trees to clear
the way. 17. They had to (and jolly well did) evacuate
the village.
EXERCISE 3 3 (a).
(2)
295
-w« <£_ - __ a^Lc £ VJ 1^' (4-) - 5*1
(5) -
^A ; r ^^ - or
..-^ A^U ,L Jj^k. ^ ^^.v (7) -Kyi
/i (9) - tfyt by ^ ^ ^ u£ jr (8)
i (10) - 'JL;^.: ^ y 'J;o li;y ^
^/^^ (11)
^0 V^c. (12)
o. (13)
^j ^ (14) -Syt <L/
. usyi.3 L.^ (17) - ^ uy
(18) - Ijj U^ «Ll^ ^j; ul ;^
.it L>±> ^Jofeo v^^-^j uJ^j) irx< tS L5 Ij
(20) -A.i!^^^^ 1 J^ 4^ (M))
^;-lf (21)
(22)
Miscellaneous Colloquial ScrUenr.es.
You can take the bicycle if chaho to batisikal leja.o.
you want to.
f the t\ ipkho ki (a,ir (h\k hait
29b
The front one has gone down
a little.
Perhaps it is punctured.
Pump it up, it will take you
to the office and back
all right.
The valve leaks, have a new
valve put on
My bicycle runs very heavy,
clean it thoroughly and
oil it.
The hind wheel is shaky.
It makes an awful noise.
Tighten its screws and nuts.
Put a little vaseline on the
chain as well.
The back inner tube is too
old, have a new one put
in.
It has got some punctures.
The road was very bad and
strewn with thorns all
over.
Some thorn has got in
again .
Get the puncture patched.
Tell him I want the bike
back by six o'clock this
evening.
Put some carbide in the
lamp.
agle td.ir men, se thorl hawa
nikal ga,i hai.
shayad us men pankchar hogd.
hawa bharlo. daftar ho ' due
tak thlk rahegl
vdlv men se hawa nikaltl hai,
nay a valv lagwd ld,o.
hamdn bdjsikal bahut bhdrl
chaltl hai, fehub sdf karke
tel dedo.
pichhld pahiyd hiltd hai.
bar a s'hor kartd hai.
iske pech aur dhibrldn kasdo.
zanjlr par thorl wezlln bhi
laga do.
pichhll tiyub bahut puram
hai, na,l dalwd la,o.
is men kuchh pankchar ham.
rasta bahut khardb fhd aur
jaga jaga kdnte the.
phir ko,i kdntd laggid hai (or
chubh gid hai).
pankchar thlk kard ld,o.
use kahnd ki sham ko chhe
baje bdjsikal wdpis chd-
hlye
lamp men kuchh kdrbdjd (or,
gais) ddldo.
Ho ana = ja kar wapis nna = to go and come back.
297
Have you got a wrench ? tnmhare pas rench Ji
pump does not work, yih pamp \hik nahln use •
tell him to change it. ki badaldo.
Lesson XXXII.
Compound Verbs (Conld.).
(x) Habitual or Frequentative (to do a thing repeatedly).
281. IJ/ ' karna ' (to do) added to a Past Participle
expresses habitual or repeated action. The Past Parti-
ciple does not change, * karna' alone being conjugated.
It does not take ' ne '
Examples : —
(ijf (*£ kiya karna = to do habitually or repeatedly
(from ' karna,' to do).
j^ U4 likha karna = to write repeatedly or frequently
(from * likhna,' to write).
Ljjf bl aya karna— to come usually, etc. (from * ana '
to come).
U^ lyt huta karna = to happen, or take place habi-
tually or repeatedly (from ' hona ' to be, to
happen, etc.).
Lj^ bU. jay a karna = to go usually, etc. (from * jana '
to go).
NOTE. — This compound takes the regular Past Participle of
' J&M&,' i.e. jfiyft — not gayft.
If you come a little earlier on Thursdays = agar juma'rat
ko zara sawere aya karo.
Go there every day at 3 o'clock = har roz tin baje wahan
jay a karo.
38
298
I shall come every week -— main hafte ke haffe dya
karungd.
If he had reported every day, such a thing would not
have happened = agar ivuh har roz rapot dediyd kartd
to aisd na hold.
H- conies here every Sunday = wuh ilwdr kc itwdr
yahdn ay a kartd hai (or did hai) .
He came here every Sunday = wuh itwdr ke itwdr (or Aar
itwdr) yahdn a yd kartd thd (or did thd).
He continued to come for three weeks = wuh tin hafte dya
kiyd (or dtd rahd).
REMARK. — (a) In the Present and Imperfect tenses it is
a 1 nays interchangeable with the Present and Imperfect,
respectively, of the simple verb, as : —
He usually comes = wuh dya kartd hai (or dtd hai).
He usually came = wuh aya karta ilia (or ata thd).
(b) In the Preterite its signification is continual and is
therefore interchangeable with the Preterite of the continue ti\ •••
compound formed by ' rahna ' (vide 283), as :—
He continued to come = wuh aya kiyd (or ata rahd).
(c) This compound is not used in the tenses formed from the
Past Participle, in which case its place is taken up by the
continuative compound formed by ' rahna ' added to tlv
Present Participle (vide 283). Its Preterite is the only
exception to this rule, but even then, not being so elegant, it
readily gives way to the continuative compound, as : —
He continued to come = wuh aya kiyd (or ata rahd) .
He has been coming = wuh ata raha hai (not, dya kiyd hai).
He had been coming = wuh dtd rahd thd (not dyd kiyd thd)
He have been coming = wuh dtd rahd hoc/a (noi
kiyd hogd).
282. It must be noted that this compound denotes a
complete action repeated each time quite distinct from an
action perpetuated in continuation of what has been done
before. The latter phase is expressed by the continuative
compound (vide 283).
VOCABULARY
!>e inconv ui« M ed (ko} \ Food (f.)
taklif hona (-i^Jt v-Jixl-G ( ^ )
Stroll, a pleasure)
\satr(f)
IUT :'r.n sight-
ng.
i i. ki jaga (in place
Instead j of) A£=W ^^.f
of 1 2. ke badle (in
return for) ^ j^ £,
less, sanitation .<
Fair (m ) we/a
To keep guard at (par) pahra
dena ti,j ^ (^ )
Till quite lately a&fa abhl
Populated
Population abadl ^[^
To teach (reading "and
parhana UUtjj
•thing or other kwhhna
hh A^-s^f JL) &42.\T
V
Some one or other ko i
ko,i ^y *j _ y
To annoy, to bother dig
karna G^ jj
Beginning from
khurak
Tolookatter,) (ki) fehabar
To enquire^ lena
about ]
Translation tariama
To translate (ka) tar jama
ka^ ^^ *^f ( ^ )
Innocent, with- ^ begunah
. \
out an fault
sal ke sal
Every year
Condemned good for not h-
raddi ^J;
Intoxication nasha
Intoxicated a*he men
To h«- intoxicated nashc men
1>(), 'J^A ^j^O ^
Senses ^^
Point (fine nok (t. ) — ^
Leather cJitf '^«-a-
Patch (joint) yor ;^
Sole <a^a ^
As, by way of kc taur ;,k £_
To be worn out (by friction)
•ili isna
EXERCISE 34.
I If the train should cmne in tjm«- everyday the travel-
wnuld not be inconvenienced 2 When you propel
300
the boat exert your strength. 3. Don't get flurried over
such trifles. 4. Have some exercise every day. 5 You
should go out for a stroll every morning and evening.
6. If there is something wrong yon should always report
to me. 7. He will, in future, inspect the lines every week
instead of every third day. 8. The train will, in future.
leave here at 9-30 instead of at 9-15 a.m. 9. Tf you had
not made a practice of lying you should not have been led
to this result (this would not have been the result). 10. If
you had thought of cleanliness you would not be ill.
11. Mohamadans, as a rule, do not drink. 12. Thousands
of people join (go in) the fair. 13. He keeps guard at my
bungalow. 14. My bearer brings (my) tea at 4 o'clock.
15. As a rule I go to the club at 5 and return from there
at 7-30 p.m. 16. We used to practice musketry from
7 till 9 in the morning. 17. Till quite lately they used to
live like savages (wild people). 18. In the beginning they
used to treat all alike. 19. When this country was less
populated everything used to be cheap. 20 He kept on
speaking (for) an hour. 21. All the lamps continued to
burn till morning. 22. The city was ablaze for two com-
plete days.
EXERCISE 34(a).
y b J Ubj y*s<-*> <ul^ c-Cl ^Jc ))& /\ (1)
y! (4)
(6) V^
ur j& jj 0,1 (7)
(10)
301
^ (12) - ;/ U4r *>
b ^~Ji (13) »y ^-
yt (15) -j/W. .^^ j^i; (14)
- «
J ^J c^-x)^ ^J;! 1;UA (18)
y i/ W ^ j,;^^/) (19)
- ^- G/ !>» 8'JJou / ^o^ ,^1 ^ (20) - 2-j*> V ^
j& 2-£ bj y ^ ju ^; Ju £. ju ^ (21)
*s (23) - ^. ,^y lyt ^AiU ^J ^"^ ^ ^ (22)
- ^^*3 ^*&>j te v«5o ^>iyt <i/ Lfj t^C (J'VA. yt> jy« £i U3f
^^^ (25) - V G/ U^. ;^^^ / u^V3; 8J (24>
I. c»i; (26) - us (.y uj y
^ ^;^ «^ (27)
Miscellaneous Colloquial Sentences.
\ want a pair of brown boots hamko ek joj-a bddami but
made for me. ban ado.
Have you got leather of this tumhdre pas is qism kd
kind ? chamra ha,
How lonfc will you take to kitni der men band d
ike it ?
1 want it on Saturday even- hamko sanichar kl sha>
ing. chdhiye.
Can't you make it by then ? tab tak nahm band sakte?
302
AH right, take the measure-
ment of my foot.
Take this boot as a pattern.
Take care you don't make it
too tight.
T want it a bit loose at the
toes.
Look here, put a half sole
on this shoes.
The heel of this has worn
out on one side; put a new
one on.
What will you charge for
this ?
Oh, it is too much, can't you
make it for 1 5 rupees ?
Yes, leather is dear enough
but not so dear as you
make it to be.
All right T shall pay you
twenty provided it is done
to my satisfaction.
Put a rubber sole on it.
The tennis shoes fit me all
right but the black ones
are too tight at the toes.
This requires certain repairs.
Put a patch on here.
This is not English leather,
it is country leather.
achchha, hamdre pd}on kd
nap lelo.
yih but namune ke tour
lejd,o.
khabarddr bahut tang na
banana,
panje zard khule hon.
dekho, is par hdf-sol lagado.
iskl erl ek taraf se ghisgayl
hai, na,l lagado.
iskd kyd loge ?
o, yih bahut ziyddah hai,
pandrah rupal men nahln
bana sakte ?
han beshak chamra mahinga
hai lekin Una nahln jitna
turn batdte ho.
achchha agar hamko pasand
agia to ham tumko bis rupai
dedengc.
is par rabar ka tola lagado.
beshak tenis kl jiiti thik ati
hai lekin kale but ke pahje
bahut tang haih.
is kl ka,l jaghen marammat
honeivdll hain.
•
is jaga ek jor lagado,
yih walayatl chamra nahln
deal hai.
303
Its point is too fine and iskl nok bahut patll hai aur
pinches at the little toe. chhoji ungll ke pas dabata
hai.
Lesson XXXIII.
Compound Verbs (Contd.). +
(xi) Continuative and Progressive (to continue to do or
to go on doing).
283. ii*> ' rahna ' (to remain, to continue) added to the
Present Participle expresses continuation, with or without
progress while '^ 'jana' (to go) similarly added ex-
presses progress, i.e. continuation attended n-nh progress.
Both of these compounds are regularly conjugated, the
Participle agreeing with its subject throughout. Neither
of them takes ' ne.'
Examples :—
Ujtj U^Xf likhta rahna = to continue to write
(with or without progress).
LiU. (I^XJ likhta jana = to go on writing (with
progress).
Ljjtj LxJtjj parhta rahna = to continue to read
(\vith or without progress).
liLi. (JLfcjj parhta jana = to go on reading (with
progfei
( liL^ or) '.Jjb; Gyt ^ kam hota rahna (or jana) = to go on
<li creasing, becoming less and less.
^ or) (in* Gyt oI^A. fcharab h"' = to be
getting worse and wor-
— ' JSnft ' is naturalh j> to 'r«lin;» to ex-
, press progre-
304
If you continue to play like this you will learn nothing
= agar turn is tardh khelte rahoge to kuchh nahin
slkhoge.
If you go on reading this book it will be finished one
day =- agar turn is kitdb ko parhte jd,oge (not so good
• rahoge ') to ek din khatam hojd,egl.
Go on repeating these two paragraphs = yih do paird-
grdf parhte raho (no progress).
Qo on reading this book from one end to the other =
yih kitdb ek sire se dusre sire tak parhte jd,o.
I shall be playing till 6 p.m. = ham sham ke chhe bajc
tak khelte rahenge.
We shall continue to advance as far as Baghdad = ham
Baghdad tak age barhte jd,enge ' (not, rahenge}.
If you had kept awake you would have seen the whole
show ==• agar turn jagte * rahte to sab tamdsha dekhte.
If you had gone on reading the book it would have been
finished by now = agar turn wuh kitdb parhte jdte to dj
talc khatam hojdtl.
He keeps on reading something or other = wuh kuchh
na kuchh parhtd rahtd hai.
He is realizing more and more every day that to make
any further attempt will be futile = wuh din ba din
samajhtd jdtd hai ki ziddah koshish karnd befdi,da hogd.
He would (used to) keep awake till as late as midnight
— wuh ddhi ddhi 3 rat tak jagt'i rahtd thd.
We were gradually realizing = ham samajhte jdte the.
We kept on guarding the place for three hours = ham
wahdn tin ghante pahrd dete rahe.
1 Since the verb necessarily denotes progress ' jana ' naturally sounds
much better, to say the least.
2 There can be only continuation and no progress in ' keeping awake.'
Hence ' rahna ' must be used.
3 Repetition here denotes ' intensity ' or ' frequence.'
305
We kept on advancing as far as Baghdad = ham Baghdad
tak age barhte gaye.
I have been playing = main kheltd rahd huh.
I have been dictating and he has been writing (what I
said) = main boltd giya huh aur wuh likhtd giya hai.
I had been playing = main kheltd rahd tha.
I had been (or went on) dictating and he had been
(or went on) writing (what 1 said) = main boltd giya
thd aur ivuh likhld giya tha.
NOTE. — (a) Two progressive compounds in ' jana ' imply
'•rtion between the two actions whilst two continual
ihna ' may indicate independence, as :—
Jo jo wuh puchhtd giya (not so good * raha ') main jawdb deta
1 (not so good ' raha ') = I kept on answering whatever
he asked.
Wuh pahra deta raha aur main khana paknla raha = He kept
guard whilst I went on cooking my food.
(6) ' Jana * must be used with ' Jon joh ' (' as/ of progress) ,
His strength increased as he got better and better =
it wuh achchha hold giya tfiqat barhti gayi.
284. The compound in * jana ' also expresses * to be
doing a thing as one goes or goes along,' in which case
•iii' gives place to *ana' according to the direction of
movement, as :—
H<> is going along laughing = wuh hanstd jdtd hai.
i i* is coming along laughing = wuh hanstd did hai.
I 1 c was writing a letter when he went away = unih
likhld giya hai.
285. ' Jata rahna * (to continue to go) is idiomatically
used to express ' to be lost,' ' to disappear.' The root
jnea probably is that nothing is ever lost in the sense of
complete extinction What is lost or disappears is actually
changing hands or places, i.e. ' continues to go from one
to another.'
39
306
His book has been lost (i.e. he has lost his book) = uski
kitdb jdti rahi hai.
286. ' Ata raha ' is occasionally idiomatically used to
express ' fell down,' as : —
W uh zamin par did raha = he fell on the ground.
VOCABULARY.
English angrezl l
Englishman angrez
Ordinary ma'muli
1. ghair
ma'muli
To spread (intr.) phailnd
To spread (tr.) phaildnd
2. 'ajib
(strange)
Extraordinary
End (of anything material)
sird [f»
End (time, etc.) Mir ^1
Railway line rel ki sarak
To suffer trouble taklif uthand
For the sake of, \kl khdtir
Out of regard for j
II . bad amni
^
2. be chaini
Province suba
Peace and order dman chain
To
play the")
fool with, (ko) chhernd
To chafe, j
To disturb. J
Slowly, gently }dhist<i dhistd
or graduallyj ai.
(l. raftarafta
By degrees \
Insect, worm kird !jj^
To be insect or worm-eaten
(ko) kird lagnd UxJ \j^ (^ )
Without a) 1. lagdtar
break, j&®
Continuously.) 2. bardbar j>)j.
» Walayatl = English or foreign. English language = angrezl (not,
walayatl) zuban.
307
Nothing but water pdni hi
pdni
In this very way isi tdrah
Lesson sdbaq
( 1. bed (m.)
<
\ 2. fcain* (f .
of time)
muddat (f.)
2. 'arsa (m.)
Space
(long)
To decline (as day, etc.)
±# dhalnd
/t \ • '
^^^ As (of progress) jon jon
cause to rain barsdnd
ton
So (of progress)
nnfusion, muddle (f.) garbar
yf
l. t
Sheet (f.
So (much) . pill
V2 isqadar jJ&»]
Thin (animate beings) dubld Pillow cover
gliilaf
Dust storm
Mosquito machchhar
Mosquito-curtain masahn
Of cheerful disposition khush
1 jg 7 .*. I
^X<U ^AJ.^.
To find fault (with) (men)
nuqs nikdlna
UJHJ ^Aaj ( ^o ) To fold tah k<t
Monthly mahwar ^lybU Camphor kdfur <y*%
EXERCISE 35.
1. ff you continue to learn this work you will become
a very efficient soldier one day. 2. If you will go on
saving a little every month you will not have to borrow
for extraordinary expenses. 3. Continue to attend the
office, till the end of this month. 4. Go on spending
money from your own pocket and let me have a bill on the
of the next month. 5. I shall continue to send
reinforcements. 6. They will go on making a railway
in the rear as we advance. 7. How long will this man
Hi Itetween a word repeated = nothing but.
308
continue to supply firewood for the regiment ? 8. If you
go on killing game like this there will be no animal left in
the forest before long. 9. If he had continued to work
hard he would have succeeded. 10. Only if the bugler had
kept on blowing his bugle. 11. Only if the gunners had
gone on firing. 12. He is always incurring losses. 13. He
is always suffering troubles for the sake of others. 14. He
keeps on writing witnesses' statements in Urdu while
I record them in English. 15. They were always com-
plaining. 16. The Colonel always used to encourage us.
17. I continued my efforts for six months. 18. Gra-
dually the disease abated. 19. By degrees the disorder
spread in the whole province. 20. Gradually peace and
order settled in the country. 21. As his health grew worse
and worse his strength waned. 22. Who has been playing
the fool with my watch ? 23. I have lost my silk handker-
chief. 24. He has lost his walking stick.
EXERCISE 35(a),
*^/' (i)
(2) -KuVyt^U
*, /i (3) - ikvyb ^ ^ ^ y
x* V;y y -
(5) -yb; l^^J ^ ^>}} ^;Ujb (4) -KJT *i
(7) - jU £*y> £] (6) - yt; 2_f
il i-Xj) (8) - jU^
1 Thaira (not, thairta) rahna = to continue to wait or to stay, to wait
or to stay on.
309
^£*>; ^Jty c-£ v^^ (10)
f y <*L; <L L# 2/ r>x~! ffc/l (11)
^sJ^JUv ^ X ^^ f jt\ (12) - .XijJ
y; ^jt; 2_/ ^ f3 /' (13) - ^ U^l
K- ^ r*
UT by Oi, ^UJ ^ (28)
^ ^ «j (15)
(17) - Syt> cLU <Lyt .Jbj ;j^I ay^ (16)
(21) - ^- Ufc; t^ Jb y |JA. U^^b Xj (20)
(23) - <*- ClU l^r- uJ^ Lr^ (22) - -!L
hUt (24) -U
^J V«^:w (25) -
* (26)
(31)
ur^ (32) - Ut; (JuJ al^JJ ^i ^L^ <L ;lyt»U
(33)
310
Miscellaneous Colloquial Sentences.
Change the sheet and the chddar aur takye kd ghildf
pillow-cover. badaldo.
dndhi a rahi hai sab danvdze
band kardo.
is kamre men beshumdr
machchhar hain.
masahri lagddo.
The dust-storm is coming,
close all the doors.
This room is full of mos-
quitoes.
Put the mosquito-curtain on
the bed.
Fold this.
It is very badly folded.
Put all the warm clothing
in the sun.
Put a IHtle napthaline or
camphor in each fold.
Or the insects will damage
them.
You are getting very slack.
I shall have to dismiss you
if you don't improve.
Put this back in the ward-
robe.
What have you done with
the money I gave you
yesterday ?
What is the date to-day ?
What is the day to-day ?
I have dropped my handker-
chief somewhere.
isko tah karo.
iski tah bahut khardb hai.
sab garm kapre dhiip men
ddlo.
thord thord naftalln yd kdfur
har ek tah men rakhdo.
nahiii to kird lagjd,ega.
turn bahut sust (or, dhile)
hote jdte ho.
agar turn achcJihl tar ah Team
nahm karoge to ham
tumko mauqiif kdr denge.
yih almdrl men wdpis
rakhdo.
jo rupaya ham ne turn ko
kal diyd thd usko kyd
kiyd ?
dj kyd (or kaunsi] tdrikh
hai ?
dj kyd (or kaunsd) din hai ?
hamdrd riimal kahin gir gay a
hai.
311
I have (unintentionally) left hamdra bed daftar men
my cane in the office, send rahqayd hai kisl ko bhejdo
some one to fetch it. ki jakar le d,e.
Go and see if the dog is in jakar dekho ki kuttd miskot
the mess or in the office. men hai yd daftar men.
Lesson XXXIV.
Compound Verbs (Concluded).
(xii) Extra- Intensive.
287. A variety of very strong intensives, which we
have ventured to call extra-intensive, is formed by adding
(») GU. jdna (to go), (ii) (Jjj parna (to fall or befall), (in)
(JoJ dend (to give), (iv) (JuJ lend (to take) and (JJI*3 ddlnd (to
cast off) to the Past Participle of another verb. They
denote earnestness, vigour, persistence, rapidity, imminence
and continuity according to the context. If the Participle
is intransitive it agrees with the subject but in case it is
transitive it invariably appears in its inflected form, ending
in 'e.'
It must be noted that this construction is admissible in
such tenses only as are formed from the root and the Pre-
sent Participle. Hence ' ne ' cannot be used with them.
Examples : —
The wall is threatening to fall -= diwdr girl jail hai (or,
girl parti hai).
The ice is fast melting = barf pigll jdtl hai.
Go on busily reading the book = yih kitdb parhe jd,o.
Go on learning it assiduously = dil lagdkar slkhe jd,o.
I shall bring tea from the mess in no time, Sir
main chd abhi ld,e detd /<
312
I shall close all the doors in no time, Sir = main abhl
sab darwaze band kiye leta hun.
Just wait for a minute please, I shall have finished my
meal in no time = ap zara jhairen main ek minit men
khand khaye leta hun.
Now this city looks to me as if it is bent on biting me
to pieces = ab yih shahr mujhe kaje fr
.
ddlta
The heat there drove one mad = wahdn kl garmi hosh
urdte detl thi.
288. ' Jana,' so used, is, however, susceptible of other
significations as well, as :—
Isko kiye jato = (i) go on doing this vigorously.
(«) have it done before you go.
(Hi) go on doing it vigorously as you go.
REMARK. — In the case of verbs implying motion from one
place to another it interchanges with ' ana ' according to direc-
tion, as : —
UU> lj«a daurd jana = to go to a place at a rapid run and will-
ingly.
lif Ij^a daurd and = to come to a place at a rapid run and
willingly.
j U. ^U. chald jdna = to go away.
Uf &*. chald and = to come away.
289. These compounds, like the other Intensives
(vide 243) require congruity of action between the two
verbs, thus united.
Compound Verbs summarised.
290. To refresh the reader's memory we give below
summary of the compound verbs : —
313
Name.
Significa-
tion.
Formation.
Remarks.
Transitive
or Intran-
A verb added to
(t) noun, (u) ad-
Some of them
take certain
jective, (m) ad- postpositions
verb or postposi- according to
tion, etc.
construction.
2 Intensive.
sitive ac-
cording to
the nature
of the verb
Vide 240. Root+'dena,' !Not used in
' lena,' * jana,' the negative,
' dalna/ etc. with few ex-
ceptions.
3. Potential.
To be able,
Root-f' sakna.'
\
can.
4. Completive.
To finish, to Root -K chukna.'
^Do not take
have done.
' ne '
5. Inceptive.
To begin. Inflected Infinitive
-h'lagna.'
;
6. Permissive
To let, to Inflected Infinitive
Takes ' ne '.
allow.
f 'demi.'
7. Acquisitive.
To be let
Inflected Infinitive
Does not take
alone, to
-h'pana.'
4ne'.
be allowed
8. Desidera- L To wish,
Infinitive -h'chah-
Takes ' ne '.
tive. to want.
na.'
2. To be
Past Participle +
Does not take
about to.
' chahna.'
'ne'.
3. Should,
Infinitive +' chahl-
ought to
y«-'
Subject in
4. Should
Infinitive -f ' ehahl-
•the Dative
have, ought
ve tha.'
(i.e. with
to have.
'ko').
9. Compulsive. To have to Infinitive-f-1 hona ' Does not take
do, etc. or ' parna.' ' ne '.
Subject in the
Dative.
40
314
Name.
Significa-
tion.
Formation.
Remarks.
10. Habitual
To do a
Past Participle +
or Frequen-
thing habi-
* karna.'
tative.
tually or
repeatedly.
11. Continua-
To continue Present Participle
Do not take
tive or Pro-
or go on + ' rahna ' or
) ' ne '.
gressive.
doing a • jana.'
thing.
12. Extra-In-
Vigour, ra-
Past Participle +
tensive.
pidity, etc.
'dena,' ' lena,'
' jana,' etc.
Praise (f.) ta'rif
To praise (ki) ta'rif karna
i • f , " /
LJ rJ L, , Q.J -JO I
Estate (f.) ja,idad
Danger khatra
For theCl. abhi
present ' 2. filhdl
Possession qabza
Married
tonor) (f.)
Respect
To respect
f\. 'izzat(h
\ 2. adc
{ (m.
I
\
adab (respect)
.) ^
VOCABULARY.
To take possession of (par)
qabza karna (^ t~a*2 (j>)
Family quarters qabilddron
ke ohar +<£ / . ..JjJLxxjl
«7 -*/^ - - ^JjJ •• •
To apologise (se) mu'afi
mangna U£iU ^*(*so ( <~. )
Discussion, argument (f.)
bahs (^A^SU
To discuss, to argue bahs
karna L^i
( 1. pal
A second
| 2. lahza
Examination imtihan
l.(kl)'izzatkarna
2. (lea) adab karna
(ix »
O I
/
Dead murda
To bury dafn karna
Idiot ahmaq
315
To fall on (to attack) (par) To sew sina
aparna Up.U/l) Fatigue party hala gula toll
Simple, plain sadah *Jl* J * <df *JLfc
Blade, fruit phal ti^
... i Bell (ringing) <ghantl
Petition, request (f.) dar- \
f 1. parosi r-jx
Neighbour A . Sf ^*
( 2. hamsaya <L>L«^Jb
fyhwast ^^
To request (for) (jfct) dor-
To help (&») madad karna
( ) by
l^hwast karnd
EXERCISE 36.
1. Everybody praised his bravery. 2. He has sold all
his estate. 3. Cut off his head. 4. Can you understand
him (his words) ? 5. When they had reaped (cut) their
crops. 6. We had already defeated them. 7. Seeing the
danger they began to retreat. 8. Let him stay in this room
for the present. 9. Why did you let him go ? 10. No one
should be allowed to leave his post. 11. We had hardly
issued from the fort when the enemy's cavalry charged
and took possession of the gate. 12. Do you want to stay
here or go back to your own regiment? 13. He wanted
to send them to support the left flank. 14. You should
always respect your elders. 15. But you ought not to
have gone to the family quarters. 16. He had to give in.
17. You will have to apologize. 18. They always wear
their uniforms on the parade. 19. He continued to argue
for two hours. 20. The disease gradually abated till (at
last) it disappeared. 21. I shall explain everything to him
in a second.
EXEROLSE 36(a).
L ^ u£| L uy^o / ^j^ ^ £J <L (1)
^ >J (2)
316
v^ (4) - Uj
\-~» *j (5) -
y ^^J ^
(6)
Uf CLy JnfJ
y j^
^ (8)
. (9)
(io)
(12) - Ub
(13) -
(25) - ( 8> or) ^ b
(26)
.^ (3)
L y
ur
i c-;LoJb y
«*»;W (15) - Kiy !/>^XJ y
(17) -y Zy ^ ^1 (16)
L. LL,yU^ ^^»1 ^ (18) - ^
^ (19) - ^^
1 (20) - ^J
i y ^iv^yb (21)
(22)
Cil J (27)
ju«
Ux>
;x
(23)
*. y^J (24)
a. (Jx<
317
(29) - yt
(28)
(30) -
Miscellaneous Colloquial Sentences.
Ring the bell.
Can you arrange for a
shikari ?
you well acquainted
with this part of the
country ?
plenty of shooting
thiTe ?
lere any shooting to be
had near here ?
There are many water- fowls
in that jhll.
there any quails to be
had here ?
There is any number of
clucks and partridges in
this neighbourhood.
killed two ducks and
one snipe.
ill take my hounds with
me.
Last time we killed two
hares.
1 1 1 all go out fishing next
week.
iere any large game to
!>•• had here ?
ghan(l bajato
shikari mil ja,ega ?
is ilaqe ko khub jante ho ?
wahan bahut shikar milta
hai ?
is jaga ke as pas kuchh shikar
mil saktd hai ?
us jhll men bahut murghabiah
hain
yahdn ba^er mil sakte hain ?
is jaga kc as pas beshumdr
baf^heh aur tltar hain.
ham ne do bat^hen aur ek
chaha mar a.
ham shikari kutte sdth
leja,enge.
pichhh dafa ham ne do
fchargosh mare the.
ham ogle hafte machhli ke
shikar ko jatenge.
yahdn bar a shikar mil saktd
hai?
318
There is no big game here yahan bard shikar ko ,i nah in
but there is no lack of lekin chhotd shikar bahut
small game. hai.
Make arrangements for at kam se kam bar ah quliyon kd
least one dozen coolies. bandobast karo.
Take care you don't use any khabarddr, zabardasti mat
violence. karo.
Lesson XXXV.
Passive Voice.
291. The Passive is formed by adding 'jana' (to go)
to the Past Participle of a transitive verb ; the whole
compound agrees with its grammatical subject, provided
it is not in the dative, as :—
UU. Uf kiyd jana — to be done (from ( karna,' to do).
1>U l$XJ likhd jana = to be written (from ' likhna,' to
write).
mdrd jana = to be killed (from ' marna,' to
beat, to kill),
su^j bheja jana = to be sent (from ' bhejna ' to
send).
bj diya jana = to be given (from f dena,' to
give).
It will be all right if a telegram is sent = agar tar bheja
ja,e to achchha hoga.
Lest he should be killed =-• aisa na ho ki wuh mara ja,e.
Let him be called back = usko wapis bulaya ja,e.
It will be seen to-morrow = kal dekhd ja,ega.
If the bridge had not been made we could not have
crossed (the river) = agar put na banaya jatd to ham
par na jd sakte.
319
Which book is being read = kaunsi kitab parhl jd rahi
hai ?
Only English is taught in this school = is madrase men
sirf angrezl parhdj, jdti hai.
A house was being built in this place = is jaga ek makdn
banwdyd ' jd rahd Ihd.
They were examined every year = sal ke sal unkd
imtihdn hyd jdtd thd.
They were all summoned into the court = wuh sab
'addlat men bulwdye1 (or, bulwd,e) gaye.
All of them have been summoned = wuh sab bulwdye
gaye hain.
All of them had been summoned = wuh sab bulwdye
gaye the.
NOTE. — The passive voice is not used in the Imperative of
the Second Person.
292. Since the grammatical subject of a passive verb
is logically its object it is often put in the dative,
especially if it is a human being, in which case the verb is
put in the Third Person, Masculine, Singular, as : —
They were sent on active service = unko lam par bhejd
gayd.
The prisoners were summoned into the court = qaidioh
ko 'addlat men bid way a gayd.
293. In case of two logical objects the verb always
agrees with the direct one and the indirect one is generally
put in the dative, unless the nature of the verb requires
another postposition to follow it instead. This holds good
in the case of such Nominal Compound Verbs also as
recognise the noun subjoined to them as their direct
object.
1 Causative of • banlnaV ' Causative of ' bulamV
320
Examples : —
He will be given two rupees = usko do rupai diye jdehge.
(The verb agrees with ' rupees.')
This has been explained to him = yih usko samjhdya
gay a hai.
(Agrees with ' this.')
The village was set on fire = gaon ko dg lagdyl gayl.
(Agrees with 'ag,' fire, f.)
We were attacked from all round = ham par chdron taraf
se hamla kiyd gay a.
(Agrees with 'hamla,' attack, m.)
At last the fort was besieged = afchir qiVe ke gird ghera
ddld gay a.
(Agrees with ' ghera,' siege, m.)
He was married to a princess = ek shdhzddl ke sdth uskl
shadi kl gayi.
(Agrees with ' shadi/ marriage, f.)
294. The Passive Voice is, however, very rarely used
in Hindustani. If the doer is known or can be guessed
from the context the construction is almost always
active, as: —
The letter was written by me ( = I wrote the letter)
= main ne chitthl likht.
Eventually he was arrested by the police (= even-
tually the police arrested him) = akhir pulls ne usko
pakarliya.
It is said ( = they or people say) =kahte hain.
Occasionally, however, the passive construction is met
with, when the subordinate (not the principal) doer
is known, in which case the doer is followed by ' ke hath
se' (by the hand of) or by ' se ' (by). This is mainly used
in the case of Causative Verbs, as : — *
321
The tents were got pitched by the coolies = qullon se
(or ke hath se) tambu lagwdye gaye.
NOTE. — The person who got the coolies to pitch the tents
is understood and the coolies appear in the character of so
many instruments or subordinate doers.
295. If the action lacks purpose or is the outcome of
circumstances over which the doer has no control the
> <>n-truction is generally intransitive, as : —
He was ruined through no fault of his = wuh begundh
barbdd hogayd (not barbdd kiya gaya).
By chance it was discovered = ittifdqan ma'lum hu,d (not
ma'blm kiya gaya}.
The door was blown open by the wind = hawa se dar-
wazd khulgayd (not khold gaya).
296. When the action is the outcome of deliberate
purpose and the doer is not known or it is considered
undesirable to divulge his or her identity, the passive is
used, but the intransitive construction might do equally
well, as: —
This building was made in the fifteenth century = yih
makdn pandrahwin sadi men bandyd gaya thd (or band
thd).
This acknowledgment was written at his own request =
yih rasld fchud iiske kahne se likhi gayl thl.
297. The Passive is sometimes used for the Potential
kna ' (to bo able, etc.). The subject in this case is put
in the Ablative, i.e., with ' se ' after it.
Examples : —
! will do it if F can = (t) agar mujhse kiya jd,e to karduh.
(ii) agar mujhse kiya ja,egd to kar dunga.
I would have done it if I could = agar mujh se kiya jdta
to kar deta.
41
322
Will he be able to do it ? = Icy a us se yih kdm kiyd jd,egd ?
I cannot do this = mujh se yih nahm kiyd jdtd (hai) .
I could not do this = (i) mujh se yih kiya na jdtd thd.
(ii) mujh se yih kiya na gay a.
REMARK. —This construction is chiefly used in the negative.
When it occurs affirmatively it is either conditional or interroga-
tive.
298. What is peculiar about this potential use of the
Passive is that it extends to intransitive verbs as
well, as : —
I cannot walk -= mujh se chald nahm jdtd.
I could not come = mujh se dyd na gayd.
You will not be able to run = turn se daurd na jd,egd.
One cannot combat against fate =• qismat se lard nahm
jdtd.
299. Allied to the potential signification are : —
(i) to dare or to be bold enough to,
(ii) to withstand, or to bear,
for which this construction is occasionally used, as :—
I durst not go before him = mujh se uske sdmne jdyd na
gayd.
I could not restrain myself = mujh se rahd na giyd.
I could not bear to see this state of his = mujh se uskl
yih hdlat dekhi na gayl.
300. The Potential Passive of intransitive verbs is often
expressed by the simple intransitive verbs as well, as :—
I cannot lift this = mujh se yih nahm uthtd (instead of
' uthaya jata ').
301. Before we close this lesson we would like to add to
it a paradigm of the conjugation of a Passive Verb : —
Infinitive, dekhd jdnd = to be seen.
Root, dekhd jd.
323
Present Participle, dekha jdta = being seen.
Past Participle, dekha gay a = been seen.
The Agent >,
The Conjunctive Participle (not in use.
The Adverbial Participle j
Principal Tenses.
(ii) Imperative. Not used.
(n) Present Subjunctive.
I may be seen, etc.
/. Main dekha jdyun. ham dekhe jd,eh.
II. Tu dekha jd,e. turn dekhe jd,o.
Ill . With dekha jd,e. ivuh dekhe jd,eh.
(iii) Future. I shall be seen, eto.
/. Main dekha jd,uhgd. ham dekhe jd,enge.
II. Tu dekha jd,egd turn dekhe jd,oge.
III. Wuh dekhd jd,egd. wuh dekhe jd^enge.
(iv) Past conditional.
(If or would that) I had been seen, etc.
First Form :
/. Main dekha jdta. ham dekhe jdte.
II. Tu dekha jata. tu,n dekhe jdte.
Iff. Wuh dekha jdta. wuh dekhe jdte.
Second Form :
/. Main dekha gayd hotd ham dekhe gaye hote.
II „ ,, „ '«»>
Iff Wuh „ „ „
(v) Present (Tndicativ-
I am seen or I am being seen, eto.
324
Frequentative or Continuous :
/. Main dekha jata huh. ham dekhe jate haih.
II. Tu „ ,, hai. turn „ „ ho.
III. Wuh ,, „ hai. wuh „ ,, haih.
Continuous (exclusively) :
/. Main dekha ja raha huh. ham dekhe ja rahe haih.
II. Tu „ ,, hai. turn „ ,, ho.
III. Wuh ,, ,, hai. wuh ,, ,, haw.
(vi) Imperfect.
I was being seen, or I used to be seen, etc.
Frequentative or Continuous :
/. Main dekha jata tha. ham dekhe jate the.
II. Tu „ „ „ turn „ „ „
///. Wuh „ „ ,, wuh ,,
Continuous (exclusively) :
/. Main dekha ja raha tha. ham dekhe ja rahe the.
II. Tu „ „ „ turn ,, „ „
///. Wuh „ „ „ wuh ,, „ „
(vii) Preterite or Simple Past.
I was seen, etc.
/. Main dekha gaya. ham dekhe gaye.
II. Tu „ „ turn „
///. Wuh „ „ wuh „
(viii) Perfect.
I have been seen, etc.
I. Main dekha gaya huh. ham dekhe gaye haih.
II. Tu „ ,, hai. turn ,, ,, ho.
III. Wuh ,, ,, hai. wuh „ „ haih
(ix) Pluperfect.
I had been seen, etc.
/. Main dekha gaya tha. ham dekhe gaye the.
II. Tu „ „ „ turn „ „ „
///. Wuh wuh „ „
325
Additional Tenses.
(x) Present Continuous Subjunctive.
(If) I am being seen, etc.
/. Main dekha jata hun. ham dekhe jate hon.
II. Tu ,, ,, ho. turn „ „ ho.
III. Wuh ,, „ ho. wuh ,, ,, hon.
(xi) Past Continuous Subjunctive.
(If) I had been in the state of being seen, etc.
/. Main dekha jata hota. ham dekhe jate hote.
11 Tu „ „ „ turn „ „ „
///. Wuh „ „ „ wuh „ „ „
(xii) Perfect Subjunctive.
(If) 1 have been seen, etc.
/. Main dekha gay a hun. ham dekhe gaye hon.
II. Tu „ „ ho. turn „ „ ho.
III. Wuh ,, ,, ho. unih „ ,, hon.
(xiii) Imperfect Futue.
/. Main dekha jatahunga. ham dekhe jate honge.
II. Tu „ ,, hoga. turn „ ,, hoge.
III. Wuh ,, ,, hoga. wuh ,, ,, honge.
(xiv) Perfect Future.
have been seen, etc.
moat
/. Main dekha gay a hunga. ham dekhe gaye honge.
II. Tu „ ,, hoga. turn „ „ hoge.
III. Wuh ,, ,, hoga. wuh „ „ honge.
NOTE. — (t) '& * for masc singular ; 'e' for masc. plural m«l
tor feminine singular and plural, except when the Present
and Past Participles happen to be the last members of a tense,
in which case 'In ' (instead of only ' I ') stands for fcm plural.
(n) First person plural (we) has no feminine declension
except in the Panjab.
326
VOCABULARY.
Dirty ghallz
Altogether, in total kul
White ant (f.) dlmak
To fell, to demolish girana
<y
(kl) zimmawdri
ufaana
To under-
take (res-
ponsibili-
ty)-
2.
I— /
To beat pijna
Later on, subsequently b'ad
men v^> AJO
L/^
Revenue malya <JuJU
Tax, customs duty mahsul
To consult (a person)
(ke sath) salah karna
Reply prepaid telegram
jawabl tar J
Generally, as a rule (adverb),
most (adj ) aksar
Poison zahr
To undergo trouble takllf
uthana (Jl
Saturated, dripping wet
tar-ba-tar
To shoot dead goli se mar
dalna UJIJ^U
Rainy season (f.) barsat
On account of, overwhelmed
with ke mare c_^U £_
To shiver, to tremble
kanpnd (Juo£
Hot wind (f.) lu y
To blow (as wind) chalna
Dust-storm dndhl
Closeness umas
Sweat, perspiration pasina
To flow
bahna
EXERCISE 37.
1. It will be a grand thing if he is caught alive. 2. He
will probably be called back. 3. He will be killed.
4. Altogether 30 tents will be pitched. 5. If these clothes
had been occasionally put in the sun, they would not
have been spoilt by white ants. 6. It would have been
all right if we had been sent a month earlier. 7. They are
given fifteen rupees extra allowance. 8. Where is all this
327
money being sent to ? 9. There was a time when he was
considered a big man. 10. He was brought into the
court. 11. All the rebels were shot dead. 12. He has
been told this several times. 13. He had been fined ten
rupees. 14. The letter is being written. 15. The boats
are being made. 16. This wall will be felled. 1 7. He was
mistaken for a spy. 18. Can't you speak the truth ?
19. You will not be able to undertake the responsibility.
20. We could nob stay in that dirty place.
EXERCISE 37(a).
r!;l IjJy ^U. ^ ^ J*^ k^ U"l/] U)
U /) (3) - ^V £ v*» J* <& *i (2)
\ £ (J^
(7) - Kw'U. (.4^J ^^ ^^o J^O (6)
UJ *xJL« UJ^ ^ (8)
(11) -A. Ut/a. 14x1 ur (io) - s i
(13)
^ (14)
<16)
U/ *eU UJ^^ ^
Us i/ ur ^ «L.U I. v^-u^i ^u jy y ^j wi (18)
l^^^t^^.y^ (19) -*>^k
328
Miscellaneous Colloquial Sentences.
It is fine weather to-day.
The sky is quite clear
to-day.
It is very cold to-day.
It is very hot to-day.
When will the cold weather
set in ?
He is shivering with cold.
It is very hot during the
summer here.
It is very cold during the
winter here.
It is getting cooler day by
day.
I like cold weather.
The sun is very strong.
When the hot wind blows.
It is very dusty to-day.
We shall have a dust-storm
to-day.
How long does the winter
last ?
It is very close to-day.
I am sweating like any-
thing.
All my clothes are wringing
wet.
When will the rains set in ?
Do you think it will rain ?
aj mausim bahut achchhd
hai.
aj dsmdn bilkul sdf hai.
\hai.
aj bahut sardl (or, thahd)
aj bahut garmi hai.
jdrd kab shuru* hogd ?
[hai.
wuh sardl ke mare kdnp rah a
garm'wn men yahdn ban
garmi hotl hai.
jdre men yahdn barl sardl
hotl hai.
din ba din jhahd hotl jdtl
hai.
hamko to jar a pasand hai.
dhnp barl tez hai.
jab lu chaltlhai.
dj bard gar da ur rahd hai.
aj dndhl dtegl.
jar a kitnl der rahtd hai ?
aj ban umas hai.
hamdre badan se paslna pdnl
kl tar ah bah (or, chal) rahd
hai.
hamdre sab kapre tar ba-tar
ho rahe hain.
bar sat kab shuru9 hogl ?
tumhdre khaydl men bdrish
hogl ?
329
Lesson XXXIV.
Causal Verbs.
302. The Intransitive verbs are mostly primitive, i.e.
they have an original form of their own. The Transitives
are either primitive or derivative, i.e. derived from the
primitives. These derivatives are also called ' causals,'
and it is these with which we intend to deal in this
lesson. Their construction is analogous with the few
English transitive verbs derived from primitive intransi-
tive verbs, as:—
' To fell'
from
1 to fall.'
' To lay '
from
' to lie.'
'To raise,'
' to rouse '
from
1 to rise.'
' To set '
from
' to sit.'
' To bait '
from
* to bite.'
303. Causals derived from primitive intransitive verbs
mean in the first stage 'to do a thing ' and in the second
'to get a thing done by some one else.' Those derived
from primitive transitive verbs mean ' to help another to
do a thing ' or ' to get a thing done by or through some
one else ' In either case the first stage is called ' First
Causal ' and their second stage the 'Second Causal' They
are formed as follows :—
( ) By inserting ' a ' and ' wa ' between the root and the
Infinitive termination ' na ', as : —
Primitive Intran-
sitive or Transi- First Causal. Second Causal,
tive verb.
UfJt, ulhna, to get Ut^'l uthana, to lift Ul^'l ufrwana, to
up, to rise. up, to rouse, to help or to make
carry. one to lift up,
etc.
42
330
Primitive Intran-
sitive or Transi-
tive verb.
UJu banna, to be
made, to be-
come.
bachna, to be
saved, to es-
cape.
karna, to do.
likhna, to
write.
ifcjj parhna, to
read.
(a) If the root is
short vowels, the
dropped in the case
UXo^. chamakna, to
glisten, to shine,
etc.
li£x/ latakna, to
hang, to be
suspended.
First Causal.
) banana, to
make.
pj bachana, to
save.
karana , to
help or to cause
to be done.
likhana to
dictate, to cause
to write.
fcjj parhana, to
help or to cause
to read, to teach.
Second Causal.
!jx» banwdna, to
get or cause to
be made by
some one else.
l^u bachwana,
to help or to
cause to save.
l^y karwana, to
help or to cause
to be done.
likhwana, to
dictate or to
cause to write.
parhwana,
to help or to
cause to read.
dissyllabic, both the syllables enclosing
second vowel, if it is (a' (short), is
of the First Causal, as :—
chamkana, LilyU^ chamak-
wdna, to get
one to make a
thing shine.
latakwdnd,
to make to glis-
ten or shine.
latkana, to
hang (tran-
sitive).
to help or to
cause one to
hang some-
thing.
331
pakarnd, to
catch.
pakrdnd, to
help or to make
to catch.
pakarwdnd,
to get one, to
help, or to make
to catch.
samajhnd, lil^u** samjhdnd, Ul^sw** samajh-
to understand, to explain, to wand, to get
to think. argue, etc. one to explain.
(b) If the root of the primitive verb be monosyllabic,
consisting of only one syllable, and enclose a long vowel
or diphthong, the vowel or diphthong is changed to corres-
ponding short vowel, as : —
U/U.
jdgnd, to
get up, to
wake up
(oneself).
letnd, to lie
down.
UJ,
bolnd,
speak.
to
baUhna, to
sit down.
dekhna, to
sec.
jagdnd, to
wake one up.
I/ lifdnd, to lay
down.
buldnd, to call.
to seat,
X+L/to make
ndj to sit.
show
bUhdnd, \
UX^
bUhld
jagwdnd, to
get one to wake
up another per-
son.
litwdnd , to
get one to lay
down another
person.
bnlwdna, to
send one to call,
Le. to send for
(a person).
P.*O bi(hwdnat to
get one to seat
another.
•likhana,
dikhluwt.
jto get
dikhwdnd , lone to
biy^/j \show a
dikhal- thing.
wdnd.
332
(l&U mdngnd, to 1>£L« mdngdnd to U)y!L« mangwdnd,
ask for to
demand.
sikhna, to
learn.
send for (a thing).
sikhana,
sikhldnd,
to teach
to get one to
ask for a thing
(i.e. to send for
a thing).
UI^X-A to get
sikhwana, one to
teach
sikhal- another.
(c) If the root of the primitive verb ends in a long
vowel ( * a,' ' I,' ( e,' or ' o ' ) it is shortened and an ' 1 ' is
inserted before the causative 'a' and ' wa,' thus making
them ' la ' and ' Iwa ' respectively, as : —
) rond, to weep,
to cry.
sand, to sleep.
khana, to eat,
to feed oneself.
J dena, to give.
pluck, to drink.
'^ ruldnd, to
make to weep,
or cry.
rulwdnd, to
get one to make
another weep or
cry.
sulana, to lull UI^L sulwanat, to
or to make to get one to lull
sleep.
GV khildnd, to
help to eat, to
feed another.
another to sleep.
khilwdnd, to
get one to feed
another.
dildna, to help Uiy*3 dilwana, to
or to cause to get one to give
be given.
ib pildnd, to help
or to make to
drink.
to another.
pilwdnd, to
get one to make
another drink.
333
(ii) Roots of intransitive verbs enclosing short vowels
generally lengthen them to form the first causal and in
consequence of the lengthening of the radical vowel dis-
pense with the addition of ' a ' before the Infinitive ter-
mination ' na.' In the Second Causal the vowel is not
lengthened and * wa ' is therefore inserted, as : —
katna, to be
cut. etc.
IbJ ladna , to be
loaded.
Lyo marna,1 to
die.
katna to cut.
ladna, to load.
U mdrna,
beat, to kill.
bo
(Jl^If kajivana, to
get or cause to
cut.
ladicana, to
get one to load.
° marwand, to
get beaten or
killed.
khulwdna,
to get one to
open a thing.
bandhwa-
na, to get one to
tie something.
(tit) Some formations are slightly irregular owing to
requirements of euphony, as; —
khulna,
opened.
to be
bahdhna, to
be tied.
kholna, to
open.
(IfcjJb bandhna, to
tie.
U£> bikna, to be
sold.
bechna, to
sell.
to be
to
broken.
break.
bikwana, to
help or to get
one to sell ; to
get a thing sold
by eome one to
some one else.
jj tufwana, to
get something
broken by some
1 It never means 4 to be beaten,* which ia expressed by
p»fn£.'
334
to get
chhutna, loose, to
Ga^Jbereleas-
chhulndt\ed, to go
off (as a
[gun).
phatna, to be
torn, to crack,
to explode (as a
bomb).
silna, to be
sewn.
j^ dubna, to be
drowned, to sink
(intr.).
£*» bhlgna, to
get wet.
j nahana, to
bathe, to have a
bath.
jj45* chhorna, to
let go, to leave,
to release, to fire
(as a gun).
«j pharna, to
tear.
u* sma, to sew.
' dabona, to
sink (tr.).
1 bhigona, to
wet.
nahlana, to
bathe (some
one).
one ; to help, to
get or to cause
one to break a
thing.
jj4a. chhurwana,
to help or to
get or to cause
one to leave,
etc.
))*t pharwana, to
get a thing torn
by some one.
silwana, to
help, or to get
some one to sew
something.
dubwana, to
get a thing
sunk by some
one.
bhigwana ,
to have (a thing)
wetted (by some
one).
nahlwana,
to get some one
bathed by some
one else.
I • Qubana ' and ' bhigana' are also used but they are not so good.
335
LL/ kahna, to say. U)^ kahlana,1 to W^ kahltvana, to
cause to be get some one to
said. say something
to some one
else.
(jy /ana, to bring. IMy liwa land, to
have something
brought or car-
ried by some
one.
(iv) A few verbs are both transitive as also intransitive,
as : —
C^> bharna, to fill or to be filled.
j badalna, to change or to be changed.
ghabrana, to confuse, or to be confused, etc.
sharmana, to feel shy or to put to shame.
khujlana, to itch, or to scratch.
NOTE. — Used in their intensive forms they take ' jana ' when
used intransitively and ' dena ' or * lenS ' (according to significa-
tion) when used transitively, as : —
I was alarmed or confused = main ghabra gaya.
I confused him = main ne usko ghabra diya.
304. The First Causals formed from primitive intran-i
tive verbs have the ordinary transitive meaning. It is only
their Second Causals which require the agency of another
person, as: —
He was saved or escaped = wuh bachgaya.
1 saved him = main nc usko bachaya.
I caused him to be saved (by another person) = main ne
usko bach way a.
l ' KahlSn* ' also means « to be called ', as :—
Wuh rajpftl kahlate the • they wore called Rajputs.
336
But the Causals, First or Second, derived from primitive
transitive verbs have always a double transitive significa-
tion, as : —
I wrote a letter = main ne chitfhi likhl
I got the letter written by the munshi = main ne munshijl
8e chifthl likhwd,l.
305. In a good many cases the First and Second
Causals derived from transitive verbs are identical in
meaning and it is a matter of indifference which of them is
used. Usage or euphony, however, sometimes prefer one
to the other, e.g. : —
Have you got his money deposited in the bank or not ?
= tumne uskd rupaya bank ghar men jama* kard (or,
karwd) diyd hai yd nahin ?
Have this parcel sent to-day (by some one else) = yih
pdrsal dj bhijwddo (not bhijddo).
306. When a thing is got done by another with one's
own help or contribution towards it the First Causal is
generally used. But if it is got done by another person
exclusively the Second Causal is used. Through a confusion
of thought they are sometimes used interchangeably,
e.g. :—
I dictated and he wrote (i.e. he wrote to my dictation)
= main ne usko likhdyd (or likhwayd).
I got him to write it = main ne yih us se likhwayd (not
likhdyd).
307. The Agent, through whom a thing is got done,
is followed by ' se ' (by) or by ' ke hath se ' (by the hand
of). But if still another person is involved, he or she takes
* kl ma'rifat ' or ' ke zari'a,' both of which mean ( by means
of ' or * through the medium of,' e.g. —
Get (it) done by him = us se (or, ke hdth se) karwd ,o.
337
Get him to have it done by the munshl = uske zarlta \'or
kl ma^rifat) munshl jl se karao (or kanvato).
308. It must be noted that the causals do not necessarily
imply causation with force at the back of it. They simply
express to get a thing done through another agency with or
without one's own help or force.
Denominative Verb.
309. Denominatives are formed by adding the infinitive
termination c na,' or in some cases ' ana ' to a noun or an
adjective, as : —
bafchshna, to bestow, to forgive (from Persian
' bakhsh ').
fcharldnd, to buy (from Persian * kharld,' buying).
qubulna, to accept (from Arabic ' qubul,' accept-
ance).
bahsna, to argue, to dispute (from Arabic ' bans,
controversy).
langrana, to limp (from Hindi ' langra/ lame).
^^: sharmana, to feel shy or abashed, also to put to
-hi me (from * sharm ' shame, shyness).
.<£ garmana, to be heated, to become warm or angry
(from * garm/ hot or warm).
l!i: MARK.— Some D«-n < -mi natives, which were in use at one
have yielded place to modern compounds, as :—
Old Verb Modern. Signification
UJj>> qubulna W J^j qubul to accept.
karna
bahsna U^ I^A^CU bah* to argue.
karna
garmana byb ^ garm to be hot, warm
hona or angry.
43
338
Old Verb.
A. chaurana
u panydna
mukydnd
Modern.
Ij^ chaura
karnd
(JuJ -^ pdni
dena
mdrna
Signification.
to widen.
to water, to irri-
gate.
to hit with the
fist.
VOCABULARY.
Moonlight, ) .
,. . (chdndnl
Moonlit, (ad].) )
Palace mahal 4
Machine (f.) kal
Blacksmith lohdr
To get burnt jalwdnd
To shake hildnd
To get washed dhulwdnd
Spring (season) bahdr (f.)
Race (f.) daur J^
To cause to run, to gallop
(tr.) daurdnd ^!l;J
Nullah ndld $ti
Over (from on) par se
To jump (intr.) ktidnd
To cause to jump kuddnd
To come to a stop ihamnd
Thanks (to God) shukr
f 1. khizdn
Autumn I 2. vat iha
\ To engage as servant naukar
rakhnd
To get one ( naukar
engaged as( rakhwdnd
a servant. I Cdj^jfj
Sale rate, price ( 1 . nirfeh f-
current. 1^2. bhdto
Finger, small toe
Branch < 2.
3.
Dry sukhd
To be weighed tulnd
To weigh ^o?wa
To get weighed tulwdnd
Efficient, able, ) .
\la,iq
worthy. j
Suit (of clothes) ;ora
un
UJy
1 ' Tahni,' a small branch. 2 « D5li,' a large or small branch.
» ' Shakh ' (general).
339
Grain ddna
Informer mukhbir
nd badal
Thick banks of clouds
kali ghata IV
To roar, to thunder garajna
(f.)
Lightning, electricity bijll
Tiny nanhd
Drop (of f 1. qatra (m.)
liquid) V 2. bund (f .)
Torrential rain musladhar
bdrish ^£^b^(jtJ JL^
Hail-stone old ^1
Heavy shower buchhdr
Sky-light roshanddn
EXERCISE 38.
1. What time do you get up in the morning ? 2. Rouse
him. 3. Get the box lifted up by the coolies (or get the
coolies to lift up the box). 4. When was this palace built ?
5. Who made this machine ? 6. I got it made by a black-
smith. 7. Is the fire burning? 8. Don't burn these
papers. 9. The enemy had the village burnt by his troops.
10. It does not move from its place. 11. Shake the bottle.
12 Don't do it yourself , get it done by the khidmatgar.
13 Did you see it yourself? 14. I have shown him
every thing in the godown. 15. Don't lie down here.
I' Put (lay) him on the bed. 17. Come and sit down.
18. Make him sit down on the chair. 19. When will you
get these clothes washed by the dhobi ? 20. How did the
door open ? Who opened the door ? 21. Get the watch-
man to open it.
EXERCISE 38(a).
L- {> (2) - ^ c--.}J c--^
(3) ?l
\ (6)
. (4) -
JU J», (5)
.340
*ir> (?)
(13) S |;
(12)
- •
^. (is) - ? yy ^ wc. I;L^- (17)
l (20) -1? ^^ ^^^ «lyl ** (19)
(21) - ^ %, ^^ ^lyl
jb (23) - yy _^ <£-! U^l (22)
(25) - S <*. UXj» W i_fi vl 2_ ^ (24)
(26) - ( j«*x-, or )
(27) -(jlytft. or)
(29)
(30)
_ Ox..
(33)
' (28) -( ^cL^or)
K ^j ^ y rr ^ CL
*i (31) - ^ ^=- (J*« ^-
c_TU .-1 (32)
(34)
Ji (36)
(38) -
(40) -
«^y~» OJ
^ (43) - j
A* rT yT (35
- (37)
b (39)
(41)
*!^ (42
341
,3(45;
-(44)
(46) -?U3 ]jb
au j** u^u ^_^, 4zJ (48) - S ^p^v. oi
UJ (50) -UT 1^ j^ (49) -
C1>L» V..^v*M
'
(47)
**u~
(51)
j (53) -
1,^ s. (52)
Miscellaneous Colloquial Sentences.
It is very cloudy to-day.
It appears we shall have rain
to-day.
Look, what a black heavy
cloud has risen from the
east.
What a nice and cool breeze
is blowing!
A strong wind has set in,
it will disperse the clouds.
What is this noise ? Is it
thundering ?
Tin- lightning too is flashing.
It has begun to drizzle.
It is raining cats and dogs.
It is hailing now.
15 the hail-stones
The rain i driving in, shut
th.it -Uy-light.
dj bahut badal hain.
ma'lum hota hai ki dj bdrish
hogi.
dekho, kaisl kali ghajd purab
se u\hi hai.
kaisl \hand\ thahdi hawd chal
rahi hai !
zor ki hawd shunt'1 hoga.i hu> ',
is se bddal phat jd,enge.
yih shor kaisd har ? bddal
garaj rahe hain ?
bijli bhi chamak (or,
rahi hai.
nanhi nanhi bniiden
shurfr hoga,i hain.
musld dhdr bdrish ho rahi hai.
ab ole par rahe hain
dekhOy kitne bare bare ole
hain !
ft&r andar d rahi hai, wuh
roshandnn band kardo.
pat ni
342
Has the rain stopped ? bdrish thamgaj hai ?
The sky has cleared now and asmdn ab bilkul sdf hogayd
the stars have once more hai aur sitdre phir nikal
appeared. d}e hain.
Thank God, it is a moon- fehudd kd shukr hai ki dj rat
lit night. chdndnl hai.
The rains are over now and ab barsdt ho chukl aur fchizdn
the autumn will set in (or pat jhar) kd mausim
shortly. jaldl shuru1 hojd,egd.
What time does the spring is mulk men bahdr kd mausim
season begin in this coun- kab shuru' hold hai ?
try?
Lesson XXXVII.
Direct Narration (oratio recta).
310. The indirect narration (oratio oblique) is very
rarely used in Hindustani, the more vivid form, i.e. the
Direct narration, being generally employed instead. In
other words, when it is intended to reproduce or to repeat
in an objective clause what one said, saw, heard, per-
ceived, felt or thought it is generally put in the original
words used or supposed to have been used.
Examples :—
He might say that he would go ( = I shall go) — = shdyad
wuh kahe ki main jdungd.
Tell him that you cannot go (I cannot go) = us se kahdo
ki main nahln jd saktd.
We shall say that we cannot come = ham kahenge ki ham
nahln d sakte.
You say that you cannot come (I cannot) = turn kahte
ho ki main nahln d saktd.
He said that he would come (= I will come) = us ne
- kahd ki main d,ungd.
343
I have written to him that you are ill (he is ill) = main
ne us ko likhdiyd hai ki wuh bimdr hai.
He asked me whose mistake it was (is) = (i) us ne mujh
se puchha ki yih kiskl ghalti hai — (was, if it relates to
iv mote past) = (ii) us ne mujh se puchha ki yih
kiskl ghalti thl.
He saw that th 3re was (is) no way of escape = us ne
dekhd ki nikalne kd rdsta kot nahln (hai).
We heard that the enemy had (have) fled = ham ne sund
ki dushman bhdg gaye hain.
He thought that the plan would (will) succeed (or I shall
succeed through this plan) = us ne khaydl kiyd ki yih
tadbir kdmydb hojd,egi (or ki main is tadbir se kdmydb
hojdyUiigd.
The general discovered that it was (is) futile to attack
= Jarnail $ahib ne ma'lum kiyd ki hamla karnd
befajda hai.
He expected that he would succeed (I shall succeed) =
usko ummld thl ki main kdmydb hojdtungd.
He dreamt that he was a king (I am a king) = us ne
khvwb dekhd ki main bddshdh hun.
H-- exclaimed with delight that his friend had come
(Hurrah, my friend has come) = wuh khush hokar bol
' i (ha ki aha, merd dost dgayd.
uspected that their intention was (is) not good =
hamko shubha hu,d ki unkl my at achchhl nahin hai.
They concluded (inferred) that the enemy would (will)
give in shortly = unhon ne natljd nikdld ki dushman
jaldi hdr man legd.
I feared that he would (will) come (lest he should come)
= mujhe (I ar thd ki wuh djd,ega (or ki wuh a na ' jate).
* Lest ' takes its verb in the negative
344
I said to myself that I was bound to succeed this time
(I shall certainly succeed) = main ne apne dil men
kaha ki is da fa zarur kamyab hunga.
NOTE. — It will have been noticed that the objective clause
is generally introduced by ' ki' (that), which may, however, be
understood.
311. The Indirect Narration is, however, preferred (not
necessarily used) to convey an order to a third person,
as : —
Tell him to come here (tell him that he should come
here) =usko bolo ki yahdn a,e (or not so good ayo).
312. The Direct Narration occasionally occurs within
Direct Narration, as :—
He said that the bearer had given it out that the sahib
was a very rich man = -MS ne kaha ki bahre ne kaha
hai ki sahib bare daulatmand adml hain.
313. In spite of all that has been said above, ambiguity
does occur, especially in involved sentences, in which case
the substitution of a pronoun by a proper noun or some
other course is resorted to by way of explanation, as :—
I told him that you (Akbar) were not in Delhi = main
ne us se kah diya tha ki Akbar Delhi men nahin hai.
NOTE. — Here 'wuh' instead of Akbar might refer to quite
another person.
314. It is always more elegant to split the infinitive
into a subordinative objective clause when it occurs in
English in its objective relation to a finite verb of this
kind, as: —
I told him to go (that you may go) = main ne usko kaha
ki ja,o.
The General ordered us to attack (' attack') = Jar nail
sahib ne hukm diya ki hamla karo.
345
He regretted to have gone there (' why did I go there ')
= us ne afsos kiya ki main wahdn kyon giya.
He did not know what to do (' what should I do ? ')
= wuh hairan tha ki main kiya karuh.
315. Whilst we are at it we might as well dispose of
the subordinate clauses denoting interest or purpose.
When they relate to present or future they are expressed
by the Present Subjunctive, but when the opportunity
for the attainment of purpose is past without its realiza-
tion it is preferably put in the Past Conditional (or
Optative), as : —
Walk quickly that we may not be late = jaldl chalo ki
der na hoja,e.
Be careful lest you miss the train = fchabardar aisa na
ho ki gar I se rahja,o.
I think we might try once more = mera khaydl hai ki
ham ek dafa phir koshish karen.
I had thought to have gone there but you did not
allow me to go = mera khayal tha ki main wahan jata
(not so good * jaun ') lekin turn ne jane na diya.
VOCABULARY.
Distant dur ka ' K;^J
Sub-Inspector of Police
inadar J J
Police station thdna
To declare on oath qasm
khakar kahna
To avenge oneself on-for —
(se-ka-) badla lena
UuJ *Jjj ( -
i iir.'itinn (f.) tahqiqat
cytiuc»JJ Hotel hotal
investigate (ki babat) Invasion charhafi ^'Ubj*^
tahqiqat karna To invade (par) charhaf
) karna
U an attributive adjective, i.e., when preceding the noun it qualifies.
346
Magistrate Majasfret sahib
Unanimously yak zabdn
Journey, voyage safar
Recommendatory letter
sifarishi chitthl
Thief chor"
Proved sabit
To prove sabit karna
( 1. munh
Face ]
( 2. chihrd
Forged (fictitious)
To escape (with one's "life)
bachkar nikalnd UJLCi
Possible mumkin
Impossible nd mumkin
Warning (remonstration)
fahmajsh
( fahmajsh
^ karna
\ b
To admonish,
To warn.
Otherwise
.. nahlii to
\2. i')arna
To regret, >
rr, f pachtana
To repent. (
Climate (f.) ab-o-hawa
Bear (m.)
c\.
)
( 2.
\. rlchh
Deer
Peacock mor
Holy, sacred, pure pdk
Tame C L
Preserve (forest) raM (f.)
Knowingly /aw ke
Bait or fodder char a *j(*>.
By chance ittifaq se ^^ j^j'
To drive, to beat (game)
hanknd UXiU
Crocodile magar machh
Alligator gharyal
Fishing rod banal
Fishing line (f.) dor
EXERCISE 39.
I. He said that he was going to a distant country.
2. They said that they were dying of (from) hunger.
3. He denied that he was a thief. 4. The Sub-Inspector
of Police replied that he was still investigating the
matter. 5. He asked me what had become of my orderly.
347
6. He swore that he would avenge himself on him. 7. He
enquired of me what was the shortest way to the Railway
i ion. 8. I asked him why he was staying in the hotel.
9. He asked me if I was going that day. 10. They heard
that the king had died. 11. He thought that he also
could make a machine like that. 12. We expected to cap-
ture the position. 13. The general concluded that it was
difficult to invade the country during the winter. 14. I
told him to keep quiet. 15. The Magistrate asked him to
bring up witnesses. 16. He advised me to apply for leave,
EXERCISE 39(a).
I** (2) - ^yt &J ^ AJ vJ5;!yl *A£ ** l^ <i~l (1)
^J f *s ^ L. u^l (3)
,K *i ** 1*3 I/ L. f (4) - ^t- ^ GI
uL BU (5) - KjJUy
,L ^^-U y$l J (6) - <*_
t^i 1. v^^ j (7)
i.; y ^ K^Iij v^^U ^ U3 L/ ^_ ^ (8)
^^ (9) -.Xu^!
<*„ U^r yL> (10) - £.
*r i/yT i. ^f (11) -
r ^/l ^^C/^^f^^ (12)
1. ^^U (13)
^
- ^
348
(16)
lyU (17)
xj (18)
A.; U „¥ yT
Uu,
(19) - A.
f (20)
-A. J^
<L ^1 (23) -
(24)
(21)
|yt
- t^J
(22)
U^
XJ Jy« Jj
(25)
Miscellaneous Colloquial Sentences.
I intend to go on two
months' leave.
I think change of climate
will do him lot of good.
There is lot of shooting to
be had in Kashmir.
Are there any tigers there ?
Not many. But there is
any number of bucks and
bears.
It is against orders to shoot
peacocks.
Because it is the Hindu's
sacred bird.
mera irdda hai ki do mahlne
ki MiutU par ja,uh.
mere khayal men ab-o-hawa
badalne se usko bahut
fa,ida hog a.
Kashmir men shikar bahut
hai.
wahan sher haiii ?
sher bahut nahin lekin hiran
aur richh (or bhalu) beshu-
mar haiii.
mor ko marna (or mor ka
shikar karna) mana* hai.
kyon ki Hindu isko pak
parinda khayal karte hain.
349
Is it wild or tame ?
What kind of shooting can
he had in this preserve ?
I did not shoot it purposely.
The bullet hit him acciden-
tally.
How many coolies do we
want to beat the game ?
\\ • can drive in a tonga
half the way, the rest of
it we shall have to do on
foot.
There is a big crocodile in
this river.
We killed a large alligator.
Where can I get a fishing
rod?
Put some bait on the hook.
Reel up this line.
yih jangll hai ya palu ?
is rakh men kaun kaunsa
shikar milta hai ?
main ne janke usko nahin
mara.
ittifaq se uske ' goli lagga,\.
shikar ko hankne ke waste
kitne qulion kl zarurat
hogl.
adhe raste tak \anga ja sakta
hai, baql safar paidal karna
hoga.
is darya men ek bara magar
machh hai.
ham ne ek bara gharyal mara.
bansl kahan se milegl (or,
mil saktl hai)
kahlte par kuchh char a lagado.
yih dor lape(do.
Lesson XXXVIII.
Participles.
The Present and the Past Participles.
:;16. How the Present and the Past Participles enter
into the formation of tenses and some compound verbs and
th< ir occasional use as a noun have already been explained,
we intend to illustrate their use as an adjective,
Bad an par ' understood after • ko.'
350
in which case, like other adjectives, they are used both
attributively as well as predicatively.
317. Used attributively, i.e., preceding the noun they
qualify, they invariably agree with it and are generally
followed by ' hu,a ' * which also changes to agree with the
noun, as :—
Present Participle :
Burning fire = jalti hutl ag.
Wayfaring travellers = rah chaltehti,e musafir.
To the fleeing enemy = bhagte hu,e dushman ko.
Up till the last breath = marte dam talc.
REMARK. — When the English Present Participle does not
denote an action in progress and is used in its generic sense,
implying a characteristic quality, the agentive construction is
used, as : —
Flesh-eating animals = gosh khdnewdle jdnwar.
Fighting race = larne wall qaum.
Lying individual = jhut bolnewdld admi.
Past Participle :
Written paper = likha hup Icaghaz.
Torn blankets = phate hu}e kambal.
Burnt bread = jail hu,l roti.
Broken arm = i^uta huya bazu.
REMARK. — Since the Past Participle so used is passive in its
character, it generally comes from the intransitive verb, unless
no such verb is conveniently handy.
318. Used predicatively the two participles do not
follow the same rules and we shall, therefore, deal with
them separately now.
1 As a matter of fact the use of ' hi3,a ' with the participial adjectives
is solely meant to distinguish them from other uses of the Participles.
It can, therefore, be optionally left out when there can be no likelihood
of ambiguity.
351
The Present Participle.
319. If the Present Participle qualifies a subject in the
nominative it agrees with the subject and is generally
followed by ' hu,a ', as : —
He was going along laughing = wuh hahsta hutd ja rahd
thd.
The tiger rushed to me roaring = sher garajtd hu,d men
taraf jhapfa.
She came to me limping = wuh langratl hu,i mere pas
ft,I.
320. If it qualifies a subject followed by * ne,' or a
logical subject, in any case other than the nominative, it is
constructed absolutely (i.e., ends in ' e '), as :—
He said laughing = us ne hanste hu,e kahd.
The lion attacked me roaring = sher ne garajte huye mujh
par hamla kiyd.
I am afraid of going there (or whilst going there) = mujh
ko \vahah jdte hii,e dar lagtd hai.
Did you not feel ashamed to do this (whilst doing this) ?
«= tumko yih karte hute sharm na a,l ?
REMARK. — This absolute construction >has a very useful
;iiiiLr in that it denotes "when or while doing a thing,"
AS: —
When or whilst writing = likhte hu ,e.
When or whilst starting = chalte hu,e.
This idea is also commonly expressed by adding ' wa
., after the Participle which then dispenses with '1m
Wh»Mi not while) writing « likhte waqt.
When speaking = bolte waqt.
When attacking = hamla karte waqt.
321. When it qualifies an object in the accusative case
in its nominative form), it may either agree with the
352
object or be constructed absolutely, the former course is
much more preferable, as : —
I have never seen a thunderbolt (lightning) falling =
main ne bijll girll (or girtl hii,i) kabhl nahln dekhl.
We saw hailstones actually falling = ham ne ole parte (or
parte hu,e) dekhe.
I saw an aeroplane flying this morning = main ne aj
subah ek hawa-l jahdz urta (or urta hu}a) dekha.
322. When the qualified object is followed by * ko ' no
agreement takes place, and the Participle may be either
in its nominative form or constructed absolutely, the latter
course being, however, preferable especially if the Participle
is transitive, as : —
I saw them running = (i) main ne unko daurta (or, daurta
hit, a) dekha. (ii) main ne unko daurte (or daurte huse)
dekha.
I heard him lying deliberately = main ne usko janbujhkar
jhut bolte (or bolte hu}e) sund.
I have never seen him doing his work = main ne usko
apnd kdm karte (or karte hii,e) kabhl nahm dekha.
323. When the Participle expresses gradual progress
towards the accomplishment of the action denoted by the
finite verb it is always constructed absolutely and repeated
and discards the ' ml, a ' part of it, as :—
Going along we reached Delhi = ham chalte chalte Dilli
pahunche.
Gradually he rose to be a Premier = hole hole wuh Wazlr
A'azam hogaya.
It has gradually worn out to half its original size = yih
ghiste ghiste ab adha rahgaya hai.
324. This construction is also used when the action
denoted by the final verb immediatly follows a continuance
of the one denoted by the Participle, as : —
353
He continued to read till he fell asleep = wuh parhte
parhte so gayd.
J5. It must be noted that what ends in "ing" in
English is not always Present Participle. One needs, there-
fore, to be very cautious when translating it into Hindu-
stani, e.g. : —
Lying is a sin = jhuj bolnd gundh hai (noun).
1 1 is not a wise thing to pour oil into the burning fire =
jaltl hu,i dg men tel ddlnd 'aql ki bat nahin (adjective).
Tiger is a flesh-eating animal = sher gosht-khdnewdld
jdmcar hai (generic adj.).
\Vlio is coming on the road ? = sarak par kaun dtd hai?
(Present Participle).
326. The Hindustani Present Participle, when so used,
always denotes an action in progress. But this is not
always so in English. Sometimes the English Present
Participle denotes a completed action, in which case it
must be translated by the Past Participle in Hindustani,
e.g :—
He is sitting (seated) in the office = wuh daftar men
bai(hd (or, baijhd hu,d) hai.
The book is lying (laid) on the table = kitdb mez par
pan (or parl hu,\) hai.
Who is standing at the door ? = darwdze par kaun khard
(or khard hu,d) hai ?
They were hiding (hidden) in a jungle = wuh ek jahgal
men chhipe (or chhipe huye) the.
It is inclining (inclined) to the right = yih dd,iii taraf
jhukd hu,d hai.
He is lying (laid) on the bed = wuh chdrpdti par lt(a
(or U(a hutd) hai.
One corner of it was projecting (projected) outwards =
uskd ek kona bdhir ko nikld AM// M-/.
45
354
He was wearing a khaki co&t=iuuh T^haki kot pahine1
(or pahine hu,e) tha.
He was holding a club in his hand=uw& lathi hath
men li,el (or li,e M,e) tha.
327. When the Present Participle is used as a com-
plement to
nazar ana ~\
dikha,l dena to appear, etc.
(jyt -yl*'* ma^lum hona)
it also expresses likelihood or possibility, as : —
Mujhe yih bat banti (or hotl) dikhaj nahin deti = I do not
see any likelihood (or possibility) of its success (Lit.
this does not appear to me likely to succeed) .
Hamkoyihadml bachta nazar nahm ata (or ma'liim nahin
hota) = I do not see any hope, likelihood or possibility
of this man escaping or recovering.
328. <Hota hu,a' (or ( se hota hu,a'), and ' hokar '
(or ' se hokar ') have a curious but logical meaning of
' via.' Those constructed with ' se ' imply breakage of a
journey as well, e.g. : —
I shall go to Delhi via Lahore =main Lahore hota hu,a
(or hokar) Delhi jafinga.
I shall break my journey at Lahore while going to
Delhi = main Lahore se hota M,a (or se hokar) Delhi
ja,uhga.
The Past Participle.
329. When the Past Participle is intransitive and
qualifies a subject or an object without any postposition
after it, it (the Participle) agrees with the subject or the
object, as : —
l Vide rule 332.
355
Qualifying a subject.
This paper is torn = yih kaghaz phafa hu,d hai.
Who is safe (i.e. , free) from sin in this world ? = is dunyd
men kaun gundh se bachd hu,d hai ?
Is the Sahib up or not ? =-- sahib uthe hu,e hain yd nahm ?
The horse was tied to a tree = ghord darakht ke sdth
bandhd hu,d thd.
He is a deserter from his regiment = wuh apni paljan se
bhdgd hu ,d hai.
Qualifying an object.
I saw a 10-rupeenote (lying) fallen in the street — main
ne ek das rupai lea not gait men gird huyd (or para hv,d)
dekhd.
He gave me both the glasses in a broken condition
= us ne mujhe donoh gilds Me hu,e diye the.
Don't leave the door open — darwdza khuld (or khuld
hu,d) mat chhoro.
T saw fifty passengers seated in that compartment
= main ne us fchdne men pachas musdfir baithe (or
baithe hu,e) dekhe.
330. If the subject is followed by ' ne ' or if it is a
logical subject, followed by some other postposition, and
Past Participle qualifying it is intransitive, the latter is
constructed absolutely, ending in * e * and is generally
followed by *hu,e,' as : —
I fired (whilst) mounted on my horse =* main ne ghore
par chafhe hu,e bandHq chalaj.
He heard the news whilst he was seated in the office
= its ne da f tar men baithe hu,e yih fchabar sunl.
331. If the Participl< i- intransitive and qualifies an
object followed by * ko ' it is put in its crude form, ending
in '&,' as:—
356
Don't leave the doors open = darwdzon ko khula (or
khula hu,a) matchhoro.
I saw them seated in the verandah = main ne unko
bardmde men bai^ha (or baitha hu,a) dekha.
332. If the Past Participle is transitive and Us own
object is expressed with it, it is always constructed
absolutely, ending in ' e ' and ' hu,e ' may follow it,
as : —
Qualifying a subject.
He was drunk = wuh sharab pl,e (or pl,e hu,e) tha.
I went with my uniform on = main wardi pahne (or
pahine hu,e) giya.
The porter is following them with (i.e., carrying) a trunk
on his shoulder = qull trank kandhe par utha,e unke
plchche pichhe jd raha hai.
Qualifying an object.
I saw him drunk = main ne usko sharab pl,e (or pi,e
hute) dekha.
I saw them dressed in khaki = main ne unko fehaki kapre
pahine (or pahine huye) dekha.
NOTE. — It is. absolutely necessary for this construction that
the object of the Past Participle be mentioned.
333. If the subject or the object happens to be the
object of the Participle as well, it agrees with it provided
it is in the nominative form, as : —
The receipt reached me cancelled = rasld mansukh kl
hu,i mere pas pahunchl.
I saw the receipt cancelled = main ne rasid mansukh kl
hu,i dekhi thi.
334. When the Participle is repeated to express a con-
tinued state it dispenses with 'hu,a,' as:—
You, too, keep on inventing news, seated idle as you
are — turn bhi bai(he baithe khabren gharte rahieho.
357
He goes about all day long with his orderly (taking his
orderly with him) = wuh ardali ko sdth ll,e llte sard din
phirtd rahtd hai.
Lying as I was I fell asleep = main Ufa left, sogayd.
NOTE. — ' Hu,a ' is also understood in a few adjectives and
adverbial phrases : as a matter of fact it can always be left out,
if it> absence will cause no ambiguity.
Phald phuld bdgh = a garden in full bloom and bearing
an abundance of fruit.
Tufa phufa makdn = dilapidated building.
Ankhofi dekhl bat (i.e., dnkhon se dekhl hu}l bat) = an eye-
witnessed fact.
Kanon aunl bat (i.e., kdnon se sum M,» bat) = hearsay.
Mahabbat bharl nigah (i e., mahabbat se bharl hu,l nigah)
= affectionate look.
A,e din = every (arrived) day.
Ulte pdon = without stopping (lit. on turned feet).
Dabe pdoh = on tip- toe, with silent tread (lit. on sup-
pressed feet).
Dabi zuban se — - with bated breath (lit. with suppressed
tongue).
335. A curious use of the Participle consists in inserting
4 hu a ' between it and the various tenses of ' hona ' (to be).
What is still more curious is that in the case of transitive
verbs the subject is put in the Agentive ! case (i.e., with
fne ' after it), as : —
He is come (i.e., he came here some time ago and is
still staying here) = wuh dyd hu^d hai.
He has been away (lit. gone) for (lit. from) two days —
ivuh do din kd (or, ae) giyd huyd hai.
He has got the letter written ready (or, he has already
written the letter) = usne chichi likhl A6,t hai.
1 Especially in the Punjab.
358
He had the book (put) in his pocket = us ne kitdb jeb
men doll huy% thi.
I was under the impression that he was a Mohamedan
= main usko musalmdn samjha hu,a tha.
NOTE. — This construction shifts one's mind from the action
itself to the state of the subject or the object after the comple-
tion of an action. Contrast the above with the following corres-
ponding tense formations which deal with the action only : —
He has come (no\v) = wuh aya hai.
He has gone (now) = wuh giya hai (or cfiala giya hai).
He has written the letter = us ne chitthi likhl hai.
He had put the book in his pocket = us ne kitdb jeb men dall
thi.
I had thought him to be a Mohamedan or I had mistaken
him for a Mohamedan = main usko musalman samjha tha.
336. The Participle of a transitive verb is sometimes used
with its corresponding intransitive finite verb to express
possibility. The Participle in such cases is merely used as
a noun and can be optionally replaced by infinitive, e.g. : —
This will (or can) not be done by my efforts to do it
(i.e., as for me I cannot do it) = yih kdm mere ki,e se
na hogd.
This dispute will (or can) not be settled by his efforts to
settle it (i.e., as for him he cannot settle this dispute)
= yih jhagrd uske mitd,e se na mijegd.
He may be saved by your efforts to save him = shdyad
wuh tumhdre bachd,e se bachjd}e.
VOCABULARY.
• 1. qatra (m.) *&* Marksman nishdnabdz
2. bund (f.) iy 3^
To boil (liquids) fctoufoa To be trained 5a<^
/lntr v (jj ^ To train sadhdnd
\
To boil (liquids) khauldnd Efface ™&™
,tr \ (j)j £ To be effaced mitnd
059
To abuse (filthy abuse) (ko)
f]<lli dend (1>J ^1
1 (f.) kamar
To be loaded ladnd
T.. load ladna
Bundle gathri
Under the arm baghal men
To rot
sarnd
To be ruined, wasted or cast
to the winds barbdd hond
To ruin, to waste barbdd
kar LLf jb ^
Bent (on) (par) tula hu,d
]3* * (f, )
Corn andj ^-Ul
To such an extent that, until
yahdii tak ki &.< cJo ui^)
To check, to examine partdl
karnd
To be spread (bed, etc.)
ftichhnii
To spread (bed, etc.)
bichhdnd
Epistle, note ruq'a <ui;
To change sides (in sleep,
etc.) karwat badalnd
To be petrified pathrdnd
Stone patthar
Staying, lodging
Rolling and tumbling girta
partd C5jj (jj
Done, tried, experimented
hdth se nikld hu,d
lyt KS ^
Seal, stamp (f.) wiw/ir
To seal, to stamp (par)
lagdnd (J'O ^ (
Ready made band bandy d
Godown,
Store.
/ goddm
EXERCISE 40.
1. Put two drops of it in the boiling water. 2. H<
boldly faced the roaring lion. 3. It requires an expert
marksman to hit a flying bird. 4. He saved me from a
sinking boat. 5. The trained horses of cavalry understand
words of command like men. 6. No one can efface tin-
predestined (written) fate. 7. I have with me a receipt
signed by you. 8. The doctor took out pieces of
broken bone. 0. Wliil t tiring look straight at the target.
360
10. Whilst leaving Lahore I told you that I should not be
back before Sunday. 1 1. I went there running all the way.
12. She came to me crying. 13. I saw the child falling
from the roof. 14. I heard him abusing the recruit.
15. Did you see him do this ? 16. Did you see the train
start? 17. Climbing on we eventually reached the top.
IS. I served Government till I grew old. 19. They were all
loaded with sacks of corn. 20. A red kamberband was tied
round (in) his waist. 21. Thousands of tents were pitched
in an open space 22. She was sitting in the drawing
room. 23. It was lying on my table. 24. He was wearing
khaki uniform. 25. He was holding (taking) a bundle
under his arm. 26. I saw the box locked. 27. Lying as it
was for a long time it rotted. 28. He won't understand it
by my explaining (it to him).
EXERCISE 40(a).
1 KI kara.I mihnat = all the labour done (by myself and by others
on my behalf). ' KI ' Fern. Past Participle from ' karna ' and • kara,I '
Fern. Past Part, from « karanS,' both agreeing with « mihnat.'
361
J^» (11) - <*^Xy> £ *} <£^J? £\ \-^*» *j i»r^f (1^)
A* **=-* J^ ^ u~^ (12) - I/ lj,J ^J
J Af «vjS JfJ Ut; |jj AJ^ ^J ^j^ (13)
jj (14)
(15)
(18) - *. fc e- ^ ,»*»/ ^ v urfj* (17)
^r c=V (19) - (43 bj 4?^ *»*;
»l; L, (20)
*i J^7- J^r- (21)
(22)
f3 (23)
(25) -? W UL ^L uy^ 4.1 J> JL/ juyu! ^ (24)
j (28) - 2U%y <Lyt iyt^u; ^ (27)
^XJ ,xj (30) -»UT «; ^ <3- (29)
«J?yt» ^J (31)
e -L/ ^^ c-^oJi ^ (32)
(34) - ±. lyt U ^ ^ ^j UV- ^ (33)
^^ (35) - 4. lyt UT x
1.^ *i (37) - 4- lyb JU> ^ *43U c-^ ^ ^— *i (36)
1 Yahah tak ki = until, to such an extent that.
9 "BachgayS" is uaed when one escape* something harmful or
unpleasant whilst "rahgayR" denotes to be on the verge of doing a
thing which, somehow or other, was not done.
46
362
<*-!>•> l J*
Miscellaneous Colloquial Sentences.
How long have you been
here, Sir ?
I have been about 2\ months
here.
Do you like this place ?
What do you think of its
climate ?
I like this place very much.
I loathe the place.
The climate here is very
bad.
Does the climate suit you ?
I have been ill ever since
I came here.
I have applied for transfer.
What cities of India have
you seen ?
So far I have seen only
Bombay and Calcutta.
Have you visited the coun-
try side ?
se yahan hain ?
main arhd,i ek mahine se
yahan hun.
dp ko yih jaga pasand hai ?
yahan kl db-o-hawd dpkl rd,e
men kaisl hai?
mujhe yih jaga bahut pasand
hai. [hai.
mujhe is jaga se ban nafrat
yahdn kl db-o-hawd bahut
khardb hai.
db-o-hawd dpkl tabl'at ke
mudfiq hai ?
jab se yahdn dyd hun bimdr
rahtd hun.
main ne tabdlll ke waste
darbhwdst dedl hai,
dp ne Hindustan ke kaun
kaun se shahr dekhe hain ?
ab tak sirf Bombay aur
Calcutta dekhd hai.
dp kis^ jaga dehdt men bhl
gaye hain.
1 ' Hah ' (yes) here serves to introduce an after thought. It is also
often used to express " agreed," in which case it can stand for English
4 No," said in answer to a question put in the negative (vide footnote 1,
page 303).
363
What do you think of the
people there ?
I should like to spend some
time among them but I
get no leisure.
They arc very simple and
guileless people.
They are not cunning and
dishonest like most of the
townsfolk.
But city people are not all
dishonest,
not all, but a majority
<>f them are regular cheats
and swindlers
wahan ke admioii ki nisbat
ap ka kya khayal hai ?
merd dil bahut chahta hai
ki kuchh waqt un men
milkar guzarun lekin fur-
sat nahln miltl.
wuh bare sidhe sade log
hain ?
wuh aksar shahrlon ki tarah
makkar aur be-lman nahln.
lekin shahroh ke rahne wale
sab be-iman nahih note.
hail ' sab be-iman nahln
hote lekin aksar pakke
\hag aur ga$h katre hote
\ain.
Lesson XXXIX.
Participles (Condu>/
Conjunctive Participle.
; 7. The main use of this Participle is to combine two or
more sentences into one and thus to miniinis" the use of
' and ', as :-
He dined and went away (having dined he went away)
= wuh khana khakar chalagaya.
tie came and saw the wounded (having come he saw
the wounded) = us ne akar zakhmion ko dekha.
(yes) here stands for English • No/ said in answer to a
question put in the negative.
364
338. This Participle is used when the subject (gramma-
tical or logical) of the sentences joined by it is one and the
same and the tense of their verbs also the same, as : —
Go and see if the mail has come (or not) '? = jakar
(or jdke) dekho ki dak d,i hai yd nahin ?
He will come and stay here at least three days = wuh
yahan akar kam az kam tin din rahegd.
If he had seen it and told me all about it, there would
have been no mistake at all = agar wuh use dekhkar
sab hdl mujhe batlddetd to bilkul ghalti na hoti.
He comes and dines here every day = wuh har roz yahan
akar hhdnd khdtd hai.
He came and dined here every day = wuh har roz yahan
akar khdnd khata thd.
I have seen and replied to it = main ne usko dekhkar
jawdb dediyd hai.
I saw him and told him this at the very moment = main
ne use dekhkar usl waqt yih kahdiyd (thd).
I went to my house and suddenly got fever = ghar jakar
mujhe bufehdr hogayd (subject logically the same).
NOTE. — It will be observed that the only condition necessary
for the use of this Participle is the similarity of the subjects
and the tenses. Thus it can be used in tenses which do not
admit a similar construction in English. For instance, Im-
perative, Future, etc.
339. If the subjects or tenses are different the sentences
or clauses must be constructed separately, as :-—
The Police having arrived, the thieves fled away (when
the Police arrived, etc.) = jab Pulis pahunchl chor
bhdg gaye.
He has arrived to-day and will go to Lahore to-morrow
= wuh dj yahdn pahunchd hai aur kal Lahore jd,egd.
340. When two or more sentences are united into one
by the Conjunctive Participle the subject does or does not
365
take ' ne ' according to the last verb. But in case the union
is effected by ' aur ' (and), the use of ' ne ' is determined by
the first verb. The subject, in this case, need not be men-
tioned more than once, but in case it is mentioned, which
is, to say the least, not good, its construction is governed
by its own verb in each case, as : —
He sat down and wrote a letter = (i) usne baijhkar chichi
likhl. (ii) wuh baith gay a aur (us ne) chitfhi likhl.
I read the letter and began to think over its contents =
(i) main chitfhl parhkar uska mat lab sochne lagd.
(ii) main ne chichi parhi aur (main) uska matlab sochne
laga.
341. As is obvious from the examples given already,
thid Participle denotes priority of one action to another.
The priority or precedence may be—
(t) Merely temporal, i.e., two or more actions taking,
e one. after the other without any further relation,
as :—
He came and went away = wuh akar chalagaya.
(ii) Preliminary, as :—
He went and sat in a corner = wuh ek kone men ja baijha
(or jakar baithgaya).
I le bought (and gave) me a pistol = usne mujhe ek pistaul
kharid diya (fcharid kar diya).
NOTE. — To convey this sense or that of rapid succession of
Actions or events the Participle generally and preferably appears
la its root form and oftener than not immediately before the
fit, it- \.-i !.
(tn) Circumstantial or Adverbial, i.e., expressing the
attendant circumstance of the prin«-i|»al action, as :—
He said laughingly = us ne hahskar kaha.
I went at a run = main daur kar giya.
Listen attentively (applying ears) « lean lagakar suno*
366
Work attentively (applying the heart or mind) = dil
lagdkar kdm karo.
You did this deliberately (having thought and known) =
turn ne yih jdn bujhkar kiyd.
Why did you come late (having delayed) ? = turn der
karke kyoh dte?
Kindly tell me the whole truth (having done kindness)
= mihrbdnl karke mujhe sach sach batld,iye.
You ought to live amicably (having united) = tumko
milkar rahnd chdhlye.
Now all of you try together (jointly, having joined) =
ab turn sab milkar koshish karo.
(iv) Instrumental or causative, i.e., expressing means
to an end, or the cause of an action, as : —
He killed him with a blow of the sword = us ne usko
talwdr mdrkar (or talwdr se) mar ddld.
I shot him dead (hitting with a bullet) = main ne usko
goll mdrkar (or goll se) mar ddld.
I live on teaching Hindustani to the European gentle-
men = main Sdhiboh ko Hindustani parhdkar guzdra
kartd hun.
He was mighty angry at (hearing) the impertinent answer
•= wuh yih gustd^hdna jawdb sunkar sakht ndrdz
hogayd.
1 am very glad to see (having seen) you, Subedar Sahib !
= Subeddr jSdhib, main dp ko dekhkar bahut khush Jiuja,
hun.
NOTE. — In the case of causation, if the final action is not an
immediate sequence of the reason, the Participle is generally
expanded into a causal clause, as :—
Being ill (i.e., because he was ill) he could not go on
active service = chunki wuh bimdr thd is li,e lardtl par
na jd saka.
367
(v) Con tradistinctive, i.e., expressing contrast. In this
case it is generally, though not invariably, followed by
1 bhi ' (even), as :—
He is as foolish as he was in spite of all his learning =
wuh itnd 'Urn parhkar bhi beivaquf ka beivaqiif ' rahd.
Although a Mohamadan, you do not say your prayers =
turn musalmdn hokar (or hokar bhi) nimdz nahln parhte.
342. In a few expressions the Conjunctive Participle
and the principal verb change places, so that the main
thought lies in the former, as : —
I sent for him = main ne usko buld bhejd (for, main ne
usko ad ml bhejkar bulwdyd).
He sent me an oral message = usne muihe kahld bhejd
(for, usne mujhe adml bhejkar kahldyd),
We have had our fill = ham pet (or jl) bhar kar kha
chuke hain (for, ham khdkar pet bhar chuke hain).
343 To express continuity or repetition of an action its
root part is repeated ; similarly if two conjunctive parti-
ciples of allied verbs are put together, the participial ending
' kar ' or c ke ' appears only once and the conjunctive * and '
is left out, as : —
Repeated beatings have made him obdurate = wuh mar
%ha kha kar dhl(h hogiyd hai (lit. having suffered
repeated beatings he has become obdurate).
I am tired of going there = main wahan ja jd kar thak-
gayd hun.
In ;ill three rupees have been saved (or left over) *=le de
kar tin rupai bache hoih (lit. having taken and given).
Always act or do your work thoughtfully = soch samajh-
kar kdm kiyd karo (having thought and understood)
We shall have finished our dinner and be ready at 10
o'clock — ham Ichdnd kha pi kar das baje tayyar hoja tenge.
I BewaqGf ka btwoqfif = fool as before.
368
344. Since the Participle denotes completion of one
action before another, it is not used in the negative unless
it stands as a reason for the finite verb, in which case also
its use is rare, as :—
Seeing no way of escape we hoisted the white flag =
bachne ka rdsta na dekhkar (or chunki ham ne bachne
ka rdsta na dekhd) safed jhandd khara kardiyd.
Not having received a reply to my letter I wired = apne
Ighat ka jawab na pa Tear main ne tar dediya (or chunki
mere khat ka jawab na ay a thd main ne tar dediya.
345. The Participle, however, acquires negative signifi-
cation, as it were, by reflection from a negative finite verb,
as : —
Don't go and associate with them = unke pas jdkar na
baithd karo (or, don't go to sit with them).
T shall go without having my food = ham khdnd khdkar
nahin jde,nge.
I shall drink without mixing soda (in it) = ham soda
mildkar nahin pl,enge.
NOTE. — This construction is too idiomatic to be imitated by
a beginner.
340. The use of too many participles is deprecated, the
sentences being advantageously broken where there is
greater pause, as : —
Having dined and slept for an hour and then getting up
and having dressed himself he rode to the Mess = wuh
khana khdkar so rahd, ek ghanja ardm karke uthd, aur
kapre pahine, phir sawdr hokar miskot ko chald gayd.
347. The Passive of the Conjunctive Participle is not
in use in Hindustani, its place is taken up by a transitive
or intransitive Participle. Tf the finite verb is in the gram-
matical Passive the Participle generally comes from a
transitive, otherwise from an intransitive verb, as : —
369
A note having been written was despatched by a peon =
ek rwfa likhkar chaprdsi ke hath bhejd gay a.
Having been arrested he was brought into the Police
Station = wuh (or usko) glriftdr karke thane men Idyd
gayd.
Having been falsely accused they were put into the prison
= unpar jhutd ilzdm lagdkar unko qaid kar diyd gaya.
You will be court-martialled and hanged = tumhara korj
marshal karke tumko phdnsl diyd jd,egd.
The bird having been frightened flew away = wuh
parinda dar kar urgayd.
Have all my clothes been washed and brought back or
not ? = hamdre sab kapre dhulkar wdpis dgaye hain
yd nahtn ?
Now the jungles have been cut down and cleared (of
all growth) = ab jangal kat kar sdf> hogaye hain.
Having been driven to helplessness he sued for peace =
us ne Idchdr hokar sulah kl darfehwdst kl.
NOTE. — If the action denoted by the Participle lacks
int. -MI inn or is the outcome of chance it naturally comes from
an intransitive verb, as :—
Having been wounded he was taken prisoner = wuh zak&mi
hokar palqra gaya.
348. Please also note the use of the following Conjunc-
tive Participles :—
karke ^= by ; as, by the name or title of—
fehdskar = specially.
M yaqln karke «= for a certainty, believing.
chhorkar — excepting, leaving out.
marpHkar=* with great difficulty.
khudd fchudd karke «= with great difficulty
(lit. .ift- ••(! prayers to Qod).
U)^> jon ton karke = somehow or 01
47
370
^ job jakar 1 = then and then only (not
^J tab jakar J before).
cub batkatka.r = interrupting conversation, object-
ing.
£_ ^ K3 Ij3 zara zard fcar&e = little by little, in every
minute detail.
Examples :—
Dodo karke a,o = come in twos (two by two).
Main ne usko beta karke paid = I brought him up as a son.
Mujhe Thakardass karke pukdrte hain = people call me
(by the name of) Thakardass
Main usko kiyd karke likhun = what title should I
address him by ?
Turn ko har waqt chaukas rahna chahiye khaskar in
dinon = you should always be on the alert especially
in these days.
Yagin karke jano ki = believe me sincerely (or honestly)
that—
Do ko chhorkar sab na,e rangrut hain = excepting two all
are new recruits.
Ek chhor kar dusra makan mere bha,l ka hai= the next
house but one belongs to my brother.
Afehir sham ke sat baje mar pit kar manzil par pahunche =
eventually with great difficulty we arrived at the
halting place.
Jon ton karke ham ne apna kam nikal liya = somehow or
other we did achieve our object.
Khuda khudd karke ham daryd se par utre == with great
difficulty (or after repeated prayers to God) we crossed
the river.
Ham sab ne milkar koshish ki jab (or, tab) jakar kdmydbl
hu,i = we were successful only when we all tried
together (i.e. , then and then only and not before).
371
Us ne bat kdlkar kahd kl = he interrupted and said
that —
Main ne usko zard zard karke samjhd diyd hai = I have
thoroughly explained to him (i.e , in every minute
detail).
VOCABULARY.
Draught (water, etc.) ghunt
To palpitate dharaknd
Pn-tence, false excuse bahdna
To pretend, to swing
lead bahdna karnd Li
Mouthful luqma
!»'• i stance, comparison
muqdbala
To resist, to compare
(kd) muqdbala karnd
the
<uaJ
To swell or be inflated
phulnd
Phlegm balgham
Purgative juldb
Police post, picket chaukl
( 1^ )
achieve one's object apnd
kdm nikdlnd UJKJ K ILJ
« cept bribe rishwat khdnd
liUf
^ain-t k*>. bar khildf
To be exceedingly delighted
(kd) dil bdgh bdgh hand
(jfcJb G (j C L) /Jt) ( ^ )
Reluctantly, indifferently
bedili se ^ ^^.
To wipe ponchhnd (i+^ijj
Ashes (f.) rdkh
Stubborn- ^ I. jamkar
ly, firmly. / 2. datkar
Constipation qabz
Liver jigar
Pulse noo?
Lung phephrd
Boil
(medsharmindah
Dumb-foundered
hakkd bakkd
EXERCISE 41.
1. Give him this and bring a receipt for it. 2. Return
the book to the club after you have read it. 3. I shall go
Mere after finishing this work. 4. Having lost heart they
372
all fled away. 5. I shall write you after arriving there.
6. Having walked about ten miles we came to a deserted l
village. 7. Having said this he went away. 8. What did
you gain by telling a lie ? 9. They issued from the fort
and made a vigorous attack. 10. We arrested and brought
him before a magistrate 11. You will spoil your character
through reading such books. 12. I shall think over the
matter and let you have an answer to-morrow. 13. I
am very pleased to see yon all. 14. You deliberately
played the lead swinger. 15. Being a Hindu as he was, he
could not marry a Mohamadan girl. 16. The midday gun
having fired we were allowed half an hour's leave. 17. We
made a stubborn resistance.
/Ix?.l (14) - Uf^Jb Hj Kib
1 Deserted = empty (or village which was empty).
'2 Sab ke sab = one and all.
373
b £b Jj K v-^~yL« ^viui^L A* (17)
x~? (19) - rfy v^< :jbj yb; c^ «tf ^ y yt li*. <xJ (18)
^ (20) - j^yt
^.fj^ ^ ^y & Jj (21)
;l" ^ 4^ £. / ^b^ (22) - S «^'
yt ;UJ ^ (23) - ^^.u
(25) • jj Uu, j^jj y
/ * (26)
(28) - U
lj^ (29) -
—,*-
Miscellaneous Colloquial Sentences.
What is the matter with tumko kya M,a hai?
you?
What disease are you suffer- tumko kya blindrl hai?
ing from ?
How long have you been kab se blmar ho ?
ill ?
How did the fever attack you awwal bufchar kis far ah
at first? *huru* hu,a?
me your tongue ? zuban dikha,o.
A i • your bowels open ? pakhana fardghat se ajdta
hai?
11 suffering from consti- mujhe qab% hai.
pation.
Do you feel any appetite ? bhuk lagtl hai ?
374
Very little.
There is something wrong
with my liver, I suppose.
What medicine have you
been taking ?
Let me see your pulse.
Take off your shirt, I want
to examine your lungs and
liver.
Do you feel any pain when
I press it ?
Do you feel any difficulty
while breathing ?
How is your boil to-day ?
I'll open it presently and
you will feel instant relief.
Undo the bandage, it is
much better than yester-
day.
How goes it with you,
Gahga Din ?
I feel no relief whatsoever.
My cough is in the former
state and the phlegm does
not cut. It is hardened.
Babu, give him some purga-
tive.
Did you pass any motions
last night ?
Now, give him ten grains of
quinine.
bahut thorl.
mere khaydl men mere jigar
men kuchh fehardbl hai.
kyd dawd isti'amdl karte rahe
ho?
nabz dikhdyo.
qamiz utdr do, main tumhare
phephre aur kaleja dekhnd
chdhtd huh.
jab main dabdtd huh to dard
hold hai ?
sdhs lene men kuchh takllf
hoti hai ?
dj tumhare phore kd kyd hdl
hai ?
main abhl ise chird duhgd
aur tumko fauran dram
hojd,egd.
pattl kholo, kal se bahut
achchhd hai.
Gahga Din, tumhdrd kyd hdl
hai?
mujhe zard bhi farq nahln.
khdnsl waise hi hai, balgham
nikaltl nahm. Safeht ho
ga,i hai.
Bdbii, use ko,i juldb dedo.
rat ko ko,l dast dyd thd (or
kuchh dast hu,e the) ?
ab use das l gren ' ' kunln '
dedo.
375
You must have patience.
ifl a very troublesome
disease and is not quickly
got rid of.
down quietly. Don't
talk to anybody.
Swallow this pill with a gulp
of water at bed-time.
Has your purging ceased ?
Oh, sir ! I am dead. I have
been sitting at stool the
whole night.
Does your heart palpitate as
before ?
I do not feel any change.
When I rise from a place,
darkness comes over my
eyes, and my head swims.
It I eat a single mouthful
my belly at once swells.
Take this prescription. T
believe it will do you lot
of good.
Take this medicine three
times a day, i.e., after
every four hours.
sabar karnd chdhlye.
yih barl khardb bimdrl hat,
jaldi nahln jail.
chup chap let jd,o kisl se bat
chit mat karo
sote waqt yih goli ek ghunt
pdnl ke sdth nigal lend,
tumhdre dast band hu,e hain
yd nahln?
huzur ! main to mar gay d.
Sari rat pdfchdne phirtd
rahd hun.
tumhdrd dil pahle kl tarah
dharaktd hai ?
kuchhfarq ma'lum nahln hotd,
jab main uthtd hun to
dnkhon ke age andherd djdtd
hai aur sir ghumne lagtd
hai.
agar ek luqma bhl khdluii t<>
pet phul jatd hai.
yih nusfcha lo, mere khaydl
men is se tumko bahut
fd}ida hogd.
yih dawd char char ghante ke
ba'd tin daf'a din men plna
U76
Lesson XL.
Relative Construction.
349. The Relative Pronoun * jo ' and the various relative
adjectives and adverbs are used in two ways, i.e. :—
(i) Restrictively ,
(u) Conjunctively or continuatively.
Examples :—
(i) Restrictively :—
The man whom you saw yesterday is my brother =
jis ddml ko kal dp ne dekhd ihd wuh merd bhd,l hai.
Here ' whom you saw yesterday ' restricts ' the man '
and serves the function of a descriptive adjective.
(ii) Conjunctively or continuatively :—
I saw my friend who recognised me at once = main ne
apne dost ko dekhd jisne (or better ' aur us ne') fauran
mujh ko pahchdn liyd.
Here * who recognised me at once ' has no restrictive
force on the noun ' friend.' It simply continues or adds to
what was said before and its ' who,' therefore, equals
' and he.'
350. When a relative pronoun, adjective or an adverb
is used in its restrictive sense the relative construction
must be used, picked up later by a correlative in the main
clause. The various relatives and correlatives are given
below for ready reference :—
Relative. Correlative.
j^. jo, who, which, / 1. »j wuh, he, she, it,
whoever, what- / that, they, those.
ever. I 2. y* so, that etc.
jaisd, as, like which. L*J^ waisd, so, like that.
jitna, as, as much. liSl utnd, so much.
377
Relative.
jilne (m.), ) as many
jitnl (f .), j as.
Correlative.
m.),1
>so
(f.) }
to, then.
tab, then.
tuhhlh
manv.
;i
so soon.
tab tak, so long.
wahdn, there
tahdn ' there.
udhar, thither.
uy ton ' tohy so (of pro-
gress).
jab, when.
juhhih ^(as soon)
7'ai«e At ) as.
;o6 tak, (as long) as.
jahah, where.
jidhar, whither.
jon jon, as (of
gradual progress).
Examples : —
He who (or, whoever) has been born (he or the same)
will die = jo paidd hu}d hai wuh (or, so) maregd.
He who (or, whichever man) goes on active service (he)
will get extra allowance = jo ddmi lam par jd.egd usko
bhattd milegd.
The man whom you called is a sergeant in my company
= jis ko turn ne buldyd thd wuh hamdrl kampni men
hawdldar hai.
What you say is all true = jo turn kahte ho so sab sach hai.
Speak plainly whatever comes in your mind = jo kuchh
tumhdre dil men d,e so sdf kahdo.
\< you sow (do) so will you reap (get) = /at'aa karoge
waisA pd,oge.
\- the master is so will the pupils be = jaisd ustdd (hai)
ivaisd shdgird (hogd).
1 1 is the same quantity as this one = jitnd yih hait
\vuh hai.
48
I Not much used in the modern language.
378
That building is not so high as this one = jitnd yiJi
makdn unchd hai utnd wuh nahin.
The road to Kabul is not so bad as the one that leads to
Gilgit= Kabul kd rdsta itnd khardb nahin jitna, Oilgit
kd hai.
This is not so difficult as that one = yih aisd (or, itnd)
mushkil nahin jitnd wuh hai.
I shall walk as many miles as you will •== jitne mil turn
chaloge utne main bhi chalungd.
As many men as were present (or all the men who were
present) exclaimed = jitne ddml maujud the sab bol
uthe.
When the rain falls the farmers feel very happy = jab
bdrish hoti hai to (or, tab) kisdn bare khush hole hain.
As soon as the train arrived the station-master handed
me a telegram = junhin (or, jaise hi) gdri pahunchi
(waise hi) isteshan mdstar ne mujhe ek tar diyd.
I shall stay here as long as you will = jab tak turn yahdn
rahoge tab tak main bhi rahungd.
I shall go where you will = jahdn turn jd,oge wahdn main
bhi jd,ungd.
Where there is flower there is thorn as well (Pleasure and
pain are a wedded couple) = jahdn phul hai wahdn
(or, tahdn) khdr bhi hai.
Whither you go, thither will I also go = jidhar turn
jd,oge udhar main bhi jd,ungd.
Our courage rose as the reinforcements arrived (one
after another) = jon jon madad dti gayi (ton ton)
hamdrd hausla barhtd giyd.
NOTE. — (a) It will be noticed that the correlative follows its
relative almost always, except in the case of ' junhin,' and
4 jon jon.'
(6) The correlative (' wuh ' or ' so ') of ' jo ' may be omitted
provided both of them are in the nominative case, as : —
379
Whoever went there did not return = jo wahan gaya (wuli or
so) ivdpis na aya.
(c) ' Jaisa ' (e,I), ' jitna ' (e,I) change like an adjective ending
in ' a '. ' Jaisa ' refers to quality, kind or manner while ' jitna '
to quantity, number and extent. The latter is followed by
' sab ' (all. whole) when it means a whole number or quantity.
They always refer to the thing with which comparison is
made. Their correlatives • waisa,' ' utne ' and ; utne ' give
place to ' aisa.' 4 itna ' and • itne ' respectively to impart a
notion of proximity.
1 . If emphasis is laid on the main clause, it generally
precedes the relative. This, however, is not admissible in
the case of ' junhi ' or * jaise hi ' (as soon as) and * jon joh '
(as, of progress), e.g. :—
Only that will come to pass which will be acceptable to
God = ivuhi ' hoga jo khuda ko man?ur hoga.
The same men will go who went yesterday = wuhl *
admi ja,enge jo kal gaye the.
This is not so easy as that one =» yih kam aisa asan
nahln jaisl wuh hai.
This rope is not so long as that one = yih rassl itnl
Iambi nahin jitni wuh hai.
You will get as many rupees as he did = tumko utne hi
rupai milenge jitne usko mile the.
You will have to stay as long as I do not come back
(or until I come back) = tumko tab tak thairna hoga
jab tak main wapis na a, fen.
I shall go to the same place as you will = main uwhin*
ja.unga jahan turn ja,oge.
Ho has gone to the same place (or direction) where (or
whither) you went = wuh bhl udhar hi gaya hai jidhar
turn gaye the.
NOTE. — The demonstrative correlative, in such a case, is
rally fnllmvt'd by the emphatic particle 'hi* provided
1 Contraction of * wuh hi'. * Contraction of ' wahan hi
380
both the clauses are in the affirmative denoting exactness or
similarity.
352. When the relatives are used in the continuative
sense, it is always easier and advantageous, especially in
colloquial language, to begin anew with a demonstrative
pronoun, adjective or adverb, etc. (as the case may be),
which may be introduced by '; aur" (and). It, however,
does not follow that the relatives should not be used.
You can use them , provided they are kept as close to their
antecedent as possible and no word likely to cause ambi-
guity is allowed to intervene between them, e.g. : —
I have written to the Tehsildar who will give you all the
help he can — ham ne Tahsilddr sahib ko likh diyd hai
jo (or better, wuh) tumko jahdn tak hosakegd madad
denge.
He turned out to be faithless as the faqlr had said
=• wuh bewafd nikld jaisa (or, aisd hi) faqlr ne kahd tha.
Mix in it two spoonfuls of milk as of brandy (i.e., a
similar quantity of brandy) = us men do chamche dud
mildlo aur utni hi birdndi ddllo.
A small district like Shahpur has given ten thousand
recruits and there is no reason why we should not
give at least as many from this district = Shahpur
jaise chhofe se ziVa ne das hazdr rangriit diye hain is
li,e ko,i waja nahin ki yih ziVa kyoh kam az Team utne hi
rahgru\ na de.
I was just about to go when he arrived = main jane hi
ko tha ki ] wuh dpahunchd.
We shall reach there at 3 when the train comes in =
ham tin baje wahdn pahunchenge aur usi waqt gdri
bhi dti hai.
l Not 'jab'.
381
I shall stop at the dak bungalow where you should
bring all your recruits = ham dak bangle men utrenge
aur wahin l turn apne sab rangruj land.
We shall move this evening to the south whither you
should follow me the next day = ham dj sham janub
k~i taraf ja,enge, dusre din turn bhl udhar hi hamdre
p'ichhe pichhe and.
We resisted stubbornly until we were forced to retreat =
ham jam-kar muqdbala karte rahe, dkhir (or, hattd ki)
ham ko majburan pichhe hafad para.
We finished the job before midday and this was as soon
as it could be done = ham ne do pahar se pahle pahle
wuh kdm khatam kar liyd, is se pahle khatam karnd nd-
mumkin thd.
NOTE.— (i) " Jon joh " (as, of progress) is used only restric-
\ iv'-ly.
i ( .'out inuative ' when ' is expressed by ' ki ' (not by ' jab ').
(Hi) Ki ' can precede or follow any relative as redundant.
M preceding the relative it requires its antecedent to be
mentioned and takes its place immediately before the relative.
Hut \\ln-n it follows, the following course is adopted :—
(a) \Vh« n the relative is not governed by a postposition it
iinin. di.Mt. i\ follows the relative.
(6) \ postposition governs the relative ft follows the
postposition
(c) In case of ' jo ' (who, which, etc.). if a noun is men-
tioned after it (the relative), the noun is placed immediately
after the relative and 'ki' follows the nounr if it is in the
Nominative case In case the noun is in the oblique the ; ki '
follows the postposition, e.g. :—
Wuh sipah* ki jo (or jo fci) = tho sepoy who.
}\'nh jaga ki jahan (or jaJian &t) = the place wli
Us waqt ki jab (or jab ki) =at the time when.
Jo sipahi ki= the sepoy who.
Jis sipahi ko ki = the sepoy t<> whom.
Jahan ki = where.
Jahan tak fct' = asfaras — , the place or extent up to \\ hi< h.
" = " wahftnhf."
382
The relative following 'ki' is often understood, in which
case it is often mistaken for the relative, as : —
Wuh sipdhi ki (jo) = the sepoy who.
Babur ki (jo) Hindustan kd bddshdh ZM = Babur who was the
King of India — .
353. When in English two or more relative clauses
qualify one and the same noun, the succeeding relatives
can, in Urdu, be either expressed or their places taken by
the corresponding correlatives ; the latter is however more
idiomatic, e.g. : —
The sepoy who applied for leave the other day and
whose application you rejected, has come again to-
day = jis sipdhi ne agle din chhutti mangi thi aur jiski
(or, uslcl) darkhwdst dp ne nd manzur ki thi, dj phir dyd
hai.
354. Relative clause within relative clause should be
avoided as much as possible by recasting the sentence,
as : —
The sepoy who asked tho other day for leave which you
did not sanction, has absconded to-day = agle din ek
sipdhi ne dp se chhutti mdngi thi aur dpne uski chhutti
nd manzur ki thi wuh dj bhdg gayd hai.
355. ' Who ' and * which ' sometimes introduce an
adverb-clause signifying cause or purpose, in which case
they are appropriately succeeded by suitable conjunctions,
as : —
The accused who (= because he) had been found guilty,
was punished = mulzam ko sazd di gayi kyon ki wuh
mujrim sdbit hu,d.
A peon was sent, who ( = that he) should deliver the
letter = ek chaprasi bhejd gayd ki chitthi pahunchdde.
356. The relative pronoun 'jo', used res trie tively,
admits of more than one construction, due to its double
383
function, i.e., pronoun as well as pronominal adjective.
Besides it may be definite or indefinite.
357. When its antecedent is mentioned it is not
followed by its correlative unless the correlative happens
to be in a case other than the Nominative. The case of
relative and its correlative is determined by thejr rela-
tion to their respective clauses.
Kxamples : —
The man who came yesterday has not come to-day =
(i) wuh adml jo kal ay a tha aj nahlh ay a. (ii) jo adml
kal ay a tha (wuh} aj nahin ay a.
The man who lived here has given 1,000 rupees for the
Charitable Hospital =» (\) us adml ne jo yahdh rahta
tha khairdtl haspatal ke waste ek hazar rupaya diya hai
(ii) jo adml yahdh rahta tha us ne fchairdti haspatal ke
waste ek hazar rupaya diya hai.
The man whom you had called, sir, has come =
(i) wuh adml jisko dp ne buldya tha dgayd hai. (ii) jis
adml ko dp ne buldya tha wuh agaya hai.
\ have sold the horse which I bought from you =
(i) main ne us ghoreko jo turn se kharldd tha bech diya
hai. (ii) jo ghord main ne dp se kharldd thd main ne
usko bech diya hai.
Construction (t) throughout is exactly like that of the
English relative. But it is not, however, considered so
good and idiomatic as the (ii) in which ' jo ' has been used
i onominal adjective taking its substantive immediately
r it.
358. Sometimes the antecedent is placed at the begin-
ning of a sentence absolutely in its Nominative form
is again picked up by the correlative in the main
;>e, provided it has to be put there in a case other than
the- Nominative, as : —
384
The man who lived here has given 1 ,000 rupees for the
Charitable Hospital = wuh ddml jo yahdn rahtd thd us
ne khairdtl haspatdl ke waste ek hazdr rupaya diyd hai.
I have killed the spy who betrayed us = wuh jdsus jis ne
ham se daghd kl Ihl main ne usko mdrddld hai.
359. The Relative may be used both as subject and
object when both of them are indefinite, as :—
Everybody carried off whatever he could lay hands on =
jo jiske hath lagd legayd (lit. whatever fell into whom-
soever's hands (he) carried (it) off.
360. The Indefinite pronouns 'jo ko,i' (whoever) and
1 jo kuchh ' (whatever) are also constructed like the Rela-
tive, as : —
Whoever gives me his clue I shall reward him Rs. 50
(i.e., I shall give Rs. 50 reward to the person who will
let me know any clue of him) = jo kol uskd patd batld-
egd ham usko pachas rupai in' am dehge.
I shall give you whatever you may ask for = jo kuchh
turn mdngoge (wuh) main tumko dungd.
Everything you had said turned out to be true = jo
kuchh tumne kahd tha wuh sab thlk nikld.
361. Most of the relatives and correlatives are often re-
placed by phrases formed with the aid of ' jo ' and ' wuh,y
as : —
Relatives. Correlatives.
Jaisd =-- (i) jis qism kd waisd__ usl /or^\ qism ka
aisd isl \ is)
(ii) jistarah usl ( or™} tarah.
isl \ is /
(Hi) jis tarlqe se usl
/ us \
isl \ is / "
Jitnd =jisqadar utnd _ usl
itnd isl is
385
Relatives.
Jab = jis waqt
Jahdn = jis jaga
= jis taraf
Correlatives.
tab = usl (or us) iraqt.
wahdn = usl (or us) jaga.
udhar = usl (or us) taraf.
VOCABULARY.
Dagger fyhahjar
To stand by (kd) sdth dend
(^ \
/
Truthfulness sachd,l
Sniper nishana bdz jL»
To double dugnd karnd
Governor hakim
Precipitately (to run) sir par
paoii rakh kar
jV> ^ ^ r
i, -i I ishdra «;Utl
fl. zalzala &Jji\
Earthquake 2. bhunchal
JC^4-?
Attention taivajjuh (f.)
pay attention to
"
III i nm in at
(se)
/I. jahgl-'azim
J^ -£H
Great war
I 2. barl lard,*
To rule (par) hukumat karnd
karnd
U
[ l.ult pult karn
To-pset Vf*^
j 2. tah-o-bdld karnd
ll^lli^Aj
Silent fehdmosh ^i^U.
Enjoyment, funny thing
Wisdom, good policy hikmat
Generally 'umuman
In happy cir-)
I khush-hal
cumstances,")
Well-to-do, j
Globe (of a lamp) hdndl
To steal rhurdna "
To carry out (order etc.) (kl)
ta'mil karna \ty Jo^o" ( ^)
Husiness transaction len ' den
surdgh
49
I From ' lent,1 to take and • denft * to give.
386
To guess (correctly) bujhna
\
.- \ (Par)
-
Kama
To regret, to repent
pachtdna
To insist,
To be obsti- :
nate. J
Bone of con
tention ,
Root of mis-T
chief. ;
Thorn khar ;l
To turn tail and run away
dum dabakar bhag jana
* * ,x * i
Intention
To be solved or ^ hal hona
dissolved. j liyt
Injustice ^ag ' talfi
Apprehension andesha
Account, story, state ^a? JU.
Generally, frequently,
most (adj).* aksar ^
Part of a )
countn^ Yilaqa A>'ilr
District. )
Four fingers' breadth chappa
j Care, precaution ihtiyat
A little
EXERCISE 42.
1 . Whoever reaches there first can have this dagger as a
prize. 2. I shall amply reward those who stand by me.
3. They do not know the man who will drive them out of
the country. 4. The letter which, if arrived, would havo
proved their truthfulness, has been lost on the sea. 5. The
dogs which bark noisily seldom bite. 6. The road which
is the shortest is rather difficult. 7. Pay them whatever
may be its price. 8. Whoever goes there never returns.
9. I gave the same answer to every one who asked me the
question. 10. It is a very old firm which supplies these
articles. 1 1 . The gentleman who used to teach you musket-
ry is my elder brother. 12. The troops who made th*
first attack were all Sikhs and Pathans. 13. The snipei
1 From ' haq ' (right) and ' talfi ' (destruction), i.e. , depriving one
one's right.
2 As, most people = alctiar log.
387
who killed their Company Commander was a Gurkha.
14. Double the rations of the animals which are weak.
15. Who is this dacoit who has been arrested to-day ?
16. The man who was found guilty has been sentenced to
death. 17. The man who deceived you tried to deceive me
as \\ell. is. ! saw a fish which weighed nearly one ton
and was three yards long. 19. The inhabitants of the city
went to the Governor who refused to listen to them.
20. We attacked the enemy who fled precipitately. 21. His
clothes are not so dirty as yours. 22. This trunk is not so
heavy as this bedding. 23. There were about as many
people there to-day as yesterday. 24. Supply us as much
gram as you can. 25. He will become a pucca sepoy
when he has learnt his musketry. 26. As soon as the
signal was given thousands of guns opened fire simultaneous-
ly and the earth shook as it does during an earthquake.
•2~. This won't be done satisfactorily until you see to it
yourself. 28. I shall follow you wherever you go. 29. We
11 play on the same plain where we played yesterday.
30. As the day advanced (charhna) it grew hotter and
hotter (heat went on increasing). 31. T went to report it
tn the Deputy Commissioner who paid no attention to what
I said. 32. The attack will begin at 2-30 a m. when every-
; v should be ready to act. 33. This went on until the
rican troops got into the field in great numbers.
Al.mr two miles to the west of the village is an
e plain, where we shall encamp t'.»r the night.
36. Tho more you delay the worse will it l>o for von.
EXERCISE 42(a).
*» (3)
l Best ia the time that ia part.
388
(6) - &/ r fcjtfc. ^ (5) - fc» ^ KJ^ ^ (4)
*^ ^!^ (7) -IkV
(8) - AJ ,WI AJU,;
-VJ
tU^fl^ (^isx^ ^ (9)
(10)
(12) - j& ^^ ^ ^/^ (11)
^. (13) - Clki ^x^J ^±. v^^oy^ £_ IUXJ <±.'2
a. (14) - .£& ^.^ Jlsv^^L LC^AC jJt ^
! j-a. (15) - <£-
(20) - i. /I5 ^G
(22) -y ^su^,^ 4?^^ ^ *kf*. (21)
ftj ^ (23) - &- Ufyb />; y&
uj uo ujovj *%} fcX*vl ^ L ^.^A^ft ^jj^S «• I Lp LJ^J ^-V
^ t4\) L— ^""^ i»ri^ i»Hr "^ Ljy^01^ ^*i (^4)
1 Walk with your nose in the air and you will trip.
a Skill (or policy) succeeds where authority fails.
389
vU. (27) - </ jU L-JJ ^ ^4 L-J^ (26) - 4- (AX)
(28) - / stJ^u 1131 / 3r* C^^L
^ > V V ^* js ~*—^ + ^
iU^^. u:^ tx-i (29) - ,^ *£
> • * S \ t Jfs J
U- i i i • - /OA\
J O Y^Y^ i 1*^ -^ r^0 ^-!^* v"" ' *r^-' « ' LA.V^. (.>'')
^J^^. (32)
(33) - U; yt
^ (34) - Ux- yt> ^ ^1 ^
/ ty£*\ A * (n. A •'• f /QPI\ A
(,3b) - ^- v_5^ f ^^ <^- S^^ U^ ' ' ~
_;L<Jt
(38) -
* o^ ^ <^;
Miscellaneous Colloquial Sentences.
H<.w ni;inv days' jouinr\ is wuh jaga yahah se kitne din
t he place from here ? fco «a/ar (or, rnsta) hai ?
pdnch payato.
\\' \\.\\ hire will y«>u charge kishtl kfi kya kiraya 1<>
for your boat ?
I it teen rupees. pandrah rupai.
300
All right, get yourself ready
to start at 5 a.m. to-mor-
row.
Bearer, look here, I shall
start for a fishing trip to-
morrow at 5 a.m. Get
everything ready in time.
What do you know about
this boatman ?
They are in fact all a bad
lot as a rule, but this one
is only a bit better than
the others.
He generally takes the sahibs
out for fishing.
Do you know the usual
haunts of the game about
here ?
I know every inch of the
ground all round this
place.
Don't take any heavy lug-
gage with you, make it as
light as possible.
Pack everything well and
carefully.
Take care lest anything
should break.
achchha, leal subah panch
baje chalne ke li,e tayyar
hojd,o.
baihrd, dekho, kal subah
panch baje ham machhli
kd shikar karne ke waste
rawdna honge. Sab chiz tab
tak tayyar kar lo.
turn ko is kishti-wale ka kuchh
hdl ma'lum hai ?
sach to yih hai ki wuh sab
badmu'dsh hote haih lekin
yih auroh se qadre achchha
hai.
wuh aksar sahib logon ko
machhli ke shikar ke waste
lejdyd kartd hai.
tumko is 'ildqe ke ird gird
shikar ki jaga ma'lum hai ?
main is jaga ki chdroh taraf
chappa chappa zamin se
ivaqif huh.
ko,i bhdri chiz sdth mat lejdyo.
Bilkul thord sdmdn lejd,o.
sab chizeh achchhi tarah aur
ihtiydt se bdhdho.
aisd na ho koi chiz tut jd,e.
391
Lesson XLI.
Adverb.
362. An adverb qualifies any part of speech except
a noun or pronoun.
363. A good many adjectives are used as adverbs, as :—
He writes very well = wuh bahut achchhd likhtd hai.
H i> very clever = ivuh bard hoshydr hai.
ik distinctly = sdf sdf bolo.
Don't do *o again = phir aise l na karnd.
4. A good many postpositions without the initial
k< " and ' ki ' serve as adverbs, as : —
.oj> qarlb
'-
nazdik >near.
upar = above, over.
o niche = below, down.
age = ahead, in front, onward.
sdmne = in front, yonder.
> pichhe = behind, back, later on.
;jo) ahdar = inside.
t&U bdhir = outside.
365. A host of adverbs are formed by adding ' se ' (with)
to an abstract noun, as : —
4Z, ))\ zor se = forcibly, strongly, loudly.
khushl se = voluntarily, gladly.
khush qismatl se = luckily.
war mi se = mildly.
salihti «e = harshly, severely.
'ajizi se «= humbly.
adab se = respectfully.
As an adverb qualifying a verb it w inflected into • aite.' This
in the case of ' waisi', • kaieft' and • jnisS' as well.
392
366. A good many Arabic nouns in the accusative
case are also commonly used as adverbs, as : —
ittifdqan = by chance.
fauran = at once.
jabran = by force.
majburan = perforce, will-he-nill-he.
iradatan = intentionally.
maslan = for instance.
dafatan = all of a sudden.
'umuman = generally.
khususan = specially.
REMARK. — If the noun has the Arabic article ' al' before it
or is governed by a preposition it loses its ' tanwm ', as : —
axx)' albatta — of course.
algharz )
> =m short.
alqissa )
'anqarib = in the near future.
)
> =at present, for the present.
)
bil-fi al
bil-kul = totally, altogether, quite.
367. The Conjunctive Participle is also sometimes used
adverbially, as :—
jan bujh kar = intentionally, deliberately.
soch samajh kar = thoughtfully.
Jj dil kholkar = generously.
hanskar = laughingly.
bhulkar = erroneously , by mistake.
khaskar = specially.
368. Persian adjectives ending in * ana ' (like) are
often used adverbially, as :—
jjhjl^ bahadurana = bravely, brave-like.
sipahlana = soldier-like, in a soldierly manner.
393
369. Please also note the following idiomatic uses of
various adverbs : —
(0 -Kalian' expresses great contrast or difference,
as: —
Kalian main kahaii ap = there is all the difference between
Your Honor and me (lit where am I and where is
Your Honor).
Knhiiit H-uh arriiri aur kahan ab yih gharlbl = once there
was such an affluence and now there is this poverty.
lint change the place of ' kahan,' as : —
Main kahan turn kahan = we are far apart (separated)
from each other.
(/?) ' Ka hlii * = anywhere, somewhere, (if) by any
chance, I fear lest, I hope not, far more, as : —
Kahln rakh do = put it anywhere.
M'llh ne use kahln Lahore men dekhd tha= I saw him
somewhere in Lahore.
(Agar) kahln barish hone lagja,e = should it by any
chance begin to rain.
A <//>//> wuh bimar nal par ?a,e==I fear lest he should
fall ill (I don't wish him to—).
Kahln wuh bimar to nahln par gaya = I hope he has not
fallen ill by any chance.
Wuh turn se kahln hoshyar hai = he is far more clever
than you.
NOTE. — ' Kahin ka ' (of somewhere) is often added t«> ibuse,
/'fl,l hnhlh kn = blackguard of some ignoble or nameless plar,
//• *tod kahln H = prostitute of someplace unfit to benam<-<l
(Hi) 4 Idhar— udhar '«= as soon as. ' Jahah — aur ' = as
•oon as. 'Jahah — wahah ' = since— as well, whilst — at
arae time, whilst on one hand — on the other hand.
i When 'kahiu' is uso.l for 'I fear leaf the verb is put in tl,-
iv«-an<l in its in tens r .- f..rm
60
394
Examples : —
Idhar yih dawa pi udhar i
achchha hogaya, \ as soon as he took the medi-
Jahdn yih dawa pi aurt cine he was all right.
achchha hogaya. )
Jahan turn ne Una kiya wahan thora sa ihsdn aur bhl
kardo = since you have done so much you might as
well do this little favor.
Jahan turn ne itnl takl'ifen utha,l hain ek aur sahl =
since you have undergone so many difficulties let
there be one more (it would not make much difference).
Jahan unko apnl bahadurl par ndz tha wahah yih bhl
fakhar tha ki ham rasti par hain = whilst they were
proud of their valour, at the same time they prided
themselves on the fact that they were on the right
side (i e., their cause was right).
Jahan wuh bahadur hain wahan daryadil bhl hain = they
are brave and generous as well.
Jahan mujhe yih khayal tha ki aise mauqa' par khamoshl
achchhl hai wahan yih andesha bhl tha ki kahln is
khamoshl se kam na bigar ja e = whilst on one hand
I thought that silence was better, on the other hand I
feared lest the silence might make things worse.
Postpositions.
370. A postposition is a word which governs a noun
or a pronoun, and shows its relation to some thing else
mentioned in a sentence.
371. A good many postpositions have already been;
given in the preceding lessons ; we have, therefore, given
below only such as have not occurred before and are met
with commonly : —
395
ke hamrah = with , in company with
fce /Mz*A = by, by the hand of.
ke hathoh = through, at the hands of.
3 £_ fce zan'a = by means of, through.
l« <L ^e *0or P&r= right through, from one side-
to the other.
ke mataht = under, subordinate to.
kemare = on account of, stricken with,.
overwhelmed by.
£_ ke bich = in the middle of, between.
r'^ <L ^e barabar = equal to.
^b ^ jfce taur = by way of, in the capacity of.
,j^c j^ £_ fce Aag men = in favor of , in respect of.
jjlj £_ Jbe rfa,ew = to the right of.
^jJb ,£_ Are 6a,eri = to the left of.
l^u, £_ ke siwa = except.
S;ib £_ ke *alawa = m addition to, besides.
ke ba'is = on account of t because of.
ke baghair = without.
• — >)L^r> £_ ke barkhildf = against, in opposition to.
J I^A. ^ A;e hawdle = in the charge or custody of.
<£- ^6 ™uw<*fi<l = according to, agreeable or
suitable to.
i_ ke mutabiq = in conformity with.
£^ ke la,iq= fit for, worthy of.
£_ ke 'iicaz = instead of, in return fm-.
£. ke badle « in return for, in . \< -\\;\\\^ -for,
instead of.
£_ A;e ztmma = under the charge or responsi-
bility of.
,£_ ^e darmiyan = in the midst of, among, be-
t \vccn.
396
ki jaga = instead of.
ki ma'rifat = through, c/o.
ki manind = like, in the manner of.
kl tarah = like, in the manner of.
ki khatir = for the sake of, out of regard
for.
ki ivaja se = by reason of.
ki badaulat = through, through the good
offices of.
ki kh.idmat men = to, addressed to, in the
service of.
ki zubani = from the mouth or speech of.
^ r^1 se == ^y way °^
ki taraf se = on behalf of.
ki char on taraf = all round.
samet = with.
372. Please note the various significations and the
difference in the use of the following postpositions :—
(t) K, ka (of, etc.).
(a) Denoting possession :—
Jacob's horse = * Jacob ' ka ghora.
(b) Denoting value :—
Grass worth four annas = char ane ki ghas.
(c) Nationality or caste :—
Hindu (Indian) by nationality = qaum ka Hindu.
Brahman by caste = zat ka Brahman.
(d) Denoting material of which a thing is made : —
Gold ring = sone ki angu\h%.
(e) Denoting origin or instrument :—
English goods = walayat ka (or walayati) mal.
. Arab horse =-- 'Arab ka (or Arabi) ghora.
397
Wound caused by a sword = talwar lea zafchm.
Milton's Paradise Lost = " Milton, " kl " Paradise Lost:7
(/) Denotes an attribute : —
Mango tree = am ka darafeht.
Lahore road = LaJiore kl sarak.
Tiffin box = \i\an ka dabba.
Blind from birth = janam ka ahdha.
NOTE. — When two English nouns occur together, the former
of them being used as an adjective, it is generally put in the
genitive or expressed by an adjective : —
Pashtu book = pashlu let kitab.
I > rasa utensils = pitol ke bartan.
Tea things = cha ka sarrian.
Leather box = cJiamre ka bakas.
\\'riting table — likhne ki mez.
This can also be expressed by suffix • wfila ' :—
Writing table = likhneivali mez.
Tiffin box = tiffin wala dabba.
(a) Governed by the Past Participle it denotes instrument,
cause or authorship : —
Cut with a sword = talwar ka kdja hu,a.
Bitten by a snake = sanp ka ka\a.
Stricken with misfortune = muslbat ka mara hii,a.
Tea Bent by you = apkl bhejl hu ,i cha.
Books written by Kipling = Kipling kl likhi hu,l kitaben.
(h) Denotes that by which an oath is taken :—
By God — khuda kl qasm (or ba khuda).
Some adjectives expressing wish or desire are con-
structed with the genitive of the thing wished for, as : —
Hungering for bread = roil ka bhuka.
Thirsting for water « panl ka piyaaa.
eedy for money = rupai /,• / / ilchl.
Added to some nouns and adverbs it forms adjectives,
as : —
Useful « kam ka.
398
Upar kd = upper.
Niche ka = lower.
(ii) y, ko (to, etc.).
Its use after the direct and indirect object and with verbs
of motion has already been explained (vide 182 to 188 and
213 to 219). Other significations of it are : —
(a) Purpose or interest, as :—
At least one company is necessary to escort them = unkl
hifdzat ko (or ke waste) kam az kam ek kampani chdhiye.
The syce has gone to fetch grass = sdis ghds lene ko
(or ke waste) giyd hai.
I am going to see the show = main tamdshd dekhne ko
jd rahd hiin.
You should go = tumko jdnd chdhiye (lit. for you going is
becoming or necessary).
NOTE. — (i) ' ko ' of purpose can always be replaced by
;i ke wasfce " or u ke ll,e." It is, however, better to leave it
understood after an infinitive, if the infinitive occurs in close
proximity with the finite verb.
(ii) With ' hona ' as the finite verb this construction expresses
imminence of action, as : —
Wuh jane ko (or jdnewdla) hai = he is about to go.
Main yih kahne ko (or kahnewdld) thd = I was about to say
this.
(b) Price or wages, as : —
What did you pay for this watch ? = turn ne yih ghari
kitne ko Ii thi ?
I will not sell this book even for hundred rupees = main
yih kitdb sau rupai ko bhi nahm dungd.
A small packet of cigarettes was sold in Mespot for
Rs. 125= 'Iraq 'Arb men ek sigret kl dibyd sawd sau
rupai ko bikl.
REMARK. — (i) The genitive ' ka ' of price or worth follows
the thing or service bargained for while the ' ko ' of price or
worth follows the price itself, as : —
399
1 -hall ])tay one rupee for this = main iska ek rupaya dungd.
What wil] you charge for this ? = turn iska kyd loge .'
What hire do you_charge up to the mess ? = turn miskot tak
jane ka kya kirdya lete ho ?
How can I accept Rs. 25 for that ? = main uske pachchis
rupai kaise qubul kar saktd hun ?
Eventually he agreed to accept Rs. 1,000 for that horse
= akhir us ne us ghore kd ek hazdr rupaya qubul karliyd.
What did this horse cost you ? = turn ne yih ghord kitne ko
(or, par or, men) liyd.
He sold his bicycle to me for Rs. 50 = us ne dpnd baisikal
mere ' hath pachas rupai ko bechdiyd.
building was auctioned for Rs. 2,000 = wuh makdn do
bazar rupai ko nildm hu,d.
Th«- ko' of price can be optionally replaced by • par' or
4 m<
'/) 'Ka' follows price to express 'worth' in a general
declaration, as : —
How much is this horse worth ? = yih ghofd kitne kdhai ?
This ring is worth Rs. 70 = yih anguthi sattar rupai H Jnl.
' Ka.' when following price, agrees with the thing bargained
for, and with the price, when it follows the thing bargained for.
(m) «g_ 8e (from, etc.).
(a) Denotes beginning, as : -
From inorninir till evening =» subah se sham tak.
From Lahore to Rawalpindi = Lahore se Rawalpindi
tak.
(6) Instrument, source or cause, as : —
With scissors — qainchl se (or ke sath).
Belonging to a noble family = a'ala khandan se.
From (on account of) fear = dar se.
•<e) Agency, a
;ill certainly -• i this d<>n< by you = main z.arur yih
kam turn se karwajinya.
By post = dak se.
To sell (to)— = (ke hSth) bochnft.
400
(d) Comparison, as : —
He is cleverer than you = ivuh turn se hoshydr hai.
(e) Separation or privation, as : —
Devoid of wisdom = hikmat se khdli.
Deprived of knowledge = 'Ilm se mahrum.
(/) ' In respect of,' as : —
Bareheaded (i.e., naked in respect of head) = sir se nangd.
Blind in one eye = ek dnkh se kdnd.
He lacks nothing in the way of eatables and drinkables
= us ko khdne pine se (or kl) kuchh kami nahin.
(g) Unity, connection or reciprocity, as :—
He joined the enemy = wuh dushman se (or ke sdth) jd
mild.
I married her = main neus se (or ke sdth) shddl karli.
We fought the enemy desperately = hum dushman se
(or ke sdth) jdn torkar lare.
Tie the horse to that peg = ghore ko us mekh se (or ke
sdth) bdndh do.
NOTE. — ' Se ' interchanges with ' ke sath ' so far as it denotes
instrument or a reciprocal action.
%* men (in, etc.).
This postposition shows, in general, that one thing is
inside or in the midst of another and is, therefore, often
used for ' among ' , * during ', ' between.'
It is also occasionally used to express : —
(a) Regarding, in respect of, as :—
Is bare men = concerning this matter.
Us muqaddame men = about that case.
'Umar men bard = elder in age, old (i.e., big in respect
of age).
'Aql men tez = quick in (of) wifc or intelligence.
401
Comparison, as : —
Turn sab men hoshyar kaun tiai ? = who is the cleverest
of all of you ?
(r) Price or cost of a thing, as : —
das rupai men (or ko or par] = for ten rupees.
(d) Round, as : —
Gardan (or gale) men = round the neck.
Kamar men = round the waist.
(v) *>t par (on, etc.).
Fundamentally it indicates ' resting on the upper surface
thing ' and is often used for ' at ', ' upon ', * above ',
. «T.'
It- rarer meanings are :—
(a) Against, as : —
Us ne hiran par ghora dauraya = he galloped his horse
against (or, after) the deer.
// i n spite of, as : —
Is qadar saza pane par bhl ! uska chalchalan achchhd na
a = in spite of so much punishment his character
has not improved.
On account of, by reason of, as : —
Kis qusur par = for, or on account of, what fault.
1st bat par = by reason of this very thing.
-' par ' as conjunction beginning a sentence means
Inr Mel i then synon\ unms with ' lekin ' or ' magar.'
(vi) ^ tak (up to, till).
It denotes limit of a thing and occasionally means
ven,' in which case it ceases to be a postposition, as :—
' sire se dusre sire tak = from one end to the otlin
.lit).
l In this caae ' par' is always supplemented by ' bhl.'
51
402
Peshawar tak = up to (or, as far as) Peshawar (limit).
Ek paisa tak bdql na bachd = not even a pice was saved
or left.
Ghar kd samdn tak nlldm hogayd = even the house fur-
niture was auctioned.
(vii) £,fjLu £_, ke sath, «!,*& £_? ke hamrah,
ke samet, yjJ, lekar,^^ dekar (with).
' Ke sath ' and ' ke hamrah ' are interchangeable so far as
they imply 'in company with/ or 'on the move with'.
The noun or pronoun governed by them is generally con-
sidered to be more important than or at least equally im-
portant with the other noun or pronoun, as :—
Main uske sath (ke hamrah) jd,ungd=l shall go with
him (i.e. , he is the chief man to go and I am either an
appendage or a fellow-goer of equal importance).
Bring all those books with you = wuh sab kitdben apne
sath (or hamrah) land.
' Ke samet ' signifies that the noun or pronoun it
governs, occupies a subordinate position, i.e., it is either a
subordinate, a belonging or an accompaniment of lesser
importance at least for the time being. It is generally
used without ' ke ', as :—
The king rushed into the fort with his army = Bddshdh
fauj samet qiVa men ghusgayd.
I jumped into the river with my clothes on = main
kapron samet daryd men kud para.
Somebody has stolen away my watch with its chain
= ko,i shafehs men ghari zanjir samet churd legayd hai.
'Lekar' (having taken) and 'dekar' (having given)
always represent their direct objects as a separate thing
in a subordinate relation. ' Lekar ' refers to the subject
while ' dekar ' to the object of a sentence, as :—
403
The General advanced with his whole army = Jarnail
Sahib sari fauj ko lekar agebafhe.
I have come with some money = main kuchh rupai lekar
ay a hun.
I have senfc him with some money = main ne usko kuchh
i dekar bhejd hai.
The Sahib sent me there with a recommendatory letter
= Sahib ne mujhe sifdrishl chichi dekar wahan bhejd.
(viii) ^T/J ,£_, ke pas; O^jyi <£_, ke nazdik ; <-^*f <L
ke qarlb (near, about, etc.).
All of them signify ; near * in the local sense, in which
case they are interchangeable, as :—
There is a mosque near the fort = qiVa ke pas (or nazdik,
or qarlb) ek masjid hai.
4 Ke pas ' also means in the possession, charge or keeping
of, as :—
I have three Arab horses = mere pas (not, nazdik or qarlb)
tin 'arabi ghore hain.
4 Ke nazdik ' is occasionally used to express ' in the
opinion or estimation of ', as :—
Tli« best plan, in my opinion, is to make a surprise
attack at night = mere nazdik sab se achchhl tajwlz
yih hai ki rat ko shabfchun maren (or achdnak hamla
karen).
In my opinion he is nobody at all *= mere nazdik wuh
ko~i chiz hi nahln.
' Ke qarlb ' also expresses 4 nearly ', 4 about ' or 4 approxi
pately ', as : —
• at 10 o'clock «=B das baje ke qarlb.
They numbered nearly one thousand — unkl ta'ddd ek
hazdr ke qarlb thl.
404
VOCABULARY.
Race (horse) ghurdaur (f.) ! Just (adj.) munsif
>;J )** Proud, haughty maghrur
Province suba &j^o
Any way ba har lidl JU.
Tidy and smart les aur chust T° be terrified ^"f^ah
_ hond
».• ;J ^T ••
Size qad
At an average austan
To disguise as
badalna
Capital (of
a kingdom)
";
Such and such fuldn
Merchant sauddgar
v (1) pdgal
Mad -
( (2) diwdna
Cash naqd J^i
To fix,
/ muqarrarkarna
To appoint, y ..
To depute. )
j
EXERCISE 43.
A tyrannic king, disguised as a beggar, was one day
walking in the streets of his capital, when he came
upon a person sitting at the door of his house. The
king asked him, " Do you know anything of the king of
this country ? What sort of man is he ? Is he oppressive
or just." The man answered that he was very proud and
a great tyrant. The king then said, " Do you know who I
am." The man replied in the negative. The king rejoined,
" I am the monarch of this realm." The man was terrified
to hear it and asked the king, " Do you know, sir, who I
am ? " The king said he did not. He rejoined, " I am the
son of such and such a merchant, and go mad for three
days every month ; and to-day is one of them." The
king laughed and went away.
^cellaneous Colloquial Sentences.
What is the price of this
cloth ?
Two rupees a yard.
It is too much, let me know
the exact price.
I should not give even half
as much.
I do not want it, but if you
give it cheap I may buy it.
Why do you charge such
exhorbitant prices ?
is kapre kl qimat kya hai ?
do rupai gaz.
yih bahut hai, thik th\k dam
boh.
main iska adha bh\ nahih
dena chahta.
mujhe is k\ %arurat nahiii,
lekin agar turn sasta do to
shay ad Idun.
turn itnd zyadah dam kyori
fm ?
406
It is not our fault, sir. It is
the War : prices have gone
up abnormally all round.
You have to pay about
3 rupees for what you
could get for one rupee in
pre war times.
Would you like cash or a
cheque ?
I have got no money on me
at present.
You had better send your
man on Monday.
I shall pay it to him.
Can't we fix the price of
every thing ?
I am afraid, no The people
would not let us do it.
Do you think things will be-
come as cheap after the
war as they were before
it?
I am afraid, no, because the
demand will be greater
than the produce.
yih hamdrd qusur
nahm, yih lardj kl icaja se
hai ; har ek chlz ki qimat
had se zydda barhga,i hai.
Lardi se pahle jis chlz ki
qimat ek rupaya thi, ab
qariban tin rupai hai.
naqd chdhiye yd chik.
mere pas is waqt ko.i rupaya
nahih.
bihtar hogd agar dp apnd
ddmi pir ko bhejdeh.
main use deduhgd.
kyd ham har ek chiz ki qimat
muqarrar nahin kar sakte ?
mere khaydl hai ki ham yih
nahm kar sakte, kyonki
log karne nahm denge.
dpke fehaydl men lard,i ke
ba'd har ek chlz pahle kl
tarah sasti hojd,egl ?
nahm, kyonki us waqt bhi
mdng zyddah aur chizen
thori hongi ,
Lesson XLII.
Conjunctions.
373. A conjunction is a joining word. It joins words,
phrases or sentences to one another.
407
374. The conjunctions offer no peculiarity differing
from those of the English language; we shall, therefore,
give below a list of the more useful of them :—
;^ aur, and
j o, and (Persian).
jf\ agar N,
j~x jo if, since.
^-r~?* Jab *
A^/l agarchi\
' , \ although.
/ 90 /
harchand, although (also, however much).
lekin
L* magar but (exceptive).
^ par )
balki, but rather, but also, on the contrary,
moreover (of contrast).
^ Vthen.
^ phtrj
J to bhi \ still, yet, nevertheless, even
> phir bhi / then (correlative of *^/'
15 td ham (Persian)) agarchi or £ go, although).
yj niz | .
also.
tf ibt, that, whether, or etc.
**l> fa jfct\ so that, in order that.
.^w jab ' <afc, until, as long as.
uLj» yahan tak ki, so that, to such an extent that.
^ chuhki \ ,
.because.
J^f kyohki*
*«*J 19GW )
, so, therefor*
w toaste >
nen lined f.- until ' it takoe the verb in the negn
408
to \
. l otherwise, or else.
tojj warna (Persian) \
b J goyd (Persian) )
/as if, as though.
jaise
-. khwah\
/whether, no matter if.
. chdhe j
b yd, either, or.
375. Please observe the various significations and the
different uses of the following conjunctions :—
(i) ;^l aur (and, etc.).
It is conjunction, adjective and pronoun, e.g. :—
Conjunction :—
Main aur merd bhdi donon wahan (jaye = I and my
brother, both, went there.
Us ne mujhe bulaya aur kahd = he called me and said.
Turn ne yih dawd pi aur achchhe M,e = you will be
all right as soon as you take this medicine.
Sarddr mara aur fauj ke pa, oh ukhargaye = the troops
took to flight as soon as their leader died.
Chand roz dildse se batdya dhista dhista bachcha chal
nikld = they teach him encouragingly for a few days
and the child begins to make improvement (Historical
Present)
NOTE. — Two verbs in the Preterite coupled by 'aur' (and)
denote (1) immediate succession of one action after another,
or (2) a general truth.
Rajput aur.buzdill = a rajput and capable of cowardice
(i.e., the two things are utterly incompatible).
Ek din thd ki wuh asharfidn lujdyd kartd thd aur ab l^hud
roti ko muhtdj hai = there was a time when he would
) Contraction of ' agar nahin to ' = if not then.
409
throw away gold coins to be scrambled for whereas now
he himself is in need of bread (i.e., is starving).
1 waqt par agaye to achchha aur agar der kl to nuqsan
hoga = if you come in time well and good but if yon
are late it will result in loss
Adjective: —
Yih aur hai = this is different.
V ra irada ab aur hai = I have a different intention
now (i.e., I have since changed my mind).
Ko,i aur admi wahan hai ? = is there anybody else there ?
Main bhulkar aur jaga chalagaya = I went to the wrong
place by mistake.
Y ih chabi aur hai = this is the wrong key.
1 nr kya chahte ho ? = what more (or else) do you want ?
Aur kuchh chahiye = do you want anything else ?
Pronoun : —
Aur sab musalman the = all the others were Mohamedans.
Auron se mujhe ko,i kdm nahln = I have nothing to do
with the others.
' Aur ' is generally omitted in numbers and allied ex-
-sions, as :—
Do sau pachas = two hundred (and) fit
Ham khd plkar wahan se chale the = we had had our
food (eaten and drunk) before we started from there.
Wuh ak*ar yahan aya jaya karta hai = he visits (comes
and goes) this place frequently.
Qalam dawat mujhe do = give me pen and ink.
Uske w iibhi zindah hain = his parents (mother
and father) are still alive.
It is optionally added to the second * na' of " n< ith. i
DOT ", as:—
Na wuh gaya aur na main = neither he went nor did I
52
410
" Aur kiya ? " (what else?) in answer to a query or
suggestion denotes emphatic approval in the sense of
' rather ', ' of course ', etc., as : —
Mere khayal men hamen jald sulah karnl paregl = I think
we shall have to make (or sue for) peace soon or in
the near future.
Aur kya = of course (there is no other alternative left
to us).
(ii) ) o (and, etc., Persian).
This conjunction is used to unite Persian and Arabic
words only, as :—
Shab-o-roz = night and day.
Iflas-o-ihtiyaj = poverty and need.
(Hi) j^XjJ lekin, j* magar. ^ par, and *XL balki (but, etc.).
The first three of these are synonymous and mean but
in the exceptive sense, but ' balki ' denotes contrast with or
advance over what has preceded. ' But ', following ' not
only ', is always ' balki \ as : —
Wuh sab jd,enge lekin (or magar or par) main nahin
jdyungd — all of them will go but I will not.
Agarchi wuh qaid hogayd magar (or lekin or par) bequsur
tha = although he was imprisoned, he was nevertheless
innocent.
Go wuh gharib hai par nihayat hi imandar hai = although
poor yet he is very honest.
Na siraf wuh ja,ega balki main bhl ja,unga = not only he
but I shall go as well.
Wuh siraf bewaquf hi nahin balki bad mu'ash bhl hai =
he is not only a fool but a scoundrel at the same
time.
Wuh nahin balki main ja,unga = not he (as you seem to
think or believe) but (on the contrary) I shall go.
411
Am nahin balki angur lungd = 1 shall not take mangoes
(which you offer) but grapes (which you withhold).
Main ne use bachpan se paid balki parhdyd bhi = I
brought him up from his infancy. Besides (or more-
over) T educated him
It is not elegant to use " magar agar" for "but if."
' Lekin agar ' are considered more euphonious.
(iv) y to (then, etc.).
1 'jar turn sack bolte to ham tumko mu'df kar dete = had
you told the truth (then) I should have pardoned you.
Jab sab kuchh faisal hochukd hai to ab der kyd hai?*=
since everything has been settled what is the delay then ?
Yih kitdb to dend ? = just hand me this book please, will
you ?
Main to nahln jdfihgd = as for me I shall not go.
Yih ghord to munhzor hai = this horse, I believe (or
as you can see) is headstrong.
Wuh to d,egd «= he for one will certainly come.
Akhir dekh to lo ki iskd natija kyd hold hai = any way do
at least wait and see what the result of it will be.
Ap bimdr to nahln = / hope you are not ill ? (you look as
if you are).
Khairiyat to hai = I hope it is all right ? (it looks as if it
is not).
Bewaquf to hai lekin bad nlyat nahln «= admitted that he
is a fool but he is not malicious (lit. evil-intentioned).
Yih to bari sharm ki bat hai = this, indeed, is a very
shameful thing.
Main to nahin jd saktd -= I (as you know, or as you can
see) cannot go.
Shardb to shardb wuh tambdku bhi nahin pita — let alone
(or to say nothing of) drinking wine, he does not even
•moke
412
Wuh to hochukd = well, that is done and finished.
Ek to wuh bewaqiif hai dusre ziddi = for one thing (or first)
he is a fool and for another (or secondly) obstinate.
(v) Difference between y to, ^^ tab, and^j phir (then. etc.).
' To ' denotes sequence of things as a result of some
cause or condition and is, therefore, correlative of ' agar '
and * jab ' (if, since, etc.); 'tab' is correlative of 'jab'
(when) used in its temporal sense; 'phir' (after that,
then) denotes order in which things take place and may
occasionally replace ' to ' when the latter introduces a
result of some cause (not condition), as • —
Agar (or jab) turn imtihdn pas kar loge to tumhen in* am
milegd = you will get a reward if (or when) you have
passed the examination.
Jab wuh jd,ega tab main bhi jd,ungd = I shall go when
(not, if) he goes.
Pahle main daftar kd kdm karlun phir tumharl bat sunungd
— let me first finish the office work and then (i.e., after
that) I shall listen to what you have got to say (lit.
your words).
Jab sab kuchh faisal ho chukd to ab (or phir) der kyd hai ?
= since everything has been settled what is the delay
then (in that case).
Wuh to gharz ka banda hai = to tell you the truth (or,
as a matter of fact) he is a slave of his ends, i.e.
servilely selfish.
(vi) j*j niz and ^& bhi (also).
' Niz ' (Persian) begins a sentence and may be supple-
mented by ' bhi.' ' Bhi ' never begins a sentence, it always
follows the additional word. In case of compound verbs
and tenses it is generally placed between the component
parts, as : —
413
Nlz main bhl ja,unga — also \ shall go.
Wuh bhl ja,ega = he will go (too, or also or, as well).
W ahdn ek adml bhl dikha,l na diyd — not even a single
soul was to be seen there.
" Bhi— bhl " express " both— and also," as :-
Nezabdzl khel bhl hai warzish bhl = tentpegging is both
a sport and physical exercise also.
Main ek ghante men jd.ungd bhl aur afinga bhl = I shall
both go and come back in one hour.
He also said (or added; = us ne yih ' bhl kaha.
(vii) ti ki (that, etc.).
Us ne kaha ki main jasahga = he said that he would go.
Mujhe malum nahln ki ivuh jd.ega yd nahln = 1 don't
know if (or, whether) he will go or not.
Turn jaoge ki tumhara bha,l = will you go or your
brother.
qhora tez nahln chal saktd (kyon) ki langrd hai = this
horse cannot walk fast because he is lame.
chalo ki waqt par pahunch jdten = come on (or walk)
quickly so that (= in order that) we may arrive in
tin
Main ne use likh >'«i ki fasal klarab ho rahehain = I
h i\« writ tt-n to him to say (== saying, or to the effect)
that the crops are being spoilt.
/ 7 kis tarah huj — has any trace
been found as to how the theft took place ?
Ap ne bal> at nrhrhha L'ii/fi ki imtihnn /.- ll,e ndm bhejdiya
= you have done very well (i.e., acted very wisely)
/// ///'// you have sent up your name for the examina-
tion.
>h must be added because ' bhi ' cannot stand by itself.
414
Hamdrd wahdn pahunchnd thd ki ddku bhdg gaye. Is irdde
se ki rdton rat chalkar tarke wahdii pahunch jden ham
ne iaHu kirdya kiye = the dacoits fled away as soon as
we reached there. Intending (lit. with this intention
that) to travel by night and reach there at dawn we
hired ponies.
Muddat tak yihi hdl rahd ki (dkhir) ek marhattd surblr
ujh'7i aur takhta ulat diyd = this state of affairs
continued for a long time until a Maharatta champion
(or hero) rose and turned the tables.
Nadir ki (jo) hotehote bddshdh hogayd asl men postin l doz
kd beta ihd = Nadir who gradually rose to be a kin^
was originally the son of " postin ' maker.
Ham do hi pardo gaye the ki (jab) dushman se do char
hogaye = we had gone only two marches when we
confronted the enemy.
Wuh morche se nikld hi ihd ki (jab] uske gol'i lagi aur wuh
chit hogayd = he had barely (or just) come out of his
trench when the bullet struck him dead.
(viii) t^*j^ chunki and aXi^ kyonki (because).
Both mean i because.' ' Chuhki ' is used when the
causal clause precedes the sequent clause and ' kyonki '
when the order is reversed, as : —
Chunki wuh bimdr ihd is waste na a sakd = because he
was ill (therefore) he could not come.
Wuh na d sakd kyonki wuh bimdr ihd = he could not
come because he was ill.
^Ij-J 'is waste' and 'JUI ' is ll,e = therefore. But
when they are followed by ti * ki ' they mean 'because,'
as : —
1 Postin = a skin-coat; postin doz = skin-coat sewer.
415
(a) Main is waste (or, ll,e)
na a saka ki bimar tha.
,jv -M .. . i I could not come because
(b) Main na a saka is
waste (or ll,e) ki bimar
Interjections.
:76. Interjections are merely words or sounds standing
by themselves and thrown into a sentence to express some
feeling of the mind.
Those commonly met with are : —
shabash ' = Bravo ! Well-done !
afrlh = Bravo ! Well-done !
slj wah wah = Admirable !
Uf kya fchub = How nice !
l*S kya bat hai = How nice !
oho = Oh !
Ut! ahd = Hallo!
ha,e ha,e = How sad !
uf = Ugh !
lauba = Bother ! Good Heavens !
hat
Avaunt! Getaway! Hush!
dur ho. )
rfa/a' ho «= Away with thy repulsive self !
Be gone.
do * = Here you are !
*a. haif. I
and I mean it !
Mil « Yes go on ! What ?
1 Contraction of * shadbash ' = be happy.
« Contraction of • yih lo' = take thin.
416
yl> bap re = Dreadful ! Good God.
khabardar = Take care !
amin = Amen !
VOCABULARY.
(ke) paon \ To confront
se
To be routed
ukharna Uj^l u
Encouragingly,^
With tender en- /
couragement. '
To begin to \ -77-
ichal nikalna
make im- ',
provement.J
Gold coin asharfl
Cowardice buzdill
Needy, in need muhtaj
Honest imandar
To bring up, to nourish
palna
Headstrong, ^ munh-zor
Strong- mouthed. ;
Tobacco (f.) tambaku
Obstinate qiddl ^
While it is still night
rdton rat ^ a
Champion, hero surbir
Board, plank tafehta
hona
Flat on one's
(se) do char
back, pros- \chit
trate J
To march \ (par) charhaj,
against, > karna
To invade. J U/ ^^J- (^ )
Rule, Government hukumat
Impossible namumkin
Wonderment ta'ajjub
To be won-\(&o) ta'ajjub
der-struck I
hona
or aston-
ished.
Safe, guarded
U»yt>
mahfuz
Otherwise
( 1. warna
)
^ 2. nahm to
iMarshal, ) . _,
,- sipah solar JL,
C-m-C. )
Nobleman
417
Mini- wazlr ^\j To gallop at ) sarpa( daurna
Amba ador£1-S°/l"r ^*" ful1 8Peed- > UJj° «-=~lr
)FJ 2. ,te*f ^~L;I Hurdle (f.) bar ;b
Jockey chabuk sawar Bramble kante l dar
EXERCISE 44.
Another day I again went to witness the horse-race.
The Marshall himself came to our residence and we moun-
ted a carriage and started. We went by the same route
we had used on the day of review and arrived at the
same building where we had been seated on the day of the
review. A good many nobles, ministers and ambassadors
were there. A big crowd of men and women had collected
round the race-course. Four heats were run. In the first
heat they ran half round the course. A jockey, whose
dress was green, won it. After two more such races a full
course was run ; but as the distance was not great, horses
mostly came in together. Any horse that comes first is
the winner. Here the longest race is one round (chakkar)
which is not more than one mile.
I n the last race, the horses had to jump at full gallop over
several hurdles about a yard high, which were covered over
with wild brambles. This was a very nice spectacle.
EXERCISE 44(a).
— >**
^ - au
;;J
i • KahtedSr' (or better, • kbard«r')= thorny.
Miscellaneous Colloquial Sentences.
What o'clock is it now 1 (i) ab kya bajd * hai ?
(ii) ab kitne baje 2 hain ?
It is exactly one o'clock. thlk ek bajd hai.
1 Qarlb qarlb = almost.
2 « Bajna ' = to be struck (as a bell, gong, etc.), to be played (as
musical instrument). '« Kya baja hai?" = what has been struck
*" Kitne baje hain ? " = how many have been struck ?
419
It is I suppose l-3(>.
It is 3-30.
It is nearly two o'clock.
It is very nearly seven.
Come at 6-45 p.m.
"> a.m.
At midnight.
At midday.
At sunrise.
At dawn
in.
At 3 p.m.
A little before dawn.
two hours before morn-
ing.
At four hours after sunset.
At (or till) so late in the
nighi .
At sunset.
Thr -nn was setting.
The sun was rising.
Bve minute to one.
derh baja hoga.
sdrhe tin baje haiit.
qartban do baje haiii .
sat bajne wale haiii.
sham ke (or ko) fuiiine sat
baje ana.
subah ke panch baje.
rat ke barah baje (or adhl rat
ko).
din ke barah baje (or do pahr
ko).
din nikle (or din cJiarhe).
tarke (or pan l phate) .
rat ke tin baje.
din ke tin baje.
munh andhere.
do ghahte rat rahe.
char ghaii^e rat <j
itnl rat gate.
'lube (or 4 din c/i/tif><
(i) din (hll* mha tha.
(ii) suraj qburuh ho raha tha.
or suraj) nikal (or charh )
Ktlia tlia.
(i) ekbajncrn'i* //'//»•/< ///////
baql h<\
(ii) ek bajne ko />//>r// n
rahtc /tarn.
u (f.)
— t<> hroak or to
420
It is twelve minutes to (i) tin bajne men bdrah mint
three. baql hain.
(ii) tin bajne ko barah mint
rahte hain.
It is seven minutes past ten. (i) das bajkar sat mint hii,e
hain.
(ii) das par sat mint hu,e
hain»
It is 25 minutes after eleven, (i) gydrah bajkar pachis mint
hu,e hain.
(ii) gyarah par pachis mint
hu,e hain.
It was early in the morning, sawera tha.
Early in the morning, earli- sawere.
er than usual.
Lesson XLIII.
Miscellaneous Hints.
Repetition.
377. Words are often repeated to convey the following
significations :—
(i) Plurality, variety or entirety in case of nouns and
pronouns.
(ii) Plurality, entirety or intensity in case of adjec-
tives.
(Hi) Distribution in case of numeral and pronomina
adjectives.
(iv) Continuation or repetition in case of participle
and intensive compound verbs.
(v) Continuation or occasionally intensity in case o
adverbs and postpositions.
421
Examples :--
Nouns.
Main ne usko ghar ghar taldsh kit/a == I searched for him
in each and every house. (Entirety.)
Sack sack bolo = speak the truth and nothing but the
truth (i.e., the whole truth). (Entirety.)
Ham sarak sarak a,e = we came by the road the whole
way. (Entirety.)
.16 wuh dar dar (or dar ba dar} mangtd phirtd hai = now
he wanders about begging from door to door. (Plural-
ity or Variety.)
Pronouns and Pronominal Adjectives.
Turn ne kya kya dekhd = what various things did you
see ? (Variety.)
W ahdh us waqt kaun kaun maujud tha = what people were
individually present there at that time ? (Plurality or
Variety.)
Jo jo kamyab lioga usko in* am milegd -~= every one of those
who succeeds will get a reward. (Distribution.)
Ko,l ko,i admi baq\ (ha, == There were only a few people
left there. (Plurality.)
/ ' n men ba'z ba'% bare insdf pasand hain = some of them
(considered individually) are just. (Distribution.)
Jo jo kuchh wuh bhejta hai main uske hisab men jama'
kar deta huh = whatever he sends me (at various times) ,
I credit it to his account.
Sab apne apne ghar chale ga.e = all went to their res-
pective houses. (Distribution.)
/ 'htoh par kitna kitna bojh tha — how much did the
camels carry individually. (Distribution.)
Main ne wuh wuh (or aisl aisl) chizen dekhlh ki 'aql
hair an rah gati = I saw such things as set my under-
standing at naught. (Distribution or Variety.)
KMARK.— (a) K kudih ' signifies *8oiu« .\hat ' or * to
some extent ', as : —
422
Wuh kuchh kuchh angrezi samajhtd hai = he understands
English a little (to some extent).
Wuh ab kuchh kuchh achchhd hai = he is somewhat better
now.
(6) • Kaun ' and ; kya ' repeated in a negative sentence
have the additional idiomatic meaning of ' all ' or • whole.'
\\'<tlinn kaun kaun na tha — (l) who were not present there ?
(name them individually). (2) Everybody was there.
Main ne kya kya na dekha — l saw everything (lit. what
was it that I did not see ?)
Ap mujh se puchhte hain ki main ne kya kya na dekha = you
ask me for a detail of what 1 did not see there.
Adjectives.
Charon taraf unchl unchl jhdrldn thlii = there were tall
bushes all round. (Plurality or Entirety.)
Us registdn ke ba'd yih hare hare khet dekhkar hamdrd
dil bahut khush hu)a = we were delighted to see the
green fields after the sandy desert. (Plurality.)
Uskl Iambi Iambi ndk to dekho = just look at his very
long nose. (Intensity.)
Uski safed safed ddrhl kya bhali ma'lum hotl thi =• how
pretty his white beard looked ! (Entirety.)
Usko tdza Idza dud pild do = ( 1) give him very fresh milk.
(Intensity). (2) Give him milk while it is still fresh.
Thandi thahdi haiva chal raM thl = a nice and cool breeze
was blowing. (Continuity and agreeable Intensity.)
Uuko pdnch panch rupai dedo = give them five rupees
each. (Distribution.)
Unke pas safar kharch ke ti,e das das rupai hain = each
of them has ten rupees for travelling expenses.
Turn sabko paune tin tin rupai milenge = every one of
you will get Rs. 2-12 0. (Distribution.)
Main ne usko char char chitthldn likhln lekin us ne ek kd
bhl jawdb na diyd = I wrote him as many as four
letters but he did not reply to a single one of them.
(Intensity.)
423
Participles and Compound Verbs.
Ham chalte chalte Delhi pahunche = we went on till we
reached Delhi. (Continuity.)
\Vuh parhte jxtfhte so gayd = he continued to read till
he fell asleep. (Continuity.)
Mai it Ixiithe baijhf nkt'i gaya Jinn = I am tired of con-
tinued idleness (lit. sitting).
/ 's ne leje leje khdnd khdyd = he took his meal lying
down all the while.
Tamdm kapre pare pare galgaye = all the clothes rotted
through continued disuse (lit. lying).
Main dekh dekhkar hairdn hold ilia = I felt puzzled as
I looked at it again and again. (Continuity or Repe-
tition.)
Jab unth laklifeii utha utha kar tajarba-kdr hu,a = when
he became experienced after repeated hardships or
reverses. (Continuity or Repetition.)
Jab jab aur jo jo wuh mujh se mdiigld thd main use de de
deta thd = I gave him whenever he asked me for any-
thing. (Continuity or Repetition.)
Wuh bimdr ho ho jdf.d hai lekin sJiardb plnd nahtn chhortd
== he does not give up drinking in spite of repeated
illness (through it).
IlKMAiiK.— (a) The Present and Past Participles are repeated
ily in their inflected form and only when the action
•ted by them is continued or repeated and contributive to
ne denoted by thr finite verb.
(6) In the case of the ('mijuiirUvi- Participle and tin-
Intensive Compound Verb only the root ]» od.
Adverbs and Postpositions.
Jaldl jaldi chalo = come (or go) on quickly.
ista dhista chalo = walk slowly.
;• chalo = go ahead (take the lead).
\\'>ih kabhl kabf hai = \\e comes here
tally,
424
Turn kahdh kahdii ho d,e ho ? — what various places have
you been to ?
Kahin kahm darkhton ke jhund the = there were clumps
of trees in some places.
Upar upar chale jd,o — go on upwards.
Bailun ab niche niche chald aid hai = the balloon is now
gradually descending.
Turn kyoh hamko bar bar dig karte ho? = why do you
bother me again and again ?
Jahdii jahdn unchi nichi zamin ho ivahah bardbar kar lo =
level the ground wherever it is rough.
Turn ne 'arzi upar upar kyon bhej di daftar kl ma'rifat
kyon nahin bheji ? — why did you send your petition
direct and not through the office ?
Awal awal (or pahle pahle) uskd suluk bahut achchhd thd
= in the beginning (i.e., early days) his treatment was
very good.
Hamdre pichhe pichhe 0,0 = follow me closely.
Us pahdrl ke pas pas rahnd •= keep close to the hill.
Paltan ke age age bdjd bajtd jdtd thd = the battalion was
led by the band, playing as it went on.
Darya ke kindre kindre ek kachchi sarak hai = there is an
unmetalled road along the bank of the river.
Us pahdr ke niche niche ek tin mil kd tanal hai = there
is a three mile tunnel under the hill.
Apni plaitun ke sdth sdth raho idhar udhar mat jd,o =
keep up with your platoon, don't stray away.
REMARK. — Only the Compound Postpositions can be repeated
and of these only a few.
378. Sometimes nouns are repeated
(i) With the Persian ' ba ' ( <o ) inserted, as :—
Roz ba roz,
Din ba din.
} day by day, from day to day.
425
Shahr ba shahr = from city to city.
M ulk ba mull: --•= from country to country.
Sal ba sal = every year.
(it) With the genitive ' ka ', ' ke ', or 4 kl' inserted, as :—
Sal ka sal = the whole year.
Paltan kl paltan = the whole battalion.
Sab ke sab = one and all.
Ohar ka ghar = the whole house (or family).
Sal ke sal = every year.
Hafte ke hafte= every week.
Mahine ke mahlne = every month.
Bat ki bat men, }
An ki an men, /in the twinkling of an eye.
Dam kc dam men. )
(m) With the intensive particle * hi ' inserted, as :—
Paul hi pani = nothing but water.
Ret hi ret = nothing but sand.
Hindu hi Hindu = Hindus exclusively.
.!/'//,« hi main = only I, none but myself.
(tv) With ' sa,' * se ' or « si' (like) inserted, as :-
Ohar saghar = &n ordinary house (i.e., a house like the
rest of them).
Dost sa dost = a friend like the rest of them.
Gall si gall = an ordinary abuse.
(v) With * to ' inserted, as :—
Sharab to shardb = leave alone drinking, to say nothing
of drinking.
379. Similarly adjectives, pronouns, and adverbs are
sometimes repeated with ' ka ', * se ' etc., inserted, as :—
Ahmaq ka ah mag = as foolish as before or as c\
Kale kd kola = as black as before or as ever.
Achchhe se achchha = the best possible.
54
426
Pnche ae uiicha = the highest existing, the loftiest
possible or imaginable.
Kya ka kya, \
Kya se kya, (something quite different to what it
Kuchh ka kuchh, / was or is.
Kuchh se kuchh. j
Kuchh 7ia kuchh = something or other.
Ko,l na ko,i = some one or other.
Kahiii ka kahln, \
Kahm se kahm, \ a place far remote to where it was
Kahan ka kahah* ( or is.
Kahan se kahan. }
Khwah ma khwah,} will-he-nill-he, certainly, for no earthly
Khwah na fehwah. ) reason.
380. A curious adjectival construction is occasionally
met with to express " ready or entire completion " of a
thing. This consists of two past participles coupled
together. If the first participle is intransitive the second
is transitive, and in case the first participle is transitive
the second is causative, as :—
Band banaya = ready made (from ' banna ' and ' banana').
Kiyz karaya = done and completed in all its details
(from ' karna ' and ' karana ').
Paka pakaya = ready cooked (from ' pakna ' and c paka-
na').
Saja sajaya =- ready furnished or equipped (from ' sajna '
and * sajana ').
Likha likhaya = ready written.
381. When one thing implies two or more attributes,
they are repeated with the genitive ' ka ' inserted, as :—
Neza-bazi khel ka khel hai aur warzish kl warzish = tent-
pegging is both a sport and physical exercise.
£7
Yik kahani let kahani hai aur naslhat ki nasihat = it is
both a story and a moral.
\uqsan ka nuqsdn aur badnami ki badnami = both loss
and disgrace.
Rhjftn i n g A ppositive .
382. Apart from the exact repetition of a word Hindu-
stani often conveys the idea of plurality by a rhyming
appositive, which is oftener than not an absolutely meaning-
\\ord. The commonest form of the appositive is
obtained by changing the first letter of a word into * w,'
as : —
Roil wotf = bread, etc., bread, and all that comes in its
train.
Pant wani = water, etc.
Kit'lb wit'ib = book, etc.
K /i find ir ,na = food. etc.
Parhnfi warhna = to read and to write, etc.
Baja gaja = band, etc. ; music and singing.
Chichi chapathl = letters, etc. (ie., parcels, money
orders, .etc ).
Maila kuchaild == dirty and filthy.
PuMi gichh (f.) = anxious enquiry
Sack much = in earnest, surely ?
•fhut mu( = in jest, as a fib.
383. The appositive sometimes has a meaning of its
own and may be synonymous with the word itself, as :—
ikar chakar =» servants and attendants.
bachche (M. P.) = children, family.
M P.) = children, family.
' 'rhhalna kiidnd = to skip and jump.
/ = to roll ;nul tniuhlr
dhnrna — to do all one can.
flhnnA = to ween and bathe <>• B with tears.
428
Chal dhal (f.) = conduct and behaviour.
Gali galoch = mutual abuse.
384. In a very few expressions the appositive precedes
the main word, as :—
Hashshash bashshash — gay and mirthful.
Ragra jhagra = dispute and quarrel.
385. In a few cases the Arabic singular and plural are
coupled together to express plurality, as :—
Amir umard = peers and nobles.
Faqlr fuqard = beggars and mendicants.
Gharib ghurabd = the poor and the indigent.
386. Two or more synonyms are often used to express
intensity, as :—
Kufr-o-beimani = the blackest type of dishonesty (lit.
infidelity and dishonesty).
Himdqat-o-ndddni = the worst ignorance (lit. foolishness
and ignorance).
Ellipsis.
387. Ellipsis means the omission of one or more words
without which a sentence would do equally well or perhaps
sound better.
388. Hindustani uses its pronouns very sparsely. In
fact it dispenses with them altogether if there can be no
likelihood of ambiguity without them, as:—
(Main) Idchdr hun, (main) kya kariin ? = I am helpless,
what can I do ?
Here 'main' (I) is understood in both the clauses,
because ' hun ' and the present subjunctive termination
' uri ' can refer to ' I ' only.
( Wuh) ^a^te ^ain = li is said (lit> Pe°Ple or thev say)'
(]j~ne\ mana ki yih durust hai = granted that it is
right.
429
ne\ 8una hai = (I) have heard (i.e., I hear).
Ham
Pulls wale chor ko pakar kar 'adalat men lega,e = the
police arrested the thief and took (him) to the
Court.
Raft dikha.o = show (me your) rifle.
389. When the present auxiliary is used in a negative
sentence either as a finite verb or in a compound tense, it
can be optionally discarded, as :—
Main bewaquf nahin (huh) = I am no fool.
Wuh merd kahna nahlh mania (hai) = he would not do
as I tell him to (i.e., he does not follow my advice).
Turn wahaii kyoh nahln gate (ho) ? = why did you not
go (or have you not gone) there ?
390. Two or more imperfect tenses following one
another may optionally discard the auxiliary ' tha ' etc.,
as : —
Jab kabhl ivuh ata (tha) yihl bat sunata (tha) = whenever
he came he told the same story.
391. * Ko ' or ' ke waste ' is generally understood after
infinitive of purpose, specially when the infinitive occurs in
close proximity with the finite verb, as :—
Wuh turn se milne ( keJ5gfff ay& tha = he came to see
you.
Ham chandmdri karne I t \ ja rahe hain -= we are
V /
going to practise musketry.
Wuh dakfari parhne ( ke *°-gte \ walayat ja,ega = he will
go to England to study medicines.
392. • Agar ' or 4 jab ' and ' to ' or * tab ' of the condi-
tional sentences, also ' agarchi ' or ' go ' (although), are
y often understood, as : —
430
(Agar) turn wahdn jd,oge to main bhi jd.ungd = if you go
there I shall go there as well.
(Jab) wuh d,egd tab main jd,ungd = I shall go when he
comes.
Agar wuh mihnat kartd (to) pas hojdtd = he should have
passed (the examination) if he had worked hard.
Jab bar sat dti hai ( — ^) kisdnon ke dil bagh bagh. hoi ate
ham = the farmers feel exceedingly delighted when
the rainy season comes.
( '7 00°"" ) wuh bewaquf to hai lekin qismat kd dhani ha I
= although a fool he is yet very lucky.
393. As in English, " either—or " and <• neither— nor "
take their verb in the first clause only, provided it is
common to both the clauses, as :—
Yd turn ja,oge yd wuh (jd.eqd) ==- either you will go or he
(will go).
Na main jd,ungd aur na wuh = neither I shall go nor he
(will go).
394. Imprecatory phrases and oaths generally occur
without a verb, as : —
Un sab par khudd ki la'nat (ho) = (may) God's curse (fall)
on all of them.
(Main) khudd ki qasam (khdtd hun or khdkar kahtd huii
ki) yih bilkul sack hai = (I swear) by God (that) it is
quite true.
(Main) tumko apne sir ki qasam (detd hun ki) jhut na
bolnd = (I) abjure you by your own head (i.e., life)
don't tell a lie.
395. 'Bat' (words, what is said by one) and ' kam '
(work, action, act), also ' dafa ' etc. (time) are often under-
stood, as:—
Us ne ek (bat) na sum — he ^,- not listen to a word.
131
Turn ne achchhd (kam) kiya ki waqt par aga,e = you have
done well (lit. good action) in that you have come in
time.
Main ne use (da fa or bar or martaba) samjhaya =-- I
explained to him as best I could (lit. a thousand
hundred thousand
times).
.'596. The following postpositions are often under-
stood : —
Main tin ghanje (tak) wahan \haira, raha = I waited there
(for) 3 hour^
Main bar sail (tak} koshih kartd raha = I tried and tried
(for) years.
Jaldl (se) chalo =walk quickly.
Wuh khushl khushl (se) chale gaye = they went away
quite satisfied or rejoicing.
Us ke (badan par] sakht chof lagl ~ he was badly hurt.
Bail ne mere (badan par) sing mara = the bullock gored
me.
Jab ham Kalkatte (men) pahunche = when \vo arrived (in)
Calcutta.
Wuh madrase (ko) Jala tha = he was going (to) the School.
397. ' Hu,a' of the participial adjectives is very often
understood, as :—
' ni bachche ko god me li,e (hu,e) bai(hl (hu,l) hai = the
mother is sitting with her child in her lap.
llachcha aiikheh khole (hu,e) para (hit, a) hai— the child
it lying with its eyes open.
\\'uh khaki kot pahne (hft,e) tha ~ he was wearing a khaki
tnnif.
''' or Polite Conversation.
:<(.)S. Indians arc l>\ nature a very courteous people
and have their own rnl<^ of etiquette. It is not, however,
within the scope of this work t<. <i< -;il with them, and we
432
shall, therefore, give below only such hints as will help the
student in polite conversation.
399. As has already been explained (vide 101 (i) to (v)),
one never uses " ham " (we) for oneself unless one is talking
to an inferior or means to convey the idea of one's own
superiority. " Main" (I) is generally used for oneself in
conversation among equals. In case the speaker wants
to be respectful to the person spoken to, equal or superior,
he uses some humble or submissive word as s^Ju " bahda ',
+&£ 'gtulam', both of which mean * slave', ^JUL khadim,
(servant), ^^ fidwi (devoted servant), ^i/-^ kamtarln
(the least or most insignificant one), etc., for himself and
lyl ap, v^jia. janab, )y^-=^ huzur, etc., all of which mean
" Your Honor, Your Excellency, etc.," for the person
spoken to. * Tu ' (thou) is very seldom used : its use is
practically confined to addressing —
(i) God, for familiar reverence.
(ii) Near junior relations or bosom friends (i.e., where
ceremonies can be dispensed with without
offence) .
(Hi) Domestics and very inferior persons, and that only
when you
(a) treat them with domestic familiarity, or
(6) intend to convey the idea of displeasure
or contempt.
* Turn ' (you) is used for equals and inferiors ; never for
superiors. Used of equals it lacks politeness but in the
case of inferiors it is far better than " tu " (thou).
Nouns and pronouns of the third person can be used
of any individual. But to imply respect they are treated
as plurals of the same person instead of as singulars.
400. Besides an Indian, especially the educated Indian,
uses all sorts of flattering and high-sounding expressions
433
for others and humble and submissive ones for himself,
optionally in reference to equals and necessarily for supe-
riors. It will be futile to give a list of them, as they are
to<> numerous. We shall, therefore, give below only a few
common ones by way of example : —
(i) lily, farmana (to order, to command) is frequently
used for "to say " to imply respect or courtesy, as : —
Ap ne kyd farmdyd thd = what did you say, sir ?
Karnail Sahib farmdU hain kl hameh is waqt fur sat
nahlii = the Colonel says that he has no time to spare
at present.
For the same reason ' farmana ' is generally substituted
for * karna ' in the nominal compound verbs, as : —
"Zikar farmana " for " zikar karna " = to mention.
" Khayal farmana " for «' khayal karna " = to think.
Manzur farmana " for " manzur karna " = to sanction.
(ii) On the other hand
'ar? karna, \
! "to petition," "to re-
^ 3 ^UxlJ iltimas karna, ,,
'«j^J ^i.1 J/ guzarish karna, etc. J
are frequently used for " to say " to convey the idea of
humility or submissiveness, as : —
Main ne unse 'ar? kar diya tha ki main hafte ke aridar
i>is nahln a 8akuhga=* I told him, to begin with, or
beforehand, that I should not be able to come back
within one week.
Waztr ne 'arz kl = the minister said.
(Hi) The following three verbs are very commonly
used : —
Ii}1 wJu^ tashrif land, to come (lit. to bring one's
noble presence).
k_iu^J tashrif lejana, to go (lit. to take away one's
noble presence).
55
434
tashrif rakhnd, to sit down, to stay, to live
(lit. to place one's noble presence).
Examples : —
Ap kab tashrif ld,ehge ? = when will you come, sir ?
Ldt Sahib agle somwdr ko Simle tashrif lejd,enge = His
Honor (or His Excellency) will go to Simla next Mon-
day.
Aiye, tashrif rakhiye = come and sit down please.
Ap kahdn tashrif rakhte hain ? = where are you staying,
sir?
(iv) When referring to the son of a gentleman you call
him sjlj ^^Lo " sahib zada " and when referring to your
own son you call him (i.e., your own son) *j!; s^xij " banda
zada." Similarly while alluding to the house of a gentle-
man (other than yourself) you call it *JU>. L^Jy " daulat
khana" (abode of wealth) and when talking of your own
house you call it <L>LL v-^c " gharlb khana (humble
cottage). Examples : —
Ap ke sahibzade dj Teal kahdn hain ? = where is your son at
present, sir ?
Yih dp ke sahibzade hain ? = is he your son, sir ?
Hah jandb, bandazdda hi l hai = yes sir, he is my son as
you have rightly guessed.
Ap led daulatT^hdna kahdn hai ? = where is your home (or
house) ?
Banda kd gharib khana Shahpur men hai = 1 belong to
Shahpur (lit. my humble cottage is in Shahpur).
(v) " Mizaj-i-sharif " (noble disposition) and " mizaj-i-
muqaddas " (sacred disposition) are the commonest expres-
sions used in reference to others' health.
l " HI " here means " as you say " or " have rightly guessed.''
435
" Sharif " (noble, holy) and " muqaddas " (sacred, holy)
are also added to names of holy places, books, etc , as : —
Makka sharlf = Holy Mecca.
Watan sharlf = Illustrious native soil.
Bait-ul-muqaddas = Jerusalem (lit. The Holy House).
Quran sharlf = Holy Qunin.
Ap ka mizdj kaisa hai ? \ .
Mnaj-i-sharlf? j how do you do, sir ?
Khuda ka shukar hai = thanks to God (t am all right).
Khuda ka fazal hai = (by) God's grace or favor (I am
all right).
Allah ka rahm hai = (By) God's mercy (I am all right).
Ear tar ah khairlyyat hai = all right in every way.
(vi) Whilst thanking an equal or a superior you gene-
rally say
mihrbam, ")
'inayat, r (your) kindness, favor etc.,
shafqat. )
•me other kindred expression, and " achchha " (all right)
and " shabftsh " (Bravo ! Well-done !) in case of inferiors.
Tin* latter (i.e., shabash) is more appreciative and is used
.to buck up the person addressed.
Euphemism.
t"l. Euphemism means "use of a soft or pleasing tmn
xpression instead of a disagreeable or offensive one."
Indians are very fond of it partly from their inherent ten-
y to be very polite and partly from superstition. For
mce a sweeper is addressed as " miht ir " (lit. greater)
or " jama'dar " ; a barber or a tailor as " khalifa " (caliph ) :
a hearer or steward as "sardftr" (chief) : a water-carrier
as " bahishti " (a man of paradise, because he supplies
frater, a vital necessity of life) ; a blind man is ad-
436
dressed as " hafiz " (one who has learnt Quran by heart).
All these palliative and flattering expressions are meant to
compensate for low calling or a shortcoming.
402. Similarly it is ominous or inauspicious to say
"dukan band karna " (to close the shop) ; the shop might
be closed for ever ; " barhana " (to increase, to add) is used
instead, as : —
liUbjj ^Kj j dukdn barhana = to close a shop.
U(jtjj ^Ij^jJuuJ dastarkhwdn barhana = to remove the
table cloth after a meal.
Glfcjj JjJ ( K ) (lea) dud barhana = to wean (a child).
403. When praising something belonging to another
person, phrases like
<.J jj ~ix^ chashm-i-bad dur= far be the evil eye.
» r * r *
all I l£U ma sha allah = as God wills.
£_ ^ khudd ke fazal se == by God's grace
(Mohdn.).
Ishwar Tci kirpa se = bj God's kindness
(Hindu).
Examples :—
Chasm-i-bad dur apki T^hubsurtl parion ko mat Tcartl hai =
far be the evil eye, your beauty eclipses that of
fairies.
Ma sha allah apkd ghord to haw a se bdten kartd hai = aa
God wills it, your horse is as fleet as the wind (lit.
talks to the wind).
Khudd ke fazal se dp bahdduri aur jawdnmardi men yakta
hain = by God's grace you are matchless in bravery
and intrepidity.
Ishwar kl kirpa se dj apkd chihrd guldb kl manind khil
hu,d hai = by God's kindness your face looks to-da^
like a rose in full bloom.
437
403A. When referring to an unpleasant subject or possi-
bility M khuda na khwastah f> or " khuda na kare " (God
forbid) or " naslb-i-dushmanah " (may it fall to the lot
of your enemies) is often used to introduce it, as : -
Khuda na kare. ki wuh bure din dekhe = God forbid that
he should fall on evil days.
Khuda na fchwastah agar hamko shikast hojaye = should
we be defeated, which God forbid.
'a) Nasib dushmanan ap
bimar to nahih
.,..,., I hope vou are not ill.
(b) Ap ke dushman bimar
to nahlii
404. *' Mania " (to die) is seldom used in reference to
Mie'fl <»\vn relations or those of others in their presence;
" guzarna " (to pass away), " wafat pana " (to obtain sal-
vation) or some other polite expression is used instead,
as : —
•lab mere walid sahib guzar ga,e = when my father died
(i.e., passed away).
Jab ap ke bare bha,i sahib ne wafat pa,i = when your
elder brother died (i.e , obtained salvation).
How to express " as soon as"
i<>"> " As soon as" or " no sooner than " is expressed
AS follows :—
(/) By the Adverbial Participle.
Ooll lagte hi wuh mar gaya = he died as soon as the
bullet hit him
Khat parkte hi main ne jawab likh diya == I wrote the
answer as soon a I had read the letter.
Uske jate hi tamam mulk men phir fasad par jatega — the
whole country will fall into disorder again as soon as
he leaves this place.
438
(u) By " jonhm " (as soon as), as :—
Jonhm us ne yih khabar sum wuh behosh hokar gir para =
he swooned and fell down as soon as he heard the
news.
(m) By " idhar— udhar ", as :—
Idhar din nikld udhar ham ne hamla shuru' kar diyd = we
began to attack as soon as the sun rose.
Idhar wuh mar a udhar dost bhi dushman hoga,e = even
his friends became enemies as soon as he died.
(iv) By 'aur', as: —
Turn ne fasad khold aur ivuh mara = he will die as soon
as you bleed him (i.e., open his vein).
Sarddr mara aur fauj ke pd,on ukhar ga,e = the troops
took to flight (i.e., lost their hold on the ground) as
soon as their leader died.
(v) By the Infinitive followed by " ki ", as :—
Uskd marna tha ki ghar Tea ghar barbad hogaya = the
whole house was ruined as soon as he died.
Bharl topon ka ana tha ki hamdre dil barh gaye = we felt
encouraged as soon as the heavy guns arrived.
Hukm ka milnd tha ki ham sab jhapat pare = all of us
rushed forward as soon as we got the order.
Occasionally " hi" (just, etc.) is added to the Infinitive
to make it more emphatic, as : —
Uska ana hi tha ki fasad mitgaya = the mischief was
quelled exactly the instant he arrived.
Tarpido ka lagna hi tha ki injan phatgayd = the engine
burst open or exploded precisely the moment the
torpedo struck it.
(vi) By the use of "der" (delay), as:—
Usko ga,e der na hu,i thl kichhat girl aur das ddmi dabkar
marga,e—he had not been gone long (i.e., as soon
439
as he went away) the roof came down and ten men
were buried to death.
Bahre ke ane ki der hai phir main chalduhga = I will
start off as soon as the bearer arrives. (Lit. the delay
consists in the coming of the bearer, after that I shall
start off).
How to express " /or/'
406. " For " is expressed as follows :—
(i) When it means ' for the sake of ', 4 for the purpose
of ' or ' meant for ' it is expressed by * ke waste ' or ' ke
ll,e ', as :-
Khuda ke waste mujhe mu'af kijlye = for God's sake
pardon me, sir.
Wuh sair ke waste ga,e hain = he has gone out for a
stroll.
Hamare waste ko,i chijthi hai ? «= is there a letter for me ?
Is men kdmydbl ke waste bari mihnat zarurl (or darkar)
hai = it requires much hard work to succeed in it.
(tt) When it refers to price it is expressed by * ko ' ,
' par ' or ' men ', as :—
Yih xabun ka dabba kitne ko (or par or men) liyahai? =
what did you pay for this box of soap ?
Main ne wuh ghora derh sau rupai ko (or par or men)
kharida tha = I bought the horse for Rs. 150.
Alehir kitne ko (or par or men) bechoge •= after all what
will you sell it for ?
i) When it refers to time it is expressed by —
(a) ' S© ' (from) if a state still continues to exist.
(b) 'Tak' (up to, till) if a state has ceased to exist.
In this case <f tak " is, however, generally understood,
as : —
Wuh tin din se bimar hai = he has been ill for 3 days
and is still ill (lit. he is ill fr<»m :> days).
440
Wuh tin din (tak1) blmdr raha = he has been ill for
3 days but is all right now (lit. he remained ill (up to)
3 days).
It is however quite correct to say—
Main tin roz ke waste Lahore ja raha hun = I am going
to Lahore for 3 days.
(iv) It is also expressed by (I) ke badle=m exchange
for, (2) ki jaga = instead of, (3) kl taraf se = on behalf of
or (4) kl taraf = in the direction of, according to its sense,
as : —
1. Change it for a new one = is ke badle nayd lelo (lit.
take a new one in exchange for it).
2. Use this for (instead of) that one = us kl jaga yih
isti'amal karo.
3. I say this for (on behalf of) him = main yih us
kl taraf se kahtd hun.
4. The train left for (started in the direction of) Pindi =
gar I Pindi ki taraf rawdna hu,i.
Interrogatives used as negatives.
407. Interrogatives are often used to express strong
negation and surprise, as —
Main wahdn kyon ja,uh ? = why should I go there ?
(=1 shall not go there).
Kaun kah saktd hai iskd natija kya hogd ? = who can say
what its result will be ? ( = no one can say, etc.).
Turn is ki nisbat kya jante ho ? = what do you know
about this ? ( = you know nothing, etc.).
Us ne kab London dekhd ? = when did he see London ?
( =he never saw London).
J Absence of ' tak ' always sounds better than its presence in such
cases.
441
Kahih aisa bhl hota hai ? = Does even such a thing as
this take place anywhere ? (= such is the case nowhere).
Gham ke baghair khushi kis larah (kyoiikar or kaise)
mahsus ho sakti hai ?= how can pleasure be frit
without (the knowledge of) pain (i.e.. it cannot be
felt).
N.achlz insan aisl bdrik baton ko kaise (kyonkar or kis
tarah) samajh sakta hai? = how can a human being,
insignificant as he is, understand such subtle things ?
(i e., he cannot understand them).
\i m:. — • Kya ' also expresses contrast mingled with surprise,
as :-
Admv kya! wuh to shaifan hai ! = a man you call him ! He
is the devil himself.
408. Another way of expressing very strong negation
is to put in " khak " (dust) or " kya khak " (what ? dust ?),
AS : —
Wuh ise khak (or kya khak) samjhega ? — how on earth
can he understand this ? (i.e., he cannot).
Is men l&ak or (kya khak) fd,ida hoga ? = what gain in the
name of Dickens can accrue from this ? (i.e., none).
Hi9. "Bhala" (well?) is also often put in such sen-
tences to make them still more emphatic, as :—
tthala kaun janta hai ki kal kya hoga ? = well ? who on
earth knows what will take place to-morrow ? (i.e., no
one knows).
Bhala is men khak or (kya khak) fa,ida hoga t = well?
what benefit can accrue from this ? (i.e. , none).
* Bhala' sometimes emphasises interrogation only with-
out lending it the negative sense, as :—
Bhala is men kya fa,ida hoga ? = well ? you just tell me
tor I ask you) what benefit will accrue from tl
56
442
NOTE. — ' Bhala ' is also used as an adjective meaning * good 'r
as : —
Bhala admt = good man.
410. Interrogatives are also preferably used in place
of relatives in subordinate objective clauses, as :—
I know who your informer is = mujhe ma'lum hai ki
tumhdrd mufehbir kaun hai (for " jo tumhdrd mukhbir
hai main usko jdntd hun ").
Do you know where he lives ? = tumko ma'lum hai ki
wuh kahdn rahta hai? (for "jahdnwuh rahta hai wuh
jaga tumko ma'lum hai ?}
411. < Kya ', 'kaisa' and ' kitna ' placed before an
adjective or an adverb signify "What a!" "How!"
in their exclamatory sense, as : —
Kya fehub ! = how nice !
Kya nirdld T^haydl hai ! = what a novel idea !
Kaisa 'ajib ddmi hai ! = what a strange individual he
is!
Kaisi sharm ki bat hai ! = how disgraceful !
Kitnd unchd mmdr hai / = how high the steeple is !
412. r< Kaisa hi" or "kitnahl" expresses 'however,'
" no matter how" and "whatever" in their indefinite or
indifferent sense ; ' agarchi ' (although), ' khwah ' or ' chahe T
(whether, no matter if) may optionally be put at the
beginning of sentences constructed with either of them.
To make it very emphatic "kyorina" (why not ?) is
placed before the verb, as : —
(Khwah or chahe) kitnd hi (or kaisa hi) be rahm ddml
(kyon na) ho = however merciless a man may be (why
should he not be, let him be).
(Khwah) kitnd hi (or kaisd hi) mushkil kdm (kyon na) ho
= however difficult a task may be.
443
Use kitnd hi sdmjhd o = however hard you try to persuade
him.
Uskl zdt kuchh hi ky-m na ho = whatever his caste may
be.
NOTE. — This construction always takes its verb in the
Present Subjunctive.
413. In alternative interrogative sentences " ya nahm "
(or not?) generally follows them though it can be under-
stood in English, as : —
Will you go (or not) ? = turn jd.oge ya nahln ?
He enquired if the Adjutant had come = us ne puchhd
ki ajUdn sahib d,e hain yd nahln.
What does he know whether I shall go or not ? = tisko
kyd khabar ki main jd,uhgd ya nahln ?
Intentional acts.
414. Indians rightly or wrongly are very jealous of
ibing active or intelligent attributes to lifeless things,
especially abstract nouns. Thus when in English a transi-
verb happens to have an inanimate noun, especially
abstract one, as its subject the sentence is generally recast
with an intransitive verb expressive of the idea, as : —
His stories interested me a good deal = uske qisse sunkar
(or uske qissoii se) mujhe bard lutf dyd.1
Drinking ruined him = wuh shardb pi pi kar (or pine se)
barbdd hogayd.*
His persistent assiduity led him to success = garkar
karne se wuh dkhir kdmydb hogayd.*
Lit. hearing his stories (or from his stories) great pleanure came to
me.
* Lit. repeatedly drinking (or from drinking) wine he became ruined,
i . from working assiduously he at last succeeded
444
You, however, come across instances where this rule is
transgressed but they are very few and far between. For
instance you can say —
Shardb ne usko barbdd kardiyd = drinking ruined him.
Uski 'ajizl ne use har-dil-'azlz band diyd = his gentleness
(or humility) made him popular.
Is ek kitab ne use 'dlim band diyd = this one book made
him a learned scholar.
415. A transitive verb implies intention or purpose in
Hindustani. That is why the intransitive construction is
generally resorted to when an action lacks purpose or
intention, as : —
I lost my book (accidentally) = men kitab gum hoga,l
(khogaj or jdtl rahi).1
I lost my book (deliberately) = main ne apm kitab
khodl.
I knocked my foot against a stone (accidentally) = rnerd
pdon patthar se laga*
I kicked the stone (intentionally) = main ne patthar ko
thokar marl.
He killed himself (accidentally) = wuh margayd*
He killed himself (committed suicide) = usne fyhud-kushi
karli (or us ne apne dp ko mdrddld).
416. Please observe the difference between the following
expressions :—
dub marnd = to drown oneself intentionally.
dub kar marnd = to die of drowning (accident).
50 jdnd = to fall asleep (involuntarily).
Lxtoj ^ so rahnd = to go to sleep (voluntarily) .
1 Lit. my book disappeared (or was lost).
2 Lit. my foot came in concussion with the stone.
8 Lit. he died.
445
How to express (t unless"
417. 'Unless' has two meanings: (a) " if— not," (6)
until " and is expressed accordingly, as :—
You will never succeed unless you work hard = agar turn
tnihnat na karoge to kabhl kamyab nahin hoge.
Nothing can be decided unless (or until) he comes = jab
talc wuh na a,e kuchh faisla nahin ho sakta.
Hoiv to express " lest" " / fear lest" "I hope not."
418. ' Lest ' etc. are expressed by —
(t) sS jyi L-J! " aisa na ho ki " or its Persian equivalent
« mabada " (may it not be so that).
(tt) ^ " kahin " (by chance), e.g. :—
Lest he should come, "\ (t) aisa na ho ki wuh aja,e.
I fear lest he should come, f (ii) mabada wuh aja,e.
I hope he will not come, j (Hi) kahin wuh a na ja.e.
I ( KMARK. — " Aisa na ho ki " and " mabada " being negative
phrases require the verb to be in the affirmative while '' kahin "
requires it to be in the negative. In both cases the verb must
l>o in its intensive form.
419. Similarly verbs expressing fear take their objective
clause in the negative, as :—
I fear lest he should die =» (t) mujhe dar (or, fyhauf) hai
ki wuh mar na jae. (ii) main darta hun ki wuh mar na
ja,e.
Suffix" wala."
420. * Wala ' added to an inflected infinitive forms—
(i) Noun of agency.
( //) Generic adjective denoting characteristic attribute.
/) Future participle denoting imminence of action,
e.g. :-
Bha,l janewale ! zara dakkhane ka rasta batate jana —
brother wayfarer ! just let me know the way to the post
office as you go along (or before you go any further).
446
Is gumndm chichi ke likhnewdle ka ndm darydft karo
= find out the name of the writer of this anonymous
letter.
Tiger is a carnivorous animal = sher gosht khdnewdld
jdnwar hai.
Odrl jdnewdli hai — the train is about to start.
NOTE. — '• Marnewala," however, means "deceased," also
* about to die,' as : —
Marnewala wasiyat kar gayd hai = the deceased has made a
will.
Wuh bichara marnewala hai — the poor man is about to die.
421. ' Wala ' is also added to nouns, pronouns, post-
positions and adverbs but never to an adjective, as :—
Us wold = the one that belongs to him (her or it).
Tumhdre wdld = the one that belongs to you.
Merewdld = the one that belongs to me.
Hamdrewdld — the one that belonge to us.
Uske niche wall chhat = the roof under it.
Us ke sdth wdld mdkdn = the building adjacent to it.
Masjid Tee sdmnewdld darwdza = the door facing the
mosque.
Upar wdld kamra = the upper room.
Samnewdld gdon = the yonder village.
422. * Wala ' is frequently used for ' ka ' of the geni-
tive, as : —
ftaivdri wdld (or ka) ghord = the riding horse.
M ewe wall (or kl) dukdn --= fruit shop.
REMARK. — Expressions like " achchha wala " (for • good one '),
" kharab wala " (for « bad one '), " kala wala " for ' the black
one ') are decidedly wrong. They are used only by Europeans
and their servants in loyal imitation of their masters. These
should be expressed as follows : —
Bring the black one = (i) kala la,o. (ii) wuh jo kala hai wuh
la,o.
Send the brown one for repairs =(*') Badami marammat ke
447
waste bhejdo. (u) wuh jo badami hai use marammat /.•
waste bhejdo.
Suffix ' sa '.
423. ' Sa ' added to nouns and pronouns forms adjec-
fl denoting similitude or likeness, as : —
Chaiid sa chihra = moon-like face.
Resham se norm narm bdl = silk-like soft hair.
Tujh sa bewaquf = a fool like fchee.
>/i sa gharlb = a poor man like me.
NOTE. — ' Waisa ' (like that) is contraction of 'wuhsa';
lisa' (like this) .. „ yih sa ' ;
4 Kaisa ' (what like ?
how 0 „ „ kissa';
' Jaisa ' (as, like
which etc.) ., „ ,, ' jis sa.'
kaun sa? = which particular ?
ko,i sa = any at random, any you like.
NOTE. — ' Kaun ' and ' ko,I ' are not inflected before • sa.'
424. Added to adjectives of quality it signifies likeness
of a lesser degree, while added to adjectives denoting size
or quantity, it either intensifies them or moderates them
to a lesser likeness according to the context, as :—
Achchha sa = pretty good.
Kharab sa = rather bad.
Kala sa = blackish.
rhcha sa = very high or rather high.
Bajra sa = very big or largish.
Lambd sa «=» very long or longish.
Added to the following adjectives it has, however, gener-
all\ th»- enhansive effect : —
Chhota sa >
AT ,. f very small, tiny.
Nanha sa )
Thora sa = very little.
Bahut sa = very much, quite a lot of.
448
425. ' Ka sa ' similarly added signifies " like that or
those of ", as: —
Bddshahon ka sa libds = royal robe (clothes like those of
kings).
Elchhon ke se bdl = hair like that of a bear.
Bandar kl si shakal = face like that of a monkey.
The Intensive Particle v_rfi>, 'hi'.
426. The chief function of ' hi ' is to emphasise or lend
point to the word to which it is added. In the case of a
compound verb it is preferably inserted between the com-
ponent parts while in the case of a noun or pronoun
followed by a postposition, it usually takes its place before
the postposition. You cannot, however, say " main hi ne ".
You must say ' main ne hi '.
427. For reasons of euphony and assimilation the
following pronouns optionally but advantageously admit of
a slight contraction and variation : —
to yih hi becomes ^j yihl.
*j wuh hi „ L_A wu^>
P\ is hi ,, ^*J isi.
r\ us hi ,, ^ul usl.
^\ in hi ,, j^J- inhln.
Jt un hi ,, ij^' unhin.
J turn hi ,, ^^ tumhln.
»fi> ham hi ,, tj^ hamln.
REMARK. — The above intensive forms are quite distinct from
the Second Dative forms of the corresponding pronouns. The
Intensives are characterised by ' i ' while the Dative by : e/
Both the forms are given below for contrast : —
Intensive. Dative.
isi &1 ise.
usi £±1 use.
449
Intensive.
inhin
unhin
tnjh hi
tuntLlh
mujh hi
hamin
428.
Similarly—
ab hi
kab hi
tab hi
becomes
Dative
inhen
J' unhen.
tujhe.
tumhen.
mujhe.
hamen.
abhi.
kabhl.
jabhl.
tabht.
Ub^ wahan hi ,, ^^jjfc^ wahln.
Examples : —
Hamin nahln kahte sard jahan kahta hai = we only do not
say (this), the whole world says (this).
Isi ghore ne pichhli dan? jUi thi = it was this very horse
which won the last race.
Tdrghar dakfchdne ke pas hi hai =s the telegraph office is
quite close to the post office.
Ek hi din men wuh gayd bhi aur a bhi gayd = in a single
(only one) day he went and also came back.
I) u*re hi din wuh bimdr pargayd = he fell ill the very IK \ t
day.
wuh din d hi gayd = at last the day did come (i.e.,
actually came).
Sifdrish to wuh kareh hi ge = as for recommendation, !»«•
\\ ill certainly make (it).
)"/// baten ho hi rahi thin ki ' fdlam ' kd bigal 6a;d«= this
conversation was still going on when "fall in" was
bugled.
57
450
Bahre hi ne yih use kahd hogd — it must be the bearer
who said this to him. (i.e., it can be the bearer only
etc.).
Unke parosion hi ne chori ki hogi = it must be their
neighbours who committed the theft.
Main dp ke hdn due hi ko thd ki bdrish hone lag ga ,i = I
was just on the point of coming to you when suddenly
it began to rain.
Kuchh hi ho ab main use mar hi ddlungd = come what
may, now I must kill him (nothing less than that).
Ko,i kitnd hi amir kyon na ho maut se nahin bach saktd
== however rich (great or grand) one may be, one can
not escape death.
Uskd and hi tha ki meri jdn men jdn dga,i = he had no
sooner come than I felt revived (i.e., his very coming
meant revival for me).
Zyddah nahin to ek hi hafte ki ru^hsat dihvddo = get me
only one week's leave if not more.
Shdyad hi wuh d,e = it is very doubtful if he will come.
Charon hi gum ho ga,e hain = all the four have been lost.
Use of l> * nd ' ar sJ ' na ' at the end of a sentence.
429. ' Na ' (or 'na') placed at the end of a sentence
makes it interrogative and expects the answer according as
the rest of the sentence is couched, i.e., if the rest of the
sentence is put affirmatively the answer is expected to be
in the affirmative, but if it is worded negatively, the
answer is expected to be in the negative, as : —
Turn kal jd,oge nd (or na) ? = 1 believe you will go
to-morrow, won't you ?
Ab to aisd nahin karoge nd (or na) ? = well, I hope you
will not do so in future, will you ?
451
430. Apart from the various ways of expressing strong
negation there is still one more which consists of the
jnflected infinitive with ' ka ' (' ke', * ki ') of the genitive
placed after and ' nahm ' before it. It is needless to say
that this construction is admissible in the negative only.
Examples : —
Main wahah nahln jane ka (hun) = I am not the man to
go there (i.e., catch me going there).
Wuh 'aurat aisi bat kabhi nahln karne ki (hai) = she is
not the woman to do such a thing.
How to express " to owe."
431. "To owe" is expressed by r dena ' (to give) or
4 lena ' (to take) as follows : —
I owe him two rupees = (i) mujh ko uske do rupai dene
hain (i.e., I have to give his two rupees), (ii) usko
mujh se do rupai lene hain (i.e., he has to take two
rupees from me).
He owed me five rupees = (i) usko mere panch rupai
dene the (i.e., he had to give five rupees of mine),
(it) mujh ko us se panch rupai lene the (i.e., I had to
take five rupees from him).
VOCABULARY.
From door to door dar l dar Just, impartial insdf-pasand
(1. maujud *
feresent (adj.) Beard
1 2.
Mustachio muchh (f.)
1 Dar (Persian) = door.
9 Both the words, i.e., 'maujud' and ' hS?ir'f are used predicatively
Used in reference to persons • maujud ' is used for superiors or
inferiors while * hazir ' for inferiors only. In reference to things • mauj u« i '
452
To be tired \
(of) I (se) uktdna
To be fed j Ultfl (
up (with) /
To rot galnd
Experienced tajarba-kdr
& <*-
To go and come back ho ana
To make a will waslyat karnd
Again and again bar bar
frj4
Treatment, dealings suluk
L j -\ i-"
To be furnished \
}sajnd
or decorated ;
To furnish,
To decorate
Advice, moral
\
}saidna
J
naslhat
Very lucky qismat kd dhani
—VJbt) O Ll^*>-o.'*»*J>
To swear (by) (kl) qasam
khdna (->(.$/ (
To abjure -~( ko—kl] qasam
dend lL j ^ j' ( ^ - y )
To be exceedingly delighted
(kd) dil bdgh bdgh hond
Horn
Sorrow g^am --c
To be felt mdhsus hond
L> fcJt , J^JfcA*ASX>«
To feel mahsiis karnd
Insignificant
Novel , strange nirdld
Steeple mlndr
Merciless be-rdhm
( 1. qissa (m.)
Story <
Pleasure,
Enjoyment.
lutf
simply denotes their existence while ' hazir ' implies an offer in the sense
of ' at your service ' , as : —
Wahan kitne adml maujud the ? = how many men were present there ?
The Colonel himself was present there = karnail sahib khud wahaft
maujud tlie.
How many recruits are present for inspection ?= kitne rangrut mulahaza
ke wastf. hazir (or ' maujud') hain ?
The bearer is present, Sir = huzur, bahra hazir hai.
Tumhare pas kitne rupai maujud hain ?— how much money have you got
ready (or as balance) ?
Huzur, mere pas pachas rupai hazir hain =•. Sir, I have fifty rupees at
your disposal.
453
Popular
Learned
'alim
Anonymous gumnam
Monkey
bandar
To feel revived,} (kl) jan men
To begin to f jan ana
hope from des- [ ^
pair JGI
PART II— MISCELLANEOUS EXERCISES.
Paraphrasing.
Before we ask the reader to try the following exercises
we should like to explain to him the necessity of paraphras-
ing difficult passages. Simple constructions and easy
sentences must be left alone. It is the complex construc-
tions and difficult wordings only which generally require
simplification. Your vocabulary of the English language
is bound to be much larger than that of Hindustani,
especially when you are studying for the Lower or the
Higher Standard, which means that you cannot say
equally well in Hindustani what you can quite easily
say in English. Other factors which contribute towards
the enhancement of the difficulty are that words of the
two languages are not identical in their various shades
of meaning and the ways of the thinkings of the two
people are different. Hence whenever you come across
a complex English construction or words the Hindustani
equivalents of which you do not know you must needs
reduce or boil them down so as to bring them, if possible,
within the scope of your own vocabulary and knowledge
of grammar. Often even the order of construction has to
be changed for this purpose. Of course you must keep
as close to the text as possible. But as there are always
more than one way of saying a thing in every language,
you can break, twist or turn it, even omit unnecessary
words so as to express it simply and idiomatically without
straying away from the text.
As it is often the case that an English word has more
than one signification, all of which cannot be expressed
455
by one Hindustani word, it necessarily follows that you
should resort to different Hindustani words to express it
according to its signification.
For instance : —
To weigh (on a scale) = tolnd.
,, (pros and cons) = sochna.
,, (an anchor) = langar unhand.
Thing (article) = ckiz.
(affair, matter) = bat.
To be translated from English into Hindustani.
I.
Pavement farsh \Jif Structure, make,) banau-nt
Charming dil-kash ^iXJj build- ^/^
To rest dram karnd by !;T Passer-by rah-guzar ;^;
Magnificent 'allshan Ji^^ End (material) aim U
Rose
Famous mashhiir
Rosy, pink gulabl ^ Merchant saudagar
'I'liere lived in Baghdad a poor porter named Hindbad.
One day, when the weather was excessively hot, he was
carrying a heavy load on his head from one end of the city
to the other. He was very tired and had still a great way
to go. Walking along he came to a street whose pavement
was sprinkled with rose water and where a gentle (light)
breeze was blowing. Delighted with this cool and charming
spot he placed his load on the ground and sat down
to rest himself for a while near a large house. He had
never passed this way before and therefore did not know
who the occupants of the house were. Noticing the magnifi-
458
cent structure of the house he became curious to know
the people in it, and enquiring from a passer-by came
to know that it belonged to his own brother, Sindbad, the
renowned merchant.
II.
Meanwhile itne men
Deck dek
Traveller )
I musafir
Passenger )
Sail badban {
To anchor langar dalna
Ice-berg barf ka pahar
Anchor langar
Favourable wind mudfiq
hawd I
Bell ghantd
Bell (small) ghantl
To weigh anchor langar
uthana
1. badban kholnd
To set sail
2. rawdna hond
To float (on water) tairna
Meanwhile the Captain of the ship came on deck among
the passengers and said to them, <( Are you all here ?
Has any of you any business to do in the city or have you
left anything behind you ? " They said, " We are all here
and ready to start as soon as you please." Just at this
time the minister's son also appeared on the deck in
search of the Captain, and the first question he asked was
whither the ship was bound. He was, however, delighted
to find that she was bound for India. The Captain having
weighed anchor set sail, and the ship, with a favourable
wind, soon lost sight of Aden. On the fourth day after
our departure we espied a huge ice-berg floating to us.
Alarm bell was rung and everybody prepared to do what
he could to escape the impending calamity.
457
III.
paisa i~» Pitiable qabil-i-rahm
Sweetmeats mithd I
Old and ragged clothes
Condition halat
| . To bless (ko) du'a'en dena
Wearing pahne (hu.e) ' ^
To kiss chumna (Lo^
To be sorry ( = feel pity) Generous action ( = kind-
(ko) rahm ana liT r^; ( / ) ! heartedness) rahmdili
Out of pity rahm khdkar
£ (+! ^ Hut yhonpri
A five-year-old girl once got a pice from her mother
to buy sweats. Having bought some she was coming
home when she saw a blind man with old and ragged
< l<>thes on, who said he had not eaten anything for two
days. The girl was sorry to hear this, and out of pity
for his pitiable condition gave him the sweetmeats she had
purchased. The blind man was much pleased and blessed
her profusely. Though the girl did not eat the sweetmeats
-elf she was glad to be able to help a poor hungry man.
When her mother came to know this she kissed her and
gave her an anna as a reward for her generous action.
A few days later this girl's brother, while riding back
fmni ihe school, met in a lane a lame man who, having
Mentally broken his stick, was helplessly sitting by the
of a white gate. The boy was too kind-hearted to
pass by without offering assistance. Accordingly, having
ell-mounted from his black mare, he put the lame ma-i <n
ick and t<>.»k him i<» hi- hut which was 3J mile* nil.
f>s
458
IV.
As soon as the troops had had their dinner and the
cavalry watered their horses at the wells, orders were
issued for the retirement of the force to our camp of the
previous night, where all preparations had been made for
the comfort of the wounded, and by night all were in
camp. The enemy did not trouble us much during the
night, as they too like us were in need of rest after the
hard fight, which had lasted for the greater part of the
day. The following day the whole force returned to Multan.
The weather is now getting very hot and in a few days'
time further operations will become inpossible, so that we
may all expect to be back in Amritsar before the middle
of April.
V.
1. bijlika lamp
2. barqi chiragh
sang marmar
Electric lamp
Marble
Piece tukra IjXJ
To pave I ^-f \farsh bandhna
\mcnJ
UjbjJ, ,. . / _^_ \
^ (J^* '
Corps (f.) to/& ^p
Fidelity wajadari ^J**(jj
Perfect trust p?lra bharosa
To try (to test) azmana UUtl
To befriend through thick
and thin bure aur bhale
waqton men sath dena
Secret
1. bhed
2. raz jl;
Travelling suit safri libas
Jeweller jauhari ^s^^
Landlord (i.e., owner of the
house)
malik-i-makan
There was hardly any time to be lost, it was now 3-15
a.m., and I was to catch the ship at 3-45 a.m. It was
moonlight then, so I had no occasion to use the electric
459
lamp I had in my pocket. I made my servants quietly
take up one of the great pieces of marble with which the
tloor of my house was paved, and there inter the corpse
of the young lady. I had a perfect trust in the fidelity of
these servants whom I had more than once tried and
found quite up to what I had expected of them. They had
befriended me through thick and thin and I had not the
least doubt about the safety of my secret. After replacing
the stone I put on a travelling suit and took what money
I had, and, having locked up every thing, affixed my own
seal on the door of my house. This done I went to look
for the jewel-merchant, my landlord, paid him what rent
I owed, with a year's rent in advance, and giving him the
prayed him to keep it for me. " A very urgent affair,"
-aid I, "obliges me to leave for India at once and T. shall
not be back till the end of this vear."
VI.
Prince shahzada
(1. salt it
Courtyard '
12. angan
/I. jelkhana
I 2. qaid khana
Fetters (a pair of) befi
douflfs (a pair of) Jmthkari
i n i t hy lohar khana AJtk. ^
nnniv dushinani
t y mujrim . ^*
o find guilty mujrim
fhairana
Crime jurm
Daily routine of work
rozdna mcfmuli kam
, ^ ;o
Complainant (in a criminal
case) mu8taghi$ <^^ix^x>
Defendant (in a criminal
case) mustaghas 'alaih
I'ur-c lhaili
To bo sorry, to regret (ko)
0/409 hona
.1 .ilor th'irnjhfi
460
One day a certain prince went to visit a jail and saw in
the courtyard of a barrack five prisoners y with fetters
and handcuffs on, preparing to go to the smithy to do
their daily routine of work. He asked them, one by one,
how they had come to be in prison. The first said that he
had done no wrong but that the chief witness against him
had told a lie. The second said that the judge had accep-
ted a bribe to send him to prison. The third said that the
complainant had got up a false case against him out of
an old spite. The fourth said that he had been found
guilty through a mistake. The fifth said that he had doubt-
less stolen a purse, which landed him into jail, and that
he was very sorry for it. The prince turning to the
jailor said, " Set this man free and let him go. He has not
added to his crime the sin of telling me deliberate false-
hood."
VII.
Widow
Orphan
(I
bewa
yatlm
dumba
Lamb< 2. bher ka bachcha
ke
So much so that yahan tak ki
Dear, darling piydra I
Accordingly chundnchi
Hard-hearted sangdil
To resolve to (kd)
karnd
»jl
irdda
>1(K)
To be attached to (ko~
sdth) mahabbat hona
Butcher qasd,i ^
Neighbourhood paros
A bargain saudd
To bargain for (kd)
karnd (^ Jj.
Scene nizdra ^Ua
Eventually dkhir j^.
Effect asar £
To be effected (par) asar
hona
saudd
.'(if)
There lived an old widow who had two orphan sons and
a, little lamb. The children and the lamb were very much
461
attached to each other. As the woman was very poor, so
much so that she had no money to buy food and clothing
for her darling children, she resolved to sell the lamb
without the knowledge of her children. Accordingly she
went one evening to a butcher who lived in the neighbour-
hood and bargained for the sale of the lamb. Next day,
when the children were playing with the lamb, the butcher
ie and having paid the money tied a rope round (in) the
lamb's neck and began to drag it away. The children on
seeing this set up a loud cry. Their mother too was very
much grieved. The butcher watched the whole scene and
felt sad. Eventually the woman offered to return the
money. But the butcher said, " Good woman, though I
am a butcher I am not so hard- hearted as not to be affec-
ted by this scene." Saying this he set the lamb free and
went away without taking back his money.
il bddshdhl
(1. hojal
Hotel '2. musdfir
Detail (f.) tafsil
fl. shakl
Appearance'
Dandy
VIII.
Mud kichar
Out-houses sdgar pesha logon
ke ghar^ £.
. dandl
12. doll
To be damaged (ko) nuqsan
pahuiichnd ^^xLtf ^^^ ( £ )
( 2. surat ^^ Sappers and miners safar
To be buried dabnd LOJ j maind wale ^J) UJ^^D**
At about 2-15 p.m. on the 17th of July as I was passing
thioiiL'ti tin* lower bazar I noticed some natives looking in
tli direction of the Royal Hotel and on enquiry was told
i lip had occurred (a part of the mountain had fallen
down) above the hotel, but no further details were known.
I im mediately decided to hurry to the hotel to see if there
462
had been any casualties or damage to the building. On the
way I met a native being carried to the hospital in a dandy,
whose appearance showed that he had been partly buried in
mud and badly battered. He himself told me that some
out-houses in the vicinity of the hotel had been demolished
and that he did not know anything more about it, having
been stunned and escaped by great good fortune. Shortly
afterwards I met a party of the Station Fire Brigade (Fire
Extinguishers of the place) and a few sappers and miners
who had been told off to render any assistance that may
be required of them.
IX.
\
1. sidhd sada
Simple
minded j 2 sada lauh
Cultivator kdshtkdr
Married shddl shudah
To sow bond
To reap (to cut) kdjnd
Religion mazhab
To drive away hdhknd
On the contrary balki
Contented with one's lot
qismat par shdkir
This simple-minded individual is a cultivator of the Jat
caste and has lived here a number of years. His father
died while he was still young but his mother together with
his married brothers and sisters are still living here. His
family and relatives are poor people, who know very little
beyond to sow and reap. He is illiterate and knows
very little about his religion. When he was very young he
used to drive monkeys, crows and other birds from the
fields ; as he grew older he used to water his fields and
collect fuel for burning. He seems to have spent his life so
far in distress. But he never complains and appears, on
the contrary, quite contented with his lot.
463
X
Thinese
i) ray
1. ghana
2. ghanddr
chini
nimdz parhna
/I. neza (m.)
Spear \ 2. bhdld (m.)
( 3. ballam (f.)
Scimitar (f.) kajar
Order (of precedence)
tartib (f.)
1. hathyarband
Armed
2. musallah
M chataj
Dacoit daku
Burmese barmi
The dacoits appeared to be in great fear of the Indian
troops and whenever they heard of any in the vicinity they
at once moved away to dense jungles far away from roads
and villages. About twelve of these dacoits were Cheen
Mu salmans, they wore loose trousers like the Chinese and
ed three times a day on mats. They could speak the
Burmese language only, but the Boh knew a smattering
of Hindustani and he alone could converse with me as I
did not know Burmese. The Boh gave me a spear and
. and on the march I was told to go behind him
with the other dacoits. The order of march used to be:
three dacoits, very plucky and well-armed ; tin -n the
Boh followed by hi< wives, and lastly the main body of th>-
dacnits
XI.
Bri t i oritiefl '/ /> grezl To be enraged taish mei>
'laqa ke hakim L
*
Sul»j.-.-t matter ma%mim
n hour (to give she!'
paw'th '!• Ub,i ali
To stamp (par) zor se i>
marna li;U ujb ^ )}\ (^)
*sr
2. fatsh
To flog, bent marna U;U
464
Necessaries of life Palm tar
zarunat-i-zMgl
As long as I was with the dacoits no prisoners were taken
but a few villages were burnt. The villagers on being
asked to supply the Boh and his band with eatables refused
to comply and produced some papers from the British
authorities to the effect that they were not allowed to har-
bour or help dacoits. The Boh got much enraged on see-
ing these papers; he tore them to pieces, stamped on them,
and then set fire to the villages. His wrath did not end
here. He ordered his companions to sieze as many
villagers as they could la,y their hands on and flog each of
them in his presence for refusing to supply them with the
necessaries of life. After this the Boh, with his men, came
to a palm grove and, as he had become very thirsty, he
ordered some of his dacoits to steal toddy l (liquor).
XII.
Quantity miqddr
( 1. piyard
Favourite
( 2. chahita
To suffer (ko) takllf hond
( j
Blade of grass ghds kd
tinkd &Jo
Obstacle rukdwat
In moderation i'ataddl se
£L_ Jbkl
One day the king and his minister went out ahunting.
The latter had with him his slave who was a very handsome
and intelligent youth. This boy really belonged to a res-
pectable family, but as ill luck would have it, had fallen
into captivity and been purchased by the minister. The
king becoming thirsty during the chase called for water.
l A sweet, refreshing liquor obtained by tapping certain palms ; a mix-
ture of spirit and water sweetened.
465
Hi- mvn \\ater-carrier (abdar) not being on the spot, the
minister ordered his boy to fill up a cup for the king.
The hid young in year* (age) but old in wisdom, filled the
eup and threw in it some small blades of grass. The king
put down the cup and asked him what grass had to do
(what business of grass) in drinking water. The sliv<
replied, " I saw Your Highm -- was very thirsty and I
d lest (main dara ki aisa na ho) you should drink too
large a quantity and suffer from it in riding. That is why
1 put in the water these small obstacles, that you might
drink in moderation." There was nothing wonderful in
this, but the boy's destiny befriended him and the king
much pleased. He took the slave from the minister and
in :<lc him one of his special attendants. Day by day his
tion for the youth increased and the king showered
• 'I r after favour on him till he rose to be a favourite
minister.
XIII.
To In- under ,-.ii impression
samjhe hu%e hona
On one hand— on the other
jahdn — ivahah J&j — ^
M i 1 i t a r v law fauji qanu n
Son in- law ddmdd jUlj ' ^
n 1 . khdwifid ^^
Husband , ,
( 2. shauhar ^y^
far William had not informed us of his intention, and
.vere under tin- impiv.— • ' he would not leave us
ii but (balki) would accompany us \\herever we W(
When the pn-Iiminaries of our flight were completed he
ted to return to hi> duty (work). No sooner did my
gave a load scream and catch -
ing hold of the coat of her husband with hnth her h
in to cry. I saw that , in law was strangely
(ted by this. The poor was on the horns of a
69
466
dilemma. On one hand he could not find it in his heart to
leave us, whilst on the other, his sense of duty urged him
(i.e., he thought that it was his duty) to return to the fort
at once and there, with his comrades, fight the rebels.
Even for the few hours he had spent in coming to the place
and in making arrangements for our flight he had been
acting against the military law.
XIV.
In former (or ancient) times j To serve (ki) naukrl
agle zamane (or waqton) (or khidmat) karna.
1 . bat (f .) cub i ( 1. manna l LUU
Matter, j . .... _ 1
2. muamla (m.)
To agree ( 2. (par) razl hona
\ ^ ^b 00
Affair.
In former times there was a man who went to the market
to buy a slave. Presently he came to a shop and saw a
handsome and intelligent-looking slave standing there. He
said to him, " My lad (Miyan * larke), do you desire that I
should buy you." The slave replied, " Being a slave I have
no choice (I can say nothing) in the matter." Then he
said to him. "What is your name?" The other said,
"Whatever you may choose to call me, that will be
my name." Then again he said, "What kind of clothes
will you wear ? " The slave answered, " Whatever you will
give me that I shall wear." After this the man asked
" What will you eat ? " He replied, " Whatever you might
choose to give me that same I shall eat." The man
said in his heart, " He is a very fine slave.'1 Accordingly
he fixed his price and bought him from his owner. Then
1 Intensive " manlena."
2 \j\.±*> miyan — Mr., my good man, boy etc. (Mohamadan).
467
the slave said to his new master, " Should you kindly
permit I want to say a word to you." The man said,
4 By all ' means." The slave said, " I will serve you
well by day, but please leave the night to myself." He
!y agreed, and the}' both went to the man's house.
XV.
To expect, to wait for (ka) j Jewels zewar
i«tizar karna (yj ;Uaul
To enter (men) dakhil hona - (Qr
To stab with knife
(
He related that one day he was seated at the door of his
bouse expecting his brother, who had gone to a village on
some business about five miles away from his house. He
heard a noise to the north of his village and standing up
towards it to see what it was. When he reached there
he saw several people running after a man and shouting.
He asked them what the matter was ; on which a friend of
his said that the man who was running ahead was a
thii'f and that he had entered the house of the landlord
and stolen jewels to the value of Rs. 200. The landlord's
saw him coming out of the house, and thinking that
he was a thief gave the alarm, hearing which the people
began to come and the thief ran off at full speed. While
Pbe was thus conversing, another man, who by chance was
ing from the other direction, caught the thief. The
f stabbed the man with a knife, which ho had with
him hidden under his clothes. The knife entered the man's
heart and he fell on the ground. Some other men ran and
caught the tl
1 Boshak (lit. undoubtedly).
468
XVI.
Baker nanbaj, ^^ \ To appeal apll [ karna by JwF
The next day the Police brought them before the Magis-
trate. The men told the Magistrate that the boy was
their servant and that they had sent him on some business
to a village seven miles distant from the village, but he
did not return for three days ; the fourth day they sent
a man in search of him to the village but he was not
found there and it was known that he had taken Rs. 20
from a friend of theirs and bolted. Then they went in
search of him, and after several days saw him in the
market at a baker's shop. The boy ran off as soon as he
saw them but they managed to catch him and thrashed
him. The Magistrate fined every one of them Rs. 20,*
adding that in default of payment they will undergo two
months' imprisonment.
XVII.
Lonely place akeli sunsan \ Carriage- driver gariban
jaga ^ ^"^ ^J^] \ ^ ^
/ 1. ddku " J15 To investigate (kl) tahqiqat
Highwav man) , , .. / ,\
\ 2. lujera Lp karna b/ c^UxSso ( ^ )
Neighbouring pas ka £ ^b Highway robbery daka "^l>3
One day at about 3 o'clock a gentleman seated in a
carriage was coming towards Jullundhar where his regiment
was stationed. When the carriage reached a lonely spot
about five miles from the city, suddenly the gentleman
was attacked by three robbers, who stopped the carriage,
wounded him severely with swords, cut his right hand and
wounded the left, and robbing him of all his things ran
away. The carriage-driver carried the gentleman bleed-
i Appeal = apll (f.).
* And ordered that if they don't pay the fine they will remain impri-
soned (for) two months.
469
in«r ' to his house. The doctors tried their best to cure him
but the gentleman died after four hours. The Police are
m iking enquiries hut no trace of the robbers has yet been
found. It seems that the robbers were the inhabitants of
th»* neighbouring villages. Many a time these men have
mttbed people The Government has now made a Police
ion there, and it is hoped that no further robbery will
take place.
XVIII.
"\Yolf bheryd bjj^> In short i/harz
Looks and manners qata* Doubtful mashk^k
wazd* (f) £~C) ^ki' Firm determination musam-
To associate (with) (he salh) mam (or pakka) irada
8J|;I (Kjnr%
At the same time snth hi
ar hirdashtkarna
To bo fed up
Fellow (being) ham
with, \
To be bored [(se) /// '» ' «y or respect
or Of ! 'U? ^JJ ( ^ ) t.arah
to extreme ! 1 . t le by little raftah raftah
(by) *i*j Axi^
Once upon a time there was a dog, who in looks and
re was so like a wolf that the wolves used to admit
him into tlu-ii society (allowed him to remain with them-
es). He ate, drank and killed sheep with them and in
short was everything that a wolf ought to be; at
!»• time he liv« .1 \\ith his fellow-dogs lik> dogs and
admitted to all their j, I'.nt , linl.- »>\ littl--.
tiogS perceived tii.it hr as^oci:i1cd \\ith uolvi-^, and
• «f him (l.rLMii t'» t'.-ar him); and it also happened that
I And blood flowed fn-
470
the wolves discovered that he was in fact a dog, and
did not like to admit him any longer into their circles ;
so,1 between both, the poor dog became neglected (lonely)
and miserable, (and his life became difficult) and, unable
to bear his undefined (doubtful) state any longer he
determined to make a decided (last) effort to become either
a dog or a wolf.
Able
(1. la,iq
\2. qabll
Fit for, worthy
of
1. kela,iq
XIX.
y Capability liyaqat
Study mutaVa
Up-keep (living) guzara
^f
2. ke qabil
To pray 'ibadat karna
A king had three sons. As he was (became) old and
no longer capable of ruling the state, he resolved to give his
kingdom over to that son who was most fit to rule.
In order therefore to ascertain their respective capabilities
he sent for his eldest son first and asked him what he most
desired. He replied that he was fond of study and that he
wished to spend his time in reading. The king, therefore,
gave him a few villages for his up-keep and told him to go
and do according to his wishes.
He then sent for his second son and asked him what he
desired most. He replied that he was anxious to acquire
wealth and spend his time in praying. The king there-
upon gave him much money and told him to go and pray
as much as he wished.
His third son said he wished to acquire a kingdom, raise
a great army, and rule his people well.
JUsvc
A
*9 *
471
The king was much pleased at these words and handed
his kingdom to him.
XX.
Passer-by rahguzar ;<^*; To lose temper ape se bahir
Charity khairat ^[^ hond (Jyt JbU <£. ±\
manifested
ana lil ^ u^> Gyt> JtOi
Gold (coin) muhr (f.) ~**
~ . , , Almighty qadir-i-mullaq
Spring chashma • ' -
Cabin, cell , small room kothri
A traveller on horse-back, holding a bag of gold, stopped
at a spring to drink, then went away. A moment after, a
young boy went there and found the bag of gold, which had
been left behind by the traveller, picked it up, and seeing
nobody round, ran away with it. A little later an old man
who had a cabin close by, where he lived upon the charity of
the passers-by, came to drink at the spring. At the same
time the traveller, who had found out that he had forgotten
hi> bag, came back there too. Seeing nobody but the old
man he asked him if he had not found his bag of gold. The
old man answered, " I am but a poor blind man, how could
I have found your bag ? " The traveller lost his temper,
iil>iised the old man and said, "By God, thou hast robbed
my bag of gold!" And he was so infuriated by the
denials of the old man that he kilhd him.
A man told the tale to Moses ( M&aa j^" ) and asked
him, " If God is just, how could he allow such thing
happen? " Moses replied, " The traveller had robbed the
boy '« father of all his goods and the old man had killed
the traveller's brother; each of them ignored these facts,
and thus was manifested the justice of God the Almighty."
472
XXI.
Periodical rains mauslml | To flow out bah nikalnd
barsdt e^Luj ^*»+* UJ£i <JL>
Tank tdldb
Inhabitant bashinda
To dig khodnd
Hide (for carrying water)
mashk (f.)
Necessities zaruriydt
After leaving this place, we proceeded three and twenty
miles and encamped near a well on a spot of open ground
in the jungle. Many deserted (empty) villages were met
with on the march and the road was, for the most part, over
heavy sand (there was deep sand on many places on the
road), without a drop of water near it. Periodical rains
had failed in this part of the country, the tanks and wells
had mostly dried up, which rendered the heat and length
of our journey this day all the more distressing. Luckily
the guide whom we had brought with us, and who had
frequently travelled along this road, informed us that
about a mile and a quarter distant were a few huts, the
inhabitants of which were supplied with water from a
spring. We set out immediately in search of it and to our
great joy found it was not dried up (when we found that
it was not dried up we were very much pleased), and on
digging up a little in the sand an abundance of water
flowed out, from which we drank ourselves and watered
our horses and camels, and made the bhisties fill their
mussucks for future necessities.
XXII.
To resist (kd) muqdbala (\. nd ittijdqi
karnd ttf *LU* ( K ) Dissensions ^1*31 li
V2. phut ' vi^
To destroy tabdh karnd Quarrel jhagrd JjJ^
(j *l»J I Contempt nafrat
473
In a short timr our army arrived at Candliar. It was
;n weather when we reached there but not so hot as in
Hindustan. The Sirdars came out at li--i with a small
force ; but suddenly they felt frightened when they -aw
th» iv, I coated regiments of the Sirkar and ran away If
they had re<ist»-d our troops in the Bolan (ih;-t. which
took up - ven or eight days to get through, they might
-troyed half the Sarkar's army.
During this march of countless hardship*, I saw, for the
time during my service, dissensions arise among the
officers. The Bombay Lat Sahib and the Bengal General
<|uaiT»'Ued. The former thought his army the best. All the
Bombay officers looked with contempt on the Shah's army
and abused us very much. Lord Kane Sahib was of higher
rank than our t> -neral, and he gave orders for som-
the fon-.- t«> l». l.-t't Ix-hind in Sindh.
XXIII
To attach lagana bKJ Alarmed fcfiau/ zadah
To continue to wait {haira
rah Ujtj ]j*& Ghost (evil spirit) bhut
To grow barhna ' UAJJ or jin ( ^^ or ) ^«J
I .rrivd with tin- regiment I was attached to, II
at Agra wh«-r<- I bought a pony for eleven nipc«-<, md in
r..mp,my witli t'.nir or ti\c ntliei wbo I
I set off for my village. 1 ir M h.d my h
y one morning before it was light and waited out
till daybreak. When my m.. (her came out to draw
water, I called to her but she did not recognise n.
uring tl MI- tiv«- y« -ars i h
1 C a of "l^r* honi.
60
474
absent, I had grown from a boy into a man. I had also
whiskers and moustaches and considered myself a handsome
sepoy. My mother seemed so alarmei when I spoke to
her, that I also became frightened, but afterwards, my
father told me that my uncle had written home to say that
I had been killed, so my mother thought at first it was my
ghost.
XXIV.
To believe true sack manna Anxious fikarmand j..L<>^£j
To take advantage of (se)
Prevalent (spread) phaila
hu,a J
fo,ida
The next day the news came that the Sirkar's army
which had gone round by Gorakhpur and Batea had
been destroyed by Nepal army. The Sahibs began to
look anxious ; and though our General told us that only a
few companies had been cut off and not the whole army,
most believed the first news was true ; my uncle was the only
one who credited the General's account. The army was
now in a sad state and not much fit for fighting. Most of
the men who had been wounded died from a strange kind
of fever prevalent in the district. We had some 580 men
disabled. The people thought that the Company's fortune
was waning and several Rajas and Nawabs began to take
advantage of this feeling and collected forces against the
Sirkar. Our army retired to Dera to rest a while. The
enemy did not annoy us, for being hill men they were
afraid to come into the open country. In a few weeks,
news came that Loneyackty Sahib had beaten Amar
Tippa, and that peace was made. Our force then marched
to Saharanpur where there was a large fort.
475
XXV.
To join (to go and meet) To be trampled to death
ke niche dabkar mar
ja milna
Called, named, naml > (or, Commissariat fcamlare/
naw)
No one can tell kaun jane
1 (wild) ghol
European soldier gord * h/ Quiet, tranquillity aman ^
My regiment was ordered to join General Loneyackty's
force by double* marches. One night, when we were near a
place called Paithan, the alarm was sounded and a dreadful
uproar took place in camp, which at first no one could
account for. A herd of wild elephants came and attacked
our elephants, which all broke loose and ran among the
tents uttering dreadful screams and loud roars, upsetting
(Mling) a number of tents and trampling to death one
European soldier and two Sahib's servants. The Europeans
wanted to open fire on the elephants but it was impossible
to distinguish wild ones from Commissariat ones. The
officers* had great difficulty in preventing this If they
had fired no one can tell the damage which might have
irred, as it was dark and the balls would have kill
number of our own men, without doubt. After a while
the wild elephants moved off and quiet was soin« \
restored, t was then on sentry duty and never shall
forget it.
I Always follows the name itself.
* Lit. of fair color.
• By double marches = (labal march (or hlch) knrkr or kitch par
k-r.
i.e., prevented them with preat <liHi< ult \
476
XXVI.
A.-D.-C. musahib v^^La^ Refreshed ffiza dam -J «;
Transparent *Aa#a/ —Jla-£ Footprint paow ka nishdn
To graze (intr.) charnd (^ ^UJ K u;
garha UbjT i To leap chhaldng mama
Track Mo; 4r 1>U
Once the king went with his A.-D.-C. for hunting in a
jungle ; when they reached a very thick part of it a deer
started (came out) from before him. The king galloped
after him, as it was the custom of the country that who-
ever started an animal in front of him he alone pursued it.
Although the king was riding his favourite (special), an
exceedingly fleet, horse he could not overtake the deer,
which ran like the wind. Having gone a long distance the
king and his horse both became tired and felt hungry and
thirsty. Luckily not far from where he was there was a
stream of clear and transparent water. He watered his
horse there and drank a little water himself, after which he
let his horse loose to graze whilst he laid himself down
under the shade of a tree for his A.-D.-C. to come up. This
faithful official had been detained by the sudden fall of
his horse while leaping across a pit but never lost the
track of his master's horse and followed him up to
where he was lying. He had in his haversack some food,
out of which he gave to the king as much as he could eat
and ate the rest himself. Having thus refreshed them-
selves the king again followed the footprints of the deer
and caught him up in the evening. It was a splendid
animal and worth the trouble taken to secure it.
<zes (f.) Gaiiga
Swelled, risen (river) charhn
hu,a lyb Uj^
Ordinarily mcimull taur jar
477
XXVII.
Entire (not broken) sabit
C 1 . bayhaivat '
Mutinv ]
' ' 2. ghadar
Scattered bikhrahu,a
The passage of the Ganges was a most difficult and hazard-
ou- und' -i taking. It was upwards of 1,600 yards wide
and at thi> season swelled by the rains to a rapid and im-
petuous torrent. All the means and appliance- which
\\ould ordinarily have been available for this operation at
B large military station like Cawnpore, were now want inn.
The bridge of boats established by our Government, which
\\a- entire on the 3rd June, was broken up by the rebels
after the commencement of the mutiny and the materials
attered. All the ferry boats had likewise been
destroyed or removed. Fortunately the little steamer, the
Berhampooter," which had been sent up with a hundred
.e Madras Fusiliers, under Captain Spurgin, to co-oper-
t«> work jointly) with the land column, had reached
"ii, and was now employed up and down the river
i 1 1 e ndeavouring to collect the boats. Not more than twenty ,
however, could he obtained, where they were formerly
tied l»y hundreds; and the boatmen who had been
engaged in aiding the mutineers, wen* prompted
•-,d tln-m-'-lves from the dn-ad of punishment.
XXVIII.
• -in fort tasalll dena
To encourage dilen dena
I •• Baghawat" s= n one person of more, while •'
aeans " mutiny " of a crowd.
478
To lose heart himmat hdrnd Cat billi
Mouse, )
Rat. {>***
To press against bosom
Mail se lagdnd
Cradle pingurd
To put trust in God
khudd par tawakkul karnd
Mishap, accident hddisa
Certain death yaqinl maut
Once a gentleman and his wife had to make a very long
journey through a wild part of India ; they had with them
a, little child about 2£ years old. There were no villages on
the whole length of their journey nor any inns to put up
in. So they had equipped themselves with tents to sleep
in during the night. One night they came upon a very
thick wood. The wife said to her husband, " I feel much
frightened to-night and my heart is sinking down ; there
must be many tigers and other wild animals in this
wood, what shall we do if they come out upon us ? "
The husband comforted and encouraged her saying, " Be of
good cheer, don't lose heart, put your trust in God.
We will light a big fire and the servants will keep watch by
turns." The husband and the wife (miyan biwi) both
kissed their child and put it into its cradle and after pray-
ing to God to protect them against any mishap retired
to rest enjoining the servants to keep watch by turns. In
the middle of the night they were roused by the screams of
the child, rushed out of the tent and in the clear light of
the moon saw that a great animal with the child in its
mouth was making for the thickest part of the wood.
The gentleman ran in for his rifle which was kept ready-
loaded to meet just such an emergency (necessity). All
then went after it and presently came to a place from
479
where they could see the brute lying down and playing
with the child just as a cat does with a mouse before it
kills it. The child was not now crying nor did it seem
much hurt. The gentleman shouldered his gun, levelled it
on the head of the tiger and fired. The brute made a loud
howl, jumped up and then fell on the ground quite dead.
The mother then ran to the child, pressed it against her
bosom and thanked God for having thus saved the child
from certain death.
XXIX.
Spirit josh ^A^ Fellow-countryman ham
Victorious fatahyab ^(*=^* watan e/V^
Atrocity zulm JLfe
Depredation lutmar ;U eu?J
To flare up bharakna Ufc*>
Meritorious deed saioab
Inveterate (habitual) 'adi
Massacre qail-i-'am
Adroit chaldk
The General now found it necessary to adopt the most
<ient measures to check the spirit of plundering. A
•rious army can with difficulty be restrained from the
license of depredation, but in the present instance the
lation of the natives assumed a meritorious character
in the eyes of the European troops. They were exasper-
ated bejond bounds by the perfidious and brutal massacre
•ir fellow-countrymen and women and they considered
tii»- plunder of the town in which these atrocities had been
perpetrated an act of righteous retribution ; but the General
determined to subdue this propensity, not only among
I .uropean troops but more especially among the Sikh
soldiers, the most adroit and inveterate plunderer^ HI
lu'lia. He appointed Lieut. Morland of the 1st Fusiliers,
Marshall, with full powers to inflict the penalty of
You are welcome fehush
480
death on any soldier, European or native, who might be
detected in plundering.
XXX.
To entertain (ki) khatir karna , 1. aur kahm
ST^ Elsewhere / L/"« .
Guest mihmdn ,.,U^ } 2- aur kisl jaqa
Host mizban
Stranger ajnibi
To knock khatkhatdnd dmded
UUfjUfl Reception (f.) d,o bhagat
Corn and} ^li! 1L^J^»jjl
A traveller, who had walked a greater part of the day,
saw night coming upon him before he had found shelter.
At a distance of about a mile and a half he espied two
houses standing opposite each other. One of them was
very large and the other appeared miserably poor (bad).
The former belonged to a rich man and the latter to a
poor fellow. The traveller, thinking that it will be less
troublesome to the rich man to entertain a guest knocked
at the door of the beautiful mansion. The owner opened
a window and shoving his head out asked who the stranger
was and what he wanted. The traveller replied that he
sought a night's lodging. The rich man scanned him from
head to foot and as he wore ragged clothes he shook his
head and said, " I am sorry I cannot take you in, as my
rooms are all full of corn. Seek a shelter elsewhere.
Saying this he shut his window and went in to sleep. The
traveller next went to the little house. He had scarcely
knocked when the door opened and the poor man bade the
wanderer welcome, adding "Stop here to-night, it is quite
dark now, you can go no further to-day." This reception
1 Lit. Come, good man.
481
pleased him much. So he walked in and the poor ni
after saluting him said, "Make yourself1 at home."
She then prepared for him some boiled rice, dal and potatoes
and. having placed all on a table, invited him to eat with
i. After they had finished the wife called her husband
aside and said, "Let us sleep to-night on mats and let the
t rest on our bed, for he must be very tired."
XXXI.
To redress wrongs (of) (ki)
faryad-rasi karna
b , (
To oppress tang karna
en ue maliya
rder bad dmni ^<*l ^ To seize or take by force zor
Complaint (f.) faryad ^^ \ se chhin lena (JuJ (^^ £L ;jj
The state of the country was very bad. The nobles
oppressed the cultivators and compelled them to pay
cted by force) large sums of revenue. This state
in _rs disturbed the country. The roads svere not safe.
>uld seize travellers and kill them or steal
all their property. No one could travel after dark, nor
y. The Sultan never showed himself (came out) and
:oumled l>y a clique of tyrants and appean d
u-are of the condition of the country and did not hear
i plaints from the poor, nor redress wrongs.
The i. Hilt of thi- state of things was that the enemies of
^u I tan increased in numbers and became active. There
>ke out) rebellion in many parts <>i the kingdom and
aobles were too \\« >U <>i too >lothful to put it down
uppress it). Large tracts of territory were seized by
, who built forts to guard the lands they had
ngfully acquired (usurped). The army, being badly
I 7«e a/mo ghar gamjho = consider this M your own house.
61
482
armed, was not feared and was concentrated round the
capital for the protection of the Sultan and the nobles.
XXXII.
To become furious jhilldnd
To creep ringnd
On one's face aundha
Trunk of an elephant (f.)
Skin (whole) (f.) khal
Peg mekh
sund ±1
When they discover (see) a herd of elephants, they follow
them at a distance, until they perceive one of them stray
from the rest and come into such a position as to be fired
at with advantage. The hunters approach (keep on coming
nearer and nearer) with great caution, creeping among the
long grass until they have got close enough to be sure
of their aim. Then they discharge all their pieces at once
and throw themselves (lie down) on their faces among the
grass. The wounded elephant immediately applies his trunk
to the different wounds, but being unable to extract the
bullets and seeing nobody near him he becomes quite
furious and runs about among the bushes screaming with
rage and pain, until by fatigue and loss of blood he has
exhausted himself and affords the hunters an opportunity
of firing a second time at him by which he is generally
brought to the ground. The skin is then taken off, and
stretched on the ground with pegs to dry, and parts of
flesh are cut into thick slices and dried in the sun to serve
as provision on some future occasion.
XXXIII.
( 1. plchhd U=EOO Guarantee, security zamdnat
Chase < .,
\ 2. ta daub \ ~jUj e^ou.
ta'aqub
When the morning broke out, we saw none of our
pursuers, and began to indulge in the hope that they
483
given up the chase. We had, however, only made four
miles in eight hours, and our prospects of escape could
scarcely be said to have improved. About 7 A.M. we saw
some natives bathing and persuaded a cooly to talk
t«» them and try to induce them to give us some food.
The fellow took from us five rupees and procured from one
of the bathers a promise to obtain food. This man left his
lota ' a^ a guarantee for his fidelity, but we saw no more of
him. We afterwards came to know that orders had been
sent down two miles farther to seize us, and that a
powerful zamindar had engaged that he would not suffer
one of us to escape.
XXXIV.
Forage chdra *
Escort iskot
y v
Without (I. bardbar
cessation \ 2. lagdtdr
Fortification qiVabandl
mine (ke niche) surang
lagand U 0 ^J^ ( ^ L) Probable aghlab
ipart (f.) /em/ <Jj^ Recent hdl-kd
The subject (sawal) of greatest importance in the garrison
at this time was the subsistence of the cavalry and
artillery horses. Foraging parties were sent out daily
under an escort, and constantly attacked by the enemy.
On the 10th of March the Afghans planted their advanced
parties so near the wall, that it was suspected they
mended to mine the fortress; it was resolved, therefore,
tn make a vigorous sally. Colonel Dennie took the
( •> niinand of a body of 800 men, and issuing from the gate,
drove off the enemy, and ascertained beyond doubt that
re had been no attempt to undermine them. Akbar
Khan then drew out his whole army and advanced to the
i A jug of brats or some other metal.
484
attack. The guns from the ramparts poured a destructive
fire on him, and our horse and foot attacked him with such
impetuosity that lie was obliged to fly, leaving more than
a hundred dead on the field. The whole force had now
been employed without cessation for three weeks in
restoring the defences, and as it did not seem probabl^
that the enemy would venture another attack after their
recent defeat, it was determined to permit the wearied
troops to enjoy the luxury of rest from their labours on the
Sabbath of the 13th March, — an announcement most
acceptable to the soldiers of the 13th, many of whom
joined Havelock in devotional exercises (in saying prayers).
XXXV.
Miscellaneous mutafarraq
Brewery Bir bhatt
Zigzag pechdar
Headquarters sadar maqam
I became worse and worse every day and was obliged to
take sick leave for one month for more efficient treatment
in a hilly climate. I had a relative residing in Nainital
and decided to go there. I left Sargodha in the afternoon
of the 2nd June and reached Kathgodam, the last railway
station to Nainital, at about 7 o'clock in the morning of
the 4th June. I had already wired for a full Tonga as my
Munshi and my bearer were accompanying me. Having a
very brief luggage, which consisted of my bedding and a
portmanteau containing half a dozen suits of clothes and a
few miscellaneous articles, I was spared the inconvenience
of leaving any luggage behind. It took us full two hours
to reach the Brewery, which is 13 miles from Kathgodam
and 9 from Nainital. From the Brewery upwards the
ascent is more difficult and not open to wheeled traffic.
There is, however, another road, very long and zigzag, which
48T,
takes you right up to Nainital in a motor-car or Tonga.
But I preferred to take the shorter one, and hiring three
pom ode on leisurely (slowly) up hill till we came up
to my uncle's bungalow standing on a very high emiii'
ital i> a very beautiful place; it has a big tank
ounded by hills on which stand a host of bungalow-
with verdant trees all round. It is the summer resort of
Provincial Government.
XXXVI.
( 1. kachahrl
12. "a'lalat ^
Sad afsosnak v— TlJ
Occurrence waq'a
Mother-in-law sas
Father-in-law susar
se X
Ill-treatment badsulukl
Caste-people birddri ke log
•' False charge jhu fa ilzam
To maltreat
L
sathj
badsvluki karna
Malicious intention bad
niyati
Headman Chaudhri
On Tuesday last a pretty-looking Hindu widow aged
about 25 years appeared in the District Magistrate's Court
and stated that she was married at the tender age of nine to
a 15-year-old boy of respectable family and lived happily
till tlir death of her husband about five years ago. About
•<> months after the sad occurrence she had to leave her
l Kind's house partly because her mother-in-law was
n«t on good terms with her and partly because her father-
in law refused to support her, and that since then till
>ut a we;*k before now she had lived with IHT parents,
who were first kind to her but had lately taken to sub-
486
jecting her to all sorts of ill-treatment. That was why
she had left them and now intended to remarry. Having
come to know this intention of hers her caste-people were
endeavouring to thwart her so much so that they intended
to get her arrested on a false charge, and that it was against
this malicious intention of theirs that she sought pro-
tection.
The Magistrate, agreeing to her request, gave her a note
addressed to the head of City Panchayat, holding him res-
ponsible for any harm that might come to the woman.
XXXVII.
IT; an | Bone haddl
to, I
To put an
end to, \(ka) khdtima karnd
To finish | U/ s*X±. ( K )
off.
To burst into hearty laugh
khilkhildkar hans parnd
To join (in) (men) shank
hona Li Jb uJo _£ ( .** )
Satisfactory tasalli bakhsh
Beginning dghdz jUl
The following day, my friend and I were up in good
time and after dressing ourselves hastily mounted our
ponies, which were ready at the door, and started for
our twelve-mile ride to the river where we were going to
fish. It was hardly light as it was barely 3 o'clock when we
started ; but the moon was just setting, which gave us light
enough to see the road Soon after starting I had a little
mishap which might have put an end to my sport for
that and many days to come. In the uncertain light my
pony put his foot into a hole and came down with me and I
got off with nothing worse than a shaking. My friend was,
at first, alarmed a little, but when he saw that none of my
487
bones had broken, burst into a hearty laugh, in which I
joined. We reached the halting place without any further
adventure (occurrence) and just in time to get the best
ot the early morning. A few minutes later, I landed my
first mahseer — a small one, it is true, but a satisfactory
beginning.
XXXVIII.
( 1. mdtha C^U ; Message (oral) paigham
Foreheads
\ 2. peskan ^^» \ Safe mahfiiz
\Ve returned to the place towards evening and the
Police Inspector arrived a little while later. On seeing
another of our comrades beaten we were forced to conclude
tho same treatment to be in store for us. But before he
could do us any harm, a message arrived from the Police
Superintendent, summoning him to his office at once.
It was dinner time before he returned. Meanwhile we
had prepared ourselves to revenge on the cruel man.
Unite close to the room we were seated in there was a
small room, which served as a store-room for arms and
ammunition. Without being seen we went into it, brought
out a gun and 20 cartridges each and seated ourselves in
our former places respectively. Just as the Police Inspector
alighted from his carriage on his return from the Super-
intendent's office, about a dozen men, his subordinates
1 servants, ran to him to ask what it was that had
detained him till so late in the night, and whether all was !
well. He had hardly spoken a word when we all fired.
A bullet hit him in the forehead and he fell down dead.1
ne of those who had collected round him were also hit
l Is it all well ? = fc&airiyyU to hai ? « Murdah hokar girpara.
488
but I cannot say how many were killed and wounded.
We then lost no time in making for the shore and crossed
the river on a boat. We were fully aware that we shall be
pursued, and therefore expected nothing but death, should
we fall into their hands again We ran on till we came to
a tent when I said to my comrades, " Thank God we arc
safe now."
XXXIX.
To crush kuchalnd
Despairing,
Disappoint- ^2. mdyics
ed.
nd umed
God
!"
inshd allah
willing
J
During the 14th and 15th the cholera continued to
rage without cessation among the troops. The medical
officer represented to the General that, at the present
rate of casualties, the whole force will be annihilated in
six weeks, and he urged some repose for the troops ; but
the General felt that there could be no repose while 4,000
of the insurgents were collected at Bithoor and threatened
Cawnpore. Having disposed of the enemy on the left
bank of the Ganges, and effectually divested them of all
desire to meet him again in the field, he determined to crush
the rebels on the right bank, and free the city of Cawn-
pore from annoyance. He telegraphed the medical report
to Sir Patrick Grant, remarking that there had been ten
fatal cases of cholera on that day, the 15th, in one regiment
alone, and that of the British force with him, numbering
1,415, no fewer than 335 were disabled by sickness or
wounds. " But," he added, "I do not despair. I march
to-morrow against Bithoor, and, God willing, shall have
captured it before the reinforcement arrive."
A ford
f I. jyayab (m.)
XL.
b | To stand up in a line qatar
12. jhag (I.)
To ford jhag kar par jana
lila.^b J" V— f (+*.
e swept away bah jana
3 carry away
bahd le'iana
fcar
(as in river)
UlsuJ (
Resource (plan) tadbtr
Pluck dilerl
\
Surface (f.) sat ah
Levy levt ki fauj
The day ' after the march was continued * to Lun, and
following3 day to Barnas. This last was a short but
fatiguing march which took ten hours to do. The
road was broken down in several places and so much delay
was caused that the camp was not reached until past
!) o'clock, when it was quite dark. The river, which was in
flood, had to be forded close to the camp. It was about
f"ii' feet deep and very cold, and the men could only get
over by going across in batches of 10 or 12 at a time and
hoi fling each other up. Many of the baggage coolies must
have been swept away and drowned had it not been for
ready resource and pluck of the levies. They formed
up in a line just below the ford, and whenever a coolie was
i off his feet they waited till the stream carried
i down to them, and catching hold of his pack, which
ted on the surface, swung him round by it on to his
i pulled him ashore.
XL1.
<-eed (to occupy the
place of) (led) ja nishln
hona
Luxury (f.) aish-o-'ashrat
Foster-brother koka
Turedin.
Jarl raha.
CHauthe din.
62
490
Infant son ma" sum beta
Premier
Well-wisher fehair khwah
Capitol
Uncle (maternal) mamun
Main support (greatest
pillar) rukn-i-a 'azam
Flourishing raunaq par^
Traitor daghabaz
Treachery daghdbdzi
Minor nabdligh
To intrigue (ki) sdzish karnd
After his death he was succeeded by his son , a notorious
tyrant. He passed his time in luxuries and the affairs l of
state drifted from bad to worse. One day when he was in a
fit of intoxication he was assassinated by his foster-brother,
whom he had wronged in more than one way. His infant
son now ascended (sat on) the throne but the government
was conducted by the Premier, who had been a well-wisher
of the family ever2 since he took his office. He, to a
certain8 extent, succeeded in correcting the evil effects of
the last reign ; but the neighbouring kings knowing that
the throne was filled by a child prepared to take advan-
tage of this occasion and marched against the capital. The
boy-king was brought out and placed in a " howdah " on an
elephant in the centre of his troops, and a pitched battle
ensued, in which the Commander of the royal army bore
down their opponents; bub in the moment of victory the
king's maternal uncle, who led the centre and was con-
sidered the main support of the kingdom, treacherously
deserted with his troops to the enemy, and thus what would
have been victory was changed by the uncle's treachery
' Salfanat ka kam.
62
Jab se.
3 Rial qodar.
Shower (f.) bilchhar
To put off to (par) multawi
491
into a crushing defeat. The enemy followed up his victory
1 took possession of the capital. The minor-king with
a score of his faithful followers fled into the hills and \\,i<
h»-ard of no more. Thus the kingdom which had been
flourishing during the reign of his able grandfather was
into bits and divided by the ambitious (greedy) chiefs
liad leagued to overthrow (to upset) it.
XLII.
To scold danjnd
Tank talab
karna OJ ^ey^* (^ ) Outwardly whir ah
To reproach la'nat malamat Departure rawangi
I. arna U^ e>-«)U> \^J*J Excuse 'uzr
The next day it rained heavily, the first time that rain
had fallen for two years. This caused great rejoicing among
the inhabitants who were running short of water. As the
fir-t shower fell, the people rushed out of their hou->-
shouting1 with joy; for now they knew that their tank <
would be filled and a supply laid in them would last them
till next rainy season. I had already arranged for eight
donkeys to carry my baggage, but owing to the \v»-t
'her, I put off my departure till the following day.
i then I could not start, as the donkey driver did not
turn up with the animals, and the same occurred on the
following. At length on the third day he put in n
appearance late in the afternoon. I had given up all hopes
«'eing him, and was rather vexed on account of tin-
v, which I had not anticipated. When I reproached
him with having broken his agreement, his only reply was,
wter! 1 had a very bad headache." I pretended
k< na're marie /nl,«.
492
to be satisfied with this excuse ; ' for I was afraid that if
I beat him he would run away.
XLIII.
Ardour josh (or garm joshi)
To implore (kl) minnat karna
Fertile zarkhez
The country of Canara is in length, from north to south,
000 kos and its breadth, from west to east, 150. The
people speak in some parts the Canarese and in some
the Telinghi language, and are so brave that they advance
to battle with songs and dances, but their ardour does not
last (remain) long. The country is so full of fastnesses
and woods that it is almost impenetrable to troops, but some
parts of it are so fertile that those who have lands care for
nothing. The Prince, when he arrived there, became ac-
quainted with these facts. He grew so alarmed and hope-
less of success that he felt it his duty to report the whole
matter to his father the Emperor, imploring him to send
reinforcements with as little delay as possible, otherwise
he thought it next to impossible to attack the country
with a force he had brought with him for the purpose.
XLIV.
Worth relating qabil-i-zikr Hindrance (f.) rok jok
/ J Jit? Oy* ^;
Entertainment (feast) ziyafat j ^^ ^.^ ^
^^Jl^C i
My mother and I returned to our village by the same
road we had come, but not with quite so much speed ; for
the ass was laden with our purchases,2 and, in addition to my
1 Maih ne yih 'uzr sunkar kuchh ghussa zahir na kiya.
2 Sauda = bargain, a thing sold or purchased.
193
arms, I also carried a considerable share of the burden.
The Sirdar's camp was still in the same place, and we
«-d on without hindrance, or any occurrence worth
tvlnting, until we reached the high ground that overlooks '
•inishlu. The sight of a tent first struck my mothci
and she stopped. " What is that, Yusuf ? " she cried out
see there is a tent." I, who had no thoughts in my
head but those that concerned my wedding, answered,
" Yes, I see ; perhaps they are making preparations for an
•rtainment for us." "Blast2 your entertainment!"
exclaimed she, " What has become 3 of your wits ? Either
-ians or Prussians are there, as sure as anything ; and
in either case * it is bad for us."
XLV.
; daman
Foot (of a hill),
Skirt.
Labourer, workman ma^dur
Carpenter barhayi ^s^jt
on raj
I n dust nous mihnatl
Bright, shining chamkila
Skilled workman karigai
Twenty years ago in the city of Roorkie near the foot of
the Himalaya mountains, there lived a Hindu of Kshatrya
caste named Kesru Singh. He was a carpenter, and being
industrious, found plenty of work. Several children
were born to him, among them a bright-eyed boy whom hi*
parents named Gan<--h ^ingh. After living some time at
Roorkie the carpenter determined to change his residence ;
; having heard that he could probably find employment
Ktawah, a large city, a hundred miles to the south, h<
Oaomithlu nagar ata hai.
* Bhar (kiln or furnace) m«rt parl tumh&rl ziySfat.
H'«fl
* DonoA hulato* men.
404
removed thither with his family. Here a new prison was
being constructed by the Government, giving employment
to a large number of carpenters, masons and other work-
men, and Keshru was soon engaged in making doors and
windows for the new buildings. Being a skilled workman
he soon earned the approbation of his superiors and was
counting upon many pleasant years in his new home, when
(ki) alas ! all of a sudden his beautiful and darling wife
became sick and died, leaving him wretched and miserable.
XLVI.
Innocuous be zarar \^e j_ Accordingly chunanchi fcsxiLL^
Under the ' circumstances it was necessary to attack
him wherever we could find him. Accordingly the following
morning our troops moved out to an entrenched camp
which had been thrown up some time before by the
sappers and miners. We halted here for the night, during
which the rebels kept up a heavy but innocuous fire
•on our bivouacs. At dawn on the following day an
advance was made against the enemy's position. The
rebels made furious attacks upon the troops and at one
time succeeded in breaking the first line. But our men,
rallying with extraordinary rapidity, again attacked the
enemy, who were driven back over the ravine (nala) with
immense slaughter and their camp taken and burnt.
XLVII.
To rejoice khushi mandnd To make idle promises dj
kal Jcarnd (^
Hasty jaldbdz \(
money, etc.) psshgi ^J^ixu Hastiness jaldbdzl -jtj jla>
An advance, in advance (of
i la halat mefy.
495
A man was ' blessed with a son, and there was conse-
quently great rejoicing in his house. He wanted to buy a
die for the child and went to a carpenter and ordered*
one to be made as soon as possible, giving him one rupee by
way of advance. The carpenter promised to give it in a
k's time. But when the week was over and the man
called for it the carpenter said it was incomplete and
put off till another week. In this way he kept on making
idle promises until the boy walked, grew up, got married,
and had a son himself. He said to his father, " I want
a cradle for my son." His father said to him, " Go to such
and such a carpenter ; I ordered a cradle from him about
twenty-five years ago, take it from him." Accordingly he
went to the carpenter and asked for the cradle. T!I.-
•enter replied, "You seem to be very hasty people;
take away your rupee ; I do not wish to hurry im
over the work."
XLVIII.
Graveyard Qo&r&fan ^Uwu To confide in,) , .bharosa
I 1. kanjus ^j»^ to rely on. / fall
\2.bathU J^v karna u^^
(I. mangnd
To borrow UliU ; Secret (adj.) khujya
(smvthiiiL' but. 2. manga9 ( 1. raz
Secret (noun) 2 hhd
mon Una < *» bhec
V UuJ GU
Confidence, ( 1. bharosa
trn \ 2. i'atibar
It happened only a month ago that a miser went to
a friend to borrow his donkey to carry a heavy load of
i Ek adml ke A8n tarka paid* ha,*. < Kah* (said).
agrees with th, ol.joct borrowed.
To confess manna
Out of greed for ke Idlach se
496
money to bury it in a secret place in the graveyard
outside the city. He had a great confidence in (on)
his friend, and confiding to him his intention invited
him to accompany him there. In short they went out
of the city and buried the money under a tree. Some days
afterwards the miser went to the tree alone to see if
his money was safe. But to his horror l he found it
missing. He reasoned * with himself thus : " Besides us
two no one else knows the secret, and it is my friend
who has taken it away; but if I question him he will
never confess." He therefore thought out a plan to re-
cover his money, and went to his friend's house and said,
" A great deal of money has come into my hands, which I
want to bury in the same place, and I should be much 5
obliged if you would accompany me to-morrow as well for
the purpose. Out of greed for this additional money he
replaced the former money, and when the miser went there
alone the next day he found it all right. He was much
pleased with his contrivance and did not place any trust
in friends after that.
XLIX.
Dream kh.wab <r>J^ Horoscope janampatri
ur/if^
1. pirohat (Hindu)
Original (f.) asl J^f
e^Jt^
(1. nazar (offering)
Priest <
2. mulla (Mohdn.)
;*
2. tuhfa (keepsake)
3. padrl (Christian)
I 3. in' dm (reward)
1 Lekin jab na puya to hakka bakka rahgaya.
* Dil mefi sochne laga ki.
3 Main bahut mashkur huhga or apkl barl mihrbarii hogl.
497
I slept fqr nearly five hours and dreamed (saw) all sorts
of dreams. One of the dreams was rather ominous (bad)
and woke me suddenly. Feeling much puzzled with it
1 -at down with my head in my ' hands to think it over, but
could make nothing of it. Whilst 1 was thus plunged
(sunk) in deep reflection my wife awoke and asked me what
the matter was. I told her my dream. She too was
puzzled and advised me to consult the priest about it say-
ing, " He is a very learned man and might be able to inter-
pret to your satisfaction." It was a sound advice, and I
lost no time in repairing to the priest's house and told him
the particulars (hal) of my dream With the aid of a book,
my horoscope, the original of which he had with him, he
explained the meaning of the dream to my satisfaction, and
I having presented him a ' muhr ' took leave * and returned
home.
L.
l*n easy, restless be-chain
Courtier darbart
To restrain
(anger), %abt karna
To confiscate j
(property). 1
Missing gumshudah 8 *jJi J
Shepherd gadarya b;J/
Flock rewar
Magician jaditgar £
The king grew very uneasy and his anxiety increased
still more when the princes did not return the next day.
All sorts of apprehensions haunted (passed in) his mind ami
li»- would not be appeased by the explanations of his court-
Being unable to restrain his anger he burst into
i Halho* men *ir thamkar (or pakar kar).
* Atir rukh'at hokar ghar chalu oya.
8 Ut*ed attributively only.
63
498
invectives against the A.D.C. who had accompanied them,
adding (and said this also) that he would put him to
death if he (the A.D.C.) would not bring the princes back
within the next 24 hours. At these words the unfortunate
but innocent A. DC. was chilled with fear (blood froze in the
body of, etc.). He instantly armed himself, mounted his
horse, and departed in search of the missing boys. Wander-
ing from place to place, like a shepherd, who had lost his
flock, he at last came to his friend, the magician, and asked
for his help.
LT.
Ear-ring ball ^Jl>
Boundary had
( 1. shahddat cuJLJt
Evidence < : ^
Goldsmith sundr
f. 2. gaicdhl ^^ly
Suspicion shub-ha
Prosecution evidence
shaha iat- i-istighasa
To suspect (a person)
(par) shubha karna
Ruins (of a building)
khandar ^*f
Accused mulzam
C 1 kitjfj'M Lu
Guilty mujarim
•C1.l_ i t_\ UbUUiHi ,tj^^i
Statement 3 , , .
( 2. izhar jl^l
Arrest giriftdri ^
To gag munh men kaprd
To arrest giriftdr karna
thosnd 'Juwj^j IjjS ^o JL^Ju« 0*4
The other * day a lad of about ten years of age was mur-
dered for the sake of gold ear-rings he was wearing. The
Police have arrested a notorious bad character who has
made * a full confession of his crime. It appears from the
statement of the accused himself and the evidence adduced
by the prosecution that the boy, whilst returning from the
school within the limits of the Cantonment, was induced
by the accused to accompany him on a ramble (sair) into
' Agle din.
2 Sab kuchh man liya hai or pura iqbal kar liya hai.
499
the neighbouring ruins of an old fort. Arrived there, the
accused seized hold of the boy, threw him on the ground,
gagged his mouth, so that it was impossible for the poor
lad to cry for help, and snatching off the ear-rings ran back
to the city where he sold them to a goldsmith for fifteen
rupees. Except for a chance happening the crime would
never have been detected. As the accused was selling the
ear-ring to (ke hath) the goldsmith, a person called
(musammi ^+~'°) Ram Lai happened to pass by, and recog-
nising the rings, immediately ran to the Police station to
inform the Police of what he suspected, which resulted in
the prompt arrest of the accused and his consequent con-
fession.
To be translated from Hindustani into English.
I.
;KLi ^ JJ^ alijb O^l ^; vjy
*~ bb » ( <L slijb - LJlcw vJol
^r Jj L y ! ^ J^S yl -
^T I5gjjt; ;'»^x^ ^XJ IC
l Jlf w/A ;ow = like me.
* Kuchh muz5,V7a (or, /tJfcar) noAiA = it does not matter.
500
II.
» I;
*, - «
*n " (or hu-ba-hu) = exactly. 2 Mahall = palace.
3 A-nikalna = to happen to come.
* Salam alaikum = peace be on you (Mohamadan greeting).
6 Wa 'alaikum-us-salam — and on you be peace (answer to the above
greeting).
« (Se) farigh hona = to have finished a thing (farigh = free, at leisure).
501
^b L «
^ ^ - y^ » L/ i.
^^ ,L^;
y . > . I -
'
1 iti^ - ^ yJU c^L, ;y XU yl
1 Rastbaz = upright, straightforward.
* Afefc bakht = rny good man or l
* Sheikh* = peraon.
* Wawaila machana-lo cry loudly, to raise hue and cry.
* Janab or Huzur a Sir, Your Honor, etc. • Kul = all, whole.
502
III.
*
;U ;U
j UJ
*,
A. -1 Ai If Ub; ^
^ J
b
V
**
= due, right, title, privilege.
Bhainaa = male buffalo. * Pip = pus. * Pe< 6&ar = belly-full.
'Ajizi = humbleness. • Chabana — to chew.
503
I* - U) <
i^ uu -y r& ILI
IV.
L £J <L
LU*"> -L :
- U> VJ ^ ^i' «Jol
Uf yoJ!
.ih-o-*(iUimat = safe and sound. * Nfahukar guzar = Unjrrnt.-fu!
3 Chaltu jifurt'i n<i~ar ~i = l.-t me flee thee movinjr (i.<«., jro away).
* fFo^u/ karna =a to recover (what is din-)
•'••ana = to rolh-rt t.
« Rayaban = desolate wilderness.
T B/iir (f.) = wa«p. 8 BAm 6/»i»iuna = to l.nzr.
10 fawtla (or a«(aba/) a stables.
504
V.
.1 -
1 Pachtana =. to regret, to repent.
2 Taqalm karnu = to divide. a Takrar (f.) = dispute.
* Bha,i (contraction of ' bha.I ') = brother, Mr. (colloquial).
5 Nahana dhona = to bathe and wash oneself.
6 Amunat = trust, deposit. 7 Lauta dena = to give back.
8 (Par) muhr lagana — to seal.
505
VI.
tfirnf «e — on behalf of. " Marzl = conmnt.
* Vatiraz = rilijrction; (par) t'o/iros i-arna = to
* 55ra = wholo ; «/lr* ( J) = .. / «5ri = the whole (emphatic). I '
with • thaili ' (hag) here.
NiycU a intention ; (H) ntya/ phirna — to IMM-OUIO cvil-intentianed.
Ajkal karna = to mak- i<ll. promise*.
(Xa) n£m na /ena = t i a ion of, to show no itigns of.
7)a'foo = cliii.n fc War/ Iwir/ ^oAi* = literally «
64
506
VII.
JU ^r or )
I Be-lman = faithless, dishonest. 2 ffak (f.) = nose.
3 Ham-jins — fellow-being. * Kothrl = small room , cell,
& ydldb karna = to summon, to demand.
* /man se = solemnly, honestly.
" Sara sar = utterly, from one end to the other.
* Kan = ear. * Insan — human being. I'atibar = trust.
10 Jf al-i-masruqa = stolen property.
11 Baramad hona — to be recovered.
607
/# /;^ LTJ v*1*1-4 - U5 *x£ ^. £^ ,xJ ^^- ( lyt
- U-^ i. « sJL^L^x, » . UkJ ^; -L « ^oJ-~ -
VIII.
IU f
I /* Aruro/ men - then, in this case.
'•' Hhurij karnu = to dismiM (a caae)
.'i/»Arn did thahadat = eye witneM. * Qanun = law.
Dhara dhar = in quick succession (onoumtopo-ic).
V = information, report.
: Pethtar = l>efor«-, previously, beforehand.
• Bafaur i- = by way of, as (Persian Prepositional phrase).
><armindah = ashamed. 10 LScMr = perfor helpless,
•I Chhapa = raid ; (por) chhUpa mamS = to raid.
(/Co) toi^r Jfcarno = to harass.
/.'p/a«ol = State (country).
508
IX.
1 Tafc me/i Zaf/a hu^a — waiting one's opportunity.
2 Khuda na khwastah — God forbid.
3 (For) 5-parno = to fall on, to attack.
* Ya'm = i.e., that is to say.
*> Surang (f.) = a mine ; (ke niche) suraftg lagana = to mine.
6 Mudda'a = object, intention. ^ Hallo, karna — to storm.
« Ghusna = to force in. w Sand = bund, dam.
10 Rwfcfc = direction, face. ll This happened on Christmas Day.
12 (ka) lihaz karna = to pay regard to. ™ Jarl rakhna = to continue.
509
1 Muharira
* DaghZbazl
siege ; (fca) muharira karna = to lay siege to.
treachery. » (^) 6«ito /«-n5 = to tak
Ifurda — <ioad. & Da/n jfcarna = to !
Kumak ((.) = reinforcement.
ghanlmat samajhna =s to take advantage of (^ftont»nor =r boonr
Jatcafimard = brave.
(/Co) fcaMo 6Af/n2 = to ftencl
N&haq = for nothing, for no fault, for no rhyme or
11 fiafidgan-i khttda = God's creatures (men).
/&uA = blood, murder.
C7« ne ek (bat) na *uni = he would not listen to a word.
Akbir dam tak = up to the last breath.
(Ki) did dena a to praise (a deed) out of sheer ju-
510
*
X.
J
- ur 8 v_/T
' ^org = duty. 2 Buzdil = coward.
3 Bodnarat A:5 ^fco = stign)a of disgrace.
* Tez fa6a', Tuhdbhu, or Tunak mizaj — quick-tempered, irascible.
& Oahak = customer. • Nibarna = to be finished.
T TtArA;* 6a turkl jawab deria = to return tit for tat, to pay one in one's
o wn coin.
3 Ag bagola hona = to fly into rage. 8 Bharakna = to flare up.
10 Nalish = complaint in a Court. H Muataghas' alaihi = defendant.
'* Jari karna = to issue (as an order).
13 Roz-i-muqarrarah = fixed day. ]* Mustaghls = complainant.
16 BWra = bad (fcam, deed, understood after ' bura').
511
VL:
^
justice.
a^a6 = eaae-lo\ \i*k pcutand = luxurious.
* Kbair khwali = well winhor. *> PFottr a'acam = Prime MiniHter.
« C7ttu = owl. 1 D3r (f.) = flock (of birds ). • Jaw« (or* goyS ') =n« if.
* M&dah = fomalo. )^ Nar = male. U Kbaraba = lmrr-n l.in.l. r
' z^«z = dowry. H Fi^a/ = at pn^
I* Salamat m tsafe Ion? ").
'* Rray3 (f.s.) « aabjecto. l« ^'*a/»/ = neglectful.
'" f,a parwah = carelex
512
Uf '^Jbl Ljfrp WJ c-^J - Ufl
Jyt 6 uJmi-«
XII
" • cy
JU L,
I Bag (f. ) = rein. 2 Morria = to turn (trans.).
8 Palan = proclamation. * Muqaddamat = cases.
5 Munsif (or 'adil) = just. 6 /Jrana = to swagger.
7 Na efc fcJ na t/o = without saying a word, quite unexpectedly.
* Ohufisa = a poking blow with the fist
a Mukka = a downward blow with the fist.
1° Mulazim = servant. U (kl taraf) muJsh.at.ib hona = to address,
513
Uiyk - UJ Jlj
~ i - <*_ ^/ ,^ ^ ur y
* b j ^
XIII.
MJ! c^i- 0,1 ^ *> b/ A. bib b
:^ O^ '
XIV.
1 Kara = a whip, a lash ; tore marna (or lag an a) = to whip, to lash.
< Waja (f.) = cause, reaaon.
B Kholkr . openly (i.e., not in parables).
U = niothi-r m-Uw. * (7oy8 = in other words.
< Ada kirna = to pay (whn» prayer).
•>5 =r old age.
><la = party, detachment, also han<ll< .
5H
1 An kl an men = in the twinkling of an eye.
2 BofcJi (f.) = ashes. 8 Sharif adml — gentleman.
* Dum dabakar bhag gaye = turned tail and fled.
b Khet rahna — to fall in the battlefield. « Matha = forehead.
1 Qiriftar karna = to arrest.
8 MuCawiza = recompense, compensation (Tawan = indemnity).
« Musladhar bariah = torrential rain.
10 Qhu\na = knee ; ghutnon ghutnon (tak) — knee deep.
Jl Bare = at last, however.
l* Jaise bana = as best we could manage.
515
* ^cxA...'
XV.
IT
I.
I Rcuad (f.s.) = provisions. * Hro^a»ra = et cetern .
* KhttdivSna m to get dug (causative).
^ (H) roA deiAna = to wait for. * paiyham = verbal message.
? (*e) Jbam /«na = to make use of.
516
b; J Jx^. - ^J^j ^ C-Tj^ ^/ X/T
-
<L
1 " Bat" understood after ' H'. 2 'Anqarlb = in the near future
* Qhat (m.) = ferry, coast.
* Ulte pa, on = without stopping (lit. on turned feet).
& Be ab o-dana = without food and drink.
« ' Wana ' is a meaningless appositive.
T Preterite used for future.
517
£.
XVII.
-
Pan *au (contraction of pafah nau) •= 600.
Hfithyar-band (or mu*alUih) = armeci.
Hoib fo/fc = hindrance, obstacle. * Murgka = cook.
B/.t-7/a 6/.a(Jta = stray.
Q5/(to (or, Jkaru-an) = caravan. ? Darra = Mountain pass, defile.
'to v«fc (or achdnak) = suddenly.
MA: m«n = in ambuscade for, on the look-out for.
I^ Kil J_l^ ^U y J
XVIII.
*rrt
1 Hankna = to drive.
2 Surayh = clue, trace ; (fco) surayh (or pa<«) lagana = to trace
3 QJiair 'ilaqa (or yaghistan) = independent territory.
* (Men) dakhl dena = to interfere.
5 Hafib-i-mamul = as usual.
519
UJ Jj
^ ;^ ^^-: ^ ^>
•' *- *
Lit -AjL; u^i«— ^j Jb ^>! » _ jt^> M»Jb - UJ
s_-5 x s«.5 S^ ^ x "
XIX.
.
'
*J
= father. •' l&ir**h (f.) = acrntch, bruise.
" Abhl abhl — just now, quite lately, a minute ago.
• Sarpat dalna (or daufana) — to gallop (tran* ).
s Qaum (f.) = tribe, race. nn»
• C7;o<f (or gaftwar) ar rii^ti.-, vulgar.
• Kbaliq = polite.
1 MiUintur = socin
fc PC/5 (f.) = worship : (fci) pf/;5 karna = to wor
520
XX.
1 Tarlqa = way, method, system. 2 Jlfas^a6J = religious.
8 'ibadat = prayer, devotion to God. 4 ^4 no 7 = corn.
6 Sa&2i (or tarkari) = vegetable.
4 KJiurak (i ) = food, also dose of medicine.
7 Zewar = ornament. 9 Jawahirat = jewels, gems.
* Shauq = fondness, liking. 10 J3w£ = idol (no.)
1 ! Bheht = an offering ; (par) &Aen£ charhana = to offer as an act of
worship or devotion.
12 ga'un = plague. I* Haiza = cholera. l4 Chlchak = small-pox.
l& Chhut = touch ; chhut se ligjati hai = is contagious (lit. is contracted
by touch).
16 Pis<»u = flea.
17 Qai (f.) or w2f? (f ) = vomit ; (ko) qai (or ultl ana) = to vomit (intr.) ;
qai (or ultl) karna = to vomit (trans).
'8 Daat = thin motions ; (ko) dost lagna = to suffer from diarrhoea,
l* Shadld = intense, strong. M Dana — pimple.
52 J
XXI.
deadly, fatal. « Af orr = disease.
Ziyadah tar — mostly, to a greater extent. * Mat a = mother.
Deri = goddess. « Parveth = manifestation.
Dauran-i-marz - duration of the disease. <* Bhajan = hymn
3/ariz = patient. 1° $ihtyabl = recovery.
(/Ci) du'o mSri^rw = to pray »
Kbu*hi mariana a to rejoice. I* Mafidar = Hindu temple.
Jfor = peacock. 16 Ke barkhilS/ = against.
(Son »« = \v
522
GJ
XXII.
« JJyt " vJu
13T ll
1 Qieea = story.
2 Peft = big box or chest.
* Musafir garl = passenger train.
<> Fl — in, per ; fl ghaMa = per hour.
* /£m garfar = to some extent, rather.
10 Ji'/a fca»fe = hardy. Jl #5ra A;a/ = work, business.
'2 Ta'ajjub = wonderment ; (ko) ta'ajjub ana = to wonder.
3 Malgari = goods train.
6 Patrl — railway line.
7 Raftar = speed, gait.
«* Chapta = flat.
523
rr<
nan.
V or )
I Majlis (f.) = meeting ; kumeti (f.) - committee.
» BarkJia*t honS — to rise up, i.e. to he clistnimed or dift«olv«l.
'imuni'at — prohibit
>.nna = to pick up, to pick out. to pluck (AM flower* and fruits).
* Khare khar* = without delay or Mopping (lit. *tandin? all the
524
V o^ /'
XXIV.
JU
= dagger.
2 Ilzam = accusation, blame ; (par) ilzam lagana = to accuse, to blame;
{par) ilzam. lagna = to be accused or blamed.
a Oharwall = wife.
* Lautkar = back (adv.).
6 Hamsaya = neighbour.
fl Qha,ib — missing. ^ Silwana = to get sewn (causative).
* Hathkarl = handcuff.
y Ta.la.nhl = searching (a plaoe or person) ; (fct) talashl leria = to search
(a place or person.)
10 Hawalat = police custody, the cell in which a prisoner is locked while
•in police custody or under trial.
H Berl = fetters (one or one pair).
525
XXV.
JLCi,
I ChalSn — despatch, Heading up for trial, also invoice of goods sent.
* Salcht qaid = rigorous iniprisonnv nt
•' Mahz qaid = simple imprisonment.
• RhugatnS = to undergo, to suffer.
*> Baramda = verandah. • Ajnabi — Rtranu
1 Munanb = proper. » Vtr* AC.5 = staying.
526
- Uf
XXVI.
<L
^ d!ofc = English mail.
'2 I fell to thinking, i.e., I hesitated. U Ta,ammul = hesitation.
* Tezrau = swift, fleet. 6 Nasha = intoxication.
<> Ahmaq = fool, idiot. 7 Fahrist = list.
5 H5<^ jorkar = c-lasping hands.
w Jahan panah = refuge of the world, Your Majesty.
10 Darj = entered, registered.
527
Jb -
XXVII.
oI .x* ;KL> - (xOj~»
J '"*•
i V' ^ -S- GJ* ,/- w » ^ ;j '-J
- O^9 ^ ^ o5!^1 / V' /' • ^ ^JJ>'1; ^ u??j*
^ V1
;y - . _
J^ >ri ^
i X&waqif — stranger, unacquainted.
* Bila zamanat = without security.
> Nishanl — sign. * Darja = rank, class, degree.
* &Aul9 = courtesy, poli t. -n. •--.
" flat auqat = sometimes ('auqXt i.s Aral>i<- plural of* wn<<
^ Pc«ha = proffH.-
'•ukriya ke snth = thankfully.
• b-T
* ur
XXVIII.
Lfc; U^yb .^^^> ^f c— JJ c— .^ ^ J *^L« A4jL <L *^f - ty b J
ju«
- £/J ^j*> ^j*> <=*4*& ^ ty kj&
±.f y 8 ^ j
1 Gadarya = shepherd, herdsman.
2 Rewar (or, galla) = flock. 8 Bara = fence, enclosure.
1 Darinda = ravenous beast.
6 Uchhalna = to skip. 6 Lapakna = to bound forward.
" Chlrna = to split, to rip open. 3 Jhatka = jerk.
b (Xo) Zene ke dene par jana = to have to suffer loss where one expected
gain (i.e., for the tables to be turned).
529
XXIX
DhGfidn* = to look for, to March.
Dhawa karna — to mak<> fon-od nmr.-hpii. to storm.
Lathi - thi. -I; • -In I.. * ^ irjfcuri ^airoA = crown witnoM.
— pointing «>ut
= houce-breaking, burglf 7 Tafii = latr
67
530
JU U
XXX.
ju^ ^±. 6
|;U ;^ ^^ ^ Uf
,AX>
h
i ur
1 Moslem = for instance. 2 Karguzarl = work, doing.
3 Sbubi — beauty, good point ; khubl ke sath = beautifully, well.
satisfactorily.
* Sar-anjam horia = to be finished or accomplished.
5 Miyan — sheath, scabbard. « War = blow.
1 Khali jana = to miss. 8 phal = blade.
" (Par se) phafydna = to jump over.
10 (Se) thokar khana = to knock one's foot against, to stumble.
11 Ar (f.) = cover, shelter. '* Ganna = sugar-cane.
13 Tar jana — to guess or infer from circumstances.
531
XXXI.
1 />'j/ me* kuchh kala — som. tlnnir wrong (fly in the ointment).
« Tofedar bafiduq = mat
•1 (f.) = hot win.l.
* Mela = a fair ; (mcla) tagna = to »».- In-l-i (as fair).
/ w/ii = rat 1 1. . « Farokht = sale.
'/f/ur = fat, well-fed. ' 6'S^ni (f.) = ri«lin« m
v IthnZn karna — to bathe (Hindu word).
10 Nizam = scene. " CAou*a« = on the alert, cir<niraiip«
532
J
XXXII.
( a)^tl£ or )
ke (kl) = a few, easily countable number of.
2 Jhufid = clump, grove. 8 Gala = neck, throat.
* Kurta •= shirt without collar and cuffs.
5 Dhoti = a sheet-like cloth tied by Hindus round their waists to cover
the lower parts of their bodies.
6 Baghl (f.) = armpit, side ; baght men — under the arm or by the sid&
(of).
= basket * Maze se = with relish.
533
^- ^ JJL; ^^ *S ^ J^ KJ
XXXITI.
10
L1 UT ^ ^ Jj^l ^ b^Xix^ </!
tt'T
1 (/Co) dua.eh dena = to blena, to invoke hlercmffH on.
2 To <iar Jh'nar (or to ek fara/) — leave alone, to say nothing of.
ttakna = to flutter. * Bo\l = piece of flesh.
b ^»\A:/» bnchaknr = avoiding detection, surreptitiously . flneakinhly.
« ^'W = highest. 1 Diy&natdar = honest.
Tfaram = relipously forl.idden, against religious laws.
= My dear Sir.
^ ju ^ T c^
XXXIV.
y
1 Ra/u chakkar hona = to run away, to make oneself scarce.
2 Chal (f ) = dodge, trick ; (H) chal mefi, ana = to be entrapped (by).
3 Namak haram = faithless, disloyal, false to one's salt (used of those
only who eat one's salt).
* Ihsan = favor, kindness. 5 Palld •=. unclean.
6 Napak = impTire. ^ (Se) mahrum = deprived (of).
3 Namak halal = faithful, loyal, true to one's salt ; namak halall
= loyalty.
y (Par) chalria = to succeed (with).
10 Bhala (or bihtarl] chahna — to wish well.
11 Zarl kl zarl men = in the sixtieth part of a second, in no time.
1* To aahl = well then I shall confess I am not what I am, well then you
can call me mud, well then I shall eat my hat.
13 Maqam = place, station, position.
l* Qabilri'zikar = worth mentioning, mentionable.
15 Tabdill — change. 1(i Lagatar = ceaselessly.
535
XXXV.
I M - trustworthy, reliable.
* Zar?a * Pcthqadmi = advance.
* Jatojl nigah *e = from military point of view.
6 Rafta rafta = gradually. * Dohri ch&l = double in oven
7 Pe*hlngo,i = prophesy : PejMnpo.i Ararwa = to foretell
* Qabil-i-i'a'ibar * '.4ma/d5ri = rule, NM
536
1 Alag thalag — quite apart (' thalag ' is a meaningless appositive).
2 Chandan = very, much (used only in negative sentences).
3 Waqifiyat = acquaintance, knowledge.
* Bo 5*5m = easily.
B Morchdbandl = fortification, entrenchment.
« Musiahkam = strong, fortified. 1 Muqlm = stationed.
* JfiCcwir = large (in number or quantity). y Zabardast = powerful.
537
XXXVI.
I Nt*tro-n&bud karna = to destroy totally, to annihilate. (.Vw< = is not,
nabud = was not).
* /?a Aar Aa/ = any way. 8 Mukhali/at = opposition.
4 FaJbe ba'd dtgre = one after another. & 3f uAtm = expedition.
• f untoztm = manager, organiser, administrator.
7 Pamal karna = to crush, to sweep (in military sense).
- *Mod (f.) = frontier ; Sarhaddl (adj.) = of front
* KbwUar = wilful, arrogant >° Muftid = misrhief-monger.
11 Sir uthana = to rebel, to become uppish.
12 A,t din — every day. 18 BurdbSrl = fnrbearan< , . iixiulc^noe.
'* Dhitha.l = obstinacy, arrogance.
lb .Strui-zori = headinesfl . mtn. til>ilit\ . ,tiimto self-will, overbearing
Character.
538
lo
juo j)
v
* .- ^LjCiLo d^3Lu <i_ ^
XXXVII.
l6;Ub K <L^ ^ toJ l*JU3^ vjol
J Qarar waqa'l saza = condign punishment.
2 (/ve) zer-i-gfraur = under consideration (of).
;"> Faujkaalii = marching against, invasion.
* SaAgdil = stony-hearted. & Bejigrl = heartlessness.
6 Rohgte khare hona = one's hair to stand on end or bristle up.
" Panja = paw, claw, clutch.
s Phafisjana = to be entangled.
h \4z56 = torment. 10 Aziyat = torture.
1 1 flar fard-i-bashar = every individual being.
12 Mils* = pernicious, troublesome. l3 TFaZida?'^ • = parents.
'* Kam 'wmar (or jshurd sal) = young, small.
15 Har = necklace, garland.
'* Kara = bangle. n Jwart (or /w,a baz) — gambler.
539
-b!
il - 0 Lj fe ;,l b
;y LJ
yi uf
** ;'-?' ^ b-
...
£. AJ/ ^ JL^L, ^f - l Ut
or )
^ or ) bj !yo
, yb UU - ^ L /!
' (/Ce) mtmA mM pani 6/»ar5n3 = for one's teeth (lit. mouth) to water.
< Qabristan (or gorittun) = graveyard.
x (K"a) gala ^f/A|na = to strangle. * fla^-ka^a = pick-pocket.
s Badiat = bane, rascal. 4 Tarapna — to writhe in i
' Dhanfihora (or munOal) = proclamation by the beat of drum.
Qhafiflhoro phirwana (or mnnadl kariranS} = to cause to be proclaimed.
9 Hulya = peraonn!
540
XXXVIII.
1 Sargardafi = perplexed, distressed.
2 Dhandhora (or muriadl) = proclamation by the beat of drum
Dhandhora phirwana (or munadi karwana) = to cause to be proclaimed.
3 (Ko) gale se Jagana = to press one against one's bosom, to embrace.
* Kfoairat = charity, alms.
5 Wabal = burden, vexation. « '^linafc (f.) = glasses.
I Nind (f) = sleep ; (ko) nifid ana — to sleep or feel sleepy.
8 Karwat badalna = to change side (in sleep).
* Gbair ma' mull = extraordinary, uncommon.
10 Qabl-az-waqt (or waqt se pahle) = before time, premature.
II Ba In hama = in spite of all this (ba = with. In = this, liama = all).
I* Israr = persistence, insistence. '* Chal basna = to die.
'* Chit = flat on one's back.
= breath (' wans ' is meaningless appositive).
541
JU ;^l
I Maqruz (or QarzdSr) = in debt. < Riha,i*hl = residential.
s Hawtll = mansion. * Nilam Jfearna = to auction.
^ Kamyab — rare. • Qimft = precious, costly, valuable.
T Raqm — item, amount. * QarziAtroA = creditor.
v Kupai he ath Hth &ne — eight annaa in a rupee.
10 ( A'u ) khXn bahanZ = to shed the blood of. to kill.
> i /Vm/u no «am5na = to be bursting with delight or pride.
>* Kwht-o-khnn = slaughter.
» Patpa kam& = to repulse, to drive back.
'* Prut himmat — down-hearted. J& Fatahyab = victorious.
542
i
**
XL.
A.
I Bera = regiment, fleet, raft. 2 iTwr/a = funny thing.
3 Mihnat t&lah = toilsomo, laborious.
4 Jang azmudah •= tried in war, veteran.
6 Raflq = friend, companion, comrade. 6 ffalah kar — adviser.
^ Aslr = prisoner (specially of war). s Tajwiz (f.) = plan, proposal.
543
B.
UT yt
(f.) = irrigation canal. < Chak = village (Panjabi)
x Bar (f.) = a wild uncultivated tract of ground covered with trees,
tramblea and underwood (Panjabi).
* B&ranl = dependent on rain.
* Ba miuhkil tam&m = hardly, with great difficulty.
* Pituhan khinar = penaioner.
lurabba? — square (adj.), a aquare of land.
' B<una = to live. * Babjar = barren.
10 Sabza zar = verdant, green. " Zarkhez = fertile.
544
XLI.
1 Biradrana •= brotherly. 2 Qawara karna = to tolerate.
3 Poshak (f.) = dress, suit of clothes.
4 Khilwat = privacy ; khilwat men = in private.
6 Shaifian = devil : shaitani = devilry. 6 Zahiran = outwardly.
T jRa*MJ = prophet (Mohammad). 8 Ba&nan = inwardly.
^ Klna = malice, grudge.
J° Mansuba = plot ; (fca) ma/ifu&a karna = to plot for.
1 1 C7*o${a = pilferer, thief.
12 Sirhana = head side of the bed ; ke sirhane = at the head side of the-
bed of. 13 (Ko) fcam tamam karna = to finish off, to kill.
1* Harbarana = to be confused, excited or alarmed ; harbarakar =f
confusedly, in confusion.
545
A.LJ.LI.
_ 1cil ^; Ubj^ - «> «UJL^ LT y K> Ub
UTU ^1^ l±
^H vj
A. i
1 La'anat karna — to curse, to reproach.
2 Admlyat = manliness. 8 AfoA: = mere, merely.
* Lahu. ke jo«h »e = from fervent and affectionate promptings of
consanguinity or fellowship of blood.
' Diljot\ — humouring, trying to please, to encourage; (kl) diljo.l
JeornS = to humour.
^ Khu*hnutna = beautiful, pretty. 7 Lagat = cost.
8 TFirfin = ruined, desolate, deserted.
« NSblna = blind (indeclinable). '° Qharq = sunk.
ii Ha*\n = heautiful (Arabic nouns and adjectives add * I ' for feminine
gender ; as Hasina = a beautiful woman.
generous.
546
I o v_^ - KJ ^i^, a LfXL ujO^ - Ufyt
&T v->! - ,-Jo^; AJLo^ » iS LUfcu Jj <L uJuLk^ y bl
XLIII.
(jj t_ ilxfj c—o JjJ t^5ol 1 t ULGU
(jJ
^ Milria = to meet, to resemble etc.
2 Bal bhar farq = hair's breadth of difference.
* Pankha jhalria = to fan.
* Haftil = acquired, gained ; hasll karna = to acquire, to gain ; hasll
horia = to be acquired etc.
5 Qhar bar = house (or home) and everything pertaining to it.
6 Pareshan = perplexed, bewildered.
T Nanba,l = baker. 3 Khush mizaj = of cheerful disposition.
* (X5) esfear fcarna = to express. '0 Mwsfcarona = to smile.
547
Ub
*
^ v;^ /
XLIV.
i Kabab = roaflt-meat. * /?er^Sri (or t&wrrfa) = small change.
o(5 = not good, ba< •
* Chawanni — four-anna bit. & 7*r3r Jborna = to persist, to insist,
o KharZ = good, geauine, clean-hearted.
' Bolchal (f.) = hot words, quarrel = tanaz'a = quarrel, dispute.
* Sikka = coin. * Qbaur *e — carof
10 fheka = contract ; thcka-dar = contractor.
" Afignthl = ring with a stone set i
>> — rule, regulation, law.
548
£.
* <± W ^ yt
- -ft. L.
JU
JU
Ixj 2- 6
6
.Jwo -
= famous, notorious. 2 Mushtabah = suspected.
3 Jama talashi = personal search (jama = dress)'.
* Shariqfeht = recognition , identification.
& Mufchbir = reporter, informer.
6 TFardat = occurrence. 1 Doe tana = friendly.
8 Ta'alluq = connection, relation.
8 Mutjala' = informed ; muttala' karna = to inform.
549
XLV.
J ^J - Uf A^AJU .^uJ <L ^^LjJ vJu) y vj
'^ uy-' 8 ^ «->•
CxT .iufj iS (0
;J
j ^ *, / . ^i^ ^L,
Afoztd = additional * Pard-i-jurm = charge s
Ear tih — all the three. * SatSyab hon& = to be p
ThnkS h&ra = tired and exhausted. < DarhZn = door-keeper.
(K») minnal gim&jat karnZ = to entreat, to implore.
(X») ;'2n labo* par ana = to be dying.
Takan (f.) = fatigue. I0 A/Ob = mm (Persian).
11 (Ihunlb honZ = to tet (M sun, moon < t
^44 = open, spacious, roomy.
13 Ara,i*h — furnishing, decoration,
J* Arattah - furnished, equipped. 16 P&klza = clean.
550
» - KJ JL^ ^^ Jj ^ Jj
; L- li^JsU. ^1 y ci^c c_£jJ
* «(JJW JU
XLVI.
, o-L) £_ 4^oo <L t\^
V.^ v *-- -V
-x«>
KJ L.J c_;^) ;^l Uf
f <L xLft
..
- ) J
KI 5U
b
U a. ^J ^j^ - (J
i L, "Ijt JyL ^ ;^I U3 ^^^ ;^l cJol sl^ ^ y
1 Qiyam karria = to stay, to halt.
2 (X?) tau'Szw' fcorna = to entertain (as guest).
''' Matuntal karna = to enrich.
+ Darlcha = window. & Bazl lagaria = to bet, to wager.
6 Dumba = lamb.
= dejected, sad.
551
^JLJ ^ ULGU Aw LLI
XLVII.
(Jjb
I Qibla-i-'alam = revered one <>f th. world (Your Majesty).
' Pahredar = sentry. * Kachkol as begging bowl.
1 (f . ) = staff, s & $3(M ;1 = holy man.
« />'- M — «>!<! in
552
Uf
XLVIII.
y;
pana = to die (lit. to obtain salvation).
2 TF5?td-i-&azwr(7t05r = revered father.
<* Intiqal = death (lit. change of place).
* TFaZJ'afaZ = crown prince.
6 Qhaur ka maqam (or aochne ki bat) = point requiring consideration.
6 Qadim = ancient ; qadlm zamane meti. = in ancient times.
1 Qhamsan = crowd, carnage ; ghamsan ki laraj = sanguinary battle.
8 Sunsan = desolate, lonely. & Rdhzan = highway man.
553
J JUx> ^
V"
(43 I
yt lyt L+*.
Jj 6A3 | UJ|
XJ £. ^
XLIX.
lyt jU3) Lu) ^j cJol - <Z-UuJ
ui
1 Makkhi = fly. < (7Aor (f.) = cave.
a AfoJbfi = spider. * JSJfl = web.
* Tannd = tostret
« TaA (f.) = bottom ; tah-i-dil »e = from the bottom of heart.
" Karlm = Morriful, Bounteous.
8 Karsaz = Providence.
v A'i Ku/atl (or AM utwi/e «<) = through the intervention of.
ritmand = needy. 1 1 .VatriU fcamfl = to question, to beg for alms.
70
554
*>
(Jt
. KJ
JU 03)
£.
J
- A.
L.
1 Darguzr karria •= to overlook. 2 Anjan banna = to feign ignorance.
3 ^a,e sir se = anew. * Rata? karria = to remove.
5 Sakh^i = generous. 8 SakJiawat = generosity.
T Shahzadl = princess. 8 Dastan (f.) = story.
* ifosa kasaya = ready saddled or tied (kaaria — to fasten tightly).
)0 (Ka) 6^e« badalna (or 7<;arw5) = to disgiiise as.
555
b I JUA. ^ -
I Wasila = means.
* Mayii* (or wiummtd) — clinapp'
//• niurna = to try hard.
* K/ia</ (f.) = ravine, down the p
^ Mu*\bat zadah — <int<>ttunat< , affliction-stricken.
« Afa;V5 = story, experience*, adventures, facts (lit .
71
PART III IDIOMATIC SENTENCES.
Our cause is just and we shall
win.
It is a crime both to take and
give bribe.
I do not believe a word he
says.
Why did you threaten him
to shoot with your pistol ?
Why did you deceive me ?
Don't judge him by (go by)
his outward appearance.
He is a very lazy individual
and sleeps whole day long.
He could not answer this
and remained silent.
He is a man of the old school
and very superstitious.1
He knocked his motor-bike
against the gateway and
broke it.
There is a respectable -looking
gentleman standing at the
doorway, wanting to see
you.
He is a regular skin-flint.
They are regular swindlers.
The whole house needs repairs.
Give me any bicycle you like.
I beg your pardon, I mistook
you for my Munshi.
These peaches8 are not yet
ripe enough.
He has rather a sharp temper.
ham hag par ham aur jltenge.
rishwat lena aur dend donon
jurm hain.
mujhe uskl bat ka zara bhl
i'atibar nahih.
turn ne kyoh usko pistaul dikha
kar daraya tha ?
turn ne mujhe kyoh dhoka diya ?
uski zahirl shakl par mat ja,o.
wuh bara sust adml hai aur
din bhar soya rahta hai.
usko chup ke siwa kuchh ban
na ay a.
wuh purane khiyalat ka adml
hai aur bara wahml hai.
uska l motor-bike ' phatak se lag
kar (or takra kar} tut gay a.
koi mu'azzaz sa adml bahir
khara hai aur ap se milna
chahta hai.
wuh pakkd makhi * chus hai.
wuh pakke guhde hain.
tamam ghar maramniat-talab ho
raha ha;.
koj, sa * bicycle ' dedo.
mu'af farmaj,,ega, main ap ko
apna Munshi samjha tha.
yih aru abhi thik pakke nahih.
uskl tabi'at kuchh tez si hai.
1 Superstitous = wahml.
Lit. fly- sucker. 3 Peaches = a-ru.
557
We occasionally visit each
other.
That is nothing, I want a
better quality, show me the
first quality.
When the sun rises it will
scatter the fog.1
First shave me and then cut
my hair.
I detest such conduct.
If*- \vas alarmed and retraced
his steps.
Tin- more he reads the more
stupid he becomes.
Hold your tongue, you ass.
Let him speak first.
He is devil of a sleeper.
You should not interfere in
other people's business.
You will never get such a
chance again.
Th'-re is a great difference
between saying and doing.
T just missed passing (my
examination) .
The hockey will begin the same
time to-morrow.
Send some one to find out,
please.
I 1 \vas raining heavily.
It is very cloudy to-day.
It is very fine to-day.
How long have you been
here?
ham kabhi kabhi ek dusre se
milte rahte hain.
yih kuchh nahin, is se achrhhd
chdhiye. awwal dnrjn <lik:
job auraj chafhegd to kuhrd
jdtd rahegd.
paMe hajdmat kar lo (or
band lo}, pichhe bdl kdtrid.
mujhe aisi baton se nafrat * hai
wuh khauf khdkar ulte pdton
phir gayd.
jitnd parhtd hai utnd hi bewaquf
hotd jdtd hai.
chup raho, gadhe.
pahle use kahne do.
wuh bald 8 kd sonewdln I"
tumhen dusron ke kdm
dakhl nahln dend chdhlye.
tumhen aisd mauqd1 phir-kabhi
ndhin milegd.
kahne aur karne men barn
hai.
main pds hole hole rahgayd*
' hockey ' kal phir usi waqt
ahuru' hogl.
fcw» ko darydjt knrm ke Kte
bhejdijiye.
zor In bdrish ho rahl tin.
dj bahut bddal hain.
dj daman bilknl adf hai.
kab se yahan ho ?
= knhra. « Nafrat = hatred.
s Bala ka (ghazab ka) = Devil of a, terrible, also marvellous.
* 'BachgayS'i f an escape from something unpleasant is impli
otherwise rahgaya.
558
I stumbled and fell down.
How long did you take to do
this?
It takes one hour and a half
to reach that place by train.
The road is a hilly one and
not made.
I remember all about this man.
I am very anxious about his
, health.
There is no hope of his re-
covery. He might survive
this night.
Will it rain, Munshi ji ?
I hope so.
I missed the train yesterday.
Come, look sharp or you will
miss it again to-day.
Is it true that he is engaged
to be married ?
He nearly died.
He nearly fell down from his
horse.
He very nearly said this.
He has become a great favour-
ite with the Adjutant.
Were you present there or
not ? If 'you were why did
you allow them to fight ?
You should have prevented
them.
main thokar kha kar gir para,
is par kitni der lagi thi ?
1. gari wahan derh ghante men
pahuhchti hai.
2. gan men wahan tak derh
ghanta lagta hai.
rasta pahari aur kachcha hai.
mujhe is adml ki nisbat sab
kuchh yad hai.
mujhe uski siht kl bari fikar
hai.
ab uske fine ki ko,i umed '
nahih. Shay ad yih raj
nikale.
Munshi ji, dp ke khiyal men
barish hogi ?
umed l to hai.
kal main gan se rah gaya tha.
chalo, jaldi karo nahm to aj phir
rahja.oge.
kya yih sach hai ki uski shddi
honewali hai ?
wuh marte marte bachgaya*
wuh apne ghore par se girte
girte bachgaya?
wuh yih kahte kahte rahgaya?-
Ajitan sahib usko bahut chahte
hai (or Ajitan sahib uski*1
bahut mante haih).
turn maujud the ya nahm ? Agar
the, to inheh kyon larne d,iya ?
Tumheh inko rokna chahiye
tha.
1 Or, •' ummid."
2 'Bachgaya' if an escape from something unpleasant is implied;
otherwise rahgaya.
3 « Bat ' understood after
559
This is very satisfactory.
1 did not expect it.
I gave him ten rupees out of
own pocket.
1 have no time to see him
now.
11- has been punished un-
justly.
• M anything else to
you made all prepara-
113 for the journey ?
Thank you, you have been
very kind.
e excuse me, I have given
'i lot of trouble.
I tli ink you had better tell
me all the truth if you can.
It will be best for both of us.
I am delighted to see you
back safe and sound.
nt to Lahore during new
year's holidays. It is still
cold there.
Good, then 3*ou leave here
to-morrow morning. Good-
bye.
You can have no talking
practice there, as the people
there speak a different
oguage.
may go if you please,
I have no objection at all.
They were to set out in the
morning but could not get
a carriage.
yih bahut achrhhd hai.
<he. yih umed l na th 1 .
main ne apnt jeb se (or, apne
pas se) usko das rupai diye.
mujhe fursat nahm, maiii /*
waqt us se nahtn mil saktn.
usko begundh sazd milt hai.
• hc.ii kurJt 'an-
turn ne sa/ar kd sab sdmdn kar
liyd hai ?
'indyat, dp ne baft mihrbdni
ki hai.
mu'df farmdti,eqd, main ne dp
ko bahut takRf di hai.
mere khiydl men ham donon
ke li,e bihtar yih hogd ki I urn
sach sach kah do.
mujhe bayi kfeushi huj hai ki
khaitiyat se wapis d,e
hain .
main nau roz H chhuttloii men
•in fha. abhi f>il:
u''t}i7ii, /di hai.
<trfi'-liri. in flj> h'J tfnhnh se rawdna
honge. Khuddhaii
waha lei mashq nahtn
ho saktt, kyon ki waha
aur zubdn bolte hain.
agar ////// idna chdhle ho, to
chalejd,o, mujhe zard bhi
i'atirdz nahtn.
unhen subah jdnd tha magar
gafi na mil sain.
nmmld."
Haftz = Protector.
560
What is the latest news ?
Is everything going on all right
in the city ?
There have been no rains and
famine is threatened.
Its price will be deducted from
your pay.
Everything must be ready by
6 a.m.
They are very simple people.
That is why crime is very
rare there.
What do they charge for a seer
of grapes ?
He is a very good shikari and
has dozens of chits granted
to him by Sahibs.
You are never in time.
He came to himself in about
three quarters of an hour.
I know what I have to do.
He has lost 3 his voice.
He is hoarse 8 through contin-
ued talking.
I hope you won't forget it, it
is very important.
Is he a permanent servant or
a temporary one ?
He is still an apprentice * and
learning the work.
You ought not to do such a
thing.
You ought not to have done
such a thing.
tdza khabar kyd hai ?
shahr men sab khairiyat hai ?
bdrish ko,i nahih hu,i, aur
qakt l kd dar hai.
iski qimat tumhdri talab se kdti
jd,egi.
sab chiz subah ke chhe baje se
pahle pahle tayydr ho?
wuh bahut sdda (or sidhe] Io9
hain, isi waste wahdn jurm
bahut kam hote hain.
ek s'er ahgur kd kyd lete hain.
wuh bahut achchhd shikari hai"
Uske pas sdhib logon ki dar-
janoh chitihidn hain.
turn kabhi waqt par nahih ate.
usko ko,i paune ghante men
jdkar hosh dyd.
mujhe ma'lum hai ki mujh*>. kya
karnd hai.
uskd gala baith gayd hai.
bateii karte karte uskd gala
baithgayd hai (or, uski drvdz
bharrd ga}i hai.
umed hai ki dp bhulehge nalnn
kyohki yih bahut zaruri hai.
wuh pakkd muldzim hai yd
kachchd ?
ivuh abhi umedwdr hai aur kdm
sikh rahd hai.
tumhen aisi bat nahih karm
chdhiye.
tumhen aisi bat nahih karni
chdhiye thi.
Qaht. (m.) = famine (in Panjabi « kal ').
Imperative for *' must." ' Chahiye ' is weaker.
To lose voice or to become hoarse = (ka) gala baithna.
Apprentice = umedwar.
tumhdrd kdm bnhut //ichh< //*//.
koshish karke ise sdf karlu.
war n't mni/n t»m}idri '' rajtot '
karni pafegi.
wuh bat ka l pakkd liai, jo knhtn
hai use purd kartd hai.
I 561
i- N quite different key, yih aur hi chdbi hai, us tale ko
t wnn't tit the lot-k. nahin lagegi.
iave fever since two o'clock mujhe kal do baje se bukhdr hai.
lav.
mail day to-day and dj waldyati dak kd din /// /
office did not close till daftar sham ke sat baje ink
7 p.m. Mul'l
Your work -is in arrears, you
must try to clear it or 1
shall have to report against
you.
He is a man of his words and
never fails to fulfil his pro-
mises.
1 1 would be very inconvenient agar wuh apni bat se *
if he went back on his word. to bari khardbi hogi.
There is no doubt that if he is men shak nahin ki ayar wuh
had been at the head of is kdm kd muntazim8 hotd
this enterprise it would not (or agar is kdm kd intizdm
ha ve failed . uske hath men hold) to ndkdm •
yabi na hoti.
fit/ar turn us ko paJtle samjhd
dete (or, apar turn usko peshtar
dgd/i * kar dete) to yih ghalti
na hoti.
Wuh kabhi sawdl kn *idhd
jawdb nahin detd.
wuh sard mayhrur hai nahlii t<>
waiseuskd ckStchalon achchhd
hai.
DelR se kaunsi jaga nazdikhai,
Kasauli yd Simla?
' luimdre fdth achchhi tar ah
pesh d,e (or, Sdhib ne hamdre
sdth achchhi tarah suluk kiyd) .
isko koshi^ti knrkr uthd.o (<T
isko uthdne ki kosh\sh karo).
ll.i'l ;<>u uanirfl him before-
hand the mistake would not
have occurred.
H'- nr\<T nivi-ft a straight
an^ver to a question.
M is a bit proud otherwise
his Character is good.
\Vhi< -h i- nearer to Delhi,
Ka-auli 01 Simla ?
^ahib treated us w. II
Tr> t«. lilt tin- in.
1 But ka pakkS = true to OIIC'K promiau (lit. tirm <*t u
* Bat ie phirjana = to go back on one's words.
•' Mmttazim — manager. * A'juh — informed, warned.
71
562
I want to say something to
you.
I have to explain a lot to you.
God knows whether this is true
or not.
Are you joking with me or are
in earnest ?
We have very little time and
must hurry up.
This man has long hair like
that of Sikhs.
He grew pale through fear.
This is not the case in England.
These are quite different.
I am always mindful of this
fact.
What is curious about this is
that he did not raise any
objection.
I do not like this.
He is very apprehensive about
the result of his examination.
I am very sorry for this.
T feel very sorry for him.
It is a disgraceful thing.
It is a very sad thing (or it is
a pity).
This is no laughing matter.
Main turn se kuchh kahna
chdhtd huh (or, mujhe turn se
kuchh kahna hai).
mujhe tumko bahut l kuchh sam-
jJidnd hai.
Khudd jane sach hai yd jhut
(or, ihik hai ya nahln).
hahsi karte ho yd sach much ?
waqt bahut tang hai, jaldt karo.
is ddmi ke bdl'2 Sikhon ke se
lambe hain.
dar ke mare uskd rang (or uske
chihre Tea rang] zard hogayd.
waldyat men aisd nahm hold (or
yih bat nahm hofi).
in men bard farq hai (or yih
bilkul mukhtalif hain) .
mujhe har waqt yih bat ydd rahtl
hai.
'ajib bat to yih hai ki us ne ko,i
i'atirdz na kiyd.
mujhe yih pasand nahm.
usko imtihdn ke natlje kd bard
ahdesha (or dar} hai.
mujhe iskd bard afsos hai.
mujhe uski nisbat bard afsos
hai.
yih ban sharm ki bat hai.
bare afsos ki bat hai.
yih ko,i hahsi Tci bat nahm.
1 Bahut kuchh = a good deal, considerable ; but ' kuchh bahut nahlh ' =
not much, in no way much.
2 * Bal' is singular if only one hair is meant. If more than one hair is
meant it is treated as plural.
563
What diseahe have you ?
What has happened to you ?
What ,ire you grieved about ?
He is seriously ill.
It is no trifling matter: it is,
in my opinion, a very serious
affair.
What business had he there ?
He has some business with
you, sir.
This is the case everywhere.
Why do \oii always feel dis-
posed to quarrel with me
over trifles.
Sir, I am sorry for having
committed this fault this
t iine, pray forgive me, there
will be no recurrence of it
in future.
We hid ourselves in a thick '
forest.
This paper is too rough and
thick.1 Show me a smooth
and thin one.
This cloth is too coarse,1 show
IIH* one of finer texture.
ly the soup is very thick.
It was very thin yrstml
It is not at all hot here <
pared with Multan.
Although <!<l«-i t:
n no sense, of advanced
age.
II is not in his right senses.
What relation is he of yours ?
tumko kya btmdri hai?
iumko kya hu,d hai ?
tumko kya ranj (or ghfim) Jiai ?
tvuh sakht bimdr hai.
yih ko,l thcri bat nahin, mere
khiyal men yih bahut bar* bat
hai.
usko wahdn kya kdrn thd ?
Jandb, usko dp se (or ke sdth)
kuchh kdm hai.
har jaga (or har kahin) yihi hai
hai.
turn kyon har waqt thort thorl
bat par mujh se larne ko tdyyar
hojdte ho ?
huzur, ab main yih qusur kar
tfid hun, mu'af farma,iye,
ayindah aisa na hoga.
ham ek ghane (or ghanddr)
jangalmen chhipgaye.
yih kaghaz bahut khurdura aur
moid Jiai. Ko,\ sdf aur palld
namuna dikhd,o.
yih kapfd bahut gaf (or
hai), ko,i bank (or patla)
namuna dikltd.o.
dj shorba bahut gdflia hai.
•
/-. muqdbale men to
h kuchh bhi yarml nahin
go mujh se barn h>tl /• kin kuchh
Kir kd na/ih'i.
uske hosh thikdne nah :
wuh tumhdrd kyd hold hai (or
lagtd ha i) .
1 Thick (coais*-, fnt; = mo liage
station) = gltanS or ghandar - gaf or >/
564
They can put up no fight
against Sikhs.
To say nothing of his igno-
rance he is proud too.
He has been married a long
time now.
The train must have arrived
at the station.
Mind your own business, you
meddler.
He will be here in a few
seconds.
A few seconds more and he
will be dead.
They can't come to an unani-
mous opinion.
He deliberately pretended to
be mad.
He died of cholera.
Don't you feel ashamed ?
He deceived us by his lying.
1 have been waiting for you
for the last three hours.
Repeat this after me.
I want to say something to
you privately.
Every one has his own method.
Life is dear to every one.
He is very selfish.
He is a great expert.
wuli Sikhoh fee sdth kyd larenge ?
(or nahih laj- sakte).
ndddn to ek taraf wuh maghrur
bhl hai.
uskl shddi kab kl ho chukl hai.
par
gdri zarur " Station
pahunch ga.i hogi.
turn apnd kdm karo, turn kaun
ho main ' Wiwah ma khwdh.
wuh ko.i dam men yahdh dyd
chdhtd hai.
wuh ab ko,i dam kd mihmdn
hai.
unki rd,e nahm milti.
wuh jan bujh kar dlwana (or,
pa gal) bangaya.
wuh haiza karke (or haize se)
mar gay a,
tumko sharm nahm all.
us ne hamko jhut bolkar dhoka
diyd.
main tin ghante se tumhdri rah
dekh raha huh (or tumhdrd
intizdr kar raha huh}~
jaise main Icahtd huh waise
hi turn bhl mere pichhe pichhe
kahe ja,o.
main akele (or alag) turn se
kuchh kahna chahta hun.
har ek kd apnd apnd tarlqa
hai.
jdn sab ko piydri hai.
wuh ba^d kkud-gfaarz * (or
matlabi) hai.
wuh bard ustdd 8 hai.
1 Lit. * who are you ? ' I (arn) will-he-nill-he.
2 gbud-gharz or matlabj — selfish. fl Literally ' teacheiv1
turn ko kaun puchhta hat ?
u&ka sir kuchh phim hu,a Jisii
(or uski 'aql thik whin).
inn iih .<?e mitha bolo.
]\ is too late nm\ .
fl. ab wa
gaydt
2. ab bn
(behij
Who cares for you ?
There is some M-IVU loose in
h\< head.
• a civil tongue in \<>ur
head
What arc you dninn '. \- • thing, kya kar rahe ho ? Kuchh n't
I am Dimply seated M you see. yunhi ^tbaithd hun
1. ab waqt (or ///////</a') yuzar
fiai (opportunity lost).
bahut far hoga,t hai
(behind time).
turn mujhe banate ho.
adho ndh banl /»
ham sab hanspare.
ktit-Jth fikar mat karo.
khdtir jama1 raho (or. rakho).
mujhe yih khush-khabri parh
kar baft khushi hu,i.
afsos hai ki turn haindre sath
na th> .
mukhta^ar hai biyan karo (or jo
kuchh hu.a mukhtasar bat-
la,o).
us ne shuru? se akhir tak sab
hnl sunayd.
wuh kdn ka ' kachrha hai.
fnain ne. u-xke salam ka jun^l,
diya.
toub (or achrhha) hu,a /
"/«•
t I n,l n /> k< /xTv
bhrjne k<> t;
"tab k<> a f'lifl (nr
/
You are tr\ ing to make a fool *
of in- .
Divide it half and half.
out laughing.
Don't bother about it.
assured.
I uas exceedingly delighted
to read the happy news.
It i- a pity that you were not
with us.
Tell me briefly what happened.
He related the u hole story
from beginning to end.
He is credulnu-
I his salutation
\\ell that \ou have come.
1 \\as goinj: t«. -end my man
ou.
K\«'i lo\r- \\\^ M\\||
e place.
in tlii- very way.
• Betoaqa/ ' ( = fool) in understood before •• banlte."
Kan Jta IcachchU - credulous. * Knntiinir hoi»iir .•
plft<-e.
566
1 (will) accept it gladly.
I \vas glad to help him.
I shall be glad to come.
Does any one of you volunteer
to go there ?
He owes me thirty rupees.
What interest do you charge ?
I borrowed Rs. 200 @ 5%.
You ought to feel ashamed of
your conduct.
If you follow my advice you
are bound to succeed.
He squandered all his father's
money.
Put it reclining against the
wall.
He is rebellious.
God bless you with a long
life.
For God's sake don't worry
me I am very busy.
By God's grace I am quite
well now.
The facts of the case are
that—
Death is preferable to such
an existence.
He was Plato of his time.
t ise khushl se qubul karta
hun.
mnjhe usko ma-dud dckar baft
khushi hu,l.
main khushl se a ungd.
turn men se ko.i wahdh khushl
se jdnd chahtd hai ?
usko mere tls rupai dene liaih
(or, mujh ko us se Its rupai
lene hain).
turn kyd sud lete ho ?
main ne pdnch fi sad-t sud par
do sau rupai qarz liye.
tumko aisi bat par sharm ant
chdhiye.
agar turn merd kahd manage to
zarur kdmydb hoge.
us ne bap kd sab rupaya urddiyd
(or fallen l kardiyd) .
diwdr se lagd kar rakho.
wuh sarkash * hai.
Khudd tumhdn 'umar dardz *
kare.
Khudd ke waste mujhe dig ma
karo. Mujhe bahut kdm hai.
Khudd ke fazal se ab main
bilkul tandurust hun.
asl bat yih hai ki — (or, sach to
yih hai ki — ).
aise jme (or aisi zindgl) se to
marnd (or maut) bihtar hai.
wuh apne waqt kd Ifldtun thd.
The ship dashed
rock and was
pieces.
against a jahdz chatdn se takrd kar tukre
broken to tukre hogayd
1 Thlkrl = a fragment of pottery ; thikrl karna = to squander.
2 Sarkash = rebellious. * Daraz (Persian) = long.
It • •ontinued to rain for full
two weeks without intermis-
hotl rahi (or j~ul rnhi).
I vi-itrd him daily \\ ithout a
!ap-e (without fail) till he
' rong enough to i:
whole voyage was un-
ntful an i comfor-
tably.
Tli<- bout WBS oxerloaded and
u) on as it started.
The s visited l
violent earthquake on the
ultimo.
Tell me everything in detail.
d not have come in
better time.
There was no time to be lost
we unmed mo-
tored to his residen<
H» eould not restrain liis
anger.
I! i-ould not restrain himself.
me out please before
rdict
He has not come yet but is
•d any minute.
I doubt very much if yon
get this here.
If he come-, well and j
otherwise bring him by
force.
very fond of
polo.
Will ynti be able to
\\ith this ?
jab tat: iruh rJm >
l(i.i<i mi hfK/tu/a main hnr roz
tiila nagba u*(
ralta.
hamam tnni"tn wlnr n ram se
git: fcoj khas bn
JM
•7 ]>ar bojli ~iij~i<i'i1i \li~i
chalte hi ulat ga,i.
picliJtlc mahine H ftaiiflrah tarikh
kf> u* xhahr men sakht (or
zor led) Miuhi-hal l n
sab bat mufassal * baydn k«
turn khub mauqe par ~:
waqt bahut thofd thd aur
fauran 'motor* par .s-
Imbir Hskehdn chale gaye.
wuh glwssc ko zabtz rui
sakd.
us se rahd na gayd.
faisla karne se pahle men sdn
hat s?/n Rfiye.
niagar dyd chnlit't
II il\
hi yahdn n>
7 / to khair, nkur
T.o.
usko polo (khehir) kdb<i
is se kdm (or guzdrn) /
(or zalzala) = earthquake
Mufa^al - in detail, detailed.
/''• karna = to confincate, to restrain oneself.
568
I suspected him from the very
beginning.
I suspected that he \va< ;i
spy-
He was dead drunk.
But the difficulty is that
I cannot get along on this.
Try to manage with this for
the present.
J am very much obliged to
you.
This happened before I can
remember.
I am here to-day also and shall
be off to-morrow.
You cannot compete with him.
He forced me to do it under
threat of dismissal.
m,ujhe shuru' hi se us par
thd.
mujhe shuba hu,d ki with jam*
hai.
wuh nashe men chur thd.
lekin mushkil to yih hai ki is men
merd guzdra nahm ho saktd.
//'/ hai (or. obhi) /.«? men ijuzdra
kar lo.
dpkd bard ih^dtinKivd J huh.
I don't remember.
I cannot remember.
Try to recollect,
Learn by heart.
Bear in mind.
It occurred to my mind.
I suddenly remembered.
There is not much difference
between the two.
He is right.
You are wrong.
You seem to have lost your
wits.
yih bat mere hosh *e i>uhl< ki
hai.
main dj kd din yahdh aur huh
kal chald jd.uhgd.
turn uske sdmne kyd thairoge
(or, nahih ihair sakte}.
us ne mujhe dardyd ki agar na
karoge to tumheh mauquf kar
duhqd tab ndchdr main nr kar
diyd.
mujhe ydd nahm.
mujhe ydd nahm did.
r ydd ko.ro.
ydd rakho.
mujhe khiydl dyd.
mujhe ydd dyd.
(1) un donoh men kuchh bahut
farq nahm.
(2) un donoh men sirf unts W«*
kd farq hai.
uskd Wiayal thlk hai.
tumhdrd khaydl ghalat hai (or
thik nahm).
ma'lum hotd hai ki tumhdri 'aql
man ga.i hai.
Ihsan = favour ; ihsanmafid = obliged.
C7n*» bit ka farq = the difference between 19 and 20.
5f>9
I have no objection whatever.
I do not deny it.
But I do not agree to tin-.
1 -\\eated profusely.
A plan has occurred to me.
tall give you exemplary
punishment next time.
1 am living beyond my income.
Good or bad. t am iroin" to do
it.
< '.»mr \\hat may.
Office work goes on fr«»m
10 a.m. till 6 p.m.
What time u ill the moon rise
to-night '
\v ill be seen to when we
have done this more import-
ant work.
II- ought to be hanged.
Let this custom be kept up
uhiNt I am here.
I shall not forget your kind-
ness as long as I live.
The M< Chills gradually con-
quered the whole of the
jab.
''itinued to read till he
fell a -deep.
rels uiih me .
mujhe ko,\ bhi i'atirdz nahin.
mujhe is se inkar nal> >
Lekin mujhe yth manzur (or
qubul) nahin.
mera badan pasine l ixvtne
hogaya.
mujh* ek tadbir sujhi * hai.
ham dusri da fa hunkr* sakht
8aza denge (or, ai'«? sazd denge
ki logon ko 'ibrat 8 h9g%) .
mera kharch amilani s< ziyatluh
hai.
achchha ho ya kharab main ise
karta to // u it .
kuchh hi ho.
subah ke das baje se sham /••
t'hhe baje tak dftftar ka kaw
rahta I
fij rat chdnd kis wnqt rharh<ga
(or niklega) ?
yih ziyddah zaruri kdm hai, jab
///// f ml it /(I I" n^k" :ft khlt i.
usko phdhsi * dena cfidhiye.
jab tak main yahdh huh ?////
'Inxtur jari rahe.
main marte dm a tak a i>ka ihtdn
nahin bhuluiiaa.
rafta rafta (or hole hole) Muyhloii
ne sard Panjab fat ah kar liyd .
a- n f i irhtesogayd.
wuh d,e din mujh *e jhv
rahldhai.
piration = paginS ; to pernpire = (ko) pa*in& ana.
ol/hna = to light upon after reflection.
* 'Ibrat = warning, foar of crime or sin.
* To hang (a person) = (ko) ph5**i
72
570
It has been raining here lately
and the roads are muddy.
It is rather difficult to give
it up now.
He will stay with us for 3 days
on his way back to Calcutta.
It is now 19 or 20 years since
I saw you last in Quetta.
As you please.
As you think fit.
Thanks to God that we have
at last achieved our object.
This is the first time I have
come to Bombay.
It is all nonsense. I do not be-
lieve it in the least.
One would infer from his
speech that his intentions
are not quite honest.
His cries started me up from
sleep.
This happened quite lately,
about a fortnight ago.
You can take one of them for
yourself.
One of the horses is my own
and the other is provided
by the Government.
He is no stranger.
This is not mine, it belongs to
some one else.
We are trying to forget our
sorrows.
If you ask me I should say
that—.
pirhhle dinoh yahdh barisJt hoii
rahi hai, is waste sarkoh par
bahut kichar hai.
ab usko chhornd zara nm.«/>/cif
hai.
wuh Kalkatte. wdpix jdle Jiu,e
tin din hamdre hah thairegd.
Unis bis sal hu,e haih hi main
ne pichhli da fa dp ko Ko.it a
men dekha thd.
jaise dpki khushi (or. marzi).
jaise_ dp mundsib khiydl far-
md,eh.
khudd kd shukr hai ki dkhir
hamdra matlab purd hogayd.
mainjjih pahll hi da fa Bamba.i
dyd huh.
yih sab bakwds hai, mujhe is kd
zara bhi yaqin nahih.
uski baton se pdyd jdtd hai ki
uski niyat men kuchh khardbl
hai.
uske rone ki dwdz sunkar main
chauhk pard.
yih abhi hu,d hai, ko,i (Jo Jut fie
ki bat hai.
in men se ek khud lelo.
ek ghord merd apnd (or nijkd)
hai aur dusrd sarkdri hai (or
sarkdr se mildhu,d hai).
wuh ko,i g]iair-ddmi nahih.
yih merd nahih, begdna J htii.
ham g^am '2 gkalat kar rahe haih-
agar mujh se puchho to main
kahuhgd ki — .
f Begana (adj.) = not one's own.
2 Qbam f/halat karna = to try to forget sorrows (by drinking, music, etc.).
r.71
a loud laughter, wuh khilkhilak'i
jo kurJih main knhta aai/a n-nh
likhta gay a.
usko itm yaql ka ki t>
ishare l ko samajh leta.
mujhe a/808 hai ki main ne use
'it Art/o?!* (ft.
ninth" khiiyal ai/a fha ki aisa
karun lekin us ne mana' kar-
diya.
I did nnt know what to do. main hairan thd ki kya h»
ur name. us ne tumhara nam lit/a.
\»\\ had bettor withdraw hihtar horja ki him apna ixti'afa
lunation.
I \\niulor whv he is so la to
Hf went on writing to my
dictation.
id not got 84
understand this hint.
_ ; ft having given him per-
mission.
1 thought of doing so but ho
me.
I \\.>?ider if he would like to
come with me or not.
rather a risky undertak-
ing.
uded that he had not
got it.
>ib hai ki us ne ihii derkyon
laga.t.
'7 jane wuh mere sath a,e
ya na a,e.
yih zqra khfii/ hai.
us ne jhut mut
pas nal
ki mere
alone seeing it I have not dekhnarhhor main nc
nahiii
ab yih bai iwhiii /
kOi kurhh kahfa fifii ko.i kitchh.
even heard its name.
is nothing (not sense or
of no consequence).
It i- not so now.
Some peop!f siy one thing,
sonif aunther.
There were only a few people wahan koj
left thei
I is no good at all.
What did you gain l>
I happened ; o l-mL at it .
tha.
iska kuclih in ./•/'.• ////
turn ne is se kya fa.i.ln ntliaya.
ittifaq se meri
part.
i- • -i i titled to a beshak tmth in'am ka mnstahaq
(or ha^dar) Inn.
.; = hint, sit-n. ,1 I ffive li
572
He got angry the moment he
heard this.
I do not know Hindustani
well.
This coat does not fit nie well.
T hope this will not interfere
with your work.
I think there is no harm in
doing this.
This will put him to great
inconvenience (or loss).
What is this used for ?
He is thirsting for your blood.
We kept on talking on different
subjects for some time
After lot of haggling it was
settled for three rupees.
Do you understand ?
I mistook him for your
nephew.
I was under the impression
that he was vour brother.
He did not understand me.
I have explained it to his
satisfaction.
We reasoned with him a good
deal but he would not
listen.
///// xunle hi usko gbussa charh
gayd.
mujhe Hindustani achchhi tarah
nahin dti. ]
yih kot mujhe thik nahin dtd.1
is se dp ke kdm men liar]1 to
nahin hogd.
mere khaydl itieii aisd karne se
kuchh harj nahin hogd.
is men uskd bard harj hog ft.
yih kis kdm 8 did hai ?
wuh tumhdre khun kd piydsd
phirtd hai.
ham kuchh der tak idhar lulhar
ki baten karte rahe.
bahut moljol * • ke ba'd pdnch
rupai par faisla hu,d.
samjheb (or samajh gaye, or
samjhd, or samajh liya) ?
main g&alti se use dpkd bhalijd
samjhd 6 thd.
main samjhe hu.e thd ki wuh
tumhdrd bhd.i hai (or main
use tumhdrd bhd,i samjhe
hu,e thd).
wuh men bat na samjhd.
main ne use samjhd diyd hai.
ham ne use bahut samjhdyd
lekin us ne elc 6 na suni.
1 ' Ana ' idiomatically means fa) to know, (6) to fit ; in the former sense
it takes its subject in the Dative.
2 ' Harj ' = inconvenience, harm, hindrance.
* * Kam ana ' = to be of use or useful, also to fall in action or in
a noble strife.
* Moljol = haggling.
6 Samajhna = to understand, to take or mistake for, to think, etc.
« Bat understood after * ek.'
573
Don't take it ill (i.e., don't
feel offended at what I have
said).
When dor- the monsoon set
in in this part of the
country ?
The Indians, as a rule, marry
their children verv early in
life.
He \\ ill be dead by the time
you arrive.
I \vas just going to get into
the train when it started.
If you had been a little more
cautious, there would not
have been the least trouble.
1 persuaded him to go.
These people have strange
ways of their own.
If my substitute arrives even
as late ac -lay after to-
morrow I can still reach
there in time.
1 was going along when
suddenly I saw a snake.
Then- i- 'i » dependem-" on
him.
I have no choice in the
matter.
\\ e readied the oinmiit uith
great difh< ulty.
I I catch him Til jrivr him
deserts.
men brit kn hum ><
is 'ildqe men barsdt kd
kab shuru' hotd }.
Hindustani asksar bachrhon In
shddi chhotl umar men kar
diyd karte hain
tumhdre pahunchle pnhtiHrhl*'
wuh mar chukegd.
main gdri par saivdr hone hi ko
tha ki wuh chaldi.
agar turn zara ziyadnh iht
karte to zara bhi takRf na
hotl.
main ne kah sunkar 4 u*ko jane
var razl kar liya.
in logon ke 'a jib dastur ha in
agar merd qd,im maqdm 8 (or
'iwzi) parson tak bh\ djd.e to
bhl mnifi irnhnh u-<i<jl par
pah unch sakln // // /'/
chaltc <•/,(,!(• htfn ,h-kh1d ////// ki
sdnp //'
koti \atibdr (or M"
nahln.
main mnjfuir* ////
ham khudd b khuda k<trk»
par pnhtiiir/n
///'' .'ir pa,un
to maza chnkltnd
i /Aft.vS/. = caution, precaution
• To try t<> pernuade = (se) kahna nunnS ; to persuade
kali runkar razl kar tfiia.
Qatim-matjam - MiibMtitute, official
* Majbur - forced, unable, compelled.
& Khuda khitda kark« (idiom) = with «reat
k' to God).
* (Ko) mazd chalchanZ = to rive «me t >
lit. repeatedly
574
I wish he had come.
T wish he would come.
This custom has been in
vogue for centuries.
This was discontinued five
years ago.
I made a great mistake in
that I did not warn you
beforehand.
The doctor has advised me to
take a change of air.
He is afraid of going there
alone.
They will not give on credit,
they want cash payment.
As no proof was forthcoming
he was discharged.
The price of wheat has risen
considerably of late.
The price of cotton has fallen.
I have seen you after a long
time, where have you been ?
I have made an engagement
with him for 10 o'clock to-
morrow morning.
The eastern wall has cracked
a little.
All are entitled to bhatta.
We disembarked at Karachi.
How long does it take to go
to and come back from
Pindi ?
kdsh ki wuh aid.
kdsh ki wuh d,e.
yih dastur sadion se chald dtd
hai.
yih pdnch sal se band hai.
main ne gjialti ki ki tumhen
pahle khabar na kar dl.
1 Doctor ' sahib ne hawd badalne
ki saldh dl hai.
wuh wahdn akeld jdte hu,e
dartd hai.
wuh udhdr l nahln dete, naqd
qlmat mangle hain.
chunki koi sabut nahin thd is
ll,e wuh rihd * kiyd gay a.
chand dinon se gandum kd
nirkh 3 bahut barh (or charh)
g.ayd hai.
ruji kd nirkh gir gay a hai.
bari muddat ke ba'd tumhen
dekhd hai, kahdn rahe ho t
mujhe kaljubah das baje uske
hdn jdnd hai' (lit. I have to
go to him, etc).
mashriql diwar thon phatga,i
(or, tarakga,i *) hai.
sab bhatte ke haqddr hain. '
ham Karachi men jahdz se
utre.
Pindi due jane men kitni der
lagti hai ?
1 Udhar deria = to give on credit.
* Riha karna — to discharge (an accused for want of proof) ; bar't
karna = to acquit.
* Nirkh = price current, rate.
* Tarakna = to crack (intr.).
575
ol .lust was flying and
nothing was clearly visible.
When does the post go out ?
What day does the English
mail go ?
It will be a holiday on the
4th proximo, it being the
king's birthday.
you set your watch by
the gun to-day ?
I just missed the train.
I missed the train barely by a
minute.
1I«- is rather shy.
He is not ill, he is malinger-
ing.
He was insolent to his
Jamadar.
The load is lopsided.
t onga appears to be some-
what heavier at the back.
rong, add it
ajrain. Six and six make
12 not 11.
How many annas are there to
a rupee ?
1 cannot think what has
happened to him.
Lean the rifle against th-
in that corner.
•^ my coat from that peg.
Will you please read
letter to me ?
bahut gardd ur rahd thd aur
kuchh sd i tour par dikha.
detd tha.
dak kis waqt jati /
waldyati dak kis din jati hai ?
agle mahine H char tdrikh
bddshdh kd janam din l (or H
sdlgirah) hai, is waste ta'atil
turn ne dj ghafi top se mild,i
thil
main gdri par sawdr hote hole
rahgayd.
main sirf ek mini gdri se
pachfiargayd.
wuh kuchh sharmild * sd I
wuh bimdr nahin, bahdnd kar
rahd //'
us ne apne jama'ddr se gus-
tdkhl H.
bojh ek taraf ko jhukd
tdnga zarn /nr/thR taraf uldr
ma'lum hold hai.
tumhdri mizdn* (or jama') ghalat
ma ' It'ii. f'ltir iama'
karo. Chhc aur chin </i~ir<th
nahin bdrah hote hain.
ek rupai ke kitne dne Jiote hain ?
twko
:id /tat.
raft ' ~ir se lagd
hamdrd hot us mekh par latkd
do.
zardyih chilthl jmrh* kar *und
l Janam-din — birthday, talgirah = birthday ; anniversary.
* Sharmila = *hv. Mizun (or ;omo') = total.
* To read (to another person) = (ko) park kar *un5nS.
576
We shall change at Lala Musa
Junction.
I wish I had known this
before.
Will you travel first or second
class ?
The baboo can go in the
intermediate class but all
other servants will go in
the third.
Can you describe the man ?
Don't waste my time.
He did not say this openly, he
merely hinted at it.
The frontier of Nepal is conti-
guous with that of Thibet.
Please write your instructions
in detail.
Please tell me briefly the
purport of this petition.
It must be a fortnight since he
left this place.
Why do you resign ?
Are you married ?
This horse has a sore back.
He has a good eye for horses.
The bargain has been settled
and I have given him five
rupees as earnest money
also.
The horse kicked him.
ham Lala Mum ' junction ' par
dusrl gdfi men sawdr honge
(or Lala M 11*0 ' jnnrtintt " par
gar I badlegi).
kdsh mujhe yih pahle ma'lunt
hold.
dp awwal darje men jd,ehge yd
dusre men ?
bdbu sdhib darmiydne darje
men jd sakte hai lekin bdqi
sab naukar tisre darje men
jdehge.
turn us ddml kd hulya1 Ixitld
sakte ho?
hamdrd waqt zd,ia' mat karo.
u-s ne yih khule four par nahih
kahd, sirf ishdra kiyd thd.
Naipdl aur Tibbat ki sarhad
milti hai.
jo kuchh dp chdhte hain mujas-
sal likh dijl,e.
is 'arzl kd mukhtasar matlab
mujhe samjhd dijiye.
usko yahdh se gaye hu.e do hn/fe
hogaye honge.
turn kyon isti'afd dete ho ?
tumhdn shddl huj, hai ?
is ghore H pith lagi hu,i hai (or
is ghore ki pith par Idgd lagd
hu,d hai).
usko ghofoh ki achchhi pahchdn
hai.
saudd 'z hogayd hai aur main ne
use pdhch rupai bai'dna* bhv
dediyd hai.
ghore ne uske lat mdri.
Hulya = description of a person.
ffauda — bargain. 3 Bai'&na — earnest money.
577
The bullock gored him.
Did you see him fall or after
he'had fallen ?
fort commands the cit
The mm i IK I overlooks the
bridge.
I have known him for a long
tin
You are charged with theft.
H \\a< tried and acquitted.
.'u-t listen t<> me.
He caught cold.
1 have got cold
l> In awake or asleep ?
He is very proud of it.
Have you any influence with
him'?
Can you give me any idea of
it- price ?
I had got into a terribl
Imt thank (iod I escaped
scot-free.
i < iod that is a very nice
suggestion indeed.
He has made a great name for
himself.
bail ne uske sing mdrd.
him ne use girtr hu,c dekha tha
yd gira h" <1
qiVe se shah r jmr mar hosakti
hai (or shahrqiVe Id w~tr
hai).
us tile ' se pul naz/ir aid hai.
usko muddat se jdnta
turn par ilzam * yih hai hi turn re
>rl In (or turn par chori ka
ilzam lftf/(tf,a gaya hai).
us par ntii'in-l-l'ima hn:n
wuh ban
zard men bat sunna.
usko zukdm* laggayd
lagga,i).
• ko zukdtn lagd hu.d (or
{hand lagt hu,l) /
wuh jdgtd hai yd soya hu.n
usko iskd bard fakhar4 hai.
uske sdth tumhdra A-//.7/// rnsukh 5
hai? (or with /////////7/T bat
k tic It i /'
a i> (ft kh minan 6 (or nil-
iskl kuchh q\mat n/<
main ek mkjit mushkil men
phans U'oj'i //"7, lekin khmlii
led
•'// to bah 11 1 ' a /,»/< i
tajwiz hai.
us ne bafd nam paidd kiwi
'IH s mound.
. n = accufiation, blame. * Zuk&nt = r»|.l r .nning of the noee).
4 Fakhar — honorable pride. s Ru*Skh — influence.
f Takhminan (or atdazan) = approximn t
578
No movement of his (i.e.,
nothing he does) is void
of policj7.
You might send it to-morrow
if it is not inconvenient.
He was appointed arbitrator
in that dispute
He has sprained his ankle
Forced labour is forbidden by
the Government.
He is not a friend of mine, we
merely know each other by
sight.
There is all the difference
between gold and lead.
He is devil of a sleeper.
He is a wolf in sheep's
clothing.
How is it that you are here !
(i.e., you and of all places
here!)
He is holding the whole
country into a state of
discomfort and anxiety.
He is building castles in the
air day and night.
Say only what you saw with
your own eyes and not what
you heard from others.
He has disgraced himself
uski koj, chdl (muxkdkoi kam)
hikmat se khdll nahih.
agar taklifnahoto kal bhejdend.
wuh us jhagre men sdli$ l
muqarrar hu,d thd.
uske takhne ko moch * dga,l hai.
Sarkdr ki taraf se begdr 8 mana9
hai.
wuh merd dost nahin, sirf jdn
pahchdn hai.
kahdn sond kahdn sikkd.
wuh bald * Ida sonewdld hai.
wuh bagld b bhagat hai.
turn yahdh kahdn I
us ne tamdm mulk ko tang kar
rakhd hai.
wuh din rat khayali puld,o6
pakdtd rahtd hai.
sirf dhkhon dekhi bat kaho,
sum sundl bat mat kaho.
us ne apm dbru 1 (or 'izzat) khdk
men mild 8 di hai.
J Salts = arbitrator.
2 Moch (f.) = sprain. » Begar = forced labour (f ).
* Bala ka = terrible, devil of a, marvellous.
* Bagla bhagat = hypocrite (lit. saintly heron: allusion to the habit of
the bird, which stands silently motionless, while watching for its prey,
looking all the while as if it were meditating on holy things).
6 Khayali pida.o pakana = to build castled in the air (lit. to cook
imaginaiy dishes). T Abril (f.) = honor.
H KJbak meb milaria = to cause to mingle with the dust, to ruin, to
destroy.
579
- a very long and sad
story.
I think it is due to misunder-
standing.
ii we recovered from the
fatigue of the journey.
Creditors are pressing me
for payment.
We shall settle it between
ourselves.
At a bend of the road our cars
collided and we were all
hurled into the khud below.
The whole place was inundated
with water.
This dashed all our
against the wall.
hopes
///// bahut lambd aur pur-dard
qissa hat,
mere khiyal men yih
fahml ' ki waja se hai.
jab (hamko) rdste In thakdwat se
dram hu.n.
mere qarz-khwdh* taqdza1 kar
rahe hai.
liam khud nipat* lenge.
mrak ke ek mor par hamdrl
gdrldn takrdgajn aur ham
sab ke sab niche khad m>
pare.
char on taraf pdni hi pdnl thd.
is se hamdrl sab umedon kd
kfeun hogaya (or par pdni
phirgayd).
dp khwdh ma khwnh zabardastl (
karte hain.
salon yihl hdl rahd yahdn tak
ki Ldt "'Curzon" $dhib dye
aur naqsha badal diyd.
uski dekhd9 dekhl sab karne lag
pare,
hamdre mazhab men shardb plnd
hardm 7 hai.
tumhdre mazhab men (or ke ru
se) gosht khdnd haldl 8 hai ?
hamdre 'ildqe -.men bard saildb 9
dyd thd aur tamdm fasal
l&ardb hogaye.
= misunderstand ing
Qarzkhyah = creditor ; qand&r = debtor.
Taqazft karna = to demand insistently, to importune.
iVipofna = to be finished or settled.
Zabardastl = high-handodnesi. « Ki dtkha dtkhl = in imitation of
Haram = religiously forbidden. < HaUU = religiously permissible.
ub = flood.
You are forcing things against
reason.
This state of things continued
for years until Lord Curzon
came and changed their
aspect.
All set themselves to imitate
It N aur-iin-t our religion to
drink wine.
I- it JM rmi^ible, according to
your religion, to eat meat ?
A great flood visited our part
of the country and all the
crops were spoilt.
580
Granted that it is cheap but it
is not durable.
I intended to go but have
since changed my mind.
I \vould not do it but he forced
me to do it.
I could make no impression on
him at all.
Don't lose this opportunity.
As soon as he heard the news
he was dismayed beyond
description.
Are they all alike or is there
anv difference in them at
alf?
I suppose it must be so (can't
be helped).
The current was so strong that
it washed the bridge clean
away.
There is a strong rumour
that — .
Let us see whether it comes to
pass or not.
All of them were left gazing
at one another's faces (in
surprise, sorrow or shame).
However hard you try I don't
expect you will succeed.
sasta to hai magar bahut cfrr
chalegd J nahin.
pahle merd jdnekd irdda thd
lekin ab nahin.
main khud nahin kartd tha lekin
us ne mujhe majbur* kiyd.
men bat kd us par kuchh Ihi
asar 8 na hu,d.
yih mauqa' hath se mat do.
yili khabar sunte hi wuh aisd
ghamgin* hu,a ki knchh nab
puchho.
wuh sab ek se (or yaksan) hain
yd un men kuchh farq bhi hai ?'
mere khaydl men iskd ko,i 'ildj
nahin.
pdm kd Una zor tM ki pul ko
sdf bahd legayd.
afwdh garm hai ki — .
dekhiye ho ki na ho.
wuh sab ek dusre kd munh
dekhte rah ga-e.
kitm hi koshish karo mujhe
umed nahin ki turn kdmydb
I hear that they cannot pull main ne sund hai ki unki 6 dpas
on together. men banti nahin.
If he goes, let him go, I don't agar jdtd hai to jane do, meri
care a rap. bald 1 se.
1 Chalna = to last.
* Asar = effect, impression.
5 (Ki) kuchh na puchlw =
(because it is indescribable).
6 * Bat ' understood after « unki,'
^ (KI) bala #e •= hang it, I (you, he, etc.) don't care.
^ M w) 'bur karwi = to compel.
* Qhamgln = sad.
(that) don't ask me anything about it
581
H> Turned out to be absolutely
different to what I believe'd
him to be.
He agreed but after lot of
persuasion.
You ought not to have done
thi< such an action is not in
kee|tiii'_r \\ith the dignity of
itive Officer.
It was r.'.ining cats and dogs.
There have been many land-
slips on the Simla road.
The Police force was not suffi-
cient to check them and
troops had to be called from
the fort
According to the last census
the population of India has
increased.
Indians have made rapid
strides in education and
wealth during the British rule.
Railways have made commu-
nication by land quicker,
easier and cheaper.
If you are hoping for promo-
tion your conduct must im-
prove considerably
The money was raised by sub-
scription in the regiment.
He stammers a little.
He is shy of speaking.
.Small-pox is raging in Delhi
this vear.
main use tcya san- ~i thd
aur wuh kyd nil;
main ne us se bahut kuchh kaha
sund jab jdkar us ne mdnd (or
man to gid lekin bari qil-o-qdl
ke ba'd).
n/> ko aisa nahin chdhiye tJid-
aisi bat sarddr In shan* ke
musld dhdr bdrish ho rahi thi.
Simla In sarak ka,i jaga se
tutga.i hai.
' police ' unko rokne ke liye kdfi
nahin th\ is liye fauji sipdhi
q\Ve se mangwdne pare.
pichhK rnardum s-shumdri lc>
ru se Hindustan H dbddi *
bar hi hu,i hai.
Hindu-station ne angrezi raj men
td'lim aur daulat men bahut
inl 'I taraqqi In hai.
rel H waja se dmad-o-raft pahle
se ziyddah tez, dsdn aur sasii
ho ijn.l hai.
agar turn taraqqi In ummid
rakhte ho to pahle chalchtdan
ko bafiut kuchh thik karo.
wuh rupaya paltan se chanda 6
karke jama' kiyd yd yd (hd.
wuh zard rukkar bat kartd (or,
tvtldtd*) hai.
wuh bolte hu,e shanndtd hai.
is sal D /(• kd
bahut zor hai
1 Shan (I.) = dignity. * Ke «A*y3n = befitting, becoming.
8 Mordum-thumorl = oenaun. * Ab&di = population.
& ChoAda = Hubncription ; chanda barna = to collect
4meA) chanda dena = to nubacribe to.
« Tutlana, to atamroer. to lisp.
582
The last weekly report shows
375 deaths and 219 new
cases.
What is the average of the last
three years ?
There was a serious railway
accident near Peshawar : a
passenger train ran into a
goods train, the latter was
derailed and several carriages
took fire.
I had hardly set foot outside
the room when the roof fell
down.
He is a nuisance in the Can-
tonment.
Munshi, can you give me any
idea of its price ?
pichchleJmffe ki rnpot sc ma'lum
hoi a hai ki tin sau pacJth attar
ddmi marga,e aur do *mi
unnis nu.e bimdr hn,e.
pir.Jihle. tin salon ki aust ' ki/a
hai ?
Peshawar ke nazdik rel kd ek
sakht hddisa * hogid ; ek musd-
fir cjdri mdl gari sc takrd
ga,i mal gan pain* se utar-
ga.i aur ka.l gar i on ko ag lag
gaj.
main kamre se bahir qadam
rakhne na paya tha ki chhat
gir part.
wuJi chha,om bhar men shararti
admi hai.
Munshi ji, dp batla sakte hai ki
is ki qimat andazan kya
hogi ?
Military Sentences.
Enrolment Questions.
What is your name ?
What is vour father's name ?
tumhara ndm kyd hai ?
bdp kd ndm ?
What is your religion, caste or Hindu ho yd Musalmdn ? Zdt
tribe ?
What is your village. Thana.
and district?
Tehsil
Have you ever been impri-
soned ?
Are you at present employed
in any army ?
Have you ever served in the
army before ?
Which force ?
kyd hai ?
ghar kahdh hai ? Gd,oh ka ndm ?
Thana ? Tahsil ? Zila ?
kdbhi gaid hu,e ?
is waqt kisi fauj men naukctr
ho?
kabhi pahle fauj men naukri ki f
kis fauj men ?
= average ; ausfan = at an average.
2 Hadisa = accident. 3 Patrl = railway line.
Why were you discharged from
there ?
Did you receive any gratuity
<>r pension ?
Have you truly stated the
whole of your former ser-
vice ?
Are you in receipt of any
allowance from Govt. ?
What for ?
Are you willing to be enrolled
in the 25th Panjabis ?
Are you willing to go wherever
ordered, by land or sea, and
allow no caste usage to
interfere with your milit
duty ?
Are you willing to be perma-
nently transferred at any
time when necessity arises,
to any corps of the group to
which the corps in which you
are then serving belongs ?
Are you willing to be vaccin-
ated ?
! )< > you agree to be revaccin-
o-ted, if need be ?
\r« you willing to serve until
discharged provided His
Majesty shall solougrequin-
your services ?
Are you willing to serve till
the termination of this war ?
Are you willing to serve for
3 years from to-day ?
What is your age ?
wahah se nvm kis waste katd ?
kuchh in'dm yd pinshan //? ill '
pahli naukri In bdbat jo kucJih
tumne kahd, sab sack hai ?
Sarkdr se koj ' launs ' milia hai ?
'.
turn pachchis nambar paltan men
khushi se bharti hond chdhle
ho?
jahan Sarkar huhn degi, khush-
H ' ho yd tari* jdnd hogd, aur
naukri men zat pat kd 'uzr 8
nahih sund jdte(/a : innn%ur
hai?
jab zarurat hogi tumko tumhdre
bere ke sdth ke kisi dusre bere
men badal diyd jd,egd ; »/
kail
tiled lagwdnd man%ur hai ?
agar zarurat ho to phir tikd lag-
wand manzur hni '
jablak Sdrkar ko tumhdri zarura
hogi, naukri karni
hai ?
is lard, I ke khitam hone tak
naukri /.- imri inanur hai ?
dj AC lekar tin sal tak naukr
karnd manzur hai ?
ir kyd hai?
Literally " dry MM.'
' L'tr = excuse.
Literally
584
Have you got any identifica-
tion marks ?
Height ?
Chest measurement >
Minimum measurement ?
Maximum measurement ?
Have you got any disease ?
(I hope not).
Any other defect ?
How many dots are there ?
Close your right eye.
Now close your left eye and
open the right eye.
Breathe in and retain it there
for some time.
Stand upright.
Run. Walk slowly.
Raise this arm up.
Let that one go down.
Take off your clothes, all ex-
cept your trousers. 6
Are you subject to epileptic
or other fits ?
Are your parents alive ?
Have they got any disease ?
Of what disease did your
father die ?
At what age ?
tnni/idre badan par ko,t dagh '
(or khas nishdn) * hai ?
unchd,i (or lambd.i] kitni hai ?
chhafi kitni hai ? (or chhdti kd
nap ?)
chhotd nap ?
bard nap ?
tumko ko,i bimdri to nahlh hai ?
ko,i aur nuqs ? 8
kitne, nuqte* hain ?
da, in dnkh band karo.
ab bd.in dnkh band karo aur
dd.ih kholo.
ahdar ki taraf sans lo aur kuchh
der roko ?
sidhe khare ho.
dauro. Ahistd dhistd chalo.
yih bdzu upar uthd.o.
usko niche jane do.
pdjdme 6 ke siwd sab kapre utdr-
do
mirgi6 yd kisi aur bimdri kd
daura 7 to nahlh hold ?
tumhdre man bap zihdah (or
jite) hain ?
unko ko,l bimdn hai ?
tumhdrd bap kis bimdri se mard
thai
kis 'umar men.
1 Dayh — scar, blot, spot. 2 NishSn =mark.
3 Nuqft •=• defect.
* Tikka — dot (Panjabi) ; tikke, plural.
& Pajama = trousers. Sheet wound round the lower part of the body is
called " dhoti " in the case of a Hindu and 4< tahmat " in the case of a
Mohamadan.
6 Mirgl = epilepsy. 7 Daura •= fit, tour.
e you ever had (1) Gonor-
rhoea, (2) Syphilis, (3) Rheu-
matism, (4) Phthisis, (5) Hec-
tic fever, or (6) Asthma?
kablii tumko (1) suzak, (2)
atishak, (3) ^inlhfffl, (4) sil,
(5) tap '//'/. i/a (6) dame In
btmari to nnhiii I
n rilling.
your head upright.
Look straight to the front.
Kr.-p your shoulders back a
little.
Keep the hands open.
Keep your fingers straight.
Don't bend down.
n the body straight.
Raise up your head a little.
Lower your left shoulder a bit.
• your heels together.
Keep the front parts of your
feet apart from each other.
Take the left foot backward.
Keep your elbows close to
your body (touching it).
Don't look about.
Let your arms hang down
Advance together in one line.
i <till. Don't move.
I ' it talk to each other.
Don't laugh.
Why do you smile ?
Don't smoke cigarettes.
I )« >n't spit MII \]\i> g
sir sidfid upar ko rakho.
sidha samne ko dekJio.
kandhon kothord jnchh<
A nil nil ko khuld rn felt o .
unglian stdhi rakho.
niche ko mat jhuko.
badan ko sidha rakho.
sir thofa upar karo.
bayah kandha thofa
karo.
en mila,o.
panje l khule
niche
n pa, on pichhe leja,o.
badan k< *fith lag\ hu,
rakko*
idhar u<1hnr mat dckho.
bazuon ko niche rahne (or
latakne} do.
ek lain men tnilkar (or ikatthc
or ek sdth) ' advance ' karo.
chup chaj> khnrc raho. Hilo
i n at.
ek dusre se bat mat karo.
A////.VO //////.
turn kyon muskarate 8 /
sigret mat pl,o.
zamin par mat th
'i = forepart of hand or foot, paw. claw.
" Kuhnl = elbow.
* Muskarana = to smile. *
74
to iipit.
586
Stop moving about in the
ranks.
Come forward.
Don't lag behind.
Step out a little.
Keep the chest forward.
Keep your fingers closed.
Don't stiffen it.
Keep your neck erect.
Don't halt without orders.
Keep the back of the hand
outward.
Don't lean on your rifle.
Keep the wrists straight.
Close up to the right.
Each of you extend to five
paces.
Carry the right foot slightly to
the right.
Carry the left leg 3 inches to
the rear.
Carry the left foot 12 inches
to the left.
Keep 4 feet distance from the
man in front of you.
Keep the legs 20 inches
apart.
Keep the weight of the body
equally balanced on both
feet.
Bring both the heels smartly
together.
• rnnh ' men idhar wHiar
ph iro.
aye d,o.
'pichhe mat mho.
zard qadam barhd,o.
chhdlt age ko rakho.
unglldn band rakho.
akrd,o ' mat.
gar dan sidhi rakho.
hukm ke bag&air ' halt ' mat
karo.
hath ki pith * bdhir ko rakho.
raft par tek s mat lagd,o.
kald.idn * sidhi rakho.
dd,en ko ' close ' karo (or nazdik
nazdik hojd,o).
sab pdnch pdnch qadam ( ex-
tend ' karc.
day an pd,on thorn dd,m taraf
lejd,o.
bd;ln tang tin 'inch' pichhe
lejd.o.
bay an pd,on bdrah ' inch ' (or
ek ' foot ') bdjn taraf lejd,o.
sdmne wale ddmi se cJidr jut dur
raho (or char fut kd fdsila
rakho) .
tang en bis ' inch ' alag rakho.
badan kd bojh donon pd,on par
bardbar rakho.
donon endn jhatpat 6 (or phurti
se) mild'o.
1 Akrana = to stiffen (tr.). 2 pith (or pusht) = back (f.).
8 \ke "- h) ^k Ia9"n" = to lean against. * Kala.i = wrist.
^ Jhatpat = at once ; phurti ae — smartly, with alacrity (' chatak
is also often used by the sepoy).
587
Don't stamp your feet on the
ground.
I 'alms of the hands should
be turned towards the
thighs.
.Move smartly on the word of
command.
Xow listen carefully and
wait for the word of
command.
Platoon commanders will
stand two paces in front
of their platoons.
<>n the command ''Quick
march" the first pace will
be a full one
Section commanders must see
that their sections keep step
and keep their dressing.
When the whistle sounds
every one will look towards
the section commander.
When I give the signal to
advance, no man will move
until my hand has dropped.
On the command " Double
march " Section comman-
ders will lead their sections
to their places.
No man will fall out or drink
from his water bottle
without orders.
Instructors (or N.C.O '•) will
inspect their squa-l ml
pd,on zamln par zor se maf
mdro.
hathelidh ' ranoti * In taraf
rakho (or, rahrii chahlyen).
jab hukm mile phurli se k~im
kfiro.
ab dhiydn 8 dekar (or. /
karke) suno aur hukm kd
inti%dr karo.
1 platoon commandar ' do do
qadam apnl apm ' platoon '
ke age khare honge,
7 '/ irk march ' ke hukm par
pahld qadcim lamba hogd (or
hond chdhlye).
'ion commander ' de.khtt
rahen ki unke apne apne
' Section ' kd qadam mild
hu,d aur ' dresi ' thik ho.
jab sttl* baje to sab a<lml
' Section commander' kit
dekho.
jab ham l advance ' kd ishdra
karen to jubtak hamdrd h~ifh
niche na gire, kott ddml apnl
jaga se mat hilo.
• Double march ' ke hukm par
' Section commander ' apne
apne ' section ' ko n/>//7 .////j?
jaga lejd,enge.
hukm ke baybair ko,i ddml
1 fatt'Out (or alay) nahin hogd
aur na botal (or kupj*)* se
pant pi,egd.
sikhdnewale (or 'uhdedar) *
apne apne ' squad ' ko dekhenge
I Hathell = palm of hand. * R&n « thigh.
x Dhiyan = attention, con tern plat i
* Siti bojana = to whittle.
* Kuppi (Panjabi) = a can with a small mouth or narrow nook.
588
see that pagris are properly
tied, .puttees put on correctly
and shorts not too long.
N.C.O.'s (or Instructors) will
see that all buttons on shirts
and kurtas are fastened.
Is there any parade to-
morrow ?
What times do you go on
parade ?
How many parades are there
each dav ?
/•/' luiki pagridh aur pattiaii
thik bandhi hu,i hon aur
jdngiye1 bahut lambe (or niche)
na hon.
'uhdeddr (or sikhldnewdle) dekh-
enge ki sab qamizon aur
kurton ke batan lage hu e hon .
kal ko,i pret hai 9
turn kis waqt pret par jdte ho ?
har roz kitni preten hoti hain ?
Who takes the morning subah ki pret kaun leta hai \
parade ?
What time is the Adjutant's
parade ?
The parade ground is wet
to-day on account of last
night's rain.
fJow many men are absent
from the parade ?
Report the absentees to the
Adjutant.
Bring them up to-morrow
before the C.O.
Ajttan sahib ki pret kis vjaqt
hai (or hott hai ?}
pichhll rat ki barish ke sabab se
pret ki zamin sab gili hai.
kitne admi pret se g&air hdzir
hain ?
At what time will the parade
be dismissed ?
Fall in the D. Coy.
There will be the General's
parade day after to-morrow.
There will be kit parade
to-morrow. See that every
thing should be scrupulously
clean and tidv.
jo gjjfair hazir hain un sab ki
rapot ajitan sahib ko koro.
kal unko kamdn afsar sahib ke
sdmne pesh karo.
pret kis waqt hochukegi ? (or
khatam or 'dismiss' hogi ?).
"'D' Company" ko Jalam*
karo.
parson jarnaili pret hogi.
kal ' kit ' pret hogi, sab chiz
bilkul sdf aur thik thdk ho.
1 Shorts = jahgiya (Panjabi).
2 To make to fall in (tr.) = falam karna; to fall in (intr.)
hona.
falam
The parade ordered for to-
morrow is off, there will
be a battalion parade in
the afternoon instead.
The Adjutant gives us lot of
trouble at these parades.
is always untidy in his
dn
The Regt. will <:<> on a route
march to-morrow.
it i- :2n m\\(>< both wa
Thi- ir. -uTs accoutrement is
hadlv put on.
lieddini' i> liadly rolled.
The buckle of the belt should
be exactly in the middle
The strap should be under tin-
right ai
Thi- coat doec .<>u.
It is too tight.
Get it fitted atthetailn: •'- >hop.
•isje it from the store.
Rifle Exercise
the forefinger of the
right hand under the nit off.
left elbow under the
Press the l.utt uith the ritfht
hand,
Thtou the rifle stiMi'.d.' up
with the right hand
Bring the ritle to the right
in front of the !
Grasp the stock uith the left
h.ind immediately m fn,r,t
the m Hi in:
kal ki fjret nahtn hogi,
badle dj do pahr ke bad
' batallion ' /*/•« i hogi.
Ajitan sahib in f)r<t»,,
hamko bahut taklij dete //^
uski wardl a dlill'i '
dhnH rahtl '•
i knl route march ' par
donon taraf bis mil hai, da -
jdna aur das mil iva /
w ddmi kd satnnu thik nahiii
lagd hu,d.
Yih bistra kharab lapeldhu, a hai.
peti kd bakla.3 thik bich men (or
sdmne) hond chdhiye.
tasma dahne bdzu ke niche hond
chdhiye.
yih kot tumko thik (or purd)
nahin nt<l.
yih bahut tang hai.
darzi khdne se thik karwdlo.
1 store ' (or guddm) se badal lo.
and Musk
dd,en Jidth ki pottl! ;/ //'///
off " ke niche rakho.
kuhni* raft ke nicht:
rakho.
' butt ' (or kunde) ko dahn>
sedabtl
rn/f ko (lahtif hnt/i xe jhatkd*
dekar sidhd upnr karo.
•>i/f_ko flahni taraf kulhe* kt
sdmne le,do.
' rtock ' ko * magazine ' se age
Inlhtl nazdik bd,en hath men
mnzbut pakro.
'l'i dhZla = loos.- and baggy, ll
« Arak (Panjal.i). ^ Jhatkn = a jerk.
590
Turn the safety catch complete-
ly over to the front.
Open the cut off, if closed.
First press it downwards with
the thumb.
Seize the knob of the bolt with
the thumb and forefinger.
Now turn it sharply upward.
Draw back the bolt to its full
extent.
Lie down on the stomach with
the legs apart.
Keep the rifle resting on the
ground and the arms extend-
ed to the front.
Keep the body and legs paral-
lel to the line of fire.
Cut away the right hand
smartly to the side.
Keep your thumb to the left
and the elbow well back.
Bring the rifle to the aiming
position.
What are you aiming at ?
Now return to the loading
position.
Keep your eyes on the mark
and the muzzle pointing up-
wards.
Don't press the trigger.
Press the trigger gently.
The magazine must not be
removed from the rifle ex-
cept for cleaning purposes.
Wipe the bayonet thoroughly
before returning it to the
scabbard.
'safety catch' ko bilkul age ki
Id taraf pherdo.
agar 'cut off ' band ho to kholdo.
pahle usko anguthe se niche
dabd,o.
' bolt ' kl ' knob ' anguthe aur
pahli uhgli men pakfo.
ab phurti se upar kl taraf
pherdo.
1 bolt ' ko jahdntak jdsake pichhe
ki taraf khenchlo.
pet ke bal letjd,o aur tdhgen
alag rakho.
raft ko zamin par tikd do aur
bdzu age ko khule rakho.
badan aur tdngen : line of fire '
ke sdth bardbar (or bil muqdbil )
rakho.
daydn hdih phurti se pihlu kl
taraf lejd,o.
angutha bd,in taraf aur kuhni
khzsi pichhe ki taraf rakho.
raft ko ' aiming position ' par
ld,o.
turn kis chiz par shist laga
rahe ho ?
ab ' loading position ' par ho
ja.o.
ankh nishane par aur ' muzzle '
upar ki taraf rakho.
' trigger ' (or lablabi) mat daba,o.
' trigger ' ko dhista dhista dabd,o.
1 magazine ' ko sirf sdf karne ke
waste raft se alag karo, 'age
pichhe kabhi nahin.
miydn men ddlne se pahle
sahgin ko khub sdf karlo.
591
Remove the oil from the blade.
If a cartridge fails to fire try
it in another rifle.
If the rifle is defective or mis-
fires get it examined by the
armourer.
Ammunition should be kept
perfectly dry and clean.
Whilst aiming look straight at
the 6 o'clock point of tin
target.
Your fore-sight is too fine, your
bullet will hit lower.
Your fore-sight is too full, your
bullet will hit higher.
Try to judge the distance by
sight.
nits must learn aiming
well before taking a course
of musketry.
Hold the rifle steadily.
Don't flinch while pressing the
trigger.
I )< ii Tt remove the rifle from the
>houlder during rapid fire.
Mihedar sahib! see that each
man's sight is correct before
he starts firing.
hon't let the rifle incline to
one si'l--.
( Ii ip it tightly or it \\ ill M rikr
sou bang against your
«-e.
The 6 o'clock n.»inf of the
target and the point of tin-
phal se tel punchhdo.1
agar ko,i kdrtus na chair t<>
ri raft men rhaldkar dekho.
agar raft men ko,i nuqs ho yd
fair Ihik na kare to mistri ko
dikha,o.
' ammunition ' ko bilkul sukhd
(or khushk) aur sdf rakhnd
chahiye.
shist lagdte waqt sidhd chdnd ki
chhe baje H jaga H taraf
dekho.
tumhdrd ' fore-sight ' bahut mchd
hai, goR niche lagegi.
tumhdra ' fore-sight ' bahut
unchd hai. goK upar lagegi.
sir f nazar (or dekhne se) fdsila
ka andaza * lagdne H koshish
karo.
chandmdri H sikhlaj * se pahlc
rangruton ko achchhi tftrnh
shist lagana sikhnd chahiye.
raft ko mazbut pakfo.
tri'/ger ' ko dabate waqt daro (or
jhijhko • mat.
• rapid fire ' men raft ko kawlhr
se alag mat karo.
subedar sahib! dp dekhen ki
fair shuru' karne se pahle ?ab
ke sd,it thik hon.
raft ko ek to.af mat jhukne do.
mazbut pakfo nahinHo tardq * se
munh par lagegi.
rh tliul ke chhe baje kijaga. aur
agle sd,it kd sird aur pichhlc
) Pufrhhna = to wipe.
1 Sikhla%l = training.
fc Taraq ft — with a rap or bang.
. < a*d&ta lagana « to estimate.
» Jhijhakna = to flinch, to hoeitafcv
592
fore-sight and the shoulders
of the back-sight should be
in one line.
Keep the butt well embedded
in the shoulder.
Don't fire while the red flag is
up.
Take the first pull-off immedi-
ately after bringing the rifle
to the shoulder.
Did it hit the bull's eye ?
Xo, it was a ricochet.
Don't fire at random.
It has missed the target.
Take a good aim before you
fire.
Don't be excited, shoot calmly.
Try to hit at the bull's eye.
Examine carefully their rifles
and pouches before leaving
the firing point.
Examine their rifles carefully
before they dismiss.
Report their progress to me
ever}7 day.
Is this gun loaded or empty ?
He is a splendid shot.
No one will fire until the
senior officer present gives
the order to fire.
Call each man individually to
the firing point.
Order him to return to his
original position before
calling up the next man.
sa.it ke donoii kinare ek sidh
men hone chdhiye.
' butt ' ko kandhe men $,ub dabd-
kar rakho.
jab Idt jhahdl upar ho to fair
mat karo.
raft ko kandhe ke sdth lagdte hi
pahli dafa ' trigger ' ko thord
khencho.
gulzan men laai ?
nahih uchat kar (or tappd khd
kar) nikalgaj,.
atkal l pachchu mat chald,o.
yih Itjvali ga,l.
fair karne se pahle khub shist
lagd,o.
ghabrd,o mat. Sabar se chald,o.
gulzan par mdrne ki koshish
karo,
' firing point ' se jane se pahle
unlci rafieh aur toshddn
achchhi tar ah dekho.
' dismiss ' hone se pahle unkl
rafleh achchhi tarah dekho.
har roz unke kdm Id hamko
rapot karo.
yih raft bhari hu,i hai yd khdli ?
wuh bahut achchhd nishdna-bdz *
hai.
jab tak dahne wdld afsar, jo
maujud ho, hukm na de koji
ddml fair na kare.
ek ek ko alag alag ' firing point '
par buld,o.
dusre ddmi ko buldne se pahle
isko apnl asli jaga par wdpis
bhejdo.
1 Atkal pachcliu = at random.
2 Nishana-baz — marksman.
593
Don't let the rifle move when
yon fire.
When no firing is taking place
keep the red flag up.
Detail one N.C.O. to assist
him.
He is the worst shot in the
Company.
When will your annual mus-
ketry be over ?
How many rounds have you
fired ?
How many rounds are left
with you ?
Return them into the store.
There will be a revolver
practice next week
They are practising bayonet
fighting.
fair karte waqt raft ko hilne na
do.
jab fair na hold ho to lal /
upar (or, khafi) rakho.
usko madad dene ke waste ek
'uhdeddr kl naukri lagado.
kampnl bhar men uski cha/«l-
mdri sab se khardb hai.
tumhdri sdldna chdndmxri kab
hochukegi ?
turn ne kitne raun<l rhaldye
hain ?
tumhdre pas kitne raund bdqi
hain .'
* store ' men wdpis dedo (or
ddkhil ' karo).
ogle ha/te ' revolver practice '
(or, pistaul H mashq *) hogi.
with sangin ki lafdj In mashq
kar rahe hain.
Recruiting.
Subedar sahib ! I want to send
a recruiting party to Gurdas-
pur district , \V i 1 1 you please
select a suitable N.C.O. to
head it ?
iit a man who should be
acquainted with the country
and have some influence in
those parts too.
Whom did we send last time ?
Ranbir Singh, was it ?
He is a very good man and has
IMTH <>ii the duty more than
once.
Which sepoys do you recom-
mend to accompany him ?
subedar sahib ! ham ek galla
toli zila* Ourdaspur men
bhejna chahte hain, dp ko,\
achchhd (or ld,iq) ' uhdedar
unke sdth jane ke waste
pasand karke hamko batldten.
hamen ek aisd ddml chdhiye jor
us ildqe se wdqif ho au.
wahdn rusukh s 6/it rakhtd
pichhli da fa kisko bhejd th<l
Ranbir Singh thd. na ?
wuh bahut achchhd ddml hai aur
yih kdm ka,l dafa kar chukd
hai.
dpke khaydl men uske sdth
kaun kaun se sipdhi jdnc
chdhiye.
Dabhil karna = to cauge to enter, to deposit.
M<uhq(l.) = practice.
76
infhionoa.
594
I think we should let him
select his own men. Tell
him that he will use no
compulsion.
1 will give him a letter to the
Tehsildar who will give him
all the help he can.
How much money do you
require ?
Give him an advance from the
loan fund.
Keep an account of what you
spend and show it to me on
your return.
Babu ! prepare the Railway
warrant at once. They must
leave this evening.
Have you had everything that
you require ?
Do you want anything more ?
All right, salam. Keep me in-
formed of your progress.
Remember that the Recruiting
Officer will visit Gurdaspur
every week on Thursday and
put up at the dak bungalow
there, where you should
bring all your recruits.
Select only strong men of the
requisite size and chest
measurement.
Don't bring low-caste men.
Try to take youths from the
militant classes only.
Enlist any young man you
come across provided he is
mere Jtfiaydl men achchM to yih
hogd ki wuh apne ddmi dp
chunle.1 Us se kahdo ki kin
ko zabardasli * bharti na Icare.
ham usko ' Tehsilddr ' sahib ke
ndm chitthi dehge, wuh jahdn,
tak ho sakegd uski madad
karenge.
tumko kitnd rupaya chdhiye ?
usko ( loan fund ' se kuchh
peshgi dedo.
jo kharch karo uskd hisdb rakho
aur wdpisi par hamko dikhd,o.
Babuji ! inke waste ' Railway
warrantj fauran tayydr kar-
den^ Aj sham ko inhen zarur
jand hogd.
sab chiz milga,i ?
kuchh aur chdhiye ?
achchhd, saldm, hamko apne
kdm ki khabar dete rahnd.
ydd rakho. Bharti wdle Sahib
har juma'rdt ko Gurdaspur
d,enge aur wahah dak bangle
men utrenge. Turn apne
rahgrut wahih land.
siraf mazbut ddmi lend jinkd
qad aur chhdti kd nap purd
ho.
nich zdt ke ddmi bharti na karnd.
Siraf larnewdli qaumon se
jawdn jawdh ddmi chunkar
lend.
jo jawdn ddmi tumko mile aur
bharti hone par rdzi ho, usko
1 Chunna = to pick out.
2 Zabardasti = high-handedness, ' se ' is understood after it.
595
willing to join the army. We
want recruits very badly and
must have them soon to
make up the strength of the
regiment.
Feed and treat them well.
get them medically ex-
ami-
When will these recruits be
tested ?
Have they taken the oath of
loya
Recruiting is very brisk there,
man}- recruits have you
brought altogether ?
You will get three rupees per
recruit for your labours and
I shall recommend you
strongly to the C.O.
How many have been declared
fit?
Why has this man been de-
clared unfit ?
0 yes, he has spleen.
His eye-sight is weak.
Leave and
Bring here all the men who
want leave.
How much leave do you want ?
Why do jrou want to go on
leave?
How many men of his company
are on leave at present ?
1 - he entitled to the leave ?
bharti karlo Hamko rahgru.
t'm In sakht zarurat hai-
Jahdii ae mileh le-do, kyoiiki
hamko paltan K ginti puri
karni hat.
unko achchhd khdne ko do aur
achchhd suluk karo.
pahle unkd ddktari muldha^a
in rahgr Itoh ko kab qasm l di
jd,e<ji ?
unhon nc namak * halall H qasrn
khd,l hat ?
wahdii bhartl ka bahut zor hai.
turn kul kitne ranprut li:e ho ?
tumko /» rahgrut tin tin rupni
in a ni mileiigeaur ham kaman
ajsar tiitiib Ice. pis tumhzri
zor ae sifdrish karenge.
kitne admi pas (or, man^ur)
hu.e hain ?
yih ddmi pis (or manzur) kyoh
nahln It
hah, thik hai, usko tilli 3 hai.
uski nazar kamzor hai.
Furlough.
sab chhutii wale admioh ko
yahah Id.o.
turn kitni chhuttl nifiinjtc ho?
t H tn kyoh chhutti par jand chdhte
uski kampni ke kitne ddmi is
waql chhu.Hi par hain ?
uskd chhutti kd haq hai yd
nah
i (Ko) qa*m dena = to put one on oath ; (ki) qcum khuna = to take an
oath of.
* Namak-halali = loyalty (to master),
a Tilli = spleen.
596
Can we spare him ?
When do you want to go ?
How far is your place from
here ?
How long does it take to reach
there ?
How far is it from the Railway
Station ?
Can't you manage to come
back in one week's time ?
How many times have you been
on leave this year ?
When did you receive this
telegram ?
When did this letter reach
you ?
Babu ! read out the letter to
me.
Who is dangerously ill ?
Who is dead ?
Whose marriage is going to
take place ?
He wants leave on medical
grounds.
He wants leave for an urgent
private affair.
I can give you only ten days'
leave.
If you want an extension wire
for it.
Your leave has been sanc-
tioned by the C.O.
I cannot recommend you for
leave.
uske jane se kdm men harj ' to
na hogd ?
turn kab jdnd chdhte ho ?
lumhdrd ghar yahdn se kitni dur
hai?
wahdn pahunchne men kitni der
lagti hai ? (or kitne din lagte
hain ?}
rel ke ' station ' se kitni dur
hai ?
ek hafte men wdpis nahin
a sakte ?
is sal turn kitm da fa rukhsat*
par ga,e ho ?
turn ko yih tar kab mild ?
tumko yih khat 8 kab pahunchd ?
Babuji ! yih chitthi parhkar
sundnd.
kaun sakht bimdr hai ?
kaun margiyd hai ?
Iciski shddi honewdli hai ?
wuh bimdri ki waja* se chhutti
mdngtd hai.
usko nijkd 5 ko,i zaruri kdm hai,
is li,e chhutti mdngtd hai.
ham tumko. siraf das din ki
chhutti de sakte hain.
agar ziyddah chhutti ki zarurat
ho to tar dend.
kamdn afsar sahib ne tumhdn
chhutti manzur ki hai.
ham chhutti ke waste tumhdn
sifdrish nahin kar sakte.
I Harj = hindrance.
* Sbat = a letter.
5 Nijka = private.
* Rukh,°at = leave.
* Waja (f.) = cause, reason.
597
I shall recommend you for
leave when you have taken
the musketry course.
You can take one month's
privilege leave if you like.
You can go on leave without
pay it you like.
The Government will pay your
travelling expenses only one
way.
You will have to pay y< (in-
travelling expenses both
ways from your own pocket.
You will get full pay whilst on
leave.
Ynu \\ill get only half pay.
He wants 3 months' furlough.
Ridiculous. What will you do
with so long a leave ?
Sir, the roof of my house has
fallen down and I want at
least one month's leave to
repair it.
All long leave is stopped.
Your leave will begin from
to-morrow and expire on the
31st of the next month.
Look here, don't overstay y mil-
leave or I'll punish you
severely.
I shall cancel your leave.
Your leave is stopped for six
mon th-
jab turn chdhdmdri In sikhld.l
kfeaiam kar chukoge /
chhutti ke waste tumhdrl
sifdrish karenge.
agar chaho to ek mahine In
haqgl ' chhutti le sakte ho.
agar chaho to bild* tankhwdh
chhutti par chalejdo.
sarkdr siraf ek taraf kd safar
kharch degl.
turn ko donon taraf kd kharch
apnl jeb se dend payegd (or
hogd.
jabtak cJihuttl }>ar rahoge purl
tankhwdh milegl.
tumko siraf ddhl (or nisf) tan-
khwdh milegl.
wuh tin mahine In razd mangtd
hai.
fuzul. Itnl chh uttl kyd karoge /
Huzur, mere ghar In chhat gir-
pan hai aur usln marammat
keli,e kam se kam ek mahine
In chuttl In zarurat hai.
sab qism In Iambi chhutti band
hai.
tumhdrl chhutti kal se shuru'
hogl aur ogle mahine ki
ikattls tdrikh khatam hogl.
dekho, chhutti se znyddah
ghair hdzir mat rahnd nahln
to ham sakht sazd denge.
ham, tumhdrl chhutti mansukh 8
kar denge
tumhdrl chhutti chhi mahine tak
l>,it,<l hni.
'' "i -- privilege leave.
Mansiikh karna = to cancel.
B33 fcmttwOA = without pay.
598
Warn them that they will be
recalled, if necessary.
Leave your address in the
office.
Has he left any instructions
about it ?
Has he returned from leave ?
When will he return from
leave ?
He has applied for an exten-
sion.
He says he is too ill to travel.
Write and tell him to send a
medical certificate.
Has he sent any medical certi-
ficate ?
Wire and tell him that his
leave has been sanctioned.
Wire and tell him to join at
once or he will be treated as
a deserter.
You cannot get any leave now.
The regiment has been ordered
on active service.
All families will stav behind.
The hearing of the land case
has been fixed for the 6th
proximo.
unko samjhddo ki agar zarurat
hojl to unko wdpis buldyd
jd,egd.
apnd pata daftar men chhorjd,o.
wuh is ki bdbat kvchh kahgayd
hai (or likh gayd hai) ?
wuh chhutti se wdpis dyd hai
yd nahih ?
kab chhutti se wdpis d,egd ?
us ne aur chhutti mdngl hai.
wuh kahtd hai ki main bahut
blmdr hun aur safar ke ld,iq
nahih.
usko likhdo ki ddklar kd sdrti-
fikat bhejde.
us ne ddktar kd sdrtifi.kat bhejd
hai yd nahih ?
use tdr bhejdo (or tar ke, zari'e
khabar dedo) ki fumhdrl
chhutti manzur hoga.l hai.
usko tdr dedo ki fauran (or
ek dam) yd, in hojd.o warna
turn bhagore [ samjhe jd.oge.
ab koi (or kisi qism ki) chhutti
nahln mil -saktl.
paltan ko lam par jane kd hukm
hogiyd hai.
sab ke bdl bachche plchhe
rahenge.
Aqle mahlne kl chhi tdrlkh us
zamin wale muqaddame H
peshi '2 hai.
Camping.
Have all the tents been re- sab tanbu (or dere) marammat
paired ? ho chuke hain ?
1 Bhagora = deserter.
2 Peahl = hearing or the date fixed for the hearing of a case.
599
Go ahead and choose a place
for the camp.
Remember that the ground
must be dry and water good
and near the camp.
The regiment is going into
camp for a week. Practise
your company before going
in pitching tents.
Is the ground rough or level ?
Cholera has broken out into
the lines and the regiment
will probably be ordered
out into camp.
Is there any shade in the
camping ground ?
Pitch the tents in a straight
line.
This tent is not properly
pitched.
The ropes are too loose, tighten
them a bit.
These pegs are old and not
strong enough.
How did you break this t« -nt
pole?
Give small tents for the
servants.
Hi is well should be reserved
for drinking purpose.
No one should be allowed to
wash and bathe here.
Strike the«o touts.
Roll up these tent walls into
separate bundles.
age jdkar Icampu ke waste jaga
pasand karo.
ydd rakho ki zamin sukhi aur
pdni nazcKk aur achchhd ho.
paltan ek hafte ke waste bahir
pard,o men jd>egi. Jane se
yahle apnl kampni ko tanbu
lagdne H mashq kard,o.
zamin unchi nichv hai yd barabar
(or hamwdr) ?
Id. in men haiza phut para hai is
waste yhfilibdn [ palian ko
bahir deroh men rahne kd
hukm hojd,egd.
pafd.o H jaga par ko,i darafaht
bhi hai ? (or kahin say a bhl
hai?).
tanbu sidhi qatdr * men lagd,o.
yih tanbu th\k nahin lagd hu,d
(hai).
rassidn bahnt dhili haih, zard
kasdo
yih mekhen purdni hain <nir
kdfi, mazbut nahin.
i/i/i chob kis tdrah (or kaise)
ft?
naukron ko chholdaridn 8 dedo.
is ku en ka pdm siraf pine, ke
waste istiamdl karo.
kisi ddmi ko yahdh nahdne dhone
in tanbuon bo girddo (or
ukherdo').
in ({an at on 6 ko lapel kar alag
lal bandh do.
line.
1 QJ&liban - probably.
• mnall tent.
' t : rna — to pull out any thing olae (as H
or nail). * Qof»5l (f.) = tent wall.
600
These tents are repairable,
get them repaired before
Sunday.
Collect firewood
Jungle.
Clear the place by burning all
the bushes.
Take care that the whole
place does not catch fire.
Is there a grazing ground near
the camp ?
Don't let any outsider come
into the camp without a
yih dere marammat-talab (or
marammat honewdle) hain,
itwdr se pahle pahle inko
marammat karwdlo.
from the jangal se lakri chun lao.
Post sentries all round the
camp.
This corner is exposed to the
enemy's fire. Take these
tents under the cover of
that eminence.
Caution them against lighting
fires.
If any extraordinary thing
happens come and report
to me at once.
The water of this well is
poisonous. Warn the men
not to drink it.
Have the ground cleaned
thoroughly before leaving it.
No trace of the halt should
be left behind.
No cooking is to be allowed
inside the camp.
Was this the report of a gun ?
Who fired it, and why ?
sab jhdndn jaldkar us jaga ko
$df kar do.
Tchabardar sab jaga ko dg na lag
jd,e.
kampu ke pas koj, chard j, l ki
jaga bhi hai ?
kisi ghair ddmi ko ' pass ' ke
baghair kampu men mat dne
do.
kampu ki chdron taraf santrl
(or pahra) lagd do.
Yih kona nangd * hai, is par
dushman ki mar ho saktl hai.
Yih tanbu us unchi jaga ki dr
men lagd,o.
unko samjhd do (or tdkid* kar
do} ki dg na. jald,en.
agar koj Mas (or ghair
ma'muti4) bat hojd,e to ham ko
fauran khabar do.
is ku,en kd pdm zahrild* hai
sipdhion se kahdo ki yahdn se
pdm na pi, en.
rawdna hone se pahle zamin ko
khub sdf karwd do.
' halt ' kd ko,i nishdn bdqi na
rahe.
kampu men ko,i chiz mat pakdne
do.
kyd yih banduq ki dwdz tht ?
kis ne chaldj aur kyon ?
1 Ohara,i = grazing ; charna (intr.) = to graze; charana (trs.) = to
graze, to tend.
2 Nanga = naked.
* Ghair ma'muli = unusual.
Taktd karna = to emphasise.
Zahrila = poisonous.
Why did you not obey
order of your senior ?
bedience of orders
v serious offence.
Put him under arrest.
Bring him up before
Company commander
morrow.
Havildar Major ! march
prisoner in.
601
Offences.
the turn
is a
the
to-
the
Do you plead guilty of this
offence ?
I plead not guilty.
I'll let you off this time but
remember a repetition of it
on your part will be sev<
dealt with.
Discipline is of paramount
importance in the army.
What has this man done ?
He deserted on the l~>th
ultimo and was arrested at
his village by the Police on
the 7th instant.
Why did you desert ?
Why did you absent yourself
v ithout leave ?
You could easily have asked
for leave.
That is a lame excuse.
N . will I) • < Hirt-martialled.
You are charged with abscond-
ing on the 15th of tho
last mou1 ti.
Call the prosecution witnesses.
ne dahne wale kd hukm
kyon nahin mdnd ?
hukm 'adult bard bhdri qusur
(or jurm) hai.
usko kdnji haus men dedo.
kal usko ; Company commander '
ke sdmne pesh karo.
Havildar Major! mulzam ko
andar ld,o.
1. I urn ne yih jurm (or qusur)
kiya ?
2. turn is jurm ka iqbdl karte
ho?
main bequsur hun.
ham is da fa tumko mu'df karte
hain lekin ydd rakho,
phir aisa karoge to ham sakht
sazd denge.
fauj men adab ' qawd'id bar*
zaruri bat hai.
is ddrril ne kyd kiya hai ?
wuh pichhle mahine ki pan >l rah
('h bhdg ffii/d thn
* Police ' ne is mahine kl
tankh usko uske gd,on men
giriftdr kiya.
turn kyon bhdg ga,e the ?
turn ijdzat ke bayhair kyon ghair
hdzir hu,e.
turn asdnl se chhutti mang
sakte the.
yih jhuta 'uzr (or bahdna) hai.
tumhdrd ' court martial ' hogd.
turn par ilzdm yih hai ki turn
pichhle mahine ki pandrah
tdrikh bhdg ga-e.
be gawdhon ko buld,o.
I Adab qawaid - discipline (
76
602
Put him on oath.
His evidence is not reliable.
It is all a concocted case.
There is no proof of this.
But the question is, Can you
prove this ?
There is anv amount of proof
against him.
Has the charge-sheet been
framed against him ?
Have you any witnesses for
your defence ?
Do you want to cross-examine
him?
The prosecution evidence is
very strong.
His defence is very weak.
Let me see his conduct sheet.
He was drunk and rowdy
last night.
He struck Lee. Corporal
Bindra.
They destroyed Government
property to the value of Rs.
300.
He attempted to escape from
his escort.
Why did you abuse him ?
His case wilt be tried on
Monday next
Who is going to try him ?
He has alreadv been punished
twice for gambling.
usko qasm do.
uski shahadat qabil-i-i'atibar
nahin.
yih sab banawti muqaddamahai.
iskd ko,i sabut nahin .
lekin saw^il to yih hai ki turn yih
sabit kar sakte ho ya nahin ?
uske bar khilaf bahut sabut hai
us par fard jurm lag gaya hai ?
tumhvrv koj bachd.o ka gawah
hai ?
turn, us par jarah karna chahte
ho?
istigh/is/i ki shahadat bahut
zdbardast hai.
uska bachao bahut kamzor hai.
uskv ' conduct sheet ' (or chal-
chalan ka chitlha) mujhe
dikhanH.
kal rat w>(h nisha.i (or nwhe
meM) th'i aur bahut shor karta
raha.
us n°, Lais Na,ik Bindra ko
mar a.
unhtn nz tin sau ruvai ka
sarkari m/il nuqsan kiya .
us ne ( i*kot ' se bhagne ki
koshish ki.
turn ne usko kyon galiaii din ?
uska muiaddama agle pir ko
pesh hoga.
1. kaun uska muqaddama
knreqa ?
2. uska muqaddama kiske pas
pesh hoga ?
usko do da fa pihle ju,a khelne
par sazd milchuki hai.
603
unhon ne * police ' ko mdrd.
They assaulted the Police.
He was not in the lines at the
roll mil.
I-'ined Rs. 5.
One week's pay forfeited.
Three days' extra drill.
Promotion stopped for one
ir.
•ivr.l of good conduct nek chdlchalni ka hi I la zabt.
badge.
Line confinement for five
da
Dismissed from service.
wah ginti ke waqt lain se gh.air
kdzir thd.
pdnch rupai jurmdnd.
ek ha/te In talab zabt.
tin din dalel.
ek sal tak (or ke waste) taraqqi
band.
panch din lain qaid.
Reduced to the ranks.
The C.O. will ask for general
court martial.
Sentenced to one week's simple
imprisonment.
Three months' rigorous impri-
sonment,
importation for life.
Sentenced to death (to be
hanged by the neck till dead.)
To be shot dead.
When will his term of impri-
sonment expire ?
Release him.
naukri se mauquf (or nam kdtd
gid).
torkar sipdhi bandyd gayd.
kamdn afsar sdfnb jamaili ' kot
marshal ' ke waste likhenge.
ek hafta mahz ' qaid.
tin mahine sakhl qaid.
kdld pdni (or 'ubur daryd-i
shor) .
phdnsi diyd * jd,egd.
goK se mdrd jd,egd.
uski qaid ki mi'dd 8 kab khatam
hogi.
usko chhordo.
Miscellaneous.
H- 1 > t his right eye in the ' Somme ' H tarn 7 men uski
Somme bat '
'I'li»- oowardfl turned tail and
fled.
The whole division fled precipi-
We shall march stage by stage.
dnkh bekdr hoga,i.
wuh gidi dum dabdkar bhdg
sdre kd sard ' division ' sir par
pd.on* rakhhar bhdg gayd.
ham pa?d,o para.o jd.enge.
>• s = mere, merely. « To hang (• ponion) = (ko) phaA*l denS.
* MVad (f.) = fixed period. * Lit. placing feet on ttte head.
604
Is the transport arrangement
all complete ?
How many camels, mules,
ponies and carts are re-
quired ?
What provisions are obtainable
on the road ?
He has had fever for 3 weeks
and is very weak. He will
not be really fit for another
fortnight.
Climb up into that tree and
tell me what you can see of
the enemy.
You must always wear clean
clothes when you go out for
a walk, and salute any officer
you may come across.
On the first of the next month
I shall just have 20 years'
service.
Will any one volunteer for
service in Egypt ?
I will make the carts cross by
the bridge.
I have sent a small detachment
there which, I think, will be
sufficient for the present.
Please tell the Adjutant Jama-
dar to come at once and give
me his report regarding the
morning's work.
This N.C.O. is a regular mis-
chief-monger and a disgrace
for his regiment.
The pass was narrow and the
enemy had occupied it on
both sides.
sab bdrbarddrl kd bahdobast
ho gayd hai ?
kitne unt, khachchren, taiiu aur
gdridh darkdr hain ? (or did-
hiye) ?
raste par kyd kyd rasad mil
sakti hai ?
usko tin hafte bukhdr rahd hai aur
bahut kamzor hogid hai. Aur
do hafte men jdkar1 achchhl
tar ah tahdurust ho to ho*
us darakht par charhjd,o aur jo
kuchh dushman kd hdl dekho
hameh batld,o.
jab sair ko jd,o to sdf kapre
pahnkar jdyd karo aur agar
ko,i afsar mile to saldm kiyd
karo.
agle mahine ki pahli tdrikh men
naukri thik bis sal hojd,egi.
koj, ddmi khushi se misar men
lam par jdnd chdhtd hai ?
main gar ion ko put par se lejd,-
uhgd.
main ne ek chhotd sd dasta
bhejdiyd hai, mere khaydl men
yih fil hdl 8 led ft hogd.
zard Ajitan Jamadar se kahnd
ki f aur an a kar subah ke kdm
ki rapot dejd.eh.
yuh 'uhdeddr awwal* darje kd
fasddi ddmi hai aur isi ki waja
se paltan badndm ho rahi hai .
darra tang thd aur uski donoh
taraf par dushman qabza kiye,
hu,e the.
1 Mefr jakar = after (lit. having gone through).
2 Ho to ho = might be, if at all.
3 Fil hai ( J UJ| ^i ) = for the present.
* Awwal darje ka = of extreme degree, of the first class.
605
darabion ko kahdo ki khachc-hron
par se zin utdr d< //
bahutl'um ' d ashman dikhajdete
lit..
dushmanbahut kam ' dikhd.i dete
the.
do rangrut jo kal hi dye the bhdg
gaye hain.
1 police ' ko fauran khabar bhej-
do id ki wuh fauran unln
taldsh men lagjd,en.
uske thane ko tar bhejdo.
ck h-nralldr ko kahdo ki kuchh
ad mi sdth lekar age jd,e aur
rasad kd intiz/im kare.
hamare liye is ildqe ka naqsha
band Id o.
hamare ddmion ne us gd.on ko
khub ghaur se * dekhd lekin
ko,i bhi aisi bat nazar net dyi
jis se ma'lum ho ki dushman
thori der pah la yahdn the.
risdle ko fauran ' advance ' kd
hukmdedo.
Tell the muleteers to unsaddle
their mules.
few enemy were visible.
The enemy very rarely ex-
posed themselves.
T\\o reomits who joined only
erday have deserted.
Inform the Police at once to
kble them to take prompt
action for their arrest.
Wire to his Police Station.
Order one Havildar to take
some men and go ahead to
arrange for the supplies.
I want you to make me a
sketch of this country.
Our men thoroughly examined
the village but could find
nothing to show that it had
been recently occupied by
the enemy.
Immediate orders must be
given to the cavalry to
advance.
The Regiment will march at paltan kal subah pdnch baje
in. to-morrow. The men kuch karegi. Sab ddrni do
should take two days' pro- din In rasad «ath lnd,cn.
visions with them.
The General is very fond of
mu>Uetry an«l «>ur men are
good shots. We should do
well.
can you reconnoitre
the position of the enemy
without crossing the river I
jarnail sahib ko chdiidmdrl kd
bard shauq hai aur hamare
ddml nisJtdna lagdne men
hushydrhain. Is waste khaydl
hai ki ham achchhe rahenge.
i ke par gaye baghfiir turn
kis tarah dushman H hdlnt
darydft har sakte ho ?
Bahut kam = very few, very ael i
aur »e=vory carefully, minutely.
606
Take care when you cross the
stream and look out for the
quick sands.
As I was going along the foot-
path I saw three armed men
hiding in a wood near by.
If they agree to Government
terms there will be no ex-
pedition against them.
The Government has demand-
ed hostages.
If they commit raids we will
make reprisals.
Two Afridi sepoys have es-
caped to the Independent
territory.
Heavy firing was maintained
from both sides till night-fall.
The enemy fled helter-skelter
as soon as our guns opened
fire.
There is very little water in
the nullah during the winter,
but when the snow melts on
the hills it gradually rises
till it becomes a veritable
river.
Had there been some troops
staying there the rebels
could not have plundered
the city.
We must start at once so as to
reach the next stage before
sunset.
khabarddr hokar naddi se par
jdnd aur chor bdlu l kd
khaydl rakhnd.
pagdandi par jdte jdte kyd *
dekhtd huh ki tin ddmi
hathydr lagd.e pas hi jahgal
men chhipe hu.e hain.
agar unhoh ne sarkdr ki sharpen 8
man lin to unpar ko$ char-
hd,i * nahin hogi.
sarkdr ne yarg&amdl b (or zdmin)
mange hain.
agar wuh chhdpe mdrenge to
ham bhl unse badla lehge (or
turkl6 ba turkl jawdb denge).
do afrldl sipdhi gjiair ildqe (or
ydghistdn] neh bhdg gaye
hain.
rat hole tak donoh taraf se khub
lagdtdr gnle barsd kiye.
junhin ki hamdri topeh chalin
dushman harbardkar1 idhar
udhar bhdg gaye.
jdre men is ndle men pdnl kam
hold hai lekin jab pahdroh
par barf pigalli 8 hai to yih
hote hote sach much kd daryd
hojdtd hai.
agar wahdn kuchh fauj rahti
hoti to bdg&i shahr ko na lut
sakte.
hameh fauran chaldend chdhtye
td ki din chhipe se pahle pahle
ogle pard,o par pahuhch jd,eh.
' Chor-balu= quick-sand. 2 Lit. " What do I see that."
3 Sharp, (f.) = term, conditions, also a bet or wager.
4 Charha,l= marching against, invasion.
& Yar£Aam5J=hostage ; zawun=surety.
6 Turkl ba turkl jawab dena=to return tit for tat.
1 Harbarana — to be in a confused hurry. 8 Pigalna = to melt.
607
The Fire Brigade did not reach
till the club had been on fire
for full one hour.
The Fire Engine worked hard
for 3 hours before the fire
was got under control.
I fired my pistol at the spy
but he escaped unhurt.
The Regiment will leave for
active service on Fri
I took part in the attack and
have a medal for it.
The road was sandy for 3 miles
and muddy for the next 2
miles after that.
The city is infect ei with
plague. Warn all the men
not to go there.
The contractor is not keeping
to the terms of his contract.
For one thing, he takes too
long to supply things ; and
secondly, his things are bad
and not according to the
sample.
Our C.O. is a very strict dis-
ciplinarian.
ybody coming from the
plague-infected area is de-
tained in quarantine for ten
days.
The fort commands the sur-
rounding country up to 30
miles.
house overlooks the bridge
across the ri
kalab ko dg lage hute purd ek
ghanta ho chukd thd ki ' Fire
Brigade ' umle pahunche.
dg bujhdnewdld airjan tin
ghante lagdldr kdm k'irtd rait a
jab jdkar ' dg kd zor kam
hu,d (or, dg bos men dyi).
main ne jdsus par pistaul
chalayd lekin tvuh bachkar
nikahjayfi.
paltan jum'e ko lam parjd,egi.
main us hamle men shfimil thd
aur uska tamyba mere pd# hai.
tin mil tak safak par bahut ret
tlii aur do mil us se age bahut
kichar (hi.
shahr men td'un hai, sab ddm.on
ko hukm sunddo ki wahdn na
jd.en.
theka-ddr theke ki sharten puri
nahin kar rahd hai. Ek to
wvh bahut der lagdtd hai
dusre uski chizen khaidb h<nh
aur namune ke mUidbiq bhi
nahin hotin.
hamdre kamdn afsar sahib bare
unjiurii (or zabite ice bare
pdbaiid*) ham.
jitne n-hnl 1'l.nn u-nli ifdqe ae
ntc hain unko das din idle
kurdtin men raktid jdtd hai.
us qiVe se chdron taraf lis mil tak
mar hosakti hai.
us ghar *e daryd kd put nazar
did hai.
1 Jab ;5A;ar = thon and then only.
2 PafroAd = strict observer (lit. feet-tied).
608
We intended to make a sur-
prise in the dead of night.
Government will give liberal
grants of lands to those who
took part in the campaign.
Our Subedar Major has been
given 20 squares of land on
the Jhelum Canal.
He has got Victoria Cross for
that conspicuous braverv.
He has nearly completed his
service and will retire next
month.
I propose to surround the
village and capture every
able-bodied individual resid-
ing in it.
He died by his gun.
What death can be better than
this for a soldier ?
It was a big victory indeed but
it cost us very dear.
Our men were not used to
fighting in the hills nor to
such severe cold.
We made a detour and attack-
ed the enemy from the rear.
How many prisoners are there
in the cells to-day ?
Our losses were much less than
those of the enemy.
hamard irdda thd ki ddht rat ko
achdnak hamla karenge.
jo ddmi us lam men shdmil the
sarkdr unko dil1 kholkar
zaminen degi.
hamdre subedar mejar sdhib ko
Jhelam nahr par bis murabb'e
zaminmili hai.
us khds bahdduri ke waste usko
Victoria Cross (or sab se bard
mild hai.
uski naukri qariban purl ho-
chuki hai aur wuh agle
mahine pinshan par jd,egd.
men tajwz * yih hai ki ham is
gd,on ko gher len aur jitne
mazbut mazbut ddmi wahdn
hain unko pakarlen.
wuh marie dam 3 tak apni top
ke pas rahd.
sipdhi ke waste is se bihtar
maut aur kyd ho sakti hai ?
beshak yih ban fatah thi lekin
is men hamdrd nuqsdn bahut
hu,d.
na to hamdre ddmion ko aisl
lard, ion kd tajriba * thd aur
na wuh aisi sakht sardi ke
* ddi b the.
ham ne ghumkar (or chakkar
lagdkar) dushman par pichhe
se hamla kiyd.
dj kdnji haus men kitne qaidi
hain ?
dushman ki nisbat hamdrd bahut
kam nuqsdn hu,d,
1 Dil kholkar = with open heart, liberally.
2 Tajwtz (f.) = proposal, suggestion.
^ Marte dam tak — up to the last (lit. till dying breath).
* Tajriba = experience. 6 (Ka) 'adi = accustomed (to).
609
What is the number of casual- dj kitne ddml
ties to-day ? hain ?
nuqsdn hu,e
put us into very bad
truck< and took us to a camp
in the rear.
There is nothing but small
hushes and sand in the whole
ooontry.
< )ui regiment was surrounded,
but we made a supreme
effort and extricated our-
selves.
as a pitched battle and in
the end we captured the
t ion.
He has been through five cam-
paigns and has five medals.
Thc\ arc making preparations
retreat.
The transport arrangement
was very bad and the
anim.iN were very lean and
What time does the Jamadar
come on his visiting rounds ?
Do you think it will suffice
i week ?
Dig a trench h<-n> .". feet long,
3 broad, and 2J deep, facing
tli
Dig it deeper down.
wuh hamen bahut khirab khardb
chhakroh ' men ddlkar pUchhe
ki taraf ek kampu men legaye.
wahdn tamim mulk men chhotl
chhotl jhdflon aur ret ke siujd
kuchh bhl nahin.
hamari paltan ghirga.i thl lekin
ham ne jantojr* koshish H
aur t»i -iiknr nikal aye.
yih ba?e ghamsdn 8 kt lajra,i thi,
akhir ham ne uruh more fit/
fatah karliya.
ivuh panch lamon par ho-ayd
hai aur uske pas pdnch
tamg&e hain.
wuh pichhe hatne H tayydridn
kar rahe hain.
bdrbarddri kd intizdm bahut
khardb thd aur jdnioar bahut
duble patie the.
jamad'ir sahib kis waqt gasht
par ate hain ?
tumhdre khiudl men yih ek
hafte tak kdft hogd ?
yahdn ek morcha khodo, pdnch
/ut lambd, tin fvt chaufd.
aur dhd.i fut gahrd, aur uskd
munh (or sdmnd, or
daryd ki taraf rakho
aur gahrd khodo.
1 Chhakra - a truck.
* Jan tor = desperate, attended with hardest possible exertion
tag).
8 Ohanuan — great crowd, carnage.
77
610
Signal to me when you see
any enemy on the other
side of the hill.
Who ordered you to hoist
the white flag ?
Make as much noise as you
like when you attack.
Look for him amongst the
dead.
It is frightfully hot there
during the summer, espe-
cially in June and July.
In the winter all the hills are
covered with snow and the
cold is intense. Hence no
operations are possible.
Stop the bleeding and bandage
the wound.
What are your orders, sentry ?
How many sentries are there
for this guard ?
Where are the other sentries ?
What would you do if a
prisoner escaped from the
cells ?
How many prisoners are there
in the guard-room ?
Bring this man up to-morrow
for slackness on guard.
This bayonet is not fixed.
Did you challenge him ?
Is there a bridge of boats
across the river ?
How much transport shall we
want for the kit ?
jab pahdn ki parti l taraf ko,l
dushman dekho to hamko
jhandi do.
tumko kis ne hukm diyd ki
safed jhanda khard karo ?
hamle ke waqt khub shor karo.
usko murdon men taldsh karo
(or, dekho).
garmi ke mausim men wahdn
sakht garmi hoti hai, khdskar
' June ' aur * July ' men.
jdre men tamdm pahdron par
barf pan raliti hai aur sardi
sakht hoti hai. Is waste ko,i
kdm nahin ho saktd.
khun (or, lahu) band karke
zakhm par patti bahdh do.
santri, tumko kyd hukm mild
hai (or, urai* milt hai) ?
is gdrd men kitne santri hain ?
dusre santri kahdn hain ?
agar ko,i qaidi kdhji haus se
bhdg jd,e to turn kyd karoge ?
kot gdrd men kitne qaidi hain ?
is ddmi ko pahre par susti ke
waste kal pesh karo.
yih sangin ' fixed ' (or, lagi
hu,i or, charhi hu,i] nahin hai.
turn ne usko buldyd thd ?
us daryd par kishtioh kd pul
hai?
' kit ' (or, asbdb) ke waste kitnl
bdrbarddri chdhiye ?
1 KI taraf = on the farther side of ; ki — — toraf = on the near
side of.
2 Urdi == charge of a sentry.
611
Only men of respectable siraf khdnddm ddmion ko ek
families can get direct dam sirddri milti hai.
commission.
( 'hallenge every passer-by and
if you don't receive a satis-
factory answer, fire.
The general has ordered to
make up the strength at
once.
There were many casualties
in spite of the sand bags in
front of u<.
We have captured Jerusalem.
Men of B Company will be
vaccinated this evening.
t all well in the lines,
Suhe.lar Sahib?
\\ li.it uas the row about last
ni^ht ? Any men drunk '.
Go on advancing up to that
knoll.
Lie down in the depression to
the left of it.
We were in the thick of the
battle when all of a sudden
the news arrived that the
enemy were evacuating the
village.
many men are avail-
able for the next draft ?
They will reach Karachi day
after to-morrow and embark
the following day.
i'ut them in separate teats
and tell of! one N.C.O. to
look after them.
jo guzre usko puhim n«r agar
thik jaivab na mile to goli
chald.o.
Jarnail sahib ne hukm diyd
hai ki fauran ginti puri karo.
agarchi hamdre sdrnne ret H
boriaii bhi thin to bhi bahut
n<l mi nuqsdn hu,e (or, mare
'/'//• zakhmi hu,e).
ham tie YarusMam fatah knrliya
hai (or, Yarushlam par qabza
karliyd hai).
aj sham ' * * B ' Company ' kc
ddmion ko tikd lagegd.
subedar sahib, lain men sab
tarah khairlyat /
kal rat shor kaisd thd ? kisi ne
nasha piyd thd ?
us file tak bafhte jd,o.
u#ki ba,in taraf jo nichi zamin
hai us men letjd,o.
Lard,i khvb garm thi jab
yakdyak khabar pahunchi ki
dushman gdton ko khnli kar
ralie hat
ogle 'drd/' ke wdste kitne
•ill in \i\i~ir hn>
Wuh parson Karachi pahun-
chenge aur uske dusre din
jahdz par sawdr hojd,enge.
unko alay alag (or, 'alaihda*
'alaihda) tambuph men rakho
aur ' ek 'uhdeddr H naukri
laga do ki unki Qabar rakhe.
'Ataihda = alag m separate, apart.
612
See if their equipment is com-
plete and make up deficien-
cies, if any, from the store.
Everybody will get three
months' pay in advance.
What family allotment do you
want to make ?
The Q.M. will make arrange-
ments for rations for the
journey.
Give them one week's un-
cooked rations.
Have they all got cooking
pots ?
No definite date has yet been
fixed for their departure.
The troop train is standing
ready at the station.
What is the carrying capacity
of each carriage ?
Don't put in a carriage more
men than there is accom-
modation for.
Put one N C.O. in charge of
each compartment.
No one should leave the train
without the permission of
the N.C.O. in charge.
On arrival there report your-
self to the S.S.O.
This cart is very badly loaded.
That cart is overloaded.
dekko ki unkd samdn sab purd
hai yd nahin, agar ko.i chtz
kam ho to istor se pun kardo.
sab ddmion ko tin tin maJiine
ki talab peshgt milegi.
turn ghar ke logon ko kitne rupai
mdhwdr l bhijwdnd chdhte ho ?
kot mdstdr sdhib rdste ke
rdshan kd bandobast karenge.
unko ek ek hafte kd kachchd
rdshan dedo.
sab ke pas khdnd pakdne ke
bartan % hain ?
abhi unki rawdngi ki ko,i pukh-
tahs (or, pakkt) tdrikh muq-
arrar nahm hu,i.
fauji gdn isteshan par tayydr
khan hai.
ek ek gdrl men kitne ddmion kl
jagahai ? (or, kitne kitne ddmi
sawdr ho
baith
-sakte hain
jitne adrmon ki jaga hai us se
ziyddah mat bithd,o.
har ek khdne men ek ek 'uhdeddr
bithd do.
ko,i ddmi sapurdi wdle 'uhdeddr
ki ijdzat bagjiair bdhir na
nikle.
wahdn jdkar S.S.O. sdhib ko
apne pahunchne ki rapot karo.
yih qdri bahut khardb ladi hu,i
hai.
is gdri par bojh ziyddah hai.
Mahwar = monthly. 2 Bartan = utensil.
Pukhtah (Persian indeclinable adjective) = pakkn.
613
Place the heavy luggage under-
neath and the light one on
the top and fasten the ropes
tightly.
Send half the Company to the
right of the hill and the
other half to the left.
The men should advance in
extended order in the open
country.
Tell the I.O.'s to bring up
their sections as quickly as
possible.
We had to move over broken
ground.
They will take only light kit
with them.
All heavy things must be left
behind.
No one should be allowed to
take more than 15 seers
with him.
The road is not suitable for
wheeled traffic.
The road is very narrow, with
many ups and downs, for
about ten miles.
a machine-gun here and
hrifi'j it int" action as soon
as the enemy make any
attempt to advance.
Cover them up with a big
tarpaulin to prevent their
getting wet on the way.
All the sick will go in ainbll-
lanrr Of
The orderly officer will inspect
the guard during his tour
of inspection.
bhari sdmdn niche aur halka
uike upar rakhkar rassidn
khub kas do.
ddhi kampni pahdri In da. in
taraf aur bdqi ddhi bd,in
taraf bhej do.
khuli jaga men sab ddmi ' ex-
tend ' hokar ' advance ' karen.
sirdaron se kahdo ki apne apne
sikshan jisqadar jald ho
sake le a, en.
ham ko tuti phuti zamin par
chalndpard.
wuh siraf halkd sdmdn sdth
lejd,enge.
sab bhari bhari chizen pichhe
rahne do.
ko,i dlmi pandrah -ser se
ziyddah apne sdth na lejde.
wuh rdtta gdrion ke waste thik
nahin.
rdsta bahut tang hai aur ko,i
das mil tak bahut chafhd,i
utrd,i hai.
ek ' machine ' gun ' yahdn lagd
do aur jitwaqt du*hman age
dne H koshish karen ek dam
chald,o.
unpar ek barisi tirpdl ddl do
td ki rdste men bhig na jd.en.
sab bimar haspatdK gdrion men
jdtenge.
ardati afsar sdhib gasht par
yard kd mulahaza karenge.
Or, kaldar top, which is not BO commonly uaed.
614
You must always be in uni-
form when outside your
quarters.
Your position is of great im-
portance.
One 1.0. should go round the
lines and inspect the kit
every Sunday.
You should not issue anything
without getting an indent
from the Company Officer.
Issue two blankets and a pair
of socks to each man.
The whole Company will get
an extra pair of putties.
The uniform is the property
of Government for 3 years.
A and B Company will be paid
out this evening.
All accounts must be settled
at the end of the month.
Explain all deductions to
them.
Put your thumb impression
here if you cannot sign.
Have you not got a seal ?
Tell the cashier to get a re-
ceipt for it.
First put one anna stamp on
and then sign it.
The pay of all absentees must
be placed in the treasury
chest
Pay him in cash if he does not
take notes.
Debit its cost to his account.
jab ghar se bdhir d,o to ward*
pahinkar ay a karo.
1 . tumhdri jaga bari zimmawdrt
ki hai
2. dpkd darja ban 'izzat kd
hai.
ek sirdar har itwdr ko lain men
jdkar ' kit ' ka muldhaza kiyd
kare.
jabtak tumko kampni kamdndar
ka ' indent ' na mile ko,t
chiz mat do.
sab ddmion ko do do kambal
aur ek ek jori jurrdb dedo.
sari kampni ko ek ek ion
pattion ki fdltu milegt.
fin sal tak yih wardi sarkdr ki
hai.
dj sham ko 'A' aur ' B '
kampni ko talab dijd.egi.
mahine ke dkhir par sab hisdb
faisal hojdnd chdhiye.
sab kdt unko samjhd do.
agar dastkhat nahin kar sakte
to yahdn anguthd lagd do.
tumhdre pas muhr nahin hai ?
khazdnchi se kahdo ki iski
rastd lele.
pahle ek dne led tikat laqd^o
aur phir us par dastkhat
karo.
jitne ddmi ghnir hdzir hain
un sab ki talab khazdne k%
peti men jama' rakho.
agar wuh not nahin letd to
naqd rupaya dedo.
iski Idgat uske hisdb men (or,
uske ndm) likho.
H 1 5
Credit this to my account.
To whose account will thi>
amount be credited ?
All transactions should be re-
gistered
Reservists are called out e
t\\ for two months'
training.
If ho is found unfit he will be
discharged.
You get gratuity or pension
according to the length of
your service.
Government does not interfere
in religious matters.
Religious instruction is given
to Hindus \>\- Pandits, to
Sikhs by Giranthis and to
Mohamadans by Maul vis.
He is the most suitable hand
for this kind of work.
You have been selected for
dutv with the machine gun
section.
The O.O. has recommended
only two men for this course.
Whose turn is it now ?
< '«>me in turns.
\Vh< -re does this roof leak ?
•• all the drains washed at
least once every day.
yih mere kisab men jama' karo.
yih raqam ' kiske hisab men
jama' hog\ ?
tamam len den* kitabon men
darj 8 hona chahiye.
har dusre sal rizarvi * do mahlne
In sikhla,l ke waste bulaye
jdte haiii.
agar ' unfit nikld (or, hu,a)
to wka nam kat jdega.
jitni naukri ho uske mutabiq
in'dm ya pinshan milti hai.
sarkar mazhab* /
dakhl* nahiii deti (or, nahtii
aG).
Pandit hindu,on ko, f.'ininthl
hoh ko, aur Maulvi musal-
manon ko mazhabi 7 ta'tim *
dete hain.
is qism ke katn ke waste wuh
hilkul thik hai.
turn * machine gun ' sikshan ke
waste chhante 9 ga,e ho (or. ke
!/ laga,e ga,e ho).
kaman afsar sahib ne i*
(or, sikhlaj) ke waste siraf do
'I'lmt'-ii ft sifarish H hni.
ab kiski bari hai ?
ban bari 5,0.
yih chhat kahan se chutt hai *
har roz kam az kam ek dafa
sab natian dhulwa.o.
Raqam (f.) = item, amount.
Len den = transactions (lit. taking and giving).
Darj karna = to regiflter ; darj hona = to be regfatered.
Rizarvi = reacr t Maihab = religion.
Dakhl denu = to interfere.
^ Maihabi = religious.
im (f.) » education. <* Chhan^na = to •elect, to sort out.
616
All filth and rubbish should be
removed by 8 a.m. every
day.
This room does not appear to
have been swept to-day.
Tell the sweeper to come here
with his broom and basket.
These latrines have not been
properly cleaned.
They smell very badly.
Whv have you not put Condy's
fluid in here ?
Tell the banyas not to give
credit to the men : if they do,
the Government will not be
responsible for it.
You must not lend money to
anybody in the lines on
interest. You will lose both
capital and interest if you
do.
If you charge more than the
bazar rates or sell anv adul-
terated articles T shall turn
you out of the lines.
The bazar Chaudhri will supply
you all the rates.
It is the duty of the Sanitary
Sergeant.
The doctor will be coming
for inspection to-morrow,
have everything cleaned
thoroughly.
sab maild aur kurd karkat '
har roz dth baje se pahle
pahle ulh jdnd chdhiye.
ma'lum hold hai ki dj is kamre
men jhdru * nahin phiri.
mihtar ko bolo ki ekdam jhdru
aur tokri lekar d,e.
yih tattidh* thik sdf nahin
hu,in.
un se sakht badbu * dti hai.
yahdn ' phenyle ' (or, dawd,i)
kyoh nahin ddti ?
Banyon se kah do ki kisi ko
udhdr mat den, agar denge
to sarkdr zimmawdr nahin
hogi.
turn lain ke kisi ddmi ko sudi 6
rupaya mat do. agar doge to
asl* aur sud* donon khobai-
thoge.
agar turn bnzdri nirkh1 se
ziyddah dam loqe yd khardb
(or, miJdwali) 8 chiz doge to
ham tumko lain se nikdl
denge.
chaudhri tumko sab nirkh degd
(or batld,egd).
yih safd,i wale hawdlddr kd
kdm hai.
kal ddktar sdhib muldhaze ke
waste d.enge. sab chiz kfrub
sdf karwd rakho.
1 K'ira karJcat — rubbish.
2 Jhnrn = broom ; jJiaru pherna = to sweep ; jharu phirna = to be
swept.
8 Tattl = latrine. * Badb'i = bad smell.
6 S~d = interest ; sudl = on interest 8 Afl •= capital.
Nirbh = rate.
Milawat = mixture ; Milawatl = adulterated.
617
You are responsible for the
cleanliness of the lines.
No unauthorised person should
be allowed to live in the
lines without permission.
When a report or complaint is
brought to you, first inves
tigate it carefully, and if you
cannot dispose of it your-
self report the matter to the
Company Commander.
You are responsible for your
Company in every respect.
You are responsible for all
books and accounts.
This site is quite good for the
followers' quarters.
Send some men to remove all
the pebbles and stones from
the parade ground.
Send a party to collect lead
and empty cartridge cases
from the range and send
them to the arsenal.
The city is out of bounds till
the sickness in it disappears.
The road will be cloned for
general traffic between 8 and
9 a.m.
Jamadar Arjan Singh, you had
better accompany them to
receive rations from the
-up pi godowns. See that
the things issued out are of
good quality and properly
weighed.
turn lain H safari ke zimmawdr
ho.
ko i ybfiiradmi ijdzat ke beghair
lain men na rahe.
jab ko.i rapot yd shiknnat
tumhare pas d,e, pahle khud
achchhi tfirah darydjt karo (or,
tdhqiqdt ' karo), agar turn se
faisla na ho sake to kampni
lea-mail 'In r ko khabar
turn har tarah (or, har bat men)
apni kampni ke zimmawdr ho.
turn sab hisdb kitdb ke zimma-
war ho.
yih jaga ' follower ' logon ke
gharon ke waste bilkul thik
hai.
kuchh ddmioh ko paret men
bhej do ki sab kankar *
patthar wahaii se chunkar
bdhir phenk den.
ek toR chaiidniari par bhej do
ki sab sikka9 aur t^uili
k»irtu* j'lina9 kar la. en aur
phir yih sab chiz niVe men
do.
jabtak bimari na hategi tab tak
shahr men jand mana' hai.
subah ath se ttau baje tak
safak 'am* logon ke waste
band ruf
Jamadar Arjan Singh <S ,
fi/) mere khayal men unke
sdth rashan lene ke waste
kamsan /'/'/• '~i //» 6 men chale-
jd,en Kfrayal rakhiyega ki
'tanachchhdaur uskd wazn
purd ho.
I Tahqiqat = investigation.
d Sikka = lead, coin.
6 Qudam = god own , store.
78
' Kafikar = gravel, pebble.
* 'um log = common people.
618
There is a wrestling match in
the lines to-day and I have
got to go there.
Come on, let us go to have a
look at the tent-pegging.
There will be a tug of war
match between A and B
Company at 6 p.m. to-day.
Our Subedar Major is retiring
to-morrow. There will be
a big dance in the lines to-
night. All of us have got
to go there.
Every man will carry a
bandage and a small bottle
of iodine with him.
Who won the hockey match
yesterday ?
We beat them by two goals to
one.
The ball hit him on the
forehead and he fell down
unconscious.
Don't show your head above
the trench.
All of them must be sent to
the segregation camp.
It was blowing hard from the
west.
We get frequent dust-storms
and the afternoons are very
dusty.
You should not sleep in the
open at night or you will
fall sick on account of the
dew.
dj lain men kushti l hai aur
mujhe wahdn jdnd hai.
chaliye, zard neza-bdzi* dekh
d,en.
dj sham ke chhi baje 'A' aur
1 B ' kampni men rasse ki
khinchdj hogi.
kal hamdre ' Subedar Major
Sdhib pinshan par jd rahe
hain. Aj rat ko lain men
ba^d ndch hogd. Ham sab ko
wahdn jdnd hai.
sab ddmt ek ek patti aur ek ek
shlshi 3 ' iodine ' ki sdth lejd.-
ehge.
kal ' hockey ' Ida ' match ' kaun
jltd ?
ham jite the, unkd ek ' goal ' thd
aur hamdre do the.
gend * uske mdthe 5 par lagi aur
wuh behosh hokar gir para.
sir morche <se upar mat karo.
un sabko alag kampu men
rahnd hogd.
maghrib ki taraf se sakht hawd
chal rahi thi.
hamdre hdh aksar dndhldn 5 dti
rahti hain aur dopahr ke
*ba'd bahut gardd hold hai.
bdhir khull jaga na so warna
os 1 ki waja se bimdr par
jd,oge.
1 Kuahtl = wrestling match.
3 Shlshl = a phial, small bottle.
6 Matha = forehead.
T OB (f.) = dew.
2 Neza-bazl = tent-pegging.
* Gefid (f.) = ball.
6 Ahdhl — dust-storm.
619
Manoeuvres will begin about
the middle of the nrxt
month.
\\ '>• are going out for a sham
fight,
\\V counteracted all their
movements successfully.
All the sentries must be alert
and keep proper look-out.
The N.C.O.'s divide all the
duties and see that they are
carried out.
l!t -inforce your men in case
of attack.
heave some men behind for
the defence of the trenches.
We counter-attacked and re-
captured the position.
We dispersed their whole
division.
Their whole brigade was dis-
persed.
You should maintain commu-
nication with the main
body.
planes are the best means
of reconnaissance for fron-
tier warfare.
Our fire was very effective.
ogle mahine In pandrah bis
tdrikh tak ' manoeuvres ' (or,
jhuti lafdj) shuru' hojd,egi.
ham jhuti lard,i par jd rahe
hain.
ham ne unki sab chdlon ka khub
jawdb diyd.
sab santrion ko chaukas ' aur
Jkjw6 hushyar (or, khabarddr)
rahnd chdhiye.
'uhdedar sab naukridti baiitt*
hain (or, lagdtc hain). aur
dekhte hain ki sab apni apnl
naukri par hdzir hain ya
nahlii.
agar hamla ho to apne admion
ko madad bhejdend.
kuchh admi morchoii ki hi/azat
ke waste pichhe chhor ja,o.
ham ne jawdbi hamla karke us
jaga ko phir leliya.
ham ne unka sare kd sard
' division ' tittar > hit la r kar-
diyd.
unkd tanidm birged tittar * bittar
hogayd.
in body ' ko klmlmr tit i> /« /•
rut'
sarhaddi s lard.i ke waste hawdj
jahdz dekh bhdl karne kd tab
se achchhd zari'a * hain.
hamdri golabdri* se du*hman
ko bahul nugsdn pahunchd.
i Alert = chaukcu.
* Tittar bittar karna = to disperse ; tittar bittar hona ss to be ditpenad.
•'tad = frontier ; aarhaddl (adj). * ZarVa = means.
6 Oolabarl — cannonade, shelling.
620
We were on the defensive.
They gave in after six hours'
hard fighting.
How long did the fight last ?
We have captured one hundred
thousand prisoners and one
thousand guns since the last
offensive.
When you see my signal to
advance try to storm the
enemy's position.
Do
o you know the strength of
the enemy in front of us ?
We shelled their trenches but
they did not return our
fire.
They stormed our position but
were driven back with heavy
casualties.
Their zeppelins hovered over
the town for half an hour
and dropped some bombs,
but no damage of impor-
tance was done.
They fought desperately but
when our men charged
them with bayonets, they
took to their heels.
We pursued them for a short
distance and captured lot of
booty.
We put all our guns out of
action before we retreated.
They did not surrender till we
set fire to the whole village.
ham bachd,o kar rahe the.
chhi ghante kt sakht lard,i ke
ba'd wuh hdrga,e.
lardj kitm der rahl ?
pichhle hamle ke shuru' se lekar
dj tak ham ne ek lakh qaidl
aur ek hazdr top l pakri hai.
jab ham ' advance ' kd ishdra
karehge ekdam dushman ke
morchon par halld * karke jd
paro.
tumko ma'lum hai ki hamdrc
sdmne dmhmanoh ki kyd
ta'ddd hai ?
ham ne unke morchon par gole
barsd,e lekin unhon ne kuchh
bhl jawdb na diyd.
wuh halld karke hamdre mor-
chon par d pare lekin ham ne
unkobahut nuqsdn pahuhchd-
kar pichhe hatddiyd.
unke bare hawzj jahdz ddhd
ghanta shahr ke, upar urte
rahe aur kuchh ' bam ' bhl,
phehke (or, girdye) lekin
kuchh aisa (or, koi bhdri)
nuqsdn na hu}d.
Wuh jdn torkar lare lekin jab
hamdre, ddmioh ne sahginoh
ke sdth hamla kiyd to wuh
bhdg khare hu,e.
Ham ne thorl dur tak unkd
pichhd kiya aur bahut mal
lutd.
pichhe hatne se pahle ham ne
apnl sab topoh ko bekdr kar
diyd thd.
jab ham ne sab gdoh ko dg lagd
dl to unhon ne hathydr ddldiye
(or, hdr man II).
1 Or, tope A pakrl hai*.
(Par) halld karna = to storm.
621
We held out for some time.
but overwhelmed by large
numbers of the enemy we
began to fall back gradu-
ally.
They could not stand our
heavy fire.
They tried to isolate us from
the main body but failed
They twice tried to break our
line but thank God did not
succeed.
We repeated our counter-
attacks till we repulsed
them to their original posi-
tion.
Our shells broke down all
their barbed wire entangle-
ments.
We carried all their defences
on that front.
\\V are at present raiding
each other to find out some
weak point.
He was only .slightly wounded.
He was severely wounded and
died tin- following day in
the hospital.
Uillet lodged too close to
lii* heart and could not be
extract'
We bnniirht down 7 «>nemy
hines in that raid
ham kuchh der are l rahe lekin
chunki bahut ddmioh ki waja
se dushman kd zor ziyddah
thd ham ahista ahista pichhe
hatne lage.
wuh hamdri sakht golabdri ke
sdtnn< [l«ir na sake.
unhon ne hamko • xhj '
se alag karne In koshish H
lekin kdmydb na hu,e.
unhoii ne do daf'a hamdri lain
torne ke waste zor l>
magar khudd kd shukr hai ki
kdmydb na hu,e.
ham jawdbi hamle karte rahe
yahdn* tak ki unko aslt
rchontak jnchhe
hamdre goloii se unki tan/'l//>
kanteddr* bdfen* tut phut
gajii.
unke jitne morche us jaga the
ham ne un sab par qabza
karliyd.
jil hfif li'in/ k'ini-or jaga ma'lvm
karne ke waste ek dusre par
chhape mar rahe hain.
us ke6 sirf hfilkn^n ior, khafif9
sd) zakhm dyd tha.
uske sakht zakhm lagd aur uwh
dusre din haspatdl men
mar
goK uske dil ke bahut hi pas
baithl Ihi i* waste nikal na
sain.
ham ne us chhape men dushman
ke sat hawdj jahdz niche
girdye.
1 Arna = to be firm : ara rahna = to remain firm.
2 Yaha* tak ki = so that, to auoh an extent that.
ntedar = barbed, tl. * fttr (f ) = fence.
* « Badan par ' understood after • k<: « khafif
msignificaiit.
622
The engine burst open and
the petrol caught fire and
set the whole machine on
fire.
The pilot and the observer
were burnt to ashes in no
time.
Your section advanced much
too quickly. Some of the
men were so blown out of
breath that they could not
take proper aim.
You must take advantage of
folds in the ground.
Don't rush madly. Run from
one cover to another.
You must walk to and fro
in a brisk and soldier-like
manner.
You must remain concealed
as much as possible from
the view of the enemy.
Don't show yourself to the
enemy.
The enemy resisted stub-
bornly.
I congratulate you on your
promotion, Jamadar Sahib.
anjan phatne se ' petrol ' (or, tel)
ko dg lag gaj aur sari
' machine ' jal uthi.
chaldnewdld aur dekhbhdl karne-
wdld an1 kt an men jalkar
rdkh hoga,e.
tumhdre ' sikshan ' ne bahut jaldt
1 advance ' kiyd. Kuchh ddmi
aise hdnp* rahe the ki shist
thik nahin lagd sakte the.
jahdn kahin zamin unchi nichi
ho us ki dr lo.
pdglon ki tar ah mat dauro, ek
dr se dusn dr tak daupkar
jd,o.
chusti se sipdhion ki tarah
tahlo*
jahdn tak ho sake dushman ki
nazar se chhipe raho.
dushman ke sdmne mat ho (or,
dushman ki nazar se bacho).
dushman ne datkar * muqdbala 6
kiyd.
jama'ddr sahib, apko tarraqi
mubdrik 8 ho.
What is your name ?
How old are you ?
What is your caste ?
Easy Dialogues.
tumhdrd ndm kyd hai ?
'umar kitm hai ?
tumhdri zdt kyd hai ?
' An ki an men — in the twinkling of an eye.
2 Hanpna = to pant, to be out of breath.
3 Tahlna = to walk to and fro, to stroll.
* Datkar (or jamkar) = stubbornly, firmly.
6 (Ka) muqabala karna = to resist, to oppose, to compare.
« Mubarik = blessed, auspicious; rmtbarikbad (f.) = congratulation ;
(kl) mubarikbad dena = to congratulate (on).
623
Where do you come from ?
Is it a village or a big city ?
What is its population (
Who is the headman of your
village ?
Is your father alive ?
What work does he do ?
Do you own any land ?
Have you any brothers ?
Are they in the army as well ?
you any relations in the
army ?
Are you married ?
When did you marr\r ?
Have you any children \
How far is your place from
here ?
How many days' journey is it
from here ?
Does the railway tram go
there?
How far is it from the railway
station ?
When did you enlist ?
Where were you enlisted ?
What is your rank ?
H «> w long have you been in the
army ?
What is the number of ymir
regiment ?
Who commands it ?
How many B.O.'s are there in
your regiment ?
How many I.O.'s ?
How many N.C.O.'s ?
tumhdrd ghar kahdn i •
gdjon hai yd bard shahr ?
dbddi kitni hai ? (or, kitne ddmi
rnhtc hain? )
are gd.on led nambarddr
(or, lambarddr) kaun hai ?
tumhdra bap zindah (or, jltd)
hai?
wuh kyd kdm kartd h«
tumhdri kuchh zamin /
tumhdrd ko,i bhd,l fid'
wuh bhi fauj men naukar ),'
fauj men tumhard ko,i rishtfvln,-
hai?
tumhdri sliddi ho chuki ha
kab shddihuj?
ko,i bdl bachcha hai ?
tumhdrd <jlinr >/«hdn se kitni
dur hai ?
li a Jinn AV kitne din ka
(or, rasla) h<
relgdri wahdn jdti /
rel ke 4 station ' se kitm dur
hai?
turn kab bharti hu,e the?
kafidn bharti hu,e the ?
tumhdrd 'uhda kyd hai ?
turn fauj men kab se mi
tumhdri paltan kd nambar kyd
hai?
usln kamdn kaun kartd hai?
(or, kamdn a/sar kaun hai ?)
tumhdri paltan men kitne afsar
(or, sdhib) hain ?
kitne sirdar hain ?
kitne 'uhdedar hain ?
624
What Company do you belong
to?
How many men are there in a
Company ?
Are there many recruits in
your regiment ?
Are there any Sikh Companies
in your regiment ?
Have you any Pathan Com-
panies as well ?
What is the strength of your
regiment at present ?
Did you go on leave this year ?
How much leave do you get
in a year ?
Which stations have you been
in?
Do you like this place ?
Do you like soldiering ?
turn kis kampni men ho ?
ek kampni men kitne admi
hole hain ?
tumhari palian men rahgrut
bahut hain ?
tumhari palian men sikhon H
ko,i kampni hai ?
pathdnon ki ko,i kampni bhi
hai ?
is waqt tumhari palian ki ginti
(or, nafri) kitni hai ?
is sal turn chhutii par gaye the ?
ek sal men kitni chhulti milti
hai ?
turn kis kis chhd,oni men
rahe ho ?
yih jaga (or, chha,oni) tumko
pasand hai ?
turn ko fauj ki naukri pasand
hai ?
Have you ever been on active
service ?
How long were you there ?
Have you got any medals ?
Of what campaign ?
Were you wounded there ?
Did you kill any of the enemy ?
Did you fight in the open or
from trenches ?
Do you like trench warfare ?
What is 3'our opinion about
the Germans ?
kabhi lam par gaye ho ?
kitni der wahah rahe ?
tumhare pas ko.i tamgha (or,
takma] J hai ?
kis lam ka ?
turn wahah zakhmi hu,e the ?
turn ne dushman ka ko,i admi
mara ?
lard,i khuli jaga hu,a karti thi
yd morchoh se ?
turn ko morchoh ki lara,i pasand
hai ?
jarmanon ki bdbat iumhara
kya khaydl hai ?
1 « Takma' (medal) is a Panjabi word and readily understood by a
Panjabi.
626
they good fighters ?
they well trained '.
i battles did your regi-
ment take part in '.
Did it do any brave deed ?
you ever taken prisoner ?
H. >\v did the enemy treat you ?
How did you esc;;
e you been to England ?
What do you think about it ?
Is it a good place ?
Did you go by land or by sea ?
What was your voyage like \
Did you feel sick ?
Did you see any of our battle-
ships ?
e you ever seen German
zeppelins ?
Have you ever seen a fight
between air-hi|'
wuh ncttdn lafne-wdlehai
achchhe tHkht hu,e hai
tumhari paltan kis kis lard, I
men aha/
ko,i bahddurl kd knm I.
dushmanon ne kabhl lumko
pakrd bhi yd nal
dushmanon ne tumhdre
kaifid suluk
nikal dye .'
turn waldyat gaye ho ? (or, turn
ne waldyat dekht hai
is lei bdbat tumhari kyd rd.e
hai ?
achchhl jaga hai ?
khu*hln ke raste gaye //•
samundar ke ?
samundar kd sa/ar kaise guzrd ?
bimdr hu,e the yd nahiii .'
turn ne hamdrd ko,i jangl jahdz
turn ne kabhi jarmanon kd
* zappelin ' (or, bafd hawdj
John-.) ihkhd hai ?
turn ne hawdj jahdzon In /
dekhi h<:
pay do you get ?
Are you paid monthly or
Can you live on your pay all
right '
\< >u get any extra
allowance ?
What for?
< .in y..ii save anything fr«»m
your pay ?
send any mom
your home ?
79
turn ko kyd talab milti hai ?
talab mahine ke mahine tnilll
hai yd haftaivd/
talal) j*ir tumhdrd guzdra
achchhl tarah ho jdtd hai *
ko,l launs (or, bhatia) bhi miltd
hai?
ki* k'ltn k< im*tt
talab se kuchh bach bhi jdtd hai ?
ghar ko k >iya bhejte ho ?
626
What are your monthh'
expenses ?
Don't you think it is too
much ?
Can you read and write ?
Have you passed your signal-
ling course (flag-wagging) ?
What rations do you get ?
Is it of good quality ?
Do you get it free or have you
to pay for it ?
When will you get promotion ?
When will you retire ?
How many years have you to
serve to entitle you to a
pension ?
What pension do you get ?
Have you ever been on re-
cruiting duty ?
How many recruits have you
given into your regt. ?
Do you get any reward for
bringing recruits ?
tumhdrd mahtne kd kharch
kiind hai ?
tumhare khaydl men yih bahut
nahm ?
kuchh likh park sakte ho ?
jhancfi ka imtihdn pas kiyd
hai ?
turn ko kyd kyd rdshan miltd
hai ?
achchhd hotd hai ?
sarkdr se muft miltd hai yd is
kt qimat tumhdn talab se kattt
hai?
tumko taraqqi kab milegi ?
pinshan par kab jd,oge ?
kilni naukri ke ba'd pinshan
kd haq hojdtd hai ?
kitnl pinshan milti hai ?
turn kdbhi galle (or, bhartl) ke
kdm par gaye ho ?
turn ne kitne rangrut apm
paltan men diye hain ?
rangrut lane kd kuchh in'dm
miltd hai ?
What do you think is the tumhare khayal men kya sabab
hai ki har ek chiz mahingl
ho rahl hai ?
cause of all-round dearness of
things ?
What is the rate of wheat
now-a-days ?
Were the crops poor this year ? is sal kyd fasal achchhe nahin
aj kal gehon l kd nirkh kyd
hai ?
How do you irrigate your
lands ?
Are there no canals in your
district ?
turn log apni zaminon ko kaise
(or, kahdh se) pdni dete ho ?
tumhare zil,e men nahr* ko,l
nahin ?
1 Gehon (or gaftdum, or kanak — Panjabi) = wheat.
« Nahr (f.) = canal.
627
Do you water your lands from zamtnon ko kuon se pant dete
wells ? ho ?
Is most of the land dependent aksar zamin baram l hai ?
on rain ?
What revenue do you pay to turn sarkdr ko kya malya * dete
Government ? ho?
What is the average produce ekbighe* In ausfan* paidawar k
per bigha of land ? kitni hoti hai~?
I BarUni = dependent on rain.
* Malya (or, mam/a, Panjabi) = revenue.
3 Bigha — about $ of an acre. * A us tan = at an average.
* Paidawar (f ) = produce.
APPENDICES.
APPENDIX A.
Days of the Week.
Urdu. Hindi.
Sunday itwar j\£\ Itwar
Monday pir ^t Somwar
Tuesday mangal J.£L« Mangalwdr
Wednesday budh *Jfc^> Budhwdr
Thursday (f.) juma'rdt c^?^*^ Wirwar
Friday jum'a I**?* Shukarwar
Saturday hafta && Sanichar
Hindi Months.
Baisdkh (April-May) 31 day*
Jeth (May-June) 31-32 „
Asdrh (June- July) ,,
Sdwan (July-August) 31-32 ,,
Bhadon (August-Septr.) 31-32 „
or ^^1 Asm or Kudr (Septr.-October) 30-31 ,,
or ^-£& Katik or J^ar^^fOctober-Novr.) 30
Aghan (No vr. -December) 29 ,,
Piis (Deer. -January) 29-30 „
Magh (January-Feby.) 29-30 ,,
(Feby. -March) 30
(March-April) 30
Seasons (f*~r°> mausim)
Winter jam (m.)
Summer garrnl (f.)
bahar (f.)
khizan (f.)
barsat (f.)
Spring
Autumn
Rainy Season
Directions or Cardinal Points.
Urdu (Arabic). Hindi.
North shimal (or shumal) JU-£ uttar
South junub
tj
dakkan (or dakkhan)
Jp*»* purab
s^*-* pachchham
shimdll
junubl
masJiriql
maghribl
East mashriq
\\'«>-t maghrib
Northern
Southern
Eastern
Western
Coins,
pie.
pice (= 3 pies).
half anna bit (= 2 pice),
one anna bit (= 4 pice),
two „ „
four „ „
eight „ „
one rupee (—16 annas),
sovereign (=15 rupees),
a gold piece (=-15 rupees),
a gold piece (=16 rupees).
The last two coins have been long out of use. Both the
names are, however, often applied to the English sover-
eign.
adhanrii
ikannl
duannl
chawannl
ijl athanni
>); rupaya
J^j paund
muhr
ashrafl
630
Weights.
tola = the weight of one rupee (or, f of an ounce).
^*^ chhitdnk = five tolas or nearly two ounces.
jb <utjl adh pa,o = 10 tolas or two chhi tacks or 4 ozs.
jb pa,o = 20 tolas, 4 chhitacks or | lb.
orfA ser = 2 pa,os or one pound nearly.
ser = one seer or two pounds nearly.
man = one maund or 82 ft nearly.
APPENDIX B.
Proverbs.
Abhi Dilli dur hai.
Adha titar adha bater.
Age kuan ptchhe kha,i.
Ahmad ki pagri Mahmud ke
sir (par).
Ap bhale to jag bhala.
Apnl chhachh ko kof khattd
nahin kahtd.
It is a far cry to Loch Awe.
(Lit. Delhi is still a long
way off).
Neither fish nor flesh, nor
good red herring, i.e.v
neither one thing nor the
other. (Lit. half partridge,
half quail).
A well before, and a ditch
behind. (On the horns of
a dilemma or between two
difficulties, i.e., the devil
and the deep sea).
Robbing Peter to pay Paul.
(Lit. Ahmad's turban on
Mahmud's head).
Good mind, good find. (A
good man finds a good
world).
No one cries stinking fish.
(Lit. no one calls his
butter- milk sour).
631
Ashrafidn litfen, 1co}ilon par
muhr.
Annual Ifhwesh ba'dhu dar-
wesh (Persian).
Baghal men chhurl munh men
Ram Ram.
Bund buiid karke tala,o
bharta hai.
Darya men rahna, aur magar
machh se bair.
Jitni chadar dekho utne pair
phaila,o.
Chamri jaye par damfi na
ja,e.
I'.l: /irith se tall nahln bajti.
II i 'umat-i-mardan madad-i-
Khuda (Persian).
Jtski lathi, us k\ bhains.
Jo
Penny wise, pound foolish.
(Lit. never mind the gold
coins, seal up the charcoal).
Charity begins at home. (Lit.
first yourself, then the
beggar).
A dagger under the arm and
prayer in the mouth. (Used
to describe a treacherous
person who smiles in your
face and cuts your throat).
Many a little makes a
muckle. (Lit. drop by
drop fills the pond).
Live in the river and fight
the crocodile (To be on
bad terms with him under
whose authority one is
placed).
Cut your coat according to
your cloth. (Lit. stretch
your legs according to the
length of your sheet).
He will pait with his skin
but not with his cash, i.e.,
you will get nothing out
of a miser but his skin.
It takes two to make a
quarrel. (Lit. you cannot
olap with one hand).
God helps those that !i«-lp
themselves. (Lit. endea-
vour is man's help is
God
Might i- right. Club-law.
Lit who has the cudgel
has the buffalo).
Who sows will reap.
632
Jo garajte hain wuh baraste
nahin.
Ndch na jane angan terhd.
Nau naqad na terah udhdr.
Pahle soch bichdr pichhe kije
kdr.
Qahr-i-darwesh bar jdn-i-dar-
wesh (Persian).
Qaul-i-marddn jdn ddrad
(Persian).
1. Sdnp ka kdtd rassi se
dartd hai, or
2. Dudh ka jala chhdchh
phnnk phunk pUd hai.
Dubte ko tinke kd sahdrd
bahut hai.
Kdm piydrd hai chdm nahin.
Great cry little wool. Empty
vessels make great noise.
(Lit. clouds which thunder
much, rain little).
Bad workmen quarrel with
their tools. (Lit. she does
not know how to dance
and says the floor is un-
• even).
A bird in hand is worth two
in the bush (Lit. nine in
cash is better than thirteen
on credit).
Look before you leap. (Lit.
first think and then act).
The poor man's rage only
hurts himself.
An honest man's words carry
weight.
Burnt child fears the fire.
(Lit. (1) one bitten by a
snake dreads a rope, (2)
one scalded with hot milk
will blow on butter-milk
to cool it).
A drowning man catches at
a straw.
Handsome is that handsome
does. (Lit. work is dear,
not skin).
633
APPENDIX C.
Prepositional Verbs.
Particular verbs take particular postpositions to denote
their relation witb some other word in a sen For
ance, 'darna' (to fear), and ' puchhna ' (to ask, to
uire), must take ' se ' (from) after tbe object feared am!
the person from whom an enquiry is made, as :—
I fear him = main us se darta h
I asked him (i.e., enquired from him) = main ne us se
puchha.
Moreover the change of postpositions often alters the
meaning of a verb. For instance, if you use ' se ' after t li
object of ' kahna/ it means ' to say,' ' to request,' ' to relate '
while ' ko ' instead of * se ' alters its meaning to ' to order,
1 to call by a name,' ' to do harm to/ as :—
I said to him, I
I asked, requested or \maih ne us se kaha.
suggested to him. J
I told (or related) the whole story to him = main ne sab
' us se^kahd.
Tell (order) him to come here = us fco kaho ki idhar a,e.
(I turn is ko Hindustani men kya
kahte~hof
2. is ko Hindustani men kya kahtc
hai~
Come on, the dog will not do you any harm = chale d,o,
kutta turn fco kuchh nahlh kahega.
Similarly milna with ' se' after its object implies inten-
tional visit, whilst ' ko ' after its subject (not object) signi-
fies accidental meeting, as:—
80
634
I visited (or interviewed) him to-day = main dj us se
mild tha.
I met (or came across) him by chance = dj wuh mujh ko
mild tha.
NOTE. — * Mima,' when used to express " to meet or to come
across by chance," takes its subject in the Dative (i.e., with
' ko ' after it) and agrees with the person met, which, latter,
assumes the Nominative form and generally precedes the Dative.
Again ' puchhna ' with ' se ' means * to ask,' * to enquire,'
whilst with * ko ' instead of ' se ' it stands for ' to enquire
after one's health or welfare,' ' to care for,' as : —
Ask (or enquire from) my bearer = hamdre bahre se
puchho.
The Sahib enquired about your welfare = sahib turn &o
puchhte the.
Who cares for us, the poor?=^am gharibon ko kaun
puchhtd hai ?
The following is a list of some commonly used Preposi-
tional Verbs with the particular postpositions they take,
given in brackets : —
(a) Verbs constructed with ' kdS ' ke,' ' ki.'
To thank (God) (Tea) shukr karna U
„ (general) (kd) shukrlya add karna
ty Ml
To reply (to a letter > (ka) jawdb dend
etc.)
To wait (for) (kd) intizdr karna
To pursue (game, (ka) plchhd karna
enemy, etc.)
To abide (by a person) (kd) sdth dend
To accompany (a per- (fca) sath karna
son)
635
To intend (to do a
thing)
To make up one's mind
(for)
To resist or to face
(enemy, etc.)
To harm , to do damage
(to)
To confess (a thing)
To admit (a crime, etc.),
To promise (to do a
thing). j
To decide (a case, etc.)
To bear in mind, ^
To look (after),
To be careful (about). /
To give a name (to)
To be accustomed (to)
To be debtor (to), to
owe (to)
To be keen (on) or fond (
(of) \
To disguise (as)
To inspect (a thing)
To hunt (to make a
victim)
To translate
To remedy, to treat
(medically)
T<> claim (for)
T<> mention
To accuse of
(kd) irdda rakhna U^; wljl ( K )
(kd) irdda karnd by x jl;l ( tf )
,, _v muqdbala , , ,. , *l»v.<U
(ka) - karna by -
'
samna
(kd) nuqsan karnd Ly ^t-Aii (
(to) ^6d/ karnd b/ JbJ! (
(kd) iqrdr karnd by Aj] (
/awto tarno
khaydl rakhna
a ndm rakhna
.b (
(
(jfcd) qarzddr hond byt y±*j* (
(Jfcd) shauq rakhna
(
d) shauqvn hond byt ^^-i (
^H (
(Jbd)
(td) mulahaza karnd b
(kd) shikar karnd by ;8Jt (
(td) tarjama karnd by d-^a^j ( K )
(to) 'tto? tomo by ^ib ( K )
(to) da'wd karna by ^y: J ( K )
(jfcd) zitr karna ( * )
(kd) ilzdm lag&na b(0 piyl ( K )
636
To trace, to track
To encourage
To entertain greed (for)
To regret, to be sorry
for
To do justice (fco)
To examine (a person
in a subject)
To appear for an ex-
amination
To obey the order (of)
To agree to or to follow
the advice (of)
m
To arrange (for)
To take vengeance (for
a grievance)
To entertain respect
(for)
To refer (to)
To be responsible (for)
To be entitled (to)
To stand surety (for)
To be grateful (to)
To lay siege (to)
(kd) gj? Ugana ^ J^_ ^
(kd) hausla barhdnd lilitv &L*j^ (X)
' £> f ff *»"* U/ J» (
(*S) lalchl hond byt
afsos karnd U
imtikan lend
imtihan dena
hukm manna tUU
manna
/i v bandobast
(U) - torna
A;arwa
(ka) hawala dena
(^) zimma-war hona U
(ka) ~qd(*r hona
' mustahaq
ihsan-mahd
(*a) -r-^— r
shukr-guzar
muhasara karnd
637
To be acquainted (with (ka) waqif hona U^A _wl m
a person;
To hand over, to put )
in the charge or (ke) saPur* ^^ Gy
custody (of) ) hawale
To cut into pieces (ke) (ukre ! karna ty <
To fall into the hands ; ,, lagna ^
t (ke) hath
(°t) j ana
To be wounded
To he hurt cAofna UX) c- 4
To be hit by some)
thing
To recommcn< 1 (A:i) sifarish karna ti
To praise, to admire (Art) ta'rlf karna
To transfer, to relieve (ki) badll karna U^ Jjj ( " )
from di;
To help (kl) madad karna
To promote (^i) toro^gt fcirna by
To protect, to guard (fo) At'/azat Jba;
To serve (a person or (kl) naukrl karna
institution)
To check, to verify (fo) pafto/ karna b
To inform (of) (kl) l&abar
aena
I Giv. th. number of pieces, if any, bofore
* ' Ke* is, in such canes, tho contraction of ' let badan par' (on the
body
8 Here give the name of the instrument. For instance ' gotl laqna ' to
be hit by a ballet.
638
To disobey the orders (kl) liukm 'aduli karna
(of)
To be insolent (to) (kl) gustafchl karna "
To swear, to make a (kl) qasam khana liU ^ ( " s\
vow (to do a thing) v^
To try (for) (fo) jfeo^wA karna by
To repair (fo) marammat karna
by e
To search, to look (for) (^) to/5^ jj.ar/^ by
To hope (for) (1cl] umed karna by
To shave (^j) hajamat karna
To treat (medically) (^ ^^ karna
To punish (for) (fo) 5a^ ^^^
To c°Py (kl) naql karna U/ JSJ ( Jy)
To dare, to make bold (Jcl) diUrl karna u< ^ / - ^
to do a thing * ^
To heed, to care (for) (kl) parwah karna (.y xl^j (^.^O
To stand surety (for) (kl) zamanatdend Uj
To backbite (kl) chughli khana
of
To complain -- (K) ^Mi/ai fcarna • ^
To look (after) ( L
L2.
L (M) Ma6ar
(kl) khabarglri karna
>
To entertain desire or (kl) khwahish karna
wish (for) ty
To encourage (ki) himmat barhand
639
To worship <»),j££ karna by
To testify (**)
To agree to the sug- ) /y_. bat
geetion or advice (of) J <**> *ott* TOanna
advice (of) )
To honor (A;t) 'izza^ karna
To dishonor (fo) be-'izzatl karna
To insult (ii)
To boast (of) («)
To identify (kl) shanakht karna
by
To invite (to a feast (kl) da'wat karna l
etc.)
To investigate (kl) tahqlqat karna
b/
gawahl
To stand witness (for) (**) ahMdai
To permit (to do thing) (fcl) '>'**«' den& lij.J ^)L?'1
marry (to celebrate (*») «^di terna ¥ v.rjLi
tlie marriage of)
To be married <*" «**« *«»« Uy vJ-jLi
To enjoin strictly, to <*0 *k''d *ar»«
urge
640
(6) Verbs constructed ivith « ko.'
To beat
(ko) marna » G;U (y)
To kick
(ko) Idt * marna (jjU ci?)l (y )
To do damage or harm
(ko) nuqsdn pahunchdnd
(to)
CiCsvi^^LaflJ (y )
To touch with hand
(ko) hath lagdnd liKJ <*.^U> (y )
To set fire (to)
(&o) a*/ lagdnd (JKJ i — f I (y )
To lock
(fco) tdld lagdnd liK/ Dl> (y )
To harass (anybody)
(ko) tang karna (^ ^Jjo ( y )
To annoy . to bother
(ko) dig karna (J^ ^ (^ )
To displease
naraz 7 . . x U*|;^
1 l~n\ ' Ifnvnn Li \ • i \ i
'. A/CJ j 77 . A/I*/ /tC* ^J »J 1 » J 1
Ma/a y (.s.^
To please
(A;o) khush karna \±4 {J»j** (j£)
To help
(ko) madad dend CLj J,>x) (y )
To promote
(A:o) taraqql dend (Jo J ^_^^ ( y )
To congratulate
(A;o) mubdrikbdd dend
(Joo oUi^Lyo ( y )
To punish
(A;o) 5»2a de?ia ULJJ [)« (y )
To defeat
(ko) shikast dend (JoJ ^^»Lk ( ^ )
To lend money (to)
(Jfco) ^ar^ dewa GJ>J c^il (/ )
To encourage
(ko) hausla dend U^o <idU?j.3w (y )
To lend money or]
to give things on >
(A;o) udhdr dend IL j ^l& j| ( y )
credit (to) j
To console or give
(fco) *o«oZ/i c^ena ILj ^JUJ (y )
satisfaction to
••
To beat
(fco) mar 0*671^ tJoJ ^U ( y )
To abuse (filthy)
(&o) graZ* dena LuJ ^^ (^ )
1 'Marna' with ' fco ' always means 'to beat 'unless the object be
such as is always beaten to death. For instance mosquitoes and flies.
Without ' fco' it generally means « to kill.'
2 'Marna' compounded with a noun always agrees with it when
' no ' is used after the subject.
641
To be touched by hand (ko) hdth lagnd
To catch fire (ko) ag lagnd
To feel hungry (ko) bhuk lagnd
To feel thirsty (ko) piyds lagnd
sardl
To feel cold
To feel warm or hot
To feel frightened
To catch cold
Ufl
(ko) garmi lagnd HO
(to' lagna (or ana)
zukdm (m.)
v lagnd
or (hand (f.)
^, r^- (/)
To be hurt
To be wounded
! '
(-£)
V ke1/
or
(or, ona)
(or, and)
,r, UJL'
To happen to be hit ( —\
!>v something \ke1/
To be attacked by
fever
lagnd
»«,•-(•
\a
U!
i • K • he badan par ' (on the l»ody of).
re name the instrument one i
81
To suffer loss
To feel ashamed
To perspire, to sweat
To happen to know (to
become known to)
642
(ko) nuqsdn pahunchna
(ko) sharm and Li I
(ko) paslnd and LiT
(ko) ma'lum hona Liyt
To enter
(c) Verbs constructed with l men.'
(men) ddkhil hona
To reach, to arrive
To interfere
To take long (over a
thing)
To be slack (in)
To be hasty (in)
To be neglectful (in)
(men }) pahunchna
(men) dakhldena LUJ J^o
(meri) der lagana Li(0 ^o
(
( o^°
( ^<
( j^o
(men) 51^5^ karna
(men) ?'afc£$ karna
(men) ghaflat karna
constructed with ' se.
To die (of a disease, etc.) (se) mar no,
To fear (se) darnd
To avoid, to escape, to\
save oneself (from) )
To be alarmed (at)
To be fed up (with)
To visit (a person)
(se) bachnd
To be tired (of)
To hate
ghabrdnd
(se) diq and LiT ^j (
(se) muldqdt karna (or milnd)
(LLLo or) Ly ci?UiU> (
(se) thaknd LU$J (
(se) nafrat karna L>y c^aJ (
' Men ' is used only when the place reached is entered.
643
K (5e)
2 ^ ^ ^ Uyb
(se) fd,ida uthdnd lil«Jl
mahrum karnd by
mahrum hona Uyt
(*e) badla lend, &J
To feel oneself driven |
into a tight corner j>
To take advantage (of)
To deprive one (of)
To be deprived (of)
To take vengeance
(from a person)
, ) 1. (se) baghl hond liyt JL> (
To mutiny or rebel \
(against) / ^ (se)bagbawatkarna
(
(
(
(
(
(
{1. («e) inkdr karnd l
2. (se) inkdri hond liyb
To be acquainted (with (se) ivdqif hond
a thing)
To be pleased (with a) **_
person or thing) J par
To be displeased (with „ nara? ^rna Uyt
a person or thing)
(
/^\
(e) Verbs constructed with ' se ' or ' ke sdth.'
aarry (to contract / se .
marriage with) \ ke sdth/
To fight (against)
To talk (to)
To tie (to)
To quarrel (with)
lama,
ht'lt
„ terna
jhagarrta (or, ;4
twmo)
644
To treat, to behave,
(towards).
To maltreat
To joke or jest (with)
To deal dishonestly
(with)
To wrestle (with)
To sympathize (with)
To deal hostilely (with)
To argue (with)
To deal high-handedly
(with)
To join, to mix with,
To resemble.
To promise (to a person)
To love, to be affection-
ate towards
To dash against or
collide with
/ * \
\kesath)
2. ,, pesh ana bT
1. „ badsuluki karna
2. ,, bur a suluk karna
b
. .
r-- karna
be-lmarii karna
torna (or, karna)
( by or uy )
,, hamdardi karna
by c
dushmani karnci
karna (y^
zabardasti karna
milna
IJJU
iqrar , ,. x ;>"
- ^*, fama ^ ^, -
se \ mahabbat(L) 7
^rr I — ^: A;ama
2 sa£/fc/ ^ii/ar (m.)
(JY _ I *--
;^ Wt-
,, jakkar khana b
(/) Verbs constructed with ' par.'
To go or judge by
To ac'
To climb , to ascend , to )
mount, etc. j
To mount, to board,
etc.
To rely (on)
To attack
To storm
To fall on, to attack,
To march against, ^
To invade. >
To object (to)
To capture or to take
possession (of)
To take possession of.
To discuss or argue
(a question)
To doubt
To suspect
To put a question (to)
To keep watch (on), to
guard
To rule (a country or
people).
To fall in love (with)
To accuse (a person)
To trust
To consider minutely
(par) jdna
1. (par) chalna
2. (par) 'ami karna
(par) charhna
xawdr hona
i'atibdr
jc
, ^r
= karna b S ' • -
bharosa ~ ***>
hamla . . ,-
- '.mass konM
„ hallo, karna
a
„ ^ parna
„ charha,t karna
„ i'atird% karna (Jy
,, qabza karna
,, bah* karna U,
,, shak karna
,, shubah karna
,, sawdl karna
M pahra dend
,, huk&mat karna
,, 'aMt'g AofiA
,, t/zam lagdnd
.. //a^ftn Jkarnd
,, 0&aur fcarna
646
To compel (to do a (par) rnajbur karna
thing)
_ f 1. ,, hair an hona liyt
To wonder (at)
| 2.,, ta ayjub karna Ly
To rush (on) „ jhapajna
To insist (on) „ zidd karna
To persist (in) ., israr karna CJ
To agree (to a thing) „ razl hona Uyt
To sign (affix signature „ dastkhat karna
on)
To show kindness (to) , mihrbam karna
To tyrannize ,, zw^m karna ^ JLb „
To feel contented (with) ,, sabr karna
To show mercy (to) ,, rahm karna
(g) Miscellaneous prepositional verbs.
To sell (to a person) (ke^} bechna li £.
V P«* / "
To point (towards) (H /am/) ishara karna
J.O IO11OW
\n>v pt,i uv) 'a^
GLa. ^
*x^5 «— '
To accompany
n -ti\ ®na
(ke sath)
jana
!-<*,
^L)
To pass by
(ke pas se) guzarna
ki taraf
To turn towards in | 1 6e mufehatib hona
speaking, / \ke sath
To address (a person).
/i tara\
1 6e J
\ /
i^^^J \
I ^.
V ASLw ^
647
REMARK. — In a fe\v cases English transitive verbs have been
expressed by Hindustani intransitive verbs and vice versa. In
such cases the Hindustani verb determines the construction
of a sentence, as : —
He was defeated = us ne shikast khdj (' khana' being a tran-
sitive verb takes • ne ' in the tenses formed from the Past
Participle).
The village caught fire = <7o,on ko ag laggaj (' lagna ' being
intransitive does not take ' ne ').
Also note the difference between :—
(t) U^ kahna and UJ^ bolna.
' Kahna ' denotes articulate speech while ' bolna ' means
to utter sounds,' intelligible or otherwise.
->/ girna and Ujj parna.
' Girna ' means to fall from a visible source or * to fall
suddenly and with force/ the fall may be partial or complete ;
while ' parna ' signifies to fall from an invisible source or
to light upon after a fall or * to befall."
NOTE. — Use ' parna ' for ' panl ' (rain), ' barf ' (snow), ' ola *
(hail), kuhra' (fog), ' qahfc ' or ' kal' (famine), ' muslbat' (mis
fortune, adversity) etc., but ' girna ' for ' bijll ' (lightning).
(tit) (Jji^I orhna and Ui^ pahinnd.
' Orhna' means 4 to cover oneself ' with loose garments,
as sheets, wrappers, blankets, etc., while ' pahinna ' ex-
presses • to dress oneself with,' or * to put on ' things
pertaining to one's dress.
(iv) LiJjMf^ chhutna and Uacu bachna.
( Chhutna ' = * to be released ' or ' to get out of a trouble
one is already in ', while * bachna ' = to escape or to avoid
a circumstance apprehended.
(v) UJtL. chdhna and LLGU mahgn&
*Chahna = to wish, to desire, to want, to like, etc.,
while 4 mangna ' — to aak for, to request to beg for.
648
Chahna has an air of superiority about it while ' mafigna '
performs an inferior roll.
(vi) UJuJ letna and L>JJ parna.
' Letna ' = ' to lay oneself down voluntarily,' while
4 parna ' = to be in a lying or fallen position. The former is
naturally used of animate beings only, whilst the latter
for both animate and inanimate. In reference to animate
beings ' parna ' however implies an exhausted, unconscious
or semi-conscious state.
Knot
APPENDIX D.
List of some commonly used feminine nouns other
than those noticed in Sections 26 and 27.
Eye ankh
Ashes rakh
Sealing-wax lakh [
( 1. girah
( 2. ganth
Way, path rah
Refuge panah
Heed, care parwah
Rumour afwah
Pay
I 2. talab
Vision, sight nigah
Fire dg
Rein 6a<7
Hurt chot
U*b
Back p^
Moustache miichh
Sprain moch
Life jdn ^U*
Thigh ran WK
Dignity shdn ^LA
Language, ^
Tongue. }
Mine (as of coal etc.) kdn 2 ^
Bow, command kamdn ^U^
Shop dukdn ^^
Rock chatdn &^$~
Battalion palfan
Lines (row, file, quarters)
lajn ,.r
' Masculine when it means a lac (1,00,000). * Kan = ear, is masculine
649
Land, ground zamln
Bayonet sangln
Sleeve astln
gardan
\\".:«il un
(Quinine kunain
khabar
ve qabar
I )day, v
, ,. }der
ce of time.)
Wall dlwar
Line (drawn) laklr
Age 'umar
Government sarkdr
Gait, speed raftdr
Midday do pahr
Sword talwdr
A walk, stroll sair
muhr
Canal nahr
Waist kamar
Sight, vision nazar
1. fajar
2. subdh
Sheet chddar
Row, line ry<
Quantity miqddr
Morning
55
JjJU
Wrangle, quarrel (aArar
Thing
Shirt
Prayer (Mohdn.) nimdz ;LJ
Table mez
Petition, request 'arz
Voice, sound dwdz
Hope ummid
Receipt (ackgt.) rasld
Help madad
Purpose, object murdd
Mosque masjid
Drill qawd'id
Imprisonment
Sleep
Drop bund
Boundary limit had
Obstinacy %id
Provisions rasad
Cry for justice jaryad
Foundation bunydd
Cover (shelter) dr
Fence Id?
Root jar
Crowd bhlr
Mud klchar
Cold
Copy
l.;ik« jh\l
Armpit, side baghal
Difficulty mushkil
Shape shakl
Bottle botal
Machine leal '
it, dodge ckdl
Railway rel
Jby
JU1»
*
J*
J^
Knl ' = to-morrow or yesterday, is man*"
82
650
Rifle J l- mft
J*
Book A;t<d6 ^txi
(. 2. banduq ^^
Socks jurrdb ^^
Rampart fasll
Jok^aj ,
Gun, cannon top <yy
Proverb masal
JL.
Silence c^wp ^-r^^
Example misdl
JU^
Sunshine dhiip vy^^
Verification partdl
J«B
Tittle-tattle, gossip gap ^^
Shield dhdl
JU>,3
Road (broad) «araA; ^y*
Hide khdl
JW
Post, mail rfafc *— TI5
Stage, halting place manzil
J>
( 1. khdk < — fli.
Dust (tine) s
C 2. garc? ^
Sort qism
^
Nose ?iaA; * — ftj
Oath qasam
r8
Reinforcement kumak u-Cj
Item raqam
r^
Practice mashq ^^<
Tribe qaum
r^1
Water-skin mashk c^x^xx
Tail dwm
..j
Food khurdk ^';^
Evening sham
A
Hunger, appetite 6M& uJ^.
Campaign, x
> lam
Point (fine) nofc »— £,
active service./
r
Mine, subter^
Bridle lagdm
r°
ranean pas- )surang ^J^
Shame sharm
c^
sage
Lance ballam
r^
Leg tang
Corpse lash
^^
Army /aw; ^
Search taldsh
Air
^olb
Ice, snow 6ar/ « — J;
Grass ghds
u-^
Direction, side .(ar«/ < — ^J
Thirst piyds
JJ«
Smell &ft j
Advice salah
-JU
Good smell khushbu ^^
Peace sulah
^
Bad smell badbu ^
Victory fatah
Branch shaikh
S
^.U
Conversation gw/Zgrii ^-^A
Opinion m,6
Peg mekh
f^°
Sword (officer's) kircH ^j
Wine sharab
u^)^
Chain zanjlr j£&-
Pocket -jeb
Stirrup rikab
4*^J
( 1. kil ' J-
Nail (iron) ]
( 2. pregr ^>i
APPENDIX E.
Words of misleading resemblance.
Mi!
UI
1. To-day aj
Fire ag
2. Inside andar
Egg andd
Blind andha
3. To dismount, ) utarna
to descend, j
To take off utarna (
To get up
To lift up
4. To speak bolnd
To forget bhulna
To call buldna L>ib
6. To increase, ) barhnd
to grow. I ^-fcj-!
To fill 6A«/ (j^
To flow bahnd
6. To sell bechnd
To send 6Ae;na
7. Affair, speech bat &(j
Very, much
, bal
many. /
8. Bad bura
Big bard
Deaf
Old (aged)
Brown
9. Old (aged)
Ungainly bhaddd
10. Sand
Bear bhdlu
11. Outside 6aAt> ytb
Spring (season) bahar ;l^
12. Heavy bharl
Turn 6arr
13. Garden bagb
Tiger 6a^
To run away bhagna
14. Some ba'z
Hawk baz
16. To ask puchhna
To arrive pahunchna
To wipe poiichhna ( Mj^
16. To read parhna (Jjtjj
To fall,
To befall.
To find, to gain pana Lib
To tear phajrna
17. To catch pakarna
Tooall pii^arnd
To cook palcdnd
18. On, at, etc. par ^
I >u ration I
of 3 hours t** *
Across ^
(fiirtlu-r ^i^
652
Mountain pdhar
Guard, watch pahra
19. Address pata
Leaf pattd
Stone patthar
20. Belly, stomach pet
Back pith
21. Puttee, \
bandage >^
Belt peti
Daughter betl
22. Bridge pul
Fruit p/fcaZ
Flower phul
First pa^/a
At first before
Lu
23. Tank
Pay
24. Narrow, )
Girth (m.))
Leg
25. Basket (big)
Piece
26. Winter jam
A little zara
27. To wake up ) ;
oneself (intr.)J
To wake up )
someone
else (tr.)
28. Shoes juta
Liar
29. Friday
Collected jc
30. To go jdnd
To know jan-na
31. To graze (intr.) charnd
To ascend,
f charhnd
to climb
etc. J
To graze (tr.)
To steal churdnd UJ^
To cause to ^ charhdna
ascend, etc. j ^J?-
To leave chhornd
32. Towalk?)
To start! ,
To fire, to drive chaldnd
UJU.
To shriek chilldnd
33. A few chand
Moon chand
Silver chdndi ^
Moonlight chdndnl
chichi
chhuttl
34. Tea
Four
Six
35. Letter
Leave
Top
Small (f.)
Umbrella chhdta
Roof
Hurt
36. Astonished hairan
Deer h Iran (
37. Order liukm
Ruler, officer hakim
45. Tent, camp dera
1£ derh AJip*3
46. To remain ra/ttia (ifc«
To place,
to keep )
rakhna
Physician hakim »xC^
10 stop (intr.) rukna
38.
Present (adj.) hazir^^
'J^;
Thousand hazar J'Jt
To stop (tr.) rokna (JS^
39.
; >
Pleased khush^i^
Senses hosh ^£yb
47. Day rog
Strength zor ^\
48. To sleep, »
40.
Fear Gold (m.) ( S°™ "*~
Delay der ^ To hear sun-na Ui~
Far (adj.) ^^ ^ To ^ear, to suffer sahna
Distance (f.) )
J!
Pain dard ^
49. Sun swra; ^^
String (f.) dor ;^5
Hole surakh ^jj~
Race daur j^J
Red surkh +j~
41.
Bucket dol J^J
50. Head «tr ^~
Drum dhol Jyt»5
Tune(f.) swr r-
12,
Breath dam ^
Stroll, excursion, ( 5Oty
Tail dum ^
sight-seeing (f.) / ^^~
Price ctew Jj
A seer ( = 2 Ibs. nearly)
43.
Wise rfana Ulj
5^ ,'••**
Grain dana 4Jb An inn (f.) sara '^
Bit (of horse),\
51. Seven sat <oL,
Mouth of Q,^dahana Coinpaninnshipsa^^JL
river. J *>tAj xty >v>/// A^JL,
44.
To see dekhna &*&**
Whole KL,
(1. dikhana
All «drc (i) c_;U
To showv
Half more sarhe &_;>~>
| 2. dikhlana
Lazy 8U8t ^~~~
bV^
Cheap ^i.s'/a LL*^
654
64. City shahr
Ti«er'| sher
Lion. )
Noise shor
55. Peace sulah
Advice salah
56. Patience sabar
Zero sifar
Journey safar
Page safha
Clean sa/
57. Certainly zarur
Necessary, \Zaruri
urgent )
Need, \zarurat
necessity / ^
58. Direction taraf
Manner tarah
59. Common 'dm ^
I 7
Mango dm ^ '
60. Court (of justice) 'addlat
Enmity 'dddwat ^^
61. Anger ghussa
Blow with fist (boxing)
ghunsd
62. Distance fdsila
Decision faisla
Crops fasal
Rampart (f.) fasil
63. Benefit fd,ida
Rule, system qd'ida
r
64. Sort, kind qism
Oath qasam
65. Grave, tomb ga&r
News fahabar
66. Sword A;trc^
Expenses Wiarch
67. Work Mm
Less, short Team
Missing gum
68. March Tcuch
Some &McM
Street kucha s^jf
Unripe . ) kachchd
Temporary, etc.)
Mud kichar y
Mule (f.) khachchar j*p^
69. Any ko,i
Several ka,i
Ditch kha ,
70. To eat,
Cooked food.
Compartment,
(khana
House (in com- )
position) .
71. To jump (down) kudnd
To dig khodna
72. Why kyon
Because kyohki
\kyohkar
In what ^ ^
manner ? J
73. Grass
655
Special %has
Fairly good fchasa
Yard (36 inches) gaz '£
74. British soldier (Tommy)
of fair color gora \^f
Horse ghora Ij^
75. Carriage, etc. gar\ ^}$
Watch, clock gharl ^4
76. Sugar-cane gannd U/
So many times as much
or as many (suffix)
gvna ^
Sin gunah sU^
To count gin-na
Ornament gahna
77. To fall girna U/
To be surrounded ghirna
To surround gherna t^x
To stare at^ ghurna
To browbeat j
78. Deep gahra
Siege, \ghera
Circumference. /
Pit garha
Pitcher ghara
79. An hour, J
"lg> \ghanta
Big bell, j
Knee ghulna
80. Ambush (t.)ghat
Coast, ferry ghat
Valley ghafi
81. To take Una UuJ
To bring tend l>*
To fight larna UjJ
82. To rob, plunder lutna
_ >
To come back
To roll (on ( . ,., f
ground) )
To turn (round or upside
down) ulajna UxJl
83. Iron lohi
Blacksmith
84. To die marna
To turn round
murna
To beat marna U;U
85. Hard work, labor
mihnat \^J&~*
Affection, love mahabbat
86. Dear (expensive)
mahinga
To ask for etc.
(intr.)
UJoU
Naked ?<an^d K^>
87. Proverb (f.) ma&al
Example (f.) mi$al
For example ma*lan
It.
656
88. Sight, vision nazar ^k>
Present, offering (from
an inferior) nazar jj
89. Is
hai
Just, etc. hi
THE END.
0 „
Printed at the Baptist Mission Press, Calcutta, and published by
the Author.
PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE
CARDS OR SLIPS FROM THIS POCKET
UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO LIBRARY
Pahwa Thakardass
1983 The node- iustani
holar
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Open Library
American Libraries
TV News
Understanding 9/11